Chevrolet - Accord - Workshop Manual - 2003 - 2003

Factory Workshop Manual Make Honda Model Accord Engine and year V6-3.0L (2003) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly Alarm Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly 05-010 July 22, 2005 Applies To: 2003-05 Accord DX and LX With Accessory Security System - ALL Accessory Security System Triggers Unexpectedly (Supersedes 05-010, dated April 15, 2005, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The accessory security system triggers unexpectedly (the horn sounds and the parking lights flash) when you open the door, or when you insert the key into the ignition switch, or while driving. PROBABLE CAUSE A software problem in the security system control unit (control unit). *CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the control unit and the security system microphone. NOTE: The microphone must be replaced because control units are matched to their microphones during the manufacturing process. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems. PARTS INFORMATION Security System Control Unit with Microphone: P/N 08E51-SDA-101R1, H/C 8028854C* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 050100 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 08E51-SDA-100A H/C 7224678 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-010A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the control unit and the security system microphone: ^ Refer to the 2003, 2004, or 2005 accessory security system installation instructions, or ^ Online, select subject Accessory Installation Instructions & Related Info, and choose 2003, 2004, or 2005 Accord 2- and 4-Door Security System Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly > Page 12 (DX, LX) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly Alarm Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly 05-010 July 22, 2005 Applies To: 2003-05 Accord DX and LX With Accessory Security System - ALL Accessory Security System Triggers Unexpectedly (Supersedes 05-010, dated April 15, 2005, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The accessory security system triggers unexpectedly (the horn sounds and the parking lights flash) when you open the door, or when you insert the key into the ignition switch, or while driving. PROBABLE CAUSE A software problem in the security system control unit (control unit). *CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the control unit and the security system microphone. NOTE: The microphone must be replaced because control units are matched to their microphones during the manufacturing process. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems. PARTS INFORMATION Security System Control Unit with Microphone: P/N 08E51-SDA-101R1, H/C 8028854C* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 050100 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 08E51-SDA-100A H/C 7224678 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-010A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the control unit and the security system microphone: ^ Refer to the 2003, 2004, or 2005 accessory security system installation instructions, or ^ Online, select subject Accessory Installation Instructions & Related Info, and choose 2003, 2004, or 2005 Accord 2- and 4-Door Security System Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly > Page 18 (DX, LX) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 19 Alarm Module: Locations 42. In Steering Column Cover 198. Under Left Side Of Dash (Honda Accy.: DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 20 Alarm Module: Diagrams 177. Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver 297. Security Receiver Unit (DX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 21 300. Security Control Unit (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 22 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 23 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 24 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 25 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 26 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 27 Alarm Module: Service and Repair Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer control unit-receiver (B). 4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (C). 5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the reverse order of removal. 6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-029 Date: 030606 Campaign - MICU Replacement 03-029 June 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A018771 Product Update: Accord V6 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if you open the trunk and then immediately close it, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify it is eligible by checking one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box: P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747102 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L90 Template ID: 03-029A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 36 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and the positive cable, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (see page 20-16 of the 2003 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). 5. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 6. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 7. Remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 8. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 9. Reconnect the positive and the negative battery cables. 10. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 11. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 12. Make sure all electrical components are working. 13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover, the left kick panel, and the left door sill trim. 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the 1st character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 37 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 38 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-029 Date: 030606 Campaign - MICU Replacement 03-029 June 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A018771 Product Update: Accord V6 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if you open the trunk and then immediately close it, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify it is eligible by checking one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box: P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747102 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L90 Template ID: 03-029A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 44 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and the positive cable, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (see page 20-16 of the 2003 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). 5. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 6. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 7. Remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 8. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 9. Reconnect the positive and the negative battery cables. 10. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 11. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 12. Make sure all electrical components are working. 13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover, the left kick panel, and the left door sill trim. 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the 1st character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 45 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 46 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Diagrams 205. Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 58 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 59 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 60 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 61 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 67 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 68 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 69 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 70 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 71 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 72 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 73 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 74 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 75 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations Navigation Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Roof And Trunk (4-door) Relay And Control Unit Locations - Roof And Trunk (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 79 Navigation System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 80 238. Middle Of Rear Shelf (EX-L: Navigation) 247. Behind Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 81 250. Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 82 Navigation Module: Diagrams 184. Navigation Sub Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) 229. Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 83 230. Navigation Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 84 Navigation Module: Service and Repair Navigation Unit Removal Installation NOTE: If the navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a map match must be done. 1. Remove the navigation unit from the trunk room. 2. Remove the navigation unit bracket (B) from the passenger's seat. 3. Remove the bracket from the navigation unit (C). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 94 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 95 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 96 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 97 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 107 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 108 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 109 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 110 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 118 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 124 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 130 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 131 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 132 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 133 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 136 109. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 137 139. Moonroof Limit Switch (4-door EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 138 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the moon roof limit switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, adjust the moon roof limit switch. If the continuity is still not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 139 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (F) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (F). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 140 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Service and Repair Limit Switch Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch (A) on the moonroof fame (B). 3. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the moonroof limit switch. 4. Remove the two mounting bolts. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 6. Adjust the moonroof limit switch as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 144 72. Behind Glove Box (L4: EX-L) 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 145 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 146 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: The turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type B: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations 110. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 150 156. Moonroof Close And Open Relay (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 151 Sunroof / Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: The turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type B: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations 256. Rear Of Roof (2-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 155 279. Moonroof Control Unit (2-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 156 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Control Unit input Test 2-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 157 4. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 162 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 163 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 164 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 165 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 166 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation ABS Main Control The ABS/TCS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signals it receives, then calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying. TCS Main Control The ABS/TCS control unit controls the TCS based on signal inputs from the accelerator pedal position sensor, engine speed, shifter position, and the wheel sensors. In addition, the ABS/TCS control unit sends an engine retard request signal to the PCM if necessary. The pressure intensifying control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. Self-Diagnosis Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 167 ^ The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a monitor IC. They check each other for problems. ^ The CPUs also check the circuit of the system. ^ When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis. The ABS/TCS control unit turns on the appropriate indicator(s). On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS and TCS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester or HDS. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester or HDS. See the tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 168 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 169 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Push in on the lock (A), then pull up the lever (B) of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector (C), and the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the three 6 mm bolts (D). 4. Remove the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit (E) and bracket (F). 5. Remove the two 6 mm bolts and hex bolt, then remove the bracket. Installation 1. Install the bracket, then tighten the two 6 mm bolts and the hex bolt. 2. Install the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 6 mm nuts. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the nuts. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector. 5. Push in the lock of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 6. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 7. Perform the TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, TCS and TCS activation indicators goes off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 170 9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS,TCS and TCS activation indicators do not come on. 10. If the brake pedal is now spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Excercise and bleed the brake system again, starting with the front wheels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Module > Component Information > Locations 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 174 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 179 149. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 180 152. DRL Relay (Canada) And Fan Control Relay (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 181 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 182 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 187 48. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 188 Cruise Control Module: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Input Test 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic system (HDS) to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 2. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A and check for DTC's. 3. Go to PGM-FI and check for DTC's. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 189 5. Perform the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 194 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 195 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 196 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 200 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 201 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 202 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 203 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 207 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 208 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 209 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 222 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 228 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Control Module: Locations Gauges Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 232 Gauges Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 235 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 236 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 237 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 238 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 239 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 240 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 241 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 242 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 243 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 244 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 245 Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 246 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 247 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 248 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 249 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 250 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 251 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 252 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 253 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 254 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 255 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 256 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 257 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 258 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 259 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 260 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 261 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 262 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 263 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 264 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 265 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 266 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 267 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 268 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 269 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 270 216. Gauge Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 271 Reminder Systems, Key Light Timer, And Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 272 Instrument Panel Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors F and P. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Remove the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 273 7. Disconnect the gauge control module 30P connector. 8. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 9. 9. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 10. 10. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic function. - If the beeper sounds and the seatbelt light flashes, go to step 11. - If the beeper does not sounds, or the seatbelt light does not flash, replace the gauge control module. 11. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and reheck the system. - It the symptom is gone, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. - It the symptom is still present, the gauge control module is faulty; replace the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 274 Instrument Panel Control Module: Service and Repair Gauge Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the instrument panel, then remove the upper column cover. 2. Place a clean shop towel (A) under the gauge control module to prevent scratching the steering column or dash panel. 3. Remove the screws from the gauge control module (B). 4. Disconnect the 30P connector (C), and remove the gauge control module. 5. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. Rewriting the ODO Data on a New Gauge Control Module NOTE: - If the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the ODO/TRIP display will appear as "-----", making the ODO function unusable, and the HDS will be unable to retrieve additional ODO values. - Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module that does not communicate. - Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the rewriting process. 1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect the HDS to the data link connector. 2. Select GAUGES AND INDICATORS from the HDS menu display. 3. Select "ODO REWRITE" from the ADJUSTMENTS menu display, and follow the instructions on the menu display to retrieve the ODO value. 4. Replace the gauge control module. 5. Follow the instructions on the menu display to write the new ODO value to the new gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 279 149. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 280 152. DRL Relay (Canada) And Fan Control Relay (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 281 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 282 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 191. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (Honda Acc.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 286 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams 294. Fog Light Relay 1 (Honda Accessory) 295. Fog Light Relay 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 290 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 291 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 297 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 298 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 299 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 300 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 301 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 302 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 303 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 304 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 305 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 306 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 307 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 308 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 309 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 310 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 311 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 312 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 313 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 314 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 315 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 316 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 317 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 318 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 319 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 320 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 321 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 322 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 323 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 324 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 325 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 326 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 327 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 328 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 329 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 330 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 331 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 332 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Entry Light Control System - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 333 Diagram 115-0 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 334 Diagram 115-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 335 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the entry light control functions troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, the recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 336 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's door panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the door multiplex control unit. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 337 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 341 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 342 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Relay Box Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 348 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 349 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 350 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 351 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 352 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 353 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 354 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 355 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 356 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 357 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 358 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 359 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 360 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 361 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 362 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 363 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 364 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 367 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 368 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 369 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 370 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 371 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 372 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 373 Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 374 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 377 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 378 Under-hood Multi-Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 381 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 387 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 388 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 389 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 390 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Actuator Control Module - ETM Fix Electronic Throttle Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Actuator Control Module ETM Fix SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: ETM Fix: PGM-FI System, APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: The circuit schematic on page 24-4 of the 2003-04 Accord ETM doesn't show the power source for the throttle actuator control module. You'll find that info on the circuit schematic on page 24-14. Make a note in your copies of the ETM to refer to page 24-14 for power source info. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 395 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Locations 181. Under Right Side of Dash (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 396 Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 397 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 398 283. Throttle Actuator Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 399 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Actuator Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the right kick panel. 2. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the throttle actuator control module (C). 4. Install the control module in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 404 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 405 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 406 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 407 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 408 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 409 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 410 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 411 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 412 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 413 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 414 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 415 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 416 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 417 Engine Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 418 179. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 421 242. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 422 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 423 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 424 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 425 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 426 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 427 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 428 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 429 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 430 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 433 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 434 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 435 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 436 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 437 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 438 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 439 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 440 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 441 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter. 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 442 touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector, and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - The ECM/PCM is replaced. - The ECM/PCM is reset. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - The throttle body is replaced. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.,) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 445 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear command to meet the purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM clear, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting in this service manual. The ECM/PCM clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. DTC CLEAR 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM RESET This command clears stored specific data from each vehicle such as DTCs, freeze data, and readiness codes. It does not clear CKP PATTERN data. 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Clear the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 446 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 447 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion,the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You can not update an ECM/PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 4. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda Interface Module (HIM). 6. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. 7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 8. Do the CKP PATTERN Learn Procedure, if you did the troubleshooting for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0335, P0340, P0344, or P0385. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, install the original ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. 5. If you substitute bran-new ECM/PCM select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, with the original ECM/PCM installed. 6. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 7. Replace the ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 451 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 452 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 453 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 457 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 458 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 459 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 460 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 465 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 466 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 470 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 471 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 472 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.2 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground, then terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the No.1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 479 5. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 480 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 481 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 486 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 487 64. Under Middle Of Dash (L4:'03 EX-L; V6: LX) 84. In Front Passenger's Seat (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 488 204. Under Middle Of Dash (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L Except '03) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 489 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 231. OPDS Unit (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 490 234. SRS Unit Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 491 234. SRS Unit Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 492 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit The operation of the front passenger's weight sensor unit must be checked after any of these actions. - Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except weight sensor unit and/or weight sensors) - After a vehicle collision Pre-Operation Check Set-up - Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position. - Adjust the seat height to the lowest position. - Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position. - Do not move the seat from this position. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except test-driving in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Turn the heater and the A/C off. - Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 2. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 3. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the tester's Inspection Menu. The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), or less, go to step 4. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 4. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg), then measure and note its actual weight (M1) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 5. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 6. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 8. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance ((T1) - (T0) - (M1)) < ±18.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat. T0: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat. M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 9. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 493 - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance is still more than ±8.6 lbs (13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. After a vehicle collision 10. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move from these positions. 11. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 12. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 13. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 14. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat steps 1 - 3. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the reading on the HDS (T0) is still more than ±16.6 lbs (±13.0 kg), go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 14. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg), then measure and note its actual weight (M) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 15. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 16. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 17. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 18. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance ((T1) - (T0) - (M1)) < ±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat. T0: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat. M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, and reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance still more than ±18.6 lbs (±13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors and the seat riser, then go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors. 3. Remove the center console and front panel. 4. Remove the center pocket. 5. Remove the center holder. 6. Remove the driver's and passenger's center lower cover. 7. Remove the heater vent ducts. 8. Disconnect the connectors and remove the torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click. NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against its bracket before torquing the Torx bolts. 2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Install all removed parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 496 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair OPDS Unit Replacement OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit 8P connector D and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit (C). 5. Remove the two screws (E) and the OPDS unit. Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws (B), and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (C) to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover (D). 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 497 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Initializing the OPDS Unit Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: A new (un-initialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select OPDS INIT, in the Adjustment Menu. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the OPDS system fails to initialize several times, replace the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 498 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Replacement Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Slide the seat all the way to the rear. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector. 5. Disconnect the connectors. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and the front passenger's weight sensor unit (B) from the seat riser. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensor unit on the seat riser. Tighten the two mounting nuts (A) and connect the connectors. 2. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. 5. After installing the front passenger's weight sensor unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 503 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 504 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Module: Testing and Inspection Electronic Control System PCM Electrical Connections Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 510 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 511 PCM Inputs And Outputs PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 512 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM Special Tools Required Honda diagnostic system (HDS) Honda Interface Module (HIM) HDS Pocket Tester NOTE: ^ Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM during troubleshooting procedures. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door locks, during the update. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of the dash. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. For '06-07 models: If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM. 4. For '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. For '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP Position Check, and follow the screen prompts with the HDS. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda interface module (HIM). 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown in the screen. If you run into a problem (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure, follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: ^ Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position. ^ Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). ^ Shut down the HDS. ^ Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ^ Reboot the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 515 ^ Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. For '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. How to Substitute the PCM Substituting the PCM Special Tools Required ^ Honda diagnostic system (HDS) ^ Honda interface module (HIM) ^ HDS pocket tester NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. '06-07 models: If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 516 8. Remove the center lower covers (A). 9. Remove the duct (B). 10. Disconnect the PCM connectors (C). 11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 12. Install the known good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 13. Open the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: '05-07 models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 18. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 20. '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 517 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove and Install the PCM How to Remove and Install the PCM 1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect PCM connectors. 6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM. 7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 522 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 523 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 524 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Power Window Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 529 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 530 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 531 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 532 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 533 Power Window Control Module: Testing and Inspection Resetting the Power Window Control Unit Resetting the power window is required when any of the following have been removed or repaired - Power window regulator - Window run channel - Power window motor - Door glass Using the HDS 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then enter the vehicle's VIN and mileage at the prompts. 3. Select Body Electrical from the System Selection menu. 4. From the Body Electrical System Select menu, select Power Windows. 5. From the Mode menu, select Adjustments. 6. From the Adjustment menu, select Window P Reset. 7. Follow the prompts on the screen. 8. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. Resetting the power window Without the HDS 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat steps 4-7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch to the AUTO DOWN position. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 537 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 538 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 539 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 546 126. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 547 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 69. Security Hood Switch (EX, EX-L; Canada LX) 288. Security Hood Switch (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 548 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 553 124. Right Side Of Trunk Lid (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 554 100. Driver's Door (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 555 122. Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 558 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Remote Switch: Locations Audio System Component Location Index (2-door M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 562 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 563 142. Radio Remote Switch (LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 568 Doors Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 569 108. Door Key Cylinder Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 572 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 578 126. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 579 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 69. Security Hood Switch (EX, EX-L; Canada LX) 288. Security Hood Switch (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 580 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations 101. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) 105. Left Rear Door (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 584 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 109. Door Lock Knob Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) 110. Door Lock Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (LX V6, EX, EX-L) 111. Door Lock Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 585 112. Door Lock Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Front Passenger's Door (EX, EXL) 1. Remove the front passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch in Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 588 the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator. Rear Door (EX, EXL) 1. Remove the left or right rear door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 589 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test Passenger's Door Lock Switch 1. Remove the front passenger's switch panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the front passenger's power window switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in LOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in the neutral position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No. 9 terminals when the door lock switch is in the neutral position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 593 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Front Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 594 94. Driver's Door (4-door) 218. Driver's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 595 192. Power Mirror Switch (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 596 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 597 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door Mirror Switch Defogger Switch (Canada) 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 252. Under Driver's Seat Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations 79. Left Side Of Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 183. Rt. Side Of Frt. Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 604 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams 232. Power Seat Adjustment Switch, Driver's 281. Power Seat Adjustment Switch, Front Passenger's (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 8-Way Adjustable Switch Test/Replacement Driver's Power Seat (8-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover from the driver's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (B). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable > Page 607 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 4-Way Adjustable Switch Test/Replacement Front Passenger's power Seat (4-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the front passenger's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 608 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Switch Test/Replacement Front Passenger's power Seat (4-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the front passenger's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations 60. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 612 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams 171. Seat Heater Switch, Driver's (EX-L) 172. Seat Heater Switch, Front Passenger's (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 613 Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the center console front panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater switch (A), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (B) or the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 622 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 628 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 631 109. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 632 139. Moonroof Limit Switch (4-door EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 633 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the moon roof limit switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, adjust the moon roof limit switch. If the continuity is still not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 634 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (F) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (F). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 635 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Service and Repair Limit Switch Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch (A) on the moonroof fame (B). 3. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the moonroof limit switch. 4. Remove the two mounting bolts. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 6. Adjust the moonroof limit switch as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations 38. Left Side Of Dash (EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 639 164. Moonroof Switch (EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 640 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the "II" to the "I" or "O" positions, as long as none of the doors are opened. This provides a convenience to parked occupants while offering a degree of security against unwanted or accidental moonroof operation. 1. Carefully push out the moonroof switch (A) from behind the dashboard lower cover, then disconnect the 6P connector (B) from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 644 122. Middle Of Trunk Lid (4-door) 233. Middle Of Trunk Lid (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 645 235. Trunk Latch Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trunk Latch Switch Test Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). ( ):DX 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 (No.1) and No 3 (No.2) terminals. ( ):DX - There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open). - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trunk Latch Switch Test > Page 648 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the neutral position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 35. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 653 36. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 654 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (1) with the float in the down position and in the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 658 52. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 659 136. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 660 Braking Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 661 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (B) from the left side of the pedal pad (C). Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T: 167 mm (6 9/16 inch) A/T: 172 mm (6 13/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers on the knurled part of the push rod (B) until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.4 to 3.0 mm (0.016 to 0.118 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 662 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal by hand. 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 67. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 669 14. Parking Brake Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 670 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations 177. Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 677 271. TCS Off Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 678 Traction Control Switch: Testing and Inspection TCS OFF Switch Test 1. Remove the TCS OFF switch from the switch panel. 2. Disconnect the TCS OFF switch 5P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the TCS OFF switch connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity when the switch is pushed. 4. Check for continuity between the TCS OFF switch connector terminal No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity at all times. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 679 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair TCS Pressure Sensor Neutral Position Memorization 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS. 3. The HDS screen will display the message: "The SCS line has been shorted. Do you want to leave the SCS line shorted?" Choose YES. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The ABS indicator comes on for 2 seconds. 6. Push the TCS OFF switch once within 2 seconds after the ABS indicator goes off. 7. Push the TCS OFF switch once within 2 seconds after the ABS indicator comes back on. 8. The TCS activation indicator blinks, and the system starts TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 9. When the ABS indicator, TCS indicator and TCS activation indicator go off, the memorizing is done. NOTE: On the left bottom side of the HDS screen you will notice "SCS" blinking during steps 4 to 9. 10. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC, or go back into the SCS Menu and remove the short from there. 11. If the indicators do not go off, retry step 10. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored 04-026 May 11, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED ABS Indicator Comes On With DTCs 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 SYMPTOM ABS indicator comes on with intermittent rear ABS sensor code(s). PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture in the sensor. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the appropriate rear wheel ABS sensor. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57475-SDA-A03 H/C 7269681 Defect Code: 03214 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored > Page 688 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 is stored, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear wheel of the affected side. 2. Locate the rear wheel sensor and disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the two rear wheel sensor mounting bolts. Remove the sensor. 4. Install the new rear wheel sensor, being careful not to twist the wires. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft), and connect the sensor to the harness. 5. Reinstall the rear wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 6. Clear the codes with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. If any ABS codes come on do the appropriate troubleshooting in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored 04-026 May 11, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED ABS Indicator Comes On With DTCs 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 SYMPTOM ABS indicator comes on with intermittent rear ABS sensor code(s). PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture in the sensor. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the appropriate rear wheel ABS sensor. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57475-SDA-A03 H/C 7269681 Defect Code: 03214 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored > Page 694 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 is stored, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear wheel of the affected side. 2. Locate the rear wheel sensor and disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the two rear wheel sensor mounting bolts. Remove the sensor. 4. Install the new rear wheel sensor, being careful not to twist the wires. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft), and connect the sensor to the harness. 5. Reinstall the rear wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 6. Clear the codes with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. If any ABS codes come on do the appropriate troubleshooting in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 697 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations 28. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 140. Under Right Rear Of Vehicle (Left Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 698 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 699 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 92. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front 93. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear 94. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 700 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 701 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Wheel Sensor The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. The wheel sensors detect changing of magnetic polarity on the magnetic encoder. The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the wheel speed based on signals received from the wheel sensor. When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. When the front wheel speed rises sharply above the vehicle speed, the TCS NC valve opens, the TCS NO valve closes, and the pump motor starts to intensify the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops, the front inlet valve closes momentarily to retain the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the front outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the front caliper fluid pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 702 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Check the magnetic encoder after cleaning the encoder. If necessary, replace the encoder. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the magnetic encoder all the way around while rotating the encoder. Standard: Front: 0.5 - 1.2 mm (0.02 - 0.05 inch) Rear: 0.4 - 1.1 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 703 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 712 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 713 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 721 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 722 107. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 723 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch (A). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 727 Cruise Control Component Location Index V6 M/T 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 728 151. Cruise Control Combination Switch ('03-'04: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 729 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit input test check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 730 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit input test check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 735 13. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 736 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 737 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 742 127. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 743 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams 61. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) 289. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 744 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 745 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, and remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the back of the front bumper beam. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Climate Control Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 749 Climate Control Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 750 57. Middle of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 751 57. In-car Temperature Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 752 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection In-car Temperature Sensor Test Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling the sensor with a hair drier. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 753 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-car Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Remove the self-tapping screw and the in-oar temperature sensor (A) from the instrument panel (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be sure to connect the air hose securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 758 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 759 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 760 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 761 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations 71. Behind Glove Box 209. Under Rt. Side of Dash (Man A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 762 48. Evaporator Temperature Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 763 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Dip the sensor in ice water (32 °F) (0 °C) and measure the resistance between its terminals. 2. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 764 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Temperature Sensor Replacement 4-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, aid carefully pull out the evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 2-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 765 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, and carefully pull out the evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 769 128. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 770 220. A/C Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 771 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch consists of a high-low pressure switch (A/C pressure switch A) and a middle pressure switch (A/C pressure switch B). - High-low pressure switch If the refrigerant pressure becomes too high (due to blockage or lack of airflow at the condenser), or too low (due to leakage), the A/C pressure switch stops the A/C request signal to the PCM and the compressor stops operating. - Middle pressure switch If the refrigerant pressure goes above or below 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/sq.cm, 213 psi), the A/C pressure switch opens or closes to signal the PCM to change the speed of the condenser fan and radiator fan (high-low). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the heater is inoperative or if any of the following items are operative; condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/With Electronic Climate Control - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS. Are there any DTCs indicated? YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 4P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the relay module and the A/C pressure switch. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals of the A/C pressure switch. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 16. 7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 774 10. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel connector A and the A/C pressure switch. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Measure the resistance between the No.14 and No.15 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). Is the resistance less than 24 kOhms? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit. 13. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check the blower motor at several speeds. Does the blower motor operate at all speeds? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio HVAC display panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Repair the problem in the blower motor circuit. 16. Check for proper A/C system pressure. Is the pressure within specifications? YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch. NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 775 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual HVAC A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of the following items are operative: condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor, or if the heater is inoperative. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS. Are there any DTCs indicated? YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 4P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the relay module and the A/C pressure switch. If the wire is OK, replace the relay module. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals of the A/C pressure switch. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 16. 7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 776 10. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the A/C pressure switch. 11. Turn the ignition switch off. 12. Measure the resistance between the No.9 and No.10 terminals of the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. Is the resistance less than 24 kOhms? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit. 13. Reconnect the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check the blower motor operation at several speeds. Does the blower motor operate at all speeds? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original front panel assembly. NO - Repair the problem in the blower motor circuit. 16. Check for proper A/C system pressure. Is the pressure within specifications? YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch. NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Solar Sensor: Component Locations Climate Control Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 781 Climate Control Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 782 55. Middle of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 783 109. Rear of Root (Sedan except DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 784 79. Sunlight Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 785 Solar Sensor: Testing and Inspection Sunlight Sensor Test 1. Remove the sunlight sensor, and reconnect the connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No.1 terminal and the (-) probe on the No.2 terminal with the 2P connector connected. The voltage readings will not change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. Voltage should be: - 3.6 - 3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct sunlight. - 3.3 - 3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 786 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Sunlight Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the upper panel from the dashboard. 2. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the upper panel (B). Be careful not to damage the sensor. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 792 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 793 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 794 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 795 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 796 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 797 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 798 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 799 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 800 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 801 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 802 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 803 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 804 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 805 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 806 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 807 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 808 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 809 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 810 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 811 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 812 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 813 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 814 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 815 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 816 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 817 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 818 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 819 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 820 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 821 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 822 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 823 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 824 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 825 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 826 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 827 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 831 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 832 Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 833 89. Left B-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) 91. Left C-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 834 215. Left B-pillar (2-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 835 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 6. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 7. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip > Page 840 Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge Sending Unit - New Wrench Available SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: New Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Wrench Available APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new fuel gauge sending unit wrench available in Honda parts stock. The new wrench T/N 07AAA-S0XA100) is a beefier version of the old one (T/N 07XAA-001010A) and supersedes it. The new wrench is much less prone to bending when you're removing a stubborn fuel pump/sender assembly locknut. Order it through normal parts ordering channels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 841 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 842 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Do multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting test mode A. - If no problem is found, go to step 2. - If DTC B1175 is indicated, go to the DTC B1175 troubleshooting. 2. Check the No.21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from the minimum to maximum position and then returns to minimum, the gauge is OK. Go to step 4. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep correctly, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the trunk floor. 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 8. Non-SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 9. SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 843 10. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the fuel pump 5P connector with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the given readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 844 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100 Non-SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 845 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (I) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (J) and new O-rings (K). When instaling the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the unit (M) and the fuel tank (N). SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 846 7. Remove the fuel tank unit (A). 8. Remove the strainer case (A), the fuel gauge sending unit (B), and the wire harness (C). 9. Install the part in the revers order of removal with a new base gasket (F) and new O-ring (G), then check these items: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (D) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (E). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (H) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations 43. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 850 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 851 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 852 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 67. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 856 14. Parking Brake Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 857 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 244. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 862 34. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 863 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-up Light Switch Test 1. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector (A). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No. 2 terminals of the back-up light switch. There should be continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. 3. If necessary, replace the back-up light switch. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001), and install it on the transmission housing. Tighten the back-up light switch to the specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 867 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 871 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A). 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 872 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A). 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 876 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 877 Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 878 89. Left B-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) 91. Left C-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 879 215. Left B-pillar (2-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 880 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 6. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 7. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 177. Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 884 296. Fog Light Switch (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 56. Middle of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 888 154. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 889 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B). 3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the upper panel. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horns Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 893 39. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 894 9. Horn Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 895 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness (B). ( ): With cruise control 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No.1 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 5P (or 13P) connector to body ground. - If the horns sound, go to step 4. - If the horns don't sound, check these items: No.13 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Relay control module in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Horns. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness. ( ): With cruise control 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal from the cable reel (B). 6. Using a jumper wire, connect the cable reel side 1P connector (C) to body ground, and turn the wheel side to side. - If the horns sound, replace the driver's airbag assembly. - If the horns don't sound or sounds intermittently, replace the cable reel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). ( ):DX 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 (No.1) and No 3 (No.2) terminals. ( ):DX - There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open). - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 908 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 912 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 913 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 916 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 917 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 921 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 928 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 929 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 930 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 934 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 935 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 939 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 940 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 941 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 942 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 946 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 955 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 956 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 957 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 958 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 959 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 965 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 966 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 967 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 968 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 969 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 970 Electric Load Sensor: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 971 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 975 141. Under Left Rear Of Vehicle Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 976 113. FTP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 977 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 978 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the FTP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 982 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams 54. IAT Sensor 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 983 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 984 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the IAT sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 988 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 989 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 990 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 994 118. MAP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 995 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 1004 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 1010 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) (B). Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) (B) Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1013 Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1014 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 86. Right Side Of Floor 159. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1015 189. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1016 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 267. HO2S (BI, S2), Rear Secondary 268. HO2S (B2, S2), Front Secondary Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017 277. A/F Sensor (B1, S1), Rear 278. A/F Sensor (B2, S1), Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F Sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F Sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor > Page 1020 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is on the WU-TWC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor (bank 2) 8P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the front A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor (bank 1) 8P connector (A), then remove the rear A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the rear A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 1023 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front secondary HO2S (bank 2) 4P connector (A), then remove the front secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the front secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear secondary HO2S (bank 1) 4P connector (A), then remove the rear secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the rear secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1027 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1028 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1029 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1030 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1031 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1032 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1036 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1041 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1042 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1043 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1044 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1048 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC - Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1052 89. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1053 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (B). 2. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1062 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1067 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1068 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 1071 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1072 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1076 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1080 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1081 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1086 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1087 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1088 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1092 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1093 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1094 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1095 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 1101 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1105 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1106 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1107 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Impact Sensor: Component Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1113 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1114 87. Left B-pillar (except DX) (Right Similar) 130. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1115 137. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper 188. Left C-pillar (Rt.Sim.) (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (Except '03-'04 2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1116 188. Left C-pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1117 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 55. Impact Sensor, Left Front 56. Impact Sensor, Right Front 73. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Driver's (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1118 74. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Front Passenger's (except DX) 258. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Driver's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (except '03-'04 2-door) 259. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Front Passenger's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (except '03-'04 2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors. 3. Remove the front bumper. 4. Remove the washer reservoir for the right side sensor or the intake air resonator for the left side sensor. 5. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor (C). Installation 1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Install all removed parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1121 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor 1ST Replacement Side Impact Sensor (1st) Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the Body section before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly. 4. Remove the front door sill trim and the center pillar lower trim panel. 5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor (1st). 6. Remove the Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (1st) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (1st) (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor. 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Install all removed pants. 4. After installing the side impact sensor (1st), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 2nd Replacement Side Impact Sensor (2nd) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1122 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor (2nd) 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. 4. Remove the Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (2nd) (C). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (2nd) (A) with torx bolts (B), then connect the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor (2nd). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Install all removed parts. 4. After installing the side impact sensor (2nd), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 80. Under Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 83. Under Front Passenger's Seat Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1126 186. Under Front Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) 211. Under Driver's Seat (Except; Ex-L; LX: V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1127 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 119. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 120. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1132 Seat Occupant Sensor: Testing and Inspection For further information, see TSB # 02-052 Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: A new (un-initialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select OPDS INIT, in the Adjustment Menu. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the OPDS system fails to initialize several times, replace the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - Before disconnecting the driver's seat position sensor 2P connector, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat assembly. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor. 5. Remove the Torx bolt (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's seat position sensor. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor. - After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust. 1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A). then connect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B). 2. Install the driver's seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1135 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Front Passenger Weight Sensor Replacement Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. 1. Remove the seat assembly. 2. Remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts attaching the seat to the weight sensors. 2-door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1136 4-door 3. Remove the front passenger's weight sensors from the seat riser. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensors on the seat riser. 2. Install the seat onto the weight sensors. 3. Reinstall the seat assembly. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. 6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1137 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit When the front passenger's weight sensors and/or weight sensor unit is replaced, calibrate the weight sensor unit by following the procedure below. While calibrating the front passenger's weight sensor unit, observe these precautions: - Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Make sure all optional parts such as seat covers are removed. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except test driving in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Keep the A/C and the heater off. - Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the seat height to the lowest position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move from these positions. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 3. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 4. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select "SWS INIT" in the Adjustment Menu and follow the prompts unit the initialization operation has been completed between the seat weight sensor unit and the sensor. 5. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) then measure and note its actual weight (M) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 6. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Leave the tester connected in the Misc Menu. 7. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 8. From the HDS's Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS's Inspection Menu. The weight (T) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 9. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale (M) and the HDS (T) with the formula below. Variance = (T) - (M) < ±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) M: Weight measured by the weight scale T: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 17. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, and reinstall them, then go to step 10. 10. Remove weight from the front passenger's seat. 11. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 12. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the tester. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 13. - If the reading on the tester (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), repeat this procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1138 13. Measure and note the prepare weight (M1) again with a weight scale. 14. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. 15. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 16. From the tester's Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK."in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 17. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance = (T1) - (M1) < ±18.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is 18.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 18. - If the variance is more than 18.6 lbs (13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced before this step), and repeat this procedure from the beginning. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the tester from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1139 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor The driver's seat position sensor must be checked after any of these actions. - Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement 1. Make sure the driver's seat is at its full forward position. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS. 6. Move the seat all the way forward. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR". NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each move. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be approximately 25 mm from the front. If the SPS data does not work as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and replace parts as needed. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1144 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 37. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1146 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1147 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen the clutch push-rod locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H) and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 - 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 191 mm (7.52 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 95 mm (3.74 inch) 3. Tighten the clutch push-rod locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C). 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A). 7. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 1153 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1157 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1158 (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1164 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1165 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1166 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1167 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1168 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1169 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1175 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 241. 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 4. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (D). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt, and connect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 9. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 1178 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 9. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 10. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1187 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1188 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1189 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1190 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1191 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1192 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1193 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1194 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1195 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1205 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1206 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1207 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1208 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1209 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1210 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1211 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1212 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 1213 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1220 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 141. Park Pin Switch/A/T Gear Position Console Light (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1222 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement NOTE: The park pin switch replacement is applied for the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever, the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever park pin switch is not available separately. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (C), then remove it from the bracket base. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (D), then remove the bulb (E) from the socket. 5. Remove the shift lock release lever (F). 6. Remove the park pin switch, and install the new switch (G) by aligning the tabs (H) with the slots (I). 7. Install the shift lock release lever. 8. Install the bulb in the socket, then install the socket in the bracket base. 9. Install the indicator panel on the bracket base. 10. Install the park pin switch connector on the bracket base, then connect the connector. 11. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1226 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1227 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1228 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1229 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1230 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1231 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1232 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1233 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor 173. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 1240 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 1241 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 1242 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor 117. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor > Page 1245 106. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 1248 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects mainshaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 1251 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 1252 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 6. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A) from the end cover. 7. Install the new O-ring (B) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the end cover. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 9. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 10. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 12. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 1253 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Reposition the under-hood fuse/relay box to gain access to the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 6. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 7. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 8. Remove the bolt securing the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (A) from the transmission housing. 9. Install the new O-ring (B) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 10. Check for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 12. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 13. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1257 247. ATF Temperature Sensor (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1258 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 10. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 11. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the jack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1259 12. Remove the transmission lower front mount. 13. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 14. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B), then remove the sensor. 15. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new ATF temperature sensor (D), then install the sensor. 16. Secure the ATF temperature sensor harness clamp (E) with the bolts. 17. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 18. Install the transmission lower front mount. 19. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and remove the transmission jack. 21. Refill the transmission with ATF. 22. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 23. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 24. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1269 243. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windows - Master Switch Input Test, Manual Revision Power Window Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Windows - Master Switch Input Test, Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: S/M Fix: PW Master Switch Input Test APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: The table for the power window master switch input test on page 22-209 of the 2003-04 S/M is missing some text in the Test condition column. There's no mention about connecting to body ground when testing cavities 9, 18, 13, 19, 12, and 14. For each of these cavities, change the last line of text in the column to read: with a jumper wire, and the No. 3 terminal to body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switches 94. Driver's Door (4-door) 102. Front Passenger's Door (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 1280 103. Left Rear Door Door (4-door) (Right Similar) 218. Driver's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 1281 219. Front Passenger's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 1282 Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Trim and Components Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 1283 Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 1284 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Front Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 1285 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Rear Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1286 Power Window Switch: Diagrams 169. Power Window Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 170. Power Window Switch, Right Rear (4-door) 185. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1287 205. Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 1. Before testing the power windows, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 3. Disconnect the 23P connector (AI from the power window switch (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 1290 NOTE:Technicians please note that several cavities require the number 3 terminal to be grounded to a body ground this is noted in either the wire color cell or test condition cell this only applies to the cavities noted all other instruction to be followed as presented, due to manual update from OEM. Aug.19th 2005. 5. With the power window master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the 23P connector to the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 1291 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and perform the following input tests. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. NOTE: Reference voltage is approximately 5 V when system is awake. The voltage drops to 0.8 V when the system goes into sleep mode. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 1292 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C). 3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test. If the original window switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power mirror and power window switch connectors (A). 3. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove the master switch (A) from the panel (B). 4. Reinstall the switch in reverse order of removal. 5. Reset the power window control unit. 6. For LX and EX models; reprogram the keyless remotes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 1295 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C). 3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test. If the original window switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1300 91. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1301 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1. Remove the right inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B). 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the reservoir. NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals in each float position (C). - There should be continuity when the float is down. - There should be no continuity when the float is up. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1306 41. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1307 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1310 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Remove the steering column covers. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 6. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1311 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1316 41. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1317 239. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1320 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Remove the steering column covers. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 6. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1321 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1331 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1332 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1333 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1334 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1335 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1336 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1337 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1338 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1339 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 1344 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 1345 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right Alignment: Customer Interest Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifts to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 1350 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 1351 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shift the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1357 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1358 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1359 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1360 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1361 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1362 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1363 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1364 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1365 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 1370 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 1371 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifts to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 1376 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 1377 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shift the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 1382 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 1388 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1389 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1390 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1391 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1392 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1393 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1394 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1395 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1396 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1397 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1398 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 03-036 Date: 050603 Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1399 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1400 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 03-036 Date: 050503 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1401 Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifts to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1402 ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1403 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shift the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # SN030915 Date: 030901 Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1404 Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1405 warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1406 TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1407 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1408 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1409 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1410 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1411 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1412 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1413 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1414 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 03-036 Date: 050603 Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1415 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1416 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Alignment: Specifications Alignment WHEEL ALIGNMENT CAMBER Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... 0°00'±45' Rear ..................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. -1°00'±30' CASTER Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... 3°15'±45' TOTAL TOE-IN Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................. 0±2 mm (0±1/16 in.) Rear ..................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 2±2 mm (1/16±1/16 in.) FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE Inside wheel ......................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 38°50'±2° Outside wheel ...................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 31°40' (Reference) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment > Page 1419 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Honda Motor Company does not list ride height/trim height specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1420 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment The suspension can be adjusted for front and rear toe. Pre-Alignment Checks For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks: 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 3. Check the tire size and tire pressure. Tire size: ('03-05 Models) Except 2 door EX, M/T models: P205/60R16 91V M+S 2 door EX, MT model: P215/50R17 93V M+S ('06-07 Models) P205/50R17 93V M+S Tire pressure: ('03-05 Models) Front: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi) Rear: 4 door LX, EX models: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi) 2 door LX, EX models: 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi) 2 door EX, M/T model: 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi) ('06-07 Models) Front: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi) Rear: 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi) 4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires. 5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling.) 6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the suspension. Caster Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the caster angle. Caster angle: 3°15'±45' 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: Front: 0°00' ±45' Maximum difference between the right and left side: 0°45' Rear: -1°00' ±30' Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1421 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Center the steering wheel spokes. 2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe-in: 0±2 mm (0±1/16 in.) - If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment. - If adjustment is required, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a wrench, and turn both rack ends (C) until the front toe is within specifications. 4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. Reposition the rack-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced. Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Check the toe. Rear toe-in: 2 ±2 mm (1/16 ±1/16 in.) - If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment. - If adjustment is required, go to step 3. 3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear control arm (B), and loosen the self-locking nut (C). 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1422 NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it has been loosened. 5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct. 6. Tighten the self-locking nut while holding the adjusting bolt. Turning Angle Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. Turning angle: Inward: 38°50' ±2° ('03-05 Models) 38°50' ±2° ('06-07 Models) 35°20' ±2° Outward: ('03-05 Models) 31°40' (reference) ('06-07 Models) 29°40' (reference) 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure regulator Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connected ............................................................................................ 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/cm2, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1427 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1428 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 - Fuel hose attachment 07ZAJ-S7C0100 - Fuel joint attachment 07ZAJ-S7CA200 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. - If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Engine idle Idle speed with no load M/T in neutral ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. .......................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Idle speed with high electric load (with HVAC on) M/T in neutral position ......................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. ........................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1432 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1433 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Pull the parking brake lever up. 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with the heater fan and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, go to the System Troubleshooting Index. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1442 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1443 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition coil Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1454 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1455 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1456 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs; replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Electrode Gap Standard (New): 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. Spark Plugs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1457 NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ2ODR-M11 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1461 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must select engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), otherwise ECM/PCM continues to stop the fuel injectors from operating. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, and then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS. 5. Remove the six ignition coils. 6. Remove the six spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 9. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 10. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gaskets ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 11. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.20 - 0.24 mm (0.008 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.28 - 0.32 mm (0.011 - 0.013 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1465 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head covers. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1466 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between, the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder, and slide it back and forth, you should feel a slight amount of drag. 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 2 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1467 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 5 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 5 cylinder. 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 3 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 14. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 6 cylinder. 17. Install the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Interval Replace Timing belt and inspect water pump every 105,000 miles (168,000 kilometers) or every seven years. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1471 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Timing Belt Inspection 1. Remove the ignition coil cover. 2. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 3. Remove the front upper cover. 4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. Replace the belt if it is cracked or soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt Removal Timing Belt Removal 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 5. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). 6. Check that the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC) mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned. Note: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft pulley mark. 7. Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1474 8. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side engine mount bracket (B). 9. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper cover (B). 10. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 11. Remove the lower cover (A). 12. Remove the timing belt guide plate (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1475 13. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown. 14. Screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position. Tighten it by hand; do not use a wrench. 15. Remove the engine mount bracket. 16. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (B), then remove the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1476 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt Installation Timing Belt Installation NOTE: The following procedure is for installation of a used belt. If you are installing a new belt, refer to the timing belt replacement procedure. 1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide plate, and the upper and lower covers. 2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center (TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the back covers. 4. Apply liquid thread lock (P/N 08713-0001) to the idler pulley bolt, then loosely install the idler pulley. 5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing belt cannot be installed, perform the timing belt replacement procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1477 6. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care not to damage the timing belt when installing it. 7. Tighten the idler pulley bolt. 8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1478 9. Install the engine mount bracket. 10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. 11. Install the lower cover. 12. Install the crankshaft pulley. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1479 13. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper cover (B). 14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the pulleys. 15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1480 16. Check the camshaft pulley marks. - If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step 17. - If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 through 16. 17. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 18. Install the ground cable (B). 19. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner. 20. Install the drive belt. 21. Install the splash shield. 22. Install the right front tire/wheel. 23. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1481 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt Replacement Timing Belt Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide plate, and the upper and lower covers. 3. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the back covers. 5. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1482 6. Remove the auto-tensioner. 7. Align the holes on the rod and housing of the auto-tensioner. 8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the auto-tensioner. Insert a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) pin through the housing and the rod. NOTE: The compression pressure should not exceed 9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200 lbf). 9. Install the auto-tensioner. NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1483 10. Screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold the timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand; do not use a wrench. 11. Apply liquid thread lock (P/N 08713-0001) to the idler pulley bolt, then loosely install the idler pulley. 12. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence starting with the drive pulley. 13. Tighten the idler pulley bolt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1484 14. Remove the pin from the auto-tensioner. 15. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. 16. Install the engine mount bracket. 17. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1485 18. Install the lower cover. 19. Install the crankshaft pulley. 20. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper cover (B). 21. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the pulleys. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 1486 23. Check the camshaft pulley marks. - If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC go to step 24. - If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 through 23. 24. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 25. Install the ground cable (B). 26. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner. 27. Install the drive belt. 28. Install the splash shield. 29. Install the right front tire/wheel. 30. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations TDC Marks Crankshaft Front and Rear Camshafts Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions 08-082 November 1, 2008 Applies To: 2003-07 Accord V6 - ALL 2005-06 Odyssey LX, EX - ALL 2005-06 Pilot 4WD - ALL 2006-07 Ridgeline - ALL Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement Instructions BACKGROUND Replacement drive belt auto-tensioners have been updated. Installing this updated auto-tensioner requires the lower timing cover to be trimmed slightly for clearance. This service bulletin duplicates the instructions packaged with the drive belt auto-tensioner. CORRECTIVE ACTION Trim the rib of the lower timing belt cover before installing the updated drive belt auto-tensioner. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the drive belt and auto-tensioner: ^ Refer to of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Auto Tensioner Replacement from the list. 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the right (passenger's) front wheel. 3. Remove the under cover from the right side to access the engine. 4. Looking in from the right front wheelwell opening, inspect the lower timing belt cover's rib. ^ If the rib is untrimmed (as in the 1st illustration above), go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions > Page 1494 ^ If the rib is already trimed (as in the 2nd illustration above), go to step 6. 5. As shown below, use a die grinder or a utility knife to trim off a 3-mm section of the lower timing belt cover. 6. Reinstall the right side under-cover. 7. Reinstall the right-front wheel, and lower the vehicle. 8. Install the new drive belt auto-tensioner. 9. Reinstall the drive belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions > Page 1495 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1496 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1497 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Inspection 1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it. 2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the drive belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1498 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension from the drive belt (B), then remove the drive belt. 2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1499 Drive Belt: Tools and Equipment Honda Serpintine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 -Lightweight and slim design -Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1500 -Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement The dust and pollen filter should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever comes first. Replace the filter more often if the airflow is less than usual. 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box then let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly from the evaporator case. 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter. 4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Male sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1513 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1514 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil Filter Replacement Special Tools Required Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 1. Remove the oil filter with the special tool. 2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine. 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 4. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1518 6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or V to VVVV) are printed around the outside of the filter, you can use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if mark V is at the bottom when the seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark VVVV comes around to the bottom. 7. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 8. 2006 model: Reset the engine oil life indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Hose/Line HVAC: Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1523 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE SYSTEM FLUID TYPE (INCLUDES ABS LINE) Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications CLUTCH LINE FLUID TYPE Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY Change *1 Manual Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 6.6 liters (1.74 US gal) Automatic Transmission ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7 liters (1.77 US gal) Total Manual Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 8.2 liters (2.17 US gal) Automatic Transmission ......................................................................................................................................................... 8.4 liters (2.22 US gal) *1 = Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine. Reserve Tank capacity = 0.6 L (0.16 US gal) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1538 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT TYPE Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Premixing is not required. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1539 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Check 1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B). 2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between the MIN and MAX mark, then inspect the cooling system for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1540 Coolant: Service and Repair Coolant Replacement 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Remove the radiator cap. 3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant. 4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen the drain bolt. 5. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain bolt. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. 7. Remove, drain, and reinstall the reserve tank. 8. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1541 9. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: ^ Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. ^ Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add water. 10. Install the radiator cap loosely. 11. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 12. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed. 13. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again, and check for leaks. 14. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications A/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 2.9L (3.1 Qt) Overhaul .......................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. 7.2L (7.6 Qt) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1548 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .............................. Honda ATF-Z1 P/N 08200-9001 Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or more. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the ATF dipstick guide pipe, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. For 2003 model: Insert the dipstick (A) back with pointing the arrow (B) on the cap (C) to the front of the vehicle. 5. For 2004-2007 models: Insert the dipstick (A) back with pointing the arrow (B) on the cap (C) to the front of the vehicle, and aligning the notch on the cap with the guide tab (D). 6. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It should be between upper mark (B) and lower mark (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1551 7. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid leaks at the transmission, hose and line joints. Note: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is below the lower mark: ^ Transmission damage will result. ^ Vehicle does not move in any gear. ^ Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when starting off in the D or R ranges. ^ Vibration results from created by the engine at idle. 8. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to proper level. Note: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is above the upper mark, vehicle moves in the N position, and shifting malfunction will occur. 9. If necessary fill the transmission through the dipstick guide pipe opening (A) to bring the fluid level up to about midway between the upper mark and lower mark of the dipstick with ATF. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 10. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide pipe. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1552 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Refill transmission with the recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) with a new sealing washer (C). 7. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark and lower mark on the dipstick. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Leaks, Check for Overfilling Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Leaks, Check for Overfilling SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: MTF Leak? Check for Overfilling APPLIES TO: 03-05 6-speed Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: Got a '03-05 6-speed Accord V6 in your shop that's leaking MTF? Before you start troubleshooting, make sure the M/T isn't just overfilled. The M/T in these vehicles has a vent tube inside the clutch housing. If the M/T is overfilled, MTF will leak out the vent tube between the engine and the M/T. Checking the MTF level is really pretty simple. Just remove the oil check bolt and its washer. The MTF level should be no higher than the bottom of the oil check bolt hole. If the MTF level is higher than the hole, the MTF will drain out the hole until the level is right. If the MTF level is lower than the bottom of the oil check bolt hole, you'll need to top off the MTF. Remove the oil filler plug and its washer. Add Honda MTF through the oil filler plug hole until it starts running out the oil check bolt hole. Once the MTF stops running out the hole, reinstall the oil check bolt with a new washer. Torque the bolt to 12 N-m (8.7 lb-ft). Install the oil filler plug with a new washer. Torque the plug to 44 N-m (33 lb-ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications M/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 2.2L (2.3 Qt) Total ................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................ 2.5L (2.6 Qt) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1563 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications M/T Fluid Type ........................................................................................................................................ Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF): P/N 08798-9016 Always use Honda MTF. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1564 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the oil check bolt (A) and washer (B), check the condition of the fluid. If the fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (C) and washer (D). 4. Install the drain plug with a new washer. 5. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B). 6. Refill the transmission fluid from the oil filler plug hole of transmission, and until the transmission fluid overflows from the oil check bolt hole (A). 7. After it stops overflowing, install the oil check bolt (B) with a new washer (C). Fluid Capacity 2.2 litres (2.3 US qt) at fluid change 2.5 litres (2.6 US qt) at overhaul Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1565 8. Install the oil filter plug (A) with a new washer (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Engine overhaul ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 5.0L (5.3 Qt) Oil change, including filter ................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 4.3L (4.5 Qt) Oil change, without filter ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 4.0L (4.2 Qt) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1572 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. Engine Oil API Classification .................................................................................................................................... Make sure the label says "For Gasoline Engines". SAE Viscosity .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................................... 5W-20 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1573 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil Replacement 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B). 4. Refill with the recommended oil. Capacity At oil change: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt) At oil change, including filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt) After engine overhaul: 5.0 L (5.3 US qt) 5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 6. 2006 model: Reset the engine oil life indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID CAPACITY Fluid change ........................................................................................................................................ .................................. 0.4 liters (0.42 US quarts) System overhaul ..................................................... ............................................................................................................... 1.1 liters (1.16 US quarts) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1578 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM FLUID TYPE Honda Power Steering Fluid. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1579 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Fluid Replacement Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C). 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. 8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored, repeat procedure as necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1584 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1585 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1586 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity or system .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 500 - 550 g (17.6 - 19.4 oz) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1589 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... HFC-134 a (R-134 a) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Refrigerant: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 - P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 ml (4 fl.oz) - P/N 38899-PR7-A01: 40 ml (1 1/3 fl.oz) Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 1592 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 1593 - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 1594 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 1595 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Evacuation System Evacuation CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. When an A/C System has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station. (If the system has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for several hours.) 2. Connect a R-1 34a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system. 3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 1596 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Charging System Charging CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Evacuate the system. 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil. 4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the compressor will be damaged. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant Capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 5. Check for refrigerant leaks. 6. Check for system performance. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant oil Capacity of components Condenser ........................................................................................................................................... .................................................25 ml (5/6 fl oz) Evaporator ................................................................ .......................................................................................................................45 ml (1 1/2 fl oz) Each line and hose ....................................................................................................................................... .....................................10 ml (1/3 fl oz) Compressor .......................................................................... ...........................................................................................................160 ml (5 1/3 fl oz) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1601 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Use only DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1602 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 - P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 ml (4 fl.oz) - P/N 38899-PR7-A01: 40 ml (1 1/3 fl.oz) Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1603 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1604 - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Washer Fluid: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 1613 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 1614 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Washer Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 1620 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 1621 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 1627 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 1628 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 1634 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 1635 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda. DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Attach a length of clear drain tube to the bleed screw. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left-front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown following until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1639 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1644 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1645 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1646 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1652 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1653 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1654 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1655 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1656 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse: Connector Views 286. Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) 290. Outside Air Temperature Sensor In-line Fuse I (Honda Accessory) 291. Outside Air Temperature Sensor In-line Fuse 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1659 292. Security In-line Fuse (DX) (Honda Accessory) 309. XM Satellite In-line Fuse 1 (Honda Accessory) 310. XM Satellite In-line Fuse 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1662 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1663 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Fuse Block: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1672 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1673 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1674 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1675 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1676 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1682 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1683 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1684 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1685 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 1686 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Circuit Diagrams Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1689 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1690 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1691 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1692 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1693 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1694 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1695 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1696 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1697 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1698 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1699 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1700 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1701 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1702 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1703 Fuse Block: Connector Locations 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1704 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1705 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1706 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1709 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1710 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1711 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1712 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1713 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1714 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1715 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1716 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1717 240. Rear Junction Block Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1720 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Relay Box Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1725 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1726 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1727 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1728 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1729 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1730 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1731 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1732 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1733 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1734 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1735 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1736 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1737 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1738 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1739 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1740 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1741 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1744 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1745 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1746 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1747 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1748 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1749 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1750 Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1751 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1754 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1755 Under-hood Multi-Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1758 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press and hold the select/reset button in the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch ON (Position II). 3. Hold the button for at least 10 seconds, until the indicator resets. Note: In an article in Honda's Service News dated March 2004 the manufacturer notes the following: Turn off the headlights to reset Maintenance Indicator. Can't reset the maintenance indicator in a 03-04 Accord? Make sure the headlights are off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still cannot reset the indicator even with the headlights off, then check to see if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does you may have to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashies five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1770 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic procedure. Does the MIL indicator flash? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge assembly. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the MIL. Does the MIL stay off? YES - Go to step 17. NO - Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait 20 seconds, and watch the MIL. Does the MIL stay on or flash more than 5 times? YES - Go to step 7. NO - The MIL circuit is OK. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Connect the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". If no problem is found in the DLC troubleshooting, go to step 21. 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? YES - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check the MIL in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does indicate ON? YES - Go to step 12. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge assembly. 12. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a short indicated? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1771 15. Disconnect ECM connector A (31P). 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A16 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A16)and the DLC. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 17. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start and idle smoothly? YES - Go to step 18. NO - Go to step 22. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Connect the HDS. 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Go to "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". If no problem is found in the DLC troubleshooting, go to step 21. 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC U0073 and/or U0155 indicated? YES - Go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM. replace the original ECM/PCM. 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 23. Inspect the No.23 + B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the No.20 IG (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is OK, go to step 24. NO - Repair short in the wire between No.23 + B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the No.23 +B IG MAIN ( 50 A) fuse. 24. Inspect the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1772 YES - Go to step 31. NO - Go to step 25. 25. Remove the blown No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 26. Remove the left kick panel, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 27. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.3 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (PCM) (15 A) and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 28. 28. Disconnect each of the components or connectors below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector E (31P) - Each injector 2P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 6P connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1773 Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 29. NO - Replace the component that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. 29. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector E (31P) - Injectors - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 30. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN) and each item. Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN). Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. 31. Inspect the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 44. NO - Go to step 32. 32. Remove the blown No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 33. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 34. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 35. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1774 Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 36. NO - Replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 36. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 37. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E5), or between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 38. 38. Remove the trunk floor trim panel. 39. Remove the access panel from the floor. 40. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 41. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1775 YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 42. 42. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A). 43. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it if necessary. Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. 44. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 45. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 46. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 47. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 48. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1776 NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E5). 48. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A5 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 53. NO - Go to step 49. 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 50. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 51. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 52. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1777 52. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.4 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A5. Is there continuity? YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (A5). 53. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 54. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 55. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals E4. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 62. NO - Go to step 56. 56. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 57. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 58. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1778 59. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 60. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 61. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector terminal E4. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-PI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (E4). 62. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals B15, E1, E2, and E3 individually. Is there more than 0.2 V? YES - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 0.2 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (B15, E1, E2, E3). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1779 NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the gearshift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in (park) for automatic transmission. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 4. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 1788 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1789 Tires: Specifications Design Specifications Tires Size Front and Rear .................................................................................................................................... ..................................... P205/60R16 91V M+S Spare ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ T135/90D15 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheels: Testing and Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection Front and Rear Wheel Axial Runout 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the axial runout by turning the wheel. Front and rear wheel axial runout: Standard: Steel wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Steel wheel Aluminum wheel 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout. Front and rear wheel radial runout: Standard: Steel wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) Front and Rear Wheel Radial Runout Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1793 Steel wheel Aluminum wheel 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, check the wheel bearing end play, and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel are clean. 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2004 TITLE: Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement APPLIES TO: 2000-04 Accords, 1999-04 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots SERVICE TIP: With so many A/Ts being replaced lately, we're hearing reports of wheel bearing noise and comebacks because of it. What's causing the problem is use of high-powered impact wrenches to install the spindle nuts on the driveshafts. - Before you remove the spindle nut, make sure you first raise the stake on the nut. Not only does this make removing the nut easier, but it prevents the driveshaft threads from getting damaged. Damaged threads can cause insufficient clamping force when installing the new spindle nut, and lead to noise. - Tighten the new spindle nut on the driveshaft with a torque wrench set to the spec listed in the appropriate S/M. Don't use a high powered impact wrench. The 400-700 lb-ft of torque it generates can overcompress the wheel bearing, causing damage and noise. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 1798 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearings - Humming Or Growling SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Humming or Growling? Check the Wheel Bearings APPLIES TO: 1998-04 Accord, 2001-04 CR-V, 2003 Element, 1999-04 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: A bad front wheel bearing(s) can make a humming or growling that's easily mistaken for a noisy bearing or gear in the A/T. Before you order a reman A/T, test-drive the vehicle to make sure the A/T is really the problem. Listen carefully as you accelerate and decelerate during your test-drive. Shift into neutral. Varying throttle position and shifting into neutral changes the load on the A/T bearings and gears. If the A/T has a bad bearing or gear, the change in load will affect its noise level. If that's what you find, then go ahead and order a reman A/T. If the noise level isn't affected by changes in throttle position or shifting into neutral, then the culprit could be a bad front wheel bearing(s). Since the wheel bearings aren't mounted on shafts being spread apart by gears, they're not affected by changes in load. Also, since Honda uses angular contact wheel bearings, you won't normally hear a change in noise level when you swerve the vehicle from side to side. Hook up a STEELMAN® ChassisEAR (T/N JSP SM06600) to the front knuckles, and test-drive the vehicle again. Refer to S/B 00-063, STEELMAN ChassisEAR Diagnostic Tool, for more info. If you hear humming or growling from one or affected wheel bearing(s), and then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the noise is gone. If you don't hear any noise from the front wheel bearings, the problem could be from tire noise or vibration. Swap the front wheels and tires with a known-good vehicle. Testdrive the vehicle, and check if the noise or vibration goes away. STEELMAN(R) and ChassisEAR (R) are registered trademarks of J.S. Products, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 1799 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing - Correct Installation To Prevent DTC's SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Install Wheel Bearings Correctly to Prevent DTCs APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord, 2002-03 CR-V, 2003 Element SERVICE TIP: When you replace a wheel bearing in a make sure you install it correctly. If you don't, these ABS DTCs can set: - ABS DTC 12, 14, 16, 18 [wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)] - ABS DTC 21, 22, 23, 24 (magnetic encoder) The brown dust shield for the wheel bearing also doubles as a magnetic encoder for the ABS. Before you install the wheel bearing, make sure the encoder is clean and free of metallic particles, then install it so the encoder is toward the inside of the knuckle. Install the encoder carefully so you don't damage its surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1800 Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing End Play Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play Front .................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1801 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1802 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts (A) and torque to the specified torque. Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play 3. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange or hub cap. 4. Measure the bearing end play moving the drum brake or brake disc inward and outward. Front/rear: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1803 Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Attachment, 78 x90 mm O7GAD-SD4O1O1 ^ Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm O7GAF-SD4O1O0 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 ^ Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD9O1OO Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1806 2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1807 6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1808 11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball joint remover. 14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 15 Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1809 NOTE: ^ Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. ^ During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint. 17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and on the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1810 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary. 5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1811 ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^ Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B) on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring when installing it. 9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. 11. Press a wheel bearing (A) onto the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1812 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Replacement Exploded View-Disc Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1813 Exploded View-Drum Brake Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Hub Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1814 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the hub cap (A). 6. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Screw two 8 X 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1815 10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Hub Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. 3. Remove the hub cap (A). 4. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1816 5. Release the parking brake lever, and remove the brake drum (A). Screw two 8X1.25 mm bolts (B) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 7. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high point solvent before reassembly. ^ Use a new spindle nut reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1817 3. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new clip after tightening the nut as shown. 4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer link bracket (E). 6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F) and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1818 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B). 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1819 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new clip into the ball joint pin as shown. 3. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 4. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (A), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D) and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1820 bracket (F). 6. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the flange bolts and rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 7. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (A) from the knuckle. 8. Remove the wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1821 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle. 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to wheel cylinder, and retighten if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 1827 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 1828 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Tightening Torque Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Tightening Torque > Page 1833 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Tightening Sequence Wheel Torque Sequence - Master Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1834 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Wheel Bolt Replacement NOTICE ^ Do not use a hammer or air or electric impact tools to remove and install the wheel bolts. ^ Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel bolts. 1. Remove the front hub or rear hub bearing unit. 2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press attachments (C) or equivalent tools. NOTE: ^ Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the mating surface on the bolt and the hub. ^ The illustration shows a front hub. 3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with the wheel bolt. NOTE: ^ Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the threaded section of the nut. ^ Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in relation to the hub disc surface. 4. Press the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press attachments or equivalent tools. 5. Install the front hub or rear hub bearing unit. NOTE: If you can not tighten the wheel nut to the specified torque value when installing the wheel, replace the front hub or rear hub bearing unit as an assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the vehicle. To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with towing hooks (A) and tie down hook slots (B). The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hook slots can be used to secure the vehicle to truck. Wheel Lift Equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lifts them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the vehicle. Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do the following: Manual Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Shift the transmission in Neutral. Automatic Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Start the engine. - Shift to position, then E/N position. - Turn off the engine. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1838 It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). NOTE - Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed. - Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the gearshift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in (park) for automatic transmission. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 4. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Engine Mount Control Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Engine Mount Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Engine Mount Control Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1848 45. Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1853 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1854 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1855 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1856 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1857 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1858 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1859 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1860 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1861 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1862 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1863 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1864 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1865 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1866 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1867 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1868 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1869 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1870 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1871 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1872 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1873 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1874 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1875 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1876 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1877 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1878 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1879 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1880 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1881 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1882 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1883 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1884 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1885 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1886 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1887 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1888 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1892 188. VTEC Solenoid Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Removal/Inspection 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve (B). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection > Page 1895 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 (A) and body ground. - If the resistance is as specified, go to step 3. - If the resistance is not as specified, replace the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for a restriction. If there is a restriction, replace the VTEC solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection > Page 1896 4. If the filter is not restricted, remove the VTEC solenoid valve (A) and push the valve (B) with your finger to check its movement. If the valve moves freely, it is normal, check the engine oil pressure. If the valve binds or sticks, replace the VTEC valve assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1897 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair VTEC Solenoid Valve Removal/Inspection 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve (B). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1901 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must select engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), otherwise ECM/PCM continues to stop the fuel injectors from operating. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, and then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS. 5. Remove the six ignition coils. 6. Remove the six spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 9. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 10. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gaskets ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 11. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1906 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation 1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil seal. 2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cylinder head. - 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. - 2 Install the oil seat about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02 - 0.06 inch) below the surface of the cylinder head. 3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a new O-ring (D). 4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow dowel pins (F). 6. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 7. Loosen the valve adjusting screws. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1907 9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. 10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). 11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Camshaft: Testing and Inspection Camshaft Inspection 1. Remove the cylinder head. 2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. 4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the cylinder head. 5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and read the end play. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft. 6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out the camshaft (B). 7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or excessively worn. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1911 8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal. 9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter. 10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-round condition. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within limits, go to step 12. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has been replaced, replace the cylinder head. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has not been replaced, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1912 11. Check total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks. ^ If the total runout of the camshaft is within the service limit, replace the cylinder head. ^ If the total runout is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft and recheck the oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head. 12. Measure cam lobe height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Replacement Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement Camshaft Replacement FRONT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Drain the engine coolant. 5. Remove the upper radiator hose. 6. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve. 7. Remove the timing belt. 8. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 9. Remove the front camshaft pulley. 10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the front camshaft (B). 11. Install the front camshaft in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil to the journals and camshaft lobes. 12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt, then install the front camshaft pulley. 13. Install the rocker arm assembly, then tighten the mounting bolts. 14. Install the timing belt. 15. Adjust the valve clearance. 16. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air out 17. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 18. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. 19. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio and XM radio channel presets. Set the clock. REAR 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Drain the engine coolant. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Replacement > Page 1915 4. Remove the heater hose (A), and two nuts (B) securing the fuel line. 5. Remove the timing belt. 6. Remove the rocker arm assembly. 7. Remove the rear camshaft pulley. 8. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the rear camshaft (B). 9. Install the rear camshaft in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil to the journals and camshaft lobes. 10. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft pulley. 11. Install the rocker arm assembly, then tighten the mounting bolts. 12. Install the timing belt. 13. Adjust the valve clearance. 14. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air out. 15. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Replacement > Page 1916 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation 1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil seal. 2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cylinder head. - 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. - 2 Install the oil seat about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02 - 0.06 inch) below the surface of the cylinder head. 3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a new O-ring (D). 4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow dowel pins (F). 6. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 7. Loosen the valve adjusting screws. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Replacement > Page 1917 9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. 10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). 11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection 1. Remove the rocker arm assembly, then disassemble the rocker arm assembly. 2. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 3. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. 4. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 1922 5. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all over-tolerance rocker arms. If any intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary). VTEC Rocker Arms 6. Inspect the rocker arm synchronizing pistons (A). Slide them into the rocker arms. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm set. NOTE: ^ Apply new engine oil to the pistons when reassembling. ^ When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B), carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. 7. Install the rocker arm assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 1923 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection VTEC Rocker Arm Test VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required ^ VTEC air adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A ^ VTEC air stopper 070AJ-0030100 ^ Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn OFF the ignition switch. 2. Remove the cylinder head covers. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). 4. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and secondary rocker arm (C). ^ If the intake mid rocker arm does not move, remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the mid, primary, and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. ^ If the mid rocker arm moves freely repeat the above procedure for the remaining intake mid rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid rocker arms pass the test, go to step 5. 5. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0 kgf/cm2, 100 psi). 6. Inspect the valve clearance. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 1924 7. Remove the No. 1 and No. 6, intake rocker shaft mounting bolts, then install and connect the special tools as shown. 8. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 440 - 540 kPa (4.5 - 5.5 kgf/cm2, 64 - 78 psi) NOTE: If the synchronizing pistons do not move after applying air pressure, move the primary or secondary rocker arm up and down manually. 9. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A) and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm (C) does not move when pushed manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set. 10. Remove the special tools. 11. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly Removal 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Loosen the adjusting, screws (A). 3. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly. - 1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. - 2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 1927 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations. ^ Inspect the rocker shafts and, rocker arms. ^ Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply new engine oil to any contact points. ^ When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 1928 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation 1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil seal. 2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cylinder head. - 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. - 2 Install the oil seat about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02 - 0.06 inch) below the surface of the cylinder head. 3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a new O-ring (D). 4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow dowel pins (F). 6. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 7. Loosen the valve adjusting screws. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 1929 9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. 10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). 11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1934 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1935 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1936 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1937 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1938 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1939 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1940 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1941 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1942 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1943 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1944 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1945 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1946 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1947 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1948 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1949 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1950 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1951 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1952 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1953 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1954 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1955 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1956 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1957 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1958 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1959 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1960 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1961 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1962 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1963 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1964 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1965 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1966 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1967 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1968 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1969 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Rod Bearing Cap Tightening torque ..................................................................................................................................................... 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.) + 90° Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Pin-to-rod clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.005 0.014 mm (0.0002 - 0.0006 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 0.019 mm (0.0007 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1974 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. 2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place a strip of Plastigage across the rod journal. 4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts. Tightening torque: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.) + 90° Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads. NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure the widest part of the Plastigage. 6. If the Plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, then install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the Plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. Rod Bearing Selection Each rod fails into one of four tolerance ranges (from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 inch), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) increments) depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3, or 4/I, II, III, or IIII) indicating the range. You may find any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4/I, II, III, or IIII in any engine. Normal Bore Size: 56.0 mm (2.20 inch) Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat damage. Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1975 Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use them, and the letters or bars stamped on the crank (codes for rod journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Why Do Connecting Rods Break? Curious why connecting rods break? Afier all, these are heavy-duty parts specifically designed to endure punishing forces and temperatures. Yet, every once in a while they do bend or break and wind up as cool conversation pieces for a coffee table or desk. Connecting rods break only after they've gotten bent. And they won't get bent unless the engine hydro-locks or the rod bearings fail. When troubleshooting a bent or broken connecting rod, here are some things to consider: ^ The number one culprit for connecting rod breakage is hydro-lock. This happens when liquid (water or fuel) entering the combustion chamber exceeds the chamber's volume. Since liquids don't compress, that extra volume in the chamber causes the rod to bend. You won't really notice anything wrong, until that bent rod finally gives out and breaks. This could happen if you're driving through deep, standing water and someone coming the other way splashes water over your hood. On very rare occasions, a bad ECM/PCM or fuel injector can cause too much fuel to enter a cylinder, causing hydro-lock and resulting in a bent rod. Before this happens, though, there are usually some kind of drive ability problems that crop up and remain afier the engine is fixed. A bent rod might not show any symptoms until it actually breaks. But bent rods leave a wider-than-normal carbon witness line in the cylinder because they're shorter. Typically, a healthy engine has a carbon line that's 6 mm deep. An engine that's suffering from bent rods has a second carbon line that's 9 to 12 mm deep. ^ Connecting rod bearings fail for a number of reasons. To properly determine what actually caused a rod bearing to fail, you've got to take apart all rod bearings and main bearings and compare them side by side. If all or most of the bearings and journals show similar damage (scoring, exposed copper, or heat discoloration) the likely cause is oil starvation, poor maintenance, customer abuse, or running the engine with an aftermarket power booster (nitrous oxide setup, supercharger, turbocharger). If only the bearing or journal for the failed rod looks bad but all the other ones look good (no scoring, no exposed copper or heat discoloration) and the crankshaft journals are smooth with no heat discoloration, then that particular bearing/ clearance would be suspect. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Service Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Service Specifications Rod Bearing Clearance Standard or new ................................................................................................................................................ 0.020 0.044 mm (0.0008 - 0.0017 inch) Limit ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.050 mm (0.0020 inch) Pin-to-rod clearance Standard or new ................................................................................................................................................ 0.005 0.014 mm (0.0002 - 0.0006 inch) Limit ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................ 0.019 mm (0.0007 inch) Small-end bore diameter ................................................................................................................................... 21.970 - 21.976 mm (0.8650 - 0.8652 inch) Large-end bore diameter (Normal) ........................................................................................................................................................ 56.0 mm (2.20 inch) End play installed on crankshaft ......................................................................... .................................................................................................................... Standard or new ........................................................................................................................................................ 0.15 - 0.35 mm (0.006 - 0.014 inch) Limit ............................................................................................ .................................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Service Specifications > Page 1982 Connecting Rod: Specifications Torque Specifications Rod Bearing Caps: Torque the bolts to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). Tighten the bolts an additional 90°. Connecting Rod Bolt Reusabillity: Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B. Specification: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 inch) If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance, replace the connecting rod bolt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1983 Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pump. 2. Remove the baffle plate. 3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and crankshaft (C). 4. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. 6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1984 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B). NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves. 3. Remove snap rings (A) from both sides of the piston. Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye protection. 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to about 158°F (70°C), then remove the piston pin. Inspection NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting rod when they are at room temperature. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1985 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the piston. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1986 4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance. Reassembly 1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A). 2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new engine oil. 3. Heat the piston to about 158°F (70°C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1987 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (B) with the embossed marks (C) on the same side. Install the piston pin (D). 5. Install the remaining snap ring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Coolant Drain Plug, Cylinder Block > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Drain Plug: Service and Repair Drain Bolt Installation NOTE: When installing the drain bolt, always use new washer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 3. Remove the timing belt drive pulley. 4. Install the new timing belt drive pulley. 5. Install the CKP sensor. 6. Install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Main Bearing Cap Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing Cap Main Bearing Cap Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing cap side bolts to the specified torque in the sequence shown. Repeat the torque sequence again to ensure the bolts are properly torqued. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Main Bearing Cap > Page 1998 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Standards and Service Limits Crankshaft bearing Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.020 0.044 mm (0.0008 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 0.050 mm (0.0020 inch) Rod bearing clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.020 0.044 mm (0.0008 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 0.050 mm (0.0020 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Main Bearing Cap > Page 1999 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing Size Codes Main Bearing Selection Crankshaft Bore Code Location Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the four main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Main Bearing Cap > Page 2000 Main journal code locations (Numbers or Bars) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2001 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the main caps and bearing halves. 2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place one strip of Plastigage across each main journal. NOTE: If the engine is still in the vehicle when you bolt the main cap down to check the clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten the Plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank with a jack under the counterweights, and check only one bearing at a time. 4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bearing cap bolts to 74 Nm (7.5 kgf-m, 54 ft. lbs.), and the bearing cap side bolts to 49 Nm (5.0 kgf-m, 36 ft. lbs.) in the proper sequence. NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the widest part of the Plastigage. 6. If the Plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the Plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check again, if the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. Main Bearing Selection Crankshaft Bore Code Location Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2002 Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the four main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Main journal code locations (Numbers or Bars) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Main journal diameter ................................................................................................................................... 71.976 - 72.000 mm (2.8337 - 2.8346 inch) Rod journal diameter ..................................................................................................................................... 52.976 53.000 mm (2.0857 - 2.0866 inch) Rod/main journal taper Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) maximum Service Limit .......................................................................................... ............................................................................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) Rod/main journal out-of-round Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) maximum Service Limit .......................................................................................... ............................................................................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) End play Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 0.10 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Runout Standard or New ..................................................................................................................................................... 0.020 mm (0.008 inch) maximum Service Limit .................................................................................. ......................................................................................... 0.03 mm (0.0012 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pump. 2. Remove the baffle plate. 3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and crankshaft (C). 4. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. 6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection > Page 2008 Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Inspection Crankshaft Inspection Out-of-Round and Taper 1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block. 2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush. 3. Check the keyway and threads. 4. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod and main journal in two places. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. 5. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main journal. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Taper Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) Straightness 6. Place the engine block on the surface plate. 7. Clean and install the bearings an the No. 1 and No. 4 journal of the engine block. 8. Lower the crankshaft into the block. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection > Page 2009 9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Installation Crankshaft and Piston Installation Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200 1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with Plastigage. 2. Check the main bearing clearance with Plastigage. 3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and connecting rods. 4. Apply new engine oil to inside of the main bearings and rod bearings. 5. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block. 6. Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 3 journal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2012 7. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with the arrow (C) facing the. timing belt end of the engine. 8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges, then loosely install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing cap side bolts (E). 9. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for the cylinder you are installing the piston in. 10. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore. 11. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembly, and check that the bearing is securely in place. 12. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the engine. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2013 13. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. 14. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place. 15. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B. 16. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A and point B. Point A - Point B = Difference in Diameter Difference in Diameter Specification: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 0.004 inch) 17. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance, replace the connecting rod bolt. 18. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, then install the cap. 19. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges. Torque the bolts (B) to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2014 20. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as shown, 21. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head lines up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn the bolt 90°). NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 15 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. 22. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing cap side bolts to the specified torque in the sequence as shown. Repeat the torque sequence again to measure the bolts are properly torqued. 23. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seat. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2015 24. Drive the new crankshaft oil seal until the driver attachment bottoms on the engine block end cover. 25. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the engine block end cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 26. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating surfaces, 27. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the engine block end cover. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 28. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B), and the engine block end cover (C) on the engine block. 29. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check the seal for distortion. 30. Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump. 31. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 32. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2016 33. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the oil pump. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 34. Grease the lip of the oil seal, and apply oil to the new O-ring (A). 35. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C). 36. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check the seal for distortion. 37. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen (E) with new O-ring (F). 38. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve)/oil filter assembly (A), with a new rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) filter (B). 39. Install the oil pan. 40. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 41. Install the cylinder heads. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2017 42. M/T model: Install the flywheel, clutch disc, and pressure plate. 43. A/T model: Install the drive plate. 44. Install the transmission. 45. Install the engine assembly. NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, after assembly it is necessary to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for about 15 minutes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2018 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft and Piston Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel. 4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate. 5. Remove the cylinder heads. 6. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 7. Remove the timing belt drive pulley from the crankshaft. 8. Remove the oil pan. 9. Remove the engine block end cover. 10. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve)/oil filter assembly. 11. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B), and oil pump (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2019 12. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of any cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 13. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 14. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. 15. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the crank pin at bottom dead center (BDC) for each cylinder. Remove the piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to damage the crank pin or cylinder with the connecting rod. 16. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly, reinstall the cap on the rod. 17. To avoid confusion during reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2020 18. Unscrew the bearing cap bolts and bearing cap side bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 19. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C). 20. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine block, being careful not to damage the journals. 21. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine block in the proper order. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt. Do not use an impact wrench. 1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B), then tighten the bolt to 64 Nm (6.5 kgf-m, 47 ft. lbs.) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). - 2 Mark the bolt head and crankshaft pulley as shown, then tighten the bolt an additional 60° (The mark on the bolt head line up with the mark on the crankshaft pulley). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2024 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A ^ Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A, or a commercially available 19 mm socket Removal 1. Remove the right front tire/wheel. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 5. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley. Installation 1. Remove any oil or clean the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B), bolt (C), and washer (D). Lubricate with new engine oil as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2025 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt. Do not use an impact wrench. 1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B), then tighten the bolt to 64 Nm (6.5 kgf-m, 47 ft. lbs.) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). - 2 Mark the bolt head and crankshaft pulley as shown, then tighten the bolt an additional 60° (The mark on the bolt head line up with the mark on the crankshaft pulley). 3. Install the drive belt. 4. Install the splash shield. 5. Install the right front tire/wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Skirt O.D. at 16.0 mm (0.63 inch) from bottom of skirt Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................... 85.975 85.985 mm (3.3848 - 3.3852 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................. ...................................................................................... 85.965 mm (3.3844 inch) Clearance in cylinder Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.015 0.040 mm (0.0006 - 0.0016 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Ring groove width Top Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................... 1.240 - 1.250 mm (0.0488 - 0.492 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................... ........................................................................ 1.27 mm (0.050 inch) Second Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 1.220 - 1.230 mm (0.0480 - 0.0484 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) Oil Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 2.805 - 2.825 mm (0.1104 - 0.1112 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 2.85 mm (0.112 inch) Pin-to-piston clearance Standard or New ....................................................................................................................... -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm (-0.00020 to +0.00004 inch) Service Limit .................................................... ....................................................................................................................... 0.004 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2029 Piston: Testing and Inspection Block and Piston Inspection 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. 3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm (0.63 inch) from the bottom of the skirt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2030 4. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at three levels in each cylinder as shown. If measurements in any cylinder are beyond the oversize bore service limit, replace the block. If the block has to be rebored, refer to step 7 after reboring. 5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2031 6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage. Measure along the edges and across the center as shown. 7. Calculate the difference between cylinder bore diameter and piston diameter. If the clearance is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston kind engine block for excessive wear. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation Piston: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Installation Crankshaft and Piston Installation Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200 1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with Plastigage. 2. Check the main bearing clearance with Plastigage. 3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and connecting rods. 4. Apply new engine oil to inside of the main bearings and rod bearings. 5. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block. 6. Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 3 journal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2034 7. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with the arrow (C) facing the. timing belt end of the engine. 8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges, then loosely install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing cap side bolts (E). 9. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for the cylinder you are installing the piston in. 10. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore. 11. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembly, and check that the bearing is securely in place. 12. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the engine. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2035 13. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. 14. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place. 15. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B. 16. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A and point B. Point A - Point B = Difference in Diameter Difference in Diameter Specification: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 0.004 inch) 17. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance, replace the connecting rod bolt. 18. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, then install the cap. 19. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges. Torque the bolts (B) to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14 ft. lbs.). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2036 20. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as shown, 21. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head lines up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn the bolt 90°). NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 15 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. 22. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing cap side bolts to the specified torque in the sequence as shown. Repeat the torque sequence again to measure the bolts are properly torqued. 23. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seat. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2037 24. Drive the new crankshaft oil seal until the driver attachment bottoms on the engine block end cover. 25. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the engine block end cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 26. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating surfaces, 27. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the engine block end cover. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 28. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B), and the engine block end cover (C) on the engine block. 29. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check the seal for distortion. 30. Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump. 31. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 32. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2038 33. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating surface of the oil pump. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 34. Grease the lip of the oil seal, and apply oil to the new O-ring (A). 35. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C). 36. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check the seal for distortion. 37. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen (E) with new O-ring (F). 38. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve)/oil filter assembly (A), with a new rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) filter (B). 39. Install the oil pan. 40. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 41. Install the cylinder heads. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2039 42. M/T model: Install the flywheel, clutch disc, and pressure plate. 43. A/T model: Install the drive plate. 44. Install the transmission. 45. Install the engine assembly. NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, after assembly it is necessary to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for about 15 minutes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2040 Piston: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft and Piston Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel. 4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate. 5. Remove the cylinder heads. 6. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 7. Remove the timing belt drive pulley from the crankshaft. 8. Remove the oil pan. 9. Remove the engine block end cover. 10. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve)/oil filter assembly. 11. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B), and oil pump (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2041 12. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of any cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 13. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 14. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. 15. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the crank pin at bottom dead center (BDC) for each cylinder. Remove the piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to damage the crank pin or cylinder with the connecting rod. 16. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly, reinstall the cap on the rod. 17. To avoid confusion during reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2042 18. Unscrew the bearing cap bolts and bearing cap side bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 19. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C). 20. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine block, being careful not to damage the journals. 21. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine block in the proper order. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2043 Piston: Service and Repair Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B). NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves. 3. Remove snap rings (A) from both sides of the piston. Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye protection. 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to about 158°F (70°C), then remove the piston pin. Inspection NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting rod when they are at room temperature. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2044 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the piston. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2045 4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance. Reassembly 1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A). 2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new engine oil. 3. Heat the piston to about 158°F (70°C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Installation > Page 2046 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (B) with the embossed marks (C) on the same side. Install the piston pin (D). 5. Install the remaining snap ring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring Piston Ring groove width Top Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................... 1.240 - 1.250 mm (0.0488 - 0.492 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................... ........................................................................ 1.27 mm (0.050 inch) Second Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 1.220 - 1.230 mm (0.0480 - 0.0484 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.055 - 0.080 mm (0.0022 - 0.0031 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) Second Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.030 - 0.055 mm (0.0012 - 0.0022 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Ring end gap Top Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.20 0.35 mm (0.008 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.40 - 0.55 mm (0.0016 - 0.022 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................... ........................................................................ 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) Oil Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.20 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2050 Piston Ring: Service and Repair Piston Ring Replacement 1. Remove the piston from the engine block. 2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B). 3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner with a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the blade, if necessary. The top ring and second ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 inch) wide, and the oil ring groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 inch) wide. Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper with the cleaning tool. NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15 - 20 mm (0.6 - 0.8 inch) from the bottom. 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler gauge: ^ If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine. ^ If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits. If the bore is over the service limit, the engine block must be rebored. Piston Ring End-Gap Top Ring: Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.008 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Ring: Standard (New): 0.40 - 0.55 mm (0.016 - 0.022 inch) Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) Oil Ring: Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit: 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2051 6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1A mark and the second ring (B) has a 2B mark. The manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward. 7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearance. 8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2052 9. Position the ring end gaps as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.20 - 0.24 mm (0.008 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.28 - 0.32 mm (0.011 - 0.013 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2057 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head covers. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2058 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between, the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder, and slide it back and forth, you should feel a slight amount of drag. 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 2 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2059 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 5 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 5 cylinder. 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 3 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 14. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 6 cylinder. 17. Install the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2063 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2064 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection 1. Remove the rocker arm assembly, then disassemble the rocker arm assembly. 2. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 3. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. 4. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 2069 5. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all over-tolerance rocker arms. If any intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary). VTEC Rocker Arms 6. Inspect the rocker arm synchronizing pistons (A). Slide them into the rocker arms. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm set. NOTE: ^ Apply new engine oil to the pistons when reassembling. ^ When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B), carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. 7. Install the rocker arm assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 2070 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection VTEC Rocker Arm Test VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required ^ VTEC air adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A ^ VTEC air stopper 070AJ-0030100 ^ Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn OFF the ignition switch. 2. Remove the cylinder head covers. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). 4. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and secondary rocker arm (C). ^ If the intake mid rocker arm does not move, remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the mid, primary, and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. ^ If the mid rocker arm moves freely repeat the above procedure for the remaining intake mid rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid rocker arms pass the test, go to step 5. 5. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0 kgf/cm2, 100 psi). 6. Inspect the valve clearance. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection > Page 2071 7. Remove the No. 1 and No. 6, intake rocker shaft mounting bolts, then install and connect the special tools as shown. 8. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 440 - 540 kPa (4.5 - 5.5 kgf/cm2, 64 - 78 psi) NOTE: If the synchronizing pistons do not move after applying air pressure, move the primary or secondary rocker arm up and down manually. 9. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A) and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm (C) does not move when pushed manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set. 10. Remove the special tools. 11. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Rocker Arm Assembly Removal 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Loosen the adjusting, screws (A). 3. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly. - 1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. - 2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 2074 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations. ^ Inspect the rocker shafts and, rocker arms. ^ Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply new engine oil to any contact points. ^ When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 2075 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation 1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil seal. 2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cylinder head. - 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. - 2 Install the oil seat about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02 - 0.06 inch) below the surface of the cylinder head. 3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a new O-ring (D). 4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow dowel pins (F). 6. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 7. Loosen the valve adjusting screws. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rocker Arm Assembly Removal > Page 2076 9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. 10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). 11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal Valve Cover: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Removal 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the six ignition coils. 3. Remove the three bolts (A) securing the harness holder, and remove the dipstick (B). 4. Remove the bolt (A) securing the power steering hose clamp. 5. Remove the two bolts (B) securing the harness holder. 6. Remove the breather hose (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2081 7. Remove the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2082 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Cover Installation Cylinder Head Cover Installation 1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If the seal is damaged, replace it. 2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the groove of the cylinder head cover. 3. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces with a shop towel. 4. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head cover gasket is seated securely, then install new spark plug seals (C) on the spark plug tubes, and install the cylinder head covers. 5. Install new cover washers (D). 6. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts in sequence, 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cylinder Head Cover Removal > Page 2083 7. Install the breather hose (A). 8. Tighten the two bolts (B) securing the harness holder. 9. Tighten the bolt (C) securing the power steering hose bracket. 10. Tighten the three bolts (A) securing the harness holder, and install the dipstick (B). 11. Install the six ignition coils. 12. Install the intake manifold. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the valves. 2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm (0.39 inch), then measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). ^ If the measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck it using a new valve. ^ If the measurement is now within the service limit, reassemble using a new valve. ^ If the measurement with a new valve still exceeds the service limit, go to step 3. 3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.020 - 0.045 mm (0.0008 - 0.0018 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.055 - 0.080 mm (0.0022 - 0.0031 inch) Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.004 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2087 Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve Guide Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 ^ Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance. 2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and a conventional hammer. 3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour. 4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may loosen the valve seats. 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1 inch) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or a face shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2088 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head. 7. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 inch) bit, then try again. NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; You could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks. 8. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them. 9. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside of the new Valve guide. Install the guide from the camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to drive the guide to the specified installed height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with cutting oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2089 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore. 12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while removing it from the bore. 13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue. 14. Check the clearance with a valve. Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Reconditioning 1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance. If the valve guides are worn, replace them before cutting the valve seats. 2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter. 3. Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. 4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30° cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5° cutter (intake seat) or the 60° cutter (exhaust seat). Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. 5. Make one more very fight pass with the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters. Valve Seat Width Standard (New): 1.25 - 1.55 mm (0.049 - 0.061 inch) Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.079 inch) 6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several times. 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat. ^ If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 67.5° cutter (intake seat) or the 60° cutter (exhaust seat) to move it down, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. ^ If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it up, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45° cutter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2093 8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and measure the valve stem installed height (A). 9. If the valve stem installed height is over the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Valve: Testing and Inspection Valve Inspection 1. Remove the valves. 2. Measure the valve in these areas. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Valve: Service and Repair Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal Special Tools Required Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Remove the cylinder head. 2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve cotters. 3. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve cotters. 4. Remove the valve spring compressor, then remove the valve retainer, valve spring, and valve. 5. Install the valve guide seal remover (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2099 6. Remove the valve seal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2100 Valve: Service and Repair Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation Special Tools Required ^ Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 ^ Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A 1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides. 2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. 3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide seal installer (B). NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring (D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring (F). They are not interchangeable. 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve cotters. 7. Remove the valve spring compressor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal > Page 2101 8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions 08-082 November 1, 2008 Applies To: 2003-07 Accord V6 - ALL 2005-06 Odyssey LX, EX - ALL 2005-06 Pilot 4WD - ALL 2006-07 Ridgeline - ALL Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement Instructions BACKGROUND Replacement drive belt auto-tensioners have been updated. Installing this updated auto-tensioner requires the lower timing cover to be trimmed slightly for clearance. This service bulletin duplicates the instructions packaged with the drive belt auto-tensioner. CORRECTIVE ACTION Trim the rib of the lower timing belt cover before installing the updated drive belt auto-tensioner. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the drive belt and auto-tensioner: ^ Refer to of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Auto Tensioner Replacement from the list. 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the right (passenger's) front wheel. 3. Remove the under cover from the right side to access the engine. 4. Looking in from the right front wheelwell opening, inspect the lower timing belt cover's rib. ^ If the rib is untrimmed (as in the 1st illustration above), go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions > Page 2107 ^ If the rib is already trimed (as in the 2nd illustration above), go to step 6. 5. As shown below, use a die grinder or a utility knife to trim off a 3-mm section of the lower timing belt cover. 6. Reinstall the right side under-cover. 7. Reinstall the right-front wheel, and lower the vehicle. 8. Install the new drive belt auto-tensioner. 9. Reinstall the drive belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions > Page 2108 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2109 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2110 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Inspection 1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it. 2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the drive belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2111 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension from the drive belt (B), then remove the drive belt. 2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2112 Drive Belt: Tools and Equipment Honda Serpintine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 -Lightweight and slim design -Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2113 -Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions Drive Belt Tensioner: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions 08-082 November 1, 2008 Applies To: 2003-07 Accord V6 - ALL 2005-06 Odyssey LX, EX - ALL 2005-06 Pilot 4WD - ALL 2006-07 Ridgeline - ALL Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement Instructions BACKGROUND Replacement drive belt auto-tensioners have been updated. Installing this updated auto-tensioner requires the lower timing cover to be trimmed slightly for clearance. This service bulletin duplicates the instructions packaged with the drive belt auto-tensioner. CORRECTIVE ACTION Trim the rib of the lower timing belt cover before installing the updated drive belt auto-tensioner. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the drive belt and auto-tensioner: ^ Refer to of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords DRIVE BELT, and select Drive Belt Auto Tensioner Replacement from the list. 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the right (passenger's) front wheel. 3. Remove the under cover from the right side to access the engine. 4. Looking in from the right front wheelwell opening, inspect the lower timing belt cover's rib. ^ If the rib is untrimmed (as in the 1st illustration above), go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions > Page 2118 ^ If the rib is already trimed (as in the 2nd illustration above), go to step 6. 5. As shown below, use a die grinder or a utility knife to trim off a 3-mm section of the lower timing belt cover. 6. Reinstall the right side under-cover. 7. Reinstall the right-front wheel, and lower the vehicle. 8. Install the new drive belt auto-tensioner. 9. Reinstall the drive belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Instructions > Page 2119 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2120 Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection 1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position of the pointer again. If the position changes, replace the auto-tensioner. 2. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner pulley. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit with the wrench in the direction shown. Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does not move smoothly or there is abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner. 5. Remove the auto-tensioner. 6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using a 10 mm bolt (B), 8 mm bolt (C) and a vise (D) as shown. Do not clamp the auto-tensioner itself. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2121 7. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt. measure the torque when the tensioner is turned counterclockwise. If the torque is less than the specified value, replace the auto-tensioner. 50.5 Nm (5.15 kgf.m, 37.2 lbf.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Replacement 1. Remove the drive belt. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the auto-tensioner. 4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement > Page 2124 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Tensioner Pulley Replacement Tensioner Pulley Replacement 1. Remove the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and remove the tensioner pulley (B). 3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Engine Mount Control Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Engine Mount Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Engine Mount Control Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2129 45. Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure Engine Oil Temperature ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle .................................................................................................................................................. ................... 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm ......................................................................................................................................................... 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2134 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. 1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, then install an oil pressure gauge (A). 2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min. 4. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect these items: ^ Check the oil screen for clogging. ^ Inspect the oil pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Engine overhaul ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 5.0L (5.3 Qt) Oil change, including filter ................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 4.3L (4.5 Qt) Oil change, without filter ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 4.0L (4.2 Qt) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2141 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. Engine Oil API Classification .................................................................................................................................... Make sure the label says "For Gasoline Engines". SAE Viscosity .............................................................................. ............................................................................................................................... 5W-20 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2142 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil Replacement 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B). 4. Refill with the recommended oil. Capacity At oil change: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt) At oil change, including filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt) After engine overhaul: 5.0 L (5.3 US qt) 5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 6. 2006 model: Reset the engine oil life indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil Filter Replacement Special Tools Required Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 1. Remove the oil filter with the special tool. 2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine. 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 4. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2146 6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or V to VVVV) are printed around the outside of the filter, you can use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if mark V is at the bottom when the seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark VVVV comes around to the bottom. 7. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 8. 2006 model: Reset the engine oil life indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement 1. Remove the filter. 2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe. 3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter feed pipe, and hold one nut with a wrench, then tighten the other nut. 4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 49 Nm (5.0 kgf-m, 36 ft. lbs.), then remove the nuts from the oil filter feed pipe. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.). NOTE: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Removal Oil Pan Removal 1. If the engine is out of the vehicle, go to step 5. 2. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height. 3. Drain the engine oil. 4. Remove exhaust pipe A. 5. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the two bolts (B) securing the transmission. 6. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan. 7. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan from the block in the places shown. 8. Remove the oil pan. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Removal > Page 2155 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Installation Oil Pan Installation 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces. 3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or O8718-0009, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the engine block. NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket. 4. Install the oil pan on the engine block. 5. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.). NOTE: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. 6. Tighten the two bolts (A) securing the transmission, then install the torque converter cover (B). 7. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following steps. 8. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets and new self-locking nuts. 9. Install the splash shield. 10. Refill the engine with oil. 11. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2159 13. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2160 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2161 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine Oil Pressure Engine Oil Temperature ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle .................................................................................................................................................. ................... 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm ......................................................................................................................................................... 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2166 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. 1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, then install an oil pressure gauge (A). 2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min. 4. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect these items: ^ Check the oil screen for clogging. ^ Inspect the oil pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Intake Manifold Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2170 Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Lower Manifold/Injector Base Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2171 Intake Manifold Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2172 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Intake Manifold Removal 1. Remove the ignition coil cover. 2. Remove the breather pipe, then remove the air intake duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2173 3. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (B), evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (C), and vacuum hose (D). 4. Remove the water bypass hoses (A), and plug them. 5. Remove these engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the intake manifold. ^ Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector ^ Throttle actuator connector ^ Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector ^ Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector ^ Engine mount control solenoid valve connector ^ Intake manifold tuning (IMT) (Intake manifold runner control (IMRC) actuator connector (M/T) 6. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps, then remove the upper cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2174 7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps, then remove the intake manifold and spacer. 8. Remove the intake manifold. Installation 1. Put a new gasket and the spacer on the injector base. 2. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use a new intake manifold gasket. 3. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use a new gasket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2175 4. Install the water bypass hoses (A). 5. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to the intake manifold. ^ Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector ^ Throttle actuator connector ^ Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector ^ Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector ^ Engine mount control solenoid valve connector ^ Intake manifold tuning (IMT) (Intake manifold runner control (IMRC)) actuator connector (M/T) 6. Install the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (B), evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (C), and vacuum hose (D). 7. Install the air intake duct, then install the breather pipe. 8. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 9. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and connectors are installed correctly. 10. Install the ignition coil cover. 11. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Oil Seal: Service and Repair Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Special Tools Required ^ Camshaft oil seal driver 07PAF-0030100 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the camshaft pulley and back cover. 3. Remove the camshaft oil seal. 4. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing. 5. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the lip of the camshaft oil seal. 6. Using the special tool (A), washer (B), and a 12 x 75 x 1.25 mm bolt (C), press in the camshaft oil seal (D) about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02 - 0.06 inch) below the surface of the cylinder head. 7. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt. Install the back cover, then install the camshaft pulley. 8. Install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Driver attachment 106 070AD-RCAA200 1. Remove the transmission. 2. M/T model: Removal the pressure plate, clutch disc, and flywheel. 3. A/T model: Removal the drive plate. 4. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 5. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 6. Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver attachment bottom against the engine block end cover. Align the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the crankshaft. 7. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 8. M/T model: Install the flywheel, clutch disc, and pressure plate. 9. A/T model: Install the drive plate. 10. Install the transmission. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car Special Tools Required Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCA0100 1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor, timing belt, and timing belt drive pulley. 2. Remove the pulley and crankshaft oil seal. 3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 4. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 5. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 6. Install the timing belt drive pulley, CKP sensor, and timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2190 13. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2191 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2192 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2197 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation 1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil seal. 2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cylinder head. - 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. - 2 Install the oil seat about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02 - 0.06 inch) below the surface of the cylinder head. 3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a new O-ring (D). 4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow dowel pins (F). 6. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly. 7. Loosen the valve adjusting screws. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2198 9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. 10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). 11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 3. Remove the timing belt drive pulley. 4. Install the new timing belt drive pulley. 5. Install the CKP sensor. 6. Install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Interval Replace Timing belt and inspect water pump every 105,000 miles (168,000 kilometers) or every seven years. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2205 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Timing Belt Inspection 1. Remove the ignition coil cover. 2. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 3. Remove the front upper cover. 4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. Replace the belt if it is cracked or soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt Removal Timing Belt Removal 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 5. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). 6. Check that the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC) mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned. Note: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft pulley mark. 7. Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2208 8. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side engine mount bracket (B). 9. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper cover (B). 10. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 11. Remove the lower cover (A). 12. Remove the timing belt guide plate (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2209 13. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown. 14. Screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position. Tighten it by hand; do not use a wrench. 15. Remove the engine mount bracket. 16. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (B), then remove the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2210 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt Installation Timing Belt Installation NOTE: The following procedure is for installation of a used belt. If you are installing a new belt, refer to the timing belt replacement procedure. 1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide plate, and the upper and lower covers. 2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center (TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the back covers. 4. Apply liquid thread lock (P/N 08713-0001) to the idler pulley bolt, then loosely install the idler pulley. 5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing belt cannot be installed, perform the timing belt replacement procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2211 6. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care not to damage the timing belt when installing it. 7. Tighten the idler pulley bolt. 8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2212 9. Install the engine mount bracket. 10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. 11. Install the lower cover. 12. Install the crankshaft pulley. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2213 13. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper cover (B). 14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the pulleys. 15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2214 16. Check the camshaft pulley marks. - If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step 17. - If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 through 16. 17. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 18. Install the ground cable (B). 19. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner. 20. Install the drive belt. 21. Install the splash shield. 22. Install the right front tire/wheel. 23. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2215 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt Replacement Timing Belt Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide plate, and the upper and lower covers. 3. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the back covers. 5. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2216 6. Remove the auto-tensioner. 7. Align the holes on the rod and housing of the auto-tensioner. 8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the auto-tensioner. Insert a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) pin through the housing and the rod. NOTE: The compression pressure should not exceed 9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200 lbf). 9. Install the auto-tensioner. NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2217 10. Screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold the timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand; do not use a wrench. 11. Apply liquid thread lock (P/N 08713-0001) to the idler pulley bolt, then loosely install the idler pulley. 12. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence starting with the drive pulley. 13. Tighten the idler pulley bolt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2218 14. Remove the pin from the auto-tensioner. 15. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. 16. Install the engine mount bracket. 17. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2219 18. Install the lower cover. 19. Install the crankshaft pulley. 20. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper cover (B). 21. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the pulleys. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Belt Removal > Page 2220 23. Check the camshaft pulley marks. - If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC go to step 24. - If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 through 23. 24. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 25. Install the ground cable (B). 26. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner. 27. Install the drive belt. 28. Install the splash shield. 29. Install the right front tire/wheel. 30. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2224 Timing Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the auto-tensioner. 3. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the timing belt adjuster (B) and collar (C). 4. Install the timing belt adjuster. 5. Install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations TDC Marks Crankshaft Front and Rear Camshafts Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover Lower Upper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2236 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2237 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2238 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2239 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2240 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2241 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2242 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2243 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2244 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2245 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2247 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2248 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2249 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2250 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2251 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2252 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2253 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2254 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2255 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2256 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2257 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2258 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2259 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2260 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2261 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2262 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2263 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2264 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2265 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2266 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2267 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2268 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2269 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2270 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2271 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC - Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2275 89. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2276 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (B). 2. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2280 188. VTEC Solenoid Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Removal/Inspection 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve (B). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection > Page 2283 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 (A) and body ground. - If the resistance is as specified, go to step 3. - If the resistance is not as specified, replace the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for a restriction. If there is a restriction, replace the VTEC solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection > Page 2284 4. If the filter is not restricted, remove the VTEC solenoid valve (A) and push the valve (B) with your finger to check its movement. If the valve moves freely, it is normal, check the engine oil pressure. If the valve binds or sticks, replace the VTEC valve assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2285 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair VTEC Solenoid Valve Removal/Inspection 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve (B). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure regulator Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connected ............................................................................................ 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/cm2, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2290 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2291 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 - Fuel hose attachment 07ZAJ-S7C0100 - Fuel joint attachment 07ZAJ-S7CA200 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. - If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Engine idle Idle speed with no load M/T in neutral ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. .......................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Idle speed with high electric load (with HVAC on) M/T in neutral position ......................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. ........................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2295 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2296 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Pull the parking brake lever up. 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with the heater fan and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, go to the System Troubleshooting Index. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2305 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2306 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition coil Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2317 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2318 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2319 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs; replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Electrode Gap Standard (New): 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. Spark Plugs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2320 NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ2ODR-M11 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2324 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must select engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), otherwise ECM/PCM continues to stop the fuel injectors from operating. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, and then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS. 5. Remove the six ignition coils. 6. Remove the six spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 9. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 10. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gaskets ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 11. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.20 - 0.24 mm (0.008 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.28 - 0.32 mm (0.011 - 0.013 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2328 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head covers. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2329 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between, the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder, and slide it back and forth, you should feel a slight amount of drag. 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 2 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2330 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 5 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 5 cylinder. 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 3 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 14. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 6 cylinder. 17. Install the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2334 Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2335 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection Water Pump Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't turn smoothly, replace the water pump. NOTE: When you check the water pump pulley, you may see a small amount of "weeping" from the bleed holes (A). This is normal. 3. Install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Replacement Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement Water Pump Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the timing belt. 3. Remove the timing belt adjuster. 4. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the five bolts. 5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating surface with the engine block. 6. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the reverse order of removal. 7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 8. Install the timing belt adjuster. 9. Install the timing belt. 10. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed the air from the cooling system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Replacement > Page 2338 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Passage Replacement Water Passage Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then the positive cable. Remove the battery. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the vacuum hoses, breather pipe, and the intake air duct. 5. Remove the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose, heater hoses, and water bypass hoses from the water passage. Remove the water passage. 6. Install the water passage in the reverse order of removal. 7. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system. 9. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 10. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. 11. Set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY Change *1 Manual Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 6.6 liters (1.74 US gal) Automatic Transmission ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7 liters (1.77 US gal) Total Manual Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 8.2 liters (2.17 US gal) Automatic Transmission ......................................................................................................................................................... 8.4 liters (2.22 US gal) *1 = Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine. Reserve Tank capacity = 0.6 L (0.16 US gal) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2344 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT TYPE Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Premixing is not required. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2345 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Check 1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B). 2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between the MIN and MAX mark, then inspect the cooling system for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2346 Coolant: Service and Repair Coolant Replacement 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Remove the radiator cap. 3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant. 4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen the drain bolt. 5. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain bolt. Remove the rubber hose. 6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. 7. Remove, drain, and reinstall the reserve tank. 8. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2347 9. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: ^ Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. ^ Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add water. 10. Install the radiator cap loosely. 11. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 12. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed. 13. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again, and check for leaks. 14. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Drain Plug, Cylinder Block > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Drain Plug: Service and Repair Drain Bolt Installation NOTE: When installing the drain bolt, always use new washer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations 150. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 152. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2357 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2358 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2359 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2360 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2361 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2362 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2363 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2364 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2365 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2366 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2367 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2368 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2369 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2370 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2371 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2372 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2373 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2374 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2375 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2376 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2377 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2378 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2379 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2380 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2381 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2382 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2383 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2384 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2385 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2386 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2387 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2388 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2389 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2390 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2391 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2392 67. Radiator Fan Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2393 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection Fan Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B). 2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to the terminal No. 1 and ground to the terminal No. 2. 3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2397 149. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2398 152. DRL Relay (Canada) And Fan Control Relay (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2399 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2400 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2405 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2406 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air > Page 2412 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2413 Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). 2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix control linkage (C). 3. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (LO) with the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix control linkage (C) as shown step 2. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). NOTE: Insert the ring from the end of the cable securely to the linkage pin. - 4-door: Insert the ring over the nail, making sure it is correctly attached. - 2-door: Insert the ring all the way to the base of the pin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2414 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C) to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core. 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc. 8. Remove the dashboard. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2418 9. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, the power transistor, and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clips (B), the connector clips (C) and the wire harness (D). Remove the heater ducts (E), then remove the mounting nuts and the blower-heater unit (F). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2419 10. Remove the self-tapping screws, the evaporator temperature sensor (C) and the joint duct A, then remove the self-tapping screws and the joint duct B (4-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, then remove the passenger's heater outlet (D), and the heater core cover (E). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor (F) (2-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater pipe brackets (G), the grommets (H) and carefully pull out the heater core (I) so you don't bend the inlet outlet pipes. 11. Install the heater core, and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal. 12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Adjust the heater valve cable. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Refer to evaporator core replacement. - Reset the power window control unit. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2423 Radiator: Testing and Inspection Radiator Test 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the top of the filler neck. 2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure. 4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2424 Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator and Fan Replacement 1. Drain engine coolant. 2. Remove the front bulkhead cover. 3. A/T model: Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses from the radiator. 4. Remove the upper radiator hose and lower radiator hose from the radiator. 5. Remove the harness clamps and A/C compressor clutch connector. 6. Remove the upper bracket cushions, then pull up the radiator. 7. Disconnect the fan motor connectors, then remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator. 8. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely. 9. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap Test 1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester (B) (commercially available). 2. Apply a pressure of 93 - 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Check for a drop in pressure. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Fan Controls Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2432 149. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2433 152. DRL Relay (Canada) And Fan Control Relay (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2434 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2435 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2441 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2442 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Opening temperature Starts Opening ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................... 169 - 176°F (76 - 80°C) Fully Open ........................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... 194°F (90°C) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2446 Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2447 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Thermostat Test Replace the thermostat if it is operating at room temperature. To test a closed thermostat: 1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open. 3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fully open. Standard Thermostat Lift Height: Above 10.0 mm (0.39 inch) Starts Opening: 169 - 176°F (76 80°C) Fully Open: 194°F (90°C) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2448 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then the positive cable, then remove the battery. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the ground cable and thermostat cover, then remove the thermostat. 5. Install the thermostat with new rubber seal. 6. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 7. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system. 8. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 9. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. 10. Set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2452 Cooling System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2453 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection Water Pump Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't turn smoothly, replace the water pump. NOTE: When you check the water pump pulley, you may see a small amount of "weeping" from the bleed holes (A). This is normal. 3. Install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Replacement Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement Water Pump Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the timing belt. 3. Remove the timing belt adjuster. 4. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the five bolts. 5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating surface with the engine block. 6. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the reverse order of removal. 7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 8. Install the timing belt adjuster. 9. Install the timing belt. 10. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed the air from the cooling system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Replacement > Page 2456 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Passage Replacement Water Passage Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the customer's audio presets. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then the positive cable. Remove the battery. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the vacuum hoses, breather pipe, and the intake air duct. 5. Remove the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose, heater hoses, and water bypass hoses from the water passage. Remove the water passage. 6. Install the water passage in the reverse order of removal. 7. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system. 9. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. 10. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets. 11. Set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior Catalytic Converter: Customer Interest Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior 03-091 June 10, 2005 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord L4 (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) - ALL 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL Sulfur Smell in the Interior (Supersedes 03-091, dated April 2, 2004, to update the information marked with the black bar and asterisks.) SYMPTOM Sulfur smell in the interior (smells like rotten eggs). PROBABLE CAUSE *Sulfur concentration in fuel, catalytic converter performance, and unsealed body seams are allowing a sulfur smell to enter the interior.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the catalytic converter, seal the body seams, and install flap seals: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL Replace the catalytic converter only: 2003-04 Accord L4 - ALL (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) 2004 Accord V6 - ALL NOTE: Do not replace the catalytic converter or do any body sealing on vehicles with a mass air flow sensor. These vehicles use a different type of catalytic converter. Installing the wrong catalytic converter may result in the MIL coming on or the vehicle failing an emissions test. PARTS INFORMATION Catalytic Converter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2466 L4: P/N 18160-RAA-S00, H/C 7698939 V6: P/N 18160-RCA-S00, H/C 7701550 Pre-Chamber Gasket L4: P/N 18393-SH3-S00, H/C 3228806 V6: P/N 18393-SDB-A00, H/C 7245194 L4 and V6: P/N 18302-SP0-003, H/C 3647914 Self-Locking Nuts (6 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Ribbon Sealer: 3M P/N 08612 (One roll repairs 5 vehicles) Flap Seal: P/N 90856-56M-305, H/C 7623697 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 18160-RCA-A00 H/C 7133234 Defect Code: 07408 Symptom Code: 06006 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. L4 Models: Remove the secondary heated oxygen sensor (SH025) from the catalytic converter, and unclip the wire harness from the exhaust heat shield. V6 Models: Remove the three-way catalytic converter. 2. Discard the six self-locking nuts and the gaskets. 3. Remove the exhaust heat shield from the catalytic converter. 4. Install the heat shield and the new catalytic converter with new exhaust gaskets and self-locking nuts. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 5. L4 models: Reinstall the SH02S. 6. Remove the rear bumper face, the absorber, and the beam. (See pages 20-182 and 20-183 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2467 7. Degrease the outer rear panel seams. 8. Using rubber gloves, apply ribbon sealer across the bottom outer trunk floor up to the taillight panel seam. 9. Apply ribbon sealer around the seams on each side of the frame ends. ^ 2-door: Go to step 15. ^ 4-door: Go to step 10. 10. Remove both rear inner taillights. (See page 22-177 and 22-178 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2468 11. Apply ribbon sealer around each of the six inner taillight mounting holes on the left and right sides. Use a small amount of sealer around each hole, and be careful to not get the sealer in the bolt holes. 12. Apply ribbon sealer to each of the two upper drain holes above the inner taillights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2469 13. Remove the left and right side rear trunk panels, the trunk rear trim, and the spare tire lid. (See page 20-112 and 20-113 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) 14. Cover the 20 mm hole on the right side of the rear frame with ribbon sealer. 15. Use a clean shop towel to clean the lower trunk lid drain holes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2470 16. 4-door only Cut four 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. 2-door only Cut two 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. Trim 5 mm off the top (adhesive) side of the flap seal, and trim 7 mm off the (non-adhesive) side. 17. Apply the flap seal over the drain hole, making sure the non-adhesive part is covering the drain hole and the adhesive part is on the lid. 18. Replace any broken trunk side panel retaining clips with new ones. Make sure the trunk lid weatherstrip is not deformed and is fully set onto the body. 19. Reinstall all removed parts. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior 03-091 June 10, 2005 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord L4 (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) - ALL 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL Sulfur Smell in the Interior (Supersedes 03-091, dated April 2, 2004, to update the information marked with the black bar and asterisks.) SYMPTOM Sulfur smell in the interior (smells like rotten eggs). PROBABLE CAUSE *Sulfur concentration in fuel, catalytic converter performance, and unsealed body seams are allowing a sulfur smell to enter the interior.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the catalytic converter, seal the body seams, and install flap seals: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL Replace the catalytic converter only: 2003-04 Accord L4 - ALL (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) 2004 Accord V6 - ALL NOTE: Do not replace the catalytic converter or do any body sealing on vehicles with a mass air flow sensor. These vehicles use a different type of catalytic converter. Installing the wrong catalytic converter may result in the MIL coming on or the vehicle failing an emissions test. PARTS INFORMATION Catalytic Converter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2476 L4: P/N 18160-RAA-S00, H/C 7698939 V6: P/N 18160-RCA-S00, H/C 7701550 Pre-Chamber Gasket L4: P/N 18393-SH3-S00, H/C 3228806 V6: P/N 18393-SDB-A00, H/C 7245194 L4 and V6: P/N 18302-SP0-003, H/C 3647914 Self-Locking Nuts (6 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Ribbon Sealer: 3M P/N 08612 (One roll repairs 5 vehicles) Flap Seal: P/N 90856-56M-305, H/C 7623697 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 18160-RCA-A00 H/C 7133234 Defect Code: 07408 Symptom Code: 06006 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. L4 Models: Remove the secondary heated oxygen sensor (SH025) from the catalytic converter, and unclip the wire harness from the exhaust heat shield. V6 Models: Remove the three-way catalytic converter. 2. Discard the six self-locking nuts and the gaskets. 3. Remove the exhaust heat shield from the catalytic converter. 4. Install the heat shield and the new catalytic converter with new exhaust gaskets and self-locking nuts. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 5. L4 models: Reinstall the SH02S. 6. Remove the rear bumper face, the absorber, and the beam. (See pages 20-182 and 20-183 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2477 7. Degrease the outer rear panel seams. 8. Using rubber gloves, apply ribbon sealer across the bottom outer trunk floor up to the taillight panel seam. 9. Apply ribbon sealer around the seams on each side of the frame ends. ^ 2-door: Go to step 15. ^ 4-door: Go to step 10. 10. Remove both rear inner taillights. (See page 22-177 and 22-178 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2478 11. Apply ribbon sealer around each of the six inner taillight mounting holes on the left and right sides. Use a small amount of sealer around each hole, and be careful to not get the sealer in the bolt holes. 12. Apply ribbon sealer to each of the two upper drain holes above the inner taillights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2479 13. Remove the left and right side rear trunk panels, the trunk rear trim, and the spare tire lid. (See page 20-112 and 20-113 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) 14. Cover the 20 mm hole on the right side of the rear frame with ribbon sealer. 15. Use a clean shop towel to clean the lower trunk lid drain holes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 2480 16. 4-door only Cut four 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. 2-door only Cut two 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. Trim 5 mm off the top (adhesive) side of the flap seal, and trim 7 mm off the (non-adhesive) side. 17. Apply the flap seal over the drain hole, making sure the non-adhesive part is covering the drain hole and the adhesive part is on the lid. 18. Replace any broken trunk side panel retaining clips with new ones. Make sure the trunk lid weatherstrip is not deformed and is fully set onto the body. 19. Reinstall all removed parts. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN040713 > Jul > 04 > Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: S/M Fix: DTC P0420 Troubleshooting APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord, 2003-04 Element SERVICE TIP: The troubleshooting procedure for DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) in the 2003-04 Accord S/M and the 2003-04 Element S/M is wrong. It was written before we had the current software problem and the updated software to correct this DTC. Make this change in your copies of the appropriate S/M: 20030-4 Accord Page 11-245, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-063 for specific model application and procedural information. 2003-04 Element Page 11-219, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-031 for specific model application and procedural information. Don't replace the catalytic converter unless the software has already been updated and DTC P0420 sets again; doing so wouldn't provide a lasting repair and could result in a warranty debit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN030707 > Jul > 03 > Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Rotten Egg Smell? Could Be the Catalytic Converter APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining of a rotten egg smell, but you can't find anything wrong with their vehicles to account for it [there's no DTC(s) set, no driveability problems reported, nothing damaged or broken]? Then it could well be coming from the catalytic converter. That smell is a release of built up hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from the reaction of organic sulfur compounds in the gasoline with the catalyst in the converter. Almost all gasoline contains some amount of organic sulfur compounds, and that amount varies by region. The more sulfur there is in the gasoline, the more H2S is built up and released by the catalytic converter, so the stronger the smell. In California, where low-sulfur gasoline is actually required by state law, sulfur smell complaints are few and far between. The folks at the Environmental Protection Agency have issued a requirement for the phasing-in of low-sulfur gasoline nationwide between 2004 and 2006. This low-sulfur gasoline should go a long way toward making complaints of rotten egg smell a thing of the past. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN040713 > Jul > 04 > Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: S/M Fix: DTC P0420 Troubleshooting APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord, 2003-04 Element SERVICE TIP: The troubleshooting procedure for DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) in the 2003-04 Accord S/M and the 2003-04 Element S/M is wrong. It was written before we had the current software problem and the updated software to correct this DTC. Make this change in your copies of the appropriate S/M: 20030-4 Accord Page 11-245, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-063 for specific model application and procedural information. 2003-04 Element Page 11-219, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-031 for specific model application and procedural information. Don't replace the catalytic converter unless the software has already been updated and DTC P0420 sets again; doing so wouldn't provide a lasting repair and could result in a warranty debit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN030707 > Jul > 03 > Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Rotten Egg Smell? Could Be the Catalytic Converter APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining of a rotten egg smell, but you can't find anything wrong with their vehicles to account for it [there's no DTC(s) set, no driveability problems reported, nothing damaged or broken]? Then it could well be coming from the catalytic converter. That smell is a release of built up hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from the reaction of organic sulfur compounds in the gasoline with the catalyst in the converter. Almost all gasoline contains some amount of organic sulfur compounds, and that amount varies by region. The more sulfur there is in the gasoline, the more H2S is built up and released by the catalytic converter, so the stronger the smell. In California, where low-sulfur gasoline is actually required by state law, sulfur smell complaints are few and far between. The folks at the Environmental Protection Agency have issued a requirement for the phasing-in of low-sulfur gasoline nationwide between 2004 and 2006. This low-sulfur gasoline should go a long way toward making complaints of rotten egg smell a thing of the past. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2506 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalytic Converter System Warm Up/Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC) and Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The WU-TWC/TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2507 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation FRONT 1. Remove the condenser fan shroud. 2. Disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and front secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector. 3. Remove the front WU-TWC. 4. Install the front WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps. 5. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal. REAR 1. Remove the intermediate shaft. 2. Disconnect the rear air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and rear secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2508 3. Remove the rear WU-TWC bracket, then remove the rear WU-TWC. 4. Install the rear WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps. 5. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Upshift Shudder/Idle Vibration Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Upshift Shudder/Idle Vibration 1st to 2nd Upshift Shudder, Judder, Vibration at 2K rpm Got a '03-05 Accord V6 in your shop that shudders or judders when upshifting from 1st to 2nd gear or vibrates when the engine is idling or running at 2,000 rpm? A deformed or damaged exhaust pipe A mounting bracket could be the culprit. To fix the mounting bracket, do this: 1. Remove the two 8 mm mounting bolts. 2. Inspect the rubber mount for cracks. If the mount is cracked, replace it. 3. Slip the mount over the stud that's welded to exhaust pipe A, and check the clearance between the mount and the engine cradle. If there's a gap, bend the stud upward until the rubber mount fits with no preload in any direction. 4. Reinstall the mounting bolts. Torque the bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). 5. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the problem is fixed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2525 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2526 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2527 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2528 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Actuator Control Module - ETM Fix Electronic Throttle Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Actuator Control Module ETM Fix SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: ETM Fix: PGM-FI System, APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: The circuit schematic on page 24-4 of the 2003-04 Accord ETM doesn't show the power source for the throttle actuator control module. You'll find that info on the circuit schematic on page 24-14. Make a note in your copies of the ETM to refer to page 24-14 for power source info. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2533 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Locations 181. Under Right Side of Dash (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2534 Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2535 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2536 283. Throttle Actuator Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2537 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Actuator Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the right kick panel. 2. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the throttle actuator control module (C). 4. Install the control module in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2542 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2543 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2544 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2545 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2546 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2547 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2548 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2549 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2550 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2551 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2552 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2553 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2554 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2555 Engine Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2556 179. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2559 242. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2560 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2561 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2562 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2563 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2564 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2565 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2566 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2567 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2568 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2571 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2572 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2573 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2574 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2575 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2576 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2577 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2578 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2579 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter. 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 2580 touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector, and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - The ECM/PCM is replaced. - The ECM/PCM is reset. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - The throttle body is replaced. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.,) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2583 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear command to meet the purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM clear, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting in this service manual. The ECM/PCM clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. DTC CLEAR 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM RESET This command clears stored specific data from each vehicle such as DTCs, freeze data, and readiness codes. It does not clear CKP PATTERN data. 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Clear the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2584 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 2585 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion,the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You can not update an ECM/PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 4. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda Interface Module (HIM). 6. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. 7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 8. Do the CKP PATTERN Learn Procedure, if you did the troubleshooting for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0335, P0340, P0344, or P0385. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, install the original ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. 5. If you substitute bran-new ECM/PCM select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, with the original ECM/PCM installed. 6. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 7. Replace the ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2589 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2591 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2595 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2596 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2597 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2598 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2603 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2604 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2608 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2609 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2610 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.2 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground, then terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the No.1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 2617 5. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 2618 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 2619 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2626 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2630 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2631 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 2634 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2635 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2639 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2646 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2647 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2648 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2652 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2653 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2657 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2658 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2659 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2660 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2664 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2673 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2674 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2675 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2676 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2677 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2683 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2684 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2685 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2686 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2687 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 2693 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 2694 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 2700 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 2701 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2702 Electric Load Sensor: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2703 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2707 141. Under Left Rear Of Vehicle Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2708 113. FTP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2709 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2710 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the FTP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2714 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams 54. IAT Sensor 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2715 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2716 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the IAT sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2720 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2721 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2722 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2726 118. MAP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2727 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 2736 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 2742 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) (B). Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) (B) Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2745 Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2746 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 86. Right Side Of Floor 159. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2747 189. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2748 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 267. HO2S (BI, S2), Rear Secondary 268. HO2S (B2, S2), Front Secondary Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2749 277. A/F Sensor (B1, S1), Rear 278. A/F Sensor (B2, S1), Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F Sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F Sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor > Page 2752 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is on the WU-TWC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor (bank 2) 8P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the front A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor (bank 1) 8P connector (A), then remove the rear A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the rear A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 2755 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front secondary HO2S (bank 2) 4P connector (A), then remove the front secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the front secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear secondary HO2S (bank 1) 4P connector (A), then remove the rear secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the rear secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2759 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2760 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2761 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2762 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2763 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2764 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2768 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2769 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2773 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2774 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2775 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2776 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2777 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2778 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2779 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2780 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC - Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2784 89. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2785 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (B). 2. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2794 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2799 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2800 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 2803 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2804 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2808 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2812 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2813 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2818 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2819 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2820 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2824 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2825 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2826 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2827 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 2833 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2837 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2838 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2839 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure regulator Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connected ............................................................................................ 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/cm2, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2844 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2845 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 - Fuel hose attachment 07ZAJ-S7C0100 - Fuel joint attachment 07ZAJ-S7CA200 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. - If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Engine idle Idle speed with no load M/T in neutral ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. .......................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Idle speed with high electric load (with HVAC on) M/T in neutral position ......................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. ........................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2849 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2850 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Pull the parking brake lever up. 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with the heater fan and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, go to the System Troubleshooting Index. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2859 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2860 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition coil Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2871 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2872 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2873 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs; replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Electrode Gap Standard (New): 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. Spark Plugs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2874 NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ2ODR-M11 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Engine Assembly Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2878 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection NOTE: After this inspection, you must select engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) reset using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), otherwise ECM/PCM continues to stop the fuel injectors from operating. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, and then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS. 5. Remove the six ignition coils. 6. Remove the six spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 9. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum Variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 10. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gaskets ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore 11. Select ECM/PCM reset to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.20 - 0.24 mm (0.008 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.28 - 0.32 mm (0.011 - 0.013 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2882 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the cylinder head covers. 2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2883 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between, the adjusting screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder, and slide it back and forth, you should feel a slight amount of drag. 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 2 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2884 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 5 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 5 cylinder. 13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 3 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 14. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. 16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 6 cylinder. 17. Install the cylinder head covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2890 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection A/C Signal: Testing and Inspection A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the blower switch on. 3. Turn the A/C switch on. 4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is it ON? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Go to the A/C pressure switch circuit test. 5. Check the A/C system. Does the A/C system operate? YES - The air conditioning system circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? YES - Do the A/C system troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 9. 9. Momentarily connect under-hood fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal No.15 to body ground with a jumper wire several times. Is there clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A27) and the A/C clutch relay. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2897 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2898 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 2901 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2902 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2906 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2910 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams 54. IAT Sensor 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2911 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2912 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the IAT sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2919 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2920 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2921 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2925 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2926 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2930 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2931 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2932 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2933 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2937 47. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2938 198. DLC Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2939 Data Link Connector: Testing and Inspection DLC Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - If the ECM/PCM does not communicate with the HDS, do this troubleshooting procedure. - Check that MIL circuit is normal, then do this troubleshooting. 1. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No.16 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.16 and the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. 2. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.4 and No.16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.4 and body ground (G501). 3. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and No.16. Is there battery voltage? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2940 YES - Go to step 4. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.5 and body ground (G501). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and No.7. Is there 8.5 V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 9. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (A14). After repairing the wire, check for a DTC with the HDS and go to the indicated DTC's Troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 10. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 10. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7 and ECM/PCM terminal A14. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (A14). After repairing the wire, check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS and go to the indicated DTC's Troubleshooting. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and No.7. Is there 0 V? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair short to power in the wire between DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (A14). After repairing the wire, check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS, and go to the indicated DTC's Troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2954 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2955 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2956 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2957 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2958 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2964 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2965 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2966 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2967 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 2968 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 2974 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 2975 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 2981 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 2982 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2983 Electric Load Sensor: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2984 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2988 166. Left Side Of Engine 181. Under Right Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2989 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2990 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM. The throttle is electronically controlled by this system. The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the System Diagram to see a functional layout of the system. Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2991 Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Throttle Body The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the throttle plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2995 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2996 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2997 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Actuator Control Module - ETM Fix Electronic Throttle Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Actuator Control Module ETM Fix SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: ETM Fix: PGM-FI System, APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: The circuit schematic on page 24-4 of the 2003-04 Accord ETM doesn't show the power source for the throttle actuator control module. You'll find that info on the circuit schematic on page 24-14. Make a note in your copies of the ETM to refer to page 24-14 for power source info. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3003 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Locations 181. Under Right Side of Dash (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3004 Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3005 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3006 283. Throttle Actuator Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3007 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Actuator Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the right kick panel. 2. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the throttle actuator control module (C). 4. Install the control module in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3012 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3013 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3014 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3015 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3016 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3017 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3018 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3019 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3020 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3021 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3022 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3023 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3024 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3025 Engine Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3026 179. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3029 242. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3030 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3031 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3032 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3033 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3034 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3035 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3036 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3037 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3038 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3041 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3042 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3043 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3044 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3045 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3046 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3047 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3048 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3049 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter. 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3050 touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector, and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - The ECM/PCM is replaced. - The ECM/PCM is reset. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - The throttle body is replaced. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.,) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3053 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear command to meet the purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM clear, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting in this service manual. The ECM/PCM clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. DTC CLEAR 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM RESET This command clears stored specific data from each vehicle such as DTCs, freeze data, and readiness codes. It does not clear CKP PATTERN data. 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Clear the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3054 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3055 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion,the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You can not update an ECM/PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 4. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda Interface Module (HIM). 6. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. 7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 8. Do the CKP PATTERN Learn Procedure, if you did the troubleshooting for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0335, P0340, P0344, or P0385. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, install the original ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. 5. If you substitute bran-new ECM/PCM select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, with the original ECM/PCM installed. 6. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 7. Replace the ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3059 141. Under Left Rear Of Vehicle Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3060 113. FTP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3061 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3062 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the FTP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations Information Bus: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3066 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door And Seat (Driver's Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3067 Multiplex Integrated Control System (MICS) Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3068 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3069 Multiplex Integrated Control System (MICS) Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3070 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3071 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Locations > Page 3072 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3075 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3076 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3077 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3078 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3079 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3080 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3081 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3082 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3083 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3084 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3085 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3086 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3087 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3088 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3089 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3090 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3091 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3092 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3093 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3094 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3095 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3096 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3097 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3098 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3099 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3100 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3101 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3102 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3103 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3104 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3105 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3106 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3107 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3108 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3109 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3110 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3111 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Diagram 50-0 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3112 Diagram 50-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3113 Multiplex Control Immobilizer System (MICS) - Circuit Diagram Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3114 Multiplex Control Immobilizer System (MICS) - Circuit Diagram Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description Information Bus: Description and Operation System Description System Descriptions Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN) Fast controller Area Network (F-CAN) and Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) share information between multiple Electronic Control Units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed for convenience related items, and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed for "real time" functions such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the Gauge Control Module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. The ECUs on the B-CAN and F-CAN transmit and receive information in the form of structured messages that may be received by several different ECUs on the network at one time. These message are transmitted and received across a communication circuit that consists of a single wire that is shared by all the ECUs on the circuit. Since messages on the F-CAN network are typically of higher importance, a second wire is used for communication circuit integrity monitoring. A backup circuit is also added to the headlight and wiper circuits on the B-CAN network in the event of a network wire or ECU failure that would effect the operation of the system. Messages are transmitted by an ECU (that monitors an input) over the communication circuit. ECUs that use the message (information related to that input) are the receivers. For example, the Combination Switch Control Unit monitors the wiper switch. When the wiper switch is placed in the low speed position, the Combination Switch Control Unit transmits that message on the communication circuit. The Relay Control Module receives the message and turns on the wipers by providing a ground for the relay. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3117 "Connected" ECUs Several ECUs are connected to each of the two networks. The Gauge Control Module is part of both networks since it is the "Gateway" between them. Above is a list of ECUs and the network they are connected to Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking The B-CAN and F-CAN systems send messages to each other to check the integrity of the network communication circuit. They do this by sending a specific digital message Out after an event. For example, turning the ignition switch to ON. After the switch to ON, all the ECUs on the communication circuit expect to receive a message from other specific units within a specified amount of time. If the message is not received, the ECU will transmit a DTC reporting that the control units did not communicate. Example of communication circuit test Normal Circuit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3118 1. Ignition switch turned ON. 2. The door multiplex control unit transmits a door switch signal. 3. The multiplex integrated control unit MICU, relay control module and gauge control module receive the door lock switch signal. 4. Communication circuit test is passed. Since the door lock switch message was received by all the ECUs expecting to receive a signal, the communication circuit between those units is OK. There are multiple signal Sent and received by each ECU during this time to ensure that the communication circuit is intact. Failed circuit 5. Ignition switch is turned ON. 6. The door multiplex control unit transmits a door switch signal. 7. The multiplex integrated control unit (MICU), relay control module and gauge control module expect to receive the door lock switch signal, but since there is a break in the communication circuits, it is not received. 8. Each ECU that expects to receive the door lock switch signal from the door multiplex control unit will transmit DTCs for the signal that it did not receive. Since there is a break in the communication circuit, the door lock switch signal could not be received by the gauge control module, multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) or the relay control module. Each of these units will set "loss of communication" error codes for the signal(s) they did not receive. There may be multiple communication DTCs if the unit that has become disconnected from the network would normally transmit multiple messages during the communication line test. For example, the door multiplex control unit sends keyless panic signal and door lock switch signal during the communication circuit test. Diagnostic Trouble Codes There are three DTC types used by the CAN networks. Troubleshooting the CAN circuit related problems Using the HDS (Preferred method) 1. Go to B CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DTCs. 2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C or D Without the HDS (Should be used only if HDS is unavailable) 3. Check for communication circuit problems using B CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1. 4. Check for DTCs while in Mode 1. 5. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in the order below Refer to the DTC troubleshooting Index for DTC descriptions. 1st Internal error and voltage failure DTCs 2nd Loss of communication DTCs 3rd Signal error DTCs 6. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure. Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart When an ECU is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the circuit, the other units will set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating 7. Find the Transmitting Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3119 8. Perform the input test for the transmitting unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3120 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3121 B-CAN System Switch Device Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3122 HDS Inputs And Commands - Input Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3123 HDS Inputs And Commands - Input Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3124 HDS Inputs And Commands - Input Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3125 HDS Inputs And Commands - Input Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3126 HDS Inputs And Commands - Input Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3127 HDS Inputs And Commands - Input HDS Inputs And Commands - Input Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3128 HDS Inputs And Commands - Output HDS Inputs, Outputs and Commands Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3129 Information Bus: Description and Operation Circuit Description Multiplex Control System How the Circuit Works The Multiplex Control System sends digital signals between control units through shared wires to reduce the number wires through harness and reduce the weight of wire harnesses. The input signals from each switch are converted to digital signals within the receiving multiplex control unit. The digital signals are sent from one multiplex control unit to another as serial data over dedicated communication lines. When the appropriate control unit receives the digital signal, it converts the signal back to an operational command, such as operating a relay. The multiplex control system schematic shows it's power, grounds, and communication lines. The ignition key light and ceiling light are shown because they are used to blink DTC's in the when the system is in the self-diagnostic mode. There are two different networks within the multiplex system, they are: - Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) - Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN) The fast controller area network (F-CAN) and body controller area network (B-CAN) share information between multiple electronic control units and work together to form the multiplex system. B-CAN Network B-CAN information is transmitted across the communication lines at a slower speed for convenience related that do not require the process speed of a fuel control system. The following control units operate on the B-CAN network: - Gauge Control Module - Relay Control Module - Multiplex Control Unit - Door Multiplex Control Unit - Combination Switch Control Unit - Climate Control Unit (EX-L, V6: EX) - Optional Connector The following system are related to the B-CAN network: - Gauge assembly - Exterior lights - Turn signals - Entry light control - Interior lights - Safety indicators - Rear window defogger (climate control) - Horns (security and panic) - Chimes (key, seat belt and lights ON) - Power windows - Moonroof timer (EX, EX-L) - Wiper/washer - Security (EX, EX-L) - Keyless entry - Power door locks - Climate control (EX-L) - Key interlock - Dash light brightness F-CAN Network F-CAN information is transmitted across the communication lines at a faster speed for "real time" functions such as fuel, emissions, and traction control data. The following control units operate on the F-CAN network: - Gauge Control Module - ECM/PCM - Navigation Control Unit (EX-L: Navigation) - Traction Control System (TCS) (V6) To allow both systems to share information, the gauge assembly translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN and operates Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3130 on both networks. Since messages on the F-CAN network are typically of higher importance, a second wire is used for communication circuit integrity monitoring. For safety reasons, a backup circuit is also added to the headlight and wiper circuits of the B-CAN network in the event of a network wire, or ECU failure that would effect the system operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Information Bus: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Scan Tool How to display DTC on the gauge control module 1. While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the ODO display when the communication between the Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU) and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the RESET knob on the gauge control module. Without Scan Tool B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (Troubleshooting without the HDS) 1. Check the No.7 (10 A) fuse and No.21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Connect the MPCS Service connector (A) to the MCIC socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Wait 5 seconds, then watch the ceiling light. 6. If there is a DTC, the ceiling light and ignition switch light will blink, pause, then repeat the DTC as long as the ignition switch ON (II). Is there a repeating DTC? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3133 YES - Count the blinks, then go to step 7. NO - Go to step 8. 7. About 1 second after you go into self-diagnosis Mode 1, the ceiling light will indicate the DTC, and repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is more than one DTC, the system will indicate them in ascending order, beginning from the DTC with the lowest numerical value. Troubleshoot the DTCs as indicated below: - DTC 2, 3, 4 and 5 simultaneously: Check for an open in the BLU wire between multiplex integrated control unit D11 and relay module 17, BRN/RED wire between multiplex integrated control unit J4 and door multiplex control unit No.16, LT GRN wire between multiplex integrated control unit X27 and combination switch control unit No.4, BRN/YEL wire between multiplex integrated control unit N28 and gauge control module terminal No.25. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box (multiplex integrated control unit), under- hood fuse/relay box, power window master switch, wiper/washer switch and gauge one at a time, in that order, and recheck for the DTCs after each substitution. - DTC 1 only: Go to MICU input test.See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Input Test - DTC 2 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the relay module input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good relay module and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. - DTC 3 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the door multiplex control unit input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good door multiplex control unit and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. - DTC 4 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the combination switch control unit input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good wiper/washer switch and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. - DTC 5 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the gauge control module input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good gauge control module and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. 8. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge control module while still in Test Mode 1. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to step 11. 9. Record all DTCs and sort them by type using the DTC Troubleshooting Index. 10. Troubleshoot the DTCs in the following order: - Battery voltage DTCs - Internal error DTCs - Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the lowest number first; for example, if B1006 and B1059 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1006 first) - Signal error DTCs 11. Remove the MPCS service connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 5 - 10 seconds, then re-insert it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3134 NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test Mode 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3135 12. In the list of circuits that can be checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is OK, the ceiling light will blink once. If the circuit is faulty, there will be no indication. Does the ceiling light indicate proper switch operation? YES - Go to function and input test for the system related to the failure. NO - Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty switch. With Scan Tool How to clear the DTC 1. While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the RESET knob for more than 10 seconds. 2. The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the trip display. Without Scan Tool Manufacturer does not supply instructions for clearing trouble codes without a scan tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3136 Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 8P connector from the wiper/washer switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the combination switch control unit must be faulty, replace the wiper/washer switch. Door Multiplex Control Unit Input Test Door Multiplex Control Unit Input Test 1. Remove the driver's door switch panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3137 2. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. With the door multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the door multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the power window master switch. Gauge Control Module Input Test Gauge Control Module Input Test 1. Remove the gauge control module. 2. Disconnect the 30P connector from the gauge control module. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3138 4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control module. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Input Test Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Input Test 1. Remove the left side kick panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3139 2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, H, I, J, K, N, P and X. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3140 4. With the connectors still disconnected from the underhood fuse/relay box, make these input tests at the connector(s). - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - It all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - It any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - It all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex integrated control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fusel relay box assembly. Relay Control Module Input Test Relay Control Module Input Test Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3141 1. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box under cover. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the relay module must be faulty, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A NOTE: - Perform this diagnosis first if the symptom is related to the B-CAN system. - Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures. 1. Make sure the system is related to B-CAN. - Gauge control module - Exterior lights - Turn signals - Entry light control - Interior lights - Safety indicators - Rear window defogger - Horns (security and panic) - Chimes (key, seatbelt and lights ON) - Power windows - Moonroof timer (EX, EXL) - Wiper/washer - Security (EX, EXL) - Keyless entry Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3142 - Power door locks - Climate control (EX, EXL) - Key interlock - Dash light brightness Is the symptom related to the B-CAN system? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Go to the system troubleshooting for the system with the symptom. 2. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) 16P connector. 3. From BODY ELECTRICAL MENU, select connected units UNIT INFORMATION, and then select CONNECTED UNIT. - MICU - Door multiplex control unit - Gauge control module - Combination switch control unit - Relay control module - Climate control unit (EXL, EX-V6) NOTE: If the unit is communicating with the scan tool, DETECT will be displayed. - If the unit is not communicating, "NOT AVAILABLE" will be displayed. Are all control units communicating with the HDS? YES - Go to step 4. NO - If any of them are not communicating, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B. If all units are not communicating, go to DTC B1000 troubleshooting. 4. Select the system that has the problem from the BODY ELECTRICAL DTCs MENU, then select DTCs. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 5. NO - If the problem is related to one the following items, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C. - Exterior lights - Turn signals - Entry light control - Interior lights - Rear window defogger (cli mate control) - Horns (security and panic) - Power windows - Moonroof timer (EX, EXL) - Wiper/washer - Power door locks NOTE: If the problem is related to one of the following items, go to the troubleshooting for that individual system. - Gauge control module - Safety indicators - Chimes (key, seat belt and lights ON) - Security (EX, EXL) - Keyless entry - Climate control (EX, EXL) - Key interlock - Dash light brightness - Audio System - Navigation 5. Record all DTCs and sort them by DTC type using the DTC troubleshooting Index. 6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in the following order: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3143 - Battery voltage DTCs. - Internal error DTCs. - Loss of communicator DTCs. Begin troubleshooting with the lowest number first (Example: if DTC B1006 and B1058 are retrieved, begin by troubleshooting B1006). - Signal error DTCs. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B NOTE: - Perform this diagnosis if any of the control units are not communicating (Not Available displayed in the HDS.) as found by the B-CAN system Diagnosis Test Mode A. - Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures. 1. Using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). select the system that has the symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL MENU. 2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of communication DTCs (use the DTC Troubleshooting Index to find the DTC type). Are loss of communication DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the MICU. 3. Perform the input test for the unit not communicating with the HDS. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C NOTE: - Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the B-CAN system does not stop or does not turn off. - If the component does not turn ON, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D. - See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and output devices and the control units that monitor the input and controls the output devices. - Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures. 1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE MENU from the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Turn OFF the switch that controls the malfunctioning component. 3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE MENU, and check the input of the switch that controls the component. Does the tester indicate the switch is OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 6. 4. In the DATA LIST of, check the output signal of the malfunctioning component. Is the output signal OFF? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3144 YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the control unit that controls the device that will not turn OFF. 5. Check the relay if applicable, then check for a short in the wire between the relay and the component, relay and control unit or the component and control unit. Are the relay and the wire harness OK? YES - Replace the control unit that controls the component that will not turn OFF. NO - Replace the relay or repair the wire harness. 6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that monitors the switch. Is the switch and wire harness OK? YES - Replace the control unit that monitors the switch. NO - Replace the switch or repair the wire harness. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D NOTE: - Perform this diagnosis a component that is controlled by the B-CAN system does not run or does not come on. - If the component does not turn off or does not stop, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C. - See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and output devices and the control units that monitor the input and controls the output devices. - Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures. 1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse and recheck. 2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE MENU from the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS). Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. NO - Go to step 3. 3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning component. 4. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE MENU, and check output signal for the malfunctioning component. Is there an output signal? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Go to step 9. 5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning component. Are the relay and circuit OK? YES - Go to step 6. NO - Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit. 6. Perform the function test for the malfunctioning component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3145 Does the output device pass the function test? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the component. 7. With the malfunctioning output device connected, connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning output device and body ground on the wire that the control unit uses to control the output device circuit. 8. Select MISC. TEST from the TEST MODE MENU, and do the forced operation test of the malfunctioning component. Is there a change in voltage (12 V to 0 V or 0 V to 12 V)? YES - Replace the component. NO - Replace the control unit that controls the malfunctioning component. 9. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE MENU, and make sure the switch signal input for the malfunctioning system indicates a change when operated. Does the switch input indicated ON when the switch is ON? YES - Replace the control unit that controls the malfunctioning component. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then check for an open or a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that monitors it. Is the switch and the wire harness OK? YES - Replace the control unit that monitors the switch. NO - Replace the switch or repair the wire harness. Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (Without the HDS) B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (Troubleshooting without the HDS) 1. Check the No.7 (10 A) fuse and No.21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3146 4. Connect the MPCS Service connector (A) to the MCIC socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Wait 5 seconds, then watch the ceiling light. 6. If there is a DTC, the ceiling light and ignition switch light will blink, pause, then repeat the DTC as long as the ignition switch ON (II). Is there a repeating DTC? YES - Count the blinks, then go to step 7. NO - Go to step 8. 7. About 1 second after you go into self-diagnosis Mode 1, the ceiling light will indicate the DTC, and repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is more than one DTC, the system will indicate them in ascending order, beginning from the DTC with the lowest numerical value. Troubleshoot the DTCs as indicated below: - DTC 2, 3, 4 and 5 simultaneously: Check for an open in the BLU wire between multiplex integrated control unit D11 and relay module 17, BRN/RED wire between multiplex integrated control unit J4 and door multiplex control unit No.16, LT GRN wire between multiplex integrated control unit X27 and combination switch control unit No.4, BRN/YEL wire between multiplex integrated control unit N28 and gauge control module terminal No.25. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box (multiplex integrated control unit), under- hood fuse/relay box, power window master switch, wiper/washer switch and gauge one at a time, in that order, and recheck for the DTCs after each substitution. - DTC 1 only: Go to MICU input test. - DTC 2 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the relay module input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good relay module and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. - DTC 3 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the door multiplex control unit input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good door multiplex control unit and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. - DTC 4 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the combination switch control unit input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good wiper/washer switch and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. - DTC 5 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the gauge control module input test. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good gauge control module and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit. 8. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge control module while still in Test Mode 1. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to step 11. 9. Record all DTCs and sort them by type using the DTC Troubleshooting Index. 10. Troubleshoot the DTCs in the following order: - Battery voltage DTCs - Internal error DTCs - Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the lowest number first; for example, if B1006 and B1059 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1006 first) - Signal error DTCs 11. Remove the MPCS service connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 5 - 10 seconds, then re-insert it. NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test Mode 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3147 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes > Page 3148 12. In the list of circuits that can be checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is OK, the ceiling light will blink once. If the circuit is faulty, there will be no indication. Does the ceiling light indicate proper switch operation? YES - Go to function and input test for the system related to the failure. NO - Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3152 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3153 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3154 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3158 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3159 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3160 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashies five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3164 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic procedure. Does the MIL indicator flash? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge assembly. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the MIL. Does the MIL stay off? YES - Go to step 17. NO - Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait 20 seconds, and watch the MIL. Does the MIL stay on or flash more than 5 times? YES - Go to step 7. NO - The MIL circuit is OK. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Connect the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". If no problem is found in the DLC troubleshooting, go to step 21. 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? YES - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check the MIL in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does indicate ON? YES - Go to step 12. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge assembly. 12. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a short indicated? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3165 15. Disconnect ECM connector A (31P). 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A16 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A16)and the DLC. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 17. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start and idle smoothly? YES - Go to step 18. NO - Go to step 22. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Connect the HDS. 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Go to "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". If no problem is found in the DLC troubleshooting, go to step 21. 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC U0073 and/or U0155 indicated? YES - Go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM. replace the original ECM/PCM. 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 23. Inspect the No.23 + B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the No.20 IG (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is OK, go to step 24. NO - Repair short in the wire between No.23 + B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the No.23 +B IG MAIN ( 50 A) fuse. 24. Inspect the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3166 YES - Go to step 31. NO - Go to step 25. 25. Remove the blown No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 26. Remove the left kick panel, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 27. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.3 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (PCM) (15 A) and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 28. 28. Disconnect each of the components or connectors below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector E (31P) - Each injector 2P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 6P connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3167 Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 29. NO - Replace the component that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. 29. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector E (31P) - Injectors - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 30. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN) and each item. Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN). Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. 31. Inspect the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 44. NO - Go to step 32. 32. Remove the blown No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 33. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 34. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 35. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3168 Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 36. NO - Replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 36. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 37. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E5), or between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 38. 38. Remove the trunk floor trim panel. 39. Remove the access panel from the floor. 40. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 41. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3169 YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 42. 42. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A). 43. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it if necessary. Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. 44. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 45. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 46. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 47. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 48. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3170 NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E5). 48. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A5 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 53. NO - Go to step 49. 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 50. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 51. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 52. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3171 52. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.4 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A5. Is there continuity? YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (A5). 53. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 54. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 55. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals E4. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 62. NO - Go to step 56. 56. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 57. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 58. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3172 59. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 60. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 61. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector terminal E4. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-PI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (E4). 62. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals B15, E1, E2, and E3 individually. Is there more than 0.2 V? YES - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 0.2 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (B15, E1, E2, E3). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3173 NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3177 118. MAP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3178 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 3187 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 3193 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) (B). Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) (B) Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3196 Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3197 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 86. Right Side Of Floor 159. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3198 189. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3199 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 267. HO2S (BI, S2), Rear Secondary 268. HO2S (B2, S2), Front Secondary Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3200 277. A/F Sensor (B1, S1), Rear 278. A/F Sensor (B2, S1), Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F Sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F Sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor > Page 3203 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is on the WU-TWC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor (bank 2) 8P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the front A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor (bank 1) 8P connector (A), then remove the rear A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the rear A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3206 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front secondary HO2S (bank 2) 4P connector (A), then remove the front secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the front secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear secondary HO2S (bank 1) 4P connector (A), then remove the rear secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the rear secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3210 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3211 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3212 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3213 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3217 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3218 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3219 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3220 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3221 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3222 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3227 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3228 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3229 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3230 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Actuator Control Module - ETM Fix Electronic Throttle Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Actuator Control Module ETM Fix SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: ETM Fix: PGM-FI System, APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: The circuit schematic on page 24-4 of the 2003-04 Accord ETM doesn't show the power source for the throttle actuator control module. You'll find that info on the circuit schematic on page 24-14. Make a note in your copies of the ETM to refer to page 24-14 for power source info. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3235 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Locations 181. Under Right Side of Dash (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3236 Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3237 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3238 283. Throttle Actuator Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3239 Electronic Throttle Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Actuator Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the right kick panel. 2. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the throttle actuator control module (C). 4. Install the control module in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3244 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3245 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3246 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3247 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3248 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3249 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3250 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3251 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3252 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3253 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3254 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3255 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3256 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3257 Engine Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3258 179. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views 242. ECM/PCM Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3261 242. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3262 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3263 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3264 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3265 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3266 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3267 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3268 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3269 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3270 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3273 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3274 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3275 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3276 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3277 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3278 PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3279 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector D (17P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3280 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3281 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter. 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 3282 touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector, and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - The ECM/PCM is replaced. - The ECM/PCM is reset. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - The throttle body is replaced. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.,) are off. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3285 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Reset HDS Clear Command The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as when the battery negative terminal or No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. The HDS has three kinds of clear command to meet the purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM clear, and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting in this service manual. The ECM/PCM clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor. DTC CLEAR 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ECM/PCM RESET This command clears stored specific data from each vehicle such as DTCs, freeze data, and readiness codes. It does not clear CKP PATTERN data. 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Clear the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3286 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove the ECM/PCM and test it: 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the center lower covers (A). 3. Remove the duct (B). 4. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C). 5. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. 7. Exit the SCS mode with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure > Page 3287 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before completion,the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - You can not update an ECM/PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 4. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda Interface Module (HIM). 6. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. 7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 8. Do the CKP PATTERN Learn Procedure, if you did the troubleshooting for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0335, P0340, P0344, or P0385. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, install the original ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. 5. If you substitute bran-new ECM/PCM select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, with the original ECM/PCM installed. 6. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 7. Replace the ECM/PCM, and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3291 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3292 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3293 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3297 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3298 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3299 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3300 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3306 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3310 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3311 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 3314 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3315 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3319 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3326 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3327 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3328 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3332 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3333 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector (A). 3. Remove the ECT sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3337 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3338 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3339 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3340 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3344 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3353 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3354 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3355 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3356 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3357 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3363 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3364 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3365 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3366 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3367 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3368 Electric Load Sensor: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3369 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3373 141. Under Left Rear Of Vehicle Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3374 113. FTP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3375 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM during the EVAP leak check. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3376 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FTP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the FTP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3380 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams 54. IAT Sensor 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3381 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3382 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the IAT sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3386 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3387 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3388 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3392 118. MAP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 3402 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) 03-027 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-door- From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020275 2003 Accord L4 4-door- From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A071758 From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C073601 2003 Element 2WD - From VIN 5J6YH1...3L000001 thru 5J6YH1...3L006131 2003 Element 4WD - From VIN 5J6YH2...3L000001 thru 5J6YH2...3L014546 MIL Comes On With DTC P2A00 (P2900) SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P2A00 (P2900)* [Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range Performance Problem]. * If you use the PGM Tester to retrieve codes, you may see DTC P2900; it's the same as DTC P2A00. PROBABLE CAUSE The air fuel ratio sensor is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check for DTC P2A00 (P2900). If P2A00 (P2900) is present, replace the air fuel ratio sensor, and clear the DTC. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 36531-RAA-A01 H/C 7136187 Defect Code: 072 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) or the PGM Tester to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-027 > May > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC PA200 (Air Fuel Ratio) > Page 3408 ^ If DTC P2A00 (P2900) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, go to the appropriate troubleshooting procedure in the appropriate service manual. 2. Replace the air fuel ratio sensor (for Accords, see the 2003 Accord Service Manual, page 11-168; for Elements, see the 2003 Element Service Manual, page 11-147). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS or the PGM Tester. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3414 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3415 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3416 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3417 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3418 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3424 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3425 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3426 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3427 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 3428 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) (B). Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) (B) Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3431 Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) (B) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3432 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 86. Right Side Of Floor 159. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3433 189. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3434 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 267. HO2S (BI, S2), Rear Secondary 268. HO2S (B2, S2), Front Secondary Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435 277. A/F Sensor (B1, S1), Rear 278. A/F Sensor (B2, S1), Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F Sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F Sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor > Page 3438 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Oxygen Sensor Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is on the WU-TWC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair A/F Sensor Replacement Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor (bank 2) 8P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the front A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor (bank 1) 8P connector (A), then remove the rear A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the rear A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3441 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Front Secondary HO2S (Bank 2) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the front secondary HO2S (bank 2) 4P connector (A), then remove the front secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the front secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank 1) Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor socket wrench. Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear secondary HO2S (bank 1) 4P connector (A), then remove the rear secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the rear secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3445 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3446 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3447 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3448 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3449 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3450 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3454 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3455 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3459 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3460 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3461 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3462 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3463 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3464 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3465 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3466 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC - Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3470 89. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3471 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (B). 2. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3479 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3480 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3484 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3485 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3486 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3487 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3488 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3489 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3490 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3491 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3496 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3497 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3498 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3499 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3500 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3501 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3502 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3517 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3518 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3519 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3520 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3521 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3522 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3523 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3524 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3525 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3526 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3527 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3528 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3529 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3530 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3531 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC - Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3535 89. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3536 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (B). 2. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3540 188. VTEC Solenoid Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Removal/Inspection 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve (B). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection > Page 3543 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 (A) and body ground. - If the resistance is as specified, go to step 3. - If the resistance is not as specified, replace the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for a restriction. If there is a restriction, replace the VTEC solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > VTEC Solenoid Valve Inspection > Page 3544 4. If the filter is not restricted, remove the VTEC solenoid valve (A) and push the valve (B) with your finger to check its movement. If the valve moves freely, it is normal, check the engine oil pressure. If the valve binds or sticks, replace the VTEC valve assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3545 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair VTEC Solenoid Valve Removal/Inspection 1. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve (B). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Voltage Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Voltage Signal: Testing and Inspection Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is on. Does the percentage vary? YES - The alternator signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 4. 4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF. 5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals E3 and E12. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 8. NO - Go to step 13. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Voltage Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3553 12. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E12. Is there continuity? YES - Test the alternator. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E12) and the alternator. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 16. Cheek for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E12. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E12) and the alternator. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior Catalytic Converter: Customer Interest Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior 03-091 June 10, 2005 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord L4 (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) - ALL 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL Sulfur Smell in the Interior (Supersedes 03-091, dated April 2, 2004, to update the information marked with the black bar and asterisks.) SYMPTOM Sulfur smell in the interior (smells like rotten eggs). PROBABLE CAUSE *Sulfur concentration in fuel, catalytic converter performance, and unsealed body seams are allowing a sulfur smell to enter the interior.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the catalytic converter, seal the body seams, and install flap seals: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL Replace the catalytic converter only: 2003-04 Accord L4 - ALL (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) 2004 Accord V6 - ALL NOTE: Do not replace the catalytic converter or do any body sealing on vehicles with a mass air flow sensor. These vehicles use a different type of catalytic converter. Installing the wrong catalytic converter may result in the MIL coming on or the vehicle failing an emissions test. PARTS INFORMATION Catalytic Converter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3563 L4: P/N 18160-RAA-S00, H/C 7698939 V6: P/N 18160-RCA-S00, H/C 7701550 Pre-Chamber Gasket L4: P/N 18393-SH3-S00, H/C 3228806 V6: P/N 18393-SDB-A00, H/C 7245194 L4 and V6: P/N 18302-SP0-003, H/C 3647914 Self-Locking Nuts (6 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Ribbon Sealer: 3M P/N 08612 (One roll repairs 5 vehicles) Flap Seal: P/N 90856-56M-305, H/C 7623697 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 18160-RCA-A00 H/C 7133234 Defect Code: 07408 Symptom Code: 06006 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. L4 Models: Remove the secondary heated oxygen sensor (SH025) from the catalytic converter, and unclip the wire harness from the exhaust heat shield. V6 Models: Remove the three-way catalytic converter. 2. Discard the six self-locking nuts and the gaskets. 3. Remove the exhaust heat shield from the catalytic converter. 4. Install the heat shield and the new catalytic converter with new exhaust gaskets and self-locking nuts. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 5. L4 models: Reinstall the SH02S. 6. Remove the rear bumper face, the absorber, and the beam. (See pages 20-182 and 20-183 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3564 7. Degrease the outer rear panel seams. 8. Using rubber gloves, apply ribbon sealer across the bottom outer trunk floor up to the taillight panel seam. 9. Apply ribbon sealer around the seams on each side of the frame ends. ^ 2-door: Go to step 15. ^ 4-door: Go to step 10. 10. Remove both rear inner taillights. (See page 22-177 and 22-178 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3565 11. Apply ribbon sealer around each of the six inner taillight mounting holes on the left and right sides. Use a small amount of sealer around each hole, and be careful to not get the sealer in the bolt holes. 12. Apply ribbon sealer to each of the two upper drain holes above the inner taillights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3566 13. Remove the left and right side rear trunk panels, the trunk rear trim, and the spare tire lid. (See page 20-112 and 20-113 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) 14. Cover the 20 mm hole on the right side of the rear frame with ribbon sealer. 15. Use a clean shop towel to clean the lower trunk lid drain holes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3567 16. 4-door only Cut four 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. 2-door only Cut two 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. Trim 5 mm off the top (adhesive) side of the flap seal, and trim 7 mm off the (non-adhesive) side. 17. Apply the flap seal over the drain hole, making sure the non-adhesive part is covering the drain hole and the adhesive part is on the lid. 18. Replace any broken trunk side panel retaining clips with new ones. Make sure the trunk lid weatherstrip is not deformed and is fully set onto the body. 19. Reinstall all removed parts. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior 03-091 June 10, 2005 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord L4 (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) - ALL 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL Sulfur Smell in the Interior (Supersedes 03-091, dated April 2, 2004, to update the information marked with the black bar and asterisks.) SYMPTOM Sulfur smell in the interior (smells like rotten eggs). PROBABLE CAUSE *Sulfur concentration in fuel, catalytic converter performance, and unsealed body seams are allowing a sulfur smell to enter the interior.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the catalytic converter, seal the body seams, and install flap seals: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL Replace the catalytic converter only: 2003-04 Accord L4 - ALL (except vehicles equipped with mass air flow sensor) 2004 Accord V6 - ALL NOTE: Do not replace the catalytic converter or do any body sealing on vehicles with a mass air flow sensor. These vehicles use a different type of catalytic converter. Installing the wrong catalytic converter may result in the MIL coming on or the vehicle failing an emissions test. PARTS INFORMATION Catalytic Converter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3573 L4: P/N 18160-RAA-S00, H/C 7698939 V6: P/N 18160-RCA-S00, H/C 7701550 Pre-Chamber Gasket L4: P/N 18393-SH3-S00, H/C 3228806 V6: P/N 18393-SDB-A00, H/C 7245194 L4 and V6: P/N 18302-SP0-003, H/C 3647914 Self-Locking Nuts (6 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Ribbon Sealer: 3M P/N 08612 (One roll repairs 5 vehicles) Flap Seal: P/N 90856-56M-305, H/C 7623697 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 18160-RCA-A00 H/C 7133234 Defect Code: 07408 Symptom Code: 06006 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. L4 Models: Remove the secondary heated oxygen sensor (SH025) from the catalytic converter, and unclip the wire harness from the exhaust heat shield. V6 Models: Remove the three-way catalytic converter. 2. Discard the six self-locking nuts and the gaskets. 3. Remove the exhaust heat shield from the catalytic converter. 4. Install the heat shield and the new catalytic converter with new exhaust gaskets and self-locking nuts. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 5. L4 models: Reinstall the SH02S. 6. Remove the rear bumper face, the absorber, and the beam. (See pages 20-182 and 20-183 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3574 7. Degrease the outer rear panel seams. 8. Using rubber gloves, apply ribbon sealer across the bottom outer trunk floor up to the taillight panel seam. 9. Apply ribbon sealer around the seams on each side of the frame ends. ^ 2-door: Go to step 15. ^ 4-door: Go to step 10. 10. Remove both rear inner taillights. (See page 22-177 and 22-178 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3575 11. Apply ribbon sealer around each of the six inner taillight mounting holes on the left and right sides. Use a small amount of sealer around each hole, and be careful to not get the sealer in the bolt holes. 12. Apply ribbon sealer to each of the two upper drain holes above the inner taillights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3576 13. Remove the left and right side rear trunk panels, the trunk rear trim, and the spare tire lid. (See page 20-112 and 20-113 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual.) 14. Cover the 20 mm hole on the right side of the rear frame with ribbon sealer. 15. Use a clean shop towel to clean the lower trunk lid drain holes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > 03-091 > Jun > 05 > Interior/Exhaust - Sulfur Odors in Vehicle Interior > Page 3577 16. 4-door only Cut four 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. 2-door only Cut two 20-mm-long strips of flap seal. Trim 5 mm off the top (adhesive) side of the flap seal, and trim 7 mm off the (non-adhesive) side. 17. Apply the flap seal over the drain hole, making sure the non-adhesive part is covering the drain hole and the adhesive part is on the lid. 18. Replace any broken trunk side panel retaining clips with new ones. Make sure the trunk lid weatherstrip is not deformed and is fully set onto the body. 19. Reinstall all removed parts. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN040713 > Jul > 04 > Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: S/M Fix: DTC P0420 Troubleshooting APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord, 2003-04 Element SERVICE TIP: The troubleshooting procedure for DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) in the 2003-04 Accord S/M and the 2003-04 Element S/M is wrong. It was written before we had the current software problem and the updated software to correct this DTC. Make this change in your copies of the appropriate S/M: 20030-4 Accord Page 11-245, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-063 for specific model application and procedural information. 2003-04 Element Page 11-219, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-031 for specific model application and procedural information. Don't replace the catalytic converter unless the software has already been updated and DTC P0420 sets again; doing so wouldn't provide a lasting repair and could result in a warranty debit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN030707 > Jul > 03 > Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Rotten Egg Smell? Could Be the Catalytic Converter APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining of a rotten egg smell, but you can't find anything wrong with their vehicles to account for it [there's no DTC(s) set, no driveability problems reported, nothing damaged or broken]? Then it could well be coming from the catalytic converter. That smell is a release of built up hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from the reaction of organic sulfur compounds in the gasoline with the catalyst in the converter. Almost all gasoline contains some amount of organic sulfur compounds, and that amount varies by region. The more sulfur there is in the gasoline, the more H2S is built up and released by the catalytic converter, so the stronger the smell. In California, where low-sulfur gasoline is actually required by state law, sulfur smell complaints are few and far between. The folks at the Environmental Protection Agency have issued a requirement for the phasing-in of low-sulfur gasoline nationwide between 2004 and 2006. This low-sulfur gasoline should go a long way toward making complaints of rotten egg smell a thing of the past. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN040713 > Jul > 04 > Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0420 Service Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: S/M Fix: DTC P0420 Troubleshooting APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord, 2003-04 Element SERVICE TIP: The troubleshooting procedure for DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) in the 2003-04 Accord S/M and the 2003-04 Element S/M is wrong. It was written before we had the current software problem and the updated software to correct this DTC. Make this change in your copies of the appropriate S/M: 20030-4 Accord Page 11-245, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-063 for specific model application and procedural information. 2003-04 Element Page 11-219, step 9: Change the text to read: Update the ECM/PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Service Bulletin 03-031 for specific model application and procedural information. Don't replace the catalytic converter unless the software has already been updated and DTC P0420 sets again; doing so wouldn't provide a lasting repair and could result in a warranty debit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Catalytic Converter: > SN030707 > Jul > 03 > Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell Catalytic Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Rotten Egg Smell? Could Be the Catalytic Converter APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining of a rotten egg smell, but you can't find anything wrong with their vehicles to account for it [there's no DTC(s) set, no driveability problems reported, nothing damaged or broken]? Then it could well be coming from the catalytic converter. That smell is a release of built up hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from the reaction of organic sulfur compounds in the gasoline with the catalyst in the converter. Almost all gasoline contains some amount of organic sulfur compounds, and that amount varies by region. The more sulfur there is in the gasoline, the more H2S is built up and released by the catalytic converter, so the stronger the smell. In California, where low-sulfur gasoline is actually required by state law, sulfur smell complaints are few and far between. The folks at the Environmental Protection Agency have issued a requirement for the phasing-in of low-sulfur gasoline nationwide between 2004 and 2006. This low-sulfur gasoline should go a long way toward making complaints of rotten egg smell a thing of the past. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3603 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalytic Converter System Warm Up/Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC) and Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The WU-TWC/TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3604 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation FRONT 1. Remove the condenser fan shroud. 2. Disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and front secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector. 3. Remove the front WU-TWC. 4. Install the front WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps. 5. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal. REAR 1. Remove the intermediate shaft. 2. Disconnect the rear air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and rear secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3605 3. Remove the rear WU-TWC bracket, then remove the rear WU-TWC. 4. Install the rear WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps. 5. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 46. EVAP Canister Purge Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3612 Vacuum Hose Routing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3613 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Purge Valve When the engine coolant temperature is below 149 °F (65 °C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3614 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair EVAP Canister Purge Valve Replacement 1. Disconnect the hoses (A) and the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector (B). 2. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (C). 3. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 47. EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3619 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting of the EVAP canister Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3620 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement Non-SULEV model 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Pry the lock tab outward (A) then remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B). NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs. 3. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with oil. SULEV model 1. Remove the EVAP canister. 2. Remove the cap (A). 3. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with engine oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - DTC P1457 Possible Clogged Line Evaporative Emissions Hose: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - DTC P1457 Possible Clogged Line SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: Got DTC P1457? Check for a Clogged EVAP Canister Purge Line. APPLIES TO: 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: Got a DTC P1457 [EVAP control system leakage (EVAP canister system)]? The problem could be a clogged EVAP canister purge line. If your customer was out four-wheeling it, there's a good possibility that mud, sand, or debris could have been sucked into the line, especially if the EVAP canister got damaged or ripped from the vehicle or if the vehicle was plowing through some deep, standing water. A clogged EVAP canister purge line can delay the supply of vacuum to the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor. If the FTP sensor reacts sluggishly, the voltage won't drop down fast enough, and the ECM/PCM will set a DTC P1457 and maybe a test ID (TID) 2D. To check for a clogged EVAP canister purge line, connect the HDS with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P DLC, and run the EVAP System Function Test. If the EVAP system fails the test, you'll need to troubleshoot and repair the problem. If the EVAP system passes the test, then follow these steps to check for a clog in the purge line from the EVAP canister to the engine: 1. Disconnect the purge hose at the EVAP canister, and attach a vacuum gauge to the hose. 2. Start the engine, and activate the purge control valve by back-probing and grounding the YEL/BLU wire. Watch the vacuum gauge. - If the gauge needle instantly reads the manifold vacuum, then the purge valve is clear. Reconnect the purge hose to the EVAP canister, and look for other possible causes. - If the gauge needle doesn't instantly read the manifold vacuum, then the purge control valve could be clogged. Go to step 3. 3. Disconnect the hose between the EVAP test port and the purge control valve. Attach a vacuum gauge to the test port end of the hose. 4. Activate the purge control valve by backprobing and grounding the YEL/BLU wire. Watch the vacuum gauge. - If the gauge needle instantly reads the manifold vacuum, then clean or replace the EVAP test port, the purge line to the rear of the vehicle, or both. - If the gauge needle doesn't instantly read the manifold vacuum, then look for a clogged purge control valve port in the intake manifold. If the port is clear, then replace the purge control valve, and retest. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3628 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3629 Evaporative Shut Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting of the EVAP canister. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations EGR System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3638 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3639 EGR Valve: Description and Operation EGR Valve The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold and into the combustion chambers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3640 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve Replacement 1. Remove the ignition coil cover. 2. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the EGR valve (B). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (C). 5. Install the ignition coil cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3644 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Inspection and Test 1. Remove the ignition cover. 2. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and connections for leaks or restrictions. 3. At idle, listen to the PCV valve (A) with a stethoscope as you lightly pinch the PCV hose (B) with your fingers or pliers several times. Each time the hose is pinched, the valve should click. If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3649 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair PCV Valve Replacement 1. Remove the ignition cover. 2. Disconnect the bolt (A). NOTE: Take care not to spill oil on the hot exhaust manifold. 3. Remove the PCV valve (B). 4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When installing a new PCV valve, make sure the O-rings (C) are in place. - When installing a used PCV valve, use new O-rings (C) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 169. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3654 162. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure regulator Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connected ............................................................................................ 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/cm2, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3659 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3660 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 - Fuel hose attachment 07ZAJ-S7C0100 - Fuel joint attachment 07ZAJ-S7CA200 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. - If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3664 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3665 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Engine idle Idle speed with no load M/T in neutral ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. .......................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Idle speed with high electric load (with HVAC on) M/T in neutral position ......................................................................................................................... .................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm A/T in N or P position ................................................. ........................................................................................................................... 790 ± 50 rpm Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3669 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3670 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - Pull the parking brake lever up. 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) 5. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with the heater fan and air conditioner off. Idle speed should be: A/T :790 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) M/T :750 ± 50 rpm (in neutral) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, go to the System Troubleshooting Index. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3674 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3675 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 3678 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3679 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element. 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3687 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Specifications Fuel: Specifications Fuel required ....................................................................................................................... UNLEADED gasoline with 86 pump octane number or higher Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. With the HDS 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel pump. - A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3698 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Without the HDS 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the left kick panel, then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3699 7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed. 9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A). 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage. 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items: - Power window control unit reset procedure. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3704 Fuel Injector: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3705 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3706 49. Fuel Injectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3707 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Injector Replacement 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the intake manifold. PGM-FI System Injector Replacement 3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A). 4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (B). 5. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (C) from the fuel rail (D). 6. Remove the injector clip (E) from the injector. 7. Remove the injector from the fuel rail. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3708 PGM-FI System Injector Replacement 8. Coat the new O-rings (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C). 9. Install the injector clip (D). 10. Coat the injector O-rings (E)with clean engine oil. 11. Install the injectors in the injector base (F). 12. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts. 13. Connect the connectors on the injectors. 14. Connect the quick-connect fittings. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3712 Fuel Line Coupler: Service Precautions Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precaution The fuel line/quick-connect fittings connect the fuel rail (A) to the fuel feed hose (B), the fuel feed hose (B) to the fuel feed hose (C), the fuel feed hose (C) to the fuel line (D), and the fuel line (E) to the fuel tank unit (F). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to the following: - The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel that was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact with electrolyte or something similar. - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3713 A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when: - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3714 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precaution The fuel line/quick-connect fittings connect the fuel rail (A) to the fuel feed hose (B), the fuel feed hose (B) to the fuel feed hose (C), the fuel feed hose (C) to the fuel line (D), and the fuel line (E) to the fuel tank unit (F). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to the following: - The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel that was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact with electrolyte or something similar. - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3715 A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when: - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3716 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting (A) for dirt, and clean it if needed. 3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts. Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage. - If it is dirty, clean it. - If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump, fuel filter, or fuel feed line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3717 5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, cover the disconnected connector and line ends with plastic bags (A). NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when; replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel feed line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation 1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage, and clean it if needed. 2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the retainer is damaged, or after: - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel feed line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3718 - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit removing the retainer from the line. 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from the mating line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 3719 4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the connector tabs (C). Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the line until both retainer pawls lock with a clicking sound. NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the line end. 5. Make sure the connection is secure and that the tabs are firmly locked into place; check visually and by pulling the connector. 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this two or three times, and check that there is no leakage in the fuel supply system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time Fuel Pressure Regulator: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time 03-079 May 2, 2006 *Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL 2004 Accord V6 2-door - From VIN 1HGCM8...4A000001 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 2004 Accord V6 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM6...4A000001 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* Long Crank Time or Hard Starting (Supersedes 03-079, dated July 9, 2004, to update the information indicated by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM Excessive cranking or hard starting. *PROBABLE CAUSE There are two possible causes: 1. Contamination in the fuel pressure regulator causes the regulator to stick or intermittently stick, which causes a delay in fuel pressure at start-up. 2. Exhaust gas backflow into the intake manifold at engine shutdown may cause a poor mixture of intake air and fuel at the next engine start-up. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the fuel pressure regulator, if needed, and use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/ PCM. NOTE: The 2004 Accords within the following VIN ranges already have an improved fuel pressure regulator. For these vehicles, skip DIAGNOSIS, and go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM: ^ VIN 1HGCM8...4A018621 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 ^ VIN 1HGCM6...4AO68600 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Pressure Regulator: P/N 16015-SDB-A00, H/C 7131923 * Fuel Pump Module Gasket Set: P/N 17046-SDA-A30, H/C 7555022* TOOL INFORMATION Fuel Sender Wrench: P/N 07AAA-S0XA100, H/C 7373228 *SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version: 2.004.004 or later Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3728 PGM-FI Software Versions or Later:* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 16015-SDB-A00 H/C 7131923 Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 09001 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Install a fuel pressure gauge. ^ Refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 11-332 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword GAUGE TEST, and select Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test (V6 Engine) from the list. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. 3. Turn off the engine. Check the fuel pressure gauge. Pressure should be 380 to 430 kpa (55 to 63 psi). 4. Monitor the fuel pressure reading. If the fuel pressure bleeds down quickly after the engine is turned off, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If the fuel pressure does not drop quickly, go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software. NOTE: There is no specification for fuel pressure bleed rate. Many variables can affect fuel line pressure, such as the fuel pump and fuel injectors. A bad regulator will lose most of the fuel pressure in the first few minutes after shutting off the engine. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. ^ Refer to page 11-315 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword PRES RELIEVING, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving (V6 Engine) from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3729 2. Remove the fuel tank unit. ^ Refer to page 11-327 of the 2003-06 Accord Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUEL PUMP REP, and select Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement (V6 Engine) from the list. 3. Remove the fuel tank unit from the case. ^ Disconnect the fuel tank sending unit connector. ^ Release the three clips, and then pull out the fuel tank unit from the case. 4. Release the clips, then remove the fuel pressure regulator mount from the fuel tank unit. 5. Remove the clip, then remove the fuel pressure regulator. Install the new regulator with new 0-rings. Reassemble the fuel tank unit. 6. Place the new gasket onto the tank body. 7. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit and the fuel tank. (See page 11-327, step 11 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement.) Install the fuel tank unit into the tank without dislodging the gasket. Using hand pressure only, slide the fuel tank unit into the tank until it is seated properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3730 8. Using the fuel sender wrench, torque the new fuel tank locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). NOTE: Do not use the locknut to force the pump into the tank. *9. Reinstall all removed parts. 10. Use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM, using HDS version 2.004.004 or later. To update the PGM-FI software, refer to service bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. 11. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (NC, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 12. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in second gear or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 13. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER FIB LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 14. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 12. 14. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the transmission in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 15. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM): ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you've completed the CKP pattern learn procedure. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 14. 16. Start the vehicle a couple times to make sure the symptom is repaired. If it is not, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures for hard starting problems.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3731 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time Fuel Pressure Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time 03-079 May 2, 2006 *Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL 2004 Accord V6 2-door - From VIN 1HGCM8...4A000001 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 2004 Accord V6 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM6...4A000001 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* Long Crank Time or Hard Starting (Supersedes 03-079, dated July 9, 2004, to update the information indicated by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM Excessive cranking or hard starting. *PROBABLE CAUSE There are two possible causes: 1. Contamination in the fuel pressure regulator causes the regulator to stick or intermittently stick, which causes a delay in fuel pressure at start-up. 2. Exhaust gas backflow into the intake manifold at engine shutdown may cause a poor mixture of intake air and fuel at the next engine start-up. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the fuel pressure regulator, if needed, and use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/ PCM. NOTE: The 2004 Accords within the following VIN ranges already have an improved fuel pressure regulator. For these vehicles, skip DIAGNOSIS, and go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM: ^ VIN 1HGCM8...4A018621 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 ^ VIN 1HGCM6...4AO68600 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Pressure Regulator: P/N 16015-SDB-A00, H/C 7131923 * Fuel Pump Module Gasket Set: P/N 17046-SDA-A30, H/C 7555022* TOOL INFORMATION Fuel Sender Wrench: P/N 07AAA-S0XA100, H/C 7373228 *SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version: 2.004.004 or later Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3737 PGM-FI Software Versions or Later:* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 16015-SDB-A00 H/C 7131923 Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 09001 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Install a fuel pressure gauge. ^ Refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 11-332 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword GAUGE TEST, and select Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test (V6 Engine) from the list. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. 3. Turn off the engine. Check the fuel pressure gauge. Pressure should be 380 to 430 kpa (55 to 63 psi). 4. Monitor the fuel pressure reading. If the fuel pressure bleeds down quickly after the engine is turned off, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If the fuel pressure does not drop quickly, go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software. NOTE: There is no specification for fuel pressure bleed rate. Many variables can affect fuel line pressure, such as the fuel pump and fuel injectors. A bad regulator will lose most of the fuel pressure in the first few minutes after shutting off the engine. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. ^ Refer to page 11-315 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword PRES RELIEVING, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving (V6 Engine) from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3738 2. Remove the fuel tank unit. ^ Refer to page 11-327 of the 2003-06 Accord Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUEL PUMP REP, and select Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement (V6 Engine) from the list. 3. Remove the fuel tank unit from the case. ^ Disconnect the fuel tank sending unit connector. ^ Release the three clips, and then pull out the fuel tank unit from the case. 4. Release the clips, then remove the fuel pressure regulator mount from the fuel tank unit. 5. Remove the clip, then remove the fuel pressure regulator. Install the new regulator with new 0-rings. Reassemble the fuel tank unit. 6. Place the new gasket onto the tank body. 7. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit and the fuel tank. (See page 11-327, step 11 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement.) Install the fuel tank unit into the tank without dislodging the gasket. Using hand pressure only, slide the fuel tank unit into the tank until it is seated properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3739 8. Using the fuel sender wrench, torque the new fuel tank locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). NOTE: Do not use the locknut to force the pump into the tank. *9. Reinstall all removed parts. 10. Use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM, using HDS version 2.004.004 or later. To update the PGM-FI software, refer to service bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. 11. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (NC, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 12. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in second gear or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 13. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER FIB LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 14. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 12. 14. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the transmission in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 15. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM): ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you've completed the CKP pattern learn procedure. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 14. 16. Start the vehicle a couple times to make sure the symptom is repaired. If it is not, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures for hard starting problems.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 3740 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > SN050112 > Jan > 05 > Fuel System - Pressure Regulator Specification Revision Fuel Pressure Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Pressure Regulator Specification Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: S/M Fix: Fuel Pressure Regulator Spec. APPLIES TO: 03-05 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: You need to fix the fuel and emissions table in the 2003-05 Accord V6 S/M Supplement. The fuel pressure regulator spec is now the same for all models. Mark up your copies of the S/M to look like this. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > SN031014 > Oct > 03 > Fuel Pressure Regulator Spec Change - Manual Revision Fuel Pressure Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pressure Regulator Spec Change Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News October 2003 TITLE: S/M Fix: Fuel Pressure Reg Specs APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: The Fuel and Emissions table listed on page 2-5 of the 2003-04 Accord V6 Supplement has some wrong info for the fuel pressure regulator specs. In the Measurement column, change the text to read Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connected. In the Standard or New column, change the spec to read 380-430 kPa (3.9-4.4 kgf/cm2, 55-63 psi). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > SN030909 > Sep > 03 > Engine Long Crank Time Fuel Pressure Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Long Crank Time SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Long Engine Crank Time APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord V6s SERVICE TIP: If owners are complaining of long engine crank times, the problem could be a bad fuel pressure regulator. Fuel pressure regulator failure can be intermittent. Verify the complaint with your customer. You can replace the fuel pressure regulator without replacing the fuel pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > SN030812 > Aug > 03 > Long Engine Crank Time Fuel Pressure Regulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Long Engine Crank Time SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2003 TITLE: Long Engine Crank Time APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: If you have owners of 2003 Accord V6 complaining of engine crank times of 3 or more seconds, the problem could be a bad fuel pressure regulator. To check if this is the problem, hook up a fuel pressure gauge. Then start the engine, and let it run for more than 2 minutes. Shut off the engine, and watch the fuel pressure reading on the gauge. If you see a significant loss of fuel pressure (it drops to 20 or 30 psi), you need to replace the fuel pressure regulator. Make sure you replace only the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel tank; there's no need to replace the fuel pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Pressure Regulator: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject CD Changer: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject 03-017 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord Without Navigation System - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Factory-Installed, 6-Disc, In-Dash CD Changer Does Not Load, Play, or Eject (Supersedes 03-017, dated April 8, 2003) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The factory-installed, 6-disc, in-dash CD changer does not do one or more of these functions: ^ Load CDs ^ Play CDs ^ Eject CDs [CD(s) are stuck inside] PROBABLE CAUSE Faulty audio unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the audio unit. Refer to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair. If a customer calls ahead to schedule an appointment, and the vehicle is in the affected VIN range, order the remanufactured audio unit right away so it is available when the customer comes in. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Pressure Regulator: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 3762 PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: These audio units mount to the non-navigation audio-HVAC display module (with and without climate control). WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 010150 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 39175-SDA-A11 H/C 7137268 Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Contention Code: From the Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual. Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Go to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair, for guidance on how to get the remanufactured audio unit. 2. Write down your customer's radio station presets. 3. Remove the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the faulty audio unit from the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281). 5. Transfer the left and right brackets from the faulty audio unit to the remanufactured audio unit. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Pressure Regulator: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 3763 NOTE: If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, leave them there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs them for diagnosis and testing. ^ If you try to remove them, you would damage the unit. ^ The manufacturer will send back the faulty unit un-repaired if you damage the unit while trying to remove the CD(s). 6. If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and stick it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the stuck CD(s) and mail them back to your dealership. 7. Reinstall the audio-HVAC display module. 8. Enter the anti-theft code and your customer's radio station presets. 9. Make sure all of the functions of the audio unit and HVAC work properly. 10. Replace the sticker on your customer's anti-theft radio identification card with one of the new stickers that shows the anti-theft code. Apply the other sticker that shows the anti-theft code onto the vehicle history file copy of the repair order. 11. Remove all old serial number stickers from the side of the glove box or inside the center console. Then apply the new sticker that shows only the serial number to the side of the glove box. 12. Return the faulty audio unit to the parts department. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Pressure Regulator: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 3769 PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: These audio units mount to the non-navigation audio-HVAC display module (with and without climate control). WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 010150 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 39175-SDA-A11 H/C 7137268 Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Contention Code: From the Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual. Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Go to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair, for guidance on how to get the remanufactured audio unit. 2. Write down your customer's radio station presets. 3. Remove the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the faulty audio unit from the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281). 5. Transfer the left and right brackets from the faulty audio unit to the remanufactured audio unit. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Pressure Regulator: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 3770 NOTE: If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, leave them there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs them for diagnosis and testing. ^ If you try to remove them, you would damage the unit. ^ The manufacturer will send back the faulty unit un-repaired if you damage the unit while trying to remove the CD(s). 6. If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and stick it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the stuck CD(s) and mail them back to your dealership. 7. Reinstall the audio-HVAC display module. 8. Enter the anti-theft code and your customer's radio station presets. 9. Make sure all of the functions of the audio unit and HVAC work properly. 10. Replace the sticker on your customer's anti-theft radio identification card with one of the new stickers that shows the anti-theft code. Apply the other sticker that shows the anti-theft code onto the vehicle history file copy of the repair order. 11. Remove all old serial number stickers from the side of the glove box or inside the center console. Then apply the new sticker that shows only the serial number to the side of the glove box. 12. Return the faulty audio unit to the parts department. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3771 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3772 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement Non-SULEV model 1. Remove the fuel pump. 2. Remove the clip (A). 3. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (B). 4. Install the regulator in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (C). Make sure the regulator is installed with the drain hole (D) facing down. SULEV model 1. Remove the fuel tank unit. 2. Remove the holder (A). 3. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (B). 4. Install the regulator in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). NOTE: Coat the O-ring with clean engine oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel pressure regulator Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connected ............................................................................................ 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/cm2, 55 - 63 psi) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3777 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3778 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 - Fuel hose attachment 07ZAJ-S7C0100 - Fuel joint attachment 07ZAJ-S7CA200 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. - If the pump runs, go to step 5. - If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be 380 - 430 kPa (3.9 - 4.4 kgf/sq.cm, 55 63 psi). - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3782 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3783 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790 Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection Fuel Line Inspection Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791 Fuel Line Inspection Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 3795 Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection Fuel Line Inspection Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 3796 Fuel Line Inspection Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3801 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3802 Evaporative Shut Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting of the EVAP canister. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Neck: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement 1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip > Page 3810 Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge Sending Unit - New Wrench Available SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: New Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Wrench Available APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new fuel gauge sending unit wrench available in Honda parts stock. The new wrench T/N 07AAA-S0XA100) is a beefier version of the old one (T/N 07XAA-001010A) and supersedes it. The new wrench is much less prone to bending when you're removing a stubborn fuel pump/sender assembly locknut. Order it through normal parts ordering channels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3811 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3812 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Do multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting test mode A. - If no problem is found, go to step 2. - If DTC B1175 is indicated, go to the DTC B1175 troubleshooting. 2. Check the No.21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from the minimum to maximum position and then returns to minimum, the gauge is OK. Go to step 4. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep correctly, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the trunk floor. 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 8. Non-SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 9. SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3813 10. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the fuel pump 5P connector with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the given readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3814 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100 Non-SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3815 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (I) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (J) and new O-rings (K). When instaling the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the unit (M) and the fuel tank (N). SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3816 7. Remove the fuel tank unit (A). 8. Remove the strainer case (A), the fuel gauge sending unit (B), and the wire harness (C). 9. Install the part in the revers order of removal with a new base gasket (F) and new O-ring (G), then check these items: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (D) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (E). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (H) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations 120. Left Front Of Trunk Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 153. Fuel Tank Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3825 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3826 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3827 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3832 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3833 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3837 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3838 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3839 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Locations Resonator: Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index (A/T) Intake Air System - Component Location Index (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Locations > Page 3843 Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator Removal/Installation A/T 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the bolts (A) and the intake air duct (B). 3. Remove the resonator (C). 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. M/T 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the bolts (A). 3. Remove the resonator (B). 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3848 142. Right Side of Engine Compartment (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3849 272. APP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control System Electronic Throttle Control System The throttle is electronically controlled by the electionic throttle control system. Idle control: when the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine loads. Acceleration control: When the acclerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is in operation. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Control System > Page 3852 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3853 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair APP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the throttle cable. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations 190. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3857 155. MAF/IAT Sensor (SULEV) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3861 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3862 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Stuck In Park After Throttle Body Replacement Throttle Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Stuck In Park After Throttle Body Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: A/T Stuck in Park After Throttle Body Replacement APPLIES TO: A/T-equipped 2003-04 Accords, 2002-04 CR-Vs, and 2003-04 Elements. SERVICE TIP: Has this happened to you? You've replaced the throttle body, now you start the engine, but the A/T won't shift out of Park. If this situation strikes an all-too-familiar chord, it could be that the PCM needs to learn the relative throttle position. This is a learned value, just like idle learn. To make this happen, here's what you do: 1. Connect the HDS with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P DLC. 2. With the engine turned off, check the TPS sensor voltage and the relative throttle position. The TPS sensor voltage should read 0.49 volt; the relative throttle position should read 0 %. If both the TPS sensor voltage and the throttle position are OK, then continue with normal troubleshooting. If the TPS sensor voltage doesn't read 0.49 volt, go to step 3. If the relative throttle position doesn¡C■t read 0%, go to step 4. 3. TPS sensor voltage greater than 0.49 volt: Check the adjustment of the cruise control and throttle cables. If the cables are properly adjusted, then replace the throttle body, and retest. TPS sensor voltage less than 0.49 volt: Replace the throttle body, and retest. 4. Reset the PCM with the HDS, then do the idle learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3867 Throttle Body: Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index (A/T) Intake Air System - Component Location Index (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3868 Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the throttle plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3869 Throttle Body: Testing and Inspection Throttle Body Test Carbon Accumulation Check 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST the HDS. The reading should be above 2.73 %. If it is not, clean the throttle body. Throttle Position Learning Check 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 3. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If you need to clean the throttle body, do the throttle body cleaning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation Throttle Body: Service and Repair Removal/Installation Throttle Body Removal/Installation CAUTION: Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, there will be serious injury to your fingers if the throttle valve is activated. NOTE: If you are replacing the throttle body, begin from step 1. If you are removing the throttle body, skip step 1 to 3, and begin from step 4. 1. Connect the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 3. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. 4. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 5. Remove the intake air duct (B). 6. Disconnect the throttle body connector (C). 7. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D). 8. Remove the harness clip (E) and the throttle body (F). 9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (G). NOTE: Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure after the throttle body has been replaced. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning - Refill the radiator with engine coolant. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation > Page 3872 Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation > Page 3873 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Cleaning Throttle Body Cleaning CAUTION: Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, there will be serious injury to your fingers if the throttle body is activated. 1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air cleaner is damaged, replace it. 2. Remove the throttle body. 3. Wipe off the carbon from the throttle valve and inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked in carburetor cleaner. NOTE: Remove the throttle body to clean it. - Be careful not to pinch your fingers. - To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A). - Do not spray carburetor cleaner directly on the throttle body. - Use Honda genuine carburetor cleaner. 4. Install the throttle body. 5. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds. 7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations Throttle Cable/Linkage: Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index (A/T) Intake Air System - Component Location Index (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations > Page 3877 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Adjustments Throttle Cable Adjustment 1. Remove the throttle cable cover (A). 2. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable free play (A) should be 10 - 12 mm (3/8 - 1/2 in.). 3. If the free play (A) is not within spec (10 - 12 mm, 3/8 - 1/2 in.), loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting nut (C) until the free play (A) is as specified, then retighten the locknut. 4. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations > Page 3878 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Throttle Cable Removal/Installation 1. Remove the throttle cable cover. 2. Fully open the throttle valve, then remove the throttle cable (A) from the throttle link (B). 3. Remove the cable housing (C) from the cable bracket(D). 4. Remove the throttle cable (A) from the accelerator pedal (B). 5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal. 6. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 7. Hold the cable, removing all slack from it. 8. Set the cable on the bracket (A). Adjust the adjusting nut (B) so that its free play is 0 mm. 9. Position the adjusting nut on the other side of the bracket (A), then tighten the locknut (C). 10. Check the throttle cable free play. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations > Page 3879 11. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the throttle valve to be sure it returns whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Electronic Throttle Control System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3883 166. Left Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3884 274. TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3889 Variable Induction Control Actuator: Service and Repair IMRC Actuator Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold cover. 2. Disconnect the IMRC actuator 5P connector (A). 3. Remove the bolts and the IMRC actuator (B). 4. Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams 269. IMRC Valve (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition coil Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3904 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3905 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3906 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3910 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3911 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3912 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3913 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 3917 115. Ignition Coils Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 3918 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Removal/installation 1. Remove the ignition coil cover. 2. Remove the ignition coils. 3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.2 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground, then terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the No.1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 3924 5. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 3925 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 3926 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3930 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3931 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3932 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.2 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse. 2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the ignition coil relay. 3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground, then terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the No.1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 3939 5. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 3940 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ignition Coil Relay Circuit > Page 3941 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 151. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3946 266. CMP Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3947 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor input is used by the ECM/PCM to determines ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3948 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP Sensor Replacement 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center. 2. Remove the upper covers from the engine. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight. 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns then remove the timing belt from the front camshaft pulley. 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (A). 6. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 7. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover. 8. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. To install the timing belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3952 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3953 273. CKP Sensors (1 And 2) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3954 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor This CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting engine misfire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3955 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the drive belt, then remove the belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper and lower timing belt covers from the engine. 4. Remove the CKP sensor A/B (A) from the oil pump. 5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 6. Clear the CKP pattern with HDS. 7. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure below. CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP Pattern Learn Procedure Enable Criteria ECT at 176 °F (8O °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Clear the CKP Pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Turn the ignition ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds. 4. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm to 1,000 rpm with the A/T in 2, or the M/T in 2nd or 3rd gear. 5. Stop the vehicle. Do not turn the ignition off. 6. Select the ALL DATA LIST in the DATA LIST MENU of the HDS. 7. Check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NG, the enable criteria was probably not met;repeat the procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 3961 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 157. Middle Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3965 12. Knock Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3966 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3967 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel rails and the intake runner base. 3. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then remove the knock sensor (B). 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3971 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3972 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark plug type ................................................................................................................................................. NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................ 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3973 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. - Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling - Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs; replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Electrode Gap Standard (New): 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. Spark Plugs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3974 NGK: IZFR6K11 DENSO: SKJ2ODR-M11 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 29. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B 30. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A and B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test results are OK, the valves are OK. ^ If the test results are not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing, 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector and solenoid valve B connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B resistances at each solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of either solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 3983 14. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 15. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 16. Remove the O-rings (E), 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (H). 17. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No.1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B move. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 3984 18. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 19. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 20. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 21. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 22. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 23. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 24. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 25. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 26. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 27. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 28. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 29. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 30. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 3985 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid C with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test result is OK, the valve is OK. ^ If the test result is not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of the solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 3986 14. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 15. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 16. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 17. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 18. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 19. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 20. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 21. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 22. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 23. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 24. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 25. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 7. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors. 8. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, O-rings (E), 8 x 8 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe H. 9. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 10. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 11. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 13. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 14. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 15. Install the. battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 16. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 17. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 18. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement > Page 3989 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 8. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 9. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 10. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 11. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3994 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3995 70. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3996 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 2003-2005-Model Type A Shift Lever and 2006-2007-Model Shift Lever 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Release the lock tab (A) securing the shift lock solenoid at the bottom of the shift lever assembly, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 3. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) and plunger spring (C) in the new shift lock solenoid (D). 4. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (E). 5. Install the shift lever assembly. 2003-2005-Model Type B Shift Lever 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (C). 4. Release the lock tab (D) securing the shift lock solenoid, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift look plunger (E) and plunger spring (F) in the new shift lock solenoid (G). 6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (H). 7. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket. 8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift lever bracket base, then connect the connector. 9. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 253. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (V6: A/T) 254. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (V6: A/T) 255. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the starter. 10. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector. 11. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 12. Replace shift solenoid valve A if the resistance is out of standard. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve A. 14. Install the starter. 15. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 16. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 17. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 18. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 19. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4002 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve B operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector. 6. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace shift solenoid valve B if the resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve B. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4003 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve C Test Shift Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve C operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector. 10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 11. Replace shift solenoid valve C if the resistance is out of standard. 12. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve C. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the starter. 7. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector, and remove shift solenoid valve A. 8. Install a new shift solenoid valve A with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 10. Install the starter. 11. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 12. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 13. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 14. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 15. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4006 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector, and remove shift solenoid valve B. 3. Install a new shift solenoid valve B with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4007 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector, and remove shift solenoid valve C. 7. Install a new shift solenoid valve C with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 9. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 10. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 11. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 12. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 13. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 260. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4011 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Lock up Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the torque converter clutch solenoid valve operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 6. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4012 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector, and remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 3. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations Gear Lockout Solenoid: Locations 245. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4017 252. Reverse Lockout Solenoid (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4018 Gear Lockout Solenoid: Service and Repair Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/ Reassembly 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Remove the battery tray. 5. Carefully remove the shift cable, select cable, and cable bracket together so as not to bend the cables. 6. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 7. Remove the bolts (A), transmission harness stay (B), and reverse lockout solenoid assembly (C). 8. Remove the roller (A) and select lock cam (B). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001) to the sealing surface. NOTE: If 4 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it, and assemble the housings. Al low it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly before filling the transmission with oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4019 11. Install the reverse lockout solenoid assembly (A) and transmission harness stay (B). 12. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 13. Install the cable bracket, select cable, and shift cable. 14. Install the battery base. 15. Install the air cleaner housing. 16. Install the battery. Connect the positive (+) cable first, then the negative (-) cable to the battery. 17. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 18. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4035 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4041 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Module: Testing and Inspection Electronic Control System PCM Electrical Connections Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4047 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4048 PCM Inputs And Outputs PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4049 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM Special Tools Required Honda diagnostic system (HDS) Honda Interface Module (HIM) HDS Pocket Tester NOTE: ^ Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM during troubleshooting procedures. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door locks, during the update. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of the dash. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. For '06-07 models: If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM. 4. For '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. For '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP Position Check, and follow the screen prompts with the HDS. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda interface module (HIM). 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown in the screen. If you run into a problem (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure, follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: ^ Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position. ^ Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). ^ Shut down the HDS. ^ Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ^ Reboot the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4052 ^ Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. For '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. How to Substitute the PCM Substituting the PCM Special Tools Required ^ Honda diagnostic system (HDS) ^ Honda interface module (HIM) ^ HDS pocket tester NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. '06-07 models: If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4053 8. Remove the center lower covers (A). 9. Remove the duct (B). 10. Disconnect the PCM connectors (C). 11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 12. Install the known good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 13. Open the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: '05-07 models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 18. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 20. '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4054 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove and Install the PCM How to Remove and Install the PCM 1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect PCM connectors. 6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM. 7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4060 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 241. 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 4. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (D). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt, and connect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 9. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4063 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 9. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 10. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4072 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4073 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4074 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4075 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4076 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4077 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4078 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4079 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4080 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4090 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4091 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4092 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4093 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4094 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4095 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4096 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4097 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4098 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4105 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4106 141. Park Pin Switch/A/T Gear Position Console Light (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4107 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement NOTE: The park pin switch replacement is applied for the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever, the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever park pin switch is not available separately. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (C), then remove it from the bracket base. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (D), then remove the bulb (E) from the socket. 5. Remove the shift lock release lever (F). 6. Remove the park pin switch, and install the new switch (G) by aligning the tabs (H) with the slots (I). 7. Install the shift lock release lever. 8. Install the bulb in the socket, then install the socket in the bracket base. 9. Install the indicator panel on the bracket base. 10. Install the park pin switch connector on the bracket base, then connect the connector. 11. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4111 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4112 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4113 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4114 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4115 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4116 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4117 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4118 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor 173. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4125 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4126 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4127 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor 117. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor > Page 4130 106. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4133 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects mainshaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4136 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4137 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 6. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A) from the end cover. 7. Install the new O-ring (B) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the end cover. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 9. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 10. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 12. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4138 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Reposition the under-hood fuse/relay box to gain access to the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 6. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 7. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 8. Remove the bolt securing the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (A) from the transmission housing. 9. Install the new O-ring (B) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 10. Check for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 12. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 13. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4142 247. ATF Temperature Sensor (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4143 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 10. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 11. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the jack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4144 12. Remove the transmission lower front mount. 13. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 14. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B), then remove the sensor. 15. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new ATF temperature sensor (D), then install the sensor. 16. Secure the ATF temperature sensor harness clamp (E) with the bolts. 17. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 18. Install the transmission lower front mount. 19. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and remove the transmission jack. 21. Refill the transmission with ATF. 22. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 23. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 24. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4154 243. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-038 > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored 04-038 March 2, 2007 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL MIL Comes On With DTC P2195 or P2197 (Supersedes 04-038, dated August 10, 2004, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The MIL is on, and DTC P2195 (rear air fuel ratio sensor signal stuck lean) or P2197 (front air fuel ratio sensor signal stuck lean) is set. PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM software incorrectly interprets sensor inputs, causing the codes to set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Using the HIM (Honda Interface Module), update the ECM/PCM with the iN monthly CD, dated August 2004 or later. TOOL INFORMATION ^ iN CD (August 2004 or later) ^ iN Workstation *^ HIM (Honda Interface Module): T/N TDS35570118* ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 (This is the same cable you use to connect the HIM to the iN workstation. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.) ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N: VET-02002426 (This is the adapter needed for the HIM.) These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or AC adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RDA-A04 H/C 7630544 Defect Code: 07201 Symptom Code: 03203 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-038 > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored > Page 4163 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you update an ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged. ^ To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. 1. If not already done, load the May 2004 or later iN CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included with the CD. *2. Update the ECM/PCM software with the HIM. For updating instructions, refer to Programming the HIM and Updating an ECM/PCM With a Programmed HIM in Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules.* 3. Warm up the engine to operating temperature, then shut if off. *4. Do the ECM/PCM RESET and the CKP PATTERN CLEAR with the HDS.* 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for 30 seconds. ^ Start the engine, and let it idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 6. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the A/T in second gear, or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or Neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 7. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 7. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and return to step 5. 8. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the A/T in first gear, or the M/T in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or Neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 9. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and do this: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-038 > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored > Page 4164 ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. 10. Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN (HIGH RPM) ^ If the value is Completed, you are finished. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat steps 5 thru 8. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time 03-079 May 2, 2006 *Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL 2004 Accord V6 2-door - From VIN 1HGCM8...4A000001 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 2004 Accord V6 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM6...4A000001 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* Long Crank Time or Hard Starting (Supersedes 03-079, dated July 9, 2004, to update the information indicated by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM Excessive cranking or hard starting. *PROBABLE CAUSE There are two possible causes: 1. Contamination in the fuel pressure regulator causes the regulator to stick or intermittently stick, which causes a delay in fuel pressure at start-up. 2. Exhaust gas backflow into the intake manifold at engine shutdown may cause a poor mixture of intake air and fuel at the next engine start-up. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the fuel pressure regulator, if needed, and use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/ PCM. NOTE: The 2004 Accords within the following VIN ranges already have an improved fuel pressure regulator. For these vehicles, skip DIAGNOSIS, and go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM: ^ VIN 1HGCM8...4A018621 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 ^ VIN 1HGCM6...4AO68600 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Pressure Regulator: P/N 16015-SDB-A00, H/C 7131923 * Fuel Pump Module Gasket Set: P/N 17046-SDA-A30, H/C 7555022* TOOL INFORMATION Fuel Sender Wrench: P/N 07AAA-S0XA100, H/C 7373228 *SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version: 2.004.004 or later Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4169 PGM-FI Software Versions or Later:* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 16015-SDB-A00 H/C 7131923 Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 09001 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Install a fuel pressure gauge. ^ Refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 11-332 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword GAUGE TEST, and select Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test (V6 Engine) from the list. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. 3. Turn off the engine. Check the fuel pressure gauge. Pressure should be 380 to 430 kpa (55 to 63 psi). 4. Monitor the fuel pressure reading. If the fuel pressure bleeds down quickly after the engine is turned off, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If the fuel pressure does not drop quickly, go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software. NOTE: There is no specification for fuel pressure bleed rate. Many variables can affect fuel line pressure, such as the fuel pump and fuel injectors. A bad regulator will lose most of the fuel pressure in the first few minutes after shutting off the engine. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. ^ Refer to page 11-315 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword PRES RELIEVING, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving (V6 Engine) from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4170 2. Remove the fuel tank unit. ^ Refer to page 11-327 of the 2003-06 Accord Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUEL PUMP REP, and select Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement (V6 Engine) from the list. 3. Remove the fuel tank unit from the case. ^ Disconnect the fuel tank sending unit connector. ^ Release the three clips, and then pull out the fuel tank unit from the case. 4. Release the clips, then remove the fuel pressure regulator mount from the fuel tank unit. 5. Remove the clip, then remove the fuel pressure regulator. Install the new regulator with new 0-rings. Reassemble the fuel tank unit. 6. Place the new gasket onto the tank body. 7. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit and the fuel tank. (See page 11-327, step 11 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement.) Install the fuel tank unit into the tank without dislodging the gasket. Using hand pressure only, slide the fuel tank unit into the tank until it is seated properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4171 8. Using the fuel sender wrench, torque the new fuel tank locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). NOTE: Do not use the locknut to force the pump into the tank. *9. Reinstall all removed parts. 10. Use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM, using HDS version 2.004.004 or later. To update the PGM-FI software, refer to service bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. 11. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (NC, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 12. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in second gear or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 13. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER FIB LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 14. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 12. 14. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the transmission in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 15. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM): ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you've completed the CKP pattern learn procedure. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 14. 16. Start the vehicle a couple times to make sure the symptom is repaired. If it is not, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures for hard starting problems.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4172 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-042 > Oct > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored 04-042 October 29, 2004 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL MIL Comes On With DTCs P0301 and P0305, or P0302 and P0306, and Possible P0300 (Supersedes 04-042, dated August 3, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The MIL is on, and DTCs P0301 and P0305, or P0302 and P0306 are set. DTC P0300 (random misfire) may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM software incorrectly interprets sensor inputs, causing the codes to set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve the DTCs with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and clear any stored codes. Program the ECM/PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM), and perform the Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP) learn procedures. TOOL INFORMATION ^ Interactive network (iN) CD (August 2004 or later) ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 (This is the same cable you use to connect the HIM to the iN workstation. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.) ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N VET-02002426 These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or A/C adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central time. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. *Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-A92 H/C 7812555* Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-042 > Oct > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored > Page 4177 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Confirm the MIL is on. Using the HDS, inspect the Freeze Data and/or the onboard Snapshot Data. Did DTCs P0301 and P0305, or P0302 and P0306, occur while the engine speed was over 4000 rpm? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you update an ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged. ^ To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. 1. Use the HDS to clear any stored codes. 2. If not already done, load the October 2004 or later iN CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included with the CD. 3. Update the ECM/PCM software with the HIM. For updating instructions, refer to Programing the HIM and Updating a Control Unit (Module With the Programmed HIM in Service Bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to Update Control Units/Module. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ With the HDS, do the ECM/PCM RETEST and CKP PATTERN CLEAR. ^ Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for 30 seconds. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 5. Do the low-rpm CKP learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in second gear, or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition OFF. 6. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FL. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 7. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 5. 7. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-042 > Oct > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored > Page 4178 ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in first gear, or the M/T in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition OFF. 8. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and check the status of PULSER F/B Learn (HIGH RPM): ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FL. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you are finished. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 7. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-050 > Sep > 04 > Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration 04-050 September 3, 2004 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 With A/T - ALL Engine Spark Knock on Acceleration SYMPTOM The engine has a spark knock (ping) during acceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The programmed ignition timing is too advanced during specific engine operating conditions. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ^ Interactive Network (iN) CD (August '04 or later) ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N VET-02002426 These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or AC adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-A73 H/C 7590656 Defect Code: 07201 Symptom Code: 09117 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Verify that the MIL is not on. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-050 > Sep > 04 > Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration > Page 4183 2. Make sure you have the latest iN CD (August '04 or later) loaded into your dealership's master server. If not, load the software using the instructions that come with the CD. 3. Update the PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM); refer to S/B 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules. NOTE: If the PCM already has the correct software update, refer to the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting. 4. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector. Follow the prompts, and do the ECM/PCM Reset and Crank Pattern Clear procedures. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) for 30 seconds. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 5. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the A/T in 2nd gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and shift into Park. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 6. Using the HDS, check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN: ^ On the HDS Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 7. ^ If the value is Not Completed, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature [the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher], and repeat step 5. 7. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the "A" in 1st gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and shift into Park. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 8. Using the HDS, check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM): ^ On the HDS Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you are finished. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the value is Not Completed, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature [the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher], and repeat step 7. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-050 > Sep > 04 > Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration > Page 4184 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4189 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Updating Control Units And Modules 01-023 April 10, 2010 Applies To: Honda Vehicles With Programmable Control Units/Modules Updating Control Units/Modules (Supersedes 01-023, dated May 15, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *^Under REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT, the MVCI was added. ^ Under UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS MVCI information was added. ^ UPDATING WITH THE MVCI was added.* The procedures in this service bulletin are used and referenced in other service bulletins. Most 2002 and later Hondas have reprogrammable control units/modules. To update (reprogram) any of these control units/modules, you need the vehicle you're working on and one of these systems: *^MVCI unit with latest control module (CM) update software installed* ^ GNA600 gateway device and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Tablet with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Pocket Tester with the latest HDS software installed ^ HIM and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ A compatible J2534 device and a PC with Honda's J2534 software installed This service bulletin describes these subjects: ^ Who to contact for questions or problems when using Honda-supplied updating equipment or the iN. ^ Required Tools and Equipment - MVCI - GNA600 - HDS Tablet - HDS Pocket Tester - HIM ^ Updating Tips and Precautions ^ Updating with the MVCI ^ Updating with the GNA600 - GNA6OO Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - GNA6OO Updating in Storage Mode ^ Updating with the HDS Tablet and the HDS Pocket Tester Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4195 ^ Updating with the HIM - HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - HIM Updating in Storage Mode - Diagnosing HIM Error Codes - HIM Self-Test NOTE: Whenever you install a new, reprogrammable control unit/module, check that it has the latest software, and update it if needed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Skill Level: Repair Technician Refer to the specific service bulletin for the symptom you are repairing. QUESTIONS ABOUT THE UPDATING EQUIPMENT OR THE INTERACTIVE NETWORK For questions about the Honda-supplied updating equipment, call American Honda's Special Tools hotline. For questions about the iN, call the iN Support Center. REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE: Updating for most control units/modules can be done with any of the following tools. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4196 *MVCI: (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program)* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4197 GNA600: (No longer available for purchase) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4198 HDS Tablet: HDS Pocket Tester: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4199 HIM: UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS ^ If you're updating a control module/unit on a new vehicle, make sure all its fuses were installed at PDI. ^ To prevent control unit/module damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. ^ Make sure the HDS Tablet, the HDS Pocket Tester, or the iN workstation has the latest version of HDS software. The HDS version number is on the HDS start-up screen. To find the latest HDS software information on ISIS, select Search by Vehicle, select Technical Library, expand the ServiceNews branch, select Keyword (All Models), enter keywords HDS VERSION, then select the latest article. NOTE: The screen is from an iN workstation. The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^Make sure the Database Update listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.) is the same or earlier than the ones listed on the Reprogramming screen of the MVCI (on the MVCI, select CM Update Mode, then select Reprogramming), or on the Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4200 Updating Honda Control Modules screen on the HDS tablet, the HDS pocket tester, or the iN workstation. MVCI:* iN Workstation: NOTE: The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^If the Database Update listed in the service bulletin is later than that shown by the software, please see the the procedures for software installation in the following documents in Tool Information on ISIS (go to General Publications, then Tool Information): - MVCI User Guide (see HDS MVCI Firmware Update section) - Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) Tablet Setup Instructions - Installation Instructions for HDS ( see PC Software for the GNA600, HIM or Pocket Tester ID)* ^ Do not connect an additional power supply to the updating equipment when it is connected to the vehicle; power is supplied through the DLC. ^ To ensure that the control module/unit is not permanently damaged during updating, vedfy that the vehicle's 12-volt battery is fully charged before starthg an update. NOTE: If the vehicle's 12-volt battery drops below 10 volts during the update, the programming status bar may go past 100 percent, or the updating tool may display an error message. ^ If you have a problem during an update (D4/ immobilizer indicator flashes, update tool freezes, etc.), you can minimize the chances of damaging the control unit/module by doing one or more of these actions: - CRITICAL: Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). - Connect a jumper battery (DO NOT connect a battery charger). - Disconnect the updating tool from the vehicle's DLC. - Reboot the updating tool. - Reconnect the updating tool to the vehicle's DLC, and retry the updating procedure. *UPDATING WITH THE MVCI Make sure you have the latest control module (CM) Update software loaded from your HDS PC to your MVC I. For loading instructions and other Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4201 details, refer to the MVCI User Guide on ISIS. The Database Update version appears when you select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. 1. Connect the DLC cable to the MVCI and to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The MVCI automatically boots up. 3. Press the ENTER button on the MVCI to see the User Config menu. Select CM Update Mode. 4. Select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. NOTE: Use these MVCI default settings: Setting 1Destination: USA Language: American English Setting 2 - Auto Detect: Yes Continuous Mode: No For more information on these settings, refer to the MVCI User Guide. 5. The CM Update software information appears. Press ENTER to continue. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4202 NOTE: If the Database Update is an earlier version than the one listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.), press ESC, then update your MVCI before continuing. 6. Wait for the MVCI to check the vehicle for reprogrammable systems. This may take up to 90 seconds. 7. If there are multiple reprogrammable systems that need to be updated, select the applicable system. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. 8. The current program ID, the recommended update, and other details appear. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4203 9. Wait for the MVCI to copy the data for updating the vehicle. 10. After the MVCI has copied the files, a confirmation screen appears. Press ENTER to update the control unit/module, or press ESC to exit. 11. Wait for the MVCI to update the control unit/module. 12. After the MVCI finishes updating the control uniti module, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) when directed by the MVCI. 13. Turn the ignition switch back to ON (II) within 60 seconds to complete the updating procedure. NOTE: The MVCI has a countdown timer. If you do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II) within 60 seconds, the MVCI sets an error code. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4204 14. After finishing the updating procedure, the MVCI gives you the option of updating the same system on another vehicle. For more information on updating several vehicles, see the MVCI User Guide. 15. If an error occurs during the updating procedure, an error message appears. Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). Press ENTER to display the error code. Refer to the CM Update Error Code Table in the MVCI User Guide for more information about the code and its solutions.* UPDATING WITH THE GNA600 NOTE: For more information on the GNA6OO, refer to the GNA600 User's Guide. This guide is on ISIS, under the Tool Information heading. Two modes of updating can be used with the GNA600: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Use Pass-Thru mode when the GNA6OO can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Use Storage mode when the GNA6OO cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. GNA600 Updating in Pass-Thru Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4205 NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-th ru-Mode. 5. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4206 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control uniti module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control uniti mod ule has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. GNA600 Updating in Storage Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the ISIS publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4207 NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then click on Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the GNA600 to the vehicle. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. 7. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the GNA600. The GNA600 does a self-check and, after about 30 seconds, its yellow No.1 and green No.2 LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4208 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 10. Disconnect the GNA600 from the USB PC interface cable, then connect the trigger switch adapter block (yellow) and the trigger switch to the GNA600 as shown below. (The DLC cable should still be connected to the GNA600.) 11. Reconnect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA600 stays on. Press and release the trigger switch button. 13. The yellow No.1 LED blinks, and the green No.2 LED stays on. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4209 NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the No.1 LED stays on and the No.2 LED goes off, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the No.1 and No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. UPDATING WITH THE HDS TABLET AND THE HDS POCKET TESTER NOTE: This procedure explains how to update with the HDS tablet. Updating with the HDS pocket tester is similar, but the user interface is modified to fit its smaller screen. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC sofiware onto your HDS tablet or HDS pocket tester. Refer to the instructions included with the HDS Installation Disc. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. On the HDS Switchboard screen, click on the CM update icon. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4210 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and connect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the Systems one at a time. 4. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4211 5. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HDS tablet. 6. In the HDS Tablet Programming screen, click on the check mark after programming is completed. 7. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. NOTE: To avoid permanent control module damage, do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) during the update. 8. When updating is complete, follow the screen prompts to turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). To update another system, return to the Updating Honda Control Modules screen by clicking on the exit button on the right side of the screen. UPDATING WITH THE HIM Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4212 Two updating modes can be used with the HIM: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Pass-Thru mode is used when the HIM can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Storage mode is used when the HIM cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 LED on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-thru-Mode. 5. Connect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4213 NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HIM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4214 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control unit/module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control unit/module has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. HIM Updating in Storage Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC So ftware on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then select Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the HIM to the vehicle, and connect it to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4215 the HIM from the vehicle. 7. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the HIM. After several seconds, the green and yellow LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the HIM. 10. Disconnect the HIM from the PC interface cable. 11. Reconnect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Press and release the ENTER button on the HIM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4216 13. The green No.1 LED stays on, and the yellow No. 2 LED blinks. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the yellow No.2 LED stays on, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the green No.1 and the yellow No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HIM from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. Diagnosing HIM Error Codes If the red No.3 LED on the HIM came on or was flashing during the update, do this: 1. Leave the ignition switch in ON (II) while you disconnect the HIM from the vehicle's DLC. 2. If not already done, load the latest HDS sofiware onto the iN workstation. 3. Connect the HIM to the iN workstation. Connect the small end of the PC interface cable to the PC port on the HIM. 4. If not already done, connect the PC end of the blue PC interface cable to the 9P serial port on the iN workstation. 5. Connect the 110 VACIl 2 VDC power supply to the HIM and to a wall outlet. 6. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 7. On the right side of the screen, click on the view error button. 8. Click on View Error at the bottom of the screen to display the problem encountered while the HIM was connected to the vehicle. ^ If you get a Code 40 error message (usually caused by a communication error between the HIM and the workstation), do this: - Do the HIM self-test procedure (see HIM Self-Test). - Move the blue PC interface cable to another communication port on the back of the computer. - If one of the communication ports on the back of the computer has another cable connected to it, disconnect that cable, leave it disconnected during the HIM procedure, and connect the blue PC interface cable to that port. - Connect the HIM to another computer. (Some iN workstations require an internal communication port setup procedure. For help, call the iN Support Center) ^ If you get a Code 50 error message (usually caused by a communications error between the HIM and the vehicle's DLC), do this: - Diagnose and clear any DTCs. (The control unit/module must be free of DTCs before you can update it.) - Make sure there's a good connection between the HIM and the DLC. - Retry the update using the procedures in this service bulletin or on the back of the HIM. - If needed, call Tech Line for further help. HIM Self-Test If you suspect there's a problem with the HIM, review the instructions in this service bulletin to make sure you are using it correctly. If you still think there's a problem, do this self-test: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4217 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS software onto the iN workstation. 2. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 3. On the right side of the screen, click on the tools button. 4. Click on HIM Self-Test Procedure. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to run the HIM self-test. 6. If the self-test indicates a problem with the HIM, call the Special Tools hotline for repair instructions. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-038 > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored 04-038 March 2, 2007 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL MIL Comes On With DTC P2195 or P2197 (Supersedes 04-038, dated August 10, 2004, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The MIL is on, and DTC P2195 (rear air fuel ratio sensor signal stuck lean) or P2197 (front air fuel ratio sensor signal stuck lean) is set. PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM software incorrectly interprets sensor inputs, causing the codes to set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Using the HIM (Honda Interface Module), update the ECM/PCM with the iN monthly CD, dated August 2004 or later. TOOL INFORMATION ^ iN CD (August 2004 or later) ^ iN Workstation *^ HIM (Honda Interface Module): T/N TDS35570118* ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 (This is the same cable you use to connect the HIM to the iN workstation. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.) ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N: VET-02002426 (This is the adapter needed for the HIM.) These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or AC adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RDA-A04 H/C 7630544 Defect Code: 07201 Symptom Code: 03203 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-038 > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored > Page 4222 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you update an ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged. ^ To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. 1. If not already done, load the May 2004 or later iN CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included with the CD. *2. Update the ECM/PCM software with the HIM. For updating instructions, refer to Programming the HIM and Updating an ECM/PCM With a Programmed HIM in Service Bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules.* 3. Warm up the engine to operating temperature, then shut if off. *4. Do the ECM/PCM RESET and the CKP PATTERN CLEAR with the HDS.* 5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for 30 seconds. ^ Start the engine, and let it idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 6. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the A/T in second gear, or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or Neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 7. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 7. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and return to step 5. 8. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the A/T in first gear, or the M/T in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or Neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 9. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and do this: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-038 > Mar > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P2195 or P2197 Stored > Page 4223 ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. 10. Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN (HIGH RPM) ^ If the value is Completed, you are finished. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat steps 5 thru 8. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time 03-079 May 2, 2006 *Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL 2004 Accord V6 2-door - From VIN 1HGCM8...4A000001 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 2004 Accord V6 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM6...4A000001 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* Long Crank Time or Hard Starting (Supersedes 03-079, dated July 9, 2004, to update the information indicated by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM Excessive cranking or hard starting. *PROBABLE CAUSE There are two possible causes: 1. Contamination in the fuel pressure regulator causes the regulator to stick or intermittently stick, which causes a delay in fuel pressure at start-up. 2. Exhaust gas backflow into the intake manifold at engine shutdown may cause a poor mixture of intake air and fuel at the next engine start-up. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the fuel pressure regulator, if needed, and use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/ PCM. NOTE: The 2004 Accords within the following VIN ranges already have an improved fuel pressure regulator. For these vehicles, skip DIAGNOSIS, and go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM: ^ VIN 1HGCM8...4A018621 thru 1HGCM8...4A024092 ^ VIN 1HGCM6...4AO68600 thru 1HGCM6...4A100943* PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Pressure Regulator: P/N 16015-SDB-A00, H/C 7131923 * Fuel Pump Module Gasket Set: P/N 17046-SDA-A30, H/C 7555022* TOOL INFORMATION Fuel Sender Wrench: P/N 07AAA-S0XA100, H/C 7373228 *SOFTWARE INFORMATION HDS Software Version: 2.004.004 or later Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4228 PGM-FI Software Versions or Later:* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 16015-SDB-A00 H/C 7131923 Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 09001 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Install a fuel pressure gauge. ^ Refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 11-332 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword GAUGE TEST, and select Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test (V6 Engine) from the list. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. 3. Turn off the engine. Check the fuel pressure gauge. Pressure should be 380 to 430 kpa (55 to 63 psi). 4. Monitor the fuel pressure reading. If the fuel pressure bleeds down quickly after the engine is turned off, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If the fuel pressure does not drop quickly, go to step 10 of REPAIR PROCEDURE to update the PGM-FI software. NOTE: There is no specification for fuel pressure bleed rate. Many variables can affect fuel line pressure, such as the fuel pump and fuel injectors. A bad regulator will lose most of the fuel pressure in the first few minutes after shutting off the engine. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. ^ Refer to page 11-315 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword PRES RELIEVING, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving (V6 Engine) from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4229 2. Remove the fuel tank unit. ^ Refer to page 11-327 of the 2003-06 Accord Service Manual Supplement, or ^ Online, enter keyword FUEL PUMP REP, and select Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement (V6 Engine) from the list. 3. Remove the fuel tank unit from the case. ^ Disconnect the fuel tank sending unit connector. ^ Release the three clips, and then pull out the fuel tank unit from the case. 4. Release the clips, then remove the fuel pressure regulator mount from the fuel tank unit. 5. Remove the clip, then remove the fuel pressure regulator. Install the new regulator with new 0-rings. Reassemble the fuel tank unit. 6. Place the new gasket onto the tank body. 7. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit and the fuel tank. (See page 11-327, step 11 of the 2003-06 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement.) Install the fuel tank unit into the tank without dislodging the gasket. Using hand pressure only, slide the fuel tank unit into the tank until it is seated properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4230 8. Using the fuel sender wrench, torque the new fuel tank locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). NOTE: Do not use the locknut to force the pump into the tank. *9. Reinstall all removed parts. 10. Use the HDS to update the PGM-FI software in the ECM/PCM, using HDS version 2.004.004 or later. To update the PGM-FI software, refer to service bulletin 01-023, Updating Control Units/Modules. 11. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (NC, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 12. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in second gear or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 13. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER FIB LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 14. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 12. 14. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the transmission in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into Park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition off. 15. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM): ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER FIB LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you've completed the CKP pattern learn procedure. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 14. 16. Start the vehicle a couple times to make sure the symptom is repaired. If it is not, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures for hard starting problems.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-079 > May > 06 > Engine Controls - Hard Start/Long Crank Time > Page 4231 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-042 > Oct > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored 04-042 October 29, 2004 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL MIL Comes On With DTCs P0301 and P0305, or P0302 and P0306, and Possible P0300 (Supersedes 04-042, dated August 3, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The MIL is on, and DTCs P0301 and P0305, or P0302 and P0306 are set. DTC P0300 (random misfire) may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM software incorrectly interprets sensor inputs, causing the codes to set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Retrieve the DTCs with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), and clear any stored codes. Program the ECM/PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM), and perform the Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP) learn procedures. TOOL INFORMATION ^ Interactive network (iN) CD (August 2004 or later) ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 (This is the same cable you use to connect the HIM to the iN workstation. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.) ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N VET-02002426 These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or A/C adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central time. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. *Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-A92 H/C 7812555* Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-042 > Oct > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored > Page 4236 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Confirm the MIL is on. Using the HDS, inspect the Freeze Data and/or the onboard Snapshot Data. Did DTCs P0301 and P0305, or P0302 and P0306, occur while the engine speed was over 4000 rpm? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you update an ECM/PCM, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged. ^ To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. 1. Use the HDS to clear any stored codes. 2. If not already done, load the October 2004 or later iN CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included with the CD. 3. Update the ECM/PCM software with the HIM. For updating instructions, refer to Programing the HIM and Updating a Control Unit (Module With the Programmed HIM in Service Bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to Update Control Units/Module. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ With the HDS, do the ECM/PCM RETEST and CKP PATTERN CLEAR. ^ Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for 30 seconds. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 5. Do the low-rpm CKP learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in second gear, or the M/T in second or third gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition OFF. 6. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN: ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FL. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 7. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 5. 7. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-042 > Oct > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Misfire DTC's Stored > Page 4237 ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road. With the A/T in first gear, or the M/T in first gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and put the transmission into park or neutral. Set the parking brake. Do not turn the ignition OFF. 8. Connect the HDS to the DLC (if not already connected), and check the status of PULSER F/B Learn (HIGH RPM): ^ On the Selection Menu, select PGM-FL. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you are finished. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the value is Not Completed, be sure the engine is at normal operating temperature (the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher), and repeat step 7. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-050 > Sep > 04 > Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls Spark Knock on Acceleration 04-050 September 3, 2004 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 With A/T - ALL Engine Spark Knock on Acceleration SYMPTOM The engine has a spark knock (ping) during acceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The programmed ignition timing is too advanced during specific engine operating conditions. CORRECTIVE ACTION Update the PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM). REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ^ Interactive Network (iN) CD (August '04 or later) ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N VET-02002426 These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or AC adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-A73 H/C 7590656 Defect Code: 07201 Symptom Code: 09117 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Verify that the MIL is not on. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-050 > Sep > 04 > Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration > Page 4242 2. Make sure you have the latest iN CD (August '04 or later) loaded into your dealership's master server. If not, load the software using the instructions that come with the CD. 3. Update the PCM software using the Honda Interface Module (HIM); refer to S/B 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules. NOTE: If the PCM already has the correct software update, refer to the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting. 4. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector. Follow the prompts, and do the ECM/PCM Reset and Crank Pattern Clear procedures. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) for 30 seconds. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 5. Do the low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the A/T in 2nd gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and shift into Park. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 6. Using the HDS, check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN: ^ On the HDS Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN. ^ If the value is Completed, go to step 7. ^ If the value is Not Completed, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature [the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher], and repeat step 5. 7. Do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure: NOTE: The low-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure must be completed before you do the high-rpm CKP pattern learn procedure. ^ Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: With the "A" in 1st gear, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm. ^ Stop the vehicle, and shift into Park. Set the parking brake. Do not turn off the ignition switch. 8. Using the HDS, check the status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM): ^ On the HDS Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. ^ On the Mode Menu, select Data List. ^ Check the value of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM). ^ If the value is Completed, you are finished. Disconnect the HDS. ^ If the value is Not Completed, make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature [the ECT SENSOR (1) value is 176 or higher], and repeat step 7. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-050 > Sep > 04 > Engine Controls - Spark Knock on Acceleration > Page 4243 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-070 > Oct > 03 > A/T - Required PROM Update Following A/T Replacement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Required PROM Update Following A/T Replacement 03-070 October 7, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A091630 2003 Accord V6 2-door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A035060 PCM Update With Automatic Transmission Replacement BACKGROUND An updated PCM software has been developed that can improve driveability and durability under certain, very specific driving conditions. Although small, there is a possibility that these driving conditions contributed to the transmission's failure. For that reason, the PCM should be updated when installing a remanufactured transmission. CORRECTIVE ACTION After installing a remanufactured transmission, update the PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM). WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour (includes checking for and clearing any body electrical codes) Failed Part: P/N 37820-RAA-A54 H/C 7284607 Defect Code: 091 Contention Code: B02 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install the remanufactured transmission. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD's mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. Low voltage, or turning off the ignition switch, can cause permanent PCM damage. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any body electrical codes that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the body electrical codes have returned. ^ If the codes have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the codes are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-070 > Oct > 03 > A/T - Required PROM Update Following A/T Replacement > Page 4248 ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4253 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Computers/Controls Updating Control Units And Modules 01-023 April 10, 2010 Applies To: Honda Vehicles With Programmable Control Units/Modules Updating Control Units/Modules (Supersedes 01-023, dated May 15, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *^Under REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT, the MVCI was added. ^ Under UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS MVCI information was added. ^ UPDATING WITH THE MVCI was added.* The procedures in this service bulletin are used and referenced in other service bulletins. Most 2002 and later Hondas have reprogrammable control units/modules. To update (reprogram) any of these control units/modules, you need the vehicle you're working on and one of these systems: *^MVCI unit with latest control module (CM) update software installed* ^ GNA600 gateway device and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Tablet with the latest HDS software installed ^ HDS Pocket Tester with the latest HDS software installed ^ HIM and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software installed ^ A compatible J2534 device and a PC with Honda's J2534 software installed This service bulletin describes these subjects: ^ Who to contact for questions or problems when using Honda-supplied updating equipment or the iN. ^ Required Tools and Equipment - MVCI - GNA600 - HDS Tablet - HDS Pocket Tester - HIM ^ Updating Tips and Precautions ^ Updating with the MVCI ^ Updating with the GNA600 - GNA6OO Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - GNA6OO Updating in Storage Mode ^ Updating with the HDS Tablet and the HDS Pocket Tester Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4259 ^ Updating with the HIM - HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode - HIM Updating in Storage Mode - Diagnosing HIM Error Codes - HIM Self-Test NOTE: Whenever you install a new, reprogrammable control unit/module, check that it has the latest software, and update it if needed. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Skill Level: Repair Technician Refer to the specific service bulletin for the symptom you are repairing. QUESTIONS ABOUT THE UPDATING EQUIPMENT OR THE INTERACTIVE NETWORK For questions about the Honda-supplied updating equipment, call American Honda's Special Tools hotline. For questions about the iN, call the iN Support Center. REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NOTE: Updating for most control units/modules can be done with any of the following tools. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4260 *MVCI: (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program)* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4261 GNA600: (No longer available for purchase) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4262 HDS Tablet: HDS Pocket Tester: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4263 HIM: UPDATING TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS ^ If you're updating a control module/unit on a new vehicle, make sure all its fuses were installed at PDI. ^ To prevent control unit/module damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof, etc.) during the update. ^ Make sure the HDS Tablet, the HDS Pocket Tester, or the iN workstation has the latest version of HDS software. The HDS version number is on the HDS start-up screen. To find the latest HDS software information on ISIS, select Search by Vehicle, select Technical Library, expand the ServiceNews branch, select Keyword (All Models), enter keywords HDS VERSION, then select the latest article. NOTE: The screen is from an iN workstation. The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^Make sure the Database Update listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.) is the same or earlier than the ones listed on the Reprogramming screen of the MVCI (on the MVCI, select CM Update Mode, then select Reprogramming), or on the Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4264 Updating Honda Control Modules screen on the HDS tablet, the HDS pocket tester, or the iN workstation. MVCI:* iN Workstation: NOTE: The HDS tablet and pocket tester screens are similar. *^If the Database Update listed in the service bulletin is later than that shown by the software, please see the the procedures for software installation in the following documents in Tool Information on ISIS (go to General Publications, then Tool Information): - MVCI User Guide (see HDS MVCI Firmware Update section) - Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) Tablet Setup Instructions - Installation Instructions for HDS ( see PC Software for the GNA600, HIM or Pocket Tester ID)* ^ Do not connect an additional power supply to the updating equipment when it is connected to the vehicle; power is supplied through the DLC. ^ To ensure that the control module/unit is not permanently damaged during updating, vedfy that the vehicle's 12-volt battery is fully charged before starthg an update. NOTE: If the vehicle's 12-volt battery drops below 10 volts during the update, the programming status bar may go past 100 percent, or the updating tool may display an error message. ^ If you have a problem during an update (D4/ immobilizer indicator flashes, update tool freezes, etc.), you can minimize the chances of damaging the control unit/module by doing one or more of these actions: - CRITICAL: Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). - Connect a jumper battery (DO NOT connect a battery charger). - Disconnect the updating tool from the vehicle's DLC. - Reboot the updating tool. - Reconnect the updating tool to the vehicle's DLC, and retry the updating procedure. *UPDATING WITH THE MVCI Make sure you have the latest control module (CM) Update software loaded from your HDS PC to your MVC I. For loading instructions and other Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4265 details, refer to the MVCI User Guide on ISIS. The Database Update version appears when you select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. 1. Connect the DLC cable to the MVCI and to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The MVCI automatically boots up. 3. Press the ENTER button on the MVCI to see the User Config menu. Select CM Update Mode. 4. Select Reprogramming, then press ENTER. NOTE: Use these MVCI default settings: Setting 1Destination: USA Language: American English Setting 2 - Auto Detect: Yes Continuous Mode: No For more information on these settings, refer to the MVCI User Guide. 5. The CM Update software information appears. Press ENTER to continue. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4266 NOTE: If the Database Update is an earlier version than the one listed in a Honda service communication (service bulletin, product update, iN message, etc.), press ESC, then update your MVCI before continuing. 6. Wait for the MVCI to check the vehicle for reprogrammable systems. This may take up to 90 seconds. 7. If there are multiple reprogrammable systems that need to be updated, select the applicable system. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. 8. The current program ID, the recommended update, and other details appear. Press ENTER to continue, or press ESC to exit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4267 9. Wait for the MVCI to copy the data for updating the vehicle. 10. After the MVCI has copied the files, a confirmation screen appears. Press ENTER to update the control unit/module, or press ESC to exit. 11. Wait for the MVCI to update the control unit/module. 12. After the MVCI finishes updating the control uniti module, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) when directed by the MVCI. 13. Turn the ignition switch back to ON (II) within 60 seconds to complete the updating procedure. NOTE: The MVCI has a countdown timer. If you do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II) within 60 seconds, the MVCI sets an error code. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4268 14. After finishing the updating procedure, the MVCI gives you the option of updating the same system on another vehicle. For more information on updating several vehicles, see the MVCI User Guide. 15. If an error occurs during the updating procedure, an error message appears. Keep the ignition switch in ON (II). Press ENTER to display the error code. Refer to the CM Update Error Code Table in the MVCI User Guide for more information about the code and its solutions.* UPDATING WITH THE GNA600 NOTE: For more information on the GNA6OO, refer to the GNA600 User's Guide. This guide is on ISIS, under the Tool Information heading. Two modes of updating can be used with the GNA600: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Use Pass-Thru mode when the GNA6OO can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Use Storage mode when the GNA6OO cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. GNA600 Updating in Pass-Thru Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4269 NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-th ru-Mode. 5. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4270 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control uniti module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control uniti mod ule has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. GNA600 Updating in Storage Mode 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the ISIS publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4271 NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the Tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to GNA600. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then click on Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the GNA600 to the vehicle. Connect the DLC cable to the GNA600 and to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA6OO stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. 7. Connect the USB PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the GNA6OO. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the GNA600. The GNA600 does a self-check and, after about 30 seconds, its yellow No.1 and green No.2 LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4272 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the GNA600. 10. Disconnect the GNA600 from the USB PC interface cable, then connect the trigger switch adapter block (yellow) and the trigger switch to the GNA600 as shown below. (The DLC cable should still be connected to the GNA600.) 11. Reconnect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.2 LED on the GNA600 stays on. Press and release the trigger switch button. 13. The yellow No.1 LED blinks, and the green No.2 LED stays on. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4273 NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the No.1 LED stays on and the No.2 LED goes off, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the No.1 and No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the DLC cable from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. UPDATING WITH THE HDS TABLET AND THE HDS POCKET TESTER NOTE: This procedure explains how to update with the HDS tablet. Updating with the HDS pocket tester is similar, but the user interface is modified to fit its smaller screen. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC sofiware onto your HDS tablet or HDS pocket tester. Refer to the instructions included with the HDS Installation Disc. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. On the HDS Switchboard screen, click on the CM update icon. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4274 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and connect the DLC cable to the vehicle's DLC. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the Systems one at a time. 4. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4275 5. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HDS tablet. 6. In the HDS Tablet Programming screen, click on the check mark after programming is completed. 7. In the Updating Honda Control Modules screen, click on the check mark. NOTE: To avoid permanent control module damage, do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) during the update. 8. When updating is complete, follow the screen prompts to turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). To update another system, return to the Updating Honda Control Modules screen by clicking on the exit button on the right side of the screen. UPDATING WITH THE HIM Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4276 Two updating modes can be used with the HIM: Pass-Thru mode and Storage mode. Pass-Thru mode is used when the HIM can be connected to an iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. Storage mode is used when the HIM cannot be connected to the iN workstation and the vehicle at the same time. HIM Updating in Pass-Thru Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 LED on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC Software on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest software is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, and click on Pass-thru-Mode. 5. Connect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Click on the check mark to continue. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4277 NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 7. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are for the vehicle you are updating, then click on the check mark. 8. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update sofiware loads the program file onto the HIM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4278 9. Click on the check mark to begin the control unit/module update. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 10. Within 60 seconds of update completion, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 11. Once the software verifies that the control unit/module has been successfully updated, click on Yes to update another identical vehicle, or click on No to exit the update program. HIM Updating in Storage Mode NOTE: If the red No.3 on the HIM comes on or flashes during the update, go to Diagnosing HIM Error Codes. 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS PC software onto your iN workstation. For loading instructions, refer to the Tool Information publication Installation Instructions for HDS PC So ftware on ISIS. NOTE: If the latest sofiware is not loaded and you do a control unit/module update, the software may indicate the vehicle has the latest update when it doesn't. Updates not done with the latest software are not covered under warranty. 2. From the iN workstation desktop, select CM Update (ECU Rewrite). 3. Click on the tools button on the right side of the screen, and make sure the interface device is set to HIM. 4. Return to the Updating Honda Control Modules main screen, then select Storage Mode and follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Take the HIM to the vehicle, and connect it to the vehicle's DLC. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4279 the HIM from the vehicle. 7. Connect the PC interface cable to the iN workstation and to the HIM. Connect the power supply unit and power supply cord to the HIM. After several seconds, the green and yellow LEDs flash. Each updatable vehicle system is checked to make sure it is current. Any systems needing an update are listed on the screen. Highlight the system you want to update, then click on the check mark to continue. NOTE: Update the systems one at a time. 8. Verify that the Program ID and the Program Part No. are correct, then click on the check mark. 9. Confirm the control module update by Program ID and Program Part No. Make sure this corresponds with any information provided in the service bulletin for the update you are doing. Click on Yes to continue. Within a few seconds, the CM Update software loads the program file onto the HIM. 10. Disconnect the HIM from the PC interface cable. 11. Reconnect the HIM to the vehicle's DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait until the green No.1 LED on the HIM stays on. Press and release the ENTER button on the HIM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4280 13. The green No.1 LED stays on, and the yellow No. 2 LED blinks. This indicates that the control uniti module is being updated. NOTE: To avoid control unit/module damage, do not interrupt the update. 14. When the yellow No.2 LED stays on, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the green No.1 and the yellow No.2 LEDs stay on, the control unit/module is updated. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HIM from the vehicle. To do the same update on an identical vehicle, repeat steps 11 thru 16. Diagnosing HIM Error Codes If the red No.3 LED on the HIM came on or was flashing during the update, do this: 1. Leave the ignition switch in ON (II) while you disconnect the HIM from the vehicle's DLC. 2. If not already done, load the latest HDS sofiware onto the iN workstation. 3. Connect the HIM to the iN workstation. Connect the small end of the PC interface cable to the PC port on the HIM. 4. If not already done, connect the PC end of the blue PC interface cable to the 9P serial port on the iN workstation. 5. Connect the 110 VACIl 2 VDC power supply to the HIM and to a wall outlet. 6. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 7. On the right side of the screen, click on the view error button. 8. Click on View Error at the bottom of the screen to display the problem encountered while the HIM was connected to the vehicle. ^ If you get a Code 40 error message (usually caused by a communication error between the HIM and the workstation), do this: - Do the HIM self-test procedure (see HIM Self-Test). - Move the blue PC interface cable to another communication port on the back of the computer. - If one of the communication ports on the back of the computer has another cable connected to it, disconnect that cable, leave it disconnected during the HIM procedure, and connect the blue PC interface cable to that port. - Connect the HIM to another computer. (Some iN workstations require an internal communication port setup procedure. For help, call the iN Support Center) ^ If you get a Code 50 error message (usually caused by a communications error between the HIM and the vehicle's DLC), do this: - Diagnose and clear any DTCs. (The control unit/module must be free of DTCs before you can update it.) - Make sure there's a good connection between the HIM and the DLC. - Retry the update using the procedures in this service bulletin or on the back of the HIM. - If needed, call Tech Line for further help. HIM Self-Test If you suspect there's a problem with the HIM, review the instructions in this service bulletin to make sure you are using it correctly. If you still think there's a problem, do this self-test: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 01-023 > Apr > 10 > Computers/Controls - Updating Control Units And Modules > Page 4281 1. If not already done, load the latest HDS software onto the iN workstation. 2. Restart the CM Update application on the iN workstation. 3. On the right side of the screen, click on the tools button. 4. Click on HIM Self-Test Procedure. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to run the HIM self-test. 6. If the self-test indicates a problem with the HIM, call the Special Tools hotline for repair instructions. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-070 > Oct > 03 > A/T - Required PROM Update Following A/T Replacement PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Required PROM Update Following A/T Replacement 03-070 October 7, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A091630 2003 Accord V6 2-door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A035060 PCM Update With Automatic Transmission Replacement BACKGROUND An updated PCM software has been developed that can improve driveability and durability under certain, very specific driving conditions. Although small, there is a possibility that these driving conditions contributed to the transmission's failure. For that reason, the PCM should be updated when installing a remanufactured transmission. CORRECTIVE ACTION After installing a remanufactured transmission, update the PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM). WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 125517 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour (includes checking for and clearing any body electrical codes) Failed Part: P/N 37820-RAA-A54 H/C 7284607 Defect Code: 091 Contention Code: B02 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Install the remanufactured transmission. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD's mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. Low voltage, or turning off the ignition switch, can cause permanent PCM damage. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any body electrical codes that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the body electrical codes have returned. ^ If the codes have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the codes are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-070 > Oct > 03 > A/T - Required PROM Update Following A/T Replacement > Page 4286 ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 29. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B 30. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A and B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test results are OK, the valves are OK. ^ If the test results are not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing, 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector and solenoid valve B connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B resistances at each solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of either solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4295 14. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 15. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 16. Remove the O-rings (E), 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (H). 17. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No.1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B move. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4296 18. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 19. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 20. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 21. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 22. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 23. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 24. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 25. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 26. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 27. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 28. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 29. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 30. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4297 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid C with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test result is OK, the valve is OK. ^ If the test result is not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of the solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4298 14. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 15. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 16. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 17. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 18. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 19. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 20. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 21. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 22. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 23. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 24. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 25. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 7. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors. 8. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, O-rings (E), 8 x 8 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe H. 9. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 10. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 11. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 13. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 14. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 15. Install the. battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 16. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 17. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 18. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement > Page 4301 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 8. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 9. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 10. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 11. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4306 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4307 70. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4308 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 2003-2005-Model Type A Shift Lever and 2006-2007-Model Shift Lever 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Release the lock tab (A) securing the shift lock solenoid at the bottom of the shift lever assembly, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 3. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) and plunger spring (C) in the new shift lock solenoid (D). 4. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (E). 5. Install the shift lever assembly. 2003-2005-Model Type B Shift Lever 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (C). 4. Release the lock tab (D) securing the shift lock solenoid, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift look plunger (E) and plunger spring (F) in the new shift lock solenoid (G). 6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (H). 7. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket. 8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift lever bracket base, then connect the connector. 9. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 253. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (V6: A/T) 254. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (V6: A/T) 255. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the starter. 10. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector. 11. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 12. Replace shift solenoid valve A if the resistance is out of standard. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve A. 14. Install the starter. 15. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 16. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 17. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 18. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 19. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4314 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve B operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector. 6. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace shift solenoid valve B if the resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve B. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4315 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve C Test Shift Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve C operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector. 10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 11. Replace shift solenoid valve C if the resistance is out of standard. 12. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve C. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the starter. 7. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector, and remove shift solenoid valve A. 8. Install a new shift solenoid valve A with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 10. Install the starter. 11. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 12. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 13. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 14. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 15. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4318 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector, and remove shift solenoid valve B. 3. Install a new shift solenoid valve B with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4319 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector, and remove shift solenoid valve C. 7. Install a new shift solenoid valve C with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 9. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 10. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 11. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 12. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 13. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 260. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4323 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Lock up Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the torque converter clutch solenoid valve operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 6. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4324 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector, and remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 3. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations Gear Lockout Solenoid: Locations 245. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4329 252. Reverse Lockout Solenoid (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4330 Gear Lockout Solenoid: Service and Repair Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/ Reassembly 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Remove the battery tray. 5. Carefully remove the shift cable, select cable, and cable bracket together so as not to bend the cables. 6. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 7. Remove the bolts (A), transmission harness stay (B), and reverse lockout solenoid assembly (C). 8. Remove the roller (A) and select lock cam (B). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001) to the sealing surface. NOTE: If 4 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it, and assemble the housings. Al low it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly before filling the transmission with oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4331 11. Install the reverse lockout solenoid assembly (A) and transmission harness stay (B). 12. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 13. Install the cable bracket, select cable, and shift cable. 14. Install the battery base. 15. Install the air cleaner housing. 16. Install the battery. Connect the positive (+) cable first, then the negative (-) cable to the battery. 17. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 18. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 29. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B 30. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A and B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test results are OK, the valves are OK. ^ If the test results are not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing, 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector and solenoid valve B connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B resistances at each solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of either solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4339 14. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 15. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 16. Remove the O-rings (E), 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (H). 17. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No.1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B move. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4340 18. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 19. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 20. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 21. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 22. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 23. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 24. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 25. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 26. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 27. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 28. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 29. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 30. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4341 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid C with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test result is OK, the valve is OK. ^ If the test result is not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of the solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4342 14. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 15. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 16. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 17. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 18. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 19. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 20. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 21. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 22. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 23. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 24. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 25. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 7. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors. 8. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, O-rings (E), 8 x 8 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe H. 9. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 10. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 11. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 13. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 14. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 15. Install the. battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 16. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 17. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 18. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement > Page 4345 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 8. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 9. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 10. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 11. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4350 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4351 70. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4352 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 2003-2005-Model Type A Shift Lever and 2006-2007-Model Shift Lever 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Release the lock tab (A) securing the shift lock solenoid at the bottom of the shift lever assembly, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 3. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) and plunger spring (C) in the new shift lock solenoid (D). 4. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (E). 5. Install the shift lever assembly. 2003-2005-Model Type B Shift Lever 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (C). 4. Release the lock tab (D) securing the shift lock solenoid, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift look plunger (E) and plunger spring (F) in the new shift lock solenoid (G). 6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (H). 7. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket. 8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift lever bracket base, then connect the connector. 9. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 253. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (V6: A/T) 254. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (V6: A/T) 255. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the starter. 10. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector. 11. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 12. Replace shift solenoid valve A if the resistance is out of standard. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve A. 14. Install the starter. 15. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 16. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 17. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 18. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 19. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4358 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve B operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector. 6. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace shift solenoid valve B if the resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve B. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4359 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve C Test Shift Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve C operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector. 10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 11. Replace shift solenoid valve C if the resistance is out of standard. 12. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve C. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the starter. 7. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector, and remove shift solenoid valve A. 8. Install a new shift solenoid valve A with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 10. Install the starter. 11. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 12. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 13. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 14. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 15. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4362 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector, and remove shift solenoid valve B. 3. Install a new shift solenoid valve B with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4363 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector, and remove shift solenoid valve C. 7. Install a new shift solenoid valve C with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 9. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 10. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 11. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 12. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 13. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 260. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4367 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Lock up Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the torque converter clutch solenoid valve operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 6. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4368 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector, and remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 3. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Module: Testing and Inspection Electronic Control System PCM Electrical Connections Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4372 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4373 PCM Inputs And Outputs PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4374 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM Special Tools Required Honda diagnostic system (HDS) Honda Interface Module (HIM) HDS Pocket Tester NOTE: ^ Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM during troubleshooting procedures. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door locks, during the update. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of the dash. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. For '06-07 models: If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM. 4. For '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. For '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP Position Check, and follow the screen prompts with the HDS. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda interface module (HIM). 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown in the screen. If you run into a problem (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure, follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: ^ Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position. ^ Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). ^ Shut down the HDS. ^ Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ^ Reboot the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4377 ^ Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. For '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. How to Substitute the PCM Substituting the PCM Special Tools Required ^ Honda diagnostic system (HDS) ^ Honda interface module (HIM) ^ HDS pocket tester NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. '06-07 models: If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4378 8. Remove the center lower covers (A). 9. Remove the duct (B). 10. Disconnect the PCM connectors (C). 11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 12. Install the known good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 13. Open the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: '05-07 models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 18. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 20. '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4379 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove and Install the PCM How to Remove and Install the PCM 1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect PCM connectors. 6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM. 7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications A/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 2.9L (3.1 Qt) Overhaul .......................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. 7.2L (7.6 Qt) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4386 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .............................. Honda ATF-Z1 P/N 08200-9001 Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or more. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the ATF dipstick guide pipe, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. For 2003 model: Insert the dipstick (A) back with pointing the arrow (B) on the cap (C) to the front of the vehicle. 5. For 2004-2007 models: Insert the dipstick (A) back with pointing the arrow (B) on the cap (C) to the front of the vehicle, and aligning the notch on the cap with the guide tab (D). 6. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It should be between upper mark (B) and lower mark (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 4389 7. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid leaks at the transmission, hose and line joints. Note: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is below the lower mark: ^ Transmission damage will result. ^ Vehicle does not move in any gear. ^ Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when starting off in the D or R ranges. ^ Vibration results from created by the engine at idle. 8. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to proper level. Note: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is above the upper mark, vehicle moves in the N position, and shifting malfunction will occur. 9. If necessary fill the transmission through the dipstick guide pipe opening (A) to bring the fluid level up to about midway between the upper mark and lower mark of the dipstick with ATF. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 10. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide pipe. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 4390 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Refill transmission with the recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) with a new sealing washer (C). 7. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark and lower mark on the dipstick. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Oil Jet Hoses Now Available Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Oil Jet Hoses Now Available SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Replacement Oil Jet Hoses Now Available APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord V6 with A/T Oil Jet Kit installed 02-04 Odyssey with A/T Oil Jet Kit installed 03-04 Pilot with A/T Oil Jet Kit installed SERVICE TIP: Honda parts stock now carries replacement oil jet hoses. You no longer need to order the entire A/T Oil Jet Kit just to replace a damaged oil jet hose. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Oil Jet Hoses Now Available > Page 4395 Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Fixing A/T Banjo Bolt Leaks APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got ATF leaking from any of the A/T banjo bolts? The first thing you need to do is replace the sealing washers. Next, start threading the banjo and line bracket bolts in their holes. Finally, torque the banjo bolt to 31 Nm (22 lb-ft) and the line bracket bolt to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft.). NOTE: The banjo bolt torque spec we're recommending is slightly higher than what's listed in the S/M. This is intentional. If you torque just the banjo bolt, you won't really fix the leak. ATF leaks at the banjo bolt stem from the line bracket getting tightened before the banjo bolt. This can misalign the banjo joint, causing the banjo bolt sealing washers not to contact their mating surfaces evenly. Once the sealing washers have been used, you must replace them. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4396 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Hose Replacement 1. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (A) on the ATF filter (B) until they are 5 - 6 mm (0.20 - 0.24 inch) away from the filter housing. 2. Secure the hoses with the clip (C) at 10 - 12 mm (0.39 - 0.47 inch) (D) from the filter housing (E). 3. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (F) over the ATF cooler lines (G). 4. Secure the hoses with the clips (H) at 5 - 6 mm (0.20 - 0.24 inch) (I) from the hose ends, and secure the hoses at the ATF cooler with the clips (J) at 2 - 4 mm (0.08 - 0.16 inch) (K) from the hose ends. 5. Install the hoses on the clamps (L) at the marks (M). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4400 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 241. 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 4. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (D). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt, and connect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 9. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4403 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 9. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 10. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4418 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4424 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Maintenance Indicator A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 29. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B 30. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A and B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test results are OK, the valves are OK. ^ If the test results are not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing, 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector and solenoid valve B connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B resistances at each solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of either solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4434 14. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 15. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 16. Remove the O-rings (E), 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (H). 17. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No.1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B move. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4435 18. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 19. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 20. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 21. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 22. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 23. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 24. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 25. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 26. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 27. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 28. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 29. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 30. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4436 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid C with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test result is OK, the valve is OK. ^ If the test result is not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of the solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 4437 14. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 15. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 16. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 17. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 18. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 19. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 20. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 21. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 22. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 23. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 24. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 25. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 7. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors. 8. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, O-rings (E), 8 x 8 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe H. 9. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 10. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 11. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 13. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 14. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 15. Install the. battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 16. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 17. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 18. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement > Page 4440 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 8. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 9. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 10. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 11. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Module: Testing and Inspection Electronic Control System PCM Electrical Connections Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4445 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4446 PCM Inputs And Outputs PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4447 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM Special Tools Required Honda diagnostic system (HDS) Honda Interface Module (HIM) HDS Pocket Tester NOTE: ^ Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM during troubleshooting procedures. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door locks, during the update. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of the dash. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. For '06-07 models: If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM. 4. For '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. For '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP Position Check, and follow the screen prompts with the HDS. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda interface module (HIM). 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown in the screen. If you run into a problem (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure, follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: ^ Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position. ^ Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). ^ Shut down the HDS. ^ Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ^ Reboot the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4450 ^ Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. For '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. How to Substitute the PCM Substituting the PCM Special Tools Required ^ Honda diagnostic system (HDS) ^ Honda interface module (HIM) ^ HDS pocket tester NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. '06-07 models: If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4451 8. Remove the center lower covers (A). 9. Remove the duct (B). 10. Disconnect the PCM connectors (C). 11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 12. Install the known good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 13. Open the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: '05-07 models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 18. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 20. '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 4452 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove and Install the PCM How to Remove and Install the PCM 1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect PCM connectors. 6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM. 7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4457 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 241. 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 4. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (D). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt, and connect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 9. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 4460 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 9. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 10. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4469 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4470 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4471 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4472 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4473 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4474 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4475 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4476 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4477 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4487 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4488 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4489 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4499 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4500 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4501 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4502 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4503 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4504 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4505 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4506 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4507 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4517 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4518 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4519 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4520 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4521 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4522 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4523 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4524 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4525 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4534 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4535 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4536 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4539 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4540 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4541 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4542 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4543 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4544 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4545 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 4546 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior Replacement Sun Visor Information Sun Visor: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Replacement Sun Visor Information Always Use Correct Replacement Sunvisors Need to replace one or both of the sunvisors in a '03-04 Accord? Make sure you order and install the correct replacement sunvisor for that vehicle. This is especially important if it's got side curtain airbags. Never install a sunvisor made for a vehicle without side curtain airbags in a vehicle with them. The consequences could be dire; just read the letter we sent to all dealerships on March 29, 2005, titled "Vehicle Modifications Affecting Safety Systems." This is serious stuff. Fortunately, there's a real easy way to tell which sunvisor goes with which vehicle. In vehicles with side curtain airbags, the entire sunvisor extends on its mount. In vehicles without side curtain airbags, the sunvisors have a plastic extender that slides in and out. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment Make sure the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker can be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out. 1. Loosen the screws (B), then insert a shop towel (C) between the body and striker. 2. Lightly tighten the screws. 3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (D). Do not tap the striker too hard. 4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel. 5. Lightly tighten the screws. 6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > System Information > Page 4553 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > System Information > Page 4554 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > System Information > Page 4555 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4559 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4560 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4561 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4562 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4563 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4564 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4565 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4566 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor 173. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4573 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4574 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4575 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor 117. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor > Page 4578 106. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4581 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects mainshaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4584 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4585 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 6. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A) from the end cover. 7. Install the new O-ring (B) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the end cover. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 9. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 10. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 12. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4586 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Reposition the under-hood fuse/relay box to gain access to the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 6. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 7. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 8. Remove the bolt securing the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (A) from the transmission housing. 9. Install the new O-ring (B) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 10. Check for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 12. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 13. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4590 247. ATF Temperature Sensor (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4591 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 10. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 11. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the jack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4592 12. Remove the transmission lower front mount. 13. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 14. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B), then remove the sensor. 15. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new ATF temperature sensor (D), then install the sensor. 16. Secure the ATF temperature sensor harness clamp (E) with the bolts. 17. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 18. Install the transmission lower front mount. 19. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and remove the transmission jack. 21. Refill the transmission with ATF. 22. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 23. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 24. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4598 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4599 70. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4600 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 2003-2005-Model Type A Shift Lever and 2006-2007-Model Shift Lever 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Release the lock tab (A) securing the shift lock solenoid at the bottom of the shift lever assembly, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 3. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) and plunger spring (C) in the new shift lock solenoid (D). 4. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (E). 5. Install the shift lever assembly. 2003-2005-Model Type B Shift Lever 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (C). 4. Release the lock tab (D) securing the shift lock solenoid, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift look plunger (E) and plunger spring (F) in the new shift lock solenoid (G). 6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (H). 7. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket. 8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift lever bracket base, then connect the connector. 9. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4609 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4610 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4611 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4612 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4613 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4614 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4615 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4616 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4617 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4627 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4628 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4629 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4630 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4631 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4632 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4633 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4634 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 4635 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4642 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4643 141. Park Pin Switch/A/T Gear Position Console Light (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4644 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement NOTE: The park pin switch replacement is applied for the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever, the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever park pin switch is not available separately. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (C), then remove it from the bracket base. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (D), then remove the bulb (E) from the socket. 5. Remove the shift lock release lever (F). 6. Remove the park pin switch, and install the new switch (G) by aligning the tabs (H) with the slots (I). 7. Install the shift lock release lever. 8. Install the bulb in the socket, then install the socket in the bracket base. 9. Install the indicator panel on the bracket base. 10. Install the park pin switch connector on the bracket base, then connect the connector. 11. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 253. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (V6: A/T) 254. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (V6: A/T) 255. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the starter. 10. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector. 11. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 12. Replace shift solenoid valve A if the resistance is out of standard. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve A. 14. Install the starter. 15. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 16. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 17. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 18. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 19. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4650 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve B operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector. 6. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace shift solenoid valve B if the resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve B. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 4651 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve C Test Shift Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve C operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector. 10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 11. Replace shift solenoid valve C if the resistance is out of standard. 12. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve C. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the starter. 7. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector, and remove shift solenoid valve A. 8. Install a new shift solenoid valve A with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 10. Install the starter. 11. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 12. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 13. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 14. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 15. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4654 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector, and remove shift solenoid valve B. 3. Install a new shift solenoid valve B with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 4655 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector, and remove shift solenoid valve C. 7. Install a new shift solenoid valve C with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 9. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 10. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 11. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 12. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 13. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Scratches Around Shift Lock Release Slot Shifter A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Scratches Around Shift Lock Release Slot SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Scratches Around Shift Lock Release Slot APPLIES TO: 03-05 Accord with Automatic Transmission SERVICE TIP: We've gotten a number of warranty claims for scratches around the shift lock release slot on '03-05 Accords with A/T. If you need to use the shift lock release, be really careful when you insert the ignition key into the slot. The acrylic surface of the A/T gear position indicator panel can be easily scratched or marred if you miss the slot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4660 Shifter A/T: Diagrams '03-05-Model Type A Shift Lever Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4661 '03-05-Model Type B Shift Lever Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Removal Shift Lever Removal 1. Remove the center console. 2. Shift the transmission into the R position. 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. 4. Press the holder lock release (A), and pull out the socket holder (B) on the shift cable (C) of the shift lever bracket base (D). Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (E). 5. Disconnect shift lock solenoid connector (A) and park pin switch connector (B). NOTE: The illustration shows the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever; the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever are similar. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4664 6. Remove the shift lever assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4665 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Installation Shift Lever Installation 1. Install the shift lever assembly. NOTE: The illustration shows the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever; the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever are similar. 2. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) and park pin switch connector (B), and install the harness clamps (C) on the shift lever bracket base. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the R position indicator comes on. 4. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (A) to adjust the shift cable (B). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4666 6. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin (A) through the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever. The shift lever is secured in the R position. 7. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) with the slot in the bracket base (C), then slide the holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud. Push the holder until it snaps securely in place. Do not install the shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (H). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4667 8. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B). 9. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from the bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the bracket base. 10. Install and tighten the nut. 11. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever. 12. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch. 13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases. 14. Reinstall the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4668 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Disassembly & Reassembly '03-05-Model Type A Shift Lever Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 4669 '03-05-Model Type B Shift Lever Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Shift Cable Adjustment Service Manual Correction Shift Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Shift Cable Adjustment Service Manual Correction SOURCE: Honda Service News May 2003 TITLE: Service Manual Shift Cable Adjustment APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord SERVICE TIP: Pages 14-207, 14-212, and 14-214 of the 2003 Accord S/M need fixing. The illustration for step 4 on page 14-207, step 17 on page 14-212, and step 6 on page 14-214 should look like this. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4675 Shift Cable: Adjustments Shift Cable Adjustment 1. Remove the center console. 2. Shift the transmission into the R position, 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. 4. Press the holder lock release (A), and pull out the socket holder (B) on the shift cable (C) of the shift lever bracket base (D). Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (E). 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (A) to adjust the shift cable (B). 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the R position indicator comes on. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4676 8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin (A) through the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever. The shift lever is secured in the R position. 9. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) with the slot in the bracket base (C), then slide the holder into base. Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud. Push the holder until it snaps securely in place. Do not install the shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (H). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4677 10. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B). 11. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from the bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the bracket base. 12. Install and tighten the nut. 13. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever. 14. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch. 15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases. 16. Reinstall the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4678 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Cable Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Shift the transmission into the R position. 4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. 5. Press the holder lock release (A), and pull out the socket holder (B) on the shift cable (C) of the shift lever bracket base (D). 6. Remove the heat shield under the shift cable grommet. 7. Remove the shift cable bracket (A) and grommet (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4679 8. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A), then remove the shift cable cover (B). NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint, remove the bolts securing the holder before removing the bolts securing the cover. 9. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever (D), then remove the shift cable (E) and the control lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively. 10. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet hole. Do not bend the shift cable excessively. 11. Install the shift cable bracket on the body, then install the grommet. 12. Verify that the transmission is in the R position at the control lever. 13. Install the selector control lever on the selector control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable excessively. 14. Install the lock bolt with a new lock washer, then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt head. 15. Install the shift cable cover, then secure the shift cable holder on the cover with the bolts. NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure install the shift cable holder after installing the shift cable cover to the torque converter housing. 16. Install the heat shield. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the R position indicator comes on. 18. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (A) to adjust the shift cable (B). 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4680 20. Insert a step 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin (A) through the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever. The shift lever is secured in the R position. 21. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) with the slot in the bracket base (C), then slide the holder into base. Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud. Push the holder until it snaps securely in place. Do not install the shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (H). 22. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B). 23. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from the bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the bracket base. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4681 24. Install and tighten the nut. 25. Remove the step 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever. 26. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch. 27. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely. 28. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation in all gears. 29. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases. 30. Reinstall the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Keep Torque Converter on Mainshaft to Avoid Damage APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to keep the torque converter in place when you're handling or installing a reman A/T. If the torque converter slips off the mainshaft, and you don't put it back on the shaft exactly right, you could cut the O-ring. This could result in loss of lock-up control and ATF leakage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 260. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4692 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Lock up Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the torque converter clutch solenoid valve operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 6. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4693 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector, and remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 3. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4698 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information 89-022 May 16, 2008 Applies To: Vehicles With an In-Radiator ATF Cooler - ALL ATF Cooler Cleaner (Supersedes 89-022, dated June 18, 2004, to update the information marked by asterisks) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured A/T, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat A/T failure. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (PIN GTHTTCF6H) is a portable, electrically operated special tool that cleans the ATF cooler with high- pressure, heated ATF. This cleaning action melts down waxy varnish residue left by burnt ATF and purges metal particles, clutch material, and other contaminants. The ATF Cooler Cleaner has these features: ^ Quick-connect fittings and color-coded hoses for easy hookup. ^ Uses about 9.5 gallons of Honda ATF-Z1, which gets filtered and recirculated. ^ Heats ATF to a temperature of 1400 to 150°F and then pumps it through the ATF cooler at high pressure (100 psi) using a pulsating action and air purging. Switching the hoses cleans the ATF cooler in the reverse direction. ^ Two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters to trap purged contaminants. ^ Built-in tool tray. This service bulletin gives you information for ordering and servicing this special tool, and guides you through the entire ATF cooler cleaning process. *REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001 Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter: T/N GTHNBP12 (12-pack) T/N GTHNBP2 (6-pack) T/N GTHGNBP22 (2-pack) ORDERING INFORMATION Additional ATF cooler cleaners or magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order on the iN, click on SERVICE, then Service Bay, then Tool and Equipment Program. From the Tool and Equipment Program menu, click on the Online Catalog tab, and then search for the desired filter pack by part number.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4699 TOOL DESCRIPTION CLEANING PROCEDURE The cleaning procedure involves hot fluid under high pressure. Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, gloves, and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow all instructions in this bulletin. 1. Plug the ATF cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light cord; you would damage the unit. 2. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4700 3. Connect the appropriate fittings to the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line going to the external filter). Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 4. Connect a shop air hose to the air purge valve. NOTICE The quick connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 5. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 6. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 7. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler, then connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 8. Connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 9. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. 10. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 11. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 12. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 13. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 14. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. TOOL MAINTENANCE Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: *^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters every 20 hours, based on hour meter reading. For more information on filter replacement, see the January 2008 Honda ServiceNews article, Hour Meter Tells You When to Replace ATF Cooler Cleaner Filters.* ^ Fill the tank so the ATF is 4.5 inches from the top of the filler hole; do not overfill. NOTE: If the fluid level is low, the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on and the tank heater will not work. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4701 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4702 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4703 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Leak From Cooler Line Banjo Bolt SOURCE: Honda Service News December 2003 TITLE: ATF Leaks From Cooler Line Banjo Bolt APPLIES TO: 1998-04 Accords, 2001-04 Civics, 1997-04 CR-Vs, 1999-04 Odysseys, 2003-04 Pilots SERVICE TIP: The banjo bolts and sealing washers on the ATF cooler lines are delicate and can be easily damaged if the line or the banjo bolt gets hit. Any movement of the line or the banjo bolt crushes the two sealing washers and lets ATF leak past the seals. Before you install an A/T or try finding an ATF leak, check the banjo bolt torque on the ATF cooler lines. If a banjo bolt is loose, remove the bolt along with the sealing washers. And if the cooler line has a bracket, remove that bolt too. Inspect the sealing surface on the A/T housing. If the surface is OK, reinstall the banjo bolt with new sealing washers, and torque the bolt to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft). Reinstall the bolt for the line bracket (if applicable), and torque the bolt to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Cooler Flushing Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Flushing ATF Cooler Flushing Special Tools Required Commercially Available Transmission Cooler Flusher Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent This procedure should be performed before reinstalling the transmission. 1. Check equipment for wear and cracks before using. Replace any worn or cracked components. 2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21 ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on the fluid container. 3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the flusher with compressed air to 550 - 829 kPa (5.6 - 8.45 kgf/cm2, 80 - 120 psi). The air line should be equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air system. 4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle. 5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (B) to the return line of the ATF cooler using a clamp. 6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or floor drain. 7. With the water and air valves (E) off, attach the water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if available.) 8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water does not flow through the cooler, it is completely plugged, it cannot be flushed, and must be replaced. 9. Press the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger down. 10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for 2 minutes, turn the air valve on for 5 seconds every 15 - 20 seconds to create a surging action. Air Pressure: MAX 845 kPa (8.45 kgf/cm2, 120 psi) 11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10. 12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler with water for 1 minute. 13. Turn the water valve off and the water supply off. 14. Turn the air valve on for 2 minutes, or until no moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the transmission. 15. Remove the flusher from the cooler line. Attach the drain hose to an ATF container. 16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose attached to the cooler line. 17. Make sure the transmission is in the P position. Fill the transmission with ATF, and run the engine for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 L (1.0 US qt.) is discharged. 18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler return hose to the transmission. 19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Cooler Flushing > Page 4706 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Cleaning ATF Cooler Cleaning Special Tools Required ^ ATF Cooler Cleaner GHTTTCF6H ^ Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-on Filter GTHGNBP2 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission failure. The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1 delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. WARNING: ^ Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. ^ Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow this procedure. 1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. Use only Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE: Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light; you could damage the unit. 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gouge reads 140° to 150°F.) NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too low for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this procedure). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Cooler Flushing > Page 4707 4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner. 5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line that normally goes to the external filter on the transmission). 6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to 125 psi) to the air purge valve. NOTICE: The quick-connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5 minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the filler/breather tube vents. 9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve. 10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5 minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the filler/breather tube vents. 13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve. 14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the, coupler if used. 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. Tool Maintenance Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Cooler Flushing > Page 4708 Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: ^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters once a year or when you notice a restriction in the ATF flow. ^ Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank before each use. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Fluid Warmer - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Warmer - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Warmer Replacement NOTE: Replace the ATF warmer with a new one whenever the transmission assembly is replaced. 1. Lift the vehicle upon a lift or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the harness clamps (A) and harness cover (B) from the harness clamp bracket (C), and remove the bolt securing the bracket. 6. Disconnect the water hoses (D) from the ATF warmer (E). 7. Put a shop rugs around the ATF warmer (A) to catch the ATF that flows out. 8. Remove the bolts securing the ATF warmer and the bracket (B), then remove the ATF warmer from the transmission 9. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages. Do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission 10. Install the new ATF warmer with the new O-rings (C) and the bracket. Do not pinch the O-rings. 11. Connect the water hoses on the ATF warmer, and secure the hoses with the clips. 12. Install the harness clamp bracket bolt, and install the harness clamps and harness cover on the bracket. 13. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 14. Fill the radiator with the engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system. 15. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4715 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4716 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4717 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4718 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4719 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4720 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4721 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4722 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor 173. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4729 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4730 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 4731 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor 117. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor > Page 4734 106. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4737 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects mainshaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4740 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4741 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 6. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A) from the end cover. 7. Install the new O-ring (B) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the end cover. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 9. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 10. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 12. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4742 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Reposition the under-hood fuse/relay box to gain access to the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 6. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 7. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 8. Remove the bolt securing the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (A) from the transmission housing. 9. Install the new O-ring (B) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 10. Check for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 12. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 13. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4746 247. ATF Temperature Sensor (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4747 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 10. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 11. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the jack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4748 12. Remove the transmission lower front mount. 13. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 14. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B), then remove the sensor. 15. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new ATF temperature sensor (D), then install the sensor. 16. Secure the ATF temperature sensor harness clamp (E) with the bolts. 17. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 18. Install the transmission lower front mount. 19. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and remove the transmission jack. 21. Refill the transmission with ATF. 22. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 23. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 24. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Pressure plate compressor 07AAE-P8EA000 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07AAF-P8EA000 ^ Pressure plate compressor adapter 07AAK-P8EA000 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 NOTICE: You must use the special tools required to remove and install the clutch pressure plate or you will irreversibly damage it. Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tool and feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 2. Install the special tools. 3. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw until it stops. 4. Loosen the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in the pattern shown in several steps, then remove the bolts. 5. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then install two pressure plate mounting bolts, hand-tight, to hold the pressure plate (B). Remove the special tools and the pressure plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4753 6. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 7. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 8. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 9. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 10. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it and the pressure plate as a set, and find the source of the oil leak if oil soaked. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4754 11. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and pressure plate as a set. 12. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and the pressure plate as a set. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is not within the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4755 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing with your finger. The pilot bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the pilot bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the crankshaft, replace the pilot bearing. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Replacement 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4756 4. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the flywheel using the special tools. Apply a light coat of oil to the bearing surface. 5. Install the flywheel and mounting bolts, finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splices of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4757 4. Align a white mark (A) across the pressure plate (B) and flywheel (C). 5. Install the pressure plate (B) and the mounting bolts (D) finger-tight. 6. Install the special tools. 7. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw unit it stops. 8. Be careful not to damage the pressure plate (A). Tighten (180 degrees apart) the pressure plate mounting bolts (B) in a star pattern in several steps. 9. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then remove the special tools. 10. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4758 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D). Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release fork set spring (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4759 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off overflowed grease. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications CLUTCH LINE FLUID TYPE Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4772 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4773 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4774 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4780 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4781 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4782 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged 05-012 October 17, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Moonroof Glass Weatherstrip Is Damaged (Supersedes 05-012, dated April 8, 2005, to update the information marked by the black bars) PROBLEM The moonroof glass weatherstrip is damaged. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Depending on the vehicle, replace the moonroof glass weatherstrip, REPAIR PROCEDURE A, or replace the moonroof glass, REPAIR PROCEDURE B. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 4788 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Same as listed in PARTS INFORMATION Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the moon roof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. 2. Place a piece of masking tape on the middle of the front edge of the moonroof glass. Make sure that the tape is on the glass only and not touching the soft rubber of the weatherstrip. 3. Place a mark on the masking tape that aligns with the seam of the weatherstrip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 4789 4. Push down on the top of the old weatherstrip with your thumb until a small section separates from the moonroof. Once a section has started to separate, grip it and pull outward, working around the moonroof until the weatherstrip is completely removed (note the locations of the holes in the weatherstrip). 5. Align the seam of the new weatherstrip to the mark on the masking tape. Make sure the holes are pointed in the same direction as noted in step 4. 6. Press the ridge of the new weatherstrip into the groove on the moonroof where the masking tape is marked. Work toward one corner; then go back to the middle and work toward the opposite corner. Be careful not to stretch the weatherstrip. 7. Continue pressing along one side, from corner to corner; then press along the opposite side, from corner to corner. 8. At the rear of the moonroof, continue pressing from one corner to the middle; then press from the opposite corner to the middle until the strip is completely installed. 9. Reinstall the moonroof glass (refer to the Glass Replacement procedure). 10. Check for proper fit of the new weatherstrip by opening and closing the moonroof. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - GLASS REPLACEMENT Replace the moonroof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 4795 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Same as listed in PARTS INFORMATION Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the moon roof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. 2. Place a piece of masking tape on the middle of the front edge of the moonroof glass. Make sure that the tape is on the glass only and not touching the soft rubber of the weatherstrip. 3. Place a mark on the masking tape that aligns with the seam of the weatherstrip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 4796 4. Push down on the top of the old weatherstrip with your thumb until a small section separates from the moonroof. Once a section has started to separate, grip it and pull outward, working around the moonroof until the weatherstrip is completely removed (note the locations of the holes in the weatherstrip). 5. Align the seam of the new weatherstrip to the mark on the masking tape. Make sure the holes are pointed in the same direction as noted in step 4. 6. Press the ridge of the new weatherstrip into the groove on the moonroof where the masking tape is marked. Work toward one corner; then go back to the middle and work toward the opposite corner. Be careful not to stretch the weatherstrip. 7. Continue pressing along one side, from corner to corner; then press along the opposite side, from corner to corner. 8. At the rear of the moonroof, continue pressing from one corner to the middle; then press from the opposite corner to the middle until the strip is completely installed. 9. Reinstall the moonroof glass (refer to the Glass Replacement procedure). 10. Check for proper fit of the new weatherstrip by opening and closing the moonroof. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - GLASS REPLACEMENT Replace the moonroof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4797 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement NOTE: ^ Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio unit and the navigation system, then write down the audio presets. 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable. 4. Remove the battery. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove the battery base. 7. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the pedal pin (B) out of the yoke. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4798 8. Remove the reservoir mounting bolt (A). 9. Remove the clutch line bracket (B). 10. Remove the clutch line clips (C). 11. Remove the clutch master cylinder (D). 12. Disconnect the reservoir hose (A), then remove the retaining clip (B) and clutch line (C) from the clutch master cylinder (D). Plug or wrap the end of the reservoir hose and clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out. 13. Remove the 0-ring (E) and clutch master cylinder seal (F) from the clutch master cylinder. 14. Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. ^ Apply brake assembly lube to the clutch line, and install a new 0-ring. ^ Apply multipurpose grease to the pedal pin. ^ Install the battery base. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4799 ^ Install the air cleaner assembly. ^ Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable, and apply multipurpose grease to prevent corrosion. ^ Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio unit and the navigation system, then enter the audio presets, and set the clock. 15. Make sure the hose clamps (A) are positioned on the master cylinder (B) and reservoir (C) as shown. 16. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off, pry apart the tip of the retaining clip (B) with a screwdriver. 17. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. NOTE: Reservoir filling is covered in the bleeding procedure. 18. Make sure the fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 19. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch, and clutch interlock switch. 20. Check the clutch operation and check for leaks. 21. Test-drive the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Slave Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the mounting bolts (A), harness bracket (B), and slave cylinder (C). 4. Remove the roll pins (D). Disconnect the clutch line (E), and remove the O-ring (F). Plug the end of the clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out. 5. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Install a new O-ring (A). 6. Pull back the boot (B), and apply brake assembly lube to the boot and slave cylinder rod (C). Reinstall the boot. 7. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the pushrod of the slave cylinder. Tighten the slave cylinder mounting bolts to 22 Nm (2.2 kgf-m, 16 lbf-ft). 8. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. - Attach a hose to the bleeder screw (A), and suspend the hose in a container of brake fluid. - Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid in the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the bleeder hose. - It may be necessary to limit the movement of the release fork (B) with a block of wood to remove all the air from the system. - Tighten the bleeder screw to 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 lbf-ft); do not overtighten it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4803 - Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when done. - Use only Honda DOT 3 brake fluid from an unopened container. - Confirm clutch operation, and check for leaking fluid. 9. Make sure the fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 10. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable. Apply multipurpose grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Test-drive vehicle. 12. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio unit and navigation system, then enter the audio presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Hydraulic Hose: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4812 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4813 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4814 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4820 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4821 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 4822 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Adjustments Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen the clutch push-rod locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H) and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 - 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 191 mm (7.52 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 95 mm (3.74 inch) 3. Tighten the clutch push-rod locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C). 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A). 7. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4826 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Replacement 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch connector (A) and clutch interlock switch connector (B). 2. Pry out the lock pin (C), and pull the pedal pin (D) out of the yoke. 3. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (E) and clutch pedal mounting bolt (F). 4. Remove the clutch pedal (G). 5. Install the clutch pedal (A). 6. Install the clutch pedal mounting bolt (B) and master cylinder mounting nuts (C). 7. Apply grease to the pedal pin (D), and slide it into the yoke, then install a new lock pin (E). 8. Connect the clutch pedal position switch connector (F) and clutch interlock switch connector (G). 9. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch, and clutch interlock switch. 10. Check the clutch operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4830 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4831 37. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4832 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4833 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen the clutch push-rod locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H) and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 - 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 191 mm (7.52 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 95 mm (3.74 inch) 3. Tighten the clutch push-rod locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C). 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A). 7. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Pressure plate compressor 07AAE-P8EA000 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07AAF-P8EA000 ^ Pressure plate compressor adapter 07AAK-P8EA000 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 NOTICE: You must use the special tools required to remove and install the clutch pressure plate or you will irreversibly damage it. Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tool and feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 2. Install the special tools. 3. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw until it stops. 4. Loosen the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in the pattern shown in several steps, then remove the bolts. 5. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then install two pressure plate mounting bolts, hand-tight, to hold the pressure plate (B). Remove the special tools and the pressure plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4837 6. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 7. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 8. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 9. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 10. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it and the pressure plate as a set, and find the source of the oil leak if oil soaked. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4838 11. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and pressure plate as a set. 12. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and the pressure plate as a set. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is not within the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4839 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing with your finger. The pilot bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the pilot bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the crankshaft, replace the pilot bearing. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Replacement 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4840 4. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the flywheel using the special tools. Apply a light coat of oil to the bearing surface. 5. Install the flywheel and mounting bolts, finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splices of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4841 4. Align a white mark (A) across the pressure plate (B) and flywheel (C). 5. Install the pressure plate (B) and the mounting bolts (D) finger-tight. 6. Install the special tools. 7. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw unit it stops. 8. Be careful not to damage the pressure plate (A). Tighten (180 degrees apart) the pressure plate mounting bolts (B) in a star pattern in several steps. 9. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then remove the special tools. 10. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4842 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D). Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release fork set spring (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4843 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off overflowed grease. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Pressure Plate Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tool and feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. Be careful not to damage the pressure plate (A). Tighten (180 degrees apart) the pressure plate mounting bolts (B) in a star pattern in several steps. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4847 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Pressure plate compressor 07AAE-P8EA000 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07AAF-P8EA000 ^ Pressure plate compressor adapter 07AAK-P8EA000 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 NOTICE: You must use the special tools required to remove and install the clutch pressure plate or you will irreversibly damage it. Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tool and feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 2. Install the special tools. 3. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw until it stops. 4. Loosen the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in the pattern shown in several steps, then remove the bolts. 5. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then install two pressure plate mounting bolts, hand-tight, to hold the pressure plate (B). Remove the special tools and the pressure plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4848 6. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 7. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 8. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 9. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 10. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it and the pressure plate as a set, and find the source of the oil leak if oil soaked. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4849 11. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and pressure plate as a set. 12. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and the pressure plate as a set. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is not within the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4850 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing with your finger. The pilot bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the pilot bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the crankshaft, replace the pilot bearing. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Replacement 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4851 4. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the flywheel using the special tools. Apply a light coat of oil to the bearing surface. 5. Install the flywheel and mounting bolts, finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splices of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4852 4. Align a white mark (A) across the pressure plate (B) and flywheel (C). 5. Install the pressure plate (B) and the mounting bolts (D) finger-tight. 6. Install the special tools. 7. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw unit it stops. 8. Be careful not to damage the pressure plate (A). Tighten (180 degrees apart) the pressure plate mounting bolts (B) in a star pattern in several steps. 9. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then remove the special tools. 10. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4853 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D). Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release fork set spring (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4854 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off overflowed grease. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid Line/Hose, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Fixing A/T Banjo Bolt Leaks APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got ATF leaking from any of the A/T banjo bolts? The first thing you need to do is replace the sealing washers. Next, start threading the banjo and line bracket bolts in their holes. Finally, torque the banjo bolt to 31 Nm (22 lb-ft) and the line bracket bolt to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft.). NOTE: The banjo bolt torque spec we're recommending is slightly higher than what's listed in the S/M. This is intentional. If you torque just the banjo bolt, you won't really fix the leak. ATF leaks at the banjo bolt stem from the line bracket getting tightened before the banjo bolt. This can misalign the banjo joint, causing the banjo bolt sealing washers not to contact their mating surfaces evenly. Once the sealing washers have been used, you must replace them. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Torque Converter, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Keep Torque Converter on Mainshaft to Avoid Damage APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to keep the torque converter in place when you're handling or installing a reman A/T. If the torque converter slips off the mainshaft, and you don't put it back on the shaft exactly right, you could cut the O-ring. This could result in loss of lock-up control and ATF leakage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 4877 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation 98-018 July 22, 2003 Applies To: ALL Models Driveshaft Boot Band Tool (Supersedes 98-018, Boot Band Tool, dated April 14, 1998) Updated information is shown by asterisks. The replacement boot bands for the driveshaft CV joint boots have changed. The replacement bands are a double loop type that require a special tool for proper installation. * TOOL INFORMATION Boot Band Tool: T/N KD-3191 This tool is already at your dealership. To order additional tools, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old boot band(s). Take care not to damage the boot. 2. Remove and inspect the boot. Replace the boot if it is worn or damaged. 3. Install the boot, and fill it with the specified amount and type of grease. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual for the grease amount and type. 4. Adjust the driveshaft to the proper length. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 5. Install the replacement boot band onto the large end of the boot with the end of the band facing toward the front of the vehicle. 6. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, and hold the boot band in place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation > Page 4888 7. Measure and mark the band with a felt-tip pen at the specified distance from the clip: ^ If you are installing a new boot, mark the band approximately 10 to 14 mm (0.4 to 0.6 in.) from the clip. ^ If you are reinstalling the original boot, mark the band 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the clip. 8. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the boot band tool and into the slot on the winding mandrel. 9. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, then slowly turn the winding mandrel with a wrench. Tighten the band until the mark you made in step 7 meets the edge of the clip. 10. Raise up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees, then center-punch the clip to hold the band temporarily. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation > Page 4889 11. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess 5 to 10 mm (0.2 to 0.4 in.) from the clip. 12. Secure the end of the boot band by tapping it down over the clip with a hammer. 13. Make sure that the boot band and clip do not interfere with anything and that the band does not move. 14. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 13 to install the boot band on the small end of the boot. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Support - Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Pinging Or Buzzing Between 1500 & 2500 RPM Support - Half Shaft/Short Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Pinging Or Buzzing Between 1500 & 2500 RPM SOURCE: Honda Service News October 2004 TITLE: Pinging or Buzzing Between 1,500 and 2,500 RPM APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: Got a 2003-04 Accord V6 in your shop that pings, buzzes, or whistles under load with the engine running at 1,500 to 2,500 rpm? The culprit could be the intermediate shaft bearing heat shield. This noise can change with engine temperature and may be intermittent. Sometimes, you can hear this noise only when the engine is cold. If you suspect the intermediate shaft heat shield is making all the racket, remove it, and test-drive the vehicle. If the noise goes away, then replace the heat shield. If you hear the noise even without the heat shield, then hook up a STEELMAN(R) ChassisEAR(R) diagnostic tool (T/N JSP-SM06600) to pinpoint the source. To keep from damaging the intermediate shaft bearing, don't drive the vehicle without the heat shield for more than a few minutes. STEELMAN(R) and ChassisEAR(R) are registered trademarks of J.S. Products, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2004 TITLE: Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement APPLIES TO: 2000-04 Accords, 1999-04 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots SERVICE TIP: With so many A/Ts being replaced lately, we're hearing reports of wheel bearing noise and comebacks because of it. What's causing the problem is use of high-powered impact wrenches to install the spindle nuts on the driveshafts. - Before you remove the spindle nut, make sure you first raise the stake on the nut. Not only does this make removing the nut easier, but it prevents the driveshaft threads from getting damaged. Damaged threads can cause insufficient clamping force when installing the new spindle nut, and lead to noise. - Tighten the new spindle nut on the driveshaft with a torque wrench set to the spec listed in the appropriate S/M. Don't use a high powered impact wrench. The 400-700 lb-ft of torque it generates can overcompress the wheel bearing, causing damage and noise. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 4898 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearings - Humming Or Growling SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Humming or Growling? Check the Wheel Bearings APPLIES TO: 1998-04 Accord, 2001-04 CR-V, 2003 Element, 1999-04 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: A bad front wheel bearing(s) can make a humming or growling that's easily mistaken for a noisy bearing or gear in the A/T. Before you order a reman A/T, test-drive the vehicle to make sure the A/T is really the problem. Listen carefully as you accelerate and decelerate during your test-drive. Shift into neutral. Varying throttle position and shifting into neutral changes the load on the A/T bearings and gears. If the A/T has a bad bearing or gear, the change in load will affect its noise level. If that's what you find, then go ahead and order a reman A/T. If the noise level isn't affected by changes in throttle position or shifting into neutral, then the culprit could be a bad front wheel bearing(s). Since the wheel bearings aren't mounted on shafts being spread apart by gears, they're not affected by changes in load. Also, since Honda uses angular contact wheel bearings, you won't normally hear a change in noise level when you swerve the vehicle from side to side. Hook up a STEELMAN® ChassisEAR (T/N JSP SM06600) to the front knuckles, and test-drive the vehicle again. Refer to S/B 00-063, STEELMAN ChassisEAR Diagnostic Tool, for more info. If you hear humming or growling from one or affected wheel bearing(s), and then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the noise is gone. If you don't hear any noise from the front wheel bearings, the problem could be from tire noise or vibration. Swap the front wheels and tires with a known-good vehicle. Testdrive the vehicle, and check if the noise or vibration goes away. STEELMAN(R) and ChassisEAR (R) are registered trademarks of J.S. Products, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 4899 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing - Correct Installation To Prevent DTC's SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Install Wheel Bearings Correctly to Prevent DTCs APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord, 2002-03 CR-V, 2003 Element SERVICE TIP: When you replace a wheel bearing in a make sure you install it correctly. If you don't, these ABS DTCs can set: - ABS DTC 12, 14, 16, 18 [wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)] - ABS DTC 21, 22, 23, 24 (magnetic encoder) The brown dust shield for the wheel bearing also doubles as a magnetic encoder for the ABS. Before you install the wheel bearing, make sure the encoder is clean and free of metallic particles, then install it so the encoder is toward the inside of the knuckle. Install the encoder carefully so you don't damage its surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4900 Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing End Play Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play Front .................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4901 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4902 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts (A) and torque to the specified torque. Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play 3. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange or hub cap. 4. Measure the bearing end play moving the drum brake or brake disc inward and outward. Front/rear: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4903 Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Attachment, 78 x90 mm O7GAD-SD4O1O1 ^ Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm O7GAF-SD4O1O0 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 ^ Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD9O1OO Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4906 2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4907 6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4908 11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball joint remover. 14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 15 Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4909 NOTE: ^ Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. ^ During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint. 17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and on the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4910 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary. 5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4911 ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^ Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B) on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring when installing it. 9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. 11. Press a wheel bearing (A) onto the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4912 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Replacement Exploded View-Disc Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4913 Exploded View-Drum Brake Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Hub Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4914 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the hub cap (A). 6. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Screw two 8 X 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4915 10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Hub Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. 3. Remove the hub cap (A). 4. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4916 5. Release the parking brake lever, and remove the brake drum (A). Screw two 8X1.25 mm bolts (B) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 7. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high point solvent before reassembly. ^ Use a new spindle nut reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4917 3. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new clip after tightening the nut as shown. 4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer link bracket (E). 6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F) and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4918 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B). 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4919 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new clip into the ball joint pin as shown. 3. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 4. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (A), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D) and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4920 bracket (F). 6. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the flange bolts and rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 7. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (A) from the knuckle. 8. Remove the wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4921 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle. 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to wheel cylinder, and retighten if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 4927 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 4928 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flex Plate Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in two or more steps. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4932 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Drive Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the transmission assembly. 2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft. 3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in two or more steps. 4. Install the transmission assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is not within the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4936 Flywheel: Service and Repair Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Pressure plate compressor 07AAE-P8EA000 ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07AAF-P8EA000 ^ Pressure plate compressor adapter 07AAK-P8EA000 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 NOTICE: You must use the special tools required to remove and install the clutch pressure plate or you will irreversibly damage it. Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tool and feeler gauge. If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 2. Install the special tools. 3. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw until it stops. 4. Loosen the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in the pattern shown in several steps, then remove the bolts. 5. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then install two pressure plate mounting bolts, hand-tight, to hold the pressure plate (B). Remove the special tools and the pressure plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4937 6. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 7. Inspect the pressure plate surface (A) for wear, cracks, and burning. 8. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and a feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate and clutch disc as a set. 9. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 10. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it and the pressure plate as a set, and find the source of the oil leak if oil soaked. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4938 11. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and pressure plate as a set. 12. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc and the pressure plate as a set. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is not within the standard, replace the flywheel, and recheck the runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not recommended. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4939 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing with your finger. The pilot bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the pilot bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the crankshaft, replace the pilot bearing. Flywheel and Pilot Bearing Replacement 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4940 4. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the flywheel using the special tools. Apply a light coat of oil to the bearing surface. 5. Install the flywheel and mounting bolts, finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splices of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc slides freely on the mainshaft. 2. Install the ring gear holder. 3. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4941 4. Align a white mark (A) across the pressure plate (B) and flywheel (C). 5. Install the pressure plate (B) and the mounting bolts (D) finger-tight. 6. Install the special tools. 7. Turn the center screw (A) clockwise by hand to apply pressure on the diaphragm spring. Continue turning the center screw unit it stops. 8. Be careful not to damage the pressure plate (A). Tighten (180 degrees apart) the pressure plate mounting bolts (B) in a star pattern in several steps. 9. Turn the center screw on the pressure plate compressor counterclockwise by hand to release the pressure, then remove the special tools. 10. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Release Bearing Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4942 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D). Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it with your hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release fork set spring (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E). Make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4943 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B) and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off overflowed grease. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4959 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 4965 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations Gear Lockout Solenoid: Locations 245. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4971 252. Reverse Lockout Solenoid (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4972 Gear Lockout Solenoid: Service and Repair Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/ Reassembly 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Remove the battery tray. 5. Carefully remove the shift cable, select cable, and cable bracket together so as not to bend the cables. 6. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 7. Remove the bolts (A), transmission harness stay (B), and reverse lockout solenoid assembly (C). 8. Remove the roller (A) and select lock cam (B). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001) to the sealing surface. NOTE: If 4 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it, and assemble the housings. Al low it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly before filling the transmission with oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4973 11. Install the reverse lockout solenoid assembly (A) and transmission harness stay (B). 12. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 13. Install the cable bracket, select cable, and shift cable. 14. Install the battery base. 15. Install the air cleaner housing. 16. Install the battery. Connect the positive (+) cable first, then the negative (-) cable to the battery. 17. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 18. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Locations 243. Transmission Housing (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T - Leaks, Check for Overfilling Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Leaks, Check for Overfilling SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: MTF Leak? Check for Overfilling APPLIES TO: 03-05 6-speed Accord V6 SERVICE TIP: Got a '03-05 6-speed Accord V6 in your shop that's leaking MTF? Before you start troubleshooting, make sure the M/T isn't just overfilled. The M/T in these vehicles has a vent tube inside the clutch housing. If the M/T is overfilled, MTF will leak out the vent tube between the engine and the M/T. Checking the MTF level is really pretty simple. Just remove the oil check bolt and its washer. The MTF level should be no higher than the bottom of the oil check bolt hole. If the MTF level is higher than the hole, the MTF will drain out the hole until the level is right. If the MTF level is lower than the bottom of the oil check bolt hole, you'll need to top off the MTF. Remove the oil filler plug and its washer. Add Honda MTF through the oil filler plug hole until it starts running out the oil check bolt hole. Once the MTF stops running out the hole, reinstall the oil check bolt with a new washer. Torque the bolt to 12 N-m (8.7 lb-ft). Install the oil filler plug with a new washer. Torque the plug to 44 N-m (33 lb-ft). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications M/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 2.2L (2.3 Qt) Total ................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................ 2.5L (2.6 Qt) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4983 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications M/T Fluid Type ........................................................................................................................................ Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF): P/N 08798-9016 Always use Honda MTF. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4984 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the oil check bolt (A) and washer (B), check the condition of the fluid. If the fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (C) and washer (D). 4. Install the drain plug with a new washer. 5. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B). 6. Refill the transmission fluid from the oil filler plug hole of transmission, and until the transmission fluid overflows from the oil check bolt hole (A). 7. After it stops overflowing, install the oil check bolt (B) with a new washer (C). Fluid Capacity 2.2 litres (2.3 US qt) at fluid change 2.5 litres (2.6 US qt) at overhaul Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4985 8. Install the oil filter plug (A) with a new washer (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear Synchronizer Hub: Customer Interest M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear 08-020 September 17, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Transmission Grinds When Shifting Into 3rd Gear, Pops Out of 3rd Gear, or Is Hard to Shift Into 3rd Gear (Supersedes 08-020, dated July 18, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for wheel alignment was changed.* SYMPTOM The 6-speed manual transmission grinds when shifting into 3rd gear, pops out of 3rd gear, or is hard to shift into 3rd gear. NOTE: These symptoms can be intermittent and sometimes more noticeable in colder climates. PROBABLE CAUSE The transmission has a faulty 3rd gear synchronizer or 3-4 shift sleeve. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the 3rd gear set. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Additional Hardware Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 4995 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 4996 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 4997 NOTE: The following parts must be replaced when replacing the third gear set. Refer to the related service manual procedures for the locations of these parts. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine M/T Fluid: P/N 08798-9031 Accord: 2.6 qt. required Civic: 1.8 qt. required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23444-PNS-306 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04101 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS Drive a known-good vehicle under the same conditions as the customer's complaint, and compare the shift quality. If the customer's vehicle has noticeable shift quality problems, replace the 3rd gear set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 4998 NOTE: It is not uncommon for there to be some resistance or notchiness when shifting into third gear. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL REMOVAL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Removal procedure from the list. 2. Disassemble the transmission down to the mainshaft: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Disassembly procedure from the list. 3. Replace the 3rd gear set: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords M/T MAINSHAFT DIS, and select the appropriate M/T Mainshaft Disassembly procedure from the list. 4. Reassemble the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Reassembly procedure from the list. 5. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL INSTALL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Installation procedure from the list. 6. Check wheel alignment. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear Synchronizer Hub: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear 08-020 September 17, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Transmission Grinds When Shifting Into 3rd Gear, Pops Out of 3rd Gear, or Is Hard to Shift Into 3rd Gear (Supersedes 08-020, dated July 18, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for wheel alignment was changed.* SYMPTOM The 6-speed manual transmission grinds when shifting into 3rd gear, pops out of 3rd gear, or is hard to shift into 3rd gear. NOTE: These symptoms can be intermittent and sometimes more noticeable in colder climates. PROBABLE CAUSE The transmission has a faulty 3rd gear synchronizer or 3-4 shift sleeve. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the 3rd gear set. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Additional Hardware Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5004 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5005 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5006 NOTE: The following parts must be replaced when replacing the third gear set. Refer to the related service manual procedures for the locations of these parts. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine M/T Fluid: P/N 08798-9031 Accord: 2.6 qt. required Civic: 1.8 qt. required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23444-PNS-306 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04101 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS Drive a known-good vehicle under the same conditions as the customer's complaint, and compare the shift quality. If the customer's vehicle has noticeable shift quality problems, replace the 3rd gear set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5007 NOTE: It is not uncommon for there to be some resistance or notchiness when shifting into third gear. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL REMOVAL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Removal procedure from the list. 2. Disassemble the transmission down to the mainshaft: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Disassembly procedure from the list. 3. Replace the 3rd gear set: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords M/T MAINSHAFT DIS, and select the appropriate M/T Mainshaft Disassembly procedure from the list. 4. Reassemble the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Reassembly procedure from the list. 5. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL INSTALL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Installation procedure from the list. 6. Check wheel alignment. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear Synchronizer Ring: Customer Interest M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear 08-020 September 17, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Transmission Grinds When Shifting Into 3rd Gear, Pops Out of 3rd Gear, or Is Hard to Shift Into 3rd Gear (Supersedes 08-020, dated July 18, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for wheel alignment was changed.* SYMPTOM The 6-speed manual transmission grinds when shifting into 3rd gear, pops out of 3rd gear, or is hard to shift into 3rd gear. NOTE: These symptoms can be intermittent and sometimes more noticeable in colder climates. PROBABLE CAUSE The transmission has a faulty 3rd gear synchronizer or 3-4 shift sleeve. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the 3rd gear set. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Additional Hardware Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5016 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5017 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5018 NOTE: The following parts must be replaced when replacing the third gear set. Refer to the related service manual procedures for the locations of these parts. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine M/T Fluid: P/N 08798-9031 Accord: 2.6 qt. required Civic: 1.8 qt. required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23444-PNS-306 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04101 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS Drive a known-good vehicle under the same conditions as the customer's complaint, and compare the shift quality. If the customer's vehicle has noticeable shift quality problems, replace the 3rd gear set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5019 NOTE: It is not uncommon for there to be some resistance or notchiness when shifting into third gear. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL REMOVAL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Removal procedure from the list. 2. Disassemble the transmission down to the mainshaft: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Disassembly procedure from the list. 3. Replace the 3rd gear set: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords M/T MAINSHAFT DIS, and select the appropriate M/T Mainshaft Disassembly procedure from the list. 4. Reassemble the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Reassembly procedure from the list. 5. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL INSTALL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Installation procedure from the list. 6. Check wheel alignment. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear Synchronizer Ring: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear 08-020 September 17, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Transmission Grinds When Shifting Into 3rd Gear, Pops Out of 3rd Gear, or Is Hard to Shift Into 3rd Gear (Supersedes 08-020, dated July 18, 2008, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time for wheel alignment was changed.* SYMPTOM The 6-speed manual transmission grinds when shifting into 3rd gear, pops out of 3rd gear, or is hard to shift into 3rd gear. NOTE: These symptoms can be intermittent and sometimes more noticeable in colder climates. PROBABLE CAUSE The transmission has a faulty 3rd gear synchronizer or 3-4 shift sleeve. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the 3rd gear set. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Additional Hardware Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5025 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5026 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5027 NOTE: The following parts must be replaced when replacing the third gear set. Refer to the related service manual procedures for the locations of these parts. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine M/T Fluid: P/N 08798-9031 Accord: 2.6 qt. required Civic: 1.8 qt. required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 23444-PNS-306 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04101 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS Drive a known-good vehicle under the same conditions as the customer's complaint, and compare the shift quality. If the customer's vehicle has noticeable shift quality problems, replace the 3rd gear set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 08-020 > Sep > 10 > M/T - Grinds/Hard To Shift Into/Pops Out Of 3rd gear > Page 5028 NOTE: It is not uncommon for there to be some resistance or notchiness when shifting into third gear. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL REMOVAL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Removal procedure from the list. 2. Disassemble the transmission down to the mainshaft: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Disassembly procedure from the list. 3. Replace the 3rd gear set: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords M/T MAINSHAFT DIS, and select the appropriate M/T Mainshaft Disassembly procedure from the list. 4. Reassemble the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Reassembly procedure from the list. 5. Reinstall the transmission: ^ Refer to Section 13 of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords MANUAL INSTALL, and select the appropriate Manual Transmission Installation procedure from the list. 6. Check wheel alignment. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear Lockout > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations Gear Lockout Solenoid: Locations 245. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear Lockout > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5033 252. Reverse Lockout Solenoid (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear Lockout > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5034 Gear Lockout Solenoid: Service and Repair Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/ Reassembly 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Remove the battery tray. 5. Carefully remove the shift cable, select cable, and cable bracket together so as not to bend the cables. 6. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 7. Remove the bolts (A), transmission harness stay (B), and reverse lockout solenoid assembly (C). 8. Remove the roller (A) and select lock cam (B). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001) to the sealing surface. NOTE: If 4 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it, and assemble the housings. Al low it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly before filling the transmission with oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear Lockout > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5035 11. Install the reverse lockout solenoid assembly (A) and transmission harness stay (B). 12. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 13. Install the cable bracket, select cable, and shift cable. 14. Install the battery base. 15. Install the air cleaner housing. 16. Install the battery. Connect the positive (+) cable first, then the negative (-) cable to the battery. 17. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 18. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Locations 243. Transmission Housing (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5043 243. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5050 243. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Module: Testing and Inspection Electronic Control System PCM Electrical Connections Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5056 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5057 PCM Inputs And Outputs PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5058 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM Special Tools Required Honda diagnostic system (HDS) Honda Interface Module (HIM) HDS Pocket Tester NOTE: ^ Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM during troubleshooting procedures. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door locks, during the update. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of the dash. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. For '06-07 models: If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM. 4. For '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. For '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP Position Check, and follow the screen prompts with the HDS. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda interface module (HIM). 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown in the screen. If you run into a problem (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure, follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: ^ Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position. ^ Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). ^ Shut down the HDS. ^ Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ^ Reboot the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 5061 ^ Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. For '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. How to Substitute the PCM Substituting the PCM Special Tools Required ^ Honda diagnostic system (HDS) ^ Honda interface module (HIM) ^ HDS pocket tester NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. '06-07 models: If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 5062 8. Remove the center lower covers (A). 9. Remove the duct (B). 10. Disconnect the PCM connectors (C). 11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 12. Install the known good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 13. Open the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: '05-07 models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 18. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 20. '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 5063 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove and Install the PCM How to Remove and Install the PCM 1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect PCM connectors. 6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM. 7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5069 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 241. 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 4. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (D). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt, and connect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 9. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 5072 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 9. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 10. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5081 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5082 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5083 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5084 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5085 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5086 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5087 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5088 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5089 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5099 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5100 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5101 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5102 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5103 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5104 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5105 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5106 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5107 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5114 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5115 141. Park Pin Switch/A/T Gear Position Console Light (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5116 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement NOTE: The park pin switch replacement is applied for the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever, the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever park pin switch is not available separately. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (C), then remove it from the bracket base. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (D), then remove the bulb (E) from the socket. 5. Remove the shift lock release lever (F). 6. Remove the park pin switch, and install the new switch (G) by aligning the tabs (H) with the slots (I). 7. Install the shift lock release lever. 8. Install the bulb in the socket, then install the socket in the bracket base. 9. Install the indicator panel on the bracket base. 10. Install the park pin switch connector on the bracket base, then connect the connector. 11. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5120 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5121 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5122 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5123 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5124 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5125 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5126 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5127 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor 173. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 5134 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 5135 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 5136 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor 117. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor > Page 5139 106. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5142 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects mainshaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5145 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5146 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 6. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A) from the end cover. 7. Install the new O-ring (B) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the end cover. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 9. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 10. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 12. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5147 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Reposition the under-hood fuse/relay box to gain access to the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 6. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 7. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 8. Remove the bolt securing the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (A) from the transmission housing. 9. Install the new O-ring (B) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 10. Check for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 12. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 13. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5151 247. ATF Temperature Sensor (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5152 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 10. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 11. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the jack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5153 12. Remove the transmission lower front mount. 13. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 14. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B), then remove the sensor. 15. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new ATF temperature sensor (D), then install the sensor. 16. Secure the ATF temperature sensor harness clamp (E) with the bolts. 17. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 18. Install the transmission lower front mount. 19. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and remove the transmission jack. 21. Refill the transmission with ATF. 22. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 23. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 24. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5163 243. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 28. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 29. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B 30. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A and B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test results are OK, the valves are OK. ^ If the test results are not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing, 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector and solenoid valve B connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B resistances at each solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of either solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 5172 14. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 15. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 16. Remove the O-rings (E), 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (H). 17. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No.1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B move. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 5173 18. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 19. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B. 20. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 21. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 22. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 23. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 24. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 25. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 26. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 27. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 28. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 29. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 30. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 5174 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid C with the HDS. 4. Follow instructions on the HDS. ^ If the test result is OK, the valve is OK. ^ If the test result is not OK, go to step 5. 5. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 9. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 10. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 11. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector. Standard: 3 - 10 Ohms 12. If the resistance of the solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 14 and remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Test > Page 5175 14. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 15. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 16. Connect the battery negative terminal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 1. Make sure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves. 17. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body mounting surface. 18. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 19. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 20. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 21. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 22. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 23. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 24. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 25. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 7. Remove the harness clamp (C) from the clamp bracket (D), and disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors. 8. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, O-rings (E), 8 x 8 mm ATF feed pipes (F), gasket (G), and 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe H. 9. Place a new gasket on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes with their filter side into the transmission housing. 10. Install new O-rings over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe. 11. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B, and harness clamp. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. 13. Install the transmission upper mount bracket and bracket plate. 14. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 15. Install the. battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 16. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 17. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 18. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement > Page 5178 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector. 7. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. 8. Remove the gasket (A) and 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B). 9. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean the passage if necessary. 10. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe with its filter side into the transmission housing. 11. Install the new gasket in the mounting groove of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body properly, then install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C on the transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket. 12. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect it securely. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5183 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5184 70. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5185 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 2003-2005-Model Type A Shift Lever and 2006-2007-Model Shift Lever 1. Remove the shift lever assembly. 2. Release the lock tab (A) securing the shift lock solenoid at the bottom of the shift lever assembly, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 3. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) and plunger spring (C) in the new shift lock solenoid (D). 4. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (E). 5. Install the shift lever assembly. 2003-2005-Model Type B Shift Lever 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (C). 4. Release the lock tab (D) securing the shift lock solenoid, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift look plunger (E) and plunger spring (F) in the new shift lock solenoid (G). 6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the shift lock stop (H). 7. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket. 8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift lever bracket base, then connect the connector. 9. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 253. Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (V6: A/T) 254. Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (V6: A/T) 255. Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve A Test Shift Solenoid Valve A Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the starter. 10. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector. 11. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 12. Replace shift solenoid valve A if the resistance is out of standard. 13. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve A. 14. Install the starter. 15. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 16. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 17. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 18. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 19. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5191 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve B operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector. 6. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace shift solenoid valve B if the resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve B. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valve A Test > Page 5192 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valve C Test Shift Solenoid Valve C Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the shift solenoid valve C operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector. 10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 11. Replace shift solenoid valve C if the resistance is out of standard. 12. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to shift solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace shift solenoid valve C. 13. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 14. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 15. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 16. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 17. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Remove the starter. 7. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector, and remove shift solenoid valve A. 8. Install a new shift solenoid valve A with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 10. Install the starter. 11. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 12. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 13. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 14. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 15. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 5195 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B connector, and remove shift solenoid valve B. 3. Install a new shift solenoid valve B with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement > Page 5196 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement Shift Solenoid Valve C Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 6. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C connector, and remove shift solenoid valve C. 7. Install a new shift solenoid valve C with new O-rings (A). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 9. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 10. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 11. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 12. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 13. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams 260. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5200 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 2. Choose Lock up Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 3. Check that the torque converter clutch solenoid valve operates with the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4. 4. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 5. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 6. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve resistance at the solenoid valve connector terminals. Standard: 12 - 25 Ohms 7. Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no resistance is out of standard. 8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery negative terminal to torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1, and connect the battery positive terminal to the terminal No. 2. ^ If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK. ^ If no clicking sound is heard, replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. 9. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5201 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 2. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector, and remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 3. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 4. Check connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector. 5. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations Gear Lockout Solenoid: Locations 245. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5206 252. Reverse Lockout Solenoid (2-door V6: M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5207 Gear Lockout Solenoid: Service and Repair Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/ Reassembly 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the battery. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Remove the battery tray. 5. Carefully remove the shift cable, select cable, and cable bracket together so as not to bend the cables. 6. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 7. Remove the bolts (A), transmission harness stay (B), and reverse lockout solenoid assembly (C). 8. Remove the roller (A) and select lock cam (B). 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. 10. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001) to the sealing surface. NOTE: If 4 minutes have passed after applying liquid gasket, reapply it, and assemble the housings. Al low it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly before filling the transmission with oil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - M/T > Gear Lockout Solenoid, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5208 11. Install the reverse lockout solenoid assembly (A) and transmission harness stay (B). 12. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid connector. 13. Install the cable bracket, select cable, and shift cable. 14. Install the battery base. 15. Install the air cleaner housing. 16. Install the battery. Connect the positive (+) cable first, then the negative (-) cable to the battery. 17. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 18. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 5224 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 5230 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Control Module: Testing and Inspection Electronic Control System PCM Electrical Connections Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5236 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5237 PCM Inputs And Outputs PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5238 PCM Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning How to Update the PCM How to Update the PCM Special Tools Required Honda diagnostic system (HDS) Honda Interface Module (HIM) HDS Pocket Tester NOTE: ^ Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM during troubleshooting procedures. ^ Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. ^ To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door locks, during the update. ^ To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. ^ You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only accept a new program. ^ If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of the dash. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. For '06-07 models: If you are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM. 4. For '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. For '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP Position Check, and follow the screen prompts with the HDS. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the Honda interface module (HIM). 6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM. 7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is shown in the screen. If you run into a problem (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure, follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: ^ Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position. ^ Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). ^ Shut down the HDS. ^ Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. ^ Reboot the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 5241 ^ Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. For '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 10. Do the CKP learn procedure. How to Substitute the PCM Substituting the PCM Special Tools Required ^ Honda diagnostic system (HDS) ^ Honda interface module (HIM) ^ HDS pocket tester NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting. '06-07 models: If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM. 4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 5242 8. Remove the center lower covers (A). 9. Remove the duct (B). 10. Disconnect the PCM connectors (C). 11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 12. Install the known good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 13. Open the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: '05-07 models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software. 17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 18. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 20. '06-07 models: If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. 22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Module Programming and Relearning > Page 5243 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove and Install the PCM How to Remove and Install the PCM 1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts. 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect PCM connectors. 6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM. 7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5249 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams 2. 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (A/T) 241. 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 4. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (C). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (D). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt, and connect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 9. Install the splash shield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement > Page 5252 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A). 6. Replace the switch, then install a new one with a new sealing washer (B). Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 7. Check the connector for water, oil, dust, or other particles inside it, and connect the connector securely. 8. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 9. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 10. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 11. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5261 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5262 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5263 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5264 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5265 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5266 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5267 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5268 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5269 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: Recalls Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 10-059 Date: 101001 Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect 10-059 October 1, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Accord, Civic, and Element Ignition Switch Key Interlock BACKGROUND Under certain conditions, the interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform. The interlock ensures the transmission is in Park before the ignition key can be removed. Interlock failure may allow the ignition key to be removed when the shift lever is not in Park. If the driver fails to engage the parking brake, the vehicle could roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5279 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the ignition switch key interlock has already been inspected/repaired. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. As a matter of federal law, these vehicles must be repaired before they are sold. Should a dealership sell an unrepaired vehicle that subsequently causes an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle in inventory is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the ignition switch and, if needed, install a Key Interlock Repair Kit. PARTS INFORMATION Key Interlock Repair Kit: P/N 06351-SDA-000 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Interlock Slide Hammer: T/N 07AAC-S84A100 NOTE: ^ An initial quantity of Permalube grease to lubricate the sliding surface of the interlock lever is included with the slide hammer. To order more Permalube, use P/N 08734-0030. ^ To order a replacement clamping bolt for the slide hammer, use T/N 07AAC-S84A400. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35100-SDA-A31 Defect Code: 5GC00 Symptom Code: R4400 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5280 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to section 17 of the appropriate service manual. 2. On the lower side of the ignition switch, look at the interlock cylinder cover: ^ If the cover is square, the ignition switch was already replaced with an updated part, and a key interlock repair kit is not needed. Go to step 3. ^ If the cover is round, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. 3. Reinstall the steering column covers. 4. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5281 1. Remove and discard the plastic cover from the ignition switch key interlock solenoid. 2. Note the position of the interlock solenoid plunger; you'll need to install it the same way. 3. Remove the screw from the solenoid, but keep the solenoid attached to its electrical connector. Discard the screw. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to lose the solenoid plunger; it slides out easily. ^ Keep the plunger free of dirt and grease while it's removed from the solenoid. 4. Note the position of the interlock lever spring; you'll need to install the new spring the same way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5282 5. Attach the slide hammer to the interlock lever pin, and tighten the slide hammer clamping bolt. Then use the slide hammer to remove the pin. Discard the pin, the lever, and the spring. 6. Wipe off any debris from the lever's sliding surface on the ignition switch with a clean cloth or a cotton swab. NOTE: To keep debris out of the ignition switch, do not clean it with compressed air. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5283 7. Apply a small amount of Permalube grease to the base of the new lever. Then attach the slide hammer to the new lever pin, insert the lever into the ignition switch, and seat the pin with the slide hammer. 8. Check the installed height of the pin with vernier calipers. If the height is more than 5.0 mm, the pin is not seated. If needed, reattach the slide hammer, and seat the pin. NOTE: It's normal for the interlock lever to be loose, even when the pin is fully seated. 9. Install a new spring on the lever. Make sure you attach the ends of the spring correctly: ^ The right end goes into the slot on the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5284 ^ The left end goes behind the notch on the interlock lever. ^ Once the spring is correctly installed, make sure the lever moves freely and returns properly. 10. Insert the plunger into the interlock solenoid, then install the solenoid using a new screw. Make sure the groove of the solenoid plunger is in the fork on the lever. 11. Install a new plastic cover on the interlock solenoid. 12. Check the operation of the ignition switch key interlock: ^ Set the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). ^ While pressing the brake pedal, shift the transmission to Neutral. ^ Try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - If you cannot turn the switch to LOCK (0), your repair was successful; go to step 15. - If you can turn the switch to LOCK (0), the interlock is not working; go to step 13. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5285 13. Remove the solenoid cover, and make sure the solenoid plunger groove is installed in the fork on the lever. ^ If needed, correct the position of the solenoid plunger, then go to step 14. ^ If the solenoid plunger is correctly installed, there is an electrical problem with the key interlock system; refer to the Automatic Transmission section of the appropriate service manual for troubleshooting information. Once the key interlock is working normally, go to step 14. 14. Install the solenoid cover. 15. Reinstall the steering column covers. 16. Center-punch a completion mark above the seventh character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5286 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > 10-059 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Ignition/Shift Interlock Defect > Page 5287 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Switch: > NHTSA10V364000 > Aug > 10 > Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect Shift Interlock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V364000: Ignition Interlock Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2003 Honda/Civic 2003 Honda/Element 2003-2004 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: August 04, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V364000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: EA09001 COMPONENT: Electrical System: Ignition POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 384220 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2003 Honda Accord, Civic two and four door, and model year 2003-2004 Honda Element vehicles. The interlock lever of the ignition switch may unexpectedly deform, which can allow the interlock function of a vehicle with an automatic transmission to be defeated. CONSEQUENCE: Removal of the ignition key when the gear selector of a vehicle with an automatic transmission has not been shifted to the park position can allow the vehicle to roll away, increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will remove the original interlock pin and lever within the ignition switch, and replace them with newly, designed components. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about September 29, 2010. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda safety recall No. R44. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations A/T Interlock System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5294 66. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5295 141. Park Pin Switch/A/T Gear Position Console Light (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5296 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement NOTE: The park pin switch replacement is applied for the 2003-2005-model type A shift lever and 2006-2007-model shift lever, the 2003-2005-model type B shift lever park pin switch is not available separately. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from the shift lever bracket base (B). 3. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (C), then remove it from the bracket base. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light bulb socket (D), then remove the bulb (E) from the socket. 5. Remove the shift lock release lever (F). 6. Remove the park pin switch, and install the new switch (G) by aligning the tabs (H) with the slots (I). 7. Install the shift lock release lever. 8. Install the bulb in the socket, then install the socket in the bracket base. 9. Install the indicator panel on the bracket base. 10. Install the park pin switch connector on the bracket base, then connect the connector. 11. Install the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations 139. Transmission Housing (L4: A/T) 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5300 A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5301 186. Transmission Range Switch (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5302 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B) then disconnect the connector. Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector 2003-2005 Models Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5303 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the continuity test for each position is good, the switch is OK. Reconnect the connector. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 3. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5304 Transmission Range Switch Connector 5. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between the terminals in the following table for each switch position. ^ If the transmission range switch continuity check is OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. ^ If there is no continuity at one or more switch positions, go to step 6. 6. Remove the transmission range switch, and check the end of the selector control shaft (A). Standard: Selector Control Shaft Width (B): 6.1 - 6.2 mm (0.240 - 0.244 inch) Selector Control Shaft End Gap (C): 1.8 - 2.0 mm (0.07 - 0.08 inch) ^ If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is within the standard, replace the transmission range switch. ^ If the measurement is out of standard, repair the selector control shaft end, and recheck the transmission range switch continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5305 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and replace the new switch. 6. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to play between the selector control shaft and the switch. The clearance (A) between selector control shaft tips is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5306 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch (C), then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the switch in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5307 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all positions, and check the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Check that the engine will start in the P and N positions, and will not start in any other shift lever position. 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. 14. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the shift lever operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor 173. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 5314 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 5315 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor 172. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Countershaft Speed Sensor > Page 5316 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor 117. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Mainshaft Speed Sensor > Page 5319 106. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects countershaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5322 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects mainshaft speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft Speed Sensor Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5325 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed Sensor Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector (A). 2. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5326 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 4. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 5. Disconnect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector. 6. Remove the bolt securing the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A) from the end cover. 7. Install the new O-ring (B) on the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the end cover. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 8. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 9. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 10. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 11. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 12. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Input Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5327 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box. 4. Reposition the under-hood fuse/relay box to gain access to the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor. 5. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 6. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 7. Disconnect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector. 8. Remove the bolt securing the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (A) from the transmission housing. 9. Install the new O-ring (B) on the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then install the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing. Do not allow dust or foreign particles to enter the transmission. 10. Check for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 11. Install the battery base and battery, then connect the battery terminals. 12. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 13. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 175. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5331 247. ATF Temperature Sensor (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5332 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Get the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, and write down the audio presets. 2. Lift the vehicle up on a hoist or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery. 6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. 7. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. 8. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base. 9. Remove the transmission upper mount bracket (A) and bracket plate (B). 10. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts. 11. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the jack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5333 12. Remove the transmission lower front mount. 13. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector (A). 14. Remove ATF temperature sensor harness clamp bolt (B), then remove the sensor. 15. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new ATF temperature sensor (D), then install the sensor. 16. Secure the ATF temperature sensor harness clamp (E) with the bolts. 17. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 18. Install the transmission lower front mount. 19. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 20. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and remove the transmission jack. 21. Refill the transmission with ATF. 22. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct. 23. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket. 24. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Enter the audio and navigation anti-theft codes, then enter the presets, and set the clock. 27. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5343 243. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5349 52. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5350 136. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5351 Braking Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5352 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (B) from the left side of the pedal pad (C). Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T: 167 mm (6 9/16 inch) A/T: 172 mm (6 13/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers on the knurled part of the push rod (B) until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.4 to 3.0 mm (0.016 to 0.118 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5353 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal by hand. 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5357 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5358 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5359 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5360 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5361 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation ABS Main Control The ABS/TCS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signals it receives, then calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying. TCS Main Control The ABS/TCS control unit controls the TCS based on signal inputs from the accelerator pedal position sensor, engine speed, shifter position, and the wheel sensors. In addition, the ABS/TCS control unit sends an engine retard request signal to the PCM if necessary. The pressure intensifying control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. Self-Diagnosis Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5362 ^ The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a monitor IC. They check each other for problems. ^ The CPUs also check the circuit of the system. ^ When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis. The ABS/TCS control unit turns on the appropriate indicator(s). On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS and TCS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester or HDS. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester or HDS. See the tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5363 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5364 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Push in on the lock (A), then pull up the lever (B) of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector (C), and the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the three 6 mm bolts (D). 4. Remove the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit (E) and bracket (F). 5. Remove the two 6 mm bolts and hex bolt, then remove the bracket. Installation 1. Install the bracket, then tighten the two 6 mm bolts and the hex bolt. 2. Install the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 6 mm nuts. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the nuts. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector. 5. Push in the lock of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 6. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 7. Perform the TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, TCS and TCS activation indicators goes off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5365 9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS,TCS and TCS activation indicators do not come on. 10. If the brake pedal is now spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Excercise and bleed the brake system again, starting with the front wheels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Assembly: Customer Interest Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5374 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5375 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5381 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5382 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Customer Interest Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5391 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5392 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5398 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5399 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5400 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5401 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5402 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5403 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5404 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Modulator Unit The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS Normally Open (NO) solenoid valve, TCS normally closed (NC) solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the damping chamber. The modulator controls the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel. ABS Control Pressure intensifying mode TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed. Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper. Pump Motor When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF. The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump through the damping chamber to the master cylinder. Pressure retaining mode TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed. Pressure reducing mode Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5405 TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open. TCS Control Pressure intensifying mode TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON. The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber to the front caliper. Pressure retaining mode TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON. Front caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve. Pressure reducing mode Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5406 TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, front inlet valve closed, front outlet valve open, pump motor ON. Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5407 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Push in on the lock (A), then pull up the lever (B) of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector (C), and the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the three 6 mm bolts (D). 4. Remove the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit (E) and bracket (F). 5. Remove the two 6 mm bolts and hex bolt, then remove the bracket. Installation 1. Install the bracket, then tighten the two 6 mm bolts and the hex bolt. 2. Install the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 6 mm nuts. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the nuts. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector. 5. Push in the lock of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 6. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 7. Perform the TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, TCS and TCS activation indicators goes off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5408 9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS,TCS and TCS activation indicators do not come on. 10. If the brake pedal is now spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Excercise and bleed the brake system again, starting with the front wheels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Module > Component Information > Locations 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5418 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations 177. Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5422 271. TCS Off Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5423 Traction Control Switch: Testing and Inspection TCS OFF Switch Test 1. Remove the TCS OFF switch from the switch panel. 2. Disconnect the TCS OFF switch 5P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the TCS OFF switch connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity when the switch is pushed. 4. Check for continuity between the TCS OFF switch connector terminal No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity at all times. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5424 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair TCS Pressure Sensor Neutral Position Memorization 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS. 3. The HDS screen will display the message: "The SCS line has been shorted. Do you want to leave the SCS line shorted?" Choose YES. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The ABS indicator comes on for 2 seconds. 6. Push the TCS OFF switch once within 2 seconds after the ABS indicator goes off. 7. Push the TCS OFF switch once within 2 seconds after the ABS indicator comes back on. 8. The TCS activation indicator blinks, and the system starts TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 9. When the ABS indicator, TCS indicator and TCS activation indicator go off, the memorizing is done. NOTE: On the left bottom side of the HDS screen you will notice "SCS" blinking during steps 4 to 9. 10. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC, or go back into the SCS Menu and remove the short from there. 11. If the indicators do not go off, retry step 10. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored 04-026 May 11, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED ABS Indicator Comes On With DTCs 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 SYMPTOM ABS indicator comes on with intermittent rear ABS sensor code(s). PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture in the sensor. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the appropriate rear wheel ABS sensor. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57475-SDA-A03 H/C 7269681 Defect Code: 03214 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored > Page 5433 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 is stored, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear wheel of the affected side. 2. Locate the rear wheel sensor and disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the two rear wheel sensor mounting bolts. Remove the sensor. 4. Install the new rear wheel sensor, being careful not to twist the wires. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft), and connect the sensor to the harness. 5. Reinstall the rear wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 6. Clear the codes with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. If any ABS codes come on do the appropriate troubleshooting in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored 04-026 May 11, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED ABS Indicator Comes On With DTCs 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 SYMPTOM ABS indicator comes on with intermittent rear ABS sensor code(s). PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture in the sensor. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the appropriate rear wheel ABS sensor. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57475-SDA-A03 H/C 7269681 Defect Code: 03214 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored > Page 5439 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 is stored, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear wheel of the affected side. 2. Locate the rear wheel sensor and disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the two rear wheel sensor mounting bolts. Remove the sensor. 4. Install the new rear wheel sensor, being careful not to twist the wires. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft), and connect the sensor to the harness. 5. Reinstall the rear wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 6. Clear the codes with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. If any ABS codes come on do the appropriate troubleshooting in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5442 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations 28. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 140. Under Right Rear Of Vehicle (Left Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5443 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5444 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 92. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front 93. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear 94. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5445 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5446 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Wheel Sensor The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. The wheel sensors detect changing of magnetic polarity on the magnetic encoder. The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the wheel speed based on signals received from the wheel sensor. When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. When the front wheel speed rises sharply above the vehicle speed, the TCS NC valve opens, the TCS NO valve closes, and the pump motor starts to intensify the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops, the front inlet valve closes momentarily to retain the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the front outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the front caliper fluid pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5447 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Check the magnetic encoder after cleaning the encoder. If necessary, replace the encoder. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the magnetic encoder all the way around while rotating the encoder. Standard: Front: 0.5 - 1.2 mm (0.02 - 0.05 inch) Rear: 0.4 - 1.1 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5448 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda. DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Attach a length of clear drain tube to the bleed screw. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left-front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown following until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5455 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brake Pedal - Click Or Pop When Depressed Brake Pedal Assy: Technical Service Bulletins Brake Pedal - Click Or Pop When Depressed SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2004 TITLE: Click or Pop When Pressing the Brake Pedal APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord or 2001-05 Civic SERVICE TIP: Got a 2003-04 Accord or 2001-05 Civic in your shop that clicks or pops when you press the brake pedal? The culprit could be the brake pedal position switch. The switch plunger doesn't fit squarely into the switch casing. When you press the brake pedal, the plunger rubs the side of the casing and makes noise. There's a simple fix for this problem: Just turn the switch around so the connector lock now faces the 5 o'clock position. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5460 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (B) from the left side of the pedal pad (C). Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T: 167 mm (6 9/16 inch) A/T: 172 mm (6 13/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers on the knurled part of the push rod (B) until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.4 to 3.0 mm (0.016 to 0.118 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5461 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal by hand. 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5462 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Replacement 1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector (A). 2. Remove the lock pin (B) and joint pin (C). 3. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D) and nuts (E). 4. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F). 5. Instal in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Replace the lock pin whenever the brake pedal is replaced. 6. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - Conventional Brake Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5468 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5469 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5470 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5471 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5472 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5473 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5474 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5475 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5476 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5477 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5478 Brake Warning Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5479 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5480 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5481 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5482 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5483 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5484 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5485 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5486 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5487 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5488 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5489 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5490 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5491 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5492 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5493 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5494 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5495 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5496 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5497 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5498 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5499 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5500 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5501 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5502 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5503 Circuit Diagram - Brake System Indicator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. Avoid breathing dust particles. - Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection-15 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Inspection-16 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3.Remove the front pads. 4. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5509 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (B). 4. Remove the flange bolt (C) while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up out of the way. Check the brake hoee and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 5. Remove the brake pads (A) and pad shims (B). 6. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 7. Remove the pad retainers (A), and check the caliper pins for free movement. 8. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 9. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 10. Clean and install the pad retainers. 11. Apply a light coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad sides of shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and to the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess paste off the pad shim and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discsand pad material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5510 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pads with the wear indicator (C) on the inside. The wear indicator should be on the top of the pad. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 13. Push in the piston (B) so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Check the brake fluid level. The brake fluid may overflow if the reservoir is too full. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 14. Pivot the caliper (C) down into position. Install the flange bolt (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5511 applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Overhaul Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5512 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the flange bolts (C) while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boots, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim (A) and brake pads (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5513 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Install the pad retainers. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pad material. 10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the inside bottom. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 11. Rotate the caliper piston (C) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (D) in the piston with the tab (E) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5514 12. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (F), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Overhaul Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5515 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application 03-069 September 2, 2010 Applies To: 2003 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Brake Noise or Judder (Supersedes 03-069, dated October 21, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time was revised after the operation was reviewed and validated. ^ Under REPAIR PROCEDURE, the requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed. SYMPTOM Front brake noise or judder while braking. PROBABLE CAUSE The front brake pads have caused a variation in brake disc thickness. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Refinish or replace the front brake discs, and install new front brake pads. PARTS INFORMATION Front Brake Pad Set [for Ohio-built L4 (VIN begins with 1HG), for Mexico-built L4 (VIN begins with 3HG)] P/N 45022-SDA-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for 2-door V6 and 4-door V6): P/N 45022-SDB-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for Japan-built L4, VIN begins with JHM): P/N 45022-SDC-A10 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5524 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 45022-SDA-A00 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 04213 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old front brake pads and shims (see page 19-12 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual). 2. Measure the brake disc thickness (see page 19-14 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual or page 19-5 of the 2003-04 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). ^ If the brake discs are within the service limit, go to step 3. * ^ If one or both of the brake discs measure less than the minimum thickness, replace them as needed, then go to step 4.* 3. Remove the brake calipers, and refinish both front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe. Use the approved Kwik-way or Snap-on brake lathe. NOTE: For information on brake disc refinishing, refer to the operating manual for the lathe and to service bulletin 00-088, Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines. 4. Apply a thin, even coat of Molykote M77 grease to the back of the new front pads and to both sides of the pad shims. Apply Molykote M77 to the end of the caliper piston. 5. Install the calipers, the brake pads, and the pad shims correctly. Make sure the inner brake pad has the wear indicator on the top. 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake noise or judder has been eliminated. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5525 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application 03-069 September 2, 2010 Applies To: 2003 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Brake Noise or Judder (Supersedes 03-069, dated October 21, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time was revised after the operation was reviewed and validated. ^ Under REPAIR PROCEDURE, the requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed. SYMPTOM Front brake noise or judder while braking. PROBABLE CAUSE The front brake pads have caused a variation in brake disc thickness. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Refinish or replace the front brake discs, and install new front brake pads. PARTS INFORMATION Front Brake Pad Set [for Ohio-built L4 (VIN begins with 1HG), for Mexico-built L4 (VIN begins with 3HG)] P/N 45022-SDA-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for 2-door V6 and 4-door V6): P/N 45022-SDB-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for Japan-built L4, VIN begins with JHM): P/N 45022-SDC-A10 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5531 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 45022-SDA-A00 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 04213 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old front brake pads and shims (see page 19-12 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual). 2. Measure the brake disc thickness (see page 19-14 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual or page 19-5 of the 2003-04 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). ^ If the brake discs are within the service limit, go to step 3. * ^ If one or both of the brake discs measure less than the minimum thickness, replace them as needed, then go to step 4.* 3. Remove the brake calipers, and refinish both front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe. Use the approved Kwik-way or Snap-on brake lathe. NOTE: For information on brake disc refinishing, refer to the operating manual for the lathe and to service bulletin 00-088, Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines. 4. Apply a thin, even coat of Molykote M77 grease to the back of the new front pads and to both sides of the pad shims. Apply Molykote M77 to the end of the caliper piston. 5. Install the calipers, the brake pads, and the pad shims correctly. Make sure the inner brake pad has the wear indicator on the top. 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake noise or judder has been eliminated. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5532 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5533 Brake Pad: Specifications Brake pads Thickness Front Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................ 10.5 11.5 mm (0.41 - 0.45 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .............................................................................. 1.6 mm (0.05 inch) Rear Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................ 8.9 9.1 mm (0.350 - 0.368 inch) Service Limit ........................................................................................... ................................................................................ 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. Avoid breathing dust particles. - Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection-15 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Inspection-16 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3.Remove the front pads. 4. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5536 4. Remove the flange bolt (C) while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up out of the way. Check the brake hoee and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 5. Remove the brake pads (A) and pad shims (B). 6. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 7. Remove the pad retainers (A), and check the caliper pins for free movement. 8. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 9. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 10. Clean and install the pad retainers. 11. Apply a light coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad sides of shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and to the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess paste off the pad shim and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discsand pad material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5537 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pads with the wear indicator (C) on the inside. The wear indicator should be on the top of the pad. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 13. Push in the piston (B) so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Check the brake fluid level. The brake fluid may overflow if the reservoir is too full. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 14. Pivot the caliper (C) down into position. Install the flange bolt (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5538 applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5539 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the flange bolts (C) while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boots, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim (A) and brake pads (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5540 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Install the pad retainers. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pad material. 10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the inside bottom. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 11. Rotate the caliper piston (C) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (D) in the piston with the tab (E) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5541 12. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (F), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. Avoid breathing dust particles. - Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection-15 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Inspection-16 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3.Remove the front pads. 4. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5544 4. Remove the flange bolt (C) while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up out of the way. Check the brake hoee and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 5. Remove the brake pads (A) and pad shims (B). 6. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 7. Remove the pad retainers (A), and check the caliper pins for free movement. 8. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 9. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 10. Clean and install the pad retainers. 11. Apply a light coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad sides of shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and to the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess paste off the pad shim and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discsand pad material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5545 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pads with the wear indicator (C) on the inside. The wear indicator should be on the top of the pad. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 13. Push in the piston (B) so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Check the brake fluid level. The brake fluid may overflow if the reservoir is too full. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 14. Pivot the caliper (C) down into position. Install the flange bolt (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5546 applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5547 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the flange bolts (C) while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boots, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim (A) and brake pads (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5548 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Install the pad retainers. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pad material. 10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the inside bottom. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 11. Rotate the caliper piston (C) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (D) in the piston with the tab (E) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5549 12. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (F), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application 03-069 September 2, 2010 Applies To: 2003 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Brake Noise or Judder (Supersedes 03-069, dated October 21, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time was revised after the operation was reviewed and validated. ^ Under REPAIR PROCEDURE, the requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed. SYMPTOM Front brake noise or judder while braking. PROBABLE CAUSE The front brake pads have caused a variation in brake disc thickness. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Refinish or replace the front brake discs, and install new front brake pads. PARTS INFORMATION Front Brake Pad Set [for Ohio-built L4 (VIN begins with 1HG), for Mexico-built L4 (VIN begins with 3HG)] P/N 45022-SDA-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for 2-door V6 and 4-door V6): P/N 45022-SDB-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for Japan-built L4, VIN begins with JHM): P/N 45022-SDC-A10 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5558 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 45022-SDA-A00 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 04213 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old front brake pads and shims (see page 19-12 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual). 2. Measure the brake disc thickness (see page 19-14 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual or page 19-5 of the 2003-04 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). ^ If the brake discs are within the service limit, go to step 3. * ^ If one or both of the brake discs measure less than the minimum thickness, replace them as needed, then go to step 4.* 3. Remove the brake calipers, and refinish both front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe. Use the approved Kwik-way or Snap-on brake lathe. NOTE: For information on brake disc refinishing, refer to the operating manual for the lathe and to service bulletin 00-088, Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines. 4. Apply a thin, even coat of Molykote M77 grease to the back of the new front pads and to both sides of the pad shims. Apply Molykote M77 to the end of the caliper piston. 5. Install the calipers, the brake pads, and the pad shims correctly. Make sure the inner brake pad has the wear indicator on the top. 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake noise or judder has been eliminated. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5559 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application 03-069 September 2, 2010 Applies To: 2003 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Brake Noise or Judder (Supersedes 03-069, dated October 21, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY ^ Under WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, the flat rate time was revised after the operation was reviewed and validated. ^ Under REPAIR PROCEDURE, the requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed. SYMPTOM Front brake noise or judder while braking. PROBABLE CAUSE The front brake pads have caused a variation in brake disc thickness. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Refinish or replace the front brake discs, and install new front brake pads. PARTS INFORMATION Front Brake Pad Set [for Ohio-built L4 (VIN begins with 1HG), for Mexico-built L4 (VIN begins with 3HG)] P/N 45022-SDA-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for 2-door V6 and 4-door V6): P/N 45022-SDB-A10 Front Brake Pad Set (for Japan-built L4, VIN begins with JHM): P/N 45022-SDC-A10 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5565 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 45022-SDA-A00 Defect Code: 07701 Symptom Code: 04213 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old front brake pads and shims (see page 19-12 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual). 2. Measure the brake disc thickness (see page 19-14 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual or page 19-5 of the 2003-04 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). ^ If the brake discs are within the service limit, go to step 3. * ^ If one or both of the brake discs measure less than the minimum thickness, replace them as needed, then go to step 4.* 3. Remove the brake calipers, and refinish both front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe. Use the approved Kwik-way or Snap-on brake lathe. NOTE: For information on brake disc refinishing, refer to the operating manual for the lathe and to service bulletin 00-088, Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines. 4. Apply a thin, even coat of Molykote M77 grease to the back of the new front pads and to both sides of the pad shims. Apply Molykote M77 to the end of the caliper piston. 5. Install the calipers, the brake pads, and the pad shims correctly. Make sure the inner brake pad has the wear indicator on the top. 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake noise or judder has been eliminated. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 03-069 > Sep > 10 > Brakes - Front Brake Judder or Noise on Application > Page 5566 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information 00-088 July 14, 2010 Applies To: ALL Models Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines (Supersedes 00-088, dated October 6, 2006, to revise the information marked with the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY The requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed.* American Honda does not allow replacement of brake discs under warranty unless the brake disc is beyond its service limit for refinishing. If the brake disc is within its service limit, you must refinish it. Maximum refinishing limits may be found in the Conventional Brakes section of the appropriate service manual. *Refinish brake discs only when they are scored or out of specification for runout or parallelism. See the appropriate service manual for the specifications.* American Honda requires refinishing of the front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe that mounts to the steering knuckle. Use of an on-car, steering knuckle- mounted lathe is critical because it corrects runout of the hub and disc as an assembly. Experience has shown that very small amounts of runout, not felt as brake pulsation initially, will grow and become noticeable as the discs are subjected to heat and wear over time and mileage. Two on-car brake lathes are recommended. The Kwik-Lathe, model number KWY-108000501, is supported with automatic shipments of adapters for new models, when required. The Accu-turn On-car Brake Lathe, model ACCHONOCLPKG, is also recommended. A power driver is required for the 82000 and is highly recommended for all other models. The Kwik-Lathe power driver model number is KWY-108012005; the Accu-turn lathe includes a power driver. Here are some advantages of using power drivers: ^ The disc is rotated at the optimum speed for a smooth and consistent cut. ^ There is no need to climb in and out of the vehicle to start and stop the engine or to shift the transmission. ^ Securing the opposite wheel with a tie-down strap is not required. ^ There is no waiting for the engine to return to idle and no concern about engine speed changes that can adversely affect brake disc cut and finish. ^ The Traction Control System (TCS) is not involved. ^ Consistent cutting speed increases cutting tool life. ORDERING INFORMATION Order brake lathes and power drivers through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To place an order, call or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday thru Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Time. You can also order online through the Interactive Network (iN). Click on Service, Tool and Equipment, and then Online Catalog. Click on Alignment, Wheel, and Brake Equipment, and then On-Car Brake Lathes. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None, this bulletin is for information only. FRONT BRAKE DISCS The following guidelines show the Kwik-Way lathe setup, the Accu-turn lathe setup is similar. Setting Up the Vehicle Put the transmission in Neutral. If you are not using the power drive system, start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature so the idle speed will stabilize to its lowest rpm. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5571 Raise the vehicle on a lift. Check for loose wheel bearings. You must replace loose wheel bearings before you refinish the brake discs. If you do not, the brake lathe will not correct for brake disc runout, resulting in an uneven finish and brake pulsation. Remove the front wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts with flat washers to compensate for the removed wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Remove the caliper assembly. Use a wire or a S-hook to hold the caliper to the spring or damper tower. Do not kink the brake hose or use it to support the caliper. If you are not using the power drive system and the vehicle has ICS or VSA, make sure you install a brake pad spreader between the pads on the hanging caliper. Also, make sure the ICS or VSA is turned off anytime the engine is started. If the system is not turned off, the brakes could activate, causing the brake pads on the hanging caliper to hit each other or the caliper pistons to fall out. Install the vibration damper on the brake disc. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure you install the protective band around the wheel nuts. If you are not using the power drive system, use a fabric tie-down strap to secure the brake disc that is opposite to the one you are refinishing. If you are working on a Prelude with ATTS, do not use a tie-down strap; let both wheels turn freely. Mounting the Brake Lathe Remove the tool bed from the brake lathe, then mount the brake lathe to the steering knuckle with a Honda 1-piece speed mount. These mounts provide quicker, more accurate mounting, and can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5572 Honda 1-Piece Speed Mounts P/N KWY-108006000 (for most models), P/N KWY-108007500 (Odysseys, Pilots, and Ridgelines with two-piston calipers) Attaching the Power Drive System 1. Make sure the drive motor assembly on the power drive system is level with the brake disc. 2. Attach the mounting yoke to the brake disc, and secure it with one of the wheel nuts. Torque the wheel nut to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5573 3. Attach the driveshaft on the drive motor assembly to the mounting yoke, making sure the center line of the driveshaft is level with the spindle nut on the wheel hub. 4. Set the lower toggle switch on the drive motor assembly to FWD (counterclockwise rotation) or REV (clockwise rotation). Setting Up and Adjusting the Brake Lathe Use Kwik-Way cutting bits, P/N KWY-109109223, and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped KW and are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Before you use the brake lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure the tips are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. If a tip is worn, rotate the bit, and use a new tip. A worn tip produces a poor finish and may cause chattering. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5574 Reinstall the tool bed on the brake lathe with the top of the cutting bits facing up and the feed knobs facing down. Adjust the tool bed until the brake disc is centered between the cutting bits. For proper refinishing, the brake disc must turn toward the top of the cutting bits. Do not set the cutting depth on the brake lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). This is two divisions on the cutting knob. Make sure you start your cut at least 3 mm (0.12 in.) beyond the worn area on the brake disc. If you are cutting larger diameter brake discs, make sure you use the 150 cutting bit holders. These bit holders, available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION), supersede the original bit holders and provide better cutting coverage for larger diameter brake discs. Each bit holder is clearly marked for proper installation on the tool holder. Cutting the Brake Disc To get the smoothest cut and the best brake disc finish, always use the slowest feed speed on the tool bed feed motor. Place the drive belt on the smallest pulley of the feed motor and on the largest pulley of the hand wheel. Make sure the lower toggle switch on the power drive system drive motor assembly is set to the proper rotation to turn the brake disc toward the top of the cutting bits. Plug the tool bed feed motor into the power outlet on the drive motor assembly, then turn on the drive motor with the upper toggle switch on the assembly. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure the transmission is in 1st gear (2nd gear on Preludes with ATTS) or Reverse and the engine is idling, but not at a fast idle. If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Turn on the tool bed feed motor, and snap it into place; there should be tension on the feed belt. Cut the brake disc until the cutting bits clear the outer edge of the disc. The cutting bits should produce a smooth, consistent finish with no chatter marks or grooves. If the disc did not clean up entirely on the first pass, reset the brake lathe and make a second pass. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5575 Finishing the Job Remove the vibration damper and the protective band (if used). Use a micrometer to measure the thickness of the brake disc. Make sure the thickness is within the service manual specifications. Clean the brake disc with soapy water or brake cleaner, then wipe it dry. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust or chips, but do not use compressed air. Unplug the tool bed feed motor from the drive motor assembly, and remove the mounting yoke from the brake disc. Remove the speed mount from the steering knuckle. Apply a small amount of Molykote 77 grease to the brake pad shims. Reinstall the caliper assembly. (If you did not use the power drive system, use the brake pad spreader to push the pistons back into the caliper.) Torque the nuts and bolts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Refinish the other front brake disc using the same guidelines. Check the brake fluid level, then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake pedal is firm and does not pulsate. Lightly apply the brakes about 20 times during the test-drive to seat the brake pads. REAR BRAKE DISCS It is possible to use an on-car lathe on some models if the rear caliper mounts are low enough to clear the vehicle body. A power driver is needed for front drive models. Refinish rear brake discs on bench-mounted equipment if necessary. Follow the same guidelines you used for refinishing front brake discs, noting these differences: ^ Mount the brake lathe to the rear knuckle with the Honda 2-Piece Adapter (P/N KWY-1 08102504). You can order the 2-piece adapter through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > SN050315 > Mar > 05 > Brakes - Rear Brake Disc Thickness Manual Revision Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Disc Thickness Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: S/M Fix: Rear Brake Disc Thickness APPLIES TO: 03-05 Accord SERVICE TIP: The standard rear brake disc thickness called out in the 2003-05 Accord S/M is wrong. The correct standard thickness should be 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes Brake Disc Refinishing Information Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information 00-088 July 14, 2010 Applies To: ALL Models Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines (Supersedes 00-088, dated October 6, 2006, to revise the information marked with the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY The requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed.* American Honda does not allow replacement of brake discs under warranty unless the brake disc is beyond its service limit for refinishing. If the brake disc is within its service limit, you must refinish it. Maximum refinishing limits may be found in the Conventional Brakes section of the appropriate service manual. *Refinish brake discs only when they are scored or out of specification for runout or parallelism. See the appropriate service manual for the specifications.* American Honda requires refinishing of the front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe that mounts to the steering knuckle. Use of an on-car, steering knuckle- mounted lathe is critical because it corrects runout of the hub and disc as an assembly. Experience has shown that very small amounts of runout, not felt as brake pulsation initially, will grow and become noticeable as the discs are subjected to heat and wear over time and mileage. Two on-car brake lathes are recommended. The Kwik-Lathe, model number KWY-108000501, is supported with automatic shipments of adapters for new models, when required. The Accu-turn On-car Brake Lathe, model ACCHONOCLPKG, is also recommended. A power driver is required for the 82000 and is highly recommended for all other models. The Kwik-Lathe power driver model number is KWY-108012005; the Accu-turn lathe includes a power driver. Here are some advantages of using power drivers: ^ The disc is rotated at the optimum speed for a smooth and consistent cut. ^ There is no need to climb in and out of the vehicle to start and stop the engine or to shift the transmission. ^ Securing the opposite wheel with a tie-down strap is not required. ^ There is no waiting for the engine to return to idle and no concern about engine speed changes that can adversely affect brake disc cut and finish. ^ The Traction Control System (TCS) is not involved. ^ Consistent cutting speed increases cutting tool life. ORDERING INFORMATION Order brake lathes and power drivers through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To place an order, call or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday thru Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Time. You can also order online through the Interactive Network (iN). Click on Service, Tool and Equipment, and then Online Catalog. Click on Alignment, Wheel, and Brake Equipment, and then On-Car Brake Lathes. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None, this bulletin is for information only. FRONT BRAKE DISCS The following guidelines show the Kwik-Way lathe setup, the Accu-turn lathe setup is similar. Setting Up the Vehicle Put the transmission in Neutral. If you are not using the power drive system, start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature so the idle speed will stabilize to its lowest rpm. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5585 Raise the vehicle on a lift. Check for loose wheel bearings. You must replace loose wheel bearings before you refinish the brake discs. If you do not, the brake lathe will not correct for brake disc runout, resulting in an uneven finish and brake pulsation. Remove the front wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts with flat washers to compensate for the removed wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Remove the caliper assembly. Use a wire or a S-hook to hold the caliper to the spring or damper tower. Do not kink the brake hose or use it to support the caliper. If you are not using the power drive system and the vehicle has ICS or VSA, make sure you install a brake pad spreader between the pads on the hanging caliper. Also, make sure the ICS or VSA is turned off anytime the engine is started. If the system is not turned off, the brakes could activate, causing the brake pads on the hanging caliper to hit each other or the caliper pistons to fall out. Install the vibration damper on the brake disc. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure you install the protective band around the wheel nuts. If you are not using the power drive system, use a fabric tie-down strap to secure the brake disc that is opposite to the one you are refinishing. If you are working on a Prelude with ATTS, do not use a tie-down strap; let both wheels turn freely. Mounting the Brake Lathe Remove the tool bed from the brake lathe, then mount the brake lathe to the steering knuckle with a Honda 1-piece speed mount. These mounts provide quicker, more accurate mounting, and can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5586 Honda 1-Piece Speed Mounts P/N KWY-108006000 (for most models), P/N KWY-108007500 (Odysseys, Pilots, and Ridgelines with two-piston calipers) Attaching the Power Drive System 1. Make sure the drive motor assembly on the power drive system is level with the brake disc. 2. Attach the mounting yoke to the brake disc, and secure it with one of the wheel nuts. Torque the wheel nut to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5587 3. Attach the driveshaft on the drive motor assembly to the mounting yoke, making sure the center line of the driveshaft is level with the spindle nut on the wheel hub. 4. Set the lower toggle switch on the drive motor assembly to FWD (counterclockwise rotation) or REV (clockwise rotation). Setting Up and Adjusting the Brake Lathe Use Kwik-Way cutting bits, P/N KWY-109109223, and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped KW and are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Before you use the brake lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure the tips are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. If a tip is worn, rotate the bit, and use a new tip. A worn tip produces a poor finish and may cause chattering. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5588 Reinstall the tool bed on the brake lathe with the top of the cutting bits facing up and the feed knobs facing down. Adjust the tool bed until the brake disc is centered between the cutting bits. For proper refinishing, the brake disc must turn toward the top of the cutting bits. Do not set the cutting depth on the brake lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). This is two divisions on the cutting knob. Make sure you start your cut at least 3 mm (0.12 in.) beyond the worn area on the brake disc. If you are cutting larger diameter brake discs, make sure you use the 150 cutting bit holders. These bit holders, available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION), supersede the original bit holders and provide better cutting coverage for larger diameter brake discs. Each bit holder is clearly marked for proper installation on the tool holder. Cutting the Brake Disc To get the smoothest cut and the best brake disc finish, always use the slowest feed speed on the tool bed feed motor. Place the drive belt on the smallest pulley of the feed motor and on the largest pulley of the hand wheel. Make sure the lower toggle switch on the power drive system drive motor assembly is set to the proper rotation to turn the brake disc toward the top of the cutting bits. Plug the tool bed feed motor into the power outlet on the drive motor assembly, then turn on the drive motor with the upper toggle switch on the assembly. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure the transmission is in 1st gear (2nd gear on Preludes with ATTS) or Reverse and the engine is idling, but not at a fast idle. If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Turn on the tool bed feed motor, and snap it into place; there should be tension on the feed belt. Cut the brake disc until the cutting bits clear the outer edge of the disc. The cutting bits should produce a smooth, consistent finish with no chatter marks or grooves. If the disc did not clean up entirely on the first pass, reset the brake lathe and make a second pass. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 00-088 > Jul > 10 > Brakes Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5589 Finishing the Job Remove the vibration damper and the protective band (if used). Use a micrometer to measure the thickness of the brake disc. Make sure the thickness is within the service manual specifications. Clean the brake disc with soapy water or brake cleaner, then wipe it dry. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust or chips, but do not use compressed air. Unplug the tool bed feed motor from the drive motor assembly, and remove the mounting yoke from the brake disc. Remove the speed mount from the steering knuckle. Apply a small amount of Molykote 77 grease to the brake pad shims. Reinstall the caliper assembly. (If you did not use the power drive system, use the brake pad spreader to push the pistons back into the caliper.) Torque the nuts and bolts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Refinish the other front brake disc using the same guidelines. Check the brake fluid level, then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake pedal is firm and does not pulsate. Lightly apply the brakes about 20 times during the test-drive to seat the brake pads. REAR BRAKE DISCS It is possible to use an on-car lathe on some models if the rear caliper mounts are low enough to clear the vehicle body. A power driver is needed for front drive models. Refinish rear brake discs on bench-mounted equipment if necessary. Follow the same guidelines you used for refinishing front brake discs, noting these differences: ^ Mount the brake lathe to the rear knuckle with the Honda 2-Piece Adapter (P/N KWY-1 08102504). You can order the 2-piece adapter through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > SN050315 > Mar > 05 > Brakes - Rear Brake Disc Thickness Manual Revision Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Disc Thickness Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: S/M Fix: Rear Brake Disc Thickness APPLIES TO: 03-05 Accord SERVICE TIP: The standard rear brake disc thickness called out in the 2003-05 Accord S/M is wrong. The correct standard thickness should be 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5594 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc Thickness Front (15 inch brake type) Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................ 22.9 23.1 mm (0.90 - 0.91 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. ............................................................................ 21.0 mm (0.83 inch) Front (16 inch brake type) Standard or New ................................................................................................................................................ 27.9 28.1 mm (1.10 - 1.11 inch) Service limit .............................................................................................. ............................................................................. 26.0 mm (1.02 inch) Rear Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................... 8.9 9.1 mm (0.35 - 0.36 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................... ............................................................................ 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Runout Front and rear ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................... 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) Parallelism Front and rear ...................................................................................................................................... .................................. 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front Front Brake Disc Inspection Runout 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 4. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 5. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 inch) from the outer edge of the disc. Brake Disc Runout: Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 6. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc. Max. Refinish Limit: 15 inch brake type: 21.0 mm (0.83 inch) 16 inch brake type: 26.0 mm (1.02 inch) NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. - A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater then 0.10 mm (0.004 inch). Thickness and Parallelism 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (3/8 inch) in from the outer edge of the disc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5597 Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinish limit. Brake Disc Thickness: 15 inch brake type: Standard: 22.9 - 23.1 mm (0.90 - 0.91 inch) Max. Refinishing Limit: 21.0 mm (0.83 inch) 16 inch brake type: Standard: 27.9 - 28.1 mm (1.10 - 1.11 inch) Max. Refinishing Limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 inch) Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) max. NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. 4. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Note: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5598 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear Rear Brake Disc Inspection Runout 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake pads. 4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 inch) from the outer edge of the brake disc. Brake disc runout: Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Max. refinish limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 inch). Thickness and Parallelism 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the brake pads. 4. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, about 45° apart and 10 mm (3/8 inch) in from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Brake disc thickness: Standard: 8.9 - 9.1 mm (0.35 - 0.36 inch) Max. refinishing limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) max. NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5599 NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda. DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Attach a length of clear drain tube to the bleed screw. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left-front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown following until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5604 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. Avoid breathing dust particles. - Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection-15 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Inspection-16 Inch Brake Type 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3.Remove the front pads. 4. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the brake pad backing plate. 5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the brake pads as a set. Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5609 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (B). 4. Remove the flange bolt (C) while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up out of the way. Check the brake hoee and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 5. Remove the brake pads (A) and pad shims (B). 6. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 7. Remove the pad retainers (A), and check the caliper pins for free movement. 8. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 9. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 10. Clean and install the pad retainers. 11. Apply a light coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad sides of shims (A), the back of the brake pads (B), and to the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess paste off the pad shim and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discsand pad material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5610 12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pads with the wear indicator (C) on the inside. The wear indicator should be on the top of the pad. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 13. Push in the piston (B) so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Check the brake fluid level. The brake fluid may overflow if the reservoir is too full. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 14. Pivot the caliper (C) down into position. Install the flange bolt (D), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot. 15. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque. 16. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5611 applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Overhaul Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5612 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. 4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set. Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the flange bolts (C) while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boots, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim (A) and brake pads (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5613 5. Remove the pad retainers (A). 6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust and check for grooves and cracks. 7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8. Install the pad retainers. 9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs and pad material. 10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the inside bottom. If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 11. Rotate the caliper piston (C) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (D) in the piston with the tab (E) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5614 12. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (F), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots. 13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Then test-drive the vehicle. Overhaul Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid. ^ Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. ^ When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. ^ Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. ^ After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5615 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE SYSTEM FLUID TYPE (INCLUDES ABS LINE) Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 35. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5622 36. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5623 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (1) with the float in the down position and in the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - Conventional Brake Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 5627 Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Brake Hose and Line Inspection 1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting. 2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines. 3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. 4. Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator-control unit for damage and leakage. NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 5628 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement NOTE: ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping, cover disconnecting line joints with rags or shop towels. 1. Replace the brake hose (A) if the hose is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks. 2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line (B) using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C). 3. Remove and discard the brake hose clip (A) from the brake hose (B). 4. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. 5. Remove the brake hose from the knuckle. 6. Install the brake hose (A) on the damper with flange bolts (B) first, then connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 5629 7. Install the brake hose (A) on the upper brake hose bracket (B) with a new brake hose clip (C). 8. Connect the brake line (D) to the brake hose. 9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system. 10. Do the following checks: ^ Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary. ^ Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Assembly: Customer Interest Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5638 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5639 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5645 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Assembly, Traction Control > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Assembly: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5646 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Customer Interest Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5655 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5656 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft 07-045 April 13, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Low and Feels Soft (Supersedes 07-045, dated March 5, 2009, to revise the information marked by the asterisks) REVISION SUMMARY *Under VEHICLES AFFECTED and PARTS INFORMATION, the Element and Odyssey models were removed. NOTE: If you have this symptom on a 2007-08 Element or Odyssey, refer to Service Bulletin 10-017, Safety Recall: Air In Modulator-Control Unit Causes Low/So ft Brake Pedal.* SYMPTOM When you apply the brakes, the brake pedal travels lower and feels softer than normal. PROBABLE CAUSE The ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit has leaked air into the brake system. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ABS/TCS or VSA modulator-control unit (modulator assembly). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5662 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57110-SDB-023 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04907 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS NOTE: If the brake pedal travel is not lower than normal and the feel is not softer than normal, do not proceed with the diagnosis or the repair. 1. Inspect the brake system, and replace any leaking, worn, or damaged parts. 2. Manually bleed the brakes following the pattern shown on ISIS or in the service manual. Do not use a pressure or vacuum power bleeder: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, and select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 3. Apply the brakes to check the height and feel of the pedal: ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is now normal, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the brake pedal height and feel is still low and soft, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-045 > Apr > 10 > Brakes - Brake Pedal Is Low And Feels Soft > Page 5663 REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the ABS/ICS or VSA modulator-control unit: ^ Refer to the Brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MODULATOR, and select the appropriate Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation from the list. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken Windshield Moulding / Trim: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken 09-051 October 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Odyssey - - ALL 2009-11 Pilot - ALL 2003-07 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan Produced 2008-11 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan and HMA produced Windshield Side Trim Retainer Is Loose or Broken (Supersedes 09-051, dated February 27, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ In Applies To, and under PARTS INFORMATION, WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, and REPAIR PROCEDURE, the information for 2003-11 Accords was added. ^ Under REQUIRED MATERIALS, the 3M adhesive applicator was changed.* BACKGROUND When removing the windshield side trim, one or more of the retainers bonded to the body are damaged or come off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace any damaged or loose windshield side trim retainers. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5669 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5670 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5671 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5672 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5678 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5679 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5680 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 5681 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5682 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5683 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5684 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5685 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5686 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Modulator Unit The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS Normally Open (NO) solenoid valve, TCS normally closed (NC) solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the damping chamber. The modulator controls the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel. ABS Control Pressure intensifying mode TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed. Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper. Pump Motor When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF. The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump through the damping chamber to the master cylinder. Pressure retaining mode TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed. Pressure reducing mode Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5687 TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open. TCS Control Pressure intensifying mode TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON. The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber to the front caliper. Pressure retaining mode TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON. Front caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve. Pressure reducing mode Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5688 TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, front inlet valve closed, front outlet valve open, pump motor ON. Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5689 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Push in on the lock (A), then pull up the lever (B) of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector (C), and the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the three 6 mm bolts (D). 4. Remove the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit (E) and bracket (F). 5. Remove the two 6 mm bolts and hex bolt, then remove the bracket. Installation 1. Install the bracket, then tighten the two 6 mm bolts and the hex bolt. 2. Install the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 6 mm nuts. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the nuts. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector. 5. Push in the lock of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 6. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 7. Perform the TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, TCS and TCS activation indicators goes off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5690 9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS,TCS and TCS activation indicators do not come on. 10. If the brake pedal is now spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Excercise and bleed the brake system again, starting with the front wheels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Master Cylinder Inspection NOTE: ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. ^ Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly with a new part if necessary. ^ Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the brake fluid. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5694 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the cable clamps from the body. 2. Remove the access panel (A), then remove the right strut brace (B). 3. Remove the reservoir cap and brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir. 4. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A). 5. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5695 6. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and washers. 7. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster (E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. 8. Remove the rod seal (F) from the master cylinder. 9. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Replace all the rubber parts with new ones whenever the master cylinder is removed. ^ Use a new rod seal on reassembly. ^ Coat the inner bore lip and outer circumference of the new rod seal with the recommended seal grease in the master cylinder set. ^ Install the rod seal onto the master cylinder with its grooved side (G) toward the master cylinder. ^ Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if necessary. 10. Bleed system. 11. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - Conventional Brake Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 5700 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 5701 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Parking Brake Check and Adjustment Check 1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified number of clicks (B). 2. Adjust the parking brake if the lever clicks are not within the specification. Adjustment NOTE: After servicing the rear brake shoes, loosen the parking brake adjusting nut, start the engine, and press the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting brake before adjusting the parking brake (with rear drum brake). 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Pull the parking brake lever up one click. 4. Tighten the adjusting nut (A) until the parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are turned. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 5702 5. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary. 6. Pull the parking brake all the way up, and make sure the parking brakes are fully applied. 7. Reinstall the center console. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 5703 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable Replacement Parking Brake Cable NOTE: The parking brake cable must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure. Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. With Rear Disc Brake 1. Release the parking brake lever fully. 2. Remove the clip (A) from the rear brake caliper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 5704 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the rear brake caliper. 4. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the rear hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake disc and inside of the wheel. ^ Adjust the parking brake. Apply the parking brake firmly 10 times then adjust it again. With Rear Drum Brake 1. Remove the brake drum and shoes, and disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake shoe. 2. Remove the flange bolts (A) and parking brake cable (B) from the backing plate (C). 3. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the rear hub and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake drum and inside of the wheel. ^ Adjust the parking brake. Apply the parking brake firmly 10 times then adjust it again. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 67. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5708 14. Parking Brake Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5709 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application Vacuum Brake Booster: Customer Interest Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application 04-012 February 27, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Hard to Press at Start-up SYMPTOM The brake pedal is hard to press the first time in the morning or after the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time. PROBABLE CAUSE During the assembly of the brake booster vacuum hose, residue may have entered the brake booster check valve, causing the valve to intermittently stick. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster vacuum hose. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 413115 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: Brake Booster Vacuum Hose L4 models P/N 46402-SDA-A02 H/C 7185465 V6 models P/N 46402-SDB-A02 H/C 7185473 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 04907 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application > Page 5719 Template ID: 04-012A (L4 models) 04-012B (V6 models) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the clip(s) that hold the brake booster vacuum hose to the mounting bracket. 2. Remove the hose. 3. Install the new hose with the clamps, then attach the clip(s) to the bracket(s). NOTE: An arrow on the hose shows the proper direction for installation. 4. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the pedal sinks slightly, the booster is okay. ^ If the pedal does not sink, test the brake booster (see page 19-18 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application Vacuum Brake Booster: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application 04-012 February 27, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Hard to Press at Start-up SYMPTOM The brake pedal is hard to press the first time in the morning or after the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time. PROBABLE CAUSE During the assembly of the brake booster vacuum hose, residue may have entered the brake booster check valve, causing the valve to intermittently stick. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster vacuum hose. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 413115 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: Brake Booster Vacuum Hose L4 models P/N 46402-SDA-A02 H/C 7185465 V6 models P/N 46402-SDB-A02 H/C 7185473 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 04907 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application > Page 5725 Template ID: 04-012A (L4 models) 04-012B (V6 models) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the clip(s) that hold the brake booster vacuum hose to the mounting bracket. 2. Remove the hose. 3. Install the new hose with the clamps, then attach the clip(s) to the bracket(s). NOTE: An arrow on the hose shows the proper direction for installation. 4. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the pedal sinks slightly, the booster is okay. ^ If the pedal does not sink, test the brake booster (see page 19-18 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5726 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Test Functional Test 1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is bypassing internally, or the brake system (master cylinder, lines, modulator, or caliper) is leaking. 2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating normally. If the brake pedal height does not vary, the booster or check valve is faulty. 3. With the engine running, press the brake pedal lightly, and shift the transmission to the D position. Apply just enough pressure to hold back automatic transmission creep. If the brake pedal sinks more than 10 mm (3/8 inch) in 3 minutes, the master cylinder is faulty. A slight change in pedal height when the A/C compressor cycles on and off is normal. (The A/C compressor load changes the vacuum available to the booster.) Leak Test 1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then stop the engine. If the brake pedal height does not vary while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. 2. Turn the engine off, and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the brake pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. If the brake pedal position does not vary, check the booster check valve. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose at the booster (A). The check valve (B) is built into the hose. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and retest. 5. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster vacuum hose between the check valve and the booster. 6. Turn the engine off and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the brake pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the brake pedal height should gradually rise. ^ If the brake pedal position does not vary, replace the brake booster. ^ If the brake pedal position varies, replace the brake booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5727 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Replacement 1. Remove the master cylinder. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the brake booster (B). 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box mounting bolt (A), then remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (B) from the body. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5728 6. Remove the primary and secondary brake lines from the hose clamp (A). 7. Remove the clip (A) and the joint pin (B), then disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal. 8. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C). 9. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine compartment. NOTICE: ^ Be careful not to damage the booster surfaces and threads of the booster stud bolts. ^ Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines. 10. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Adjust the pushrod length before installing the brake booster. ^ Use a new clip whenever installing. ^ After installing the brake booster and master cylinder, fill the reservoir with new brake fluid, bleed the brake system, and adjust the brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5729 pedal height and free play. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Customer Interest Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application 04-012 February 27, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Hard to Press at Start-up SYMPTOM The brake pedal is hard to press the first time in the morning or after the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time. PROBABLE CAUSE During the assembly of the brake booster vacuum hose, residue may have entered the brake booster check valve, causing the valve to intermittently stick. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster vacuum hose. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 413115 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: Brake Booster Vacuum Hose L4 models P/N 46402-SDA-A02 H/C 7185465 V6 models P/N 46402-SDB-A02 H/C 7185473 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 04907 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application > Page 5738 Template ID: 04-012A (L4 models) 04-012B (V6 models) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the clip(s) that hold the brake booster vacuum hose to the mounting bracket. 2. Remove the hose. 3. Install the new hose with the clamps, then attach the clip(s) to the bracket(s). NOTE: An arrow on the hose shows the proper direction for installation. 4. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the pedal sinks slightly, the booster is okay. ^ If the pedal does not sink, test the brake booster (see page 19-18 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application 04-012 February 27, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Brake Pedal Is Hard to Press at Start-up SYMPTOM The brake pedal is hard to press the first time in the morning or after the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time. PROBABLE CAUSE During the assembly of the brake booster vacuum hose, residue may have entered the brake booster check valve, causing the valve to intermittently stick. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the brake booster vacuum hose. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 413115 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: Brake Booster Vacuum Hose L4 models P/N 46402-SDA-A02 H/C 7185465 V6 models P/N 46402-SDB-A02 H/C 7185473 Defect Code: 03001 Symptom Code: 04907 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 04-012 > Feb > 04 > Brakes - Pedal Hard to Press Upon first Application > Page 5744 Template ID: 04-012A (L4 models) 04-012B (V6 models) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the clip(s) that hold the brake booster vacuum hose to the mounting bracket. 2. Remove the hose. 3. Install the new hose with the clamps, then attach the clip(s) to the bracket(s). NOTE: An arrow on the hose shows the proper direction for installation. 4. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. ^ If the pedal sinks slightly, the booster is okay. ^ If the pedal does not sink, test the brake booster (see page 19-18 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5749 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5750 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5751 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5752 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5753 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation ABS Main Control The ABS/TCS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signals it receives, then calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying. TCS Main Control The ABS/TCS control unit controls the TCS based on signal inputs from the accelerator pedal position sensor, engine speed, shifter position, and the wheel sensors. In addition, the ABS/TCS control unit sends an engine retard request signal to the PCM if necessary. The pressure intensifying control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. Self-Diagnosis Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5754 ^ The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a monitor IC. They check each other for problems. ^ The CPUs also check the circuit of the system. ^ When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis. The ABS/TCS control unit turns on the appropriate indicator(s). On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS and TCS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester or HDS. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester or HDS. See the tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5755 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 47P Connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5756 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Push in on the lock (A), then pull up the lever (B) of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector (C), and the connector disconnects itself. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the three 6 mm bolts (D). 4. Remove the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit (E) and bracket (F). 5. Remove the two 6 mm bolts and hex bolt, then remove the bracket. Installation 1. Install the bracket, then tighten the two 6 mm bolts and the hex bolt. 2. Install the ABS/TCS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 6 mm nuts. 3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the nuts. 4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector. 5. Push in the lock of the ABS/TCS control unit 47P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 6. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 7. Perform the TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, TCS and TCS activation indicators goes off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5757 9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS,TCS and TCS activation indicators do not come on. 10. If the brake pedal is now spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal brake system during modulation. Excercise and bleed the brake system again, starting with the front wheels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Module > Component Information > Locations 144. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5761 197. ABS/TCS Modulator-Control Unit Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 35. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5766 36. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5767 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (1) with the float in the down position and in the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5771 52. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5772 136. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5773 Braking Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5774 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (B) from the left side of the pedal pad (C). Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): M/T: 167 mm (6 9/16 inch) A/T: 172 mm (6 13/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers on the knurled part of the push rod (B) until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.4 to 3.0 mm (0.016 to 0.118 inch) by locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5775 5. Check the brake pedal free play. Pedal Free Play 1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal by hand. 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 67. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5782 14. Parking Brake Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5783 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations 177. Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5790 271. TCS Off Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5791 Traction Control Switch: Testing and Inspection TCS OFF Switch Test 1. Remove the TCS OFF switch from the switch panel. 2. Disconnect the TCS OFF switch 5P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the TCS OFF switch connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity when the switch is pushed. 4. Check for continuity between the TCS OFF switch connector terminal No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity at all times. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5792 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair TCS Pressure Sensor Neutral Position Memorization 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's side of the dashboard. 2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS. 3. The HDS screen will display the message: "The SCS line has been shorted. Do you want to leave the SCS line shorted?" Choose YES. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The ABS indicator comes on for 2 seconds. 6. Push the TCS OFF switch once within 2 seconds after the ABS indicator goes off. 7. Push the TCS OFF switch once within 2 seconds after the ABS indicator comes back on. 8. The TCS activation indicator blinks, and the system starts TCS pressure sensor neutral position memorization. 9. When the ABS indicator, TCS indicator and TCS activation indicator go off, the memorizing is done. NOTE: On the left bottom side of the HDS screen you will notice "SCS" blinking during steps 4 to 9. 10. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC, or go back into the SCS Menu and remove the short from there. 11. If the indicators do not go off, retry step 10. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored 04-026 May 11, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED ABS Indicator Comes On With DTCs 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 SYMPTOM ABS indicator comes on with intermittent rear ABS sensor code(s). PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture in the sensor. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the appropriate rear wheel ABS sensor. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57475-SDA-A03 H/C 7269681 Defect Code: 03214 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored > Page 5801 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 is stored, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear wheel of the affected side. 2. Locate the rear wheel sensor and disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the two rear wheel sensor mounting bolts. Remove the sensor. 4. Install the new rear wheel sensor, being careful not to twist the wires. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft), and connect the sensor to the harness. 5. Reinstall the rear wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 6. Clear the codes with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. If any ABS codes come on do the appropriate troubleshooting in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored 04-026 May 11, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED ABS Indicator Comes On With DTCs 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 SYMPTOM ABS indicator comes on with intermittent rear ABS sensor code(s). PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture in the sensor. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the appropriate rear wheel ABS sensor. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 57475-SDA-A03 H/C 7269681 Defect Code: 03214 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 04-026 > May > 04 > Brakes - ABS Lamp ON/Intermittent DTC's Stored > Page 5807 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC 15, 16, 17, 18, 43, and/or 44 is stored, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear wheel of the affected side. 2. Locate the rear wheel sensor and disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the two rear wheel sensor mounting bolts. Remove the sensor. 4. Install the new rear wheel sensor, being careful not to twist the wires. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft), and connect the sensor to the harness. 5. Reinstall the rear wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to 108 Nm (80 lb-ft). 6. Clear the codes with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. If any ABS codes come on do the appropriate troubleshooting in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5810 Wheel Speed Sensor: Connector Locations 28. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 140. Under Right Rear Of Vehicle (Left Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5811 142. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5812 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 92. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front 93. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear 94. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5813 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5814 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Wheel Sensor The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. The wheel sensors detect changing of magnetic polarity on the magnetic encoder. The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the wheel speed based on signals received from the wheel sensor. When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. When the front wheel speed rises sharply above the vehicle speed, the TCS NC valve opens, the TCS NO valve closes, and the pump motor starts to intensify the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops, the front inlet valve closes momentarily to retain the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the front outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the front caliper fluid pressure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5815 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Check the magnetic encoder after cleaning the encoder. If necessary, replace the encoder. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the magnetic encoder all the way around while rotating the encoder. Standard: Front: 0.5 - 1.2 mm (0.02 - 0.05 inch) Rear: 0.4 - 1.1 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5816 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - ABS/TCS Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5825 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5826 37. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5827 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5828 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen the clutch push-rod locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H) and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 - 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 191 mm (7.52 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 95 mm (3.74 inch) 3. Tighten the clutch push-rod locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C). 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A). 7. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 5834 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5838 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5839 (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5844 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5845 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Battery Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Replacing a Battery? Don't Disconnect the Cables With the Engine Running When replacing a battery, many service techs disconnect the battery cables with the engine running to keep the data alive in volatile memory. This practice worked fine back in the day when vehicles were pretty much a box on wheels, but with so many of today's vehicles sporting a impressive array of cool, high tech hardware, it's not recommended. Here's why: ^ The battery works as a capacitor to prevent sudden swings in voltage. With the battery cables disconnected, the alternator voltage regulator tries to stabilize the system voltage, but it can only do so by turning the alternator on and off. ^ When solenoids or relays are turned on and of{ they produce a very high voltage spike that travels through the 12-volt system. This voltage spike can fry sensitive solid state components or corrupt the data that's stored in volatile memory for such components as the gauge control module, the radio, and the various control units. The best way to keep data alive in volatile memory when replacing a battery is to hook up a Honda Computer Memory Saver to the 16P data link connector (DLC). This portable tool works as a secondary 12-volt source. It saves you the hassle of writing down your customer's audio presets, resetting the clock, or even doing the idle learn procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions > Page 5851 The Honda Computer Memory Saver is indeed a real time saver, but here's a word of caution: Don't let the positive battery cable touch any body ground. It will cause a short that will either blow the fuse in the tool or cause a drop in system voltage resulting in the loss of any data that 5 in volatile memory. The Honda Computer Memory Saver is available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order one, just call and ask for FZRMS4000H. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 132. Alternator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5857 Alternator: Testing and Inspection Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is on. Does the percentage vary? YES - The alternator signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 4. 4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF. 5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals E3 and E12. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 8. NO - Go to step 13. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5858 12. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E12. Is there continuity? YES - Test the alternator. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E12) and the alternator. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 16. Cheek for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E12. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E12) and the alternator. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Alternator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Alternator Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Disconnect the fan motor connector (A) and compressor clutch connector (B), then remove the reserve tank (C). 4. Remove the two bolts (D), and loosen a bolt (E), then remove the condenser fan shroud. 5. Remove the drive belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5861 6. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B) from the alternator. 7. Remove the bolt (C) securing the harness holder. 8. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and alternator bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the alternator. 9. Install the alternator and drive belt in the reverse order of removal. 10. Connect the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 11. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station preset. Set the clock. 12. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5862 Alternator: Service and Repair Disassembly and Reassembly Alternator Overhaul Exploded view Special Tools Required - Handle driver 07749-0010000 - Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. 1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them. 2. Remove the alternator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5863 3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a 22 mm wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact wrench. 4. Remove the three flange nuts. 5. Remove the end cover (A) and the insulator (B). 6. Remove the brush holder (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5864 7. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear housing assembly (A) and washer (B). 8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to step 13. Remove the rotor from the drive end housing. 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for seizure marks. - If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor assembly. - If the rotor is OK, go to step 10. 10. Remove the front bearing retainer plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5865 11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and hammer. 12. With a hammer and special tools, install a new front bearing in the drive end housing. Alternator Brush Inspection 13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with vernier calipers (B). - If either brush is shorter than the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. - If brush length is OK, go to step 14. Alternator Brush Length Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) Rotor Slip Ring Test Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5866 14. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings (A). - If there is continuity, go to step 15. - If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly. 15. Check that there is no continuity between each slip ring and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C). - If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing assembly, and go to step 16. - If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly. 16. Assemble the alternator in reverse order of disassembly, and note these items: - Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip rings. - If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to 110 N.m (11.2 kgf.m, 81.0 lbf.ft) when you reinstall it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5871 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5872 37. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5873 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A). 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5874 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing will be held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen the clutch push-rod locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F), stroke (G), free play (H) and disengagement height (I) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.12 - 5.51 inch) Clutch Pedal Free Play: 10 - 18 mm (0.39 - 0.71 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 191 mm (7.52 inch) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height: 95 mm (3.74 inch) 3. Tighten the clutch push-rod locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C). 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A). 7. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 9 - 12 mm (0.35 - 0.47 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (K) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut (J). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 5884 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations 176. Transmission Housing (V6: A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5892 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5893 (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Clicking Or Ratcheting Noise On Hard Right Turn Starter Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Clicking Or Ratcheting Noise On Hard Right Turn SOURCE: Honda Service News May 2004 TITLE: Clicking or Ratcheting Noise on Hard Right Turns APPLIES TO: 2002-04 CR-V, 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: A faulty starter motor can cause a clicking or ratcheting noise when turning hard right. This noise can easily be mistaken for a tranny noise. To properly identify this noise, hook up a STEELMAN(R) ChassisEAR(R) diagnostic tool (T/N JSP-SM06600) to the starter motor, and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is loudest at the starter, replace the starter motor. STEELMAN(R) and ChassisEAR(R) are registered trademarks of J.S. Products, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5898 Starter Motor: Locations 167. Transmission Housing (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5899 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5900 Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection Starter Performance Test 1. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal. 2. Make a connection as shown using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the vehicle). To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. 3. Connect the battery as shown. Be sure to disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid. If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly. 4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid is working properly. 5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. 6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise. 7. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5901 8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown in the diagram, and confirm that the motor starts and keeps rotating. 9. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly. Specifications Electric current: 80 A or less Motor speed: 2,600 rpm or more Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement Starter Motor: Service and Repair Replacement Starter Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies, for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the harness clamp (A). 5. Disconnect the starter cable (B) from the B terminal, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (C) from the S terminal. 6. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then remove the starter. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal is facing out. 8. Connect the battery positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 9. Start the engine to make sure the starter works properly. 10. Enter the antitheft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 11. Set the clock. 12. Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 5904 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Overhaul Starter Overhaul Disassembly/Reassembly Armature Inspection and Test 1. Remove the starter. 2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure. 3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or damage, replace the armature. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 5905 4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe within the following specifications, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B). 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature. Commutator Diameter Standard (New): 28.0 - 28.1 mm (1.102 - 1.106 in.) Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.) 6. Measure the commutator (A) runout. - If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments. - If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature. Commutator Runout Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. Service Unit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 5906 7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). Commutator Mica Depth Standard (New): 0.4 - 0.5 mm (0.016 - 0.020 in.) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) 8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If an open circuit exists between any segments, replace the armature. 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 5907 10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists between the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the armature. Starter Brush Inspection 11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. Brush Length Standard (New): 15.8 - 16.2 mm (0.62 - 0.64 in.) Service Limit: 11.0 mm (0.43 in.) Starter Brush Holder Test 12. Check that there is no continuity between the (+) brush holder (A) and (-) brush holder (B). If there is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly. Brush Spring Inspection Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 5908 13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring the brush into contact with the commutator, then attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off the brush. If the spring tension is not within specification, replace the spring. Spring Tension: 15.7 - 17.7 N (1.60 - 1.80 kgf, 3.53 - 3.97 lbf) 14. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then position the brush about halfway out of its holder, and release the spring to hold it there. NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of #500 or #600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as the commutator. 15. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back each brush spring again, and push the brush down until it seats against the commutator, then release the spring against the end of the brush. 16. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush holder (B). Overrunning Clutch Inspection 17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft. Replace it if it does not slide smoothly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 5909 18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. If it does not lock in either direction or it locks in both directions, replace it. 19. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available separately. Check the condition of the torque converter ring gear to see if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged. 20. Reassemble the starter in the reverse order of disassembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5913 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5914 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations 167. Transmission Housing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5918 21. Starter Solenoid Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5919 Starter Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Starter Solenoid Test 1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 2. - If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. 2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and M terminal. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK. - If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Auxiliary Power Socket Overload Auxiliary Power Outlet: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Auxiliary Power Socket Overload Dead Power Socket? Keep Electrical Load Below Max NOTE: This article applies to Japan-built 03-06 Accords, '05-06 Civic Hybrids, '02-6 CR-Vs, and '04-06 Insights. The accessory power socket is made to handle a maximum electrical load of 120 watts (10 amps). Exceed that limit over a period of time, and the socket could overheat and cause an open circuit. If you've got a vehicle in your shop with a dead accessory power socket, check for continuity between the center contact and the wire terminal. If you find an open circuit, remind your service customer to keep the electrical load below 120 watts or the problem could wind up happening again. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5925 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5926 Accessory Power Sockets Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5929 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5930 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5931 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5932 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5933 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5934 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5935 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5936 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5937 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5938 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5939 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5940 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5941 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5942 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5943 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views 31. Accessory Power Socket, Front 32. Accessory Power Socket, Rear (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Accessory Power Sockets - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966 Diagram 155 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 5969 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 5970 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Front Accessory Power Socket Front Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center console holder. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the front accessory power socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 5. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 6. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 5971 7. Remove the ring (A). 8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 5972 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Rear Accessory Power Socket Rear Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Open the center console. 2. Remove the screw and accessory power socket panel (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the rear accessory power socket (C). 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 6. - If there is no battery voltage, check for. Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 7. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 7. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 5973 8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel (B). 9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Accessory Power Socket Front Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center console holder. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the front accessory power socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 5. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 6. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket > Page 5976 7. Remove the ring (A). 8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket > Page 5977 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Rear Accessory Power Socket Rear Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Open the center console. 2. Remove the screw and accessory power socket panel (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the rear accessory power socket (C). 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 6. - If there is no battery voltage, check for. Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 7. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 7. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket > Page 5978 8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel (B). 9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5983 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5984 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5985 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5986 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5987 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse: Connector Views 286. Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) 290. Outside Air Temperature Sensor In-line Fuse I (Honda Accessory) 291. Outside Air Temperature Sensor In-line Fuse 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5990 292. Security In-line Fuse (DX) (Honda Accessory) 309. XM Satellite In-line Fuse 1 (Honda Accessory) 310. XM Satellite In-line Fuse 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5993 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 5994 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Fuse Block: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6003 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6004 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6005 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6006 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6007 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6013 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6014 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6015 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6016 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6017 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Circuit Diagrams Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6020 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6021 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6022 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6023 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6024 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6025 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6026 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6027 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6028 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6029 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6030 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6031 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6032 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6033 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6034 Fuse Block: Connector Locations 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6035 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6036 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6037 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6040 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6041 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6042 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6043 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6044 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6045 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6046 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6047 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6048 240. Rear Junction Block Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6051 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID Ground To Components Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams 200. C103 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6058 209. C404 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6059 210. C405 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6060 211. C406 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6061 212. C554 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6062 213. C555 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6063 214. C556 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6064 215. C557 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6065 285. C101 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How To Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6068 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6069 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6070 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6071 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6072 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6073 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6074 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6075 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6076 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6077 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6078 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6079 to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6080 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6081 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6082 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Relay Box Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6088 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6089 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6090 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6091 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6092 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6093 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6094 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6095 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6096 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6097 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6098 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6099 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6100 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6101 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6102 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6103 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6104 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6107 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6108 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6109 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6110 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6111 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6112 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6113 Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6114 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6117 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6118 Under-hood Multi-Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6121 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Relay Box Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6126 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6127 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6128 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6129 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6130 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6131 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6132 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6133 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6134 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6135 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6136 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6137 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6138 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6139 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6140 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6141 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6142 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6145 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6146 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6147 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6148 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6149 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6150 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6151 Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6152 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6155 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6156 Under-hood Multi-Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6159 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Auxiliary Power Socket Overload Auxiliary Power Outlet: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Auxiliary Power Socket Overload Dead Power Socket? Keep Electrical Load Below Max NOTE: This article applies to Japan-built 03-06 Accords, '05-06 Civic Hybrids, '02-6 CR-Vs, and '04-06 Insights. The accessory power socket is made to handle a maximum electrical load of 120 watts (10 amps). Exceed that limit over a period of time, and the socket could overheat and cause an open circuit. If you've got a vehicle in your shop with a dead accessory power socket, check for continuity between the center contact and the wire terminal. If you find an open circuit, remind your service customer to keep the electrical load below 120 watts or the problem could wind up happening again. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6165 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6166 Accessory Power Sockets Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6202 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6203 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6204 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views 31. Accessory Power Socket, Front 32. Accessory Power Socket, Rear (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6205 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Accessory Power Sockets - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6206 Diagram 155 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 6209 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 6210 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Front Accessory Power Socket Front Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center console holder. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the front accessory power socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 5. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 6. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 6211 7. Remove the ring (A). 8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 6212 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Rear Accessory Power Socket Rear Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Open the center console. 2. Remove the screw and accessory power socket panel (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the rear accessory power socket (C). 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 6. - If there is no battery voltage, check for. Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 7. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 7. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Relay Test > Page 6213 8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel (B). 9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Accessory Power Socket Front Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Remove the center console holder. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the front accessory power socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 5. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 6. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket > Page 6216 7. Remove the ring (A). 8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket > Page 6217 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Rear Accessory Power Socket Rear Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement 1. Open the center console. 2. Remove the screw and accessory power socket panel (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the rear accessory power socket (C). 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 6. - If there is no battery voltage, check for. Blown No.9 (15 A) or No.32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Poor ground (G501, G601). - An open in the wire. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 7. - If there is no continuity, check for: Poor ground (G503). - An open in the wire. 7. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Accessory Power Socket > Page 6218 8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel (B). 9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6223 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6224 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6225 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6226 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6227 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse: Connector Views 286. Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror In-line Fuse (Honda Accessory) 290. Outside Air Temperature Sensor In-line Fuse I (Honda Accessory) 291. Outside Air Temperature Sensor In-line Fuse 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6230 292. Security In-line Fuse (DX) (Honda Accessory) 309. XM Satellite In-line Fuse 1 (Honda Accessory) 310. XM Satellite In-line Fuse 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6233 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6234 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Fuse Block: Customer Interest Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6243 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6244 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6245 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6246 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6247 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim 05-034 December 14, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Headlights Dim or DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-034, dated September 13, 2000) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The headlights dim with the engine running and the headlights on, or DTC P1298 [electronic load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage] is stored in the ECM/PCM (but the headlights do not dim). PROBABLE CAUSE The ELD has a faulty solder joint. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Accord and Odyssey: Replace the under-hood fusel/relay box. Element Replace the ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6253 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 38255-S5A-003 H/C 7987571 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 07411 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS If the headlights dim when the engine is running, connect the HDS to the DLC: 1. With the HDS in the PGM-FI Data List, start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Turn on the headlights. 3. Monitor the ELD value on the Data List. ^ If the ELD value is less than 18 amps: - For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD - For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6254 - For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT ^ If the ELD value is greater than 18 amps, disregard this bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: A faulty ELD may cause the charging system to fluctuate between 12.5-volt and 14.5-volt modes with the engine running and the headlights on. This fluctuation causes the headlights to dim. Under normal operating conditions, the charging system operates in the 14.5-volt mode. ^ If the headlights do not dim, but DTC P1298 is stored in the ECM/PCM: ^ For Accord, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD ^ For Odyssey, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY ^ For Element, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT NOTE: When DTC P1298 is set, the charging system is fixed in the 14.5-volt mode, preventing the headlights from dimming. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - ACCORD 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-71 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - ODYSSEY 1. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box: ^ Refer to page 22-85 of the 2005-06 Odyssey Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword UNDER-HOOD REM, and select Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation from the list. 2. If necessary, clear the DTC with the HDS. REPAIR PROCEDURE C - ELEMENT 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio system. Write down the customer's audio unit presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6255 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the holder. Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder. 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6256 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, then remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 05-034 > Dec > 05 > Electrical/Lighting - DTC P1298 Set or Headlamps Dim > Page 6257 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reconnect the 3P ELD connector, and reinstall the lower cover onto the fuse/relay box. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box and the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Clear the DTC. 17. *Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the driver's window AUTO function does not work. ^ Start the engine. ^ Push down the driver's power window switch to the second detent (AUTO down) to lower the driver's window all the way down. When the window reaches the bottom, hold the switch in the AUTO down position for 2 more seconds. ^ Pull up the driver's power window switch to raise the driver's window all the way up without stopping. When the window reaches the top, hold the switch in the up position for 2 more seconds. ^ If the driver's window AUTO function does not work, repeat this power window control unit reset procedure. 18. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes.* 19. Enter the audio system anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio unit presets. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Circuit Diagrams Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6260 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6261 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6262 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6263 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6264 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6265 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6266 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6267 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6268 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6269 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6270 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6271 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6272 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6273 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6274 Fuse Block: Connector Locations 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6275 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6276 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6277 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6280 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6281 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6282 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6283 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6284 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6285 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6286 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6287 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6288 240. Rear Junction Block Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6291 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID Ground To Components Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams 200. C103 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6298 209. C404 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6299 210. C405 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6300 211. C406 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6301 212. C554 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6302 213. C555 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6303 214. C556 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6304 215. C557 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6305 285. C101 (Junction Connector) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How To Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6308 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6309 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6310 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6311 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6312 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6313 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6314 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6315 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6316 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6317 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6318 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6319 to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6320 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6321 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6322 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Relay Box Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6328 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6329 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6330 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6331 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6332 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6333 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6334 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6335 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6336 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6337 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6338 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6339 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6340 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6341 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6342 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6343 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6344 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6347 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6348 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6349 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6350 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6351 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6352 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6353 Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6354 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6357 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6358 Under-hood Multi-Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6361 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations 33. Left Side Of Engine Compartment 49. Behind Left Kick Panel Relay Box Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6366 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6367 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6368 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6369 Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6370 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6371 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6372 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6373 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6374 Starting System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6375 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6376 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6377 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6378 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6379 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6380 Under-Hood Multi-relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6381 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6382 195. Behind Left Kick Panel (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6385 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6386 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6387 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6388 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6389 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6390 236. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6391 Relay Box: Diagrams Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6392 237. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6395 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6396 Under-hood Multi-Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals. 6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fusel relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. 5. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 7. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6399 Relay Box: Service and Repair Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Removal and Installation SRS components are located, and the in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A). 6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fusel relay box away from the body. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fusel relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presents. 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6409 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6410 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6411 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6412 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6413 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6414 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6415 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6416 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6417 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 6422 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 6423 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right Alignment: Customer Interest Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifts to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 6428 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 6429 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shift the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6435 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6436 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6437 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6438 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6439 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6440 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6441 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6442 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6443 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 6448 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > Jun > 05 > Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right > Page 6449 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifts to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 6454 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 03-036 > May > 05 > Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right > Page 6455 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shift the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 6460 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 6466 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6467 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6468 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6469 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6470 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6471 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6472 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6473 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6474 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6475 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6476 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 03-036 Date: 050603 Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6477 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6478 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 03-036 Date: 050503 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6479 Alignment - Vehicle Pulls to the Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifts to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6480 ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6481 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shift the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # SN030915 Date: 030901 Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6482 Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6483 warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6484 TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6485 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6486 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6487 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6488 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6489 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6490 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6491 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6492 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 03-036 Date: 050603 Steering - Vehicle Pulls to The Right 03-036 June 3, 2005 Applies To: *2003 Accord - ALL 2004 Accord - ALL 2005 Accord - ALL* 2003-2005 Accord: Vehicle Drifts to the Right (Supersedes 03-036, dated September 23, 2003, to update the information marked with the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The vehicle drifis to the right at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE The camber settings are uneven. CORRECTIVE ACTION Shift the front subframe to the right. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 42700-SDB-A02 H/C 7137714 *Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 09770* Template ID: 03-036A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Inspect the tires for uneven or abnormal tire wear, and set the tire pressure to the cold specifications shown on the doorjamb sticker. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6493 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph on a road with very little crown. Use a stopwatch to determine how long the vehicle takes to make a complete lane change. ^ If the vehicle takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If the vehicle takes less than 6 seconds to change lanes, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, and inspect the front suspension for any damage. ^ If there is any suspension damage, replace the damaged parts and check the wheel alignment. ^ If there is no suspension damage, go to step 2. 2. Swap the front tires from side to side, and test-drive the vehicle as you did in the DIAGNOSIS. ^ If the vehicle now takes 6 seconds or more to change lanes, the drift is normal. Return the vehicle to the customer, and explain that the drift is normal. ^ If swapping tires did not have an effect on vehicle lane-change time, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the four 14 mm subframe bolts and the four subframe bracket bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6494 4. At the left rear of the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and the floor frame. 5. At the left front of the subframe, insert another pry bar between the subframe and the front side frame. NOTICE Be careful not to damage the front side of the frame when you press on the pry bars. You could bend and damage the frame if you apply too much pressure. 6. Press on both pry bars, and shifi the subframe as far right as possible. It will move only a few millimeters. 7. While holding the subframe to the far right, have an assistant torque the four 14 mm subframe bolts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft) and the four bracket mounting bolts to 93.5 N.m (69 lb-ft). 8. Check the wheel alignment. Make sure the vehicle has some negative camber at the right front wheel, but not more than that allowed in the wheel alignment specifications. 9. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the drift is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Alignment: Specifications Alignment WHEEL ALIGNMENT CAMBER Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... 0°00'±45' Rear ..................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. -1°00'±30' CASTER Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... 3°15'±45' TOTAL TOE-IN Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................. 0±2 mm (0±1/16 in.) Rear ..................................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 2±2 mm (1/16±1/16 in.) FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE Inside wheel ......................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 38°50'±2° Outside wheel ...................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 31°40' (Reference) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment > Page 6497 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Honda Motor Company does not list ride height/trim height specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6498 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment The suspension can be adjusted for front and rear toe. Pre-Alignment Checks For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks: 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 3. Check the tire size and tire pressure. Tire size: ('03-05 Models) Except 2 door EX, M/T models: P205/60R16 91V M+S 2 door EX, MT model: P215/50R17 93V M+S ('06-07 Models) P205/50R17 93V M+S Tire pressure: ('03-05 Models) Front: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi) Rear: 4 door LX, EX models: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi) 2 door LX, EX models: 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi) 2 door EX, M/T model: 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi) ('06-07 Models) Front: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi) Rear: 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi) 4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires. 5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling.) 6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the suspension. Caster Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the caster angle. Caster angle: 3°15'±45' 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: Front: 0°00' ±45' Maximum difference between the right and left side: 0°45' Rear: -1°00' ±30' Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6499 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Center the steering wheel spokes. 2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe-in: 0±2 mm (0±1/16 in.) - If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment. - If adjustment is required, go to step 3. 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a wrench, and turn both rack ends (C) until the front toe is within specifications. 4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. Reposition the rack-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced. Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Check the toe. Rear toe-in: 2 ±2 mm (1/16 ±1/16 in.) - If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment. - If adjustment is required, go to step 3. 3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear control arm (B), and loosen the self-locking nut (C). 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6500 NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it has been loosened. 5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct. 6. Tighten the self-locking nut while holding the adjusting bolt. Turning Angle Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. Turning angle: Inward: 38°50' ±2° ('03-05 Models) 38°50' ±2° ('06-07 Models) 35°20' ±2° Outward: ('03-05 Models) 31°40' (reference) ('06-07 Models) 29°40' (reference) 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6506 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6507 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6508 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6509 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6510 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6511 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6516 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Attachment, 78 x90 mm O7GAD-SD4O1O1 ^ Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm O7GAF-SD4O1O0 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 ^ Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD9O1OO Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6517 2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6518 6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6519 11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball joint remover. 14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 15 Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6520 NOTE: ^ Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. ^ During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint. 17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and on the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6521 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary. 5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6522 ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^ Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B) on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring when installing it. 9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. 11. Press a wheel bearing (A) onto the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID CAPACITY Fluid change ........................................................................................................................................ .................................. 0.4 liters (0.42 US quarts) System overhaul ..................................................... ............................................................................................................... 1.1 liters (1.16 US quarts) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6528 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM FLUID TYPE Honda Power Steering Fluid. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6529 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Fluid Replacement Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C). 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. 8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored, repeat procedure as necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-086 > Apr > 09 > Power Steering - Moans/Whines On Cold Start Up Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Power Steering - Moans/Whines On Cold Start Up 07-086 April 3, 2009 Applies to vehicles shown above. Power Steering Moans or Whines During Cold Start-Up (Supersedes 07-086, Power Steering Moans or Whines, dated December 1, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM A moan or whine is heard when turning the steering wheel when the engine is cold. There may be air bubbles or foam in the power steering reservoir. The noise usually goes away when the engine warms up. PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the O-ring on the power steering pump inlet joint. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine Power Steering Fluid: P/N 08206-9002, H/C 3747284 (One container repairs about 12 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 5121B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 91345-PAA-A01 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-086 > Apr > 09 > Power Steering - Moans/Whines On Cold Start Up > Page 6541 H/C 5430681 Defect Code: 07408 Symptom Code: 04201 Template ID: 07-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 07-086 > Apr > 09 > Power Steering - Moans/Whines On Cold Start Up Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Moans/Whines On Cold Start Up 07-086 April 3, 2009 Applies to vehicles shown above. Power Steering Moans or Whines During Cold Start-Up (Supersedes 07-086, Power Steering Moans or Whines, dated December 1, 2007, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM A moan or whine is heard when turning the steering wheel when the engine is cold. There may be air bubbles or foam in the power steering reservoir. The noise usually goes away when the engine warms up. PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the O-ring on the power steering pump inlet joint. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Genuine Power Steering Fluid: P/N 08206-9002, H/C 3747284 (One container repairs about 12 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 5121B5 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 91345-PAA-A01 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 07-086 > Apr > 09 > Power Steering - Moans/Whines On Cold Start Up > Page 6547 H/C 5430681 Defect Code: 07408 Symptom Code: 04201 Template ID: 07-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > SN030410 > Apr > 03 > Power Steering Whines or Whistles Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering Whines or Whistles SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Power Steering Whines or Whistles APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord V6s and on 200203 Civic 2-doors before VIN 1HGEM2...3L034854 SERVICE TIP: On a loose crimp in the power steering high-pressure hose can cause the silencer inside the hose to shift and make a whine or whistle. To fix this problem, replace the high-pressure hose. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > SN030410 > Apr > 03 > Power Steering Whines or Whistles Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering Whines or Whistles SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Power Steering Whines or Whistles APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord V6s and on 200203 Civic 2-doors before VIN 1HGEM2...3L034854 SERVICE TIP: On a loose crimp in the power steering high-pressure hose can cause the silencer inside the hose to shift and make a whine or whistle. To fix this problem, replace the high-pressure hose. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6557 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A Special Tools Required ^ P/S joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A ^ P/S joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B ^ P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122 ^ P/S pressure gauge 07406-00100A Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. 1. Check the power steering fluid level. 2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B) with the P/S joint outlet plate. 3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). 4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump). 5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully. 6. Start the engine and let it idle. 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature. 8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. if the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read no more than 1,500 kPa (15 kgf-cm, 2,213 psi). If it reads high, check for: ^ Clogged or deformed feed or return line between the pump and gearbox. ^ Clogged valve body unit. 9. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Gradually close pressure control valve and immediately read the pressure. NOTICE: Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating. 10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 7,940 - 8,630 kPa (81 - 88 kgf/cm2, 1,150 - 1,250 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A > Page 6560 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-0010001 Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 Special Tools Required ^ P/S joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A ^ P/S joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B ^ P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122 ^ P/S pressure gauge 07406-0010001 Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. 1. Check the power steering fluid level. 2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B) with the P/S joint outlet plate. 3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). 4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump). 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A). 6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B). 7. Start the engine and let it idle. 8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature. 9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read no more than 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads high, check for: ^ Clogged or deformed feed or return line between the pump and gearbox. ^ Clogged valve body unit. 10. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure control valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. NOTICE: Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating. 11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 7,940 - 8,630 kPa (81 - 88 kgf/cm2, 1,150 - 1,250 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Pump Replacement 1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir. 3. Remove the side engine mount bracket (A). 4. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley. 5. Cover the auto-tensioner, alternator, and A/C compressor with several shop towels to protect them from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (B) and pump outlet hose (C) from the pump (D), and plug them. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed. 6. Remove the pump mounting bolts (E). 7. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the pump. 8. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose onto the new pump. 9. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings securely. 10. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6563 11. Install the drive belt (A). Note these item during belt installation: ^ Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on the pulleys (B). ^ Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the auto-tensioner, alternator, A/C compressor, and drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease before installation. 12. Install the side engine mount bracket. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 13. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6564 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Overhaul Pump Overhaul Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged. Special Tools Required Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 Disassembly NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the following procedure. 1. Drain the fluid from the pump. 2. Remove the power steering pump. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6565 3. Hold the power steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws (B), hold the pulley (C) with the special tool (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring. 5. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, flow control valve and spring. 6. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal. 7. Remove the outer side plate, cam ring, rotor, vanes, side plate and O-rings. 8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve from the pump housing. 9. Remove the snap ring, then remove the pump drive shaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic hammer. 10. Remove the seal from the pump housing. Inspection 11. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve. 12. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the pump housing for scratches and wear. 13. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump housing, and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go to step 14; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The flow control valve (A) is not available separately. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6566 14. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the flow control valve in a container of power steering fluid or solvent (C), and blow in the hose. ^ If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not available separately. ^ If the flow control valve OK, set it aside for reassembly later. 15. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and install a new one (B). 16. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the Exploded View; if any of them are worn or damaged, replace the pump as an assembly. Reassembly 17. Align the pin (A) of the sub-valve (B) with the oil passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the sub-valve into place, then install the snap ring (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6567 18. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side facing in) into the pump housing by hand first then position the pump drive shaft (B) in the pump housing. Press the pump drive shaft and pump seal with the appropriate size socket wrench (C) as shown. 19. Install the 40 mm snap ring (D) with its radiused edge facing out. 20. Coat the new pump cover seal (A) with power steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the pump cover (B). 21. Install the outer side plate (C) over the two roll pins (D) with its arrow marks stamped (E) facing down. 22. Set the pump cam ring (A) over the two roll pins with its "^" mark (B) facing down. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6568 23. Assemble pump rotor (A) to the pump cover (B) with its "^" mark (C) facing up. 24. Set the 10 vanes (D) in the grooves in the rotor. Make sure that the round ends (E) of the vanes are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring. 25. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the side plate (B). 26. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning the roll pins set holes (D) in the side plate with the roll pins (E). 27. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, and position it in the bottom of the pump housing. 28. Install the pump cover assembly (B) in the pump housing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 29. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6569 30. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and install it on the flow control valve cap (D), then install the cap on the pump housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. 31. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B). Install the inlet joint on the pump housing. 32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 33. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten the pulley nut to specified torque. 34. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley by hand. If it turns hard, loosen the four flange bolts on the cover, then retighten them in same manner as in step 28. Turn the pump again by hand. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 154. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6574 66. PSP Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6575 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6576 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead. 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it indicate OFF? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 12. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 7. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to ON? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 11. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (A17) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6577 14. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine. 15. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does it change to OFF? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 20. Connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 21. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A17. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (A17). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6578 22. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6579 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6585 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6586 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6587 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations 43. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6591 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6592 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6593 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair Steering Lock Replacement 1. Remove the steering column. 2. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Be careful not to damage the switch body when removing the shear bolts. 3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body. 4. Install the switch body without the key inserted. 5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts. 6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns freely. 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B) twist off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6600 Steering Gear: Adjustments Rack Guide Adjustment Special Tools Required Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07916-SA50001 SHOWA-Steering Gearbox 1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (B). 3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw (A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite 5699) all around the threads (B). Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox. 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.), then loosen it. 5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm (0.4 kgf-cm, 3 ft. lbs.), then back it off to the specified angle. Specified Return Angle: 20° max 6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench, and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully seated. 7. Install the special tool on the locknut (B), and hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque with the special tool. 8. Check for unusual steering effort through the complete turning travel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6601 9. Check the steering wheel rotation play and the power assist. TKS-Steering Gearbox 1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (B). 3. Remove the old sealant from rack guide screw (A) threaded section, and apply new sealant (Loctite 565) all around the first three threads (B). Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox. 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 22 Nm (2.2 kgf-cm, 16 ft. lbs.), then loosen it. 5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm (0.4 kgf-cm, 3 ft. lbs.), then back it off to the specified angle. Specified Return Angle: 15° ± 5° 6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench, and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully seated. 7. Install the special tool on the locknut (B), and hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque with the special tool. 8. Check for unusual steering effort through the complete turning travel. 9. Check the steering wheel rotation play and the power assist. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal Steering Gearbox Removal Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 ^ Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 * ^ Engine hanger balancer bar VSB02C00019 * ^ Subframe adaptor VSB02C000016 * * Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment program 888-424-6857 Note these items during removal: ^ Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the valve body unit, its lines, and the end of the gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air. ^ Make sure to remove the steering wheel before disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable reel can occur. 1. Drain the power steering fluid. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the front wheels. 4. Remove the steering wheel. 5. Remove the steering joint cover A. 6. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect the steering joint by moving the steering joint (B) toward the column. Hold the slider shaft (C) on the column with a piece of wire (D) between the joint yoke (E) on the slider shaft to the joint yoke on the upper shaft. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6604 7. Remove the steering joint cover B. Be careful not to damage the mating surface on the joint cover B and pinion shaft grommet. Replace the cover seal (A) if necessary. 8. Remove and discard the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint nut (B), then loosen the nut. 9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the special tool. 10. Remove the front bulkhead cover. 11. Lift and support the engine with engine support hanger (A) and engine balancer bar (B). Attach the front arm (C) to the front cylinder head with a spacer (D) and the 10 x 1.25 mm bolt (E). Attach the rear arm (F) to the rear cylinder head with the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (G). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6605 12. Remove the P/S heat baffle plate (A). 13. Remove the feed line holder mounting bolt (A) on the front suspension subframe. 14. Remove the feed line holder mounting bolt (A) and return hose (B) from the gearbox mounting bracket (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6606 15. Place several shop towels under the line connections, and cover the gearbox mounting part to protect it from the power steering fluid. Loosen the flare nut (A), and disconnect the feed line (B). 16. Loosen the flare nut (C), and disconnect the return line (D). 17. After disconnecting the lines, plug or seal them with a piece of tape or equivalent to prevent foreign materials from entering. NOTE: Do not loosen the cylinder line A and B between the valve body unit and the cylinder. 18. Attach the special tool to the front suspension subframe (A) with hanging the hook of the special tool over the front of the subframe, then tighten the special tool screw. 19. Raise the jack (B) and line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base, then attach them with bolts securely. 20. Remove the front suspension subframe right mid mount bolts (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6607 21. Remove the front suspension subframe left mid mount (A). 22. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolts on the left gearbox mount, and remove the steering stiffener plate (A). 23. Remove the front suspension subframe rear bracket (A) mounting bolt (B). 24. Loosen the two front suspension subframe mounting bolts (C) on right and left, and slowly lower the jack supporting subframe (D) with special tool until the subframe has dropped 30 mm (1 1/8 inch) total. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6608 25. Remove the two flange bolts from the right side of the gearbox, then remove the gearbox mounting bracket (A) and cushion (B). 26. Move the steering gearbox toward the front, and remove the pinion shaft grommet (A) from the top of the valve body unit. 27. Apply vinyl tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft. 28. Apply vinyl tape or equivalent material (A) to brake lines (B) to protect it from the pinion shaft. 29. Move the steering gearbox to the driver's side, and rotate it so the pinion shaft points toward the front of the vehicle. 30. Carefully move the steering gearbox as an assembly toward the driver's side of the vehicle until pinion shaft clears the wheelwell opening. Be Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6609 careful not to damage the brake lines with the pinion shaft. 31. Remove the steering gearbox through the wheelwell opening on the driver's side. 32. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure that no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox mount cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the subframe and stiffener. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6610 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Installation Steering Gearbox Installation Special Tools Required Subframe adaptor EQS02C000016 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment program 888-424-6857) 1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure that no power steering fluid is on the mating surface of the gearbox and a front suspension subframe. To prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from loosening after the installation, remove the power steering fluid from the mount cushions and bolt holes. 2. Apply a mild soap and water solution to both side of the mount cushion mating surfaces (A). 3. Pass the cylinder of the steering gearbox (B) through the wheelwell opening on the driver's side. 4. Carefully move the steering gearbox toward the passenger's side until the pinion shaft clears the wheelwell opening on the body. 5. Rotate the steering gearbox so the pinion shaft (A) points upward. 6. Continue moving the gearbox toward the passenger's side until the steering gearbox is in position. Make sure the power steering return line and feed line are routed above the gearbox. 7. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, and install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the slot in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion (B) on the valve housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6611 8. Position the cutout (A) on the mounting cushion (B) as shown, and install it on the cylinder of the gearbox securely. 9. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (C) over the mounting cushion, and loosely install the two flange bolts. 10. Install the steering stiffener plate (A) and gearbox mounting bolts on the left side of the gearbox, then tighten them to the specified torque. 11. Tighten the flange bolts on the right side of the gearbox with alternately in two or more steps to the specified torque. 12. Connect the return line (A) securely, and tighten the flare nut to specified torque SHOWA: 16 x 1.5 mm 42 Nm (4.3 kgf-cm, 31 ft. lbs. TKS: 14 x 1.5 mm 37 Nm (3.8 kgf-cm, 27 ft. lbs.) 13. Connect the feed fine (B) securely, and tighten the flare nut to specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6612 14. Install the feed line holder (A) and return hose (B) on the gearbox mounting bracket (C). 15. Install the feed line holder (A) on the subframe. Make sure that there is no interference between the feed and return lines any other parts. 16. Install the P/S heat baffle plate (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6613 17. Raise the jack supporting front suspension subframe (A) with special tool until the subframe is in position. 18. Install the rear suspension subframe bracket (B) mounting bolt (C), then tighten new subframe mounting bolt (D) to the specified torque. 19. Install the front suspension subframe left mid mount (A). 20. Install the front suspension subframe right mid mount bolts (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6614 21. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads. Then reconnect the tie-rod end (Al to the knuckle arms. 22. Install the tie-rod end ball joint nut, and tighten it to the specified torque. Then install the new cotter pin (B), and bend it as shown (C) or (D). 23. Install the new cover seal (A) all the way around in the steering joint cover B. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the seal, then install the steering joint cover B. 24. Center the steering rack within its stroke. 25. Position the steering column joint (A) so the bolt (B) opposite to the notch (C) is within the range shown. 26. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position, cut the wire (D) and slip the lower end of the steering joint on to the pinion shaft (E). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6615 27. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the groove (B) around the pinion shaft, and loosely install the joint bolt (C). Make sure that the joint bolt is securely in the groove of the pinion shaft. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is fully seated. 28. Tighten the steering joint bolt to specified torque. 29. Install the steering joint cover A until contact the mating surfaces on the cover B evenly around. 30. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 31. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about three full turns) until the arrow mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the steering wheel. 32. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed air from the system. 33. After installation, do the following checks. ^ Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks. ^ Do the front toe inspection. ^ Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering spoke angles to the right and left are not equal (steering wheel and rack are not centered), correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft serrations, and repeat step 34. Then adjust the front toe by turning the tie-rod ends, if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6616 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Overhaul Steering Gearbox Overhaul TKS-Steering Gearbox (Manufactured in U.S.A. and Mexico plants only) Special Tools Required ^ Driver handle, 480 mm 070GD-0010100 ^ Attachment, 24 x 26 mm 07746-0010700 ^ Pilot, 22 mm 07746-0041000 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 Piston seal ring guide 07ZAG-S7A0100 Piston seal ring sizing tool 07ZAG-S7A0200 ^ Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: ^ Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the following procedure. ^ For the Showa-made steering gearbox overhaul procedures. Removal 1. Remove the steering gearbox. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6617 Disassembly: TKS-Made Steering Gearbox 2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull the boots away from the ends of the steering gearbox. 3. Unbend the lock washer (A). 4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6618 5. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E). 6. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide screw (B). 7. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from the gearbox housing. 8. Remove the cylinder lines from the gearbox. NOTE: Use a second wrench when loosening the cylinder lines to avoid damage to the fittings on the steering gearbox. Do not loosen the A and B connectors. 9. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly moving the steering rack back and forth. 10. Remove the end plug (A) from the gearbox housing, then remove the nut (B) from the pinion shaft end. 11. Remove the two flange bolts, the valve body unit (C), and gasket (D) from the gearbox. Check that the valve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. If any play or roughness is felt, replace the valve body unit with a new part if necessary. Do not try to disassemble the valve body unit. 12. Slide the steering rack all the way to the left. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6619 13. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the end (B) of the circlip (C) sticks out from the hole (D) in the cylinder housing. Then turn it clockwise to remove the circlip. 14. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (B), and steering rack (C) from the steering gearbox. 15. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B) from the rack bushing (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6620 16. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the inside of seal ring groove and piston edges when removing the seal ring. 17. Insert the special tools, and carefully place it on the cylinder end seal (A) as shown. Make sure that the special tool is securely positioned on the cylinder end seal. 18. Install the bearing separator (B) on the gearbox housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the gearbox housing points upward, then push out the cylinder end seal by pressing on the end of the special tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6621 19. Remove the steering gearbox from the press, and set a driver extension (A) on the special tool (driver handle). Place the steering gearbox in a press, then remove the cylinder end seal (B) from the gearbox by pressing on the end of the extension. Note these items when pressing the cylinder end seal: ^ Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it if necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal. ^ Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove the seal by striking the tool; striking the tool would break the cylinder end seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox. Reassembly 20. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first. 21. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down toward the big end of the tool. Note these items during reassembly: ^ Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, make sure you contract the seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool). ^ Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set. 22. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the O-ring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6622 23. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the special tool with power steering fluid, then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the piston seal ring. 24. Move the special tool back and forth several times to make the piston seal ring fits snugly in the piston. 25. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped Portion. 26. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal (A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the steering rack with its grooved side toward the piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be careful not damage the lip of the seal with the edges or teeth of the steering rack. 27. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then remove any adhesive residue. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6623 28. Apply multipurpose grease to the steering rack teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be careful not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall with the rack edges. 29. Insert a deep socket (A) onto the steering rack as shown. 30. Install the cylinder and seal (B) into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press. Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it may damage the cylinder end seal. 31. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack. 32. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and coat the surface of the tape with power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6624 33. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal (A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the rack bushing (B) using the special tools. 34. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing. 35. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger. 36. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then remove any adhesive residue. 37. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the hole (B) is aligned with the slot (C) on the cylinder housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6625 38. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in the rack stop. 39. Apply multipurpose grease to the bearings (A) in the gearbox housing, and install the valve body unit (B) and new gasket (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of line connections). Then loosely install the two flange bolts. 40. Install the new self-locking nut (D) onto the pinion shaft end, and tighten to specified torque. 41. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. 42. Apply new sealant (Loctite 565) all the way around the threads on the end plug (F), install the end plug onto the gearbox housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. 43. After tightening, use a drift to stakes (A) the end plug shoulder against the gearbox housing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6626 44. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new O-rings with power steering fluid, then install the lines. Note these items during reassembly: ^ Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. The joints must be free of foreign material. ^ Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. NOTE: Use a second wrench when tightening the cylinder lines to avoid damaging to the fittings on the steering gearbox. 45. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox housing. 46. Apply new sealant (Loctite 565) all the way around the first three threads of the rack guide screw (B), then install the spring (C), rack guide screw, and locknut (D). 47. Adjust the rack guide screw. After adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding it right and left. 48. Install the new stop washer (A) and lock washer (B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots (D). Install the rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in place. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack. 49. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with a wrench, and tighten both rack ends. Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6627 50. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots on the rack end joint housing. 51. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of the rack end joint housing (A). 52. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves (B) on the rack ends. 53. Center the steering rack within its stroke. 54. Clean off the any grease or contamination from the boot installation surfaces (A) around on the gearbox housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end on the housing properly. 55. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the threaded section (D) of the rack end. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6628 56. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A) with the holes (B) of the band. 57. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a commercially-available Oetiker 1098 pincer or equivalent (B). 58. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6629 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement 1. Remove the steering gearbox. 2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer (B), 10 x 105 mm flange bolt (C) and the 10 mm nut (D) as shown. 3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the nut with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount cushion (E). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on the gearbox mounting cushion hole. 5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer, flange bolt, and the nut as shown. 6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the nut until the mount cushion edges (B) properly fit on the gearbox flange surface. 7. Reinstall the steering gearbox. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Removal SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations,'03 model 2-door, '03 model 4-door, '04 model 2-door, '04 model 4-door and precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the driver's airbag from the steering wheel. 3. Disconnect the cruise control set/resume switch, audio remote switch and navigation guide switch connectors (if equipped). 4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (A). 5. Install a commercially-available steering wheel puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel from the steering column shaft by turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller. Note these items when removing the steering wheel: ^ Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. ^ If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt. 6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the steering column. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6633 Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly Steering Wheel Installation Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6634 1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label point should point straight up. 2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A) and tighten it to the specified torque. Connect the audio remote, navigation guide and cruise control set/resume switch connectors (if equipped). Make sure the wire harness is routed and fastened properly. 4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the system is operating properly. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Reset the clock. 6. Check the cruise control, audio remote, navigation guide and turn signal canceling for proper operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning Tie Rod Boot: Customer Interest Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning 05-013 March 25, 2005 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL Clunking or Looseness in the Tie Rod Inner Joint SYMPTOM While turning, clunking is heard from the steering or looseness is felt in the steering wheel. PROBABLE CAUSE Water entered the tie-rod inner ball joint, causing rust that wore the plastic liner inside of the socket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the tie-rod ball joints, and replace the boots and tie-rod ball joints as required. PARTS INFORMATION Ball Joint Set: P/N 53010-SD B-A01, H/C 7139470 Clip: P/N 53434-587-A01, H/C 5439617 Bellows Clamp: P/N 53449-SDB-A01, H/C 7139561 Bellows: P/N 53534-SDB-A01, H/C 7139603 Spacer (Stop Washer): P/N 53535-SD B-A01, H/C 7139611 Lock Washer: P/N 53536-SDB-A01, H/C 7139637 Hex Nut: P/N 91411-587-A01, H/C 5454863 Cotter Pin: P/N 94201-20350, H/C 0058388 Hex Nut (10 mm): P/N 94030-10080, H/C 0995993 TOOL INFORMATION Pincers: Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially available REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6644 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53010-SDB-A01 H/C 7139470 Defect Code: 08001 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS With the vehicle on an alignment rack (vehicle weight on tires), have an assistant turn the steering wheel from side to side, and inspect the tie-rod inner joints for excessive play or looseness: ^ If the tie-rod inner ball joint has excessive movement, center the steering rack, remove the boot band, and pull the boot far enough to expose the ball joint. ^ If the tie-rod inner ball joint is loose and you find moisture, remove the opposing tie-rod inner ball joint and inspect it. ^ If either tie-rod ball joint has corrosion and/or has too much play or looseness, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations: ^ Refer to page 1-12 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LIFT, and select Lift and Support Points from the list. 2. Remove the affected front wheel. 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknut, and unscrew the ball joint from the tie rod. NOTE: Count and write down the number of turns that it takes to separate the ball joint from the tie- rod end. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6645 4. Remove the boot bands and tie-rod clips. Pull the boot away from the ends off the steering gearbox. 5. Unbend the lock washers. 6. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends with another wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 7. Remove the lock washer and the stop washer. 8. Install the new stop washer and new lock washer. Align the lock washer tabs with the slots on the rack end while holding the lock washer in place. Repeat this step for the other end of the rack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6646 9. Install the new rack ends. 10. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with a wrench, and torque both rack ends to 84 N~m (62 lb-ft). Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 11. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on the rack end joint housing. 12. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of the rack end joint housing. 13. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves on the rack ends. 14. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6647 15. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot installation grooves around the gearbox housing. Install the new boot (bellows) on the rack end with the tie-rod clips, and fit the boot end into the installation grooves in the housing properly. 16. After installing the boot, wipe any grease off the threaded section of the rack end. 17. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs with the holes of the band. 18. Close the ear portion of the band with commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent. 19. Slide the rack right and left to make certain that the boot is not deformed or twisted. 20. Install the tie-rod end onto the new ball joint by spinning the same number of turns you wrote down in step 4. Tighten the tie-rod locknut. 21. Reinstall the tie-rod ball joint, tighten the nut, and install a new cotter pin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6648 22. Reinstall the front wheels. 23. If required, repeat steps 2 thru 23 on the other front wheel. 24. Do a wheel alignment to ensure proper tire wear and steering wheel spoke angle: ^ Refer to page 18-6 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WHEEL, and select Wheel Alignment (V6 Engine) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning Tie Rod Boot: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning 05-013 March 25, 2005 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord V6 - ALL Clunking or Looseness in the Tie Rod Inner Joint SYMPTOM While turning, clunking is heard from the steering or looseness is felt in the steering wheel. PROBABLE CAUSE Water entered the tie-rod inner ball joint, causing rust that wore the plastic liner inside of the socket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the tie-rod ball joints, and replace the boots and tie-rod ball joints as required. PARTS INFORMATION Ball Joint Set: P/N 53010-SD B-A01, H/C 7139470 Clip: P/N 53434-587-A01, H/C 5439617 Bellows Clamp: P/N 53449-SDB-A01, H/C 7139561 Bellows: P/N 53534-SDB-A01, H/C 7139603 Spacer (Stop Washer): P/N 53535-SD B-A01, H/C 7139611 Lock Washer: P/N 53536-SDB-A01, H/C 7139637 Hex Nut: P/N 91411-587-A01, H/C 5454863 Cotter Pin: P/N 94201-20350, H/C 0058388 Hex Nut (10 mm): P/N 94030-10080, H/C 0995993 TOOL INFORMATION Pincers: Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially available REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6654 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53010-SDB-A01 H/C 7139470 Defect Code: 08001 Symptom Code: 04201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS With the vehicle on an alignment rack (vehicle weight on tires), have an assistant turn the steering wheel from side to side, and inspect the tie-rod inner joints for excessive play or looseness: ^ If the tie-rod inner ball joint has excessive movement, center the steering rack, remove the boot band, and pull the boot far enough to expose the ball joint. ^ If the tie-rod inner ball joint is loose and you find moisture, remove the opposing tie-rod inner ball joint and inspect it. ^ If either tie-rod ball joint has corrosion and/or has too much play or looseness, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations: ^ Refer to page 1-12 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword LIFT, and select Lift and Support Points from the list. 2. Remove the affected front wheel. 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknut, and unscrew the ball joint from the tie rod. NOTE: Count and write down the number of turns that it takes to separate the ball joint from the tie- rod end. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6655 4. Remove the boot bands and tie-rod clips. Pull the boot away from the ends off the steering gearbox. 5. Unbend the lock washers. 6. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends with another wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 7. Remove the lock washer and the stop washer. 8. Install the new stop washer and new lock washer. Align the lock washer tabs with the slots on the rack end while holding the lock washer in place. Repeat this step for the other end of the rack. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6656 9. Install the new rack ends. 10. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with a wrench, and torque both rack ends to 84 N~m (62 lb-ft). Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 11. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on the rack end joint housing. 12. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of the rack end joint housing. 13. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves on the rack ends. 14. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6657 15. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot installation grooves around the gearbox housing. Install the new boot (bellows) on the rack end with the tie-rod clips, and fit the boot end into the installation grooves in the housing properly. 16. After installing the boot, wipe any grease off the threaded section of the rack end. 17. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs with the holes of the band. 18. Close the ear portion of the band with commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent. 19. Slide the rack right and left to make certain that the boot is not deformed or twisted. 20. Install the tie-rod end onto the new ball joint by spinning the same number of turns you wrote down in step 4. Tighten the tie-rod locknut. 21. Reinstall the tie-rod ball joint, tighten the nut, and install a new cotter pin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tie Rod Boot: > 05-013 > Mar > 05 > Steering - Looseness Felt/Clunking Noise When Turning > Page 6658 22. Reinstall the front wheels. 23. If required, repeat steps 2 thru 23 on the other front wheel. 24. Do a wheel alignment to ensure proper tire wear and steering wheel spoke angle: ^ Refer to page 18-6 of the 2003-05 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WHEEL, and select Wheel Alignment (V6 Engine) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6659 Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement Special Tools Required Front hub dis/assembly tool 07965-3A50500 1. Remove the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle. 2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end. 3. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin. 4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh multipurpose grease. 5. Pack the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease. Note these items when installing new grease: ^ Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the tapered section (E) of the ball pin. ^ Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 6. Install the new boot (A) using the front hub disassembly tool. The boot must not have a gap at the boot installation sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination, and wipe it if necessary. 7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end. 8. Install the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle. 9. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Wear Limit If the ball joint is worn or damaged, replace the ball joint. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ball Joint Removal Ball Joint: Service and Repair Ball Joint Removal Removal Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 NOTICE: Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it. 1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint (B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint pin. 2. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B). 4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head (C) of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow the jaw to pivot. 5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose from the steering arm or knuckle. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin. NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the pressure bolt. 6. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the steering arm or knuckle. Inspect the ball Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ball Joint Removal > Page 6666 joint boot, and replace it if damaged. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ball Joint Removal > Page 6667 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Ball Joint Boot Replacement Replacement Special Tools Required Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 07GAG-SD40700 1. Remove the boot clip and the boot. 2. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with grease. Keep the grease off of the boot - to -knuckle mating surface (B). 3. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin (C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not let dirt, or other foreign materials get into the boot. 4. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it gently to force out any air. 5. Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt (A) until its base is just above the groove around the bottom of the boot. Then slide the clip (B) over the tool and into position on the boot. 6. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the exposed portion of the ball joint pin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Suspension Upper Arm Replacement Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 1. Remove the front damper. 2. Remove the wheel sensor bracket (A) from the upper arm (B). 3. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. 4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 5. Remove the upper arm mounting bolts (A), and remove the upper arm (B). NOTE: During installation, install new upper arm mounting bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6672 6. Install the upper arm by inserting a rod (A) of appropriate size (O.D. 6 mm/L: 300 mm) into the positioning holes (B), and place the upper arm (C) on the rod to position it before tightening the upper arm mounting bolts. 7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to specified torque values, except for the upper arm mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Use a new cotter pin on the castle nut. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjusting it if necessary. ^ Insert a rod (A) of appropriate size (O.D. 6 mm/L: 300 mm) into the positioning holes (B), and place the upper arm (C) on the rod to position it before tightening the upper arm mounting bolts. Lower Arm Lower Arm Removal/Installation Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheel. 3. Remove the damper fork (A) from the damper (B) and lower arm (C). NOTE: During installation, insert the damper fork into the damper lower end so the aligning tab (D) is aligned with the slot (E) in the damper fork. Replace the damper fork mounting nut (F) and bolt (G) with a new one. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6673 4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). NOTE: During installation, install a new flange nut. 5. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut. NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 6. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint remover. 7. Remove the flange bolts, and remove the lower arm (A). NOTE: During installation, install the new flange bolts. 8. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6674 ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6675 Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Upper Arm Removal/Installation Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 1. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new clip after tightening the nut a shown. 2. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). Do not disconnect the brake line. 4. Remove the wheel sensor harness mounting bracket (B). 5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and remove the upper arm (B). Note: During installation, install the new flange bolt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6676 6. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items; ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or drum and inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjusting it if necessary. Lower Arm Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Remove the lower arm mounting nut (A) and mounting bolt (B) from the knuckle side. 4. Remove the flange bolt (C), and remove the lower arm (D). 5. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Use a new lower arm mounting nut on reassembly. Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or drum and inside of the wheel. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Control Arm Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle side. 4. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (C) and adjusting cam (D), then remove the self-locking nut (E), and adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut and control arm mounting nut. 5. Remove the control arm (F). 6. Install the control arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and adjusting cam with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or drum and inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the side trim panel. 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as necessary. 3. Detach the floor wire harness clip (A), and remove seat cushion clip (B). 4. Remove the bolts (C, D) and nut (E), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (F). 5. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal. When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6683 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Attachment, 78 x90 mm O7GAD-SD4O1O1 ^ Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm O7GAF-SD4O1O0 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 ^ Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD9O1OO Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6684 2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6685 6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6686 11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball joint remover. 14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 15 Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6687 NOTE: ^ Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. ^ During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint. 17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and on the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6688 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary. 5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6689 ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^ Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B) on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring when installing it. 9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. 11. Press a wheel bearing (A) onto the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Knuckle: Diagrams Knuckle/Hub Replacement W/ Related Components Exploded View-Disc Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6693 Exploded View-Drum Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Knuckle/Hub Replacement Knuckle/Hub Replacement Exploded View-Disc Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6696 Exploded View-Drum Brake Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Hub Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6697 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the hub cap (A). 6. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Screw two 8 X 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6698 10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Hub Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. 3. Remove the hub cap (A). 4. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6699 5. Release the parking brake lever, and remove the brake drum (A). Screw two 8X1.25 mm bolts (B) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 7. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high point solvent before reassembly. ^ Use a new spindle nut reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6700 3. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new clip after tightening the nut as shown. 4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer link bracket (E). 6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F) and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6701 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B). 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6702 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new clip into the ball joint pin as shown. 3. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 4. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (A), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D) and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6703 bracket (F). 6. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the flange bolts and rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 7. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (A) from the knuckle. 8. Remove the wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6704 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle. 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to wheel cylinder, and retighten if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knuckle/Hub Replacement > Page 6705 Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Knuckle Bushing Replacement Replacement Special Tools Required Bushing driver 30 - 40 07NAD-SS00100 or 07NAD-SS00101 1. Position the knuckle (A) on the press with the machined surface (B) facing down. 2. Adjust the special tool so it matches the inner diameter of the bushing hole, then tighten the socket bolts (C) securely. 3. Position the special tool on the bushing (D). 4. Remove the bushing by pressing on the special tool with a press as shown. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inside of the bushing hole while pressing on the bushing. 5. Position the knuckle (A) on the press with the machined surface (B) facing up. 6. Adjust the special tool so it matches with the outer diameter of the bushing (C). 7. Position the special tool on the outer sleeve (D) of the bushing. 8. Press the bushing into the knuckle using the special tool as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 05-021 > Nov > 06 > Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Link Broken Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Link Broken 05-021 November 3, 2006 Applies To: 1998-05 Accord - ALL *2006 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....6A000001 thru 1HGCM....6A0077 2006 Accord L4 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....6A000001 thru 1HGCM....6A0494* Rear Stabilizer Link Is Broken (Supersedes 05-021, dated July 5, 2005, to update the information marked with the black bar and asterisks) PROBLEM A rear stabilizer link is broken. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace both stabilizer links with updated parts. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Stabilizer Link Kit (includes both links and new self-locking nuts): P/N 06523-S84-A00, H/C 8019309 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 4191C2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 52325-584-A01 H/C 5439286 Defect Code: 01801 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-021A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift to full height. 2. Remove both rear stabilizer links. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 05-021 > Nov > 06 > Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Link Broken > Page 6715 3. Install the new stabilizer links on the stabilizer bar and the stabilizer link brackets. NOTE: On the old stabilizer links, the left link has a white paint mark, and the right link has a yellow mark. On the new links, the link with the red mark goes on the left (driver's) side, and the link with the blue mark goes on the right (passenger's) side. 4. Install the flange nuts at the link brackets (on the top of the link) and the new self-locking nuts on the links at the stabilizer bar (on the bottom of the link). ^ While using a 5 mm hex wrench to hold the joint pins, torque the self-locking nuts to 38 N.m (28 lb-ft). ^ While using a 5 mm hex wrench to hold the joint pins, torque the flange nuts to 39 N.m (29 lb-ft). 5. Lower the vehicle, then drive it for 5 minutes. 6. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and retorque the self-locking nuts and the flange nuts to the specifications shown in step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 05-021 > Nov > 06 > Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Link Broken Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Link Broken 05-021 November 3, 2006 Applies To: 1998-05 Accord - ALL *2006 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....6A000001 thru 1HGCM....6A0077 2006 Accord L4 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....6A000001 thru 1HGCM....6A0494* Rear Stabilizer Link Is Broken (Supersedes 05-021, dated July 5, 2005, to update the information marked with the black bar and asterisks) PROBLEM A rear stabilizer link is broken. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace both stabilizer links with updated parts. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Stabilizer Link Kit (includes both links and new self-locking nuts): P/N 06523-S84-A00, H/C 8019309 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 4191C2 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 52325-584-A01 H/C 5439286 Defect Code: 01801 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-021A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift to full height. 2. Remove both rear stabilizer links. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 05-021 > Nov > 06 > Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Link Broken > Page 6721 3. Install the new stabilizer links on the stabilizer bar and the stabilizer link brackets. NOTE: On the old stabilizer links, the left link has a white paint mark, and the right link has a yellow mark. On the new links, the link with the red mark goes on the left (driver's) side, and the link with the blue mark goes on the right (passenger's) side. 4. Install the flange nuts at the link brackets (on the top of the link) and the new self-locking nuts on the links at the stabilizer bar (on the bottom of the link). ^ While using a 5 mm hex wrench to hold the joint pins, torque the self-locking nuts to 38 N.m (28 lb-ft). ^ While using a 5 mm hex wrench to hold the joint pins, torque the flange nuts to 39 N.m (29 lb-ft). 5. Lower the vehicle, then drive it for 5 minutes. 6. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and retorque the self-locking nuts and the flange nuts to the specifications shown in step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E). 3. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) and lower arm (C) with the joint pins set at the center of their range of the movement. NOTE: The left stabilizer link has a yellow paint mark (D), while the right stabilizer link has a white paint mark. 4. Install a new self-locking nut and flange nut, and lightly tighten them. NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. 5. Place the floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. NOTICE: Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. 6. Tighten the new self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to the specified torque values while holding the respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D). 7. After 5 minutes of driving, re-tighten the self locking nut again to the specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6724 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C);with a hex wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E). 3. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) and stabilizer link bracket (C) with the joint pins set at the center of their range of the movement. NOTE: The left stabilizer link has a white paint mark (D), while the right stabilizer link has a yellow paint mark. 4. Install the new self-locking nut and flange nut, and lightly tighten them. NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. 5. Place a jack under the knuckle, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. 6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to the specified torque values while holding the respective joint Dins (C) with a hex wrench (D). 7. After 5 minutes of driving, re-tighten the self locking nut again to the specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Strut Tower Brace > Component Information > Service and Repair Frame Stiffener Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter 05-066 November 24, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Universal Front Subframe Removal Adapter (Replaces 01-043, Civic Front Sub frame Removal Adapter, dated September 11, 2001) The universal front subframe removal adapter is a required tool. When properly fitted to a transmission jack and the vehicle's front subframe, the adapter provides a convenient way to remove the subframe. Front subframe removal is required for transmission or engine removal. NOTE: The adapter will only support the subframe it will not support the entire powertrain assembly. Refer to the WARNING label on the adapter. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-06 Accord - ALL 2005-06 Accord Hybrid - ALL 2001-06 Civic - ALL 2001-06 Civic GX - ALL 2003-06 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-06 Civic Si - ALL 2002-06 CRV - ALL 2003-06 Element - ALL ORDERING INFORMATION The universal front subframe removal adapter is TIN VSB02C000016. To order additional adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the transmission jack, (new model number NRI-72500D), available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. (The old model number LSL-W93714 can still be used.). The adapter also works with many commercially available transmission jacks. 1. Loosen the four bolts that hold the adapter's adjustable arms to its center plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 6733 2. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corners of the jack base, then attach the adapter to the jack base with the bolts that came with the jack. Tighten all of the bolts securely. 3. Raise the jack to vehicle height. 4. With the rear bar of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, route the adapter's strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap as tightly as possible, insert the pin through the appropriate loop, then tighten the wing nut. 5. With all of the vehicle parts properly supported or removed (see Engine or Transmission Removal in the appropriate service manual), carefully lower the subframe using the controls on the jack. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 6734 Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Subframe Removal Adapter 02-066 November 19, 2002 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL Accord Subframe Removal Adapter When properly fitted to the transmission jack and the the vehicle's subframe, the adapter allows the subframe to be removed for transmission repair. ORDERING INFORMATION One Subframe Adapter (T/N VSB02C000016) was shipped to each dealership as a required special tool. To order an additional adapter, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The subframe removal adapter is for subframe support only. It will not support the engine, transmission, and subframe as one assembly. Read the labels on the subframe adapter. 1. Remove the bolts from the transmission jack. Line up the slots in the four adjustable arms of the adapter with the bolt holes on the corners of the transmission jack base, then bolt on the adapter. 2. Remove the safety pin that holds the strap, and loosen the two L-shaped brackets. 3. Raise the jack until the adapter touches the subframe. 4. Loosen the wing nut that tightens the strap. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 6735 5. Adjust the position of the transmission jack or the subframe adapter as necessary so that the adapter presses flat against the subframe. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 6736 6. With the rear of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, wrap the strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap tight, then insert the safety pin in the adapter and a loop in the strap. Make sure the pin goes through a loop in the strap, not between the loops. 7. Finger-tighten the wing nut that tightens the strap. Do not overtighten; the strap only needs to be snug. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 6737 8. Slide the adjustable L-shaped brackets against the subframe, and tighten the adapter bolts. 9. With all vehicle parts properly supported or removed, remove the subframe mounting bolts and lower the subframe. See Transmission Removal in section 14 or Steering Gearbox Removal in section 17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Subframe: Procedures Subframe Replacement Front Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. Front Subframe Alignment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6740 NOTE: - Before removing the subframe, make the appropriate lines where the subframe that line up with the edge of the rear bracket for reinstallation. - When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. - After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align the reference marks with the edge of the rear brackets then tighten each bolts. Rear Subframe Torque Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6741 After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6742 Subframe: Removal and Replacement Subframe Replacement Front Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bolts, front subframe middle mounting rubber mounting bolts, front subframe rear bracket mounting bolts, front subframe rear damper front mounting bolt, and steering gearbox bracket mounting bolt, be sure to replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6743 Front Subframe Alignment NOTE: - Before removing the subframe, make an alignment mark for the front subframe rear bracket as shown. - When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. - After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align the reference marks with the edge of the rear brackets then tighten all bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6744 Rear Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 6749 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Damper/Spring Replacement Removal 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6752 3. Remove the damper fork (A) from the damper (B) and lower arm (C). 4. Remove the two 8 mm flange nuts (A) and three 10 mm flange nuts (B) from the top of the damper, and remove the damper assembly (C). Disassembly/Inspection 1. Compress the damper spring with the commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacture's instructions then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring mounting cushion and spring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6753 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests. Reassembly NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed. 1. Assemble the damper disassembled parts except for the washer and self-locking nut. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (A), and compress the spring lightly. 3. Align the bottom of the spring and the stepped part (B) of the lower spring seat. 4. Position the damper mounting base (A) so the stud bolt (B) in it is aligned with the aligning tab (C) in the damper unit. 5. Compress the damper spring. Do not compress the spring excessively. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6754 6. Install the washer (A) and a new 10 mm self-locking nut (B). Hold the damper shaft with a hex wench (C), and tighten the 10 mm self-locking nut to the specified torque. 7. Remove the damper assembly from the strut spring compressor. Installation 1. Position the damper assembly (A) in the body with the aligning tab (B) facing inside, then loosely install the flange nuts. 2. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with the slot (C) in the damper fork. 3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (D) into the damper fork. 4. Install the flange bolt (E) to the damper fork and lower arm, and lightly tighten the new damper fork mounting nut (F). NOTE: Use a new damper fork housing nut on reassembly. 5. Place the floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. 6. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to the specified torque. 7. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. 8. Tighten the flange nut on the damper fork to the specified torque. 9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6755 10. Check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6756 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Damper/Spring Replacement Special Tools Required Strut Spring Compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent, commercially available. Removal 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheel. 2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover. 3. Remove the seat side bolster. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6757 4. Remove the two flange nuts (A). 5. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the knuckle. 6. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link bracket (F). 7. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the damper (G) from the vehicle. Damper spring are different, left and right. Mark the springs L and R before you continue. Disassembly/Inspection 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6758 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests. Reassembly 1. Install all parts except the self-locking nut and washer onto the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B), and align the damper mounting base (C) as shown. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (A). 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 4. Install the washer (A), and loosely install a new self-locking nut (B). 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque. Installation Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6759 1. Lower the rear suspension, position the damper (A), in the body. 2. Loosely install the flange nuts (B) onto the top of the damper. 3. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) on the bottom of the damper. Connect the stabilizer link (B) on the bracket (C), and loosely install the flange nut (D). 4. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack load the vehicle weight, and tighten the flange bolt to the specified torque. 5. Tighten the flange nut while holding the joint pin (E) with a hex wrench (F). 6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque. 7. Install the seat side bolster. 8. Install the rear bulkhead cover. 9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc or drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel. 10. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Front: Top Rod Nut ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Upper Mount Nuts: 10 x 1.25 mm ....................................................................................................................................... .................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) 8 x 1.25 mm ...................................................................... ....................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Pinch Bolt ............................................................................................................................................ ........................ 43 N.m (4.4 kgf-m, 32 lbf-ft) Damper Fork to Lower Arm ........................................................................................................................................ 64 N.m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 lbf-ft) Rear: Top Rod Nut ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Mounting Plate Nuts .................................................... .................................................................................................................. 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Brake Hose Bracket Bolt ............................................................................................................................................... 22 N.m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 lbf-ft) Wheel Sensor Bracket ................................................................................................................................................. 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 lbf-ft) Bottom Damper Bolt ................................................................................... ............................................................................... 108 Nm (79.6 lbf-ft.) Stabilizer Link Nut ............... .......................................................................................................................................................... 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 6765 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Damper/Spring Replacement Removal 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6768 3. Remove the damper fork (A) from the damper (B) and lower arm (C). 4. Remove the two 8 mm flange nuts (A) and three 10 mm flange nuts (B) from the top of the damper, and remove the damper assembly (C). Disassembly/Inspection 1. Compress the damper spring with the commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacture's instructions then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring mounting cushion and spring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6769 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests. Reassembly NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed. 1. Assemble the damper disassembled parts except for the washer and self-locking nut. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (A), and compress the spring lightly. 3. Align the bottom of the spring and the stepped part (B) of the lower spring seat. 4. Position the damper mounting base (A) so the stud bolt (B) in it is aligned with the aligning tab (C) in the damper unit. 5. Compress the damper spring. Do not compress the spring excessively. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6770 6. Install the washer (A) and a new 10 mm self-locking nut (B). Hold the damper shaft with a hex wench (C), and tighten the 10 mm self-locking nut to the specified torque. 7. Remove the damper assembly from the strut spring compressor. Installation 1. Position the damper assembly (A) in the body with the aligning tab (B) facing inside, then loosely install the flange nuts. 2. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with the slot (C) in the damper fork. 3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (D) into the damper fork. 4. Install the flange bolt (E) to the damper fork and lower arm, and lightly tighten the new damper fork mounting nut (F). NOTE: Use a new damper fork housing nut on reassembly. 5. Place the floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. 6. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to the specified torque. 7. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. 8. Tighten the flange nut on the damper fork to the specified torque. 9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6771 10. Check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6772 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Damper/Spring Replacement Special Tools Required Strut Spring Compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent, commercially available. Removal 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheel. 2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover. 3. Remove the seat side bolster. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6773 4. Remove the two flange nuts (A). 5. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the knuckle. 6. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link bracket (F). 7. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the damper (G) from the vehicle. Damper spring are different, left and right. Mark the springs L and R before you continue. Disassembly/Inspection 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6774 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests. Reassembly 1. Install all parts except the self-locking nut and washer onto the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B), and align the damper mounting base (C) as shown. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (A). 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 4. Install the washer (A), and loosely install a new self-locking nut (B). 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque. Installation Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6775 1. Lower the rear suspension, position the damper (A), in the body. 2. Loosely install the flange nuts (B) onto the top of the damper. 3. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) on the bottom of the damper. Connect the stabilizer link (B) on the bracket (C), and loosely install the flange nut (D). 4. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack load the vehicle weight, and tighten the flange bolt to the specified torque. 5. Tighten the flange nut while holding the joint pin (E) with a hex wrench (F). 6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque. 7. Install the seat side bolster. 8. Install the rear bulkhead cover. 9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc or drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel. 10. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Remove the parking brake cable bracket (A) from the trailing arm (B). 4. Remove the mounting bolts (C), and remove the trailing arm. 5. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or drum and inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjusting it if necessary. Leading Arm Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the rear wheel. 3. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the leading arm (A). 4. Install the leading arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or drum and inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2004 TITLE: Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement APPLIES TO: 2000-04 Accords, 1999-04 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots SERVICE TIP: With so many A/Ts being replaced lately, we're hearing reports of wheel bearing noise and comebacks because of it. What's causing the problem is use of high-powered impact wrenches to install the spindle nuts on the driveshafts. - Before you remove the spindle nut, make sure you first raise the stake on the nut. Not only does this make removing the nut easier, but it prevents the driveshaft threads from getting damaged. Damaged threads can cause insufficient clamping force when installing the new spindle nut, and lead to noise. - Tighten the new spindle nut on the driveshaft with a torque wrench set to the spec listed in the appropriate S/M. Don't use a high powered impact wrench. The 400-700 lb-ft of torque it generates can overcompress the wheel bearing, causing damage and noise. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 6783 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearings - Humming Or Growling SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Humming or Growling? Check the Wheel Bearings APPLIES TO: 1998-04 Accord, 2001-04 CR-V, 2003 Element, 1999-04 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: A bad front wheel bearing(s) can make a humming or growling that's easily mistaken for a noisy bearing or gear in the A/T. Before you order a reman A/T, test-drive the vehicle to make sure the A/T is really the problem. Listen carefully as you accelerate and decelerate during your test-drive. Shift into neutral. Varying throttle position and shifting into neutral changes the load on the A/T bearings and gears. If the A/T has a bad bearing or gear, the change in load will affect its noise level. If that's what you find, then go ahead and order a reman A/T. If the noise level isn't affected by changes in throttle position or shifting into neutral, then the culprit could be a bad front wheel bearing(s). Since the wheel bearings aren't mounted on shafts being spread apart by gears, they're not affected by changes in load. Also, since Honda uses angular contact wheel bearings, you won't normally hear a change in noise level when you swerve the vehicle from side to side. Hook up a STEELMAN® ChassisEAR (T/N JSP SM06600) to the front knuckles, and test-drive the vehicle again. Refer to S/B 00-063, STEELMAN ChassisEAR Diagnostic Tool, for more info. If you hear humming or growling from one or affected wheel bearing(s), and then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the noise is gone. If you don't hear any noise from the front wheel bearings, the problem could be from tire noise or vibration. Swap the front wheels and tires with a known-good vehicle. Testdrive the vehicle, and check if the noise or vibration goes away. STEELMAN(R) and ChassisEAR (R) are registered trademarks of J.S. Products, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 6784 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing - Correct Installation To Prevent DTC's SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Install Wheel Bearings Correctly to Prevent DTCs APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord, 2002-03 CR-V, 2003 Element SERVICE TIP: When you replace a wheel bearing in a make sure you install it correctly. If you don't, these ABS DTCs can set: - ABS DTC 12, 14, 16, 18 [wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)] - ABS DTC 21, 22, 23, 24 (magnetic encoder) The brown dust shield for the wheel bearing also doubles as a magnetic encoder for the ABS. Before you install the wheel bearing, make sure the encoder is clean and free of metallic particles, then install it so the encoder is toward the inside of the knuckle. Install the encoder carefully so you don't damage its surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6785 Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing End Play Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play Front .................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6786 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6787 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts (A) and torque to the specified torque. Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play 3. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange or hub cap. 4. Measure the bearing end play moving the drum brake or brake disc inward and outward. Front/rear: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6788 Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Attachment, 78 x90 mm O7GAD-SD4O1O1 ^ Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm O7GAF-SD4O1O0 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 ^ Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD9O1OO Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6791 2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6792 6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6793 11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball joint remover. 14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 15 Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6794 NOTE: ^ Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. ^ During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint. 17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and on the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6795 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary. 5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6796 ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^ Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B) on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring when installing it. 9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. 11. Press a wheel bearing (A) onto the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6797 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Replacement Exploded View-Disc Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6798 Exploded View-Drum Brake Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Hub Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6799 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the hub cap (A). 6. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Screw two 8 X 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6800 10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Hub Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. 3. Remove the hub cap (A). 4. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6801 5. Release the parking brake lever, and remove the brake drum (A). Screw two 8X1.25 mm bolts (B) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 7. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high point solvent before reassembly. ^ Use a new spindle nut reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6802 3. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new clip after tightening the nut as shown. 4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer link bracket (E). 6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F) and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6803 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B). 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6804 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new clip into the ball joint pin as shown. 3. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 4. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (A), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D) and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6805 bracket (F). 6. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the flange bolts and rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 7. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (A) from the knuckle. 8. Remove the wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6806 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle. 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to wheel cylinder, and retighten if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 6812 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 6813 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the gearshift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in (park) for automatic transmission. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 4. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle is level. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 6822 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6823 Tires: Specifications Design Specifications Tires Size Front and Rear .................................................................................................................................... ..................................... P205/60R16 91V M+S Spare ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ T135/90D15 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheels: Testing and Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection Front and Rear Wheel Axial Runout 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the axial runout by turning the wheel. Front and rear wheel axial runout: Standard: Steel wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Steel wheel Aluminum wheel 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout. Front and rear wheel radial runout: Standard: Steel wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Aluminum wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) Front and Rear Wheel Radial Runout Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6827 Steel wheel Aluminum wheel 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, check the wheel bearing end play, and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel are clean. 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2004 TITLE: Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement APPLIES TO: 2000-04 Accords, 1999-04 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots SERVICE TIP: With so many A/Ts being replaced lately, we're hearing reports of wheel bearing noise and comebacks because of it. What's causing the problem is use of high-powered impact wrenches to install the spindle nuts on the driveshafts. - Before you remove the spindle nut, make sure you first raise the stake on the nut. Not only does this make removing the nut easier, but it prevents the driveshaft threads from getting damaged. Damaged threads can cause insufficient clamping force when installing the new spindle nut, and lead to noise. - Tighten the new spindle nut on the driveshaft with a torque wrench set to the spec listed in the appropriate S/M. Don't use a high powered impact wrench. The 400-700 lb-ft of torque it generates can overcompress the wheel bearing, causing damage and noise. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 6832 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearings - Humming Or Growling SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Humming or Growling? Check the Wheel Bearings APPLIES TO: 1998-04 Accord, 2001-04 CR-V, 2003 Element, 1999-04 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: A bad front wheel bearing(s) can make a humming or growling that's easily mistaken for a noisy bearing or gear in the A/T. Before you order a reman A/T, test-drive the vehicle to make sure the A/T is really the problem. Listen carefully as you accelerate and decelerate during your test-drive. Shift into neutral. Varying throttle position and shifting into neutral changes the load on the A/T bearings and gears. If the A/T has a bad bearing or gear, the change in load will affect its noise level. If that's what you find, then go ahead and order a reman A/T. If the noise level isn't affected by changes in throttle position or shifting into neutral, then the culprit could be a bad front wheel bearing(s). Since the wheel bearings aren't mounted on shafts being spread apart by gears, they're not affected by changes in load. Also, since Honda uses angular contact wheel bearings, you won't normally hear a change in noise level when you swerve the vehicle from side to side. Hook up a STEELMAN® ChassisEAR (T/N JSP SM06600) to the front knuckles, and test-drive the vehicle again. Refer to S/B 00-063, STEELMAN ChassisEAR Diagnostic Tool, for more info. If you hear humming or growling from one or affected wheel bearing(s), and then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the noise is gone. If you don't hear any noise from the front wheel bearings, the problem could be from tire noise or vibration. Swap the front wheels and tires with a known-good vehicle. Testdrive the vehicle, and check if the noise or vibration goes away. STEELMAN(R) and ChassisEAR (R) are registered trademarks of J.S. Products, Inc. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheel Bearing Noise After A/T Replacement > Page 6833 Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Wheel Bearing - Correct Installation To Prevent DTC's SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Install Wheel Bearings Correctly to Prevent DTCs APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord, 2002-03 CR-V, 2003 Element SERVICE TIP: When you replace a wheel bearing in a make sure you install it correctly. If you don't, these ABS DTCs can set: - ABS DTC 12, 14, 16, 18 [wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)] - ABS DTC 21, 22, 23, 24 (magnetic encoder) The brown dust shield for the wheel bearing also doubles as a magnetic encoder for the ABS. Before you install the wheel bearing, make sure the encoder is clean and free of metallic particles, then install it so the encoder is toward the inside of the knuckle. Install the encoder carefully so you don't damage its surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6834 Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing End Play Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play Front .................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6835 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6836 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts (A) and torque to the specified torque. Front Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Drum Wheel Bearing End Play Rear Disc Wheel Bearing End Play 3. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the hub flange or hub cap. 4. Measure the bearing end play moving the drum brake or brake disc inward and outward. Front/rear: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6837 Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm O7AAF-SDAA1OO ^ Attachment, 78 x90 mm O7GAD-SD4O1O1 ^ Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm O7GAF-SD4O1O0 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm O7MAC-SLOA2O2 ^ Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD9O1OO Knuckle/Hub Replacement 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6840 2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6841 6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub. NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hub. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent the brake disc from binding. 9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6842 11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: ^ To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread protector on the threads of the ball joint. ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the ball joint remover. ^ Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint. ^ Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball joint remover. 14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown. 15 Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover. 16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6843 NOTE: ^ Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint may come apart. ^ During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint. 17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and mating surface of the castle nut. ^ First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut during reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and on the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and on the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Wheel Bearing Replacement 1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6844 3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary. 5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6845 ^ Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle. ^ Remove any oil, grease, dust, and other foreign material from the encoder surface. ^ Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface. ^ Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B) on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring when installing it. 9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. 11. Press a wheel bearing (A) onto the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6846 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle/Hub Replacement Exploded View-Disc Brake Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6847 Exploded View-Drum Brake Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Hub Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6848 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Remove the hub cap (A). 6. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A). 8. Screw two 8 X 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6849 10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Hub Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel. 3. Remove the hub cap (A). 4. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6850 5. Release the parking brake lever, and remove the brake drum (A). Screw two 8X1.25 mm bolts (B) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A). 7. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Wash the spindle thoroughly in high point solvent before reassembly. ^ Use a new spindle nut reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. ^ After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake drum. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Knuckle Replacement-Disc Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the splash guard (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6851 3. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, install the new clip after tightening the nut as shown. 4. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer link bracket (E). 6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F) and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6852 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B). 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6853 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Knuckle Replacement-Drum Brake 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the clip (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the new clip into the ball joint pin as shown. 3. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the special tool. 4. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (A), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange nut (B) while holding the joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D) and disconnect the stabilizer link (E) from the stabilizer link Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6854 bracket (F). 6. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the flange bolts and rear brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 7. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (A) from the knuckle. 8. Remove the wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6855 10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle. 11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle 12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), and remove the knuckle (B). 13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle. ^ Use a new lower arm mounting nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then it only far enough to align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. ^ Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system. Check for a leak at the brake line to wheel cylinder, and retighten if necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Exploded View - Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 6861 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 6862 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Tightening Torque Wheel Fastener Torque Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Tightening Torque > Page 6867 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Tightening Sequence Wheel Torque Sequence - Master Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6868 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Wheel Bolt Replacement NOTICE ^ Do not use a hammer or air or electric impact tools to remove and install the wheel bolts. ^ Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel bolts. 1. Remove the front hub or rear hub bearing unit. 2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press attachments (C) or equivalent tools. NOTE: ^ Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the mating surface on the bolt and the hub. ^ The illustration shows a front hub. 3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with the wheel bolt. NOTE: ^ Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the threaded section of the nut. ^ Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in relation to the hub disc surface. 4. Press the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press attachments or equivalent tools. 5. Install the front hub or rear hub bearing unit. NOTE: If you can not tighten the wheel nut to the specified torque value when installing the wheel, replace the front hub or rear hub bearing unit as an assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Mode/Air Mix Problems After Control Panel Replacement Air Door Actuator / Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Mode/Air Mix Problems After Control Panel Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News June 2004 TITLE: Mode/Air Mix Problems After Control Panel Replacement APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: If you have heater mode motor that chatters and the air mix motor and outlet temperature only adjusts to HOT or COLD, check if the heater control panel has been replaced. If a heater control panel for a 2-door model is installed in a 4-door model, you'll get these symptoms. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6875 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6876 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6877 53. Under Left Side of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) 54. Under Left Side of Dash (Man. A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6878 71. Behind Glove Box 76. Under Right Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6879 208. Behind Glove Box (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6880 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams 221. Air Mix Control Motor (Manual A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) 222. Air Mix Control Motor, Driver's (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6881 223. Air Mix Control Motor, Front Passenger's (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6882 228. Mode Control Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6883 233. Recirculation Control Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Air Mix Control Motor Test Heating and Air Conditioning Air Mix Control Motor Test 4-door 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the air mix control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the air mix control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. 3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement. - If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the air mix control motor. - If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as needed. - If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Measure the resistance between the No.5 and No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kOhms. 5. Reconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No.3 and No.5 terminals. Max Cool - about 0.5 V Max Hot - about 4.5 V 7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the air mix control motor. 2-door 1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the air mix control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the air mix control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. 3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement. - If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the air mix control motor. - If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6886 - If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Measure the resistance between the No.4 and No.5 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kOhms. 5. Reconnect the air mix control motor 5P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No.3 and No.5 terminals. Max Cool - about 1.0 V Max Hot - about 4.0 V 7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the air mix control motor. Climate Control Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Test 4-door: 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the passenger's air mix control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the passenger's air mix control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 terminal; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. 3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement. - If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the passenger's air mix control motor. - If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as needed. - If the passenger's air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Measure the resistance between the No.5 and No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kOhms. 5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No.3 and No.5 terminals. Max Cool - about 1.5 V Max Hot - about 4.5 V 7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the passenger's air mix control motor. 2-door: 1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the passenger's air mix control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the passenger's air mix control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 terminal; the passenger 5 air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6887 3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement. - If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the passenger's air mix control motor. - If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as needed. - If the passenger's air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Measure the resistance between the No.4 and No.5 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kOhms. 5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 5P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No.3 and No.5 terminals. Max Cool - about 1.0 V Max Hot - about 4.0 V 7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the passenger's air mix control motor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6888 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Mode Control Motor Test Mode Control Motor Test 4-door 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the mode control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.2 terminal of the mode control motor, and ground the No.1 terminal; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. 3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. - If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or less at the 20 kOhm range. With the mode control motor running as in step 2, check for continuity between the No.3, 4, 5 and 6 terminals and the No.7 terminal individually. There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the motor moves past the switch's terminal. 5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal, replace the mode control motor. 2-door 1. Disconnect the 10P connector from the mode control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the mode control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.2 terminal of the mode control motor, and ground the No.1 terminal; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. 3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. - If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or less at the 20 kOhm range. With the mode control motor running as in step 2, check for Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6889 continuity between the No.6, 7, 8 and 9 terminals and the No.10 terminal individually. There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the motor moves past the switch's terminal. 5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal, replace the mode control motor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6890 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting Climate Control Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the Under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or No.5 terminal of the 5P (2-door) connector and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the recirculation control motor. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Test the recirculation control motor. Is the recirculation control motor OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the recirculation control motor, or repair the recirculation control linkage or doors. 7. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6891 8. Check for continuity between the No.10 and No.11 terminals audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and body ground individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation control motor. NO - Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same wires for voltage. Is there any voltage? YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the climate control unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6892 11. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and at the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation control motor. Heating and Air Conditioning Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6893 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 (4-door) or No.5 (2-door) terminal of the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the recirculation control motor. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Test the recirculation control motor. Is the recirculation control motor OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Replace the recirculation control motor. 7. Disconnect the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 8. Check for continuity between the No.7 and No.8 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the recirculation control motor. NO - Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same wires for voltage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6894 Is there any voltage? YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the audio-HVAC display panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and at the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the recirculation control motor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 6895 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor Test 4-door 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the recirculation control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the recirculation control motor, and ground the No.5 or No.7 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No.5 or No.7 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh (when the No.7 terminal is disconnected) or Recirculate (when the No.5 terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. 2-door 1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the recirculation control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the recirculation control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.5 terminal of the recirculation control motor, and ground the No.1 or No.2 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No.1 or No.2 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh (when the No.1 terminal is disconnected) or Recirculate (when the No.2 terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Mix Control Motor Air Mix Control Motor Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, then remove the driver's dashboard under cover. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the air mix control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, then remove the driver's dashboard under cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the air mix control motor (B). Remove wire harness clip (C), the self-tapping screws and the air mix control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6898 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Control Motor Mode Control Motor Replacement 4-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor from the heater unit. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. 2-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6899 3. Disconnect the lop connector (A) from the mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor from the heater unit. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6900 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor. Disconnect the 7P connector (B) from the passenger's air mix control motor (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's air mix control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. 2-door 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the mode control motor. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the evaporator temperature sensor. Disconnect the 5P connector (C) from the passenger's air mix control motor (D). Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's air mix control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6901 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Control Motor Recirculation Control Motor Replacement 4-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the recirculation control motor from the blower unit. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. 2-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6902 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the recirculation control motor from the blower unit. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6906 127. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6907 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams 61. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) 289. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6908 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6909 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, and remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the back of the front bumper beam. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Heater Blower Motor Gets Hot or Blows a Fuse APPLIES TO: 1990-04 Accords, 1992-04 Civics, 1997-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2000-04 Insights, 1995-04 Odysseys, 1996-02 Passports, 2003-04 Pilots, 1997-01 Preludes, and 2000-04 S2000s SERVICE TIP: A blocked cooling hose for the heater blower motor can cause the motor to overheat, draw more current, blow a fuse, or even melt its plastic impeller. Before you order a replacement blower motor, make sure the cooling hose isn't blocked. On some models, you'll find the cooling hose molded into the blower motor housing; on other models, it's a separate piece. Check the S/M for the vehicle you're working on to determine the actual location of the cooling hose. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6914 Blower Motor: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6915 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6916 77. Under Right Side Of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) 210. Under Rt. Side of Dash (Man A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 35. Blower Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Blower Unit Removal and Installation 4-door 1. Remove the glove box, passenger's dashboard lower cover and the passenger's kick panel. 2. Remove the connector clips (A), the wire harness clip (B), and bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace (C) in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown. Retain these parts to be reinstalled later. 3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower motor and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clips (B) and the connector clip (C). Remove the mounting nuts, the mounting bolts and the blower unit (D). 4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leakage. 2-door 1. Remove the glove box, passenger's dashboard lower cover, and the passenger's kick panel. 2. Remove the connector clips (A), the wire harness clip (B), and bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace (C) in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown. Retain these parts to be reinstalled later. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6921 3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower motor and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clip (B) and the connector clip (C). Remove the mounting nuts, the mounting bolts and the blower unit (D). 4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leakage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6922 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Blower Unit Component Replacement Note these items when overhauling the blower unit: - The recirculation control motor (A), blower motor cooling hose (B) (2-door), blower motor cover (C) (2-door), the blower motor (D) and the dust and pollen filter (E) can be replaced without removing the blower unit. - Before reassembly, make sure the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly without binding. - After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6926 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6927 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6928 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement The dust and pollen filter should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever comes first. Replace the filter more often if the airflow is less than usual. 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box then let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly from the evaporator case. 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter. 4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Male sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Climate Control Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6935 Climate Control Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6936 57. Middle of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6937 57. In-car Temperature Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6938 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection In-car Temperature Sensor Test Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling the sensor with a hair drier. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6939 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-car Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Remove the self-tapping screw and the in-oar temperature sensor (A) from the instrument panel (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be sure to connect the air hose securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Cabin Ventilation Duct: Procedures Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6944 Cabin Ventilation Duct: Removal and Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Pulley to pressure plate clearance ...................................................................................................... ........................................................... 0.014 - 0.024 in. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6949 245. A/C Compressor Clutch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Compressor Clutch Check Compressor Clutch Check 1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling, or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set. 2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag. 3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A) and the pressure plate (B) all the way around. If the clearance is not within specified limits, remove the pressure plate and add or remove shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance. Clearance: 0.35 - 0.6 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.) NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5 mm. 4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 6952 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Compressor Clutch Circuit Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check the No.12 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step2. NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. 2. Check the engine coolant temperature, throttle position, and idle speed (use the HDS PGM-FI data list if possible). Is the coolant temperature, throttle position, or idle speed OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Troubleshoot and repair the cause of the high engine coolant temperature, low idle, or excessively high throttle position sensor reading. 3. Remove the compressor clutch relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the compressor clutch relay. 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 6953 5. Connect the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper wire. Does the compressor clutch click ? YES - Go to step 6. NO - Go to step 14. 6. Disconnect the jumper wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between the No.4 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the compressor clutch relay. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay. 11. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No.27 terminal of PCM connector A (31P) and body ground with the PCM connectors connected. Is there battery voltage? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at No.27 terminal of PCM connector A (31P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM then perform the PCM idle learn procedure. NO - Repair open in the wire between the compressor clutch relay and the PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 6954 14. Disconnect the jumper wire. 15. Disconnect the compressor clutch 1P connector. 16. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the No.1 terminal of the compressor clutch 1P connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check the compressor clutch clearance, and the compressor clutch field coil. Repair as needed. NO - Repair open in the wire between the compressor clutch relay and the compressor clutch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6955 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Compressor Clutch Overhaul Special Tools Required A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, commercially available 1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the pressure plate with a commercially available A/C clutch holder (B). 2. Remove the pressure plate (Al and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs adjustment, increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its clearance. NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5 mm. 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley or the compressor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6956 4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal (A), then remove the wire harness (B) and the bracket (C). Disconnect the field coil connector (D). Remove the snap ring (E) with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (F). Be careful not to damage the field coil or the compressor. 5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items: - Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the compressor. - Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum solvent. - Install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove. - Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled. - Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the pulley. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information > Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6960 246. A/C Diode Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6964 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6965 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6966 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6967 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling charging station. 3. Remove the front bulkhead cover. 4. Remove the battery and the battery box. 5. Remove the clips (A), then remove the air intake cover (B) and the air intake tube or duct (C). 6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from the condenser fan shroud (B). Disconnect the condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire harness clip (D) from the condenser fan shroud. Remove the hose (E) from the radiator. Loosen the lower mounting bolts, then remove the upper mounting bolts and the condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan shroud. 7. Remove the bolts and the radiator upper mount brackets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6971 8. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line (A) from the condenser. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch connector (B). 9. Remove the bolts from the condenser. 10. Remove the nut, then disconnect the discharge line from the condenser. 11. Remove the condenser by lifting it up. Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when removing the condenser. 12. Install the condenser in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8). - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6972 O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Be careful not to damage the radiator or the condenser fins when installing the condenser. - Charge the system. - Reset the power window control unit. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams 27. A/C Condenser Fan Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6980 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6981 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6982 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 04-027 Date: 100904 Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair 04-027 September 4, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension and Out-of-Warranty Repair: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark (Supersedes 04-027, Warranty Extension: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark, dated July 7, 2009, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ Under BACKGROUND, PARTS INFORMATION, and ORDERING INFORMATION, information about out-of-warranty parts was added. ^ A new section, OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR ORDERING AND CORE RETURN INFORMATION, was added.* BACKGROUND NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the audio unit display on affected vehicles purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 7 years or 105,000 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage. In some audio units, a component failure on the PCB (printed circuit board) could cause the audio display to become dark or dim, and prevent the audio/HVAC panel buttons from illuminating. To ensure that customers have adequate warranty coverage for this potential problem, American Honda is increasing the warranty on the audio unit display to 7 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first. For other defects, the standard 3 years or 36,000 miles warranty applies, whichever occurs first. *If the warranty extension has expired, refer to PARTS INFORMATION to determine which part number you need to order. If you order a Customer Contribution P/N, refer to PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display is Dim or Dark, for more information about prices, ordering, and core return.* VEHICLES AFFECTED NOTE: Affected vehicles do not have the navigation system. Only a small number of vehicles within a wide range of vehicles are affected by this warranty extension. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6991 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles received a notification of this warranty extension. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION If confirmed by your diagnosis, replace the printed circuit board (PCB) inside the audio unit. The PCB core must be returned for credit. *OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR ORDERING AND CORE RETURN INFORMATION For information on how to order the PCB and return the core to Remanufactured Parts Operations, refer to PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark. NOTE: Make sure you promptly return the core to American Honda to receive your core credit.* PARTS INFORMATION *The matrix lists audio unit information as installed at the factory. There is a chance that the audio unit has been changed from the original. To ensure that the correct PCB is used, always match the audio unit part number (label found on the audio unit chassis) with the PCB part number. The part number for an audio unit starts with 39175and the PCB part number starts with 3917A." Match the next six characters of the audio unit part number with the next six of the PCB part number. Example: Audio Unit P/N 39175-SDN-A11 Honda Paid PCB P/N 3917A-SDN-A11RM Customer Contribution PCB P/N 3917A-SDN-A11CP Use the 100% Honda Paid P/N if the repair is covered by one of the following: ^ The 7 year/100,000 mile audio-HVAC display warranty extension ^ The 3 year/36,000 mile new vehicle warranty ^ 100% Goodwill Use the Customer Contribution PIN and the ordering and return instructions from PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark, if the repair is covered by one of the following: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6992 ^ 99% or less Goodwill ^ A Vehicle Service Contract (VSC) ^ A Certified Used Car Contract (CUC) ^ The customer paid NOTE: Using the Client Contribution P/N establishes a Replacement Parts Limited Warranty that covers the PCB for 12 months or 12,000 miles, whichever occurs first. TOOL INFORMATION PCB Tool Kit: P/N 07AAZ-SDAA170 (The kit includes an ESD/anti-static mat, a wrist strap, five colored markers, and a screw container.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION If the vehicle is within the warranty extension period, 7 years or 100,000 miles, whichever comes first, use the information below to submit a claim. Operation Number: 0101E4 Flat Rate Time: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 39175-SDA-A11 Defect Code: 5DY00 Symptom Code: Q3200 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Use the eject button to remove all CDs from the audio unit. 3. With the radio on, select a radio station using one of the presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6993 ^ If you hear the radio station but cannot see the radio frequency selected, and the radio/HVAC panel buttons are not illuminated with the headlights on, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you can't hear any sound and can't see the radio frequency selected, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: For problems and repairs not covered by this bulletin, troubleshoot as needed, and refer to Service Bulletin 06-001, Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In Warranty Exchange, and Audio and DVD Player Out-of-Warranty Repair. PCB HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you replace a PCB, refer to the PCB HANDLING PRECAUTIONS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6994 ^ To replace a PCB, you need the ESD/anti-static mat from the PCB tool kit (P/N 07AAZ-SDAA170) and a clean work surface. ^ Before you open the audio unit or handle the replacement PCB, attach the wrist strap (included in the PCB tool kit) around one of your wrists, and attach the alligator clip to the ESD mat. ^ Replacement PCBs come with a new serial number label, an anti-theft code card, and two labels with the new serial number and anti-theft code. Apply the serial number label to the anti-theft card, and give the card to the customer. Make sure the customer knows the importance of keeping the anti-theft code card in a safe place. Advise them to discard the original anti-theft code card. ^ Check that the AM/FM radio, CD, and HVAC all work before doing this repair, as this repair is for illumination problems only. Other problems and repairs are not covered by this bulletin. 1. Press the eject button, and remove all of the CDs from the audio unit. 2. Remove the audio unit from the dashboard: ^ Refer to page 22-372 of the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords AUDIO PANEL, and select Audio-HVAC Display Panel Removal/Installation from the list. 3. Place the audio unit on the ESD/anti-static mat. Then attach the wrist strap around one of your wrists, and attach the alligator clip to the ESD mat. 4. Using the blue marker, mark the four 3 x 8 mm screws on the audio unit's heat sink as shown. Then remove the four screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the blue dot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6995 5. Using the orange marker, mark the four 2.6 x 16 mm screws on the heat sink as shown. Then remove the four screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the orange dot. 6. Remove the heat sink, and set it aside. 7. Using the green marker, mark the two screws on the back cover of the audio unit as shown. Then remove the two screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the green dot. 8. Using the green marker, mark the large screw on the front lower cover of the audio unit. Also, mark the small screw with the red marker. Then remove the two screws, and place them in the appropriate sections of the screw container marked with the green dot and the red dot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6996 9. Using the black marker, mark the three screws on the bottom cover as shown. Then remove the three screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the black dot. 10. Take the bottom cover off the audio unit, and set it aside. 11. Carefully lift the PCB, touching only the edges as shown. 12. Set the PCB next to the audio unit on the ESD mat, and pull on the ribbon cable to disconnect it from the PCB. 13. Remove the new PCB from the anti-static bag, touching only the edges, and place it on the ESD mat. Put the original PCB into the anti-static bag for return. With the new PCB on the ESD mat, push the ribbon cable into the connector on the PCB. NOTE: Make sure the ribbon cable is secure. If it is not properly connected, the CD player will not work. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6997 14. Carefully place the new PCB into the audio unit. To ensure proper PCB placement, align the three alignment tabs and screw holes. 15. Carefully remove the protective cover from the gray thermal pad on the new PCB. 16. Reassemble the audio unit in the reverse order of removal. 17. Stick the light blue serial number label (supplied with the new PCB) over the original serial number label on the audio unit. NOTE: The PCB kit includes a new serial number label to be placed over the existing label on the customer's audio unit. The anti-theft code is linked to the serial number. If the new label is not applied to the unit, a future serial number search for the anti-theft code will yield an incorrect code. The original label is white and the replacement is light blue. 18. Reinstall the audio unit in the vehicle. 19. Check the audio unit and HVAC controls: ^ Press the PWR button to confirm that the unit turns On\Off. ^ The display should show code. Enter the new audio unit code provided with the new PCB. ^ Adjust the dimmer switch to make sure the switch illumination works correctly. ^ Check the operation of all radio and HVAC buttons. ^ Insert a CD to confirm proper CD operation. ^ Move the vehicle outside, and check the AM, FM, and XM radio reception (if equipped). ^ If the audio unit and the HVAC controls are all OK, return the vehicle to the customer with the new anti-theft code card. Be sure the customer understands that the new card replaces the old card and that the old card should be discarded to avoid confusion. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6998 ^ If there are any problems with the audio unit or the HVAC controls, recheck all connections that were disconnected during the repair, including the ribbon cable to the PCB. If the radio still does not function correctly, refer to Service Bulletin 06-001 for audio unit replacement information. 20. Return the original PCB to the supplier using the packaging that the remanufactured PCB came in. To prevent damage to the returned PCB, be sure to place the PCB first in the plastic bag, then into the cardboard insert, before placing it into the box. ORDERING INFORMATION *NOTE: If you are doing an out-of-warranty repair, refer to PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark, for ordering and core return information.* Audio unit PCBS are available only through controlled parts orders. To order one of the PCBS listed below, you will need to submit a VIN. Do NOT order parts through the automated audio order system. ^ P/N 3917A-SDA-A11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDA-L11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-A11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-A61RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-L11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-L61RM Parts Return Ship the original PCB back to the manufacturer using the box that the remanufactured PCB came in. Fill out the prepaid shipping label that came with the remanufactured unit, and attach it to the box. Make sure you enclose a copy of the paid warranty claim with the original unit. For additional warranty information, refer to PIB A07-0002, Warranty Extension: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark. NOTE: If the original PCB is not returned to the vendor within 20 days from the date the warranty claim is paid, your dealership will be debited with a core loss charge. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 6999 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 04-027 Date: 100904 Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair 04-027 September 4, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension and Out-of-Warranty Repair: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark (Supersedes 04-027, Warranty Extension: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark, dated July 7, 2009, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ Under BACKGROUND, PARTS INFORMATION, and ORDERING INFORMATION, information about out-of-warranty parts was added. ^ A new section, OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR ORDERING AND CORE RETURN INFORMATION, was added.* BACKGROUND NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the audio unit display on affected vehicles purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 7 years or 105,000 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage. In some audio units, a component failure on the PCB (printed circuit board) could cause the audio display to become dark or dim, and prevent the audio/HVAC panel buttons from illuminating. To ensure that customers have adequate warranty coverage for this potential problem, American Honda is increasing the warranty on the audio unit display to 7 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first. For other defects, the standard 3 years or 36,000 miles warranty applies, whichever occurs first. *If the warranty extension has expired, refer to PARTS INFORMATION to determine which part number you need to order. If you order a Customer Contribution P/N, refer to PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display is Dim or Dark, for more information about prices, ordering, and core return.* VEHICLES AFFECTED NOTE: Affected vehicles do not have the navigation system. Only a small number of vehicles within a wide range of vehicles are affected by this warranty extension. Before beginning work, verify vehicle eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7005 ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles received a notification of this warranty extension. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION If confirmed by your diagnosis, replace the printed circuit board (PCB) inside the audio unit. The PCB core must be returned for credit. *OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR ORDERING AND CORE RETURN INFORMATION For information on how to order the PCB and return the core to Remanufactured Parts Operations, refer to PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark. NOTE: Make sure you promptly return the core to American Honda to receive your core credit.* PARTS INFORMATION *The matrix lists audio unit information as installed at the factory. There is a chance that the audio unit has been changed from the original. To ensure that the correct PCB is used, always match the audio unit part number (label found on the audio unit chassis) with the PCB part number. The part number for an audio unit starts with 39175and the PCB part number starts with 3917A." Match the next six characters of the audio unit part number with the next six of the PCB part number. Example: Audio Unit P/N 39175-SDN-A11 Honda Paid PCB P/N 3917A-SDN-A11RM Customer Contribution PCB P/N 3917A-SDN-A11CP Use the 100% Honda Paid P/N if the repair is covered by one of the following: ^ The 7 year/100,000 mile audio-HVAC display warranty extension ^ The 3 year/36,000 mile new vehicle warranty ^ 100% Goodwill Use the Customer Contribution PIN and the ordering and return instructions from PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark, if the repair is covered by one of the following: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7006 ^ 99% or less Goodwill ^ A Vehicle Service Contract (VSC) ^ A Certified Used Car Contract (CUC) ^ The customer paid NOTE: Using the Client Contribution P/N establishes a Replacement Parts Limited Warranty that covers the PCB for 12 months or 12,000 miles, whichever occurs first. TOOL INFORMATION PCB Tool Kit: P/N 07AAZ-SDAA170 (The kit includes an ESD/anti-static mat, a wrist strap, five colored markers, and a screw container.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION If the vehicle is within the warranty extension period, 7 years or 100,000 miles, whichever comes first, use the information below to submit a claim. Operation Number: 0101E4 Flat Rate Time: 0.8 hour Failed Part: P/N 39175-SDA-A11 Defect Code: 5DY00 Symptom Code: Q3200 Skill Level: Repair Technician DIAGNOSIS 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. 2. Use the eject button to remove all CDs from the audio unit. 3. With the radio on, select a radio station using one of the presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7007 ^ If you hear the radio station but cannot see the radio frequency selected, and the radio/HVAC panel buttons are not illuminated with the headlights on, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you can't hear any sound and can't see the radio frequency selected, this bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. NOTE: For problems and repairs not covered by this bulletin, troubleshoot as needed, and refer to Service Bulletin 06-001, Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In Warranty Exchange, and Audio and DVD Player Out-of-Warranty Repair. PCB HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ Before you replace a PCB, refer to the PCB HANDLING PRECAUTIONS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7008 ^ To replace a PCB, you need the ESD/anti-static mat from the PCB tool kit (P/N 07AAZ-SDAA170) and a clean work surface. ^ Before you open the audio unit or handle the replacement PCB, attach the wrist strap (included in the PCB tool kit) around one of your wrists, and attach the alligator clip to the ESD mat. ^ Replacement PCBs come with a new serial number label, an anti-theft code card, and two labels with the new serial number and anti-theft code. Apply the serial number label to the anti-theft card, and give the card to the customer. Make sure the customer knows the importance of keeping the anti-theft code card in a safe place. Advise them to discard the original anti-theft code card. ^ Check that the AM/FM radio, CD, and HVAC all work before doing this repair, as this repair is for illumination problems only. Other problems and repairs are not covered by this bulletin. 1. Press the eject button, and remove all of the CDs from the audio unit. 2. Remove the audio unit from the dashboard: ^ Refer to page 22-372 of the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords AUDIO PANEL, and select Audio-HVAC Display Panel Removal/Installation from the list. 3. Place the audio unit on the ESD/anti-static mat. Then attach the wrist strap around one of your wrists, and attach the alligator clip to the ESD mat. 4. Using the blue marker, mark the four 3 x 8 mm screws on the audio unit's heat sink as shown. Then remove the four screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the blue dot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7009 5. Using the orange marker, mark the four 2.6 x 16 mm screws on the heat sink as shown. Then remove the four screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the orange dot. 6. Remove the heat sink, and set it aside. 7. Using the green marker, mark the two screws on the back cover of the audio unit as shown. Then remove the two screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the green dot. 8. Using the green marker, mark the large screw on the front lower cover of the audio unit. Also, mark the small screw with the red marker. Then remove the two screws, and place them in the appropriate sections of the screw container marked with the green dot and the red dot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7010 9. Using the black marker, mark the three screws on the bottom cover as shown. Then remove the three screws, and place them in the section of the screw container marked with the black dot. 10. Take the bottom cover off the audio unit, and set it aside. 11. Carefully lift the PCB, touching only the edges as shown. 12. Set the PCB next to the audio unit on the ESD mat, and pull on the ribbon cable to disconnect it from the PCB. 13. Remove the new PCB from the anti-static bag, touching only the edges, and place it on the ESD mat. Put the original PCB into the anti-static bag for return. With the new PCB on the ESD mat, push the ribbon cable into the connector on the PCB. NOTE: Make sure the ribbon cable is secure. If it is not properly connected, the CD player will not work. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7011 14. Carefully place the new PCB into the audio unit. To ensure proper PCB placement, align the three alignment tabs and screw holes. 15. Carefully remove the protective cover from the gray thermal pad on the new PCB. 16. Reassemble the audio unit in the reverse order of removal. 17. Stick the light blue serial number label (supplied with the new PCB) over the original serial number label on the audio unit. NOTE: The PCB kit includes a new serial number label to be placed over the existing label on the customer's audio unit. The anti-theft code is linked to the serial number. If the new label is not applied to the unit, a future serial number search for the anti-theft code will yield an incorrect code. The original label is white and the replacement is light blue. 18. Reinstall the audio unit in the vehicle. 19. Check the audio unit and HVAC controls: ^ Press the PWR button to confirm that the unit turns On\Off. ^ The display should show code. Enter the new audio unit code provided with the new PCB. ^ Adjust the dimmer switch to make sure the switch illumination works correctly. ^ Check the operation of all radio and HVAC buttons. ^ Insert a CD to confirm proper CD operation. ^ Move the vehicle outside, and check the AM, FM, and XM radio reception (if equipped). ^ If the audio unit and the HVAC controls are all OK, return the vehicle to the customer with the new anti-theft code card. Be sure the customer understands that the new card replaces the old card and that the old card should be discarded to avoid confusion. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7012 ^ If there are any problems with the audio unit or the HVAC controls, recheck all connections that were disconnected during the repair, including the ribbon cable to the PCB. If the radio still does not function correctly, refer to Service Bulletin 06-001 for audio unit replacement information. 20. Return the original PCB to the supplier using the packaging that the remanufactured PCB came in. To prevent damage to the returned PCB, be sure to place the PCB first in the plastic bag, then into the cardboard insert, before placing it into the box. ORDERING INFORMATION *NOTE: If you are doing an out-of-warranty repair, refer to PIB A10-0012, Customer Pay PCB Program: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark, for ordering and core return information.* Audio unit PCBS are available only through controlled parts orders. To order one of the PCBS listed below, you will need to submit a VIN. Do NOT order parts through the automated audio order system. ^ P/N 3917A-SDA-A11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDA-L11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-A11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-A61RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-L11RM ^ P/N 3917A-SDN-L61RM Parts Return Ship the original PCB back to the manufacturer using the box that the remanufactured PCB came in. Fill out the prepaid shipping label that came with the remanufactured unit, and attach it to the box. Make sure you enclose a copy of the paid warranty claim with the original unit. For additional warranty information, refer to PIB A07-0002, Warranty Extension: Audio-HVAC Display Is Dim or Dark. NOTE: If the original PCB is not returned to the vendor within 20 days from the date the warranty claim is paid, your dealership will be debited with a core loss charge. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Assembly: > 04-027 > Sep > 10 > Campaign - A/C, Audio Display Warr. Ext/Non-Warr. Repair > Page 7013 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7014 Control Assembly: Locations 199. Behind Audio-HVAC Disp. Mod. (Man. A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7015 Multiplex Integrated Control System (MICS) Component Location Index 58. Behind Climate Control Unit (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7016 248. Behind Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 226. Climate Control Unit (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7019 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Max Cool Position Function When the mode control button is in the MAX COOL position, the Audio-HVAC module will automatically select the Recirculation mode and turn the A/C on. The recirculation switch and A/C switch are disabled and cannot be turned off in this mode. If the Audio-HVAC-Display Module fails to function as described, replace the front panel assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power/Ground Circuit Testing Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power/Ground Circuit Testing Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.20 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio-HVAC display panel. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.22 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power/Ground Circuit Testing > Page 7022 Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection Climate Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting Climate Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.4 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the climate control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.6 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the climate control unit and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Core: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Locations > Page 7029 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Locations > Page 7030 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Evaporator Core Replacement 4-door 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the evaporator core. 3. Remove the blower unit. 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor. 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the power transistor, then remove the wire harness clip (B), the connector clip (C), the self-tapping screws, and the expansion valve cover (D). 6. Carefully pull out the evaporator core (A) and the plate (B) without bending the pipes. 7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) . - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Locations > Page 7031 O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system. 2-door 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the evaporator core. 3. Remove the blower unit. 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor. 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the power transistor, then remove the wire harness clip (B), the self-tapping screws, and the expansion valve cover (C). 6. Carefully pull out the evaporator core without bending the pipes. 7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Locations > Page 7032 - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct 0-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7037 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7038 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7039 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7040 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations 71. Behind Glove Box 209. Under Rt. Side of Dash (Man A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7041 48. Evaporator Temperature Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7042 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Dip the sensor in ice water (32 °F) (0 °C) and measure the resistance between its terminals. 2. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7043 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Temperature Sensor Replacement 4-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, aid carefully pull out the evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 2-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7044 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, and carefully pull out the evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air > Page 7050 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7051 Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). 2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix control linkage (C). 3. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (LO) with the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix control linkage (C) as shown step 2. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). NOTE: Insert the ring from the end of the cable securely to the linkage pin. - 4-door: Insert the ring over the nail, making sure it is correctly attached. - 2-door: Insert the ring all the way to the base of the pin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7052 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C) to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core. 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc. 8. Remove the dashboard. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7056 9. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, the power transistor, and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clips (B), the connector clips (C) and the wire harness (D). Remove the heater ducts (E), then remove the mounting nuts and the blower-heater unit (F). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7057 10. Remove the self-tapping screws, the evaporator temperature sensor (C) and the joint duct A, then remove the self-tapping screws and the joint duct B (4-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, then remove the passenger's heater outlet (D), and the heater core cover (E). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor (F) (2-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater pipe brackets (G), the grommets (H) and carefully pull out the heater core (I) so you don't bend the inlet outlet pipes. 11. Install the heater core, and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal. 12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Adjust the heater valve cable. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Refer to evaporator core replacement. - Reset the power window control unit. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations Heater Core Case: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7061 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7062 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core. 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc. 8. Remove the dashboard. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7063 9. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, the power transistor, and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clips (B), the connector clips (C) and the wire harness (D). Remove the heater ducts (E), then remove the mounting nuts and the blower-heater unit (F). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7064 10. Remove the self-tapping screws, the evaporator temperature sensor (C) and the joint duct A, then remove the self-tapping screws and the joint duct B (4-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, then remove the passenger's heater outlet (D), and the heater core cover (E). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor (F) (2-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater pipe brackets (G), the grommets (H) and carefully pull out the heater core (I) so you don't bend the inlet outlet pipes. 11. Install the heater core, and the evaporator core in the reverse order of removal. 12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Adjust the heater valve cable. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Refer to evaporator core replacement. - Reset the power window control unit. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Relief Valve Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the system and the compressor oil from running out. 3. Clean the mating surfaces. 4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it. 5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve. 6. Charge the system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Hose/Line HVAC: Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7071 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations Power Transistor HVAC: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7075 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7076 133. Blower Power Transistor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7077 Power Transistor HVAC: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power transistor. 2. Measure the resistance between the No.3 and No.4 (4-door) or No.1 and No.2 (2-door) terminals of the power transistor. It should be about 1.4 1.5 kOhms. - If the resistance is within the specifications, go to step 3. - If the resistance is not within the specifications, replace the power transistor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7078 3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 (4-door) or No.4 (2-door) terminal (BLU/YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the terminal and insulate it from body ground. 4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor. 5. Supply 12 volts to the No.1 (4-door) or No.4 (2-door) cavity of the power transistor connector with a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the blower motor runs. - If the blower motor does not run, replace the power transistor. - If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is OK. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Locations Receiver Dryer: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Locations > Page 7082 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Locations > Page 7083 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement 1. Remove the condenser. 2. Remove the bolts from the condenser, then remove the receiver/dryer (A), the bracket (B) and the O-rings (C). 3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7088 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7089 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7090 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity or system .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 500 - 550 g (17.6 - 19.4 oz) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7093 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... HFC-134 a (R-134 a) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Refrigerant: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 - P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 ml (4 fl.oz) - P/N 38899-PR7-A01: 40 ml (1 1/3 fl.oz) Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 7096 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 7097 - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 7098 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 7099 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Evacuation System Evacuation CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. When an A/C System has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station. (If the system has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for several hours.) 2. Connect a R-1 34a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system. 3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement > Page 7100 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Charging System Charging CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Evacuate the system. 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil. 4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the compressor will be damaged. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant Capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 5. Check for refrigerant leaks. 6. Check for system performance. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant oil Capacity of components Condenser ........................................................................................................................................... .................................................25 ml (5/6 fl oz) Evaporator ................................................................ .......................................................................................................................45 ml (1 1/2 fl oz) Each line and hose ....................................................................................................................................... .....................................10 ml (1/3 fl oz) Compressor .......................................................................... ...........................................................................................................160 ml (5 1/3 fl oz) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7105 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Use only DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7106 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 - P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 ml (4 fl.oz) - P/N 38899-PR7-A01: 40 ml (1 1/3 fl.oz) Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7107 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7108 - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7112 128. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7113 220. A/C Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7114 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch consists of a high-low pressure switch (A/C pressure switch A) and a middle pressure switch (A/C pressure switch B). - High-low pressure switch If the refrigerant pressure becomes too high (due to blockage or lack of airflow at the condenser), or too low (due to leakage), the A/C pressure switch stops the A/C request signal to the PCM and the compressor stops operating. - Middle pressure switch If the refrigerant pressure goes above or below 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/sq.cm, 213 psi), the A/C pressure switch opens or closes to signal the PCM to change the speed of the condenser fan and radiator fan (high-low). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the heater is inoperative or if any of the following items are operative; condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/With Electronic Climate Control - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS. Are there any DTCs indicated? YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 4P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the relay module and the A/C pressure switch. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals of the A/C pressure switch. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 16. 7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 7117 10. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel connector A and the A/C pressure switch. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Measure the resistance between the No.14 and No.15 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). Is the resistance less than 24 kOhms? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit. 13. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check the blower motor at several speeds. Does the blower motor operate at all speeds? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio HVAC display panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Repair the problem in the blower motor circuit. 16. Check for proper A/C system pressure. Is the pressure within specifications? YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch. NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 7118 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual HVAC A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of the following items are operative: condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor, or if the heater is inoperative. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS. Are there any DTCs indicated? YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 4P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the relay module and the A/C pressure switch. If the wire is OK, replace the relay module. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals of the A/C pressure switch. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 16. 7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 7119 10. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the A/C pressure switch. 11. Turn the ignition switch off. 12. Measure the resistance between the No.9 and No.10 terminals of the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. Is the resistance less than 24 kOhms? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit. 13. Reconnect the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check the blower motor operation at several speeds. Does the blower motor operate at all speeds? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original front panel assembly. NO - Repair the problem in the blower motor circuit. 16. Check for proper A/C system pressure. Is the pressure within specifications? YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch. NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7124 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7125 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7126 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7130 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7131 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7132 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7133 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7137 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7138 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7139 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Climate Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7147 127. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7148 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams 61. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) 289. Outside Air Temperature Sensor (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7149 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7150 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, and remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the back of the front bumper beam. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Climate Control Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7154 Climate Control Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7155 57. Middle of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7156 57. In-car Temperature Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7157 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection In-car Temperature Sensor Test Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling the sensor with a hair drier. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7158 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-car Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Remove the self-tapping screw and the in-oar temperature sensor (A) from the instrument panel (B). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be sure to connect the air hose securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7163 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7164 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7165 Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7166 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations 71. Behind Glove Box 209. Under Rt. Side of Dash (Man A/C DX, LX, L4: EX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7167 48. Evaporator Temperature Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7168 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Dip the sensor in ice water (32 °F) (0 °C) and measure the resistance between its terminals. 2. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance. 3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7169 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Temperature Sensor Replacement 4-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, aid carefully pull out the evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 2-door 1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then release the glove box stops and let the glove box hang down. 2. Remove the relays from the bracket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7170 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, and carefully pull out the evaporator temperature sensor. 4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7174 128. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7175 220. A/C Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7176 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch consists of a high-low pressure switch (A/C pressure switch A) and a middle pressure switch (A/C pressure switch B). - High-low pressure switch If the refrigerant pressure becomes too high (due to blockage or lack of airflow at the condenser), or too low (due to leakage), the A/C pressure switch stops the A/C request signal to the PCM and the compressor stops operating. - Middle pressure switch If the refrigerant pressure goes above or below 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/sq.cm, 213 psi), the A/C pressure switch opens or closes to signal the PCM to change the speed of the condenser fan and radiator fan (high-low). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Climate Control A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the heater is inoperative or if any of the following items are operative; condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/With Electronic Climate Control - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS. Are there any DTCs indicated? YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 4P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the relay module and the A/C pressure switch. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals of the A/C pressure switch. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 16. 7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 7179 10. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel connector A and the A/C pressure switch. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Measure the resistance between the No.14 and No.15 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). Is the resistance less than 24 kOhms? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit. 13. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check the blower motor at several speeds. Does the blower motor operate at all speeds? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio HVAC display panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Repair the problem in the blower motor circuit. 16. Check for proper A/C system pressure. Is the pressure within specifications? YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch. NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 7180 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual HVAC A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: - Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of the following items are operative: condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor, or if the heater is inoperative. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain DTCs. 1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS. Are there any DTCs indicated? YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 4P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the relay module and the A/C pressure switch. If the wire is OK, replace the relay module. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals of the A/C pressure switch. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 16. 7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector. 8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Climate Control > Page 7181 10. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there 5V or more? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the A/C pressure switch. 11. Turn the ignition switch off. 12. Measure the resistance between the No.9 and No.10 terminals of the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. Is the resistance less than 24 kOhms? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit. 13. Reconnect the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check the blower motor operation at several speeds. Does the blower motor operate at all speeds? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original front panel assembly. NO - Repair the problem in the blower motor circuit. 16. Check for proper A/C system pressure. Is the pressure within specifications? YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch. NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Solar Sensor: Component Locations Climate Control Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7186 Climate Control Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7187 55. Middle of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7188 109. Rear of Root (Sedan except DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7189 79. Sunlight Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7190 Solar Sensor: Testing and Inspection Sunlight Sensor Test 1. Remove the sunlight sensor, and reconnect the connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No.1 terminal and the (-) probe on the No.2 terminal with the 2P connector connected. The voltage readings will not change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. Voltage should be: - 3.6 - 3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct sunlight. - 3.3 - 3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7191 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Sunlight Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the upper panel from the dashboard. 2. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the upper panel (B). Be careful not to damage the sensor. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations Service Port HVAC: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7195 Air Conditioning Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Solar Sensor: Component Locations Climate Control Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7200 Climate Control Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7201 55. Middle of Dash (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7202 109. Rear of Root (Sedan except DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7203 79. Sunlight Sensor (Climate Control EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7204 Solar Sensor: Testing and Inspection Sunlight Sensor Test 1. Remove the sunlight sensor, and reconnect the connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No.1 terminal and the (-) probe on the No.2 terminal with the 2P connector connected. The voltage readings will not change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. Voltage should be: - 3.6 - 3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct sunlight. - 3.3 - 3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7205 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Sunlight Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the upper panel from the dashboard. 2. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the upper panel (B). Be careful not to damage the sensor. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair SRS Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment NOTE: Before doing any SRS repairs, use the PGM Tester SRS menu method to check for DTCs; refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index for the less obvious deployed parts (seat belt tensioners, OPDS sensor, side airbag sensors, etc.) After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Seat belt tensioners - Front sensors After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed airbag(s) - Seat belt tensioners - Front sensors After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed side airbag(s) - Side impact sensor(s) (1st) for the side(s) that deployed After a collision where the side curtain airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Side impact sensor(s) (1st) for the side(s) that deployed - Side impact sensor(s) (2nd) for the side(s) that deployed - Roof trim - Front grab handle - Any related trim clip During the repair process, inspect these areas: - Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, don't repair, any damaged harnesses. - Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, replace the cable reel. After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the ignition switch ON. If the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS airbag system is OK. If the indicator does not function properly, use the PGM Tester SRS Menu Method to read the DTC(s). If this doesn't retrieve any codes, use the Tester's SCS menu method. If the SCS method doesn't work, you may need to install a known-good SRS unit to read the DTC (s). If you still cannot retrieve a code, go to SRS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7215 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7216 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7217 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Driver's Air Bag - Replace Torx Bolts Properly Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Driver's Air Bag - Replace Torx Bolts Properly SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2004 TITLE: Replace Drivers Air Bag Torx Bolts Properly APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: When replacing a drivers's side air bag, make sure you replace the torx bolts properly. When removing the bolts, use a high-quality bit, making sure the bit is aligned. DON'T USE AIR TOOLS. When installing bolts, always start the bolts by hand to avoid cross-treading, and torque the bolts to the value listed in the service manual. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7222 Air Bag: Diagrams 71. Side Airbag Inflator, Driver's (except DX) 72. Side Airbag Inflator, Front Passenger's (except DX) 130. Airbag First And Second Inflators, Driver's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7223 131. Airbag First And Second Inflators, Front Passenger's 256. Side Curtain Airbag Inflator, Driver's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L Except '03) 257. Side Curtain Airbag Inflator, Front Passenger's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L Except '03) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Deployment and Disposal Airbag Disposal Special Tools Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, or seat belt tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the part(s) must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the part(s). Only after the part(s) have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the parts appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying Airbags in the vehicle If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and seat belt tensioners should be deployed while still in the vehicle. These parts should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, side curtain airbags, or seat belt tensioner is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. Driver's Airbag 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 5. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7226 6. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) from the floor wire harness. Side curtain airbag 7. Disconnect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat belt tensioner 8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner 4P connector (A) from the floor wire harness. Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7227 9. Cut off each connector, strip the ends of the wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A) to the wires. Place the deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle. NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. The like color wires go to the individual inflators. 10. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool. - If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the component. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the component is ready to be deployed 11. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). - If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If a component doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components - During deployment the airbags can become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after deployment before touching the airbags. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7228 12. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely. Deploying Components Out of the Vehicle If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as follows: 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure or on the tool label. 2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on flat ground, at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or people. 3. Follow steps 9 through 12 of the in-vehicle deployment procedure. NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. The like color wires go to the individual inflators. Disposal of Damaged Components 1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure for the driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, side airbag, side curtain airbag, and seat belt tensioner. 2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping, and twisting together the two inflator wires. NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. The like color wires go to the individual inflators. 3. Package the component in exactly the same packaging that the new replacement part came in. 4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Honda District Service Manager for how and where to return it for disposal. Deployment Tool Check 1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery. 2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty. 3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7229 Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Airbag Driver's Airbag Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. 3. Remove the two Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit. 4. Disconnect the horn switch connector (1P), then remove the driver's airbag (B). Installation 1. Connect the horn switch connector (1P) (A) to the driver's airbag. 2. Place the new driver's airbag (B) in the steering wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7230 3. Connect the cable reel to the driver's airbag 4P connector (A), then install the access panel (B) on the steering wheel. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. - Make sure the horn button works. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7231 Air Bag: Service and Repair Front Passenger Airbag Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the glove box. 3. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness. 4. Disconnect the passenger's A pillar trim. 5. Remove the three mounting nuts (A) from the bracket. Cover the lid and dashboard with a cloth, and pry carefully with a screwdriver to lift the front passenger's airbag (B) out of the dashboard. NOTE: The airbag lid has pawls on each side which attach it to the dashboard. Installation 1. Place the new front passenger's airbag (A) into the dashboard. Tighten the front passenger's airbag mounting nuts (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7232 2. Connect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) to dashboard wire harness, then reinstall the glove box and passenger's front pillar trim. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7233 Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Airbag Side Airbag Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector (A). 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side airbag (B). Installation NOTE: - If the side airbag lid is secured by a tape, remove the tape. - Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover. - Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified torque. - Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed properly. Improper installation may prevent proper deployment. - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7234 1. Place the new side airbag on the seat-back frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting nuts (B). 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their full ranges of movement, making sure the harness wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 6. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs. 7. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7235 Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Curtain Airbag Side Curtain Airbag Replacement Removal NOTE: - Review the interior trim replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. - Removal of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - The side curtain airbag system consists of the side curtain airbag module, including the roof trim and front grab handle. When the side curtain airbag has been deployed, these parts should be replaced. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Remove the antenna coil. 4. Disconnect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7236 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7237 5. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the bracket. 6. Remove the side curtain airbag assembly. Installation NOTE: - Installation of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - If the airbag is frayed, or has only other visible damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repair an airbag. - When you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and not caught between the inflator bracket by the bracket bolts. - Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed properly, otherwise the airbag could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7238 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7239 1. Place the new side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof. Tighten the side curtain airbag mounting bolts (A). 2. Connect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) to the side curtain airbag subharness. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 7240 5. After installing the side curtain airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 6. Install all removed parts. 7. Confirm proper headliner/pillar trim overlap. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7244 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7245 64. Under Middle Of Dash (L4:'03 EX-L; V6: LX) 84. In Front Passenger's Seat (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7246 204. Under Middle Of Dash (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L Except '03) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7247 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 231. OPDS Unit (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7248 234. SRS Unit Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7249 234. SRS Unit Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7250 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit The operation of the front passenger's weight sensor unit must be checked after any of these actions. - Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except weight sensor unit and/or weight sensors) - After a vehicle collision Pre-Operation Check Set-up - Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position. - Adjust the seat height to the lowest position. - Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position. - Do not move the seat from this position. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except test-driving in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Turn the heater and the A/C off. - Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 2. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 3. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the tester's Inspection Menu. The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), or less, go to step 4. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 4. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg), then measure and note its actual weight (M1) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 5. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 6. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 8. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance ((T1) - (T0) - (M1)) < ±18.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat. T0: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat. M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 9. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7251 - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance is still more than ±8.6 lbs (13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. After a vehicle collision 10. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move from these positions. 11. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 12. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 13. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 14. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat steps 1 - 3. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the reading on the HDS (T0) is still more than ±16.6 lbs (±13.0 kg), go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 14. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg), then measure and note its actual weight (M) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 15. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 16. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 17. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 18. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance ((T1) - (T0) - (M1)) < ±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat. T0: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat. M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, and reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance still more than ±18.6 lbs (±13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors and the seat riser, then go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors. 3. Remove the center console and front panel. 4. Remove the center pocket. 5. Remove the center holder. 6. Remove the driver's and passenger's center lower cover. 7. Remove the heater vent ducts. 8. Disconnect the connectors and remove the torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click. NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against its bracket before torquing the Torx bolts. 2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Install all removed parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 7254 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair OPDS Unit Replacement OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit 8P connector D and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit (C). 5. Remove the two screws (E) and the OPDS unit. Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws (B), and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (C) to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover (D). 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 7255 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Initializing the OPDS Unit Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: A new (un-initialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select OPDS INIT, in the Adjustment Menu. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the OPDS system fails to initialize several times, replace the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 7256 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Replacement Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Slide the seat all the way to the rear. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector. 5. Disconnect the connectors. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and the front passenger's weight sensor unit (B) from the seat riser. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensor unit on the seat riser. Tighten the two mounting nuts (A) and connect the connectors. 2. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. 5. After installing the front passenger's weight sensor unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Push out the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator from behind the upper panel. 3. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (B). 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity, replace the bulb. 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams 225. Cable Reel Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7263 225. Cable Reel Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7264 225. Cable Reel Part 3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7265 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Cable Reel Replacement Removal 1. Make sure the wheels are aligned straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the driver's airbag. 4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cable reel, then remove the steering wheel bolt (B). 5. Align the front wheels point straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. 6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A). 7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove the column covers (B, C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7266 8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 5P or 13P connector (C) from the cable reel (D). 9. Release the lock tab (A) under the cable reel connector with a 90 ° hook shaped tool (B). Slide the tool below the cable reel connector just above the lock tab. Release the lower lock tab (C), and slide the cable reel off the column. Installation 1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Set the cancel sleeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertically. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7267 4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering column shaft. Then connect the 5P or 13P connector (B) to the cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C) to the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (D). 5. Install the steering column covers. 6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about 3 turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. 7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the holes on the steering wheel, and install the steering wheel with a new steering wheel bolt (A), then reconnect the connector. 8. Install the driver's airbag. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. - After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the indicator does not come on. - Make sure the horn works. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Diagnostic Connector, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Diagnostic Connector: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Diagnostic Connector, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7271 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Impact Sensor: Component Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7276 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7277 87. Left B-pillar (except DX) (Right Similar) 130. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7278 137. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper 188. Left C-pillar (Rt.Sim.) (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (Except '03-'04 2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7279 188. Left C-pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7280 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 55. Impact Sensor, Left Front 56. Impact Sensor, Right Front 73. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Driver's (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7281 74. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Front Passenger's (except DX) 258. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Driver's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (except '03-'04 2-door) 259. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Front Passenger's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (except '03-'04 2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors. 3. Remove the front bumper. 4. Remove the washer reservoir for the right side sensor or the intake air resonator for the left side sensor. 5. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor (C). Installation 1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Install all removed parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7284 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor 1ST Replacement Side Impact Sensor (1st) Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the Body section before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly. 4. Remove the front door sill trim and the center pillar lower trim panel. 5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor (1st). 6. Remove the Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (1st) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (1st) (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor. 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Install all removed pants. 4. After installing the side impact sensor (1st), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 2nd Replacement Side Impact Sensor (2nd) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7285 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor (2nd) 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. 4. Remove the Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (2nd) (C). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (2nd) (A) with torx bolts (B), then connect the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor (2nd). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Install all removed parts. 4. After installing the side impact sensor (2nd), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7289 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7290 Seat Occupant Sensor: Testing and Inspection For further information, see TSB # 02-052 Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: A new (un-initialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select OPDS INIT, in the Adjustment Menu. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the OPDS system fails to initialize several times, replace the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - Before disconnecting the driver's seat position sensor 2P connector, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat assembly. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor. 5. Remove the Torx bolt (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's seat position sensor. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor. - After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust. 1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A). then connect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B). 2. Install the driver's seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7293 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Front Passenger Weight Sensor Replacement Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. 1. Remove the seat assembly. 2. Remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts attaching the seat to the weight sensors. 2-door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7294 4-door 3. Remove the front passenger's weight sensors from the seat riser. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensors on the seat riser. 2. Install the seat onto the weight sensors. 3. Reinstall the seat assembly. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. 6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7295 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit When the front passenger's weight sensors and/or weight sensor unit is replaced, calibrate the weight sensor unit by following the procedure below. While calibrating the front passenger's weight sensor unit, observe these precautions: - Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Make sure all optional parts such as seat covers are removed. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except test driving in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Keep the A/C and the heater off. - Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the seat height to the lowest position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move from these positions. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 3. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 4. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select "SWS INIT" in the Adjustment Menu and follow the prompts unit the initialization operation has been completed between the seat weight sensor unit and the sensor. 5. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) then measure and note its actual weight (M) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 6. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Leave the tester connected in the Misc Menu. 7. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 8. From the HDS's Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS's Inspection Menu. The weight (T) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 9. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale (M) and the HDS (T) with the formula below. Variance = (T) - (M) < ±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) M: Weight measured by the weight scale T: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 17. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, and reinstall them, then go to step 10. 10. Remove weight from the front passenger's seat. 11. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 12. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the tester. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 13. - If the reading on the tester (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), repeat this procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7296 13. Measure and note the prepare weight (M1) again with a weight scale. 14. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. 15. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 16. From the tester's Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK."in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 17. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance = (T1) - (M1) < ±18.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is 18.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 18. - If the variance is more than 18.6 lbs (13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced before this step), and repeat this procedure from the beginning. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the tester from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7297 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor The driver's seat position sensor must be checked after any of these actions. - Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement 1. Make sure the driver's seat is at its full forward position. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS. 6. Move the seat all the way forward. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR". NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each move. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be approximately 25 mm from the front. If the SPS data does not work as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and replace parts as needed. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Side Air Bag: Diagrams (Except DX) (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Curtain Airbag Replacement Side Curtain Airbag Replacement Removal NOTE: - Review the interior trim replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. - Removal of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - The side curtain airbag system consists of the side curtain airbag module, including the roof trim and front grab handle. When the side curtain airbag has been deployed, these parts should be replaced. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Remove the antenna coil. 4. Disconnect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7303 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7304 5. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the bracket. 6. Remove the side curtain airbag assembly. Installation NOTE: - Installation of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - If the airbag is frayed, or has only other visible damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repair an airbag. - When you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and not caught between the inflator bracket by the bracket bolts. - Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed properly, otherwise the airbag could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7305 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7306 1. Place the new side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof. Tighten the side curtain airbag mounting bolts (A). 2. Connect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) to the side curtain airbag subharness. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7307 5. After installing the side curtain airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 6. Install all removed parts. 7. Confirm proper headliner/pillar trim overlap. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7308 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Airbag Side Airbag Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector (A). 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side airbag (B). Installation NOTE: - If the side airbag lid is secured by a tape, remove the tape. - Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover. - Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified torque. - Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed properly. Improper installation may prevent proper deployment. - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Curtain Airbag Replacement > Page 7309 1. Place the new side airbag on the seat-back frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting nuts (B). 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their full ranges of movement, making sure the harness wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 6. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs. 7. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: Customer Interest Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 7318 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 7319 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 7325 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 7326 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken Windshield Moulding / Trim: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken 09-051 October 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Odyssey - - ALL 2009-11 Pilot - ALL 2003-07 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan Produced 2008-11 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan and HMA produced Windshield Side Trim Retainer Is Loose or Broken (Supersedes 09-051, dated February 27, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ In Applies To, and under PARTS INFORMATION, WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, and REPAIR PROCEDURE, the information for 2003-11 Accords was added. ^ Under REQUIRED MATERIALS, the 3M adhesive applicator was changed.* BACKGROUND When removing the windshield side trim, one or more of the retainers bonded to the body are damaged or come off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace any damaged or loose windshield side trim retainers. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7332 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7333 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7334 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7335 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7341 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7342 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7343 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 7344 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7349 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7350 64. Under Middle Of Dash (L4:'03 EX-L; V6: LX) 84. In Front Passenger's Seat (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7351 204. Under Middle Of Dash (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L Except '03) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7352 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 231. OPDS Unit (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7353 234. SRS Unit Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7354 234. SRS Unit Part 2 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7355 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Operation Check of the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit The operation of the front passenger's weight sensor unit must be checked after any of these actions. - Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except weight sensor unit and/or weight sensors) - After a vehicle collision Pre-Operation Check Set-up - Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position. - Adjust the seat height to the lowest position. - Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position. - Do not move the seat from this position. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except test-driving in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Turn the heater and the A/C off. - Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 2. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 3. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the tester's Inspection Menu. The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), or less, go to step 4. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 4. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg), then measure and note its actual weight (M1) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 5. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 6. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 8. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance ((T1) - (T0) - (M1)) < ±18.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat. T0: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat. M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 9. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7356 - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance is still more than ±8.6 lbs (13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. After a vehicle collision 10. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move from these positions. 11. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 12. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 13. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 14. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, reinstall them, then repeat steps 1 - 3. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the reading on the HDS (T0) is still more than ±16.6 lbs (±13.0 kg), go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 14. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg), then measure and note its actual weight (M) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 15. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. 16. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 17. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 18. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance ((T1) - (T0) - (M1)) < ±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat. T0: Weight measured by the HDS with no load on the seat. M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, the check is complete. Go to step 19. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, and reinstall them, then repeat this procedure from the beginning. - If after reinstalling the front passenger's seat weight sensors, the variance still more than ±18.6 lbs (±13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors and the seat riser, then go to step 1 of "Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit". 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors. 3. Remove the center console and front panel. 4. Remove the center pocket. 5. Remove the center holder. 6. Remove the driver's and passenger's center lower cover. 7. Remove the heater vent ducts. 8. Disconnect the connectors and remove the torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click. NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against its bracket before torquing the Torx bolts. 2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Install all removed parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 7359 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair OPDS Unit Replacement OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the passenger's side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the passenger's seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit 8P connector D and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit (C). 5. Remove the two screws (E) and the OPDS unit. Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws (B), and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (C) to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover (D). 2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 7360 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Initializing the OPDS Unit Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: A new (un-initialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select OPDS INIT, in the Adjustment Menu. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the OPDS system fails to initialize several times, replace the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 7361 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Replacement Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Slide the seat all the way to the rear. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector. 5. Disconnect the connectors. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and the front passenger's weight sensor unit (B) from the seat riser. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensor unit on the seat riser. Tighten the two mounting nuts (A) and connect the connectors. 2. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. 5. After installing the front passenger's weight sensor unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7367 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7368 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7369 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7378 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7379 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7385 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7386 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7387 Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection Inspection For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner, review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. Retractor 1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7388 2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 ° from the mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40 °. Do not attempt to disassemble the retractor. The front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner is shown, the front seat belt retractor without seat belt tensioner is similar. 3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. In-vehicle 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed. 3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a sudden stop or impact. 5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released. 6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic locking retractor). This function is for securing child seats. -1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR. The seat belt should retract with a ratcheting sound, but not extend. This is normal. -2. To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend normally. 7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Front Seat Belt Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Front Seat Belt - 2-door 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Slide the front seat forward fully. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 4. Remove the seat belts. - '03 model driver's and passenger's seat belts and '04 model driver's seat belt: Remove the lower anchor cap (A), and remove the lower anchor bolt (B). - '04 model passenger's seat belt: Carefully insert the tip of a small screwdriver (A) through the hole in the back of the front seat belt lower anchor cover (B) and into the hole in the front seat belt lower anchor (C). Unlock the lower anchor by pushing in on the screwdriver. Remove the screwdriver, and then detach the front seat belt anchor plate (D) and anchor cover from the lower anchor. 5. Remove these items: - Side trim panel. - Middle cross-member gusset. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7391 6. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B). Release the clip (C), then release the front seat belt (D) from the seat belt guide (E). 7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the retractor mounting bolt (B), and the retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E). 8. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7392 9. Install the belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers, collars, and bushing on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed replace the front seat belt protector with new one. - Apply liquid thread lock to the upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. - Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly. - '04 model passenger's seat belt: Before attaching the front seat belt lower anchor, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belts. Triangle marks (A) on the anchor plate (B) and on the lower anchor (C) must face the same side. Insert the hook on the anchor plate into the lower anchor, and be sure that the lower anchor is locked securely. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Front Seat Belt - 4-door 1. Make sure you have the antitheft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Slide the front seat forward fully. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7393 4. '03 model driver's and passenger's seat belts and '04 model driver's seat belt: Remove the lower anchor cap (A), and remove the lower anchor bolt (B). 5. '04 model passenger's seat belt: Carefully insert the tip of a small screwdriver (A) through the hole in the back of the front seat belt lower anchor cover (B) and into the hole in the front seat belt lower anchor (C). Unlock the lower anchor by pushing in on the screwdriver. Remove the screwdriver, and then detach the front seat belt anchor plate (D) and anchor cover from the lower anchor. 6. Remove the B-pillar lower trim. 7. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7394 8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B), and the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E). 9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F). 10. Remove the B-pillar upper trim. 11. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7395 12. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed replace the front seat belt protector with new one. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. - Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly. - '04 model passenger 5 seat belt: Before attaching the front seat belt lower anchor, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belts. Triangle marks (A) on the anchor plate (B) and on the lower anchor (C) must face the same side. Insert the hook on the anchor plate into the lower anchor, and be sure the lower anchor, is locked securely. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Seat Belt Buckle 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Manual seat: Remove the center cover, 2-door, 4-door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7396 5. Detach the seat belt switch connector (A) and harness clip (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7397 6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A) and detach the harness clip (B), then remove the seat belt buckle (C). 7. Pull the seat belt switch harness (D) out through the space between the seat cushion and the seat linkage (except manual seat), or through the hole in the seat track (manual seat). 8. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Move the seat all the way forward and backward and confirm that the seat buckle harness is routed properly. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Passenger's Seat Belt Lower Anchor - '04 Model 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the front seat. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7398 4. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A), then remove the lower anchor (B). 5. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Assemble the washers, collar, and bushing on the lower anchor bolt as shown. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7399 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Rear Seat Belt Replacement NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Rear Seat Belt - 2-door 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A). 3. Remove the side trim panel. 4. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A). 5. Remove the retractor bolt (A), then remove the rear seat belt (B) and retractor (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7400 6. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the upper and lower anchor belts as shown. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Rear Seat Belt - 4-door 1. Remove the rear seat side bolster. 2. Remove the center anchor bolt (A). 3. Remove the rear shelf. 4. Remove the retractor mounting bolt (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the rear seat belt (C) and retractor (D). 5. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7401 1. Remove the rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B). 3. Remove the rear shelf, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET screw (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the center belt (C) and retractor (D). 5. Remove the protector (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7402 6. Install the seat belt and buckles in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 80. Under Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 83. Under Front Passenger's Seat Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7406 186. Under Front Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) 211. Under Driver's Seat (Except; Ex-L; LX: V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7407 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 119. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 120. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams 143. Seat Belt Tensioner, Driver's 144. Seat Belt Tensioner, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Impact Sensor: Component Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7416 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7417 87. Left B-pillar (except DX) (Right Similar) 130. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7418 137. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper 188. Left C-pillar (Rt.Sim.) (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (Except '03-'04 2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7419 188. Left C-pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7420 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 55. Impact Sensor, Left Front 56. Impact Sensor, Right Front 73. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Driver's (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7421 74. Side Impact Sensor (1st), Front Passenger's (except DX) 258. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Driver's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (except '03-'04 2-door) 259. Side Impact Sensor (2nd), Front Passenger's (V6: EX-L; L4: EX-L) (except '03-'04 2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors. 3. Remove the front bumper. 4. Remove the washer reservoir for the right side sensor or the intake air resonator for the left side sensor. 5. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor (C). Installation 1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector, the front passenger's airbag 4P connector, and both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 5. Install all removed parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7424 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor 1ST Replacement Side Impact Sensor (1st) Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the Body section before doing repairs or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly. 4. Remove the front door sill trim and the center pillar lower trim panel. 5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor (1st). 6. Remove the Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (1st) (B). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (1st) (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor. 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Install all removed pants. 4. After installing the side impact sensor (1st), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 2nd Replacement Side Impact Sensor (2nd) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7425 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor (2nd) 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. 4. Remove the Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (2nd) (C). Installation 1. Install the new side impact sensor (2nd) (A) with torx bolts (B), then connect the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor (2nd). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Install all removed parts. 4. After installing the side impact sensor (2nd), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 80. Under Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 83. Under Front Passenger's Seat Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7429 186. Under Front Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) 211. Under Driver's Seat (Except; Ex-L; LX: V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7430 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 119. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 120. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations SRS Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7434 SRS Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7435 Seat Occupant Sensor: Testing and Inspection For further information, see TSB # 02-052 Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: A new (un-initialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71. 1. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC Memory"). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the seat. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted. 4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select OPDS INIT, in the Adjustment Menu. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE: If the OPDS system fails to initialize several times, replace the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS system continues to fail to initialize, replace the OPDS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. - Before disconnecting the driver's seat position sensor 2P connector, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat assembly. 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor. 5. Remove the Torx bolt (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's seat position sensor. Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor. - After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean. Keep it away from dust. 1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A). then connect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B). 2. Install the driver's seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7438 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Front Passenger Weight Sensor Replacement Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described. 1. Remove the seat assembly. 2. Remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts attaching the seat to the weight sensors. 2-door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7439 4-door 3. Remove the front passenger's weight sensors from the seat riser. Installation NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensors on the seat riser. 2. Install the seat onto the weight sensors. 3. Reinstall the seat assembly. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. 6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7440 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit Calibrating the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit When the front passenger's weight sensors and/or weight sensor unit is replaced, calibrate the weight sensor unit by following the procedure below. While calibrating the front passenger's weight sensor unit, observe these precautions: - Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed. - Make sure all optional parts such as seat covers are removed. - Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat. - Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. - Keep the windows closed. - Perform all calibration procedures except test driving in the service bay. - Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. - Keep the A/C and the heater off. - Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle. - Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes. 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, adjust the seat height to the lowest position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward position. Do not move from these positions. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). 3. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 4. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then adjustments. Select "SWS INIT" in the Adjustment Menu and follow the prompts unit the initialization operation has been completed between the seat weight sensor unit and the sensor. 5. Prepare a weight between 55 to 77 lbs (25 to 35 kg) then measure and note its actual weight (M) with a weight scale. NOTE: The accuracy of the weight scale must be within ±2.2 lbs (1 kg). 6. Place the prepared weight on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Leave the tester connected in the Misc Menu. 7. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 8. From the HDS's Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS's Inspection Menu. The weight (T) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 9. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale (M) and the HDS (T) with the formula below. Variance = (T) - (M) < ±8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) M: Weight measured by the weight scale T: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat - If the variance is ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 17. - If the variance is more than ±8.6 lbs (±3.9 kg), remove the seat weight sensors, and reinstall them, then go to step 10. 10. Remove weight from the front passenger's seat. 11. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 12. From the HDS inspection menu, select seat weight sensor, then "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." The weight (T0) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the tester. - If the reading on the HDS (T0) is ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg) or less, go to step 13. - If the reading on the tester (T0) is more than ±6.6 lbs (±3.0 kg), repeat this procedure from the beginning. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7441 13. Measure and note the prepare weight (M1) again with a weight scale. 14. Place the weight on the front passenger's seat. 15. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/hr), then stop on level ground. 16. From the tester's Main Menu, select SRS, then seat weight sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK."in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T1) of the front passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS. 17. Calculate the variance between the weight measured by the weight scale and the HDS with the formula below. Variance = (T1) - (M1) < ±18.6 lbs (3.9 kg) T1: Weight measured by the HDS with the weight on the seat M1: Weight measured by the weight scale. - If the variance is 18.6 lbs (±3.9 kg) or less, calibration is complete. Go to step 18. - If the variance is more than 18.6 lbs (13.9 kg), replace the front passenger's weight sensors (if they were not replaced before this step), and repeat this procedure from the beginning. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the tester from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7442 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check of the Driver's Seat Position Sensor The driver's seat position sensor must be checked after any of these actions. - Driver's seat position sensor replacement - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement 1. Make sure the driver's seat is at its full forward position. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS. 6. Move the seat all the way forward. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR". NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each move. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat should be approximately 25 mm from the front. If the SPS data does not work as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and replace parts as needed. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Amplifier > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Amplifier: Service and Repair Window Antenna Coil Replacement 1. Remove the left rear pillar trim. 2. Disconnect the 1P connectors (A) from the window antenna coil (B). 3. Disconnect all connectors, then remove the bolt and window antenna coil. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS Antenna Removal/Installation 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Remove the GPS antenna (A). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Diagrams Antenna, Radio: Diagrams 22. Window Antenna, AM Signal 23. Window Antenna, FM Signal 311. XM Satellite Radio Antenna (EX-L Except '03) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7454 Antenna, Radio: Testing and Inspection Window Antenna Test 1. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester probe (B) as shown. 2. Touch one tester probe to the near of the window antenna terminal (A) here, and move the other tester probe along the antenna wires to check that continuity exists. Repair if continuity does not exist. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Service and Repair > XM Antenna Replacement Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair XM Antenna Replacement XM Antenna Replacement 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the XM antenna (B). 3. Remove the nut from the XM antenna. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Service and Repair > XM Antenna Replacement > Page 7457 Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair Window Antenna Repair Window Antenna Repair NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section must be no longer than one inch. 1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A) with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol. 2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of the window antenna wire (B) with cellophane tape (C). 3. Mix the silver conductive paint thoroughly. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of paint (A) extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break. Allow 30 minutes to dry. 4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire. 5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it dry three hours before removing the tape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly Alarm Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly 05-010 July 22, 2005 Applies To: 2003-05 Accord DX and LX With Accessory Security System - ALL Accessory Security System Triggers Unexpectedly (Supersedes 05-010, dated April 15, 2005, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The accessory security system triggers unexpectedly (the horn sounds and the parking lights flash) when you open the door, or when you insert the key into the ignition switch, or while driving. PROBABLE CAUSE A software problem in the security system control unit (control unit). *CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the control unit and the security system microphone. NOTE: The microphone must be replaced because control units are matched to their microphones during the manufacturing process. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems. PARTS INFORMATION Security System Control Unit with Microphone: P/N 08E51-SDA-101R1, H/C 8028854C* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 050100 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 08E51-SDA-100A H/C 7224678 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-010A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the control unit and the security system microphone: ^ Refer to the 2003, 2004, or 2005 accessory security system installation instructions, or ^ Online, select subject Accessory Installation Instructions & Related Info, and choose 2003, 2004, or 2005 Accord 2- and 4-Door Security System Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly > Page 7467 (DX, LX) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly Alarm Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly 05-010 July 22, 2005 Applies To: 2003-05 Accord DX and LX With Accessory Security System - ALL Accessory Security System Triggers Unexpectedly (Supersedes 05-010, dated April 15, 2005, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The accessory security system triggers unexpectedly (the horn sounds and the parking lights flash) when you open the door, or when you insert the key into the ignition switch, or while driving. PROBABLE CAUSE A software problem in the security system control unit (control unit). *CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the control unit and the security system microphone. NOTE: The microphone must be replaced because control units are matched to their microphones during the manufacturing process. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems. PARTS INFORMATION Security System Control Unit with Microphone: P/N 08E51-SDA-101R1, H/C 8028854C* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 050100 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 08E51-SDA-100A H/C 7224678 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-010A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the control unit and the security system microphone: ^ Refer to the 2003, 2004, or 2005 accessory security system installation instructions, or ^ Online, select subject Accessory Installation Instructions & Related Info, and choose 2003, 2004, or 2005 Accord 2- and 4-Door Security System Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly > Page 7473 (DX, LX) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7474 Alarm Module: Locations 42. In Steering Column Cover 198. Under Left Side Of Dash (Honda Accy.: DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7475 Alarm Module: Diagrams 177. Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver 297. Security Receiver Unit (DX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7476 300. Security Control Unit (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7477 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7478 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7479 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7480 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7481 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7482 Alarm Module: Service and Repair Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer control unit-receiver (B). 4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (C). 5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the reverse order of removal. 6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Locations Immobilizer System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Locations > Page 7486 Alarm System Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Programming Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors, the hood and the tailgate are closed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 6. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 9. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Within 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators within 1 to 4 sec, then push the transmitter lock or unlock button again, or the code will not be stored. 13. Within 10 sec, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the keyless receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key. 15. Confirm proper operation with the transmitters. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer control unit-receiver (B). 4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (C). 5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the reverse order of removal. 6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7494 126. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7495 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 69. Security Hood Switch (EX, EX-L; Canada LX) 288. Security Hood Switch (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7496 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7506 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7507 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7508 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7509 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7515 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7516 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7517 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7518 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7519 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7520 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7521 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7522 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7523 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7528 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7529 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7530 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7531 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7532 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7533 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7534 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7535 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7536 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7537 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7538 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7539 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7540 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7541 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7542 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7543 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7544 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7545 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7546 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7547 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7548 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7549 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7550 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7551 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7552 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7553 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Test NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. 1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to reset the transmitter. - If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. - If the locks don't work, go to step 2. 2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. - If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter. - If there is no water damage, go to step 3. 3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button five or six times. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4. 4. Reprogram and register the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, try and program to another vehicle. If still not operating, replace the transmitter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7554 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Transmitter Programming Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors, the hood and the tailgate are closed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 6. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 9. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Within 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators within 1 to 4 sec, then push the transmitter lock or unlock button again, or the code will not be stored. 13. Within 10 sec, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the keyless receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key. 15. Confirm proper operation with the transmitters. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7559 124. Right Side Of Trunk Lid (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7560 100. Driver's Door (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7561 122. Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 7564 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7569 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7570 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7571 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7572 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7573 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7574 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7575 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7576 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7577 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7578 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7579 Cellular Phone: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7580 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7581 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7582 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7583 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7584 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7585 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7586 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7587 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7588 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7589 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7590 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7591 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7592 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7593 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7594 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7595 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7596 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7597 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7598 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7599 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7600 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7601 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7602 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7603 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7604 299. Hands-Free Telephone Control Unit (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7605 Cellular Phone: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 152 (Honda Accessory) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-029 Date: 030606 Campaign - MICU Replacement 03-029 June 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A018771 Product Update: Accord V6 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if you open the trunk and then immediately close it, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify it is eligible by checking one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box: P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747102 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L90 Template ID: 03-029A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7614 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and the positive cable, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (see page 20-16 of the 2003 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). 5. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 6. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 7. Remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 8. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 9. Reconnect the positive and the negative battery cables. 10. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 11. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 12. Make sure all electrical components are working. 13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover, the left kick panel, and the left door sill trim. 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the 1st character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7615 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7616 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign MICU Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-029 Date: 030606 Campaign - MICU Replacement 03-029 June 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A018771 Product Update: Accord V6 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if you open the trunk and then immediately close it, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify it is eligible by checking one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box: P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747102 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L90 Template ID: 03-029A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign MICU Replacement > Page 7622 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and the positive cable, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (see page 20-16 of the 2003 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). 5. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 6. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 7. Remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 8. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 9. Reconnect the positive and the negative battery cables. 10. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 11. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 12. Make sure all electrical components are working. 13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover, the left kick panel, and the left door sill trim. 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the 1st character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign MICU Replacement > Page 7623 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign MICU Replacement > Page 7624 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7630 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7631 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7632 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7633 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7634 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7635 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7636 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7637 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7638 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7639 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7640 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7641 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7642 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7643 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7644 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7645 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7646 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7647 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7648 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7649 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7650 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7651 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7652 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7653 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7654 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7655 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7656 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7657 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7658 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7659 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7660 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7661 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7662 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7663 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7664 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7665 Audio-HVAC Display Panel Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7666 Safety Indicator System - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs Audio-HVAC Display Panel Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs > Page 7669 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Testing and Inspection Safety Indicator Input Test Safety Indicator Input Test 1. Before testing the safety indicator functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, H and P. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, are recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs > Page 7670 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 7. 7. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic function. - If the indicators flash, go to step 8. - If the indicators do not flash, replace the gauge control module. 8. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck the system. - If the symptom is gone, the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If the symptom is still present, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs > Page 7671 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Testing and Inspection Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power/Ground Circuit Testing Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.20 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio-HVAC display panel. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.22 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. - Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage. - Do not work in a dusty or dirty place. - Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work. - Do not touch the circuit board with your bare hands. - Do not work with dirty hands. - Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable. - Do not touch the terminal connector of the flat plate cable with your bare hands. (If you have touched it, wipe it off thoroughly.) 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the upper panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 7674 3. Remove the screws and bolts, disconnect the audio-HVAC display module connectors (A) and the antenna lead (B), then remove the audio-HVAC display module (C). 4. Install the audio-HVAC display module and note these items: - Make sure the disconnected connectors plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is connected properly. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 7675 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Display Panel and Audio Unit Removal/Installation Audio-HVAC Display Panel and Audio Unit Removal/Installation 1. Remove the audio-HVAC display module. 2. Remove the mounting screws and the audio unit (A) from the radio brackets (B). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 7676 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Display Panel Disassembly/Reassembly Audio-HVAC Display Panel Disassembly/Reassembly 1. Remove the audio-HVAC display panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 7677 2. Remove the mounting screws and the covers (A), then disconnect the connectors (B) (Navigation system) from the printed circuit board (C). 3. With navigation system: Remove the mounting screws and display unit (A) from the printed circuit board (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 7678 4. Remove the mounting screws and control knobs (A), then remove the printed circuit board (B). 5. Install the audio unit and printed circuit board in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 7679 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/Clock Replacement Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/Clock Replacement With Navigation 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Remove the two mounting screws. 3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the audio HVAC subdisplay/clock (B). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 07-012 Date: 070216 Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics 07-012 February 16, 2007 Applies To: ALL - with accessory Music Link installed Music Link (For iPod) General Information and Symptom Troubleshooting BACKGROUND Honda Music Link is a Honda accessory designed to let the customer play music from an Apple(R) ipod(R) through the vehicle's audio system. The basic Music Link kit includes the Music Link interface unit, an audio unit bus cable, the Music Link harness, a CD-ROM, and the Quick Reference Guide. The CD-ROM includes a detailed User's Guide and some optional ITS (text-to-speech) software that lets the customer play music by playlist, artist, album, or genre. ^ The CD-ROM is for home computer use only. Do not insert it into a vehicle CD player. ^ Quick Reference Guides, User's Guides, and the latest TTS software versions can be downloaded from http://musiclink.honda.com. ^ For customer assistance and questions regarding TTS software loading, have the customer contact American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department. The GENERAL INFORMATION section of this service bulletin covers these subjects: ^ Music Link iPod Information Resources ^ Resources for Installation Instructions ^ Music Link First-Use Information ^ iPod Reset Procedure Information The TROUBLESHOOTING section includes troubleshooting for these symptoms: ^ Check mark is not shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. ^ Static, or weak or no volume over speakers only in Music Link mode. ^ Music Link has no sound, check mark is shown on the iPod display screen. ^ Music Link has no sound, the disc number and track number flashes on the audio display. ^ Check mark is shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. ^ iPod music and XM radio music play at the same time (Pilot). ^ Music Link will not do Disc 1-4 search functions. ^ Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using (Disc 2) search function. ^ Song/artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using Disc 1-4 search functions. PARTS INFORMATION Bus Harness: P/N 08-8-1H1-10030, H/C 8387060 Music Link Harness: P/N 08-8-1H1-10031, H/C 8387052 2-Port Bus Harness: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7685 P/N 08A31-0F1-000, H/C 7512999 Music Link Interface Unit: P/N 08-8-1H1-10101, H/C 8582603 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. FLAT RATE TIMES Failed Part: P/N 08~8-1H1-10031 H/C 8387052 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer General Information Music Link iPod Information Resources ^ Online at http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech Faq.html ^ Music Link Information Sheet (Honda ServiceNews, March 2006) ^ Music Link Frequently Asked Questions (Honda ServiceNews, March 2006) ^ Quick Reference Guide (supplied in Music Link kit) ^ User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide are available online: http://musiclink.honda.com/Down_Ref.html ^ General information: www.apple.com, then select support. ^ iPod firmware (unit software) version information: www.apple.com, then select Support. ^ To find out what (unit software) is loaded on the iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7686 - Select Settings. - Select About. ^ iPod reset procedure: http://docs.info.apple.com/ article.html?artnum=61705 Resources for Installation Instructions Online, enter the model and year, enter the keyword MUSIC LINK, and select the appropriate installation instructions. Music Link First-Use Information After installing the Music Link kit, switch the audio unit to AUX (auxiliary) mode and verify the audio unit displays CDC EJECT or CD4 EJECT. Connect the iPod to the Music Link connector. Make sure the check mark is displayed on the iPod display screen and that you hear music. ^ The Music Link disc supplied in the kit contains the TTS software and the User's Guide. It is for home computer use only. ^ The customer needs to load the TTS software/User's Guide on his/her home computer in order for all of the search functions (Disc 1-4) to operate. ^ Only the shuffle functions (Disc 5-6) will operate without the TTS software installed (see the Quick Reference Guide). ^ For the search functions (Disc 1-4) to operate properly, TTS software must be run after any songs are changed (added or removed) on the iPod. ^ You can change the Disc position on most audio units by using the Disc - (preset number 5) and Disc + (preset number 6). Always refer to the User's Guide for proper operation. iPod Reset Procedure Information The iPod reset procedure applies to these Apple iPod models: ^ Fifth-generation or later iPod (also known as iPod with video) ^ iPod nano(R) ^ iPod with color display (iPod photo) ^ iPod mini(R) NOTE: To view this information online, log on to http//docs.info.apple.com/article.html?artnum=6 1705 To reset the customer's iPod: 1. Cycle the Hold switch on and off (slide it to Hold, then turn it off again). 2. Press and hold the Menu and Select buttons for 6-10 seconds until the Apple logo appears. NOTE: If you are having difficulty resetting the iPod, set it on a flat surface. As you press the Select button, make sure your finger does not touch any part of the click wheel. Also make sure that you press the Menu button toward the outside of the click wheel and not near the center. 3. If the above steps do not work, try connecting the iPod to a power adapter and plug the power adapter into an electrical outlet, or connect the iPod to your computer. Make sure the computer is on and isn't set to sleep mode. BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING ^ Before troubleshooting, ask the customer these questions: - What is the main issue? - What model and generation iPod do you have? Refer to www.apple.com. - What version iPod firmware (unit software) is loaded? ^ Go to the Main Menu. ^ Select Settings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7687 ^ Select About. - What iTunes version are you using? - What TTS software version is installed? ^ Make sure you have the customer's iPod for troubleshooting. ^ Turn on the iPod, and verify its battery is fully charged before testing. If the battery is low, the iPod will not "make up" when connected. ^ Some iPod protective cases cause the Music Link iPod connector to be installed crookedly or not fully engaged. Be sure to remove the protective case before troubleshooting. ^ Go to http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech Faq.html to view technical FAQs and troubleshooting. TROUBLESHOOTING Check mark is not shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. NOTE: Remove the iPod protective case, if installed. 1. At the Music Link interface unit, make sure both connectors are fully engaged, and the cables do not have any broken or bent pins. NOTE: To release the Music Link interface unit connectors, you must pull back on the lock sleeves. Does either cable have the connector partially disengaged, or are any pins broken or bent? Yes - Reconnect or replace the loose or damaged cable. No - Go to step 2. 2. At the audio unit, make sure the cable connectors and the connector pin fits are tight. Also check that the optional Y-bus harness (if installed) connector and connector pin fits are tight. Do the cable connections and pins fit properly? Yes - Replace the Music Link interface unit and the cable. No - Repair the faulty connection at the audio unit. Static, or weak or no volume over speakers only in Music Link mode. NOTE: Remove iPod protective case, if installed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7688 1. At the iPod, make sure the iPod connector is fully engaged. Is the iPod connector fully engaged? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Properly connect the iPod connector and retest. Replace the cable if the connector is loose or damaged. 2. Disconnect the customer's iPod. 3. Connect headphones to the iPod, and listen to the sound quality. Is the sound quality normal in the headphones? Yes - Go to step 4. No - There is static from the customer's uploaded music. If the volume is weak or low, verify the iTunes sound level setting. 4. Connect a known-good iPod and retest. NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. Is the sound quality normal over the speakers? Yes - The vehicle is functioning normally. Do an iPod reset on the customer's iPod and retest. If the problem does not go away, have the service advisor explain to the customer that the vehicle is operating properly and advise the customer to: ^ Install the latest iPod firmware. ^ Consult the general information at www.apple.com. This is not a comprehensive list, only a suggested starting point for the customer to troubleshoot the iPod. No - Go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the known-good iPod. 6. Do a vehicle battery cable reset: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 7. Reconnect the customer's iPod and retest. Is the sound quality normal over the speakers? Yes It is an intermittent audio unit/Music Link failure, and the system is OK at this time. No - Do the "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD4 mode" troubleshooting. Music Link has no sound, check mark is shown on iPod display screen. 1. At the Music Link interface unit, make sure both connectors are fully engaged, and the cables do not have any broken or bent pins. NOTE: To release the Music Link interface unit connectors, you must pull back on the lock sleeves. Does either cable have the connector partially disengaged, or are any pins broken or bent? Yes - Reconnect or replace the loose or damaged cable. No - Go to step 2. 2. At the audio unit, make sure the cable connectors and the connector pin fits are tight. Also check that the optional Y-bus harness (if installed) connector and connector pin fits are tight. Do the cable connections and pins fit properly? Yes - Substitute a known-good iPod and retest. If the sound is normal, do an iPod reset, and retest. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7689 NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. No - Repair the faulty connection at the audio unit. Music Link has no sound, the disc number and track number flashes on the audio display. Disconnect and reconnect the iPod, then retest. Does Music Link operate normally? Yes - The iPod connector pins are loose. Replace the cable if the connector is damaged. No - There is a firmware error. Advise the customer to install the latest iPod firmware (unit software). Check mark is shown on iPod display screen, radio does not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. 1. Make sure the audio unit works in all other modes. Does the audio unit work in all other modes? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Do a vehicle battery cable reset, then retest: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 2. Remove the Music Link interface unit, and verify the software version on the unit label is SW 1.06 or higher. Is the software version SW 1.06 or higher? Yes - Do the "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode" troubleshooting. No - Replace the Music Link interface unit and iPod cable. iPod music and XM radio music play at the same time (Pilot). There is a software compatibility issue in the XM receiver unit. Refer to S/B 06-061, XM(R) Satellite Radio and Audio Accessories Play at the Same Time for repair information. Music Link will not do Disc 1-4 search functions. NOTE: TTS software must be loaded on the customer's home computer before Disc 1-4 search functions work. 1. Use a known-good iPod to verify that the search functions (Disc 1-4) work. NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. Does the known-good iPod do search functions (Disc 1-4)? Yes - Verify with the customer if the TTS software is loaded. If the customer needs assistance, refer the customer to American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department for assistance with TTS software loading problems (see page 6 of this bulletin). No - Do the battery cable reset, then retest: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 2. If the problem does not go away, do "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode" troubleshooting. Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using (Disc 2) search function. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 7690 Make sure the "Compilations" setting is switched off in the settings menu on the customer's iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. - Select Settings. - See Compilation. Is the "Compilations" setting switched off? Yes - There is a TTS software program error. Tell the customer to rerun the TTS software. No - Change the "Compilations" setting on the customer's iPod to off. Song/Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using Disc 1-4 search functions. Remind the customer that the TTS software must be run after any songs are changed on the iPod, and advise them to run the TTS software and retest the iPod search functions. Explain to the customer that once the TTS software has run: ^ If the iPod functions properly, there was an intermittent TTS software program error. ^ If the iPod does not function properly, direct the customer to contact Customer Service for assistance with TTS software loading problems. CUSTOMER INFORMATION NEEDED BEFORE CALLING HONDA'S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT Print this page, and give it to the customer if they are experiencing a ITS software-related issue. Direct them to answer the questions, then contact American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department at (800) 999-1009. Customer Information Before calling customer service, go to http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech_Faq.html and view the technical FAQs and troubleshooting. Also, go to www.apple.com, select support, and view the technical FAQs and troubleshooting. Please have the following information ready when contacting customer service: ^ What is the main issue? ^ What type of iPod do you have? Refer to www.apple.com. ^ What version iPod firmware (unit software) is loaded? To find out what firmware (unit software) is loaded on the iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. - Select Settings. - Select About. ^ What version iTunes are you using on your home computer? ^ When you connect your iPod to the vehicle's Music Link connector, is the check mark displayed on your iPod display screen? ^ What type of computer do you have (Mac or PC)? ^ What operating system are you using? ^ Have you loaded the ITS software on your home computer? ^ Do you run the ITS software every time you connect your iPod to your home computer? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Diagrams 306. Video Monitor Console (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7698 DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair 06-001 February 26, 2010 Applies To: 1998 and Later Models - ALL Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In-Warranty Exchange and Out-of-Warranty Repair (Supersedes 06-601, dated March 4, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR, the address for Pioneer Electronics Service was changed.* COVERAGE This bulletin applies to all Honda audio units, CD players/changers, cassette tape players, navigation units, and rear entertainment system (RES) units, both in warranty and out of warranty. COMPONENT REPLACEMENT POLICY Use only remanufactured components for warranty repairs on customer vehicles. Follow the warranty information and procedures given in this service bulletin. ^ Remanufactured audio, navigation, and RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. ^ Use new components to repair new, unsold vehicles. ^ A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. ^ You must receive authorization from your District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM) before ordering a new component. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: From the Flat Rate Manual Flat Rate Time: From the Flat Rate Manual Failed Part: Use the RM part number from the repair order without the RM (example: 08A06-341-110) Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Symptom Code: From Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual Part used for repair: Use the RM part number from the repair order (example: 08A06-341-110RM) IN-WARRANTY DIAGNOSIS Service Advisor: Interview the customer to get as much information as possible. Information like where and when the problem occurs is vital to your diagnosis. This information also helps you to determine if the audio, navigation, or RES system is operating normally, or if a problem exists. Write the complaint on the repair order. NOTE: For CD/DVD related problems, you must verify if the customer used discs with adhesive labels. Service Technician: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7699 1. Print out the appropriate system worksheet from an Interactive Network (iN) workstation. ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on (ISIS) Service Publications. ^ Click on SEARCH BY PUBLICATION. ^ Click on Job Aids. ^ Click on Audio System Worksheet, Navigation System Worksheet, or Rear Entertainment System Worksheet. 2. Duplicate and confirm the problem using the customer information written on the repair order or have the customer demonstrate the problem, then write down the results on the worksheet. Using the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX or the DTC INDEX (if applicable) in the applicable service manual, find the symptom that matches the customers complaint, and follow the diagnostic procedure: ^ Refer to the appropriate section in the service manual, or ^ From the iN main menu: - Click on SERVICE. - Click on ISIS (Service Publications). - Click on SEARCH BY VEHICLE. - Enter the model and the model year. - Enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES, and the DTC (if applicable) - Select the appropriate Service Bulletin, ServiceNews article, or Symptom Troubleshooting from the list. 3. Repair the vehicle according to your diagnosis, then confirm the repair by trying to duplicate the customer's original complaint, or check to see if the DTC returns: ^ If the problem is gone, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the problem is still there, go to step 4. 4. Replace the audio/navigation/RES unit with a remanufactured unit: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7700 ^ For warranty repairs, go to the IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE procedure. ^ For vehicle service contract (VSC) and certified used car (CUC) repairs, call. ^ For goodwill repairs, contact your dealership's District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM). IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE Service Technician: NOTE: ^ Use the iN to order a remanufactured audio, navigation, or RES unit. Do not call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. ^ A Tech Line reference number is not required to submit the order. Check Yes, and enter the Reference Number only when there is a preexisting Tech Line contact. 1. With your completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet, go to an iN workstation. 2. From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE, then click on AUDIO, then select Warranty Audio Order. 3. Select the model, year, and keyword (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES) for the vehicle you are working on, then click on Search. 4. Review all displayed publications for additional repair information. If you cannot repair the problem, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7701 5. Click Warranty Audio Order to view the Warranty Audio Order form. 6. Enter the VIN and the mileage, then click the Submit button to view the Warranty Audio Order form. Use the completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet to help you answer the questions on the Warranty Audio Order form. Questions with a red asterisk (*) are required fields that you must answer to submit the form. Make sure the information is complete (17-digit VIN, etc.). This information is critical to the remanufacturing process. Screen # 2 of the form contains the problem description, condition information, and shared functions. Fill this section out with as much information as possible. Select one part number from the list provided, then click Submit. It is your responsibility to ensure the correct part number is selected based on color and application information. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7702 NOTE: Once you submit your order, you can track it using the Warranty Audio VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. For details, go to WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS in this service bulletin. 7. You will receive a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit packed in a reusable shipping box. Save this box and the packing materials. You must return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this box. Otherwise your dealership risks being billed a core loss charge, ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 8. Remove the failed audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. 9. Install the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate installation procedure from the list. 10. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Also be sure to transfer all of the mounting brackets to the replacement unit. Failure to do this may result in dash squeaks and rattles. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs it for diagnosis and testing. ^ Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core. Customer media (CDs, CD magazines, DVDs, DVD-As, cassette tapes, etc.) will be properly removed by the supplier at the point of tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealer. Make sure the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not disassembled! If the core is disassembled, your dealership will be debited a core loss charge ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 11. Put the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in the same box that the remanufactured unit came in. NOTE: If you do not return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this same box, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. Parts Manager: 12. The Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form you submitted is kept on the iN for 60 days. Print out a copy to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on Transactions. ^ Click on Advanced Search, and enter a date range. ^ Click on Filtered by Service. ^ Under Transaction Description, click on Warranty Audio Order, then go back to the top of the page and click on Search. ^ Scroll down to the appropriate VIN, then select it to view the form. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 13. Print out a copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7703 ^ Click on Returns and Surplus. ^ Click on Audio Core Return. ^ Select the appropriate VIN to view the Update Core Return information screen. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 14. Place the printed copies of the Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form and the Core Return Update Acknowledgement into the core return box with the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core. NOTE: If you return a failed audio/navigation/RES core without the proper forms, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. 15. Ship the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core to the appropriate location by using the prepaid shipping label that came with the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit. NOTE: If the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not received at the specified address within 30 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, your warranty claim will be debited, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. If you know that you cannot return the core within 30 days, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group, and ask for an extension. ^ If you call for an extension and the core is not received within 60 days from the order date, you will be debited the full amount of the warranty claim. ^ If you do not call for an extension, and the core is received between 31 and 60 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, a $250 late core charge will be assessed. WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Here is a list of answers to the most frequently asked questions about the warranty audio order program: Question: When do I use the warranty audio order program? Answer: Use the program when you are replacing an audio/navigation/RES unit under warranty (including goodwill) that has an internal failure. NOTE: The customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is removed by the supplier at tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealership. Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. Remanufactured audio/navigation/RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. New components should be used to repair new, unsold vehicles. A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. Your DPSM must authorize ordering a new component. Question: How do I order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: For a warranty replacement, use the ordering information IN WARRANTY EXCHANGE. For goodwill repair, contact your DPSM. For a non-warranty repair, see OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR. Question: Who do I call for questions on the Warranty Audio Order Program? Answer: For administrative questions, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7704 Question: Who do I call if I need help diagnosing the problem or if I have technical questions about the unit? Answer: If you cannot find the answers in the appropriate service manual, service bulletins, or ServiceNews articles on iN, create a Tech Line access code, then call Tech Line: 1. From the iN main menu, select SERVICE. 2. Select Tech Line. A dropdown menu appears, then select Tech Line. The ISIS main screen appears. 3. Select SEARCH BY VEHICLE, and enter any vehicle with any keyword like NAVI, AUDIO, or RES. 4. At the top of the screen you will see this statement: If you cannot resolve the problem with the information below, then click Tech Line. Select Tech Line. 5. The Tech Line access code screen appears. Fill in all the required fields, then select SUBMIT. 6. Have the access number ready when you call Tech Line. Question: Do I need a Tech Line reference number to order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: No. Question: What year and model audio/navigation/RES unit can I order through the warranty audio order program? Answer: Most current models are available through the vehicle's standard warranty period. If your application is not available, you will receive a message instructing you to call the Re manufactured Parts Dealer Service Group at 888-997-7278. Question: How can I track my order once I submit it? Answer: To track your order, go the Warranty Audio Order VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. 1. From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. 2. Click on Parts Ordering. 3. Click on Audio VIN Inquiry. 4. Enter a date in the All Orders Accepted Since box, then click on Submit. The AUDIO VIN INQUIRY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT screen appears, listing orders by VIN, ORD REF (Order Reference), STAT (Status), SHIP DATE, SHIPPER, and PART NUMBER. The status of your order is displayed by one of these codes: Codes generated by RPO Tech Line: ^ PEND - Your order is waiting to be processed by RPO Tech Line. ^ HOLD - Your order is waiting for additional dealer diagnosis. ^ ERR - Your order caused an error; call. ^ DENY - RPO Tech Line denied your order; call. ^ APPR - RPO Tech Line approved your order and forwarded it to AHM Parts. Codes generated by AHM Parts Division: ^ BO/TOS - Your order is on back order or is temporarily out of stock. ^ CAN/BOC - Your order has been cancelled contact your assigned parts center. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7705 ^ ALO/BOA - Your order has been allocated, but not released for shipment. ^ REL/BOR - Your order has been picked, packed, and shipped. ^ INV - Your order has been invoiced to your dealer parts account. CORE RETURN INFORMATION Service Technician: 1. If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, or cassette tape) is stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and attach it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the media, and mail it back to your dealership. 2. Use the pre paid shipping label. Each audio supplier provides a prepaid shipping label with the remanufactured audio unit. Return the core using this label to ensure it is received at the appropriate location for credit. Use the pre paid shipping labels to return audio cores to authorized locations only; do not use them for any other purpose. If you need additional prepaid shipping labels, contact Remanufactured Parts Operations. ^ Complete the shipping label with your dealership information. ^ Pack one audio unit per box, and use a separate shipping label for each one. ^ On the line requesting Your Internal Reference Information, enter YOUR DEALER NUMBER and the WARRANTY CLAIM NUMBER. 3. On the repair order, write down the warranty claim number, the original part number, the serial numbers from both the faulty and remanufactured units, and the return tracking number. 4. Ship the faulty unit in the same box the remanufactured unit came in. Make sure you include this required paperwork: ^ A copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement from the iN. ^ A copy of the warranty audio order. NOTE: When the Remanufacturing Center gets the faulty unit, your warranty audio order will be updated to indicate that the core was received. If the core is received 31-60 days from the order date, and you have been debited a core loss charge, your dealership will be credited back, less a $250 late fee. OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, AND RES UNITS PRODUCED IN 1998 OR LATER) NOTE: If you are making a repair or exchange because of a service bulletin or service campaign, do not use OUT-OF-WARRANTY procedures. Refer to IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE for more information. Service Advisor: 1. Give your customer an estimate for repairing the unit (see step 6), plus the labor cost to replace it. For an Alpine unit, your customer has the option of contacting Alpine Electronics directly. Alpine's customer service number is 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304. Service Technician: 2. Remove the failed unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7706 ^ Online, enter keyword AUDIO, NAVI, or RES, and select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, navigation DVD, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there. The manufacturer will remove and return it. 3. Obtain an Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form, and complete the Technician section.To obtain the form, do this: ^ On ISIS, click on Technical Library, then click on Job Aids. ^ Select the applicable form from the list, and print it out: - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Audio System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Navigation System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Rear Entertainment System Component Repair Form Parts Manager: 4. Complete the parts manager's section of the Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Make sure you include your name, department, and dealership phone number on the form. 5. Identify the manufacturer. Units sent to the wrong manufacturer may not be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Look for the number code on the face of the unit. ^ If the unit has no number code on its face, check the label on the unit housing, and compare the first two or three letters of the radio reference number (or the audio unit model number) to this list: Alpine - CM, CD, MR, or MF Clarion - PH Fujitsu Ten - CE or SD Panasonic - CQ or CR Pioneer KEH or DEH 6. Contact the manufacturer (see step 9) to request an estimate for the cost of the repair plus shipping. 7. Complete the required paperwork: ^ Paying by check - Make a dealership check out to the manufacturer for the cost of repair and return shipping. Make sure to include the check number on the form. NOTE: For all Panasonic products, make your check out to Komtec Electronics. ^ Paying by credit card (Visa or Mastercard only) - When you use a credit card, fill in all of these fields on the component repair form: - Credit card number - Credit card expiration date Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7707 - The name as it appears on the credit card - Signature (authorized card holder) - Phone number - Authorized charge amount NOTE: If you send in a faulty unit without a check or complete credit card information, the manufacturer may send it back to you unrepaired, or they may repair it and send it back to you C.O.D. ^ Print two copies of the completed Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Keep one copy with the repair order, and include the other copy with the faulty unit when you send it to the manufacturer. 8. Carefully pack the faulty unit and the paperwork in a suitable box, and label the box clearly. You are responsible for lost or damaged units; keep all shipping documents and insurance receipts. 9. Ship the faulty unit to the appropriate manufacturer via UPS. Alpine Electronics of America c/o Standard Radio Engineering Corp. 2012 Abalone Ave., Unit D Torrance, CA 90501 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304 Bose Corporation Automotive Systems Division-Service Framingham, MA 01701-9168 800-231-2673 S3 Clarion Factory Service Center 241 Beaver Rd. Walton, KY 41094 800-347-8667 (You must get authorization from Clarion before shipping units) Fujitsu Ten 19600 5. Vermont Ave. Torrance, CA 90502 800-237-5413 FTH Group Inc. (Kenwood Accessory Parts) 16685 E. Johnson Dr. City of Industry, CA 91745 626-333-2435 (You must get an RMA authorization number from www.fthgroupinc.com; from the home page, select Consumer Products) Komtec Electronics (Panasonic) 6590 Darin Way Cypress, CA 90630 714-903-3300 (Make sure your check is made out to Komtec) * Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc. 1925 E. Dominguez St. Long Beach, CA 90801 800-553-3756* Visteon c/o Model Electronics 615 E. Crescent Ave. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7708 Ramsey, NJ 07446 800-433-9657 (Visteon offers an open line of credit. Call their 800 number to establish an account.) NOTE: ^ The manufacturer will repair the unit and ship it back within 5-7 working days, via UPS ground prepaid or 2nd Day Air (whichever you requested). Do not forget to include the shipping cost in your dealership payment. Units damaged by misuse or mishandling cannot be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Each manufacturer's guarantee for the repair differs. To confirm the repair guarantee, contact the manufacturer using the phone number listed above. 10. To check on the status of your repair order, call the manufacturer. If your customer has any further questions or concerns, have them call Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009. NOTE: A damaged unit may need extra repair. If so, the manufacturer will call you with an estimate of any added charges. ^ If you accept the estimate, mail a dealership check for the additional amount to the manufacturer, authorize the increased amount to be applied to the credit card payment, or have the manufacturer ship the unit back to you, and you pay the difference upon arrival (C.O.D.). ^ If you reject the estimate, the faulty unit will be returned to you along with a refund. However, you will be charged $30.00 (C.O.D.) for diagnosis, shipping, and handling. The unit will be shipped back to you, via UPS Ground. COMPLETING THE OUT-OF-WARRANTY/NEW REPLACEMENT AUDIO SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR FORM Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7709 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7710 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7711 NOTE: It is very important that you fill out this form fully and accurately. An accurate explanation of the problem and conditions helps the manufacturer to duplicate the problem, speeding the repair, and reducing the number of No Trouble Found" (NTF) units. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 7712 DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins No Reman Program For I-VES (R) SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2003 TITLE: No Reman Program for i-VES APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord, 1999-03 Odyssey, 2003 Pilot SERVICE TIP: If you're doing repairs on an accessory DVD- or VCR-based i-VES (R), keep in mind there's no remanufacturing program available. If an i-VES component needs repair or replacement, order and install new parts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7713 305. DVD Player Unit (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7718 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7719 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7720 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7721 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7722 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7723 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7724 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7725 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7726 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7727 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7728 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7729 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7730 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7731 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7732 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7733 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7734 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7735 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7736 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7737 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7738 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7739 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7740 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7741 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7742 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7743 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7744 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7745 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7746 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7747 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7748 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7749 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7750 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7751 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7752 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7753 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 157-0 (V6: EX-L) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Diagrams 205. Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS Antenna Removal/Installation 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Remove the GPS antenna (A). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Diagrams Navigation Display: Diagrams (EX-L) (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations Navigation Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Roof And Trunk (4-door) Relay And Control Unit Locations - Roof And Trunk (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7768 Navigation System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7769 238. Middle Of Rear Shelf (EX-L: Navigation) 247. Behind Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7770 250. Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7771 Navigation Module: Diagrams 184. Navigation Sub Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) 229. Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7772 230. Navigation Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7773 Navigation Module: Service and Repair Navigation Unit Removal Installation NOTE: If the navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a map match must be done. 1. Remove the navigation unit from the trunk room. 2. Remove the navigation unit bracket (B) from the passenger's seat. 3. Remove the bracket from the navigation unit (C). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for CD Changer: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject CD Changer: Customer Interest Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject 03-017 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord Without Navigation System - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Factory-Installed, 6-Disc, In-Dash CD Changer Does Not Load, Play, or Eject (Supersedes 03-017, dated April 8, 2003) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The factory-installed, 6-disc, in-dash CD changer does not do one or more of these functions: ^ Load CDs ^ Play CDs ^ Eject CDs [CD(s) are stuck inside] PROBABLE CAUSE Faulty audio unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the audio unit. Refer to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair. If a customer calls ahead to schedule an appointment, and the vehicle is in the affected VIN range, order the remanufactured audio unit right away so it is available when the customer comes in. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for CD Changer: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 7784 PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: These audio units mount to the non-navigation audio-HVAC display module (with and without climate control). WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 010150 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 39175-SDA-A11 H/C 7137268 Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Contention Code: From the Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual. Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Go to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair, for guidance on how to get the remanufactured audio unit. 2. Write down your customer's radio station presets. 3. Remove the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the faulty audio unit from the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281). 5. Transfer the left and right brackets from the faulty audio unit to the remanufactured audio unit. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for CD Changer: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 7785 NOTE: If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, leave them there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs them for diagnosis and testing. ^ If you try to remove them, you would damage the unit. ^ The manufacturer will send back the faulty unit un-repaired if you damage the unit while trying to remove the CD(s). 6. If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and stick it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the stuck CD(s) and mail them back to your dealership. 7. Reinstall the audio-HVAC display module. 8. Enter the anti-theft code and your customer's radio station presets. 9. Make sure all of the functions of the audio unit and HVAC work properly. 10. Replace the sticker on your customer's anti-theft radio identification card with one of the new stickers that shows the anti-theft code. Apply the other sticker that shows the anti-theft code onto the vehicle history file copy of the repair order. 11. Remove all old serial number stickers from the side of the glove box or inside the center console. Then apply the new sticker that shows only the serial number to the side of the glove box. 12. Return the faulty audio unit to the parts department. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for CD Changer: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject CD Changer: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject 03-017 May 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord Without Navigation System - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Factory-Installed, 6-Disc, In-Dash CD Changer Does Not Load, Play, or Eject (Supersedes 03-017, dated April 8, 2003) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The factory-installed, 6-disc, in-dash CD changer does not do one or more of these functions: ^ Load CDs ^ Play CDs ^ Eject CDs [CD(s) are stuck inside] PROBABLE CAUSE Faulty audio unit. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the audio unit. Refer to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair. If a customer calls ahead to schedule an appointment, and the vehicle is in the affected VIN range, order the remanufactured audio unit right away so it is available when the customer comes in. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for CD Changer: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 7791 PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: These audio units mount to the non-navigation audio-HVAC display module (with and without climate control). WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 010150 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 39175-SDA-A11 H/C 7137268 Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Contention Code: From the Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual. Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Go to S/B 98-019, Audio Unit In-Warranty Exchange/Out-of-Warranty Repair, for guidance on how to get the remanufactured audio unit. 2. Write down your customer's radio station presets. 3. Remove the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the faulty audio unit from the audio-HVAC display module (see page 22-281). 5. Transfer the left and right brackets from the faulty audio unit to the remanufactured audio unit. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for CD Changer: > 03-017 > May > 03 > Audio System - CD Changer Won't Load/Play/Eject > Page 7792 NOTE: If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, leave them there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs them for diagnosis and testing. ^ If you try to remove them, you would damage the unit. ^ The manufacturer will send back the faulty unit un-repaired if you damage the unit while trying to remove the CD(s). 6. If CD(s) are stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and stick it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the stuck CD(s) and mail them back to your dealership. 7. Reinstall the audio-HVAC display module. 8. Enter the anti-theft code and your customer's radio station presets. 9. Make sure all of the functions of the audio unit and HVAC work properly. 10. Replace the sticker on your customer's anti-theft radio identification card with one of the new stickers that shows the anti-theft code. Apply the other sticker that shows the anti-theft code onto the vehicle history file copy of the repair order. 11. Remove all old serial number stickers from the side of the glove box or inside the center console. Then apply the new sticker that shows only the serial number to the side of the glove box. 12. Return the faulty audio unit to the parts department. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Tuner > Component Information > Description and Operation Radio Tuner: Description and Operation Radio Theft Protection On EX and EX-V6 models Your vehicle's audio system will disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, you must enter a specific five-digit code using the preset bars or the TUNE knob. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five-digit, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible. You should have received a card that lists your audio system code number and serial number. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio system's serial number in this Owner's Manual. If you should happen to lose the card, you must obtain the code number from a Honda dealer. To do this, you will need the system's serial number. If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see "CODE" in the frequency display the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is located on the radio code card included in your Owner's Manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing. If the code card is lost, a Honda dealer can access your code with the your radio's serial number. To access the serial number, turn the radio on. It must display "CODE", then turn the radio off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and power buttons at the same time, then quickly release. You will have to store your favorite stations on each side of the preset bars (1 - 6) after the system begins working Your original settings were lost when power was disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Tuner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7797 Radio Tuner: Service and Repair If you should happen to lose the card, you must obtain the code number from a Honda dealer. To do this, you will need the system's serial numbers. If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see "CODE" in the frequency display the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is located on the radio code card included in your Owner's Manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing. If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have ten tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in ten attempts, you must then leave the system on for one hour before trying again. You will have to store your favorite stations on each side of the preset bars (1 - 6) after the system begins working Your original settings were lost when power was disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Remote Switch: Locations Audio System Component Location Index (2-door M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7801 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7802 142. Radio Remote Switch (LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Remote Control: Testing and Inspection Radio Remote Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly. 2. Remove the 4P connector (A) from the radio remote switch (B) 3. Remove the two mounting screws and the switch. 4. Measure resistance between the No.3 and No.4 terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the remote switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams Speaker: Diagrams 75. Speaker; Driver's Door 76. Speaker, Front Passenger's Door 77. Speaker, Left Rear Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7809 78. Speaker, Right Rear 84. Tweeter, Left 85. Tweeter, Right Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7810 Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker Replacement Front Speaker 1. Remove the door panel. NOTE: If you pull the speaker out too far from the door, you will damage the lower clips (C). 2. Pull the speaker (A) straight out, just enough to release the upper clips. Then lift the speaker straight up to release the lower clips (C). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the speaker. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Tweeter 1. Remove the tweeter speaker grille (A). 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the tweeter. 3. Remove the tweeter speaker grille from the tweeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7811 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Rear Speaker 1. Remove the rear speaker cover by prying straight up to release the clips. 2. Remove the four mounting bolts from the rear speaker (A). 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the speaker. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly Alarm Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly 05-010 July 22, 2005 Applies To: 2003-05 Accord DX and LX With Accessory Security System - ALL Accessory Security System Triggers Unexpectedly (Supersedes 05-010, dated April 15, 2005, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The accessory security system triggers unexpectedly (the horn sounds and the parking lights flash) when you open the door, or when you insert the key into the ignition switch, or while driving. PROBABLE CAUSE A software problem in the security system control unit (control unit). *CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the control unit and the security system microphone. NOTE: The microphone must be replaced because control units are matched to their microphones during the manufacturing process. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems. PARTS INFORMATION Security System Control Unit with Microphone: P/N 08E51-SDA-101R1, H/C 8028854C* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 050100 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 08E51-SDA-100A H/C 7224678 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-010A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the control unit and the security system microphone: ^ Refer to the 2003, 2004, or 2005 accessory security system installation instructions, or ^ Online, select subject Accessory Installation Instructions & Related Info, and choose 2003, 2004, or 2005 Accord 2- and 4-Door Security System Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly > Page 7821 (DX, LX) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly Alarm Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly 05-010 July 22, 2005 Applies To: 2003-05 Accord DX and LX With Accessory Security System - ALL Accessory Security System Triggers Unexpectedly (Supersedes 05-010, dated April 15, 2005, to update the information marked with asterisks) SYMPTOM The accessory security system triggers unexpectedly (the horn sounds and the parking lights flash) when you open the door, or when you insert the key into the ignition switch, or while driving. PROBABLE CAUSE A software problem in the security system control unit (control unit). *CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the control unit and the security system microphone. NOTE: The microphone must be replaced because control units are matched to their microphones during the manufacturing process. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems. PARTS INFORMATION Security System Control Unit with Microphone: P/N 08E51-SDA-101R1, H/C 8028854C* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 050100 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 08E51-SDA-100A H/C 7224678 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-010A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Replace the control unit and the security system microphone: ^ Refer to the 2003, 2004, or 2005 accessory security system installation instructions, or ^ Online, select subject Accessory Installation Instructions & Related Info, and choose 2003, 2004, or 2005 Accord 2- and 4-Door Security System Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm Module: > 05-010 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Triggers Unexpectedly > Page 7827 (DX, LX) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7828 Alarm Module: Locations 42. In Steering Column Cover 198. Under Left Side Of Dash (Honda Accy.: DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7829 Alarm Module: Diagrams 177. Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver 297. Security Receiver Unit (DX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7830 300. Security Control Unit (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7831 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7832 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7833 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7834 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7835 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7836 Alarm Module: Service and Repair Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer control unit-receiver (B). 4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (C). 5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the reverse order of removal. 6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-029 Date: 030606 Campaign - MICU Replacement 03-029 June 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A018771 Product Update: Accord V6 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if you open the trunk and then immediately close it, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify it is eligible by checking one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box: P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747102 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L90 Template ID: 03-029A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7845 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and the positive cable, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (see page 20-16 of the 2003 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). 5. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 6. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 7. Remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 8. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 9. Reconnect the positive and the negative battery cables. 10. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 11. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 12. Make sure all electrical components are working. 13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover, the left kick panel, and the left door sill trim. 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the 1st character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7846 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7847 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-029 Date: 030606 Campaign - MICU Replacement 03-029 June 6, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A018771 Product Update: Accord V6 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if you open the trunk and then immediately close it, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify it is eligible by checking one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box: P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747102 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L90 Template ID: 03-029A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7853 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and the positive cable, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (see page 20-16 of the 2003 Accord V6 Service Manual Supplement). 5. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 6. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 7. Remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 8. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 9. Reconnect the positive and the negative battery cables. 10. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 11. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 12. Make sure all electrical components are working. 13. Install the driver's dashboard under cover, the left kick panel, and the left door sill trim. 14. Center-punch a completion mark above the 1st character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7854 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 03-029 > Jun > 03 > Campaign - MICU Replacement > Page 7855 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Diagrams 205. Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7867 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7868 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7869 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7870 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7876 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7877 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7878 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 7879 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7880 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7881 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7882 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7883 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7884 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations Navigation Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Roof And Trunk (4-door) Relay And Control Unit Locations - Roof And Trunk (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7888 Navigation System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7889 238. Middle Of Rear Shelf (EX-L: Navigation) 247. Behind Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7890 250. Middle Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7891 Navigation Module: Diagrams 184. Navigation Sub Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) 229. Navigation Display Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7892 230. Navigation Unit (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7893 Navigation Module: Service and Repair Navigation Unit Removal Installation NOTE: If the navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a map match must be done. 1. Remove the navigation unit from the trunk room. 2. Remove the navigation unit bracket (B) from the passenger's seat. 3. Remove the bracket from the navigation unit (C). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7899 126. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7900 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 69. Security Hood Switch (EX, EX-L; Canada LX) 288. Security Hood Switch (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7901 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7906 124. Right Side Of Trunk Lid (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7907 100. Driver's Door (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7908 122. Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 7911 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Remote Switch: Locations Audio System Component Location Index (2-door M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7915 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7916 142. Radio Remote Switch (LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the vehicle. To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with towing hooks (A) and tie down hook slots (B). The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hook slots can be used to secure the vehicle to truck. Wheel Lift Equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lifts them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the vehicle. Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do the following: Manual Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Shift the transmission in Neutral. Automatic Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Start the engine. - Shift to position, then E/N position. - Turn off the engine. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7921 It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). NOTE - Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed. - Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation Voice Activation System: Technical Service Bulletins Navigation/Voice Recognition System Operation 02-064 December 21, 2004 Applies To: *2003-05 Accord - ALL *2005 Accord Hybrid - ALL* PDI of the Accord Voice Recognition DVD Navigation System (Supersedes 02-064, PDI of the Voice Recognition DVD Navigation System, dated September 16, 2003) Updated information is shown with black bars and asterisks. BACKGROUND This bulletin provides information for Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI), including testing, of the navigation system. These topics are covered: ^ Navigation System Controls ^ Voice Control System Operation ^ Navigation System Operation ^ Navigation System Setup at PDI ^ Map Coverage Areas For more detailed information on system operation, refer to the Navigation System Owner's Manual. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None; these procedures are considered part of normal PDI. Skill level: Repair Technician SCREEN - All selections and instructions are displayed on the screen. This touch-screen display uses infrared beams that are interrupted by your finger to determine what selection has been made. Because of this, you do not need to push on the screen; all you do is touch your selection. If the system doesn't accept your selection (nothing happens), try moving your finger slightly on the selection; do not push against the screen. You can also use the joystick or the voice control system to make a selection. NOTE: Avoid using anything other than your fingers on the screen. Sharp objects can damage the touch-sensitive membrane. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation > Page 7926 UPPER DISPLAY - This display provides the time and basic audio and climate control settings, even when the navigation system is not being used. The time is set from received GPS signals and is accurate to within a second. This time can be adjusted in Setup. See the owner's manual for information on the audio and climate control portions of the display. MENU button - Press this button to change the display from the current screen to the main menu. When en route to a destination, press this button to change routing parameters. MAP/GUIDE button - Press this button to display a map of your current position for casual driving. When en route, press this button to switch between the map and route information. INFO button - Press this button to display the menu for selecting the Trip Computer, Voice Command Help, Calendar, or Calculator. CANCEL button - Press this button to return to the previous screen. ZOOM buttons - Press these buttons to change the scale when displaying a map. ZOOM (Down Arrow) allows you to zoom out to see a larger area and ZOOM (Up Arrow) allows you to zoom in for greater detail. When a list is displayed, ZOOM (Up Arrow) and ZOOM (Down Arrow) can be used to page up or page down. SETUP button - Press this button to display a menu of system options. JOYSTICK - The joystick moves left, right, up, and down. Use it to highlight menu selections, scroll through lists, or look around in maps. After making a selection in a menu or list, choose the selection by pushing in the joystick. You can also choose a selection by touching it on the screen, and in most instances, you can use the voice control system to make a selection. VOICE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION The navigation system features a highly sophisticated voice control system. This system uses voice recognition to permit hands-free operation of most of the navigation system, audio system, and climate control system functions. The voice control system consists of the TALK and BACK buttons on the steering wheel, and a microphone on the ceiling. The audio speakers are used for voice prompts. NOTE: The front speakers are muted when the voice for the navigation system is speaking, and all speakers are muted when using the TALK and BACK buttons. TALK button - Press this button to activate the voice control system to accept voice commands. BACK button - This button has the same function as the CANCEL button. Press this button to return to the previous display. When the previous display appears, the system prompts you to give a command and sounds a beep. Press the TALK button to issue your next command. Microphone - Picks up your voice commands. Using the Voice Control System The voice control system is activated with the TALK button. To control the navigation system, the audio system, or the climate control system by voice, press and release the TALK button, then pause a moment before you give a voice command. Once the voice control system understands your command, it updates the proper system, and may prompt you for additional commands, depending on the next screen. NOTE: To view a complete listing of the voice commands, refer to the Navigation System Manual, or press the A/C-INFO button and select Voice Command Help. Improving Recognition To achieve optimum voice recognition, the following guidelines should be followed: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation > Page 7927 ^ Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command you are giving. Refer to the Navigation System Manual. ^ Close the windows and the moonroof. ^ Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2). ^ Adjust the air flow from the vents so that it does not blow against the microphone on the ceiling. ^ After pressing the TALK button, wait for the beep, then give a voice command. ^ Give a voice command clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. ^ If the system cannot recognize your voice command, speak louder. ^ If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly. ^ If you speak a command with something in your mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly. NAVIGATION SYSTEM OPERATION Selecting a Destination A destination can be selected by Address, Intersection, Place, Personal Address, Previous Destination, Map Input, or Today's Destinations using the touch-screen, the joystick, or the voice control system. Refer to the Navigation System Manual for detailed information. Traveling to a Destination Confirm a selected route - The system display asks you to select one of the following route options: ^ Direct Route - Takes the least amount of time ^ Easy Route - Minimizes the number of turns ^ Minimize Freeways - Avoids freeway travel (when possible) ^ Minimize Toll Roads - Avoids toll roads (when possible) ^ Maximize Freeways - Incorporates freeway travel (when possible) Going off the route - If you leave the route, the system recalculates the route from your current position and displays a new highlighted route. Modifying the route - The system can recalculate portions of the route and/or avoid a specific street, and then return you to the current route. Save current location - This option stores the current location for later use (it does not change or cancel the route instructions currently in progress). A location can be stored any time the navigation system is in use. Track off-road position - This option displays small circular dots ("bread crumbs") on the map if you drive on a road not shown on the navigation screen. These bread crumbs begin to appear approximately 1/2 mile away from a mapped road, and they allow you to retrace your route back to a mapped road. They will not appear if this feature is turned off during setup. Personal addresses Two users can each store up to 100 destinations (addresses with phone numbers) in the system. A PIN (Personal Identification Number) is optional. Refer to the Navigation System Manual for instructions on how to enter a PIN and use Personal Addresses. Go Home This option allows a single button entry to set your home address as a destination. A PIN is optional. System Limitations Always verify the audio and visual route information by carefully observing roadway signs, signals, etc. Use your own good judgment, and obey traffic laws while driving. The navigation system has these limitations: ^ The GPS (global positioning system) satellites used by the navigation system are operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. For security reasons, Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation > Page 7928 certain inaccuracies are built into the GPS. This can cause occasional positioning errors of up to several hundred feet. If the navigation system indicates your position incorrectly, wait several seconds until it corrects itself. The system may also correct itself after you make a turn or cross a road. ^ The routes calculated by the system may not always be what you consider to be the most direct ones. Try different routing methods to obtain the best route. Even the direction your vehicle is pointing influences the route calculation. ^ Since businesses fail or move to new locations some information may be inaccurate. Also, route guidance may conflict with actual road conditions such as street closures, construction, and detours. ^ Occasionally, the navigation system may "reboot" due to excess heat or shock, or from recalculating a route too many times. Rebooting does not necessarily indicate a need for service. ^ GPS reception is affected by outside electrical interference from aftermarket electronic devices placed near the GPS antenna or navigation unit. Aftermarket metallic tinting of windows above the GPS antenna can seriously degrade the GPS signal. NAVIGATION SYSTEM SETUP AT PDI The navigation system must be allowed to initialize itself before use. During initialization, the system obtains the orbital information of the GPS satellites. When initialization is complete, the system can "locate" itself and function normally. To initialize the system, follow this procedure. 1. Perform the normal PDI of the vehicle, including the audio system. The AUDIO button and the navigation system voice will not function if the anti-theft code for the audio system has not been entered. 2. Start the engine, and move the vehicle outside, away from buildings and power lines. Then enter the security code for the navigation system. The code is on the Navigation Anti-Theft Code card. To enter the audio security code, turn on the audio system by pressing the VOL/PWR knob. Then press and release the TUNE knob; the number 0" appears on the upper display. ^ If 0" is a digit in the code, press and release the TUNE knob to store it. ^ If 0" is not a digit in the code, turn the TUNE knob left or right until the correct digit is displayed. Press and release the TUNE knob to store it. Enter the remaining digits the same way. ^ When all of the digits in the code have been entered correctly, the radio starts playing, and the navigation system voice functions become operational. NOTE: If the Anti-Theft Code card is lost, you can find the code with the Interactive Network (iN) by using the Anti-Theft Code option and the serial number of the navigation control unit. If the serial number cannot be found, you can obtain the serial number from the bottom of the navigation control unit, or you can obtain it from the Diagnostic menu (refer to the service manual). If you cannot find the code with iN, contact the Automobile Warranty Department at 310-783-3240. 3. The following instructions appear on the screen to indicate the system is initializing. Follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: The average initialization takes about 10 minutes, but it can take as long as 45 minutes. When initialization is complete, the system proceeds to the globe screen. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation > Page 7929 4. If the system does not initialize, a second screen appears. When this screen is displayed, the system is still performing the initialization. The system does not automatically exit to the globe screen when initialization is complete. After 30 minutes, try restarting the vehicle to see if the navigation system completed the initialization. If not, follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: The initialization screen may appear after battery voltage to the navigation control unit has been disconnected for more than 5 minutes. If this occurs, follow the on-screen instructions. If you are still unable to obtain GPS initialization, refer to the service manual for diagnostic information. 5. When initialization is complete, the disclaimer screen appears. Touch "OK." NOTE: Do not enter a destination yet. In order for the system to calculate a route, it must align the current location to a mapped road (map matching). This will occur when you start driving. 6. Drive the vehicle at least a half mile from your dealership, then find a safe place to park. 7. *From the Map screen, press and release the TALK button and say "Find the nearest Honda dealer."* 8. Select your dealership from the screen listings, then select "K" on the next screen. NOTE: If your dealer location is not correct or needs to be changed, please report it to your District Parts and Service Manager(DPSM). 9. If your dealership is in a detailed coverage area, the map will show a blue highlighted route. Follow the voice guidance back to the dealership. If your dealership is not in a detailed coverage area, you may see a blue dotted "vector line" pointing to your dealership instead of the blue highlighted route. Exercise caution, and use the map to guide you back. 10. While in the Map screen, verify that the voice control system is interfacing properly with the navigation, audio, and climate control subsystems. ^ *Press the TALK button on the steering wheel and say the commands "Display 1/2 mile scale" and "Display current location." If necessary, press the BACK button (also on the steering wheel) to return to the map.* ^ To check the audio system, press the TALK button and say, "Radio play," then "Radio select AM" or "Radio select FM 1." ^ To check the climate control system, press the TALK button and say Temperature up," and then "temperature down." Verify that the temperature display on the center console changes accordingly. 11. Touch the SETUP button, or use the voice control system and say Setup." Then verify these settings by touch or with the joystick: ^ *Volume set to a comfortable level ^ Display set to AUTO ^ Voice feedback set to ON 12. In Setup, touch "Delete Previous Destinations" to bring up the Select item to delete:" menu. Select and delete any previous destinations except your dealership. NOTE: If this bulletin is being done as part of a warranty repair, do not delete any customer information.* NOTE: Normally the clock in the upper display is set by the GPS and does not need adjustment (this is the factory default). However, the time may need to be adjusted in some cases. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation > Page 7930 13. *In Setup, touch "Time Zone/Clock" to adjust the clock to the correct time.* NOTE: ^ If you live in a state or part of a state (like AZ or IN) that does not observe Daylight Savings time, then set the Auto Daylight Savings Time" setting to OFF. ^ If the dealership is located very near a time zone boundary, then set the Auto Time Zone by GPS" to OFF. This will allow the vehicle clock to retain the same time if the customer routinely travels back and forth across the time zone boundary. 14. Return to the Main menu, then clean the screen with a soft damp cloth. You may use a mild cleaner intended for eyeglasses or computer screens. Harsher chemicals may damage the screen. NOTE: Do not use shop towels, paper towels, or tissues; they can scratch or damage the screen. MAP COVERAGE AREAS The map database is stored on a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) located in the navigation control unit. The database covers the 48 contiguous U.S. states and Canada. Map Types The maps that you view on the screen consist of two types of roads: "Verified roads" and "unverified roads." Verified roads have been driven by the database vendor. Information about the road's average speed, turn restrictions, or whether it is a one-way street are contained in the navigation system. Roads within metropolitan areas (detailed coverage), interstate freeways, and major roads connecting cities are typically" verified." They can be recognized on the screen (daytime setting) as the darker colored roads. Unverified roads may be found in rural areas. The information about these roads may have inaccuracies. Therefore, they are shown for reference only. They can be recognized on the screen (daytime setting) as a light brown color. Guidance in unverified areas depends on the setting for Unverified routing" made during setup. If the setting is OFF, then you will see a dotted blue vector line pointing to your destination when driving in an unverified area. You will have to manually choose roads from the map to get to your destination. If the setting is ON, then you will see a blue/pink route line and receive route guidance. Pop-up cautionary boxes appear while en route to alert you when entering unverified areas. NOTE: This feature is set to OFF from the factory. Detailed Coverage Many cities and metropolitan areas are fully mapped. Detailed coverage includes: ^ Roads with names ^ Service roads without names that serve as access to rest areas along motorways ^ Main paved roads without names that are within, or lead to included polygons (places such as large shopping centers, universities, golf courses, parks, etc.) ^ Paved roads without names that are used only by public vehicles ^ Ferry connections for automobiles via rail or boat ^ Walkways with names and addresses ^ Undefined traffic areas with more than 10,800 square feet ^ Ramps, roundabouts, special traffic figures, turn lanes, and U-turn lanes ^ Service roads ^ Pedestrian streets and pedestrian zones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Navigation/Voice Recognition System - Operation > Page 7931 *For a list of current detailed coverage areas by country and state/province, refer to the Navigation System Owner's Manual for the current model year or the Honda web site, www.honda.com. Go to the Ownerlink section and select the "Ordering a Navigation DVD" link.* Non-Detailed Coverage Cities and towns in the non-detailed map coverage area may have incomplete mapping. Only major federal, state, and county roads leading to and through these cities and towns are mapped. These "Verified" roads are shown as darker colored roads. All other streets are "unverified" and are shown in light brown. If you see an asterisk (*) next to the city name, ^ Streets may be missing completely or shown in the wrong location. ^ Street address information may be unavailable, and you may be prompted to use the map to locate your destination. ^ Streets may be either named incorrectly or have no name ("unnamed road"). Guidance in unverified areas depends on the setting for ~Unverified routing" made during setup. See ~Driving to your destination" in the Navigation System Manual for more information. ORDERING A DVD *Replacement DVDs can be ordered online at www.honda.com. Go to the Ownerlink section, then select the "Ordering a Navigation DVD" link. You can also call 888-291-4675. Updated DVDs, with expanded coverage, are made available periodically, usually in the fall. Use the above procedure to order updated DVDs.* Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7932 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7933 140. Voice Control Switch (EX-L: Navigation) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper: Service and Repair Front Bumper Removal/Installation 2-door NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper. - Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front bumper as shown. 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both sides securely. - Replace any damaged clips. 4-door NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper. - Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front bumper as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7939 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both sides securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the rear bumper as shown. 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper brackets on both sides securely. - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when, removing and installing the rear bumper. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7943 1. Remove the rear bumper as shown. 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper brackets on both sides securely. - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Cabin Ventilation Duct: Procedures Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7948 Cabin Ventilation Duct: Removal and Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the hood rear seal (A) by pulling it out. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (B) from the cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers. 3. Detach the clips (C, D) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (E) upward, and release the hooks (F) on the passenger's cowl cover from the driver's side, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (G). 5. Detach the clips (C, D, H) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (I) upward, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 6. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Coupe Door Outer Handle Replacement 2-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary. 2. Raise the glass fully. 3. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A) and cylinder rod (B). 4. Release the retainer clip (A), then remove the lock cylinder (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7961 5. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder (A) and cylinder switch (B). 6. Disconnect the cylinder switch connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B), then remove the cylinder switch (C). 7. Remove the maintenance cap (A). While holding the outer handle (B) from the outside of the door, remove the bolts, then remove the outer handle protector (C) by sliding it forward to release the hook (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7962 8. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered sequence, and remove it. 9. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed properly. - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly, and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer door handle bolts loose so the inner protector does not interfere with the lock cylinder, then tighten the handle bolts. - Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the handle, then install the lock cylinder. Be sure the clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7963 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Outer Handle Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel. - Plastic cover, as necessary. 2. Raise the glass fully. 3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower channel (B) by pulling it downward. 4. Remove the maintenance cap (A), then disconnect the outer handle rod (B), and cylinder rod (C) on driver's side and passenger's side. 5. Driver's and some passenger's: Remove the maintenance cap (A) from the rear of the door, then loosen the screw securing the cylinder protector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7964 (B) and the outer handle (C). NOTE: Because of the tread lock (D) on the middle of threads, the screw will stay on the protector after loosening it. 6. Remove the bolt, slide the cylinder protector (A) rearward, then remove the cylinder switch (for some models), lock cylinder, and cylinder protector as an assembly. 7. With cylinder switch: Disconnect the cylinder switch connector (A), and detach the harness clips (B), then remove the cylinder switch (C). 8. Remove the screws, then separate the lock cylinder (A), cylinder switch (B) (for some models), and cylinder protector (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7965 9. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). 10. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care not to scratch the door. 11. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed properly (for some models). - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (for some models), and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks operate properly. - Make sure the door handle works properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Coupe Door Latch Replacement 2-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary. 3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder, then disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer handle. 4. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, and remove the bolts, then remove the center lower channel (B) by pulling it downward. 5. Remove the screws securing the lock knob (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7970 6. Detach the inner handle cable clip (A), and disconnect the actuator connectors (B). Remove the screws, then remove the latch (C) through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D), cylinder rod (E), inner handle cable (F), and lock cable (G). 7. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in property, and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens property. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7971 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Latch Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel. - Plastic cover, as necessary. - Center lower channel. 3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder, and disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer handle. 4. Remove the screws securing the lock knob (A). 5. Disconnect the actuator connectors (A) (for some models), and detach the inner handle cable clip (B). Remove the screws (C, D) securing the latch (C) and the lock cable protector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7972 6. Release the hooks (A) of the lock cable protector (B) from the door, then remove the latch (C) with the protector through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D), cylinder rod (E), lock cable (F), and inner handle cable (G). 7. Remove the lock cable protector (A) from the latch protector (B) by releasing the hook (C). 8. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If equipped, make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in properly and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Coupe Door Panel Removal/Installation 2-door Special Tools Required Trim pad remover, Snap-on A177A or equivalent, commercially available. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, pry out on the lower portion of the cover (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then remove the cover and the screws. 3. Remove the power window switch panel (A). -1 Insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape through a hole under the armrest, and push up the bottom of the power window switch (B) to release the panel. -2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hook (C) and clips (D). -3 Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (E) (driver's) and the power window switch connector (F). 4. Remove the screws (G) from under the armrest. 5. Remove the mirror mount cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7977 6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. -1 Release the clips that hold the door panel with a commercially available trim pad remover (B). -2 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward, then release the lock knob (C). 7. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and courtesy light bulb socket (B), and detach the harness clip (C) from the panel (D). 8. If necessary, remove the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) from the door panel (B) by pulling it down. 9. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the cable and the bulb socket are connected properly. - Check the window and power door lock operations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7978 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Panel Removal/Installation 4-door Special Tools Required Trim pad remover, Snap-on A177A or equivalent, commercially available. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, pry out on the rear portion of the cover (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then remove the cover and the screws securing the inner handle (D). 3. Remove the power window switch panel (A). -1 Pry upon the rear edge of the switch panel with a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape to release the rear clip. -2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hooks (B) and front clip. -3 Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (C) (driver's) and the power window switch connector (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7979 4. Remove the screw from under the pull pocket cap (A). 5. Remove the mirror mount cover. 6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. -1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips that are just above the marks (B) on the edge of the panel with a commercially available trim pad remover (C). -2 Detach the upper clips. -3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward, then release the lock knob (D) 7. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A), and if equipped, courtesy light bulb socket (B), and detach the harness clip (C). Remove the inner handle (D) by releasing the hooks (E, F). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 7980 8. If necessary, remove the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) from the door panel (B) by pulling it down. 9. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the cable and the bulb socket are connected properly. - If equipped, check the window and power door lock operations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment Make sure the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker can be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out. 1. Loosen the screws (B), then insert a shop towel (C) between the body and striker. 2. Lightly tighten the screws. 3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (D). Do not tap the striker too hard. 4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel. 5. Lightly tighten the screws. 6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7987 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door stop mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to door stop mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7993 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7994 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7995 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 7996 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7997 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new one because it will bend. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel, 2-door, 4-door. - Power mirror/Manual mirror. - Door sash trim, 2-door. 2. 4-door: Remove the screws from the rear edge of the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7998 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot. 4. Pull the rear of the glass outer weatherstrip (A) away from the door, then release the front clip (B) from the mounting hole in the door. If necessary, pry the clip, then remove the weatherstrip. 5. Install new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations 99. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8002 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams 165. Power Window Motor; Driver's 166. Power Window Motor, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel, 2-door, 4-door. 2. 4-door: Remove the screws, then remove the panel bracket (A). 3. Remove the plastic cover, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8006 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B). 6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. - Make sure the power door locks, windows, and power mirror operate properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel. - Plastic cover, as necessary. 2. Raise the glass fully. 3. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C) and the cable protector (D). 4. Detach the cable clips (A) and the hook (B) of the cable protector (C), then remove the latch (D) with the cable protector forward. Take care not to bend any of the cables. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8012 5. Remove the maintenance hole seal (A) and bolt, slide the protector (B) rearward, then remove it. 6. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). 7. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care not to scratch the door. 8. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Latch Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Raise the glass fully. 3. Remove the screw securing the lock knob (A). 4. Remove the plastic cover, as needed. 5. Disconnect the actuator connector(s) (A) (for some models). Remove the screws (B, C) securing the latch (D) and the cable protector (E). 6. Detach the cable clips (A) and the hook (B) of the cable protector (C), then remove the latch (D) with the cable protector through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend any of the cables. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8016 7. Remove the cable protector (A) from the latch protector (B) by releasing the hook (C). 8. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If equipped, make sure the actuator connector(s) are plugged in properly. - Make sure the door locks and the window operates properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation 4-door Special Tools Required Trim pad remover, Snap-on A177A or equivalent, commercially available. 1. Lower the glass fully. 2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, pry out on the rear portion of the cover (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then remove the cover and the screws securing the inner handle (D). 3. Remove the switch panel (A). -1 Pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel with a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape to release the rear clip. -2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hooks (B) and clip. -3 Disconnect the power window switch connector (C). 4. Remove the screw from under the pull pocket cap (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8020 5. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. -1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips that are just above the marks (B) on the edge of the panel with a commercially available trim pad remover (C). -2 Detach the upper clips. -3 Stating at the front, pull the door panel upward, then release the lock knob (D). 6. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A). Remove the inner handle (B) by releasing the hooks (C, D). 7. If necessary, remove the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) from the door panel (B). 8. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and the cable is connected securely. - If equipped, check the window and power door lock operations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Rear Door Hook Pin and Catch Replacement 4-door 1. With a Torx T40 bit, remove the door hook pin (A) from the door. 2. With a Torx T40 bit, remove the bolts, then remove the door catch (A) from the body. 3. Install the hook pin and catch in the reverse order of removal, and apply liquid thread lock to the threads of the door hook pin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door stop mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clip (B, C), then remove the door weatherstrip (D). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (E) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to the door stop mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8032 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8033 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8034 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 8035 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8036 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new one because it will bend. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door, 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Remove the screw from the front edge of the door. 3. Starting at the front, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8037 4. Detach the rear clip (A), then remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations 104. Left Rear Door (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8041 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams 167. Power Window Motor, Left Rear (4-door) 168. Power Window Motor, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel - Panel bracket. - Plastic cover, as necessary. 2. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Remove the glass from the regulator (B), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull the door weatherstrip (B) away as needed, then remove the screw (C). Remove the bolt (D) securing the center channel (E). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8045 4. Pull the upper portion of the center channel (A) forward to remove it from the door quarter glass seal (B), then pull up and remove the center channel out through the window slot. Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (C). 5. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B). 6. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8046 7. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B). 8. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 9. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 10. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door Release Actuator: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and if equipped, remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Loosen the bolt (E). 3. Remove the front door sill trim, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Remove the opener (B) from the bolt. 5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to bend the cable. 6. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door Release Cable: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items form the left side of the vehicle: - Side trim panel. - Door sill trim. - Trunk rear trim panel. - Trunk side trim panel ,left side. 2. Pull the carpet back as necessary. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Detach the clip (C) with a clip remover, and release the opener cable (B) from the clip (D). 5. Release the fuel fill door/trunk lid opener cable (A) from the clip (B). Remove the fuel fill door latch (C) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (D) from the body. 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch (E). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8054 7. Release the fuel fill door opener cable/trunk lid opener cable from the clips (G). 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable. 9. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Route the opener cable (A) beside the floor wire harness clips (B) correctly. - Align the marks (C) on the cable with the cable clips (D) as shown. - Replace any damaged clips. 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items form the left side of the vehicle: - Front door sill trim. - Rear door sill trim. - B-pillar lower trim. - Left rear seat side bolster. - Trunk rear trim panel. - Trunk side trim panel, left side. 2. Pull back the carpet as necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8055 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D). 5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (A) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (B) from the body. 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (C) from the trunk lid latch (D). 7. Using a clip remover, detach clip (E). Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the clips (F, G) (with power trunk lid lock). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8056 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle Take care not to bend the cable. 9. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) with the cable clips (C) as shown. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (B). Take care not to scratch the hood. 2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement 1. Remove these items: - Front bumper, 2-door. - Front grille, 4-door. 2. Remove the cover (A) from the hood latch (B). 3. If equipped, disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A). 4. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A) from the body. 5. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood latch. Take care not to bend the cable. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8064 6. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply multipurpose grease to each location of the hood latch indicated by the arrows. - Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly and hood latch switch connector is plugged in properly (for some models). - Adjust the hood latch alignment. - Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Release Handle Replacement 1. Remove the kick panel, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release handle (A). 3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood release handle. Take care not to bend the cable. 4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order of removal, and note there items: - Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the hood opens properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Opener Cable Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items: - Front bumper, 2-door. - Front Grill, 4-door. - Inner fender. - Kick panel, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Remove the bolt (A) then remove the radiator upper bracket (B). 3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (D) from the hood latch (E). 4. Move the radiator (C) as necessary. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (F), and remove the grommet (G) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable. 5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Hood Support Strut Replacement STABILUS Type 1. Remove the bolts securing the hood support strut (A) to the hood. 2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to pry the support strut clip (B) away from the strut, but do not remove the clip completely. While an assistant supports the hood, pull the support strut off the pivot bolt (C). Take care not to scratch the body or hood. 3. Push the clip (A) into its original position, and then push the support strut (B) onto the pivot bolt (C). 4. Reinstall the bolts. SHOWA Type ('03-05 models) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8074 1. While an assistant supports the hood, remove the pivot bolt (A) and hood side bolts, then remove the support strut (B). Take care not to scratch the body or hood. 2. Install the pivot bolt first, and then install the hood side bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8080 126. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8081 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 69. Security Hood Switch (EX, EX-L; Canada LX) 288. Security Hood Switch (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8082 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and if equipped, remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Loosen the bolt (E). 3. Remove the front door sill trim, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Remove the opener (B) from the bolt. 5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to bend the cable. 6. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the clip, then remove the spare tire lid (A). 2. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (B) up, then remove it. 3. Remove the left: trunk side trim panel (A) and the right trunk side trim panel (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area > Page 8091 1. Right side: Remove the trunk hook (C), the jack cover (D), and the jack (E). 2. Remove the hook bolts (F) and clips. 3. Remove the trim panels from the trunk compartment. Left side: Release the trunk lid opener cable (G) from the slit (H) in the trim panel. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 '03-05 Models 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care hot to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the clip, then remove the spare tire lid (A). 2. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (B) up, then remove it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area > Page 8092 3. Remove the left trunk side trim panel (A) and the right trunk side trim panel (B). 1. Right side: Remove the trunk hook (C), the jack cover (D), and the jack (E). 2. Remove the clips. 3. Remove the trim panels from the trunk compartment. Left side: Release the trunk lid opener cable (F) from the slit (G) in the trim panel. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Special Tools Required STC trim tool set SOJATP2014 '06 Model 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the clip, then remove the spare tire lid (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area > Page 8093 2. Detach the clips (A, B), and release the hooks (C) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (D) up, then remove it. 3. Remove the left trunk side trim panel (A) and the right trunk side trim panel (B). 1. Right side: Remove the trunk hook (C), the jack cover (D), and the jack (E). 2. Remove the clips. 3. Remove the trim panels from the trunk compartment. Left side: Release the trunk lid opener cable (F) from the slit (G) in the trim panel. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area > Page 8094 Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim. 1. Using the appropriate tool from the KTC tool set, detach the clips (A, B, C), then remove the trunk lid trim (D). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area > Page 8095 1. Using the appropriate tool from the KTC tool set, detach the clips (A, B, C), then remove the trunk lid trim (D). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Latch Replacement 1. 4-door: Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder. 2. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) and trunk lid latch switch connector (B). If equipped with a power trunk lid latch, detach the trunk lid latch switch connector from the trunk lid. Take care not to bend the opener cable. 3. Remove the bolts from the trunk lid latch (C). 4. Pull the trunk lid latch (A) out, and on 4-door, disconnect the cylinder rod (B) from the trunk lid latch. Take care not to bend the cylinder rod. 5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items form the left side of the vehicle: - Side trim panel. - Door sill trim. - Trunk rear trim panel. - Trunk side trim panel ,left side. 2. Pull the carpet back as necessary. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Detach the clip (C) with a clip remover, and release the opener cable (B) from the clip (D). 5. Release the fuel fill door/trunk lid opener cable (A) from the clip (B). Remove the fuel fill door latch (C) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (D) from the body. 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch (E). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8102 7. Release the fuel fill door opener cable/trunk lid opener cable from the clips (G). 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable. 9. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Route the opener cable (A) beside the floor wire harness clips (B) correctly. - Align the marks (C) on the cable with the cable clips (D) as shown. - Replace any damaged clips. 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items form the left side of the vehicle: - Front door sill trim. - Rear door sill trim. - B-pillar lower trim. - Left rear seat side bolster. - Trunk rear trim panel. - Trunk side trim panel, left side. 2. Pull back the carpet as necessary. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8103 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D). 5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (A) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (B) from the body. 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (C) from the trunk lid latch (D). 7. Using a clip remover, detach clip (E). Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the clips (F, G) (with power trunk lid lock). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8104 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle Take care not to bend the cable. 9. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) with the cable clips (C) as shown. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder Replacement 4-door NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to scratch the cover. 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the rear seat handle (A) up at either hook portion (B) on the forward side of the trunk pass through cover (C). Then slide the handle half-way up. 2. From trunk compartment side of the cover, using a small screwdriver, press the inside hook (A) down through the access hole (B). 3. While pressing the hook, pry the trunk handle (C) up with a flat-tip screwdriver. 4. Remove the trunk handle (A) and rear seat handle (B) together at the same time. 5. Remove the retainer clip (C), then remove the trunk pass-through cover key cylinder (D) from the cover (E). 6. Install the key cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Put the two handles together before installing them on the trunk pass-through cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder > Page 8109 - Make sure the trunk pass-through cover opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder > Page 8110 Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Key Cylinder Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement 4-door 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B). 2. Remove the bolts securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder clockwise, and remove it. 3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Dynamic Damper Replacement 1. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid dynamic damper (A). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the damper in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the trunk latch switch/trunk lid opener solenoid. 2. Check trunk lid opener solenoid operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the trunk lid opener solenoid, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 3. If the trunk lid opener solenoid does not work as specified, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Spring: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement 1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar center clip (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8120 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the torsion bars with the torsion bar tool (A) from both trunk lid hinges. NOTE: 2-door: First remove the right torsion bar (B), then remove the left torsion bar (C). - 4-door: First remove the left torsion bar (B), then remove the right torsion bar(C). 3. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8121 4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - The shapes of the right torsion bar (A) and left torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars properly. - Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with the torsion bar assembly tool. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8125 122. Middle Of Trunk Lid (4-door) 233. Middle Of Trunk Lid (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8126 235. Trunk Latch Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trunk Latch Switch Test Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). ( ):DX 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 (No.1) and No 3 (No.2) terminals. ( ):DX - There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open). - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trunk Latch Switch Test > Page 8129 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the neutral position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off 2. Apply clear sealant (B) into the channel of the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around. Sealant: SUNRISE MEISEI B-33C, or equivalent 3. Locate the painted alignment mark (C or D) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark in the center of the tailgate opening, and install the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around in the direction shown Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip. 4. Check for water leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Emblem: Procedures Emblem Replacement Emblem Replacement 2-door NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 2. Apply the emblem where shown. 4-door NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8138 2. Apply the emblem where shown. Emblem/Sticker Replacement Emblem/Sticker Replacement 2-door NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8139 2. Apply the emblem/sticker where shown. When installing the LEV/ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the quarter glass, align the sticker application tape with the edge of the black ceramic and alignment mark on the quarter glass, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. 4-door NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8140 2. Apply the emblem/sticker where shown. When installing the LEV/ULEV/SULEV sticker on the inside surface of the rear door quarter glass, align rear edge of the application tape and bottom of the sticker with the glass mark, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8141 Body Emblem: Removal and Replacement Emblem/Sticker Replacement 2-door NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 2. Apply the emblems/sticker where shown. When installing the LEV/ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the quarter glass, align the sticker application tape with the edge of the black ceramic and alignment mark on the quarter glass, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. '03-05 Models 4-door NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8142 2. Apply the emblems/sticker where shown. When installing the LEV/ULEV sticker ('03-05 models), SULEV sticker ('03-04 models) on the inside surface of the rear door quarter glass, align rear edge of the application tape and bottom of the sticker with the glass mark, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. '06 Model 4-door NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8143 2. Apply the emblems/sticker where shown. When installing the LEV/ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the rear door quarter glass, align rear edge of the application tape and bottom of the sticker with the glass mark, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the hood rear seal (A) by pulling it out. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (B) from the cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers. 3. Detach the clips (C, D) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (E) upward, and release the hooks (F) on the passenger's cowl cover from the driver's side, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (G). 5. Detach the clips (C, D, H) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (I) upward, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 6. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair Rear License Trim Replacement 2-door 1. On the inside of the trunk lid, remove the nuts (A), and release the clips (B, C, D), then remove the rear license trim (E). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and replace damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Frame: Service and Repair Rear License Trim Replacement '03-06 Models 2-door 1. On the inside of the trunk lid, remove the nuts (A), and release the clips (B, C, D), then remove the rear license trim (E). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. '06 Model 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the trunk lid trim . 2. From inside the trunk lid, disconnect back-up connectors (A), then remove the nuts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8153 3. On the inside of the trunk lid, release the clips (A, B, C), then remove the rear license trim (D). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Upper Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Roof Molding Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape. Molding Replacement 1. Remove the hood hinge cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8157 2. Remove the windshield portion of the roof molding (A): -1 Detach the bottom clip (B). -2 Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver in under the molding next to the lower clip (C). -3 Push the hooks (D) while pulling the molding up to release the clip from the retainer (E). -4 Gradually work your way up to release each of the upper clips (C, F) (2-door)/(G, H, I) (4-door). 3. Pull up and slide the middle portion (A) of the roof molding to release it from the retainers (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8158 4. Pull up the front portion of roof molding. 5. Pull up and release the rear end of the roof molding (A) from the pin (B), then remove the roof molding (C). 6. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the roof molding is installed securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Retainer Replacement (4-door Adhesive type): Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8159 1. Gradually scrape off the adhesive tape (A) under the retainers (B) while heating it with the heat gun. NOTE: Do not heat the body painted surface around the retainers too much to prevent damage. - To keep the exterior resin parts near the A-pillar from being overheated by the heat gun, wrap them with an aluminum foil. 2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 3. Install the upper retainers (A) and the lower retainers (B). -1 Peel the adhesive backing away from the upper and lower retainers. -2 Line up the retainers with the alignment marks (C) on the body, and glue the retainers with adhesive tape (D) (3M 9259, or equivalent). -3 Apply epoxy two part mixing adhesive (E) around the edge of the retainers as shown. Retainer Replacement (T-stud type) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8160 1. While prying the middle hook (A) with a flat-tip screwdriver, slide the upper retainer (B) and lower retainers (C) upward to release them from the T-studs (D) on the A-pillar. Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Install the retainers in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken Windshield Moulding / Trim: Customer Interest Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken 09-051 October 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Odyssey - - ALL 2009-11 Pilot - ALL 2003-07 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan Produced 2008-11 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan and HMA produced Windshield Side Trim Retainer Is Loose or Broken (Supersedes 09-051, dated February 27, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ In Applies To, and under PARTS INFORMATION, WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, and REPAIR PROCEDURE, the information for 2003-11 Accords was added. ^ Under REQUIRED MATERIALS, the 3M adhesive applicator was changed.* BACKGROUND When removing the windshield side trim, one or more of the retainers bonded to the body are damaged or come off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace any damaged or loose windshield side trim retainers. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8169 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8170 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8171 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8172 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken Windshield Moulding / Trim: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken 09-051 October 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Odyssey - - ALL 2009-11 Pilot - ALL 2003-07 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan Produced 2008-11 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan and HMA produced Windshield Side Trim Retainer Is Loose or Broken (Supersedes 09-051, dated February 27, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ In Applies To, and under PARTS INFORMATION, WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, and REPAIR PROCEDURE, the information for 2003-11 Accords was added. ^ Under REQUIRED MATERIALS, the 3M adhesive applicator was changed.* BACKGROUND When removing the windshield side trim, one or more of the retainers bonded to the body are damaged or come off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace any damaged or loose windshield side trim retainers. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8178 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8179 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8180 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 8181 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8188 Front wheelhouse: - Cut and remove the wheelhouse upper member. - When removing the front wheelhouse, if necessary, cut the wheelhouse upper extension. Damper Housing: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8189 - Check the damper housing position, and check for damage. If necessary, replace it. - Remove the wheelhouse upper member, and wheelhouse upper member separator. - When removing the wheelhouse upper member separator, and glue the urethane block at the separator mounted position. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8190 - Replace the damper housing and wheelhouse upper extension as an assembly. Installation Front wheelhouse: 1. Check the damper housing and front side frame position, and set the new wheelhouse upper extension align it with the body side wheelhouse upper extension. 2. Cut the new wheelhouse upper extension and clamp it. 3. Check the body dimensions, engine compartment, engine compartment and front floor under view, rigid rear subframe top view, rigid rear subframe side view, and tack weld the new wheelhouse upper extension. 4. Set the new front wheelhouse, bulkhead side frame, and front bulkhead. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8191 5. Check the body dimensions, engine compartment and front floor under view, rigid rear subframe top view, rigid rear subframe side view, and tack weld the new parts. 6. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, then check for differences in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. 7. Do the main welding. Weld the wheelhouse upper extension, and front wheelhouse. NOTE: Attach the patch at the joint section of the wheelhouse upper extension, and weld it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8192 8. Weld the wheelhouse upper member. Damper Housing: 1. Set the new parts, and front bulkhead into position, and measure the front compartment diagonally. Check the body dimensions, engine compartment, engine compartment and front floor under view, rigid rear subframe top view, rigid rear subframe side view. 2. Tack weld the new parts. 3. Temporarily install the front subframe, and check the front side frame position. 4. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, then check for differences in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. 5. Do the main welding. - Weld the wheelhouse upper extension and dashboard upper side member extension. - Weld the damper housing, front wheelhouse and front side frame. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8193 - From the passenger's compartment side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower, housing lower extension, and damper housing lower. 6. Glue the urethane block to the wheelhouse upper extension as shown. Urethane block: P/N. 91616-SO4-000 Adhesive: Cemedine 366, or equivalent 7. Weld the wheelhouse upper member. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8194 8. Insert the nozzle to the holes of the wheelhouse upper member, and extension, and spray the anti-rust agent to the around of the urethane block. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8195 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Inner Fender Replacement Front Inner Fender Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the front inner fender (A). -1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B). If equipped, remove the front splash guard (C). -2 From under the front bumper (D), remove the bolt (E) securing the front bumper, splash shield (F), and front inner fender, and remove the clip (G) securing the front bumper and front inner fender. -3 From the wheel arch, remove the clips (H, I) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) on the body -4 Release the hook (J) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender. 2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8196 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Fender Fairing Replacement Front Fender Fairing Replacement 1. Remove the front inner fender as necessary. 2. Open the front door. Remove the upper clip (A), and from inside the door, remove the lower clip (A) securing the front fender fairing (B) and front fender (C). 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (A), and release the clip (B). 4. Remove the front fender fairing (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8197 5. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Before installing the clips in the door opening area, install the front fender fairing (A) to the front fender (B) properly as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Rear Inner Fender Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the screws, then remove rear inner fender (A) from the rear bumper (B) and body. 2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the side trim panel. 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as necessary. 3. Detach the floor wire harness clip (A), and remove seat cushion clip (B). 4. Remove the bolts (C, D) and nut (E), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (F). 5. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal. When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Strut Tower Brace > Component Information > Service and Repair Frame Stiffener Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter 05-066 November 24, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Universal Front Subframe Removal Adapter (Replaces 01-043, Civic Front Sub frame Removal Adapter, dated September 11, 2001) The universal front subframe removal adapter is a required tool. When properly fitted to a transmission jack and the vehicle's front subframe, the adapter provides a convenient way to remove the subframe. Front subframe removal is required for transmission or engine removal. NOTE: The adapter will only support the subframe it will not support the entire powertrain assembly. Refer to the WARNING label on the adapter. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-06 Accord - ALL 2005-06 Accord Hybrid - ALL 2001-06 Civic - ALL 2001-06 Civic GX - ALL 2003-06 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-06 Civic Si - ALL 2002-06 CRV - ALL 2003-06 Element - ALL ORDERING INFORMATION The universal front subframe removal adapter is TIN VSB02C000016. To order additional adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the transmission jack, (new model number NRI-72500D), available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. (The old model number LSL-W93714 can still be used.). The adapter also works with many commercially available transmission jacks. 1. Loosen the four bolts that hold the adapter's adjustable arms to its center plate. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 8213 2. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corners of the jack base, then attach the adapter to the jack base with the bolts that came with the jack. Tighten all of the bolts securely. 3. Raise the jack to vehicle height. 4. With the rear bar of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, route the adapter's strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap as tightly as possible, insert the pin through the appropriate loop, then tighten the wing nut. 5. With all of the vehicle parts properly supported or removed (see Engine or Transmission Removal in the appropriate service manual), carefully lower the subframe using the controls on the jack. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 8214 Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Subframe Removal Adapter 02-066 November 19, 2002 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL Accord Subframe Removal Adapter When properly fitted to the transmission jack and the the vehicle's subframe, the adapter allows the subframe to be removed for transmission repair. ORDERING INFORMATION One Subframe Adapter (T/N VSB02C000016) was shipped to each dealership as a required special tool. To order an additional adapter, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The subframe removal adapter is for subframe support only. It will not support the engine, transmission, and subframe as one assembly. Read the labels on the subframe adapter. 1. Remove the bolts from the transmission jack. Line up the slots in the four adjustable arms of the adapter with the bolt holes on the corners of the transmission jack base, then bolt on the adapter. 2. Remove the safety pin that holds the strap, and loosen the two L-shaped brackets. 3. Raise the jack until the adapter touches the subframe. 4. Loosen the wing nut that tightens the strap. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 8215 5. Adjust the position of the transmission jack or the subframe adapter as necessary so that the adapter presses flat against the subframe. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 8216 6. With the rear of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, wrap the strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap tight, then insert the safety pin in the adapter and a loop in the strap. Make sure the pin goes through a loop in the strap, not between the loops. 7. Finger-tighten the wing nut that tightens the strap. Do not overtighten; the strap only needs to be snug. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 8217 8. Slide the adjustable L-shaped brackets against the subframe, and tighten the adapter bolts. 9. With all vehicle parts properly supported or removed, remove the subframe mounting bolts and lower the subframe. See Transmission Removal in section 14 or Steering Gearbox Removal in section 17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Subframe: Procedures Subframe Replacement Front Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. Front Subframe Alignment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8220 NOTE: - Before removing the subframe, make the appropriate lines where the subframe that line up with the edge of the rear bracket for reinstallation. - When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. - After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align the reference marks with the edge of the rear brackets then tighten each bolts. Rear Subframe Torque Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8221 After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8222 Subframe: Removal and Replacement Subframe Replacement Front Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bolts, front subframe middle mounting rubber mounting bolts, front subframe rear bracket mounting bolts, front subframe rear damper front mounting bolt, and steering gearbox bracket mounting bolt, be sure to replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8223 Front Subframe Alignment NOTE: - Before removing the subframe, make an alignment mark for the front subframe rear bracket as shown. - When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. - After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align the reference marks with the edge of the rear brackets then tighten all bolts. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8224 Rear Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Grille: Procedures Front Grille Replacement 2-door 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), and remove the front grille (B) from the front bumper (C) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper. 3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal. 4-door NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to scratch the front bulkhead cover and front grille. 1. Remove the clips (A, B) and detach the hooks (C), then remove the front bulkhead cover (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8229 2. Remove the clips, then remove the front grille (A). Take care not to drop the clips inside the front bumper. 3. Install the front grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the front hook portions into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8230 Grille: Removal and Replacement Front Grille Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the front bumper 2. '03-05 models: Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), and remove the front grille (B) from the front bumper (C) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper. 3. '06 model: Remove the clips (A) and screws (B), and remove the front grille (C) from the front bumper (D) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper. 4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the front bulkhead cover and front grille. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8231 1. Remove the clips (A, B) and detach the hooks (C), then remove the front bulkhead cover (D). 2. '03-05 models: Remove the clips, then remove the front grille (A). Take care not to drop the clips inside the front bumper. 3. '06 model: Remove the clips (A) and screws (B), then remove the front grille (C). Take care not to drop the clips and screws inside the front bumper (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8232 4. '06 model: If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the upper grille molding (A) from the front grille. 5. Install the front grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the front hook portions into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair Arm Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Armrest/Trunk Pass - Through Cover Replacement 4-door NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Remove the clip (A) from the left portion of the armrest pivot. 2. Remove the armrest. -1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of the vehicle. -2 Remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (C) on the passenger's side of the vehicle by pulling up on the armrest, and remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (D) by pulling up on the armrest. 3. Remove the beverage holder. 4. Fold the seat-back forward. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8237 5. Remove the screws, and detach the hooks (A), then remove the trunk pass-through cover (B). 6. Install the armrest and trunk pass-through cover in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill Carpet: Customer Interest Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill 04-044 July 23, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Carpet Is Loose at the Right Front Door Sill Trim SYMPTOM The carpet comes loose from under the right front door sill trim. PROBABLE CAUSE An open area under the carpet forms a soft spot next to the right front door sill trim. This soft spot lets the carpet pull away from under the trim when lightly stepped on. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord 4-door (VINs beginning with 1HG and 3HG): ALL 2004 Accord 4-door L4: From VIN 1HGCM5...4A000001 thru 1HGCM5...4A067228 From VIN 3HGCM5...4G700001 thru 3HGCM5...4G702883 2004 Accord 4-door V6: From VIN 1HGCM6...4A000001 thru 1HGCM6...4A045157 CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a foam block in the open area under the carpet. Replace the carpet clip if it is damaged or it has torn away from the carpet. PARTS INFORMATION Carpet Block Kit: PN 83303-SDA-999, H/C 7808066 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 83301-SDA-A11ZA H/C 7149875 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill > Page 8246 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front door sill trim and kick panel. 2. Release the carpet clip from the body. 3. Inspect the carpet clip. ^ If the clip is OK, go to step 10. ^ If the clip is damaged or it has torn away from the carpet, go to step 4. 4. Position the carpet clip in its original location. Use a felt-tip pen to make a small mark in the center of the clip on the carpet. Discard the clip. 5. Pull out the staples if they are still in the carpet. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill > Page 8247 6. Use a felt tip pen to mark two hole locations in the new carpet clip as shown. 7. While wearing eye protection, use a 3 mm drill bit to drill two holes into the carpet clip where you made the marks. 8. Position the new carpet clip on the center mark you made in step 4. Use a felt-tip pen to mark the hole locations on the carpet. Use a utility knife to cut out the holes. 9. Use a small wire tie to fasten the carpet clip to the carpet. Cut off the excess wire tie. 10. Lift up the carpet, and find the open area under it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill > Page 8248 11. Press the foam block into the open area. (No adhesive is needed; friction holds the block in place.) 12. Put the carpet back down in its original position, and clip it in place. Reinstall the kick panel and the door sill trim. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill Carpet: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill 04-044 July 23, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Carpet Is Loose at the Right Front Door Sill Trim SYMPTOM The carpet comes loose from under the right front door sill trim. PROBABLE CAUSE An open area under the carpet forms a soft spot next to the right front door sill trim. This soft spot lets the carpet pull away from under the trim when lightly stepped on. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord 4-door (VINs beginning with 1HG and 3HG): ALL 2004 Accord 4-door L4: From VIN 1HGCM5...4A000001 thru 1HGCM5...4A067228 From VIN 3HGCM5...4G700001 thru 3HGCM5...4G702883 2004 Accord 4-door V6: From VIN 1HGCM6...4A000001 thru 1HGCM6...4A045157 CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a foam block in the open area under the carpet. Replace the carpet clip if it is damaged or it has torn away from the carpet. PARTS INFORMATION Carpet Block Kit: PN 83303-SDA-999, H/C 7808066 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 83301-SDA-A11ZA H/C 7149875 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill > Page 8254 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front door sill trim and kick panel. 2. Release the carpet clip from the body. 3. Inspect the carpet clip. ^ If the clip is OK, go to step 10. ^ If the clip is damaged or it has torn away from the carpet, go to step 4. 4. Position the carpet clip in its original location. Use a felt-tip pen to make a small mark in the center of the clip on the carpet. Discard the clip. 5. Pull out the staples if they are still in the carpet. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill > Page 8255 6. Use a felt tip pen to mark two hole locations in the new carpet clip as shown. 7. While wearing eye protection, use a 3 mm drill bit to drill two holes into the carpet clip where you made the marks. 8. Position the new carpet clip on the center mark you made in step 4. Use a felt-tip pen to mark the hole locations on the carpet. Use a utility knife to cut out the holes. 9. Use a small wire tie to fasten the carpet clip to the carpet. Cut off the excess wire tie. 10. Lift up the carpet, and find the open area under it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carpet: > 04-044 > Jul > 04 > Interior - Carpet is Loose at Right Front Door Sill > Page 8256 11. Press the foam block into the open area. (No adhesive is needed; friction holds the block in place.) 12. Put the carpet back down in its original position, and clip it in place. Reinstall the kick panel and the door sill trim. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Carpet: Procedures Carpet Replacement (V6) Carpet Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. With Side Curtain Airbag NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove these items: - Front driver's seats - Rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door - Rear seat side bolsters, both sides, 4-door - Kick panels, both sides, 2-door, 4-Door - Door sill trim, 2-door - Center console - Dashboard center lower cover, driver's, passenger's - Parking brake lever - Front seat, belt lower anchor bolt, both sides, 2-door, 4-door 4. Remove these items: - Front passenger's seat - Front door sill trim, both sides, 4-door - Rear door sill trim, both sides, 4-door - B-pillar lower trim, both side, 4-door - Driver's dashboard under cover - Passenger's dashboard lower cover 5. Detach the clips, then remove the footrest (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8259 6. Disconnect the antenna lead (A) and antenna connector (B), and disconnect the side curtain airbag subharness connector (C). Detach the harness clips (D), and using a Torx T30 bit, remove the ground bolt (E). 7. Remove the bolts securing the select lever bracket (A). 8. Two-piece type: Release the clips (A) fastening the front carpet (B) and rear carpet (C). One-piece type: Release the clip (A) from middle of the carpet (D). Two-piece type: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8260 One-piece type: 9. Release the hooks (E) with a flat-tip screwdriver and the fastener (F), then remove the carpet (one-piece type) or the front and rear carpets (two-piece type). 10. Install the carpet(s) in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly. - Replace the clip if its damaged. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Do the PCM idle learn procedure - Perform the power window control unit reset procedure. Carpet Replacement (All) Carpet Replacement SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. Remove these items: - Front seats, both sides. - Rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. - Rear seat side bolsters, both sides, 4-door. - Kick panels, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. - Front door sill trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. - Rear door sill trim, both sides. - B-pillar lower trim, 4-door. - Center console. - Driver's dashboard center lower cover. - Passenger's dashboard center lower cover. - Parking brake lever. 2. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor bolt, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8261 3. Detach the clips, then remove the footrest (A). 4. M/T Model: Remove the bolts, then remove the center console bracket (A). 5. Disconnect the antenna lead (A) and antenna connector (B). Detach the harness clips (C), and using a Torx T30 bit, remove the ground bolt (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8262 6. Remove the bolts securing the change lever bracket or select lever bracket (A). 7. Two-piece type: Release the clips (A) fastening the front carpet (B) and rear carpet(C). One-piece type: Release the clip (A) from middle of the carpet (D). Two-piece type: One-piece type 8. Release the hooks (E) with a flat-tip screwdriver, and the fastener (F), then remove the carpet (one-piece type) or the front and rear carpets (two-piece type). 9. Install the carpets(s) in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses and antenna lead are routed correctly. - Replace the clip if it's damaged. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8263 Carpet: Removal and Replacement Carpet Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. With side curtain airbag: Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. With side curtain airbag: Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove these items: - Front seats, both sides - Rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door - Rear seat side bolsters, both sides, 4-door - Front door sill trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door - Kick panels, both sides, 2-door, 4-door - Rear door sill trim, both sides, 4-door - B-pillar lower trim, 4-door without side curtain airbags, 4-door with side curtain airbags - Center console - Driver's dashboard center lower cover - Passenger's dashboard center lower cover - '04-06 models: Driver's dashboard undercover - '04-06 models: Passenger's dashboard lower cover - Parking brake lever 4. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor bolt, both sides ('03 model) or passenger's side ('04-06 models), 2-door, 4-door. 5. Detach the clips, then remove the footrest (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8264 6. M/T model: Remove the bolts, then remove the center console bracket (A). 7. Disconnect the antenna lead (A) and antenna connector (B). If equipped, disconnect the side curtain airbag subharness connector (C). Detach the harness clips (D), and using a T30 Torx bit, remove the ground bolt (E). 8. Remove the bolts securing the change lever bracket or select lever bracket (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8265 9. Two-piece type: Release the clips (A) fastening the front carpet (B) and rear carpet (C). One-piece type: Release the clip (A) from middle of the carpet (D). 10. Release the hooks (E) with a flat-tip screwdriver-push the screwdriver toward the door, then lift upward. Remove the fastener (F), and then remove the carpet (one-piece type) or the front and rear carpets (two-piece type). 11. Install the carpet(s) in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly. - Replace the clip if it is damaged. With side curtain airbags: Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Console: > 02-067 > Jun > 03 > Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly Console: Customer Interest Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly 02-067 June 24, 2003 * Applies To: * See VEHICLES AFFECTED Center Pocket Lid Does Not Work Properly (Supersedes 02-067, dated December 10, 2002) Updated information is shown by black bars and Asterisks. SYMPTOM The center pocket lid either does not open or it opens but does not stay closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The locking pin on the end of the locking arm is bent so it cannot engage the cam slot. * VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the locking arm. PARTS INFORMATION Locking Arm (G-Sensor Comp): P/N 77282-SDA-A00, H/C 7337645 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841108 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 77280-SDA-A31ZA H/C 7146947 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Console: > 02-067 > Jun > 03 > Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly > Page 8274 Defect Code: 002 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 02-067A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Open the center pocket lid. If the lid is stuck, force it open. 2. Remove the center holder (see page 20-107 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 3. Remove the center pocket. 4. Locate the white plastic locking arm on the left side of the center pocket. Note carefully how the tension spring mounts to the arm. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Console: > 02-067 > Jun > 03 > Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly > Page 8275 5. While pushing on the locking arm counterweight, close the lid enough to release the locking pin on the end of the arm from the cam slot in the arm of the lid. 6. Remove the locking arm (one screw). 7. Transfer the tension spring from the old locking arm to the new one. Install the new locking arm, making sure the arm pivots freely. If needed, loosen the mounting screw until it does. 8. Engage the locking pin in the cam slot, then make sure the lid opens and closes properly. If it does not, replace the center pocket. 9. Reinstall the center pocket. 10. Reinstall the center holder. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Console: > 02-069 > Nov > 02 > Interior - Center Pocket Mat is Wavy Console: Customer Interest Interior - Center Pocket Mat is Wavy 02-069 November 12, 2002 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL Center Pocket Mat Is Wavy PROBLEM The center pocket mat is wavy or does not lie flat. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center pocket mat. New mats are made of a different material and have more adhesive. PARTS INFORMATION Center Pocket Mat: P/N 83143-SDA-999, H/C 7361538 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841107 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 77280-SDA-A31ZA H/C 7146947 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A99 Template ID: 02-069A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Open the center pocket lid. 2. Remove the center holder (see page 20-107 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Console: > 02-069 > Nov > 02 > Interior - Center Pocket Mat is Wavy > Page 8280 3. Remove the center pocket. 4. Remove and discard the center pocket mat. 5. Peel off the paper backing, and install the new mat in the center pocket. Starting with the tabs, smooth out the mat with your fingers to ensure good adhesion. NOTE: The tabs on the end of the new mat are there to properly position it during installation. Leave them alone; they do not attach to the back of the center pocket. 6. Reinstall the center pocket. 7. Reinstall the center holder. DISCLAIMER Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Console: > 02-067 > Jun > 03 > Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly Console: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly 02-067 June 24, 2003 * Applies To: * See VEHICLES AFFECTED Center Pocket Lid Does Not Work Properly (Supersedes 02-067, dated December 10, 2002) Updated information is shown by black bars and Asterisks. SYMPTOM The center pocket lid either does not open or it opens but does not stay closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The locking pin on the end of the locking arm is bent so it cannot engage the cam slot. * VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the locking arm. PARTS INFORMATION Locking Arm (G-Sensor Comp): P/N 77282-SDA-A00, H/C 7337645 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841108 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 77280-SDA-A31ZA H/C 7146947 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Console: > 02-067 > Jun > 03 > Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly > Page 8286 Defect Code: 002 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 02-067A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Open the center pocket lid. If the lid is stuck, force it open. 2. Remove the center holder (see page 20-107 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 3. Remove the center pocket. 4. Locate the white plastic locking arm on the left side of the center pocket. Note carefully how the tension spring mounts to the arm. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Console: > 02-067 > Jun > 03 > Interior - Center Pocket Doesn't Work Properly > Page 8287 5. While pushing on the locking arm counterweight, close the lid enough to release the locking pin on the end of the arm from the cam slot in the arm of the lid. 6. Remove the locking arm (one screw). 7. Transfer the tension spring from the old locking arm to the new one. Install the new locking arm, making sure the arm pivots freely. If needed, loosen the mounting screw until it does. 8. Engage the locking pin in the cam slot, then make sure the lid opens and closes properly. If it does not, replace the center pocket. 9. Reinstall the center pocket. 10. Reinstall the center holder. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Console: > 02-069 > Nov > 02 > Interior - Center Pocket Mat is Wavy Console: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Center Pocket Mat is Wavy 02-069 November 12, 2002 Applies To: 2003 Accord - ALL Center Pocket Mat Is Wavy PROBLEM The center pocket mat is wavy or does not lie flat. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the center pocket mat. New mats are made of a different material and have more adhesive. PARTS INFORMATION Center Pocket Mat: P/N 83143-SDA-999, H/C 7361538 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841107 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 77280-SDA-A31ZA H/C 7146947 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A99 Template ID: 02-069A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Open the center pocket lid. 2. Remove the center holder (see page 20-107 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Console: > 02-069 > Nov > 02 > Interior - Center Pocket Mat is Wavy > Page 8292 3. Remove the center pocket. 4. Remove and discard the center pocket mat. 5. Peel off the paper backing, and install the new mat in the center pocket. Starting with the tabs, smooth out the mat with your fingers to ensure good adhesion. NOTE: The tabs on the end of the new mat are there to properly position it during installation. Leave them alone; they do not attach to the back of the center pocket. 6. Reinstall the center pocket. 7. Reinstall the center holder. DISCLAIMER Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Console: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8299 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8300 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8301 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8302 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8303 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8304 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8305 Console: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8306 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8307 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8308 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8309 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8310 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8311 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8312 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8313 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8314 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8315 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8316 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8317 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8318 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8319 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8320 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8321 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8322 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8323 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8324 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8325 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8326 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8327 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8328 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8329 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8330 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8331 Console: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8332 Diagram 114-4 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation Console: Service and Repair Center Console Removal/Installation Center Console Removal/Installation NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard, and related parts. 1. M/T: Remove the shift knob (A). -1 Lower the shift lever boot (B) to release the hook (C) from the knob. -2 Remove the shift knob. 2. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the center console front panel (C) up. If equipped, disconnect the seat heater switch connectors (D). 3. Detach the clips (A) by pulling the center console pocket (B) up. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 8335 4. Remove the screws (A), detach the clips (B) and hook (C) by pulling the center holder (D) up, and disconnect the front accessory power socket connector (E). 5. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the center console rear panel (C) up. 6. Remove the center console (A). -1 Open the console box lid (B) then remove the console mat (C). -2 If equipped, disconnect the rear accessary power socket connector (D), and detach the clip (E). -3 Remove the screws (F, G), then pull up the rear portion of the console up to release the hooks (H),then remove it. 7. Install the console in the reverse older of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Console Removal/Installation > Page 8336 Console: Service and Repair Center Console Rear Cover Replacement Center Console Rear Cover Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the center console. 1. Remove the center console. 2. Open the armrest (A) and remove the hinge mounting screws, then remove the armrest. 3. Remove the screws (A) and detach the clips (B) then remove the center console rear cover (C). 4. Install the cover the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8342 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8343 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8344 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Glove Compartment Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Glove Compartment Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Glove Box Lock Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove box. 1. Remove the glove box. 2. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver in under the knob (A) while pulling it, and pry the top of the retainer (B) up. NOTE: Do not remove the retainer entirely. Leave the other side of it in the original position when removing and installing the lock cylinder. 3. Remove the glove box lock cylinder (A). 4. Reinstall the top of the retainer (A) in the original position, then reinstall the lock cylinder (B). Push the cylinder into place securely until the retainer snaps into place. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear 03-007 February 25, 2005 *Applies To: 2003-04 Accord 4-door - ALL 2005 Accord 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM5...5A000001 thru 1HGCM5...5A032195 1HGCM6...5A000001 thru 1HGCM6...5A015257* Headliner Sags in the Back (Supersedes 03-007, dated August 31, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks. SYMPTOM The back of the headliner is sagging. PROBABLE CAUSE The headliner has come loose from the two rear clip holders. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply adhesive to the bottom of the rear clip holders, and reattach the headliner to them. REQUIRED MATERIALS JB Kwik Weld: P/N 8276 (This product is available at most retail auto supply stores. Call 800-529-3530 for information on local suppliers.) or Devcon High Strength Plastic Welder: P/N 8-220 (This product is available at most retail auto supply stores. Call 800-626-7226 for information on local suppliers.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 842013 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 83200-SDA-A21ZA H/C 7164288 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 06101 Template ID: 03-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear > Page 8357 1. Apply masking tape to the edges of the headliner and the rear window to avoid getting adhesive on them. 2. Pull down the headliner near one of the rear clip holders. Pull down the headliner carefully to avoid creasing it. Use coarse-grade sandpaper (about 60 grit) to roughen the headliner area under the clip holder. Sand the area for 15 to 30 seconds. Repeat this step under the other clip holder. NOTE: This step ensures that the headliner sticks properly to the clip holders. *3. Moisten a clean cloth with water, and wipe off any dust from the sanded areas. Make sure the headliner is dry before applying adhesive.* 4. Following the manufacturer's instructions, prepare a small amount of adhesive in a container. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear > Page 8358 5. Leave the rear clip holders in the roof. Make sure each clip holder is turned so its opening is facing toward the front of the vehicle. While pulling down slightly on the headliner, use a putty knife to apply a dab of adhesive to the bottom of each clip holder. 6. Slowly press the headliner against the rear clip holders. Wedge a rod (an 11-inch, 3/8-inch extension works well) padded at both ends, between the rear seat-back and the headliner for support. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear > Page 8359 7. Wait at least 5 minutes, then remove the rod. Pull off the masking tape. Tell your customer not to touch or disturb the headliner for at least 4 hours. * NOTE: Driving with only the rear windows down or other situations that cause wind buffeting may disturb the rear headliner, preventing the adhesive from properly bonding the headliner to the clip holder.* Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior Headliner: Customer Interest Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior 03-037 July 29, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A070867 - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020515 - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A023939 - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A057470 Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water SYMPTOM A water leak from the roof stains the headliner. PROBABLE CAUSE Insufficient application of sealant. CORRECTIVE ACTION Locate and seal the source of the water leak, then replace the headliner. TOOL INFORMATION Door Trim Tool Set: T/N SOJATP2014 These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional tools, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M ULTRAPRO Autobody Sealant: 3M P/N 051135-08302 (One tube will repair approximately 20 roof molding channels.) PARTS INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior > Page 8364 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 83200-SDN-A01ZA H/C 7177710 Defect Code: 059 Contention Code: B06 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood, and move the hood hinge cover out of the way. 2. Start to remove the roof channel molding by disconnecting the molding clips at the windshield. Use plastic trim tools to gently lift the molding to gain access to the clips, then release the windshield molding clips. Refer to the page 20-167 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual. NOTE: Remove the lower clip (at hood hinge) last. Slide the molding off the clip, then rotate the clip. Use care when removing the molding, it will be reused. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior > Page 8365 3. Disconnect the clips at the roof molding, and remove the molding. Slide the molding off the tab at the rear of the roof molding. 4. Remove the headliner. Refer to the page 20-99 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags, refer to page 20-11 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual V-6 Supplement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior > Page 8366 5. Create a soapy mixture that consists of two tablespoons of liquid detergent and five ounces of water. 6. Pour the soapy mixture into the roof molding channel. Blow compressed air from the interior of the vehicle at the channel to locate and pinpoint the exact location of the leak(s). Be sure to test the full length of the molding channel. 7. Clean and dry the roof molding channel. 8. Apply a liberal amount of 3M ULTRAPRO Autobody Sealant to the area(s) that leaked. 9. Install the new headliner. 10. Reinstall the roof channel molding. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear 03-007 February 25, 2005 *Applies To: 2003-04 Accord 4-door - ALL 2005 Accord 4-door - From VIN 1HGCM5...5A000001 thru 1HGCM5...5A032195 1HGCM6...5A000001 thru 1HGCM6...5A015257* Headliner Sags in the Back (Supersedes 03-007, dated August 31, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks. SYMPTOM The back of the headliner is sagging. PROBABLE CAUSE The headliner has come loose from the two rear clip holders. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply adhesive to the bottom of the rear clip holders, and reattach the headliner to them. REQUIRED MATERIALS JB Kwik Weld: P/N 8276 (This product is available at most retail auto supply stores. Call 800-529-3530 for information on local suppliers.) or Devcon High Strength Plastic Welder: P/N 8-220 (This product is available at most retail auto supply stores. Call 800-626-7226 for information on local suppliers.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 842013 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 83200-SDA-A21ZA H/C 7164288 Defect Code: 06201 Symptom Code: 06101 Template ID: 03-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear > Page 8372 1. Apply masking tape to the edges of the headliner and the rear window to avoid getting adhesive on them. 2. Pull down the headliner near one of the rear clip holders. Pull down the headliner carefully to avoid creasing it. Use coarse-grade sandpaper (about 60 grit) to roughen the headliner area under the clip holder. Sand the area for 15 to 30 seconds. Repeat this step under the other clip holder. NOTE: This step ensures that the headliner sticks properly to the clip holders. *3. Moisten a clean cloth with water, and wipe off any dust from the sanded areas. Make sure the headliner is dry before applying adhesive.* 4. Following the manufacturer's instructions, prepare a small amount of adhesive in a container. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear > Page 8373 5. Leave the rear clip holders in the roof. Make sure each clip holder is turned so its opening is facing toward the front of the vehicle. While pulling down slightly on the headliner, use a putty knife to apply a dab of adhesive to the bottom of each clip holder. 6. Slowly press the headliner against the rear clip holders. Wedge a rod (an 11-inch, 3/8-inch extension works well) padded at both ends, between the rear seat-back and the headliner for support. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-007 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging In Rear > Page 8374 7. Wait at least 5 minutes, then remove the rod. Pull off the masking tape. Tell your customer not to touch or disturb the headliner for at least 4 hours. * NOTE: Driving with only the rear windows down or other situations that cause wind buffeting may disturb the rear headliner, preventing the adhesive from properly bonding the headliner to the clip holder.* Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior 03-037 July 29, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A070867 - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A020515 - From VIN 1HGCM8...3A000001 thru 1HGCM8...3A023939 - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A057470 Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water SYMPTOM A water leak from the roof stains the headliner. PROBABLE CAUSE Insufficient application of sealant. CORRECTIVE ACTION Locate and seal the source of the water leak, then replace the headliner. TOOL INFORMATION Door Trim Tool Set: T/N SOJATP2014 These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional tools, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M ULTRAPRO Autobody Sealant: 3M P/N 051135-08302 (One tube will repair approximately 20 roof molding channels.) PARTS INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior > Page 8379 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 83200-SDN-A01ZA H/C 7177710 Defect Code: 059 Contention Code: B06 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood, and move the hood hinge cover out of the way. 2. Start to remove the roof channel molding by disconnecting the molding clips at the windshield. Use plastic trim tools to gently lift the molding to gain access to the clips, then release the windshield molding clips. Refer to the page 20-167 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual. NOTE: Remove the lower clip (at hood hinge) last. Slide the molding off the clip, then rotate the clip. Use care when removing the molding, it will be reused. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior > Page 8380 3. Disconnect the clips at the roof molding, and remove the molding. Slide the molding off the tab at the rear of the roof molding. 4. Remove the headliner. Refer to the page 20-99 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags, refer to page 20-11 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual V-6 Supplement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-037 > Jul > 03 > Body - Roof Molding Channel Leaks Water To Interior > Page 8381 5. Create a soapy mixture that consists of two tablespoons of liquid detergent and five ounces of water. 6. Pour the soapy mixture into the roof molding channel. Blow compressed air from the interior of the vehicle at the channel to locate and pinpoint the exact location of the leak(s). Be sure to test the full length of the molding channel. 7. Clean and dry the roof molding channel. 8. Apply a liberal amount of 3M ULTRAPRO Autobody Sealant to the area(s) that leaked. 9. Install the new headliner. 10. Reinstall the roof channel molding. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance Headlamp Bulb: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance 08-010 March 19, 2008 Applies To: 2003-07 Accord - ALL VINs beginning with 1HG and 3HG Low Beam Headlight Distributes Light Poorly (Supersedes 08-010, dated February 9, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM There is poor light distribution from the low beam in one or both headlights, making it difficult to see street signs. PROBABLE CAUSE The low beam (HB4) headlight bulb made by Sylvania does not provide proper light distribution. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected Sylvania headlight bulb(s). PARTS INFORMATION Low Beam Headlight Bulb: P/N 33116-884-All, H/C 6487201 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Any affected vehicle with Sylvania brand low beam headlight bulbs, in or out of warranty, is eligible for free bulb replacement. Headlight adjustment, if needed, is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. Failed Part: P/N 33116-584-A01 H/C 6248710 Defect Code: 5WB00 Symptom Code: Q7400 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Check the headlight aim. Are the headlights aimed properly? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Adjust the headlights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance > Page 8387 NOTE: Headlight adjustment is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. ^ Refer to page 22-196 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword HEADLIGHT, and select Headlight Adjustment from the list. 2. Inspect both low beam headlight bulbs. Is a Sylvania bulb installed in either headlight? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the affected bulb(s): ^ Refer to page 22-198 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords HEADLIGHT BULB, and select Exterior Light Bulb Replacement from the list. 2. Turn on the headlights to confirm that they operate correctly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance > Page 8393 NOTE: Headlight adjustment is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. ^ Refer to page 22-196 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword HEADLIGHT, and select Headlight Adjustment from the list. 2. Inspect both low beam headlight bulbs. Is a Sylvania bulb installed in either headlight? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the affected bulb(s): ^ Refer to page 22-198 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords HEADLIGHT BULB, and select Exterior Light Bulb Replacement from the list. 2. Turn on the headlights to confirm that they operate correctly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8394 Headliner: Testing and Inspection Checking and Adjusting the Headliner/Pillar Trim Overlap To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying and damaged the pillar trim, the overlap between the headliner and pillar trim must be less then 15 mm. To check the overlap, do this: 1. Install the headliner (A) and the pillar trims (B). 2. Using masking tape on the headliner, mark the upper edge of each pillar trim, 3. Remove the pillar trims, and measure the headliner overlap. - If the overlap is less than 15 mm, remove the tape, and install the pillar trims. - If the overlap is 15 mm or more, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8395 4. Carefully trim the headliner with a utility knife, reducing the overlap to less than 15 mm. 5. Remove the tape, and install the pillar trims. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8396 Headliner: Adjustments Checking and Adjusting the Headliner/Pillar Trim Overlap To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying and damaged the pillar trim, the overlap between the headliner and pillar trim must be less then 15 mm. To check the overlap, do this: 1. Install the headliner (A) and the pillar trims (B). 2. Using masking tape on the headliner, mark the upper edge of each pillar trim, 3. Remove the pillar trims, and measure the headliner overlap. - If the overlap is less than 15 mm, remove the tape, and install the pillar trims. - If the overlap is 15 mm or more, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8397 4. Carefully trim the headliner with a utility knife, reducing the overlap to less than 15 mm. 5. Remove the tape, and install the pillar trims. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Headliner: Procedures Headliner Removal/Installation (V6) Headliner Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. With Side Curtain Airbag NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove these items: - A-pillar trim, both sides - Ceiling light - Front door sill trim and rear door sill trim, both sides, 4-door - B-pillar lower trim, both sides, 4-door - C-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door - Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides, 2-door, 4-door - B-pillar upper trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door 2. Release the tabs (A) on both sides with a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the sunvisor cap (B) from the bracket (C). Turn the cap, and remove it. 3. Remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B) from both sides. -1 Remove the self-tapping ET screws. -2 Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8400 -3 Disconnect the vanity mirror light connector (C). -4 Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (D), and turn the holder 90 °, then pull it out. 4. Remove the roof console (A). -1 Remove the lens (B). -2 Remove the bolts (C,D). -3 Pull out the roof console, and front individual map light (E). Disconnect the front individual map light connector (F), and ambient light connector (G). 5. 4-door: Lower the grab handle, then pry out the lids (A). Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining grab handles. 6. Remove the headliner. -1 4-door: Remove the socket plug (A). -2 Remove the front door opening trim (B) and rear door opening trim (C) from each roof portion. -3 Detach the clip (D) (4-door), and release the fasteners (E) by pulling the front portion of the headliner(F) down. -4 With the help of an assistant, release the headliner from the clips (G) and moonroof frame (H) by sliding the headliner rearward, and lowering the headliner. -5 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8401 2-door: 4-door: 7. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If the side curtain airbags have deployed, replace the headliner and both front grab handles (4-door) with new ones. Check other interior trim pieces for damage before reinstallation and if necessary replaced. - If the side curtain airbags have not deployed, the removed interior trim pieces should still be checked for damage, and replaced with new ones if necessary. - Make sure the top of the headliner overlaps with the headliner correctly - When reinstalling the headliner through the door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - 4-door: If the threads on a visor and grab handle screws are worn out, use an oversized self-tapping ET screw made specifically for this application: Visor: P/N 90137-S30-0030 Grab handle: P/N 90137-S0A-0030 - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. Headliner Removal/Installation (All) Headliner Removal/Installation NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove these items: - A-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. - Ceiling light. - Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. - B-pillar lower trim, 4-door. - B-pillar upper trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. - C-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door, 4-door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8402 2. From both sides, using a flat-tip screwdriver, release the tabs (A), then remove the sunvisor cap (B) from the bracket (C). Turn the cap, and remove it. 3. From both sides, remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B). -1 Remove the self-tapping ET screws. -2 Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder. -3 If equipped, disconnect the vanity mirror light connector (C). -4 Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (D), and turn the holder 90 °, then pull it out. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8403 4. Remove the roof console (A). -1 Remove the lens (B). -2 Remove the bolts (C, D). -3 Pull out the roof console, and front individual map light (E). Disconnect the front individual map light connector (F), and if equipped, ambient light connector (G). 5. 4-door: Lower the grab handle, then pry out the lid (A). Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining grab handles. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8404 6. Remove the headliner. With moonroof: -1 4-door: Remove the socket plug (A). -2 Remove the front door opening trim (B) and rear door opening trim (C) from each roof portion. -3 Detach the clip (D) (4-door), and release the fasteners (E) by pulling the front portion of the headliner (F) down. -4 With the help of an assistant, release the headliner from the clips (G) and moonroof frame (H) by sliding the headliner rearward, and lowering the headliner. -5 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8405 7. Remove the headliner. Without moonroof: -1 Remove the front door opening trim (A) and rear door opening trim (B) from each roof portion. -2 With the help of an assistant, release the headliner (C) from the clips (D) by sliding the headliner rearward, and lowering the headliner. -3 Remove the cushion tape (E), then remove the roof harness (F) from the headliner. -4 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8406 8. 4-door: If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the front grab handle bracket (A) and rear grab handle bracket (B) from each side by releasing the hooks (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8407 9. If necessary, detach the hooks (A) and the clip (B), then remove the front roof side pad (C) and rear roof side pad (D). 10. 4-door with moonroof: If necessary, pull down the roof console bracket (A) to release the clip. 11. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - When reinstalling the headliner through the door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - If the threads on a visor and grab handle (4-door) screws are worn out, use an oversized self-tapping ET screw made specifically for this application: Visor: P/N 90137-S30-0030 Grab handle: P/N 90137-S0A-0030 - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8408 Headliner: Removal and Replacement Headliner Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend or scratch the headliner. - Be, careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove these items: - A-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbag, 2-door with side curtain airbag , 4-door without side curtain airbag , 4-door with side curtain airbag - Ceiling light - Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides, 2-door 4-door - B-pillar lower trim, 4-door without side curtain airbags, 4-door with side curtain airbags- B-pillar upper trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbags, 2-door with side curtain airbags , 4-door without side curtain airbags , 4-door with side curtain airbags - C-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbags, 2-door with side curtain airbags, 4-door without side curtain airbags , 4-door with side curtain airbags page 2. From both sides, using a trim tool, release the tabs (A), then turn the sunvisor cap (B), and remove it from the bracket (C). 3. From both sides, remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B). 1. Remove the self-tapping ET screws. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8409 2. Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder. 3. If equipped, disconnect the vanity mirror light connector (C). 4. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (D), turn the holder 90 degree, and then pull it out. 4. Remove the roof console (A). 1. Remove the lens (B). 2. Remove the bolts (C, D). 3. Pull out the roof console, and front individual map light (E). Disconnect the front individual map light connector (F), and if equipped, ambient light connector (G). 5. 4-door: Lower the grab handle, then pry out the lids (A). Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining grab handles. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8410 6. With moonroof: Remove the headliner. 1. 4-door: Remove the socket plug (A). 2. Remove the front door opening trim (B) and rear door opening trim (C) from each roof portion. 3. Detach the clip (D) (4-door), and release the fasteners (E) by pulling the front portion of the headliner (F) down. 4. With the help of an assistant, detach the rear clips (G) by pulling the rear portion of the headliner down, and release the headliner from the moonroof frame (H) by sliding the headliner rearward, and lowering it. 5. Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8411 7. Without moonroof: Remove the headliner. 1. Remove the front door opening trim (A) and rear door opening trim (B) from each roof portion. 2. With the help of an assistant, detach the rear clips (C) by pulling the rear portion of the headliner (D) down. 3. Remove the cushion tape (E), then remove the roof harness (F) from the headliner. 4. Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8412 8. 4-door without side curtain airbag: If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the front grab handle bracket (A) and rear grab handle brackets (B) from both sides by releasing the hooks (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8413 9. Without side curtain airbag: If necessary, detach the hooks (A) and the clip (B), then remove the front roof side pad (C) and rear roof side pad (D). 10. 4-door with moonroof: If necessary, pull down the roof console bracket (A) to release the clip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8414 11. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, replace the headliner and front grab handle (4-door) on deployed side with new ones. - To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, being damaged when deploying, and injuring persons when deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these kinds of damage: Any creases or tears in the headliner (A) - Any fasteners (B) or clip bases (C) which have come off the headliner - Any damage around the grab handle holes (D) (4-door) or sunvisor holes (E) in the headliner - Any deformations in the grab handle (F) (4-door) - Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (G) - Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (H) - Any cracks in the sunvisor base (I) - Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (J) - Any deformations in the grab handle bracket (4-door) - Replace any damaged parts with new ones. - Make sure the top of the headliner overlaps with the trim pieces correctly. - When passing the headliner through the door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - 4-door: If the threads on a visor or grab handle screw are worn out, use an oversized self-tapping ET screw made specifically for this Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8415 application: Visor: P/N 90137-S30-003 Grab handle: P/N 90137-SOA-003 - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Shelf: > 03-018 > Mar > 03 > Interior - Rear Shelf Rattles Rear Shelf: Customer Interest Interior - Rear Shelf Rattles 03-018 March 4, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C019349 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A054708 2003 Accord 2-Door From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A014092 Rattle From the Rear Shelf SYMPTOM A rattle can be heard from the rear shelf area. PROBABLE CAUSE The dynamic damper does not fit tightly against the rear shelf. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install washers between the dynamic damper and the rear shelf. PARTS INFORMATION 6 mm washer (2 required): P/N 94103-06800, H/C 0629824 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 848302 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 74799-SDA-A01 H/C 7174741 Defect Code: 043 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-015A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear shelf trim (see page 20-95 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 2. Remove the dynamic damper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Shelf: > 03-018 > Mar > 03 > Interior - Rear Shelf Rattles > Page 8424 3. Install two 6 mm washers between the dynamic damper bracket and the rear shelf. 4. Reinstall the dynamic damper and the rear shelf trim. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Shelf: > 03-018 > Mar > 03 > Interior - Rear Shelf Rattles Rear Shelf: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Rear Shelf Rattles 03-018 March 4, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN JHMCM5...3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C019349 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A054708 2003 Accord 2-Door From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A014092 Rattle From the Rear Shelf SYMPTOM A rattle can be heard from the rear shelf area. PROBABLE CAUSE The dynamic damper does not fit tightly against the rear shelf. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install washers between the dynamic damper and the rear shelf. PARTS INFORMATION 6 mm washer (2 required): P/N 94103-06800, H/C 0629824 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 848302 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 74799-SDA-A01 H/C 7174741 Defect Code: 043 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-015A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear shelf trim (see page 20-95 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 2. Remove the dynamic damper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Shelf: > 03-018 > Mar > 03 > Interior - Rear Shelf Rattles > Page 8430 3. Install two 6 mm washers between the dynamic damper bracket and the rear shelf. 4. Reinstall the dynamic damper and the rear shelf trim. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rear Shelf: Procedures Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the high mount brake light, first disconnect the bulb socket. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. - Make sure the high mount brake light bulb socket is connected securely. 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the high mount brake light, first disconnect the bulb socket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8433 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits and hole in the rear shelf. - Make sure the high mount brake light bulb socket is connected securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8434 Rear Shelf: Removal and Replacement Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the C-pillar trim from both sides, without side curtain airbags, with side curtain airbags. 2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (A). 1. Pull the upper edge of the cover back to detach the hooks (B) and clips. 2. Pull the bottom edge of the cover back to detach the hooks (C) from the body flange. 3. '03-05 models: Remove the high mount brake light (A). 1. From the trunk compartment, disconnect the high mount brake light bulb socket (B). 2. Push the high mount brake light towards the rear window, and gently pry up at the back to release the front hooks (C). 3. Release the rear hooks (D), then remove the high mount brake light. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8435 4. From both sides, pull the rear speaker grille (A) up to detach the clips, then remove the rear speaker grille. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8436 5. Remove the rear shelf (A). 1. From the trunk compartment, release the hooks (B) from the rear seat-back lock cylinder (C), then remove the lock cylinder trim (D). 2. Lift the rear shelf to detach the clips. 3. Release both rear corner edges (E) of the rear shelf from the rear window opening flange (F), and pull the rear shelf toward the front of the vehicle. 6. Pull the rear center seat belt (G) out through the slit (H) in the rear shelf. 7. Install the shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the high mount brake light bulb socket is connected securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the C-pillar trim from both sides, without side curtain airbags, with side curtain airbags. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8437 2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (A). 1. Pull the upper edge of the cover back to detach the hooks (B) and clips. 2. Pull the bottom edge of the cover back to release the cover from the body flange. 3. '03-05 models: Remove the.high mount brake light (A). 1. From the trunk compartment, disconnect the high mount brake light bulb socket (B). 2. Push the high mount brake light towards the rear window, and gently pry up at the back to release the front hooks (C). 3. Release the rear hooks (D), then remove the high mount brake light. 4. From both sides, pull the rear speaker grille (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then remove the rear speaker grille. 5. Remove the rear shelf (A). 1. Pull the lock cylinder trim (B) up to release the hooks (C), then remove the trim from the rear seat-back lock cylinder (D). 2. Lift the rear shelf to detach the clips. 3. Pull the rear shelf toward the front of the vehicle. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8438 6. Pull both rear seat belts (E) and rear center seat belt (F) out through the slits (G) in the rear shelf. 7. Install the shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center seat belt through the slits in the rear shelf. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the high mount brake light bulb socket is connected securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door - Door Sill Area NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Left side: Remove the footrest. 2. Left side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and bolt. 3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F) or (G), then remove it. 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (H) from the opener (I). 5. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (J) up to detach the clips (K), then remove the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8442 6. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B). 1. Pull out the door opening trim (C) as needed from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door opening flange. 2. Left side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold it. 3. Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it. 7. Pull out the door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the door opening flange, then remove the trim. 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable is connected securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door - Front Door Sill Area NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8443 1. Left side: Remove the footrest. 2. Left side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and bolt 3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F) or (G), then remove it. 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (H) from the opener (I). 5. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (J) up to detach the clips (K), then remove the trim. 6. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B). 1. Pull out the door opening trim (C) as needed from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door opening flange. 2. Left side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold it. 3. Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8444 7. Pull out the front door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange, then remove the trim. 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable is connected securely Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door - Rear Door Sill Area NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Detach the hook (A) and tab (B) from the B-pillar lower trim (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D) up by hand to detach the clips (E), then remove it. 2. If necessary, pull the rear side outer trim (F) up to detach the clips (G), then remove the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8445 3. Pull out the rear door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the rear door opening flange, then remove the trim. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Replacement Sun Visor Information Sun Visor: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Replacement Sun Visor Information Always Use Correct Replacement Sunvisors Need to replace one or both of the sunvisors in a '03-04 Accord? Make sure you order and install the correct replacement sunvisor for that vehicle. This is especially important if it's got side curtain airbags. Never install a sunvisor made for a vehicle without side curtain airbags in a vehicle with them. The consequences could be dire; just read the letter we sent to all dealerships on March 29, 2005, titled "Vehicle Modifications Affecting Safety Systems." This is serious stuff. Fortunately, there's a real easy way to tell which sunvisor goes with which vehicle. In vehicles with side curtain airbags, the entire sunvisor extends on its mount. In vehicles without side curtain airbags, the sunvisors have a plastic extender that slides in and out. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 04-023 > Sep > 04 > Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down Trim Panel: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down 04-023 September 3, 2004 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord 4-Door - ALL Right Side Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down or Does Not Fit Properly (Supersedes 04-023, dated May 7, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks. PROBLEM The right side trunk trim panel does not fit properly. CORRECTIVE ACTION Drill a hole in the trim panel, and install a 7 mm push-in clip. PARTS INFORMATION Clip: P/N 90667-50D-003ZC, H/C 6245518 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 848002 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 84601-SDA-A01ZA H/C 7151137 Defect Code: 07404 Symptom Code: 07304 * Template ID: 04-023A* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 04-023 > Sep > 04 > Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down > Page 8458 1. Open the trunk. Locate the hole in the right rear quarter panel. 2. Position the trunk trim panel next to the hole, and make a mark with a felt-tip pen where the panel needs to be drilled. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 04-023 > Sep > 04 > Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down > Page 8459 3. Push the trim panel against the quarter panel, and drill a 6 or 7 mm hole through the panel. NOTE: Use a short drill bit, being careful to drill through the trim panel only. 4. Hold the trim panel in place, and install the clip. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 04-023 > Sep > 04 > Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down Trim Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down 04-023 September 3, 2004 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord 4-Door - ALL Right Side Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down or Does Not Fit Properly (Supersedes 04-023, dated May 7, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks. PROBLEM The right side trunk trim panel does not fit properly. CORRECTIVE ACTION Drill a hole in the trim panel, and install a 7 mm push-in clip. PARTS INFORMATION Clip: P/N 90667-50D-003ZC, H/C 6245518 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 848002 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 84601-SDA-A01ZA H/C 7151137 Defect Code: 07404 Symptom Code: 07304 * Template ID: 04-023A* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 04-023 > Sep > 04 > Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down > Page 8465 1. Open the trunk. Locate the hole in the right rear quarter panel. 2. Position the trunk trim panel next to the hole, and make a mark with a felt-tip pen where the panel needs to be drilled. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 04-023 > Sep > 04 > Body - Trunk Trim Panel Hangs Down > Page 8466 3. Push the trim panel against the quarter panel, and drill a 6 or 7 mm hole through the panel. NOTE: Use a short drill bit, being careful to drill through the trim panel only. 4. Hold the trim panel in place, and install the clip. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door - Door Sill Area NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Left side: Remove the footrest. 2. Left side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and bolt. 3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F) or (G), then remove it. 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (H) from the opener (I). 5. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (J) up to detach the clips (K), then remove the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8469 6. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B). 1. Pull out the door opening trim (C) as needed from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door opening flange. 2. Left side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold it. 3. Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it. 7. Pull out the door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the door opening flange, then remove the trim. 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable is connected securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door - Front Door Sill Area NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8470 1. Left side: Remove the footrest. 2. Left side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and bolt 3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F) or (G), then remove it. 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (H) from the opener (I). 5. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (J) up to detach the clips (K), then remove the trim. 6. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B). 1. Pull out the door opening trim (C) as needed from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door opening flange. 2. Left side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold it. 3. Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8471 7. Pull out the front door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening flange, then remove the trim. 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Make sure the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable is connected securely Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door - Rear Door Sill Area NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Detach the hook (A) and tab (B) from the B-pillar lower trim (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D) up by hand to detach the clips (E), then remove it. 2. If necessary, pull the rear side outer trim (F) up to detach the clips (G), then remove the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8472 3. Pull out the rear door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the rear door opening flange, then remove the trim. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8473 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 A-pillar - Without Side Curtain Airbags ('03-04 models) NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Pull out the door opening trim (A) as needed. Pull the upper portion of the A-pillar trim (B) back by hand to detach the clips, and pull the trim up, then remove it from the dashboard (C). NOTE: The 2-door is shown, the 4-door is similar. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door-B-pillar - Without Side Curtain Airbags ('03-04 models) NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - C-pillar trim, front portion as needed - Side trim panel, upper portion as needed - Door opening trim, as needed 2. Remove the front seat belt upper anchor bolt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8474 3. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A). 1. Remove the clip (B) from the seat belt guide (C). 2. Pull out the trim by hand to detach the clips (D), and to release the hooks (E) in the numbered sequence. 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. - Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. - When installing the side trim panel, make sure the seat belt is not pinched. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door-B-pillar - Without Side Curtain Airbags ('03-04 models) SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Front door sill trim - Rear door sill trim - Front door opening trim, as needed - Rear door opening trim, as needed 1. Remove these items: - Front door sill trim - Rear door sill trim - Front door opening trim, as needed - Rear door opening trim, as needed Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8475 2. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A). 1. Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of the trim back by hand. 2. Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (B). 3. Remove the upper anchor cover, and remove the upper anchor bolt. 4. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A). 1. Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the lower clip. 2. Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the trim. 3. Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (B). 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. - Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. Special Tools Required Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8476 KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door-C-pillar - Without Side Curtain Airbags ('03-04 models) NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the rear seat belt lower anchor bolt. 3. Left side: Pull the coat hanger (A) down, and remove the coat hanger cover (B) by releasing the hook (C), then remove the screw (D). Right side: Remove the right C-pillar cap (E) by releasing the hooks (F), then remove the screw (G). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8477 4. Remove the C-pillar trim (A). 1. Pull the front edge of the trim down to detach the hooks (B) and clips (C) from the B-pillar upper trim (D). 2. Pull out the trim to detach the clips (E). 3. Pull out the bottom portion of the trim to detach the hooks (F) from the rear shelf (G) and the side trim panel (H). 4. Pass the rear seat belt (I) out through the slit in the trim. 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstallation - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belt. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door-C-pillar - Without Side Curtain Airbags ('03-04 models) NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat side bolster - Rear door opening trim, as needed 2. Pull the C-pillar trim (A) back by hand to detach the clips, then remove it. 3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Push the clips into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 A-pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-06 models) SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8478 1. Remove the A-pillar trim (A). 1. Pull out the door opening trim (B) as needed. 2. Pry the A-pillar cap (C) out until it is stopped by the hooks (D). Release the hooks and pull the cap out of the grommet (E). Discard the cap. 3. Pull the trim back by hand to detach the clip, then pull the trim up. NOTE: The 2-door is shown, the 4-door is similar. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Do not reuse the A-pillar cap; always replace it. - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the A-pillar trim with a new one. - To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these types of damage: Any cracks, deformations, or press-whitenings in the A-pillar trim (A) - Any cracks, or press-whitenings in the grommet and clip seating surfaces (B) - Bent or broken grommet (C). - Replace any damaged parts with new ones. - Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8479 - Push the clips into place securely. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door-B-pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-06 models) SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - C-pillar trim, front portion as needed - Side trim panel, upper portion as needed - Door opening trim, as needed 2. Remove the front seat belt upper anchor bolt. 3. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A). 1. Remove the clip (B) from the seat belt guide (C). 2. Pull out the trim by hand to detach the clips (D), and to release the hooks (E) from the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket (F) in the numbered sequence. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8480 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the B-pillar upper trim with new one. - To prevent the side curtain airbag.from accidentally deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these types of damage: Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar upper trim (A) and the upper hooks (B), and any press-whitenings in the upper part of the trim - Any cracks or press-whitenings in the clip seating surface (C) - Replace any damaged parts with new ones. - Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly. - Make sure the trim hooks are installed into the holes in the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely. - Push the clips into place securely. - Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. - When installing the side trim panel, make sure the seat belt is not pinched. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door-B-pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-06 models) SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Front door sill trim - Rear door sill trim - Front door opening trim, as needed - Rear door opening trim, as needed Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8481 2. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A). 1. Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of the trim back by hand. 2. Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks 3. Remove the upper anchor cover, and remove the upper anchor bolt. 4. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A). 1. Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the lower clip. 2. Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the trim. 3. Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (B) from the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8482 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the B-pillar upper trim with a new one. - To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these kinds of damage: Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar upper trim (A) and the upper hooks (B), and any press-whitenings in the upper part of the trim - Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar lower trim (C), and any breakages in the part (D) fitted with the B-pillar upper trim. - Any cracks or press-whitenings in the clip seating surfaces (E) - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and if necessary, replace them with new ones. - Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly. - Make sure the trim hooks are installed into the holes in the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely. - Push the clips into place securely. - Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door-C-pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-06 models) SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the rear seat belt lower anchor bolt. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8483 3. Left side: Pull the coat hanger (A) down, and remove the coat hanger cover (B) by releasing the hook (C), then remove the screw (D). Right side: Remove the right C-pillar cap (E) by releasing the hooks (F), then remove the screw (G). 4. Remove the C-pillar trim (A). 1. Pry the C-pillar cap (B) out until it is stopped by the hooks (C). Release the hooks and pull the cap out of the grommet (D). Discard the cap. 2. Pull the front edge of the trim down to detach the hooks (E) and clips (F) from the B-pillar upper trim (G). 3. Pull out the trim to detach the clips (H). 4. Pull out the bottom portion of the trim to detach the hooks (I) from the rear shelf (J) and the side trim panel (K). 5. Pass the rear seat belt (L) out though a slit in the trim. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8484 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Do not reuse the C-pillar cap; always replace it. - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the C-pillar trim with new one. - To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these types of damage: Any cracks, deformations, or press-whitenings in the C-pillar trim (A) - Any cracks, or press-whitenings in the grommet and clip seating surfaces (B) - Bent or broken grommet (C) - Replace any damaged parts with new ones. - Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly page. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. - Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstallation. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door-C-pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-06 models) SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat side bolster. - Rear door opening trim, as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8485 2. Remove the C-pillar trim (A). - 1 Pry the C-pillar cap (B) out until it is stopped by the hooks (C). Release the hooks and pull the cap out of the grommet (D). Discard the cap. - 2 Pull the C-pillar trim back by hand to detach the clips, then remove the trim. 3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Do not reuse the C-pillar cap; always replace it. - If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the C-pillar trim with new one. - To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these kinds of damage: Any cracks, deformations, or press-whitenings in the C-pillar trim (A) - Any cracks, or press-whitenings in the grommet and clip seating surfaces (B) - Bent or broken grommet (C) - Replace any damaged parts with new ones. - Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 8486 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take-care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat-back and seat cushion - Door sill trim, as needed - C-pillar trim, without side curtain airbags,with side curtain airbags - Rear bulkhead cover - Rear speaker grille - Rear shelf, as needed 2. Remove the side trim panel (A). 1. Remove the clip (B). 2. Pull out the front upper edge of the trim panel by hand to release the hooks (C) from the B-pillar upper trim (D). 3. Pull the trim panel back by hand to detach the clips (E). 4. While pulling the rear shelf (F) up, pull the trim panel out and forward to release it from the rear clip (G). 3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before reinstalling the side trim panel, remove the remaining rear clip from the body, and install in on the side trim panel. - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt and that it is not pinched by the side trim panel. - Push the clips and hooks into place securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8492 Doors Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8493 108. Door Key Cylinder Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 8496 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8510 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8511 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8512 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8513 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8519 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8520 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8521 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8522 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8523 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8524 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8525 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8526 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8527 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8532 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8533 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8534 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8535 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8536 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8537 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8538 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8539 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8540 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8541 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8542 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8543 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8544 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8545 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8546 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8547 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8548 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8549 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8550 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8551 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8552 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8553 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8554 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8555 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8556 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8557 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Test NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. 1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to reset the transmitter. - If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. - If the locks don't work, go to step 2. 2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. - If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter. - If there is no water damage, go to step 3. 3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button five or six times. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4. 4. Reprogram and register the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, try and program to another vehicle. If still not operating, replace the transmitter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8558 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Transmitter Programming Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors, the hood and the tailgate are closed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 6. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 9. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Within 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless receiver in the power window master switch. 12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators within 1 to 4 sec, then push the transmitter lock or unlock button again, or the code will not be stored. 13. Within 10 sec, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the keyless receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key. 15. Confirm proper operation with the transmitters. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8563 Doors Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8564 108. Door Key Cylinder Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 8567 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations 101. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) 105. Left Rear Door (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8571 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams 40. Door Lock Actuator, Driver's (except USA DX) 41. Door Lock Actuator, Front Passenger's (except USA DX) 42. Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear (4-door: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8572 43. Door Lock Actuator, Right Rear (4-door: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8573 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8574 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations 101. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) 105. Left Rear Door (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8578 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 109. Door Lock Knob Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) 110. Door Lock Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (LX V6, EX, EX-L) 111. Door Lock Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8579 112. Door Lock Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Front Passenger's Door (EX, EXL) 1. Remove the front passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch in Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8582 the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator. Rear Door (EX, EXL) 1. Remove the left or right rear door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8583 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test Passenger's Door Lock Switch 1. Remove the front passenger's switch panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the front passenger's power window switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in LOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in the neutral position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No. 9 terminals when the door lock switch is in the neutral position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder Replacement 4-door NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to scratch the cover. 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the rear seat handle (A) up at either hook portion (B) on the forward side of the trunk pass through cover (C). Then slide the handle half-way up. 2. From trunk compartment side of the cover, using a small screwdriver, press the inside hook (A) down through the access hole (B). 3. While pressing the hook, pry the trunk handle (C) up with a flat-tip screwdriver. 4. Remove the trunk handle (A) and rear seat handle (B) together at the same time. 5. Remove the retainer clip (C), then remove the trunk pass-through cover key cylinder (D) from the cover (E). 6. Install the key cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Put the two handles together before installing them on the trunk pass-through cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder > Page 8588 - Make sure the trunk pass-through cover opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder > Page 8589 Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Key Cylinder Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement 4-door 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B). 2. Remove the bolts securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder clockwise, and remove it. 3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Actuator Test 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the power mirror actuator (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. 4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror actuator. Defogger Test (Canada) 5. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the 8P connector. There should be continuity with the defogger switch ON. If there is no continuity, check for an open circuit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8594 Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair Power Mirror Actuator Replacement 1. Remove the power mirror. 2. Disconnect the 8P connector. 3. Carefully remove the mirror holder from the mirror housing. Gently pull it out by hand. 4. Remove the cover (A), then remove the two screws from the mirror connector (B). 5. Record the terminal locations and wire colors. 6. Cut the wire harness with the wire cutter. 7. Remove the three screws, and separate the mirror housing (A) from the bracket (B). 8. Remove the three screws and separate the actuator (A) from the housing (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8595 9. Route the wire harness (A) of the new actuator (B) through the hole in the bracket (C). 10. Install the new actuator in the reverse order of removal. 11. Insert the terminals into the connector in the original arrangement as shown above. 12. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be careful not to break in the mirror holder when reinstalling it to the actuator. 13. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door. 14. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8599 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Front Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8600 94. Driver's Door (4-door) 218. Driver's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8601 192. Power Mirror Switch (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8602 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8603 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door Mirror Switch Defogger Switch (Canada) 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage 99-062 January 15, 2007 Applies To: ALL Paint Damage From Environmental Fallout (Supersedes 99-062, dated October 12, 1999 to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The exterior paint surface does not feel smooth after the vehicle is washed. PROBABLE CAUSE Environmental fallout (airborne metallic particles, tree sap, paint overspray, road tar, insect residue, etc.) has adhered to the exterior paint surface. NOTE: This form of paint damage should not be confused with acid rain damage. Unlike environmental fallout damage, acid rain damage appears on the paint surface as pits or water spots-possibly black or brown in the center-which may feel smooth to the touch. PREVENTION The shipping wax/wrap guard applied to the vehicle at the factory provides the best protection for the paint finish from environmental fallout and acid rain damage. American Honda strongly recommends that you leave the shipping wax/wrap guard on the vehicle for as long as possible. Your dealership is responsible for maintaining the vehicle's finish after the shipping wax/ wrap guard is removed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a product line from one of the manufacturers listed in REQUIRED MATERIALS to clean the paint surface and to wax it after cleaning. Make sure you follow the manufacturer's instructions for each of the products you use. REQUIRED MATERIALS Each of the clays listed should do at least three vehicles. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8609 In warranty: American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under these conditions: ^ It is done during PDI ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading) Operation number: 812355 Flat rate time: 1.0 hour Failed P/N: PDI-PAINT, H/C 3173994 *Defect code: 08103 Symptom code 08811* Skill level: Repair Technician *NOTE: When submitting the claim, make sure you enter the vehicle's date of receipt in the customer contention comment section. The claim will be rejected without this information.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Wash and dry the vehicle out of direct sunlight. 2. Tear off a piece of clay. Shape the piece with your hands into a flat disk about 3 inches in diameter. 3. Spray a 2-to 3-square-foot area of the affected panel with the manufacturer's lubricant. 4. Clean a 1-square-foot section of the sprayed area by rubbing it with the clay. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8610 5. Check your work by running your fingers over the cleaned and lubricated surface to feel for any remaining contamination. ^ If you feel any particles on the cleaned surface fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, clean the section again, and recheck your work. ^ If the cleaned surface feels smooth, fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, and go to step 6. NOTE: You must carefully fold and knead the clay to keep a clean side next to the paint surface. Never use clay that has fallen on the ground. Any small pieces of dirt or sand that imbed in the clay will scratch the paint surface. If the clay falls on the ground, discard it and get a fresh piece. 6. Clean the remaining sections of the sprayed area (repeat steps 4 and 5). 7. Wipe the lubricant from all the cleaned sections with a clean terry cloth towel. 8. Clean the rest of the affected panel and any additional panels that need cleaning (repeat steps 3 thru 7). 9. Apply the manufacturer's recommended wax or glaze to all the cleaned panels. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-062 > Jan > 07 > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage 99-062 January 15, 2007 Applies To: ALL Paint Damage From Environmental Fallout (Supersedes 99-062, dated October 12, 1999 to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The exterior paint surface does not feel smooth after the vehicle is washed. PROBABLE CAUSE Environmental fallout (airborne metallic particles, tree sap, paint overspray, road tar, insect residue, etc.) has adhered to the exterior paint surface. NOTE: This form of paint damage should not be confused with acid rain damage. Unlike environmental fallout damage, acid rain damage appears on the paint surface as pits or water spots-possibly black or brown in the center-which may feel smooth to the touch. PREVENTION The shipping wax/wrap guard applied to the vehicle at the factory provides the best protection for the paint finish from environmental fallout and acid rain damage. American Honda strongly recommends that you leave the shipping wax/wrap guard on the vehicle for as long as possible. Your dealership is responsible for maintaining the vehicle's finish after the shipping wax/ wrap guard is removed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a product line from one of the manufacturers listed in REQUIRED MATERIALS to clean the paint surface and to wax it after cleaning. Make sure you follow the manufacturer's instructions for each of the products you use. REQUIRED MATERIALS Each of the clays listed should do at least three vehicles. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-062 > Jan > 07 > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8616 In warranty: American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under these conditions: ^ It is done during PDI ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading) Operation number: 812355 Flat rate time: 1.0 hour Failed P/N: PDI-PAINT, H/C 3173994 *Defect code: 08103 Symptom code 08811* Skill level: Repair Technician *NOTE: When submitting the claim, make sure you enter the vehicle's date of receipt in the customer contention comment section. The claim will be rejected without this information.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Wash and dry the vehicle out of direct sunlight. 2. Tear off a piece of clay. Shape the piece with your hands into a flat disk about 3 inches in diameter. 3. Spray a 2-to 3-square-foot area of the affected panel with the manufacturer's lubricant. 4. Clean a 1-square-foot section of the sprayed area by rubbing it with the clay. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-062 > Jan > 07 > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8617 5. Check your work by running your fingers over the cleaned and lubricated surface to feel for any remaining contamination. ^ If you feel any particles on the cleaned surface fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, clean the section again, and recheck your work. ^ If the cleaned surface feels smooth, fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, and go to step 6. NOTE: You must carefully fold and knead the clay to keep a clean side next to the paint surface. Never use clay that has fallen on the ground. Any small pieces of dirt or sand that imbed in the clay will scratch the paint surface. If the clay falls on the ground, discard it and get a fresh piece. 6. Clean the remaining sections of the sprayed area (repeat steps 4 and 5). 7. Wipe the lubricant from all the cleaned sections with a clean terry cloth towel. 8. Clean the rest of the affected panel and any additional panels that need cleaning (repeat steps 3 thru 7). 9. Apply the manufacturer's recommended wax or glaze to all the cleaned panels. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > SN031106 > Nov > 03 > Air Fresheners - Bad News For Paint Or Plastic Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Air Fresheners - Bad News For Paint Or Plastic SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Hanging Air Fresheners: Bad News for Paint or Plastic APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Never let hanging air fresheners come in contact with painted or plastic surfaces. The chemicals used in them can eat into paint or permanently mar the plastic. Most of these air fresheners actually state on their packages to avoid contact with any surface. Advise your customers to heed those words. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 02-072 > Dec > 02 > Body - 2003 Paint Codes Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - 2003 Paint Codes 02-072 December 17, 2002 Applies To: 2003 - ALL 2003 Honda Paint Codes Paint formulations are determined by each paint company. For questions about formulas or color matching, call your paint supplier or one of the companies listed at the end of this service bulletin. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 02-072 > Dec > 02 > Body - 2003 Paint Codes > Page 8626 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 02-072 > Dec > 02 > Body - 2003 Paint Codes > Page 8627 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 02-072 > Dec > 02 > Body - 2003 Paint Codes > Page 8628 The number following the paint description is the paint process used during the vehicle manufacture: 1 - Two-stage process. Clear coat is applied over the color coat. 2 - Two-stage process. A small amount of color is mixed in the clear coat and applied over the color. 3 - Single-stage process. No clear coat is applied. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-030 > May > 99 > Vehicle - Recommended Repair Materials (IN CD) Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Recommended Repair Materials (IN CD) 99-030 May 4, 1999 Applies To: ALL Recommended Materials Many procedures in service bulletins and other service publications require you to use adhesives, sealants, lubricants, solvents, wool felt, EPT sealer, etc. While some of these materials look and feel similar to each other or to non-approved materials, always use the recommended material to save yourself a costly comeback and a dissatisfied customer. Remember: A material that's "almost the same" probably won't do the job. A recommended material is selected by Honda engineers only after its effectiveness has been evaluated under the conditions in which it will be used. To select the best materials, factors such as these are considered: ^ The compounds that make up the part(s) being used ^ The material's resistance to temperature, moisture, vibration, etc. ^ Whether the material needs to be dry or pliable ^ How the material bonds to dissimilar parts, for example, rubber to glass, plastic to rubber, and plastic to metal This Service Bulletin describes most of the recommended materials commonly referenced in Honda service and training publications. The materials are grouped into four categories: Insulating Products, Adhesives and Sealers, Greases and Lubricants, and Cleaners and Polishes. You can purchase these materials through local suppliers; many are also available through American Honda. Please share the information in this bulletin with the people in your parts department. Insulating Products Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-030 > May > 99 > Vehicle - Recommended Repair Materials (IN CD) > Page 8633 Adhesives and Sealers Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-030 > May > 99 > Vehicle - Recommended Repair Materials (IN CD) > Page 8634 Greases and Lubricants Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 99-030 > May > 99 > Vehicle - Recommended Repair Materials (IN CD) > Page 8635 Cleaners and Polishes Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 97-028 > Mar > 97 > Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair (IN CD) Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair (IN CD) 97-028 March 31, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models Minor Paint Finish Repair The first thing a new vehicle owner sees when he or she takes delivery of a new vehicle is the paint finish. Therefore, making the vehicle look good is very important. However, customer feedback has pointed out that many new vehicles are delivered with scratches and swirl marks. This is especially true with dark-colored vehicles. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the paint finish using the tools, supplies, and procedures recommended for the type of damage (scratches, swirl marks, etc.) and for the color of the paint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None: information only. RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND SUPPLIES To repair the paint finish, you should use these tools and supplies: Tools and Safety Equipment ^ Mil gauge (film thickness gauge) - Pro Gauge II, or equivalent - ETG (Electronic Thickness Gauge), or equivalent These mil gauges are commercially available. They can be purchased from Pro-Motorcar-Products at 800-334-2843. ^ Variable speed electric polisher ^ Dual-action orbital polisher (electric or pneumatic) ^ Eye protection (face shield or safety goggles) Supplies ^ 9" Foam polishing pads (do not use wool type) ^ Clean, 100% cotton terry cloth towels or soft flannel cloth ^ Wet/dry sandpaper (1500 - 2000 grit) ^ Soft sanding pad ^ 50/50 Solution of isopropyl alcohol and water While we cannot recommend one manufacturer over another, any of the manufacturers listed here can provide you with quality products through their nationwide distributor network. Contact them for your paint repair supply needs, choose one, and then use the system of only that one manufacturer. If you need to know how to use the products, ask the manufacturer for training. 3M Automotive Trades Division 22100 Telegraph Road P.O. Box 358 Southfield, MI 48037-0358 Phone Number: 800-521-8180 Ext. 6890 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 97-028 > Mar > 97 > Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair (IN CD) > Page 8640 Meguiar's 17991 Mitchell South Irvine, CA 92714 Phone Number: 800-347-5700 MOC Products 12306 Montague Street Pacoima, CA 91331 Phone Number: 818-896-2258 REPAIR PROCEDURE The following procedures may not apply to all conditions or colors. Use the procedure that best suits the condition and color of the vehicle you're repairing. Repairing and Polishing the Painted Surface The goal of a minor paint repair is to correct the damage to the upper layer of the painted surface. This is done by removing a thin layer of paint (no more than 0.5 mil) and then restoring the luster by polishing the repaired surface. A quick way to determine the depth of a scratch in the paint is to run your fingernail across the scratch. If your fingernail catches on the scratch, the area will need to be wet sanded and polished. When doing scratch or swirl mark repairs, use only quality products from one manufacturer. Each manufacturer has its own set of paint repair products that have matching materials. Mixing materials from different manufacturers, or using inexpensive products, compromises the repair quality. An electric polisher with an adjustable rpm control set between 1,500 and 1,800 rpm is best for polishing. When using a polisher, faster is not better. Too much polisher speed and too much applied force can cause swirl marks or may even burn the paint. Removing Swirl Marks Most swirl marks can be removed by using a foam polishing pad and polishing material. Use the polisher at 1500 to 1800 rpm with a small amount of polishing material on the pad. Always begin with the finest polishing material. If necessary, progress to the next coarser material only when the fine materials are ineffective. When polishing, work in small sections (approximately 24" x 24"). Avoid running the polishing pad over edges of a body panel or body lines where the paint is more susceptible to burning through. Let the cleaner do the work. Do not apply too much force! Forcing the polishing pad could cause deep cuts into the paint and might damage the surface so badly that it would need to be repainted. Polishing Dark Colors This additional procedure, after the polishing process described above, is important to reduce any chance of swirl marks, which show more on dark colors. When polishing is completed, use the same type of foam polishing pad on a random orbital polisher. Apply the finest polishing material to a 24" x 24" work area. Start the polisher, and make three to four passes over the work area. Remove the glaze residue with a cotton terry cloth or soft flannel cloth. Wet Sanding This process is used to repair scratches and acid rain damage deeper than 0.2 mil. The object is to remove as little paint material as possible. When wet sanding, stop frequently and dry the work area. This will allow you to see if the wet sanding has removed the damage. Start by soaking a 1500 or 2000 grit wet/dry sanding paper in water for 15 minutes. Wrap the soaked wet/dry sanding paper around a soft sanding pad. Lightly sand in one direction across (90 degrees) the scratched surface to highlight the surface damage. Flush the area with clean water. To remove any sanding scratches left by the wet sanding process, use a foam polishing pad and a polishing material. Refer to Removing Swirl Marks. Final Inspection When the polishing process is done, the paint surface may look perfect, but residue can hide very fine scratches that will become apparent after a few washings. This is especially true for darker colors. Start the final inspection by spraying a 50/50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water on the work area and then wiping it dry. NOTE: Avoid spraying the solution on any unpainted plastic parts such as taillights, turn signal lenses, reflectors, etc. The solution can cause cracking. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 97-028 > Mar > 97 > Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair (IN CD) > Page 8641 Inspect the repaired area, and repeat the polishing process if necessary. Finish the inspection by waxing the completed vehicle with a high-quality wax. Use the wax recommended by the paint repair supplies manufacturer you have chosen. Preventive Maintenance Avoiding scratches and dents while the vehicle is in your dealership inventory requires some preventive maintenance. To help reduce the occurrence of scratches and dents, follow these recommendations: ^ Park vehicles far enough apart to prevent door dents and dings. ^ Leave the exterior shipping protection on the vehicle until it is ready to be sold. ^ Implement and use an inventory age control system. ^ Use deionized water to reduce water spotting. ^ Wash the vehicles with deionized water, soap, and a wash mitt at least once a week. NOTE: Using a wash mitt will remove any residual dirt from the paint surface. If a wash mitt is not used, the residual dirt on the painted surface will scratch the paint when the surface is dried with a chamois or towel. ^ Use a clean chamois or terry cloth towel to dry the vehicles. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 88-037 > Mar > 92 > Body - Paint Acid Rain Damage Repair Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Paint Acid Rain Damage Repair Bulletin No. 88-037 Issue Date MAR 27, 1992 Model ALL Applicable To ALL File Under PDI Paint Damage Due to Acid Rain (Supersedes 88-037, dated June 2, 1989) SYMPTOM Careful visual examination of a paint surface that has been washed, rinsed thoroughly, and dried reveals "waterspots" and/or spots of discoloration in the paint. Refer to Service Bulletin 88-036 for the inspection procedure. PROBABLE CAUSE The paint surface has been etched by rainwater made acidic or alkaline by atmospheric impurities. The extent of the damage can vary greatly, depending on how long the impurities have sat on the surface. In very severe cases, the base coat is damaged, requiring repainting. PREVENTION The shipping wax applied at the factory provides the best protection against damage by acid rain and industrial fallout. It is strongly recommended that the shipping wax be left on the car as long as possible. The dealership is responsible for maintaining the car's finish after this wax is removed. During the high heat and humidity periods of the year, the car must be rinsed off (with water only) after every exposure to rainfall. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a small area of the paint surface that has suffered obvious acid rain damage. Perform the steps under DIAGNOSIS on this area. After each step, inspect to determine if all traces of the damage are removed. Note which step repairs the damage. Repair the rest of the damaged areas using the same set of steps. Glaze and wax the car after completing the repairs. NOTE: Each of the steps in the diagnostic procedure removes a small layer of the paint finish, reducing its durability. It is very important to perform the steps in order, inspect the surface often, and stop when it is repaired. DIAGNOSIS [NEW] Refer to the RECOMMENDED MATERIALS list for the suggested compounds and pads to use with this procedure. 1. Clean the area with a wax and grease remover. 2. Add one tablespoon of baking soda to a quart of water. Wash the area with this solution and rinse thoroughly. Inspect and continue if necessary. 3. Hand-polish the test area. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the selected system. (Do not use any included sanding materials at this time.) Inspect the paint surface, and continue if necessary. 4. Following the instructions supplied with the selected system, polish the test area using an electric buffer and polishing pad. Inspect the surface frequently to see if the acid rain damage has been removed. The goal is to remove the minimum amount of finish necessary to cure the problem. CAUTION: Check the buffing pad and surface frequently to avoid wearing through the finish. ^ Clear-coated paints should deposit no body color on the pad. If the body color starts to appear on the pad, stop immediately and examine your work. This is an indication that the clear coat has been worn completely away in some areas, and the color coat is no longer protected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 88-037 > Mar > 92 > Body - Paint Acid Rain Damage Repair > Page 8646 ^ Some non-metallic paints are protected by a clear coat combined with some body color. In this case, the buffing pad will show some body color immediately. If this clear/color coat is buffed through, there will be a dramatic change in the color intensity on the buffing pad. ^ Check the appropriate Paint Codes Service Bulletin to determine if a paint finish is clear-coated or clear/color-coated. NOTE: Approximately 95% of all cars damaged by acid rain should be repaired by steps 1 through 4. More severe damage will require you to go on to step 5. 5. Apply a rubbing compound, using an electric buffer and buffing pad. Follow this with an application of machine glaze, applied with the electric buffer and polishing pad. Inspect and continue if necessary. NOTE: DSM approval is required before going on to Step 6 if this is a warranty repair. 6. Wet-sand the area with # 1500 or # 2000 sandpaper, then use the polishing compound from the selected Finesse system with an electric buffer to polish out the scratches. If damage remains visible, repeat this process using # 1200 sandpaper. If damage is still evident, a # 1000 sandpaper may be used. Do not use a sandpaper coarser than # 1000, or you will leave scratches that cannot be removed with polishing compound. NOTE: DSM approval is required before going on to Step 7 if this is a warranty repair. 7. Before repainting, wet-sand the surface with #600 sandpaper until all traces of acid rain damage are removed. RECOMMENDED MATERIALS WARRANTY INFORMATION American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under the following conditions: ^ It is done during PDI. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 88-037 > Mar > 92 > Body - Paint Acid Rain Damage Repair > Page 8647 ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading). Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 88-036 > Dec > 88 > Body - Paint Damage Inspection Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Paint Damage Inspection Bulletin No. 88-036 Issue Date DEC 2, 1988 Model ALL Applicable To ALL File Under PDI Paint Inspection During transit and storage, new cars may be exposed to airborne pollutants which damage the paint surface. This damage must be recognized and repaired before the car is delivered to the customer. Use the procedure below to properly inspect new cars during PDI. PROCEDURE Remove the protective shipping wax (refer to Service Bulletin 87-006), then wash and dry the car. Do not apply any waxes, polishing compounds, glazes, etc., until the paint surfaces have been thoroughly inspected. Inspect all painted surfaces as explained below for damage by Acid Rain and Industrial Fallout. Acid Rain - The appearance of acid rain damage can vary somewhat depending on whether the pain color is dark or light, metallic or non-metallic, clear-coated or not clear-coated. Typically, acid rain damage looks very much like water droplets that have dried on the paint: a white ring around the outside, with a clear or dull center. These rings may be as small as a pinhead or as big as a quarter. In severe cases, pitting of the surface will be seen within the rings. It is also possible for acid rain damage to appear as a discoloration or staining with no visible ring or pitting. To inspect, park the car in an area illuminated by fluorescent lights, as acid rain damage can be seen more easily in this type of light. Examine the surface by looking at it closely from various angles. Acid rain damage will be most visible at the edge of the light's reflection on the surface. Industrial Fallout - This takes the form of small airborne iron particles which stick to the paint surface. They can eventually eat" through the paint to the base metal and promote rust. Damage from industrial fallout is easier to feel than to see. By running a fingernail across the surface, the metal particles will be felt as a gritty sensation. You may also hear a scraping sound. Rust-colored dots may be visible on very light paint surfaces. CORRECTIVE ACTION If either of the above types of damage is identified, refer to the appropriate Service Bulletin for the corrective action. Acid Rain - 88-037, dated Dec. 9, 1988 Industrial Fallout - 88-035, dated Dec. 2, 1988 WARRANTY INFORMATION None - this procedure should be considered part of PDI. Warranty information for correcting paint damage is included in the applicable Service Bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8652 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Recommended Repair Materials (IN CD) 99-030 May 4, 1999 Applies To: ALL Recommended Materials Many procedures in service bulletins and other service publications require you to use adhesives, sealants, lubricants, solvents, wool felt, EPT sealer, etc. While some of these materials look and feel similar to each other or to non-approved materials, always use the recommended material to save yourself a costly comeback and a dissatisfied customer. Remember: A material that's "almost the same" probably won't do the job. A recommended material is selected by Honda engineers only after its effectiveness has been evaluated under the conditions in which it will be used. To select the best materials, factors such as these are considered: ^ The compounds that make up the part(s) being used ^ The material's resistance to temperature, moisture, vibration, etc. ^ Whether the material needs to be dry or pliable ^ How the material bonds to dissimilar parts, for example, rubber to glass, plastic to rubber, and plastic to metal This Service Bulletin describes most of the recommended materials commonly referenced in Honda service and training publications. The materials are grouped into four categories: Insulating Products, Adhesives and Sealers, Greases and Lubricants, and Cleaners and Polishes. You can purchase these materials through local suppliers; many are also available through American Honda. Please share the information in this bulletin with the people in your parts department. Insulating Products Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8653 Adhesives and Sealers Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8654 Greases and Lubricants Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8655 Cleaners and Polishes Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8656 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair (IN CD) 97-028 March 31, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models Minor Paint Finish Repair The first thing a new vehicle owner sees when he or she takes delivery of a new vehicle is the paint finish. Therefore, making the vehicle look good is very important. However, customer feedback has pointed out that many new vehicles are delivered with scratches and swirl marks. This is especially true with dark-colored vehicles. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the paint finish using the tools, supplies, and procedures recommended for the type of damage (scratches, swirl marks, etc.) and for the color of the paint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None: information only. RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND SUPPLIES To repair the paint finish, you should use these tools and supplies: Tools and Safety Equipment ^ Mil gauge (film thickness gauge) - Pro Gauge II, or equivalent - ETG (Electronic Thickness Gauge), or equivalent These mil gauges are commercially available. They can be purchased from Pro-Motorcar-Products at 800-334-2843. ^ Variable speed electric polisher ^ Dual-action orbital polisher (electric or pneumatic) ^ Eye protection (face shield or safety goggles) Supplies ^ 9" Foam polishing pads (do not use wool type) ^ Clean, 100% cotton terry cloth towels or soft flannel cloth ^ Wet/dry sandpaper (1500 - 2000 grit) ^ Soft sanding pad ^ 50/50 Solution of isopropyl alcohol and water While we cannot recommend one manufacturer over another, any of the manufacturers listed here can provide you with quality products through their nationwide distributor network. Contact them for your paint repair supply needs, choose one, and then use the system of only that one manufacturer. If you need to know how to use the products, ask the manufacturer for training. 3M Automotive Trades Division 22100 Telegraph Road P.O. Box 358 Southfield, MI 48037-0358 Phone Number: 800-521-8180 Ext. 6890 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8657 Meguiar's 17991 Mitchell South Irvine, CA 92714 Phone Number: 800-347-5700 MOC Products 12306 Montague Street Pacoima, CA 91331 Phone Number: 818-896-2258 REPAIR PROCEDURE The following procedures may not apply to all conditions or colors. Use the procedure that best suits the condition and color of the vehicle you're repairing. Repairing and Polishing the Painted Surface The goal of a minor paint repair is to correct the damage to the upper layer of the painted surface. This is done by removing a thin layer of paint (no more than 0.5 mil) and then restoring the luster by polishing the repaired surface. A quick way to determine the depth of a scratch in the paint is to run your fingernail across the scratch. If your fingernail catches on the scratch, the area will need to be wet sanded and polished. When doing scratch or swirl mark repairs, use only quality products from one manufacturer. Each manufacturer has its own set of paint repair products that have matching materials. Mixing materials from different manufacturers, or using inexpensive products, compromises the repair quality. An electric polisher with an adjustable rpm control set between 1,500 and 1,800 rpm is best for polishing. When using a polisher, faster is not better. Too much polisher speed and too much applied force can cause swirl marks or may even burn the paint. Removing Swirl Marks Most swirl marks can be removed by using a foam polishing pad and polishing material. Use the polisher at 1500 to 1800 rpm with a small amount of polishing material on the pad. Always begin with the finest polishing material. If necessary, progress to the next coarser material only when the fine materials are ineffective. When polishing, work in small sections (approximately 24" x 24"). Avoid running the polishing pad over edges of a body panel or body lines where the paint is more susceptible to burning through. Let the cleaner do the work. Do not apply too much force! Forcing the polishing pad could cause deep cuts into the paint and might damage the surface so badly that it would need to be repainted. Polishing Dark Colors This additional procedure, after the polishing process described above, is important to reduce any chance of swirl marks, which show more on dark colors. When polishing is completed, use the same type of foam polishing pad on a random orbital polisher. Apply the finest polishing material to a 24" x 24" work area. Start the polisher, and make three to four passes over the work area. Remove the glaze residue with a cotton terry cloth or soft flannel cloth. Wet Sanding This process is used to repair scratches and acid rain damage deeper than 0.2 mil. The object is to remove as little paint material as possible. When wet sanding, stop frequently and dry the work area. This will allow you to see if the wet sanding has removed the damage. Start by soaking a 1500 or 2000 grit wet/dry sanding paper in water for 15 minutes. Wrap the soaked wet/dry sanding paper around a soft sanding pad. Lightly sand in one direction across (90 degrees) the scratched surface to highlight the surface damage. Flush the area with clean water. To remove any sanding scratches left by the wet sanding process, use a foam polishing pad and a polishing material. Refer to Removing Swirl Marks. Final Inspection When the polishing process is done, the paint surface may look perfect, but residue can hide very fine scratches that will become apparent after a few washings. This is especially true for darker colors. Start the final inspection by spraying a 50/50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water on the work area and then wiping it dry. NOTE: Avoid spraying the solution on any unpainted plastic parts such as taillights, turn signal lenses, reflectors, etc. The solution can cause cracking. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8658 Inspect the repaired area, and repeat the polishing process if necessary. Finish the inspection by waxing the completed vehicle with a high-quality wax. Use the wax recommended by the paint repair supplies manufacturer you have chosen. Preventive Maintenance Avoiding scratches and dents while the vehicle is in your dealership inventory requires some preventive maintenance. To help reduce the occurrence of scratches and dents, follow these recommendations: ^ Park vehicles far enough apart to prevent door dents and dings. ^ Leave the exterior shipping protection on the vehicle until it is ready to be sold. ^ Implement and use an inventory age control system. ^ Use deionized water to reduce water spotting. ^ Wash the vehicles with deionized water, soap, and a wash mitt at least once a week. NOTE: Using a wash mitt will remove any residual dirt from the paint surface. If a wash mitt is not used, the residual dirt on the painted surface will scratch the paint when the surface is dried with a chamois or towel. ^ Use a clean chamois or terry cloth towel to dry the vehicles. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8659 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Paint Acid Rain Damage Repair Bulletin No. 88-037 Issue Date MAR 27, 1992 Model ALL Applicable To ALL File Under PDI Paint Damage Due to Acid Rain (Supersedes 88-037, dated June 2, 1989) SYMPTOM Careful visual examination of a paint surface that has been washed, rinsed thoroughly, and dried reveals "waterspots" and/or spots of discoloration in the paint. Refer to Service Bulletin 88-036 for the inspection procedure. PROBABLE CAUSE The paint surface has been etched by rainwater made acidic or alkaline by atmospheric impurities. The extent of the damage can vary greatly, depending on how long the impurities have sat on the surface. In very severe cases, the base coat is damaged, requiring repainting. PREVENTION The shipping wax applied at the factory provides the best protection against damage by acid rain and industrial fallout. It is strongly recommended that the shipping wax be left on the car as long as possible. The dealership is responsible for maintaining the car's finish after this wax is removed. During the high heat and humidity periods of the year, the car must be rinsed off (with water only) after every exposure to rainfall. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a small area of the paint surface that has suffered obvious acid rain damage. Perform the steps under DIAGNOSIS on this area. After each step, inspect to determine if all traces of the damage are removed. Note which step repairs the damage. Repair the rest of the damaged areas using the same set of steps. Glaze and wax the car after completing the repairs. NOTE: Each of the steps in the diagnostic procedure removes a small layer of the paint finish, reducing its durability. It is very important to perform the steps in order, inspect the surface often, and stop when it is repaired. DIAGNOSIS [NEW] Refer to the RECOMMENDED MATERIALS list for the suggested compounds and pads to use with this procedure. 1. Clean the area with a wax and grease remover. 2. Add one tablespoon of baking soda to a quart of water. Wash the area with this solution and rinse thoroughly. Inspect and continue if necessary. 3. Hand-polish the test area. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the selected system. (Do not use any included sanding materials at this time.) Inspect the paint surface, and continue if necessary. 4. Following the instructions supplied with the selected system, polish the test area using an electric buffer and polishing pad. Inspect the surface frequently to see if the acid rain damage has been removed. The goal is to remove the minimum amount of finish necessary to cure the problem. CAUTION: Check the buffing pad and surface frequently to avoid wearing through the finish. ^ Clear-coated paints should deposit no body color on the pad. If the body color starts to appear on the pad, stop immediately and examine your work. This is an indication that the clear coat has been worn completely away in some areas, and the color coat is no longer protected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8660 ^ Some non-metallic paints are protected by a clear coat combined with some body color. In this case, the buffing pad will show some body color immediately. If this clear/color coat is buffed through, there will be a dramatic change in the color intensity on the buffing pad. ^ Check the appropriate Paint Codes Service Bulletin to determine if a paint finish is clear-coated or clear/color-coated. NOTE: Approximately 95% of all cars damaged by acid rain should be repaired by steps 1 through 4. More severe damage will require you to go on to step 5. 5. Apply a rubbing compound, using an electric buffer and buffing pad. Follow this with an application of machine glaze, applied with the electric buffer and polishing pad. Inspect and continue if necessary. NOTE: DSM approval is required before going on to Step 6 if this is a warranty repair. 6. Wet-sand the area with # 1500 or # 2000 sandpaper, then use the polishing compound from the selected Finesse system with an electric buffer to polish out the scratches. If damage remains visible, repeat this process using # 1200 sandpaper. If damage is still evident, a # 1000 sandpaper may be used. Do not use a sandpaper coarser than # 1000, or you will leave scratches that cannot be removed with polishing compound. NOTE: DSM approval is required before going on to Step 7 if this is a warranty repair. 7. Before repainting, wet-sand the surface with #600 sandpaper until all traces of acid rain damage are removed. RECOMMENDED MATERIALS WARRANTY INFORMATION American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under the following conditions: ^ It is done during PDI. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8661 ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading). Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8662 Part 1 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8663 Paint: Service Precautions Paint Safety Precautions WARNING: Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container. The following precautions are important items in order to maintain a safe painting work area. - Wear an approved respirator and eye protection when painting. - Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. - Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. - After the painting work is finished, wash your face and gargle with water. - Wear approved gloves and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. - If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse and wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames, or cigarettes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications Paint: Application and ID Color Chart Paint Specifications Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8666 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8667 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code and Color Label Location Paint Code - 4 Door Paint Code - 2 Door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8668 Vehicle Identification Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8669 Vehicle Identification Number - 4 Door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8670 Vehicle Identification Number - 2 Door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8671 Paint: Application and ID Types and Materials of Exterior Plastic Parts Types and Materials of Exterior Plastic Parts NOTE: A standard symbol is stamped on the underside of each resin part to show the type of material of used. 2-DOOR Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Chart Paint Specifications > Page 8672 4-DOOR Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Basic Rules For Repairing A Paint Finish Paint: Service and Repair Basic Rules For Repairing A Paint Finish General The 3-coat-3-bake (3C-3B) paint finish gives the Accord a deep gloss and stunning finish. This information provides information on paint defect, repair, and refinishing. Throughout, the objective is to explain in a simple yet comprehensive manner the basic items you should know about paint repairs. Select the correct material for the defect and repaint or refinish in the correct manner as described in this information. Basic Rules for Repairing a Paint Finish To repair paint damage, always use the 2-part acrylic urethane paints designated; polish and bake each of the three coats, as in production, to maintain the original film thickness, and to assure the same quality as the original finish. Features in Each Work Process 1. Pretreatment and Electrodeposition In the pretreatment process, the entire body is degreased, cleaned, and coated with zinc phosphate by dipping. After the body has been cleaned with pure water, it is placed in an electrolytic bath of soluble primer (Cationic Electrodeposition). This produces a thorough corrosion inhibiting coating on the inner surface and corners of the body, pillars, sills, and panel joints. Chipping primer is then applied to the most susceptible areas. Sectional View of Paint Coats 2. Intermediate Coat The intermediate coat is applied to the prepared surface to further protect against damage. 3. Top Coat Enamel paint and either polyester or acrylic resin paint are used in the top coat for higher solidity, smoothness, brightness, and weather resistance. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Basic Rules For Repairing A Paint Finish > Page 8675 Paint: Service and Repair Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat General The removal of paint and undercoating by stone chips immediately exposes metal to the atmosphere, causing it to oxidize. The thickness of this oxidation increases if the process continues unchecked. The soft chipping guard primer protects, against damage due to the impact of such objects. Sectional View of Paint Coats: - The soft chipping guard primer coat is applied over the E.D. (Electrostatically Deposited) primer. It is followed by guide coating and top coating. - The soft chipping guard primer produces a smooth surface when dry. It should be sprayed so the thickness of the protective film is 20 microns. Basic Rules for Repairing a Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat: - Soft chipping guard primer coat is then applied to the most susceptible area. - Spray the primer surface (2-part urethane primer surfacer) on the soft chipping guard primer coating areas when you replace parts using soft chipping guard primer coat. WARNING: Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - Ventilate when spraying undercoat. 1. Sanding the replacement part. NOTE: Do not oversand the edges or corners of the part. - Do not expose base metal. Use a double action sander and P400 disc sandpaper. 2. Air blowing / degreasing Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover. 3. Protect from overspray Use masking tape and paper to protect the related areas not being repaired overspray. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Basic Rules For Repairing A Paint Finish > Page 8676 4. Spraying primer surfacer - Spray about 4 to 5 coats to get 20 microns of thickness. One coat deposits about 5 to 7 microns. - Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. Applying several thin coats is recommended. Use a 2-part urethane primer surfacer and a spray gun. - Mix the primer surfacer with the additive and solvent, and in the correct ratio. - Follow the primer surfacer manufacturer's instructions. 5. Drying After spraying primer surfacer, allow 7 to 10 minutes of drying time, then force dry it with infrared lamps or an industrial dryer. 6. Polishing Check that the primer surfacer has dried thoroughly, then sand the primer surfacer. Use a double action sander and P400~P600 disc sandpaper. 7. Intermediate coating and top coating Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8686 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8687 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8688 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8689 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03-041 Date: 030731 Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement 03-041 July 31, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM7...3A000001 thru 1HGCM7...3A016733 Product Update: Accord L4 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit BACKGROUND When you insert the key in the driver's door lock and turn it quickly, the passenger's door may not lock and the security system may not arm. In addition, if the trunk is opened and then immediately closed, the security system may not arm the trunk. This is an intermittent problem that does not affect the remote transmitters. It is caused by a timing discrepancy in the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU). CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this product update. The customer notification may also contain information on other product updates. An example of the customer notification for this MICU product update is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN range are affected by this product update. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. If any affected vehicles are in your new or used vehicle inventory, repair them as described in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (The MICU is inside the fuse/relay box.) PARTS INFORMATION Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (EX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A22, H/C 7426554 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (LX models): P/N 38200-SDN-A02, H/C 7426539 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 747103 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 38200-SDN-A21 H/C 7170665 Defect Code: 5AY Contention Code: L98 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before doing this repair procedure (see page 23-17 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8695 1. Write down your customer's radio station presets. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 2. Disconnect the negative cable and the positive cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the left door sill trim and the left kick panel (see page 20-90 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). 4. Remove the two mounting bolts from the under-dash fuse/relay box, then pull the fuse box away from the body. 5. Disconnect the connectors, and remove the fuse box. 6. Carefully remove all fuses and relays from the old fuse box, and install them in their correct locations in the new fuse box. 7. Connect the connectors to the new fuse box, then install the fuse box with the original mounting bolts. 8. Reconnect the positive and negative battery cables. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). 10. Enter your customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. 11. Make sure all electrical components are working. 12. Install the left kick panel and the left door sill trim. 13. Center-punch a completion mark above the fifth character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8696 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8697 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > 03-041 > Jul > 03 > Campaign - Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Replacement > Page 8698 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8699 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8700 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8701 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8702 7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8703 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 12. 12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8707 72. Behind Glove Box (L4: EX-L) 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8708 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8709 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: The turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type B: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations 110. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8713 156. Moonroof Close And Open Relay (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8714 Sunroof / Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: The turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type B: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations 256. Rear Of Roof (2-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8718 279. Moonroof Control Unit (2-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8719 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Control Unit input Test 2-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8720 4. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair Sunshade Replacement 2-door 1. Remove the drain channel. 2. Remove the screws, then remove the set plate (A) from each side. 3. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both front sunshade base sliders (B). 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), move the sunshade forward until you can see both rear sunshade base sliders (B). Do not damage the sunshade. 5. Release both rear sunshade base sliders from the guide rail portions of the frame, then remove the sunshade. 6. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the set plate mounting screws before reinstallation. - Check the glass height adjustment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8726 7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. 4-door 1. Remove the drain channel. 2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade slider spacers (B). 3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers. 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), move the sunshade forward until you can see both sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the sunshade and hooks. 5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8727 6. Remove the sunshade (A). 7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and both rear sunshade base sliders (B). 8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, and check the glass height adjustment. 9. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade. - Moonroof motor. 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting screws (F) from both sides of the frame (G). 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the frame. 5. Pivot the glass bracket (C) down by sliding the lift up slider (D) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifters. 6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement > Page 8732 7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel sliders (B) from both sides. 8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C) from both glass brackets, then remove them from the frame (D). 9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged parts should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement > Page 8733 - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement > Page 8734 Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: Service and Repair Inner Cable Replacement Inner Cable Replacement 2-door 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove these items: - Wind deflector. - Moonroof motor. 3. Tilt the glass bracket (A) up by sliding the link lifter (B) forward fully. 4. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the slide stop (C) and the plate (D). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement > Page 8735 5. Slide the glass bracket (A) forward to remove the front slider portion (B) of the bracket out of the guide rail (C). 6. Remove the glass bracket (A) from the link lifter (B). 7. Pull the slider portion (A) of the inner cable (B) out of the slide rail (C), then remove the inner cable. 8. If necessary, remove the drain channel slider (A) by sliding it forward. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement > Page 8736 9. Install the slider and cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged parts should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Apply butyl sealant (C) to the frame (D) where the slide stops (E) will be reinstalled with screws (F). - Apply liquid thread lock to the set plate (G) mounting screws (H) before reinstallation. - Before reinstalling the motor, slide both glass brackets rearward fully until the slider portions (I) of the inner cable contact with the screws (J) on the guide rail to align both glass brackets. - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. - After reinstalling the motor, do the moonroof motor reprogram procedure. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 8745 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 8751 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8754 109. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8755 139. Moonroof Limit Switch (4-door EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8756 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the moon roof limit switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, adjust the moon roof limit switch. If the continuity is still not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8757 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (F) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (F). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8758 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Service and Repair Limit Switch Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch (A) on the moonroof fame (B). 3. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the moonroof limit switch. 4. Remove the two mounting bolts. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 6. Adjust the moonroof limit switch as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations Moonroof Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8762 Moonroof Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8763 109. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8764 59. Moonroof Motor (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8765 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection Motor Test 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the moonroof motor. 3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground according to the table. 4. If the motor does not run, replace it. NOTE: See closing force check for motor clutch test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8766 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Motor Replacement 2-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the connector (A), and using a Torx T25 bit, remove the bolts, then remove the motor (B). Do not operate the motor before reinstallation. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the motor mounting bolts before reinstallation. - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly. - Do the moonroof motor reprogram procedure. - Check the motor operation. 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove the motor (B). 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly. - Check the motor operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations 110. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8770 156. Moonroof Close And Open Relay (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8771 Sunroof / Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: The turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type B: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations 38. Left Side Of Dash (EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8775 164. Moonroof Switch (EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8776 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the "II" to the "I" or "O" positions, as long as none of the doors are opened. This provides a convenience to parked occupants while offering a degree of security against unwanted or accidental moonroof operation. 1. Carefully push out the moonroof switch (A) from behind the dashboard lower cover, then disconnect the 6P connector (B) from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Wind Deflector Replacement 2-door 1. Open the glass fully. 2. Remove the screws securing the wind deflector (A). 3. Remove the deflector link base (A) from each side. Twist the wind deflector (B) forward and push it down, and pass the deflector spring (C) out through the slot of the slide stop (D) on each side, then remove the wind deflector. 4. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal, and apply multipurpose grease to both slots where the deflector springs are installed. 4-door 1. Open the glass fully. 2. Remove the links (A) from both sides. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8780 3. Remove the wind deflector (A). 4. Pry up on the deflector bases (A) and release the hooks (B), then remove the bases with springs (C) from both sides. 5. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Channel Replacement Drain Channel Replacement 2-door 1. Remove the glass. 2. Move both glass brackets (A) to detach the pins (B) inside from both glass brackets. 3. Turn the drain channel (A) up while sliding it forward to release it from the pins (B) on both drain channel sliders (C). 4. Stand the drain channel (A) upright, and pull up the channel to remove it from both drain channel sliders(B). 5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal, and check the glass height adjustment. 6. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. 4-door 1. Remove the glass. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8785 2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof normally tilts up and disconnect the drain channel rod (B) on both sides. 3. Slide the drain channel (A) forward. 4. Pull the rear edge of the drain channel (A) up while pushing both clips (B), and release the channel from both hooks (C) of the drain channel slider by pulling it rearward 5. Remove the drain channel. 6. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Push the clip portions into place securely. - Check the glass height adjustment. 7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8786 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Frame and Drain Tube Replacement Frame and Drain Tube Replacement 1. Remove these items: - Headliner. - Moonroof glass. 2. 2-door: Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands: -1 Disconnect the motor connector (B), and the drain tubes (C). -2 Remove the interior harness (D) by detaching the harness clips (E) and removing the cushion tape (F). -3 With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts (G,H) starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (I) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. -4 With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8787 3. 4-door: Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands. -1 Disconnect the motor connector (B), open/close-tilt/close switch connector (C), and the drain tubes (D), and remove the moonroof relays (E). -2 Remove the interior harness (F) by detaching the harness clips (G) and removing the tapes (H). -3 With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (I) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. -4 With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. 4. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, 2-door, 4-door. Tie a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the front pillar. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8788 5. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts, 2-door, 4-door: - Spare tire lid - Trunk rear trim panel - Jack lid Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull back the trunk side trim panel and pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. 6. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When installing the rear drain tube at the rear pillar, make sure the cushion on the tube align with the hole in the body, and that the alignment mark on the tube align with the upper clip. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8789 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade. - Moonroof motor. 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting screws (F) from both sides of the frame (G). 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the frame. 5. Pivot the glass bracket (C) down by sliding the lift up slider (D) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifters. 6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8790 7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel sliders (B) from both sides. 8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C) from both glass brackets, then remove them from the frame (D). 9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged parts should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 8791 - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Frame and Drain Tube Replacement 1. Remove these items: - Headliner. - Moonroof glass. 2. 2-door: Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands: -1 Disconnect the motor connector (B), and the drain tubes (C). -2 Remove the interior harness (D) by detaching the harness clips (E) and removing the cushion tape (F). -3 With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts (G,H) starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (I) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. -4 With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8795 3. 4-door: Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands. -1 Disconnect the motor connector (B), open/close-tilt/close switch connector (C), and the drain tubes (D), and remove the moonroof relays (E). -2 Remove the interior harness (F) by detaching the harness clips (G) and removing the tapes (H). -3 With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (I) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. -4 With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. 4. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, 2-door, 4-door. Tie a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the front pillar. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8796 5. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts, 2-door, 4-door: - Spare tire lid - Trunk rear trim panel - Jack lid Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull back the trunk side trim panel and pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. 6. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When installing the rear drain tube at the rear pillar, make sure the cushion on the tube align with the hole in the body, and that the alignment mark on the tube align with the upper clip. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations 256. Rear Of Roof (2-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8800 279. Moonroof Control Unit (2-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8801 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Control Unit input Test 2-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8802 4. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged 05-012 October 17, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Moonroof Glass Weatherstrip Is Damaged (Supersedes 05-012, dated April 8, 2005, to update the information marked by the black bars) PROBLEM The moonroof glass weatherstrip is damaged. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Depending on the vehicle, replace the moonroof glass weatherstrip, REPAIR PROCEDURE A, or replace the moonroof glass, REPAIR PROCEDURE B. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 8811 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Same as listed in PARTS INFORMATION Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the moon roof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. 2. Place a piece of masking tape on the middle of the front edge of the moonroof glass. Make sure that the tape is on the glass only and not touching the soft rubber of the weatherstrip. 3. Place a mark on the masking tape that aligns with the seam of the weatherstrip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 8812 4. Push down on the top of the old weatherstrip with your thumb until a small section separates from the moonroof. Once a section has started to separate, grip it and pull outward, working around the moonroof until the weatherstrip is completely removed (note the locations of the holes in the weatherstrip). 5. Align the seam of the new weatherstrip to the mark on the masking tape. Make sure the holes are pointed in the same direction as noted in step 4. 6. Press the ridge of the new weatherstrip into the groove on the moonroof where the masking tape is marked. Work toward one corner; then go back to the middle and work toward the opposite corner. Be careful not to stretch the weatherstrip. 7. Continue pressing along one side, from corner to corner; then press along the opposite side, from corner to corner. 8. At the rear of the moonroof, continue pressing from one corner to the middle; then press from the opposite corner to the middle until the strip is completely installed. 9. Reinstall the moonroof glass (refer to the Glass Replacement procedure). 10. Check for proper fit of the new weatherstrip by opening and closing the moonroof. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - GLASS REPLACEMENT Replace the moonroof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged 05-012 October 17, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Moonroof Glass Weatherstrip Is Damaged (Supersedes 05-012, dated April 8, 2005, to update the information marked by the black bars) PROBLEM The moonroof glass weatherstrip is damaged. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Depending on the vehicle, replace the moonroof glass weatherstrip, REPAIR PROCEDURE A, or replace the moonroof glass, REPAIR PROCEDURE B. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 8818 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Same as listed in PARTS INFORMATION Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the moon roof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. 2. Place a piece of masking tape on the middle of the front edge of the moonroof glass. Make sure that the tape is on the glass only and not touching the soft rubber of the weatherstrip. 3. Place a mark on the masking tape that aligns with the seam of the weatherstrip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 8819 4. Push down on the top of the old weatherstrip with your thumb until a small section separates from the moonroof. Once a section has started to separate, grip it and pull outward, working around the moonroof until the weatherstrip is completely removed (note the locations of the holes in the weatherstrip). 5. Align the seam of the new weatherstrip to the mark on the masking tape. Make sure the holes are pointed in the same direction as noted in step 4. 6. Press the ridge of the new weatherstrip into the groove on the moonroof where the masking tape is marked. Work toward one corner; then go back to the middle and work toward the opposite corner. Be careful not to stretch the weatherstrip. 7. Continue pressing along one side, from corner to corner; then press along the opposite side, from corner to corner. 8. At the rear of the moonroof, continue pressing from one corner to the middle; then press from the opposite corner to the middle until the strip is completely installed. 9. Reinstall the moonroof glass (refer to the Glass Replacement procedure). 10. Check for proper fit of the new weatherstrip by opening and closing the moonroof. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - GLASS REPLACEMENT Replace the moonroof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: Customer Interest Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8829 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8830 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8836 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8837 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Power Seat Motor: Component Locations Power Seat Component Location Index (4-way Adjustable) 81. Under Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8842 185. Under Front Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8843 Power Seat Motor: Connector Locations 80. Under Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 186. Under Front Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8844 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams 62. Power Seat Front Up-down Motor, Driver's (EX-L; LX: V6) 63. Power Seat Rear Up-down Motor, Driver's (EX-L; LX: V6) 64. Power Seat Slide Motor, Driver's (EX-L; LX: V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8845 157. Power Seat Recline Motor, Driver's (EX-L; LX: V6) 251. Power Seat Slide Motor, Front Passenger's (4-door V6: EX-L) 270. Power Seat Recline Motor, Front Passenger's (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection 8-Way Adjustable Motor Test Driver's 8-way Adjustable Power Seat 1. Remove the driver's seat. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the power seat adjustment switch (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable > Page 8848 3. Test each motor by applying battery voltage and body ground to the terminals. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in the driver's seat wire harness between the 12P connector and each motor connector. If the harness is OK, replace the motor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable > Page 8849 Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection 4-Way Adjustable Motor Test Front Passenger's 4-way Adjustable power Seat 1. Remove the front passenger's seat. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the power seat adjustment switch. 3. Test each motor by applying battery voltage and body ground to the terminals. 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in the passenger's seat wire harness between the 12P connector and each motor connector. If the harness is OK, replace the motor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Up-Down Motor Replacement Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Up-Down Motor Replacement Up-down Motor Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the recline cover. 3. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the up-down motor connector (A). 4. Remove the push nut (B) and the pin (C) from the link (D), then remove the nuts securing the up-down motor (E). 5. Remove the bolts securing the motor bracket (A) and the rear pipe (B), then remove the rear pipe. 6. Rotate the motor bracket down on the shaft, and remove the up-down motor (C) from the bracket. 7. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Up-Down Motor Replacement > Page 8852 - Check the pivot bushing (A) for damage. If necessary, replace it. - Replace the push nut with a new one. - Make sure the motor connector is plugged in properly, and the push nut is installed correctly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Up-Down Motor Replacement > Page 8853 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement 8-Way Power Seat SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the seat-back cover/pad from the seat-back frame. 3. Remove the recline motor (A): -1 Release the push nut (B) from the motor side end of the connecting rod (C). -2 Gently tap on the motor side of the connecting rod to remove it from the recline motor and both recline adjusters (D). -3 Remove the rod cover (E). -4 Remove the bolt, then remove the recline motor. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the push nut with a new one. Make sure the push nut is installed correctly. - Apply liquid thread lock to the motor mounting bolt before reinstallation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 252. Under Driver's Seat Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations 79. Left Side Of Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 183. Rt. Side Of Frt. Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8860 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams 232. Power Seat Adjustment Switch, Driver's 281. Power Seat Adjustment Switch, Front Passenger's (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 8-Way Adjustable Switch Test/Replacement Driver's Power Seat (8-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover from the driver's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (B). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable > Page 8863 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 4-Way Adjustable Switch Test/Replacement Front Passenger's power Seat (4-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the front passenger's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8864 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Switch Test/Replacement Front Passenger's power Seat (4-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the front passenger's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative Seat Back: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative 04-017 March 19, 2004 Applies To: 2003 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Lumbar Support Does Not Work SYMPTOM The driver's lumbar support does work. PROBABLE CAUSE The lumbar support basket is broken. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the lumbar support basket. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 859142 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81526-SDB-A73 H/C 7424930 Defect Code: 00301 Symptom Code: 03220 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8873 Template ID: 04-017A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS While sitting in the driver's seat, adjust the lumbar support. If the support does not move, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With your fingers, pull out the center of the seat-back panel to release the center clips. 2. Flex the panel in the center to release the top hooks. The bottom portion of the panel is still held in by two clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8874 3. Remove the panel by breaking the lower clips with a long, flat-tip screwdriver and a mallet: ^ Hold the screwdriver on the clip between the panel and the seat frame. ^ Using a mallet, firmly hit the screwdriver until the clip breaks. Do not damage the panel alignment pins that extend through the seat frame. ^ Break the other clip the same way. ^ Remove the broken clip parts from the panel and the seat frame. 4. Adjust the lumbar-support lever to its minimum setting (the lever points up). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8875 5. Pull down and flex the top of the basket assembly, then release the hanger wire from the top of the basket and the yoke bar. 6. Disconnect the Z-shaped, cable-end fitting from the yoke bar. 7. Lower the center hook until its short end clears the flange, then remove the center hook from the basket. 8. Remove the cable from the top of the basket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8876 9. Lift the basket as high as possible. Using a pair of pliers, remove the top slide wire from the right side of the basket. Release the left side by hand. 10. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pop the lower cross wires from the basket. 11. Lower the basket to clear the slide wire. Then tilt the top of the basket away from the seat, and remove the basket. 12. Slide the new basket between the seat foam and the slide and cross wires. 13. Using a pair of pliers, attach the basket to the top slide wire. 14. Install the two lower cross wires into the center slots at the bottom of the basket. 15. Install the outer ends of the wires in the corresponding slots in the basket (two slots on each side). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8877 16. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease to the short end of the center hook where it contacts the metal support on the basket flange, then install the hook with its small end on the left side of the flange. If the yoke is not connected to the center hook, reconnect it. 17. Install the cable into the basket, then route the cable behind the slide wire and the cross wire. 18. Connect the Z cable end to the left side of the yoke bar. 19. Install the small hook of the hanger wire into the yoke bar with the hook pointing toward the rear of the vehicle. 20. Route the top of the hanger wire behind the slide wire and the cross wire. Pull down and flex the top of the basket. Install the top of the hanger wire through the slot in the top of the basket, then move the wire to the right until the small end of the hanger hook is seated into the hole. 21. Sit in the driver's seat, and check the lumbar support by cycling the adjustment from minimum to maximum several times. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8878 22. Make sure all the linkage components are properly positioned, then install two new seat-back panel clips, and install the panel. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative Seat Back: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative 04-017 March 19, 2004 Applies To: 2003 Accord - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Lumbar Support Does Not Work SYMPTOM The driver's lumbar support does work. PROBABLE CAUSE The lumbar support basket is broken. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the lumbar support basket. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 859142 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 81526-SDB-A73 H/C 7424930 Defect Code: 00301 Symptom Code: 03220 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8884 Template ID: 04-017A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS While sitting in the driver's seat, adjust the lumbar support. If the support does not move, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With your fingers, pull out the center of the seat-back panel to release the center clips. 2. Flex the panel in the center to release the top hooks. The bottom portion of the panel is still held in by two clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8885 3. Remove the panel by breaking the lower clips with a long, flat-tip screwdriver and a mallet: ^ Hold the screwdriver on the clip between the panel and the seat frame. ^ Using a mallet, firmly hit the screwdriver until the clip breaks. Do not damage the panel alignment pins that extend through the seat frame. ^ Break the other clip the same way. ^ Remove the broken clip parts from the panel and the seat frame. 4. Adjust the lumbar-support lever to its minimum setting (the lever points up). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8886 5. Pull down and flex the top of the basket assembly, then release the hanger wire from the top of the basket and the yoke bar. 6. Disconnect the Z-shaped, cable-end fitting from the yoke bar. 7. Lower the center hook until its short end clears the flange, then remove the center hook from the basket. 8. Remove the cable from the top of the basket. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8887 9. Lift the basket as high as possible. Using a pair of pliers, remove the top slide wire from the right side of the basket. Release the left side by hand. 10. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pop the lower cross wires from the basket. 11. Lower the basket to clear the slide wire. Then tilt the top of the basket away from the seat, and remove the basket. 12. Slide the new basket between the seat foam and the slide and cross wires. 13. Using a pair of pliers, attach the basket to the top slide wire. 14. Install the two lower cross wires into the center slots at the bottom of the basket. 15. Install the outer ends of the wires in the corresponding slots in the basket (two slots on each side). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8888 16. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease to the short end of the center hook where it contacts the metal support on the basket flange, then install the hook with its small end on the left side of the flange. If the yoke is not connected to the center hook, reconnect it. 17. Install the cable into the basket, then route the cable behind the slide wire and the cross wire. 18. Connect the Z cable end to the left side of the yoke bar. 19. Install the small hook of the hanger wire into the yoke bar with the hook pointing toward the rear of the vehicle. 20. Route the top of the hanger wire behind the slide wire and the cross wire. Pull down and flex the top of the basket. Install the top of the hanger wire through the slot in the top of the basket, then move the wire to the right until the small end of the hanger hook is seated into the hole. 21. Sit in the driver's seat, and check the lumbar support by cycling the adjustment from minimum to maximum several times. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Back: > 04-017 > Mar > 04 > Interior - Seat Lumbar Support Inoperative > Page 8889 22. Make sure all the linkage components are properly positioned, then install two new seat-back panel clips, and install the panel. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Use a Steamer to Smooth Out Fabric Upholstery A garment steamer and a stiff-bristle brush make a great team for removing those nasty wrinkles, lines, or impressions in fabric upholstery. You can buy an inexpensive, small, hand-held garment/ fabric steamer from a number of different manufacturers. Some of these units even come with a handy built-in brush. Once you've got your steamer, follow the manufacturer's instructions to get it ready for use. Then apply a generous amount of steam to the problem area. Keep the steamer moving slowly over the area until it's hot and moist. A Word of Caution: Go easy on the steam if you're cleaning the front passenger seat in a vehicle with side airbags. Moisture can adversely affect or damage the OPDS sensors in the seatback. While the area is hot and moist, use a stiff-bristle brush, or the built-in brush if your steamer has one, to work the fabric back and forth and up and down. Stubborn areas might need more steam and brushing, so be patient and stay with it. It's worth the effort. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Rear Seat Trunk Pass-Through Cover Rear Seat Armrest/Trunk Pass - Through Cover Replacement 4-door NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Remove the clip (A) from the left portion of the armrest pivot. 2. Remove the armrest. -1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of the vehicle. -2 Remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (C) on the passenger's side of the vehicle by pulling up on the armrest, and remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (D) by pulling up on the armrest. 3. Remove the beverage holder. 4. Fold the seat-back forward. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8896 5. Remove the screws, and detach the hooks (A), then remove the trunk pass-through cover (B). 6. Install the armrest and trunk pass-through cover in the reverse order of removal. Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement 4-door: 1. Remove the seat side bolster. 2. Release all the hook strips (A), and fold back the seat side bolster cover (B), and release the cover from the hooks (C), to remove it. 3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hook strips. Rear Seat Cushion Cover Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement 1. Remove the seat-backs and seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8897 2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover. 3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat cushion cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8898 4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Rear Seat-Back Cover Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat-back, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Remove these items: - Armrest and trunk pass-through cover, 4-door. - Headrest. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the center belt guide. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8899 4. Remove the clips and release the fasteners (A) (4-door), then pull back the seat-back mat. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8900 5. Release all the clips (A), and hook strips (B), and fold back the seat-back cover (C). 6. Pull out the seat-back pad (A) from the frame (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. 7. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8901 8. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the hooks (B) of the horizontal wires (C) from the vertical wires (D) on the pad (4-door), and remove the clips (E), then remove the seat-back cover. 9. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the fasteners, hook strips, and clips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8902 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seat Cover Front Seat Cover Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Do not touch the OPDS sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil. Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. Seat-back Cover - 4-way Power Seat 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the headrest. 3. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the recline motor connector (A), detach the side airbag connector clip (B), the OPDS unit connector clip (C), and harness clip (D). Release the seat cushion cover (E) from the seat cushion frame spring (F), then pull the cover back and remove the wire ties (G). 4. Remove these items from the front seat, then remove the seat-back: - Recline cover - Center cover 5. Detach the clips and hooks (A) by carefully pulling the bottom of the back panel (B) back, pull the panel downward to release the hooks (C) from the seat-back frame, then remove the panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8903 6. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-back cover (B). 7. Pull the recline motor harness (A), side airbag harness (B) and the OPDS harness (C) out through the holes (D) in the seat-back cover. 8. Release the hooks (A) of the reinforcing cloth (B) from the seat-back frame (C). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8904 9. Pull out the headrest guides (A) by pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. 10. From the back of the the seat-back, pass both lower retainers (A) through the slots in the seat-back pad, and release all of the clips (B). 11. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat-back cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat > Page 8905 12. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips, hooks, and hook strips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). - Reinstall the hooks (C) of the reinforcing cloth (D) securely. - Use only original Honda replacement seat-back covers. - Make sure the Recline motor harness, side airbag harness, and OPDS harness are routed properly. - If necessary, reinitialize the OPDS control unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Seat Heaters Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8910 Seat Heater: Connector Locations 80. Under Driver's Seat (EX-L, V6) 83. Under Front Passenger's Seat (L4: EX-L) 185. Under Front Pass. Seat (Sedan V6: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8925 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8926 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8927 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8928 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8929 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8930 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8931 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8932 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8933 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8934 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8935 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8936 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8937 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8938 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8939 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8940 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8941 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8942 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8943 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8944 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8945 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8946 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8947 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8948 Seat Heater: Connector Views 145. Seat Heater, Driver's (EX-L) 146. Seat Heater, Front Passenger's (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8949 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Diagram 147-0 (EX-L) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8950 Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Seat Heaters - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8951 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Seat Heater Test Driver's Seat 1. Remove the driver's seat. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 2P connector (B) from the seat heater. 3. Check for continuity between the B1 and B2 terminals of the seat-back heater 2P connector. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the A1 and A2 terminals, and the A1 and B2 terminals. There should be continuity. 5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the seat heater. Front Passenger's Seat 1. Remove the passenger's seat. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat heater. 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals, and No.3 and No.4 terminals of the 4P connector. There should be continuity. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat heater. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8955 72. Behind Glove Box (L4: EX-L) 180. Behind Glove Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8956 158. Seat Heater Relay (EX-L) And Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8957 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: The turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type B: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations 60. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8961 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams 171. Seat Heater Switch, Driver's (EX-L) 172. Seat Heater Switch, Front Passenger's (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8962 Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the center console front panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater switch (A), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (B) or the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch Replacement Seat Latch: Service and Repair Rear Seat-Back Latch Replacement Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement 2-door NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the rear shelf cover. 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch (B). 3. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back locks securely and unlocks properly. 4-door NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove these items: - Rear door sill trim, both sides. - Seat side bolster, both sides. - Rear shelf cover. 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A) from the trunk compartment. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch Replacement > Page 8967 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch. Fastener Locations. 4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back locks securely and unlocks properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch Replacement > Page 8968 Seat Latch: Service and Repair Rear Seat-Back Lock Cylinder Replacement Rear Seat-back Lock Cylinder Replacement 2-door NOTE: Take care not to scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Disconnect the cylinder rods from both seat-back latches self-tapping ET. 3. Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the seat-back lock cylinder (A) and cylinder rods (B). 4. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back unlocks properly. 4-door NOTE: Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the trunk compartment. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back lock cylinder. 4. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back unlocks properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch Replacement > Page 8969 Seat Latch: Service and Repair Trunk Pass-Through Cover Key Cylinder Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder Replacement 4-door NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to scratch the cover. 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the rear seat handle (A) up at either hook portion (B) on the forward side of the trunk pass through cover (C). Then slide the handle half-way up. 2. From trunk compartment side of the cover, using a small screwdriver, press the inside hook (A) down through the access hole (B). 3. While pressing the hook, pry the trunk handle (C) up with a flat-tip screwdriver. 4. Remove the trunk handle (A) and rear seat handle (B) together at the same time. 5. Remove the retainer clip (C), then remove the trunk pass-through cover key cylinder (D) from the cover (E). 6. Install the key cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Put the two handles together before installing them on the trunk pass-through cover. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch Replacement > Page 8970 - Make sure the trunk pass-through cover opens properly and locks securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Latch Cable: Service and Repair Rear Seat Access Cable Replacement 2-door Driver's Seat SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS section before re installation. NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Take care not to bend the cable. - Put on glove protect your hands. 1. Remove the front driver's seat. 2. Remove the seat-back. 3. Remove the seat-back cover/pad as on assembly from the seat-back frame. 4. Detach the cable clip (A), and disconnect the rear seat access cable (B) from the rear seat access lever (C) and both recline adjusters (D). Release the wire ties (E), then remove the cable. 5. Install the cable in the reverse order a removal, and note these items: - Replace any wire ties you removed with new ones. - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8978 Doors Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8979 108. Door Key Cylinder Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in LOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door key cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Key Cylinder Switch Test > Page 8982 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral) position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8988 126. Behind Middle Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8989 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams 69. Security Hood Switch (EX, EX-L; Canada LX) 288. Security Hood Switch (DX, LX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8990 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Hood Switch Test 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations 101. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) 105. Left Rear Door (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8994 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 109. Door Lock Knob Switch, Driver's (except USA DX) 110. Door Lock Knob Switch, Front Passenger's (LX V6, EX, EX-L) 111. Door Lock Knob Switch, Left Rear (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8995 112. Door Lock Knob Switch, Right Rear (4-door: LX V6, EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Front Passenger's Door (EX, EXL) 1. Remove the front passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch in Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8998 the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not specified, replace the door lock actuator. Rear Door (EX, EXL) 1. Remove the left or right rear door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 8999 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test Passenger's Door Lock Switch 1. Remove the front passenger's switch panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the front passenger's power window switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in LOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in the neutral position. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.9 terminals when the door lock switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No. 9 terminals when the door lock switch is in the neutral position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9003 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Front Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9004 94. Driver's Door (4-door) 218. Driver's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9005 192. Power Mirror Switch (Except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9006 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9007 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B). NOTE: The illustration shows 4-door Mirror Switch Defogger Switch (Canada) 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 252. Under Driver's Seat Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations 79. Left Side Of Driver's Seat (EX-L; LX: V6) 183. Rt. Side Of Frt. Passenger's Seat (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9014 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams 232. Power Seat Adjustment Switch, Driver's 281. Power Seat Adjustment Switch, Front Passenger's (4-door V6: EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 8-Way Adjustable Switch Test/Replacement Driver's Power Seat (8-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover from the driver's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (B). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 8-Way Adjustable > Page 9017 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection 4-Way Adjustable Switch Test/Replacement Front Passenger's power Seat (4-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the front passenger's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9018 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Switch Test/Replacement Front Passenger's power Seat (4-way Adjustable) 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the front passenger's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat switch. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A). 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations 60. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9022 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams 171. Seat Heater Switch, Driver's (EX-L) 172. Seat Heater Switch, Front Passenger's (EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9023 Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the center console front panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater switch (A), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (B) or the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 9032 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely 03-003 July 2, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Updated information is shown by asterisks. Moonroof Does Not Close Completely (Supersedes 03-003, dated June 24, 2003) SYMPTOM The moon roof does not close completely unless you press the moonroof switch repeatedly. PROBABLE CAUSE The moonroof limit switch is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003 Accord L4 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM5. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A017403 From VIN JHMCM5. ..3C000001 thru JHMCM5...3C028190 2003 Accord V6 4-Door EX: From VIN 1HGCM6. ..3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A012934 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the moonroof limit switch. PARTS INFORMATION Moonroof Limit Switch: P/N 70431-SEA-A01, H/C 7359607 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 814134 *Flat Rate Time: 1.1 hours* Failed Part: P/N 70200-SDC-A01 H/C 7248966 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03220* Template ID: 03-003A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: > 03-003 > Jul > 04 > Body - Moonroof Doesn't Close Completely > Page 9038 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Remove the headliner. See page 20-103 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual. (In ISIS, use the keyword HEADLINE, and select Headliner Removal/Installation from the list.) Use a trim pad remover to unfasten the headliner clips.* 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch. 3. Unplug the 4P connector from the limit switch. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the switch. 4. Install the new limit switch with the two mounting bolts, making sure the new switch is in the same position as the original switch. Torque the bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). Plug in the 4P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the operation of the moonroof with the moon roof switch (from the tilt-up position to fully closed; from the fully open position to fully closed). * ^ If the moonroof does not work properly, adjust the limit switch (see page 20-86). (In ISIS, use the keyword LIMIT, and select Moonroof Limit Switch Adjustment from the list.) Reinstall the headliner.* ^ If the moonroof works properly, reinstall the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9041 109. Rear Of Roof (4-door: EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9042 139. Moonroof Limit Switch (4-door EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9043 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the moon roof limit switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, adjust the moon roof limit switch. If the continuity is still not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9044 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (F) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (F). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9045 Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch: Service and Repair Limit Switch Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch (A) on the moonroof fame (B). 3. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the moonroof limit switch. 4. Remove the two mounting bolts. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 6. Adjust the moonroof limit switch as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations 38. Left Side Of Dash (EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9049 164. Moonroof Switch (EX, EX-L) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9050 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the "II" to the "I" or "O" positions, as long as none of the doors are opened. This provides a convenience to parked occupants while offering a degree of security against unwanted or accidental moonroof operation. 1. Carefully push out the moonroof switch (A) from behind the dashboard lower cover, then disconnect the 6P connector (B) from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9054 122. Middle Of Trunk Lid (4-door) 233. Middle Of Trunk Lid (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9055 235. Trunk Latch Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trunk Latch Switch Test Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). ( ):DX 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 (No.1) and No 3 (No.2) terminals. ( ):DX - There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open). - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trunk Latch Switch Test > Page 9058 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 1. Remove the trunk lid trim. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the neutral position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Insulator Locations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Insulator Locations > Page 9063 Sound Proofing / Insulation: Locations Insulator Size Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Insulator Locations > Page 9064 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Insulator Locations > Page 9065 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Splash Guard: Procedures Splash Shield Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the splash shield (A). -1 From both wheel arch, remove the bolts (B) and clips (C) securing the front inner fender (D) and splash shield (on the body). -2 From under the front bumper (E), remove the clips (C). -3 Pull the splash shield out. 2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9070 Splash Guard: Removal and Replacement Splash Shield Replacement Splash Shield Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the splash shield (A). -1 From both wheel arch, remove the bolts (B) and clips (C) securing the front inner fender (D) and splash shield (on the body). -2 From under the front bumper (E), remove the clips (C). -3 Pull the splash shield out. 2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clip. Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9071 1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal, and check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and replace them with new ones. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Strut Tower Brace > Component Information > Service and Repair Frame Stiffener Replacement Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Remove the hood rear seal (A) by pulling it out. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (B) from the cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers. 3. Detach the clips (C, D) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (E) upward, and release the hooks (F) on the passenger's cowl cover from the driver's side, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (G). 5. Detach the clips (C, D, H) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (I) upward, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 6. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones. - Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9085 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door stop mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to door stop mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9090 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9091 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9092 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9093 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9094 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new one because it will bend. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel, 2-door, 4-door. - Power mirror/Manual mirror. - Door sash trim, 2-door. 2. 4-door: Remove the screws from the rear edge of the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9095 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot. 4. Pull the rear of the glass outer weatherstrip (A) away from the door, then release the front clip (B) from the mounting hole in the door. If necessary, pry the clip, then remove the weatherstrip. 5. Install new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door stop mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clip (B, C), then remove the door weatherstrip (D). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (E) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to the door stop mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9103 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9104 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9105 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 9106 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9107 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new one because it will bend. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door, 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Remove the screw from the front edge of the door. 3. Starting at the front, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9108 4. Detach the rear clip (A), then remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged 05-012 October 17, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Moonroof Glass Weatherstrip Is Damaged (Supersedes 05-012, dated April 8, 2005, to update the information marked by the black bars) PROBLEM The moonroof glass weatherstrip is damaged. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Depending on the vehicle, replace the moonroof glass weatherstrip, REPAIR PROCEDURE A, or replace the moonroof glass, REPAIR PROCEDURE B. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 9117 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Same as listed in PARTS INFORMATION Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the moon roof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. 2. Place a piece of masking tape on the middle of the front edge of the moonroof glass. Make sure that the tape is on the glass only and not touching the soft rubber of the weatherstrip. 3. Place a mark on the masking tape that aligns with the seam of the weatherstrip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 9118 4. Push down on the top of the old weatherstrip with your thumb until a small section separates from the moonroof. Once a section has started to separate, grip it and pull outward, working around the moonroof until the weatherstrip is completely removed (note the locations of the holes in the weatherstrip). 5. Align the seam of the new weatherstrip to the mark on the masking tape. Make sure the holes are pointed in the same direction as noted in step 4. 6. Press the ridge of the new weatherstrip into the groove on the moonroof where the masking tape is marked. Work toward one corner; then go back to the middle and work toward the opposite corner. Be careful not to stretch the weatherstrip. 7. Continue pressing along one side, from corner to corner; then press along the opposite side, from corner to corner. 8. At the rear of the moonroof, continue pressing from one corner to the middle; then press from the opposite corner to the middle until the strip is completely installed. 9. Reinstall the moonroof glass (refer to the Glass Replacement procedure). 10. Check for proper fit of the new weatherstrip by opening and closing the moonroof. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - GLASS REPLACEMENT Replace the moonroof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged 05-012 October 17, 2006 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Moonroof Glass Weatherstrip Is Damaged (Supersedes 05-012, dated April 8, 2005, to update the information marked by the black bars) PROBLEM The moonroof glass weatherstrip is damaged. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Depending on the vehicle, replace the moonroof glass weatherstrip, REPAIR PROCEDURE A, or replace the moonroof glass, REPAIR PROCEDURE B. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 9124 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: Same as listed in PARTS INFORMATION Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A - WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the moon roof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. 2. Place a piece of masking tape on the middle of the front edge of the moonroof glass. Make sure that the tape is on the glass only and not touching the soft rubber of the weatherstrip. 3. Place a mark on the masking tape that aligns with the seam of the weatherstrip. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 05-012 > Oct > 06 > Body - Moonroof Weatherstrip damaged > Page 9125 4. Push down on the top of the old weatherstrip with your thumb until a small section separates from the moonroof. Once a section has started to separate, grip it and pull outward, working around the moonroof until the weatherstrip is completely removed (note the locations of the holes in the weatherstrip). 5. Align the seam of the new weatherstrip to the mark on the masking tape. Make sure the holes are pointed in the same direction as noted in step 4. 6. Press the ridge of the new weatherstrip into the groove on the moonroof where the masking tape is marked. Work toward one corner; then go back to the middle and work toward the opposite corner. Be careful not to stretch the weatherstrip. 7. Continue pressing along one side, from corner to corner; then press along the opposite side, from corner to corner. 8. At the rear of the moonroof, continue pressing from one corner to the middle; then press from the opposite corner to the middle until the strip is completely installed. 9. Reinstall the moonroof glass (refer to the Glass Replacement procedure). 10. Check for proper fit of the new weatherstrip by opening and closing the moonroof. REPAIR PROCEDURE B - GLASS REPLACEMENT Replace the moonroof glass: ^ Refer to Glass Replacement in the appropriate Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MOONROOF GLASS, and select Moonroof Glass Replacement (With Moonroof) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off 2. Apply clear sealant (B) into the channel of the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around. Sealant: SUNRISE MEISEI B-33C, or equivalent 3. Locate the painted alignment mark (C or D) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark in the center of the tailgate opening, and install the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around in the direction shown Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip. 4. Check for water leaks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9136 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9137 107. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9138 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch (A). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9142 48. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9143 Cruise Control Module: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Input Test 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic system (HDS) to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 2. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A and check for DTC's. 3. Go to PGM-FI and check for DTC's. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9144 5. Perform the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9148 Cruise Control Component Location Index V6 M/T 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9149 151. Cruise Control Combination Switch ('03-'04: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9150 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit input test check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9151 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit input test check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9156 48. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9157 Cruise Control Module: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Input Test 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic system (HDS) to the Data Link Connector (DLC). 2. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A and check for DTC's. 3. Go to PGM-FI and check for DTC's. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9158 5. Perform the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9166 197. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9167 107. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9168 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch (A). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9172 Cruise Control Component Location Index V6 M/T 40. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9173 151. Cruise Control Combination Switch ('03-'04: Except USA DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9174 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit input test check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9175 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's airbag. 2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit input test check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Push out the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator from behind the upper panel. 3. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (B). 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity, replace the bulb. 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index - Conventional Brake Components Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9187 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9188 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9189 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9190 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9191 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9192 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9193 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9194 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9195 Brake Warning Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9196 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9197 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9198 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9199 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9200 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9201 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9202 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9203 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9204 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9205 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9206 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9207 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9208 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9209 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9210 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9211 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9212 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9213 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9214 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9215 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9216 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9217 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9218 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9219 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9220 Circuit Diagram - Brake System Indicator Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9225 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9226 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9236 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9237 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9238 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9239 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9240 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9241 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9242 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9243 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9244 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9245 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9246 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9247 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9248 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9249 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9250 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9251 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9252 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9253 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9254 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9255 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9257 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9258 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9259 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9260 303. Cigarette Lighter (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9261 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 155 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - HVAC Subdisplay / Clock Has Wrong Time Clock: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - HVAC Subdisplay / Clock Has Wrong Time SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2004 TITLE: Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/ Clock Has Wrong Time APPLIES TO: 2003-05 Accord EX-Ls and EX V6s with the navigation system. SERVICE TIP: Is the time on the audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock not matching the time on the audio-HVAC display module? If this is the case, you need to synchronize the two clocks. Here's how: 1. Press the SETUP button on the display module. From the Set-up Screen, select 2 or 4. Then select Time zone/clock. - If the time is off by exactly 1 hour, check if the daylight savings setting is on or if the time zone setting is right for your area. - If the Set-up Screen time matches the subdisplay/clock time, but both times are wrong, touch the Reset button on the screen. This clears any adjustments that your customer might have made with the + or - buttons from the Clock adjustment screen. - If the subdisplay/clock time doesn't match the display module time on the Clock adjustment screen, there could be a communication problem. Go to step 2. 2. Go into the diagnostic mode (see section 22 of the 2003-2005 Accord S/M for details). Select Functional Setup, and then H/U Time Send. Make sure you've selected ON, then touch the Set button. You may need to keep doing this last action until the H/U time send completes. If the two clocks still won't sync, then go to step 3. 3. Check the 10P connector between the subdislay/clock and the display module. Look for loose terminals, and check for any opens or shorts in the wires. Repair the connector if needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9271 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9272 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9273 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9278 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9279 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9280 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9281 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9282 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9283 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9284 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9285 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9286 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9287 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9288 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9289 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9290 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9291 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9292 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9293 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9294 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9295 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9296 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9297 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9298 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9299 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9300 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9301 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9302 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9303 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9304 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9305 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9306 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9307 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9308 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9309 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9310 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9311 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9312 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9313 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9317 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9318 Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9319 89. Left B-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) 91. Left C-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9320 215. Left B-pillar (2-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9321 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 6. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 7. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9327 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9328 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9329 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9330 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9331 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9332 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9333 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9334 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9335 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9336 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9337 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9338 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9339 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9340 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9341 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9342 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9343 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9344 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9345 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9346 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9347 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9348 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9349 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9350 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9351 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9352 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9353 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9354 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9355 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9356 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9357 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9358 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9359 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9360 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9361 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9362 Audio-HVAC Display Panel Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9363 Safety Indicator System - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs Audio-HVAC Display Panel Inputs And Outputs Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs > Page 9366 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Testing and Inspection Safety Indicator Input Test Safety Indicator Input Test 1. Before testing the safety indicator functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, H and P. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, are recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs > Page 9367 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 7. 7. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic function. - If the indicators flash, go to step 8. - If the indicators do not flash, replace the gauge control module. 8. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck the system. - If the symptom is gone, the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If the symptom is still present, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Audio-HVAC- Display Module Inputs and Outputs > Page 9368 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Testing and Inspection Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power/Ground Circuit Testing Audio-HVAC Display Panel Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.20 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio-HVAC display panel. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.22 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and the precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. - Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage. - Do not work in a dusty or dirty place. - Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work. - Do not touch the circuit board with your bare hands. - Do not work with dirty hands. - Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable. - Do not touch the terminal connector of the flat plate cable with your bare hands. (If you have touched it, wipe it off thoroughly.) 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Remove the upper panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 9371 3. Remove the screws and bolts, disconnect the audio-HVAC display module connectors (A) and the antenna lead (B), then remove the audio-HVAC display module (C). 4. Install the audio-HVAC display module and note these items: - Make sure the disconnected connectors plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is connected properly. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 9372 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Display Panel and Audio Unit Removal/Installation Audio-HVAC Display Panel and Audio Unit Removal/Installation 1. Remove the audio-HVAC display module. 2. Remove the mounting screws and the audio unit (A) from the radio brackets (B). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 9373 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Display Panel Disassembly/Reassembly Audio-HVAC Display Panel Disassembly/Reassembly 1. Remove the audio-HVAC display panel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 9374 2. Remove the mounting screws and the covers (A), then disconnect the connectors (B) (Navigation system) from the printed circuit board (C). 3. With navigation system: Remove the mounting screws and display unit (A) from the printed circuit board (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 9375 4. Remove the mounting screws and control knobs (A), then remove the printed circuit board (B). 5. Install the audio unit and printed circuit board in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio-HVAC Display Module Removal/Installation > Page 9376 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/Clock Replacement Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/Clock Replacement With Navigation 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Remove the two mounting screws. 3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the audio HVAC subdisplay/clock (B). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Low Fuel Indicator Comes On At 1/4 Tank Fuel Gauge: Technical Service Bulletins Low Fuel Indicator Comes On At 1/4 Tank SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2004 TITLE: Low Fuel Indicator Comes On at 1/4 Tank APPLIES TO: 2003-05 Accord SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaint of the low fuel indicator coming on when the fuel gauge still reads 1/4 tank? Don't bother to do any troubleshooting. The low fuel indicator is designed to come on when the fuel tank level drops down to 3 or 4 gallons and the fuel gauge reads just less than 1/4 tank. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Low Fuel Indicator Comes On At 1/4 Tank > Page 9381 Fuel Gauge: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Charting the Fuel Gauge and the Low Fuel Indicator APPLIES TO: 1998-03 Accord, 1996-03 Civic, or 1999-03 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: If an owner is leery of the fuel gauge or low fuel indicator accuracy and worries about running out of fuel, you may be able to restore faith in the accuracy of this hardware by charting the operation. If the fuel gauge, the low fuel indicator, or both doesn't give your customer a warm, fuzzy feeling, don't replace the fuel gauge or the sending unit until you've first charted the fuel gauge needle position and low fuel indicator status. You rarely improve accuracy by replacing fuel gauges and sending units. To chart the fuel gauge needle position and the low fuel indicator status, do this: 1. Have your customer bring in the vehicle when the fuel tank is nearly empty. 2. Drain any remaining fuel from the tank. 3. Park the vehicle on a flat surface, and add 2 gallons of fuel to the tank with the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0). 4. Start the engine, and note the fuel gauge needle position after 2 minutes. Draw a picture of the fuel gauge showing the position of the needle. Also note on your drawing if the low fuel indicator is on or off. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Add 2 more gallons of fuel to the tank. Start the engine, and note the position of the needle after 2 minutes. Draw another picture of the fuel gauge showing the current position of the needle. Note the status of the low fuel indicator. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Repeat step 5 until the fuel tank is full. Then give your customer all of the pictures you've drawn. They're usually enough to convince even the staunchest Doubting Thomas. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip > Page 9386 Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge Sending Unit - New Wrench Available SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: New Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Wrench Available APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new fuel gauge sending unit wrench available in Honda parts stock. The new wrench T/N 07AAA-S0XA100) is a beefier version of the old one (T/N 07XAA-001010A) and supersedes it. The new wrench is much less prone to bending when you're removing a stubborn fuel pump/sender assembly locknut. Order it through normal parts ordering channels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9387 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9388 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Do multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting test mode A. - If no problem is found, go to step 2. - If DTC B1175 is indicated, go to the DTC B1175 troubleshooting. 2. Check the No.21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from the minimum to maximum position and then returns to minimum, the gauge is OK. Go to step 4. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep correctly, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the trunk floor. 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 8. Non-SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 9. SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9389 10. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the fuel pump 5P connector with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the given readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9390 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100 Non-SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9391 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (I) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (J) and new O-rings (K). When instaling the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the unit (M) and the fuel tank (N). SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9392 7. Remove the fuel tank unit (A). 8. Remove the strainer case (A), the fuel gauge sending unit (B), and the wire harness (C). 9. Install the part in the revers order of removal with a new base gasket (F) and new O-ring (G), then check these items: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (D) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (E). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (H) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. - Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. - Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. - Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. - Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. - Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. - The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before disconnecting the battery cable. - Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the customer's radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9398 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (4,5). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9399 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Side Curtain Airbag Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9400 5. Disconnect both side curtain airbag 2P connectors (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness. Seat Belt Tensioner 6. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. SRS Unit 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from the SRS unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Control Module: Locations Gauges Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9404 Gauges Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9407 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9408 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9409 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9410 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9411 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9412 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9413 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9414 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9415 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9416 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9417 Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9418 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9419 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9420 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9421 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9422 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9423 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9424 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9425 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9426 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9427 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9428 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9429 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9430 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9431 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9432 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9433 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9434 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9435 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9436 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9437 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9438 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9439 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9440 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9441 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9442 216. Gauge Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9443 Reminder Systems, Key Light Timer, And Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9444 Instrument Panel Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors F and P. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Remove the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9445 7. Disconnect the gauge control module 30P connector. 8. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 9. 9. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 10. 10. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic function. - If the beeper sounds and the seatbelt light flashes, go to step 11. - If the beeper does not sounds, or the seatbelt light does not flash, replace the gauge control module. 11. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and reheck the system. - It the symptom is gone, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. - It the symptom is still present, the gauge control module is faulty; replace the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9446 Instrument Panel Control Module: Service and Repair Gauge Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the instrument panel, then remove the upper column cover. 2. Place a clean shop towel (A) under the gauge control module to prevent scratching the steering column or dash panel. 3. Remove the screws from the gauge control module (B). 4. Disconnect the 30P connector (C), and remove the gauge control module. 5. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. Rewriting the ODO Data on a New Gauge Control Module NOTE: - If the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the ODO/TRIP display will appear as "-----", making the ODO function unusable, and the HDS will be unable to retrieve additional ODO values. - Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module that does not communicate. - Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the rewriting process. 1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect the HDS to the data link connector. 2. Select GAUGES AND INDICATORS from the HDS menu display. 3. Select "ODO REWRITE" from the ADJUSTMENTS menu display, and follow the instructions on the menu display to retrieve the ODO value. 4. Replace the gauge control module. 5. Follow the instructions on the menu display to write the new ODO value to the new gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations 43. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9450 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9451 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9452 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Fuel Indicator Test 1. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2. - If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module assembly. 2. Do multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting test mode A. - If any DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. - If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3. 3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Indicator - Turn Off Headlights To Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2004 TITLE: Turn Off Headlights To Reset Maintenance Indicator APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: Can't reset the maintenance required indicator? Make sure the headlights are turned off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still can't reset the indicator even with the headlights turned off, then check if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does, you may need to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press and hold the select/reset button in the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch ON (Position II). 3. Hold the button for at least 10 seconds, until the indicator resets. Note: In an article in Honda's Service News dated March 2004 the manufacturer notes the following: Turn off the headlights to reset Maintenance Indicator. Can't reset the maintenance indicator in a 03-04 Accord? Make sure the headlights are off; otherwise, it won't reset. If you still cannot reset the indicator even with the headlights off, then check to see if the vehicle has aftermarket daytime running lights. If it does you may have to disable the system to reset the indicator. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashies five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9466 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic procedure. Does the MIL indicator flash? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge assembly. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the MIL. Does the MIL stay off? YES - Go to step 17. NO - Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait 20 seconds, and watch the MIL. Does the MIL stay on or flash more than 5 times? YES - Go to step 7. NO - The MIL circuit is OK. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Connect the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". If no problem is found in the DLC troubleshooting, go to step 21. 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? YES - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Check the MIL in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does indicate ON? YES - Go to step 12. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge assembly. 12. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a short indicated? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9467 15. Disconnect ECM connector A (31P). 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A16 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A16)and the DLC. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 17. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start and idle smoothly? YES - Go to step 18. NO - Go to step 22. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Connect the HDS. 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Go to "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". If no problem is found in the DLC troubleshooting, go to step 21. 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC U0073 and/or U0155 indicated? YES - Go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM. replace the original ECM/PCM. 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 23. Inspect the No.23 + B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the No.20 IG (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is OK, go to step 24. NO - Repair short in the wire between No.23 + B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the No.23 +B IG MAIN ( 50 A) fuse. 24. Inspect the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9468 YES - Go to step 31. NO - Go to step 25. 25. Remove the blown No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 26. Remove the left kick panel, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 27. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.3 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (PCM) (15 A) and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 28. 28. Disconnect each of the components or connectors below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector E (31P) - Each injector 2P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 6P connector Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9469 Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 29. NO - Replace the component that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. 29. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. - PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) - ECM/PCM connector E (31P) - Injectors - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 30. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN) and each item. Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN). Also replace the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse. 31. Inspect the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 44. NO - Go to step 32. 32. Remove the blown No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 33. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 34. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 35. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9470 Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 36. NO - Replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 36. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 37. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E5), or between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 38. 38. Remove the trunk floor trim panel. 39. Remove the access panel from the floor. 40. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 41. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9471 YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Go to step 42. 42. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A). 43. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it if necessary. Also replace the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. 44. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 45. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 46. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 47. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 48. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9472 NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E5). 48. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A5 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 53. NO - Go to step 49. 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 50. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 51. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 52. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9473 52. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.4 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A5. Is there continuity? YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (A5). 53. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 54. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 55. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals E4. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 62. NO - Go to step 56. 56. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 57. Remove the kick panel. Then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 58. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9474 59. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 60. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 61. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector terminal E4. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-PI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (E4). 62. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals B15, E1, E2, and E3 individually. Is there more than 0.2 V? YES - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 0.2 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (B15, E1, E2, E3). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9475 NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension Odometer: Recalls Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension 06-085 May 9, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage (Supersedes 06-085, dated January 22, 2008, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND On December 29, 2007, a federal court provided final approval of the settlement of a class action lawsuit alleging that the odometers on certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models, and some 2007 Fit models, were overstating mileage. As part of the settlement, American Honda is extending the mileage-based coverage period of all warranties, Honda Care Service Contracts, and Honda Certified Used Vehicles by 5 percent on the above referenced vehicles. The time limits for all warranties are unchanged. VEHICLES AFFECTED The vehicles affected by this settlement include certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models and some 2007 Fit models purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006. The affected region is the United States (including the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands). Affected vehicles registered to customers with a military or a NATO address are also included in this settlement. The most effective way to check a vehicle's warranty coverage is by a VIN status inquiry. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION American Honda notified affected customers by mail or publication. The notices were sent to original registered purchasers, informing them of the terms of the settlement. Notice was also published in a national newspaper. To view the content of the mailed notice, as well as other documents regarding the settlement, or for additional information, please refer to these sources: Website: www.odosettlementinfo.com Information Center: (888) 888-3082 CORRECTIVE ACTION *On affected vehicles, the settlement requires you to honor a 5 percent increase in the mileage coverage period for all warranties, all Honda Certified Used Vehicles, and those Honda Care Service Contracts purchased only by the original owners.* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Use the chart as a reference for converting most standard warranty mileage limits to the extended mileage coverage. Use the chart as a reference to all service bulletins affected by the extended mileage coverage. In addition to the 5 percent mileage increase in warranty coverage, any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension > Page 9484 consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. WARRANTY MILEAGE CONVERSION NOTE: Follow normal warranty claim coding when submitting a claim. SERVICE BULLETINS AFFECTED BY EXTENDED MILEAGE COVERAGE Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Odometer: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension Odometer: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension 06-085 May 9, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage (Supersedes 06-085, dated January 22, 2008, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND On December 29, 2007, a federal court provided final approval of the settlement of a class action lawsuit alleging that the odometers on certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models, and some 2007 Fit models, were overstating mileage. As part of the settlement, American Honda is extending the mileage-based coverage period of all warranties, Honda Care Service Contracts, and Honda Certified Used Vehicles by 5 percent on the above referenced vehicles. The time limits for all warranties are unchanged. VEHICLES AFFECTED The vehicles affected by this settlement include certain 2002 through 2006 Honda models and some 2007 Fit models purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006. The affected region is the United States (including the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands). Affected vehicles registered to customers with a military or a NATO address are also included in this settlement. The most effective way to check a vehicle's warranty coverage is by a VIN status inquiry. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION American Honda notified affected customers by mail or publication. The notices were sent to original registered purchasers, informing them of the terms of the settlement. Notice was also published in a national newspaper. To view the content of the mailed notice, as well as other documents regarding the settlement, or for additional information, please refer to these sources: Website: www.odosettlementinfo.com Information Center: (888) 888-3082 CORRECTIVE ACTION *On affected vehicles, the settlement requires you to honor a 5 percent increase in the mileage coverage period for all warranties, all Honda Certified Used Vehicles, and those Honda Care Service Contracts purchased only by the original owners.* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Use the chart as a reference for converting most standard warranty mileage limits to the extended mileage coverage. Use the chart as a reference to all service bulletins affected by the extended mileage coverage. In addition to the 5 percent mileage increase in warranty coverage, any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Odometer: > 06-085 > May > 08 > Campaign - Vehicle Warranty Mileage Extension > Page 9490 consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. WARRANTY MILEAGE CONVERSION NOTE: Follow normal warranty claim coding when submitting a claim. SERVICE BULLETINS AFFECTED BY EXTENDED MILEAGE COVERAGE Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Odometer: > SN050515 > May > 05 > Instrument Cluster Rewriting ODO Data Odometer: All Technical Service Bulletins Instrument Cluster - Rewriting ODO Data SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Rewriting ODO Data on a New Gauge Control Module APPLIES TO: 03-05 Accord 05 Odyssey 06 Ridgeline SERVICE TIP: If you're replacing the gauge control module, make sure you use the HDS to rewrite the ODO data from the old gauge control module to the new one. Installing a gauge control module with a zeroed out odometer could lower the vehicle's resale value and even spark a Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) investigation. Make sure you check with your state DMV for any mileage disclosure requirements. You may still need to apply a Mileage Disclosure sticker or provide a True Mileage Unknown (TMU) notification. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Odometer: > SN030418 > Apr > 03 > Odometer - Does It Rack Up Miles When Towed Odometer: All Technical Service Bulletins Odometer - Does It Rack Up Miles When Towed SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Does a Towed Vehicle's Odometer Rack Up Miles? APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: If the vehicle has an electronic speedometer (one that isn't cable-driven), the answer is NO. The odometer doesn't rack up mileage as long as the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or the ACC (1) position. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Odometer: > SN050515 > May > 05 > Instrument Cluster Rewriting ODO Data Odometer: All Technical Service Bulletins Instrument Cluster - Rewriting ODO Data SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Rewriting ODO Data on a New Gauge Control Module APPLIES TO: 03-05 Accord 05 Odyssey 06 Ridgeline SERVICE TIP: If you're replacing the gauge control module, make sure you use the HDS to rewrite the ODO data from the old gauge control module to the new one. Installing a gauge control module with a zeroed out odometer could lower the vehicle's resale value and even spark a Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) investigation. Make sure you check with your state DMV for any mileage disclosure requirements. You may still need to apply a Mileage Disclosure sticker or provide a True Mileage Unknown (TMU) notification. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Odometer: > SN030418 > Apr > 03 > Odometer - Does It Rack Up Miles When Towed Odometer: All Technical Service Bulletins Odometer - Does It Rack Up Miles When Towed SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Does a Towed Vehicle's Odometer Rack Up Miles? APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: If the vehicle has an electronic speedometer (one that isn't cable-driven), the answer is NO. The odometer doesn't rack up mileage as long as the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or the ACC (1) position. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 153. Right Side Of Engine Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9511 13. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9512 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9513 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 2. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge Outside Temperature Display: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge 03-082 December 19, 2003 Applies To: 2003-04 Accord DX, LX, and L4 EX Without Climate Control - ALL Outside Air Temperature Gauge Accessory Troubleshooting Guide (P/N 08E71-SDA-100) (Supersedes 03-082, dated November 16, 2003) Updated information is shown with black bars and asterisks. This bulletin includes the system specifications, troubleshooting guides, and a circuit diagram for the accessory outside temperature gauge, P/N 08E71-SDA-100. SPECIFICATIONS OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE GAUGE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) *The outside air temperature sensor changes resistance with changes in ambient air temperature. The outside air temperature control unit converts the resistance value of the outside air temperature sensor into a digital signal and sends it over the B-CAN line. The gauge control module receives the signal, and displays it as the outside air temperature. Outside Air Temperature Indicator Logic If the engine coolant temperature is 140°F (60°C) or higher when the ignition switch is turned on, the last outside temperature indicated will be displayed. If the engine coolant temperature is 139°F (59°C) or below when the ignition switch is turned on, the current outside temperature will be Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge > Page 9518 displayed. This logic has been written into the gauge control module to help prevent abnormal or fluctuating outside temperature indicator readings due to heat reflection from the road, the engine, and surrounding traffic.* Outside Air Temperature Gauge System Diagram HDS INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMANDS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge > Page 9519 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Outside Air Temperature Is Not Shown on the Display * NOTE: Before troubleshooting the outside air temperature circuit, check for B-CAN DTCs. If any DTCs are present, perform B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A. 1. Check the No. 33 (3A) and No. 30 (7.5A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuses, and check the temperature display.[]* 2. Check the BATT (2A) fuse on the accessory wire harness. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Replace the fuse, and check the temperature display.[] 3. * Check the IG2 (2A) fuse on the accessory wire harness. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the fuse, and check the temperature display.[] 4. Disconnect the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge > Page 9520 5. Check for resistance between terminal No. 17 (BLU) and terminal No. 18 (GRN) of the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P). Is there about 500 to 20 K Ohms? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Check the resistance of the outside air temperature sensor. Is there about 500 to 20 k Ohms? YES - Repair the open in the BLU or GRN wire.[] NO - Replace the outside air temperature sensor.[] 7. Check for continuity between terminal No. 11 (BLK) of the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P) and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 8. NO - Repair the open in the BLK wire between the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P) terminal No. 11 and body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge > Page 9521 8. Check for continuity between terminal No. 16 (BLK) of the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P) and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair the open in the BLK wire between the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P) terminal No. 16 and body ground. 9. Check for continuity between the under-dash fusel relay box connector T (6P) terminal No. 3 and the outside air temperature control unit (22P) terminal No. 7. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Repair the open in the BRN/RED wire between terminal No. 3 of the under-dash fusel relay box connector T (6P) and terminal No. 7 of the outside temperature sensor connector (22P).[] 10. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 (WHT/ BLU) and terminal No. 11 (BLK) of the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P). Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Repair the open in the WHT wire between the No. 33 (3A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the BATT (2A) accessory fuse, or repair the open in the WHT/BLU wire between the BATT (2A) fuse and the outside air temperature gauge control unit connector (22P).[] Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge > Page 9522 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 and terminal No. 11 of the outside air temperature gauge control unit harness (22P) connector. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 13. NO - Repair the open in the YEL/BLK wire between the No. 30 (7.5A) fuse in the fuse/relay box and the 1G2 (2A) accessory fuse, or repair the open in the YEL/GRN wire between the BATT (2A) fuse and the outside air temperature gauge control unit.[] 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Reconnect the connector (22P) to the outside air temperature gauge control unit. 15. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then select YOP ECU, then DATA LIST, then Outside Temp Sens. Does the HDS show a temperature? YES - Troubleshoot the gauge assembly (see page 22-230 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual).[] NO - Replace the outside air temperature gauge control unit.[]* Actual Air Temperature and Indicated Air Temperature Are Different NOTE: *The engine coolant temperature must be lower than 139°F (59°C) before attempting the following troubleshooting. 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor from the vehicle. 2. Dip the sensor in ice water for several minutes, then measure the resistance between terminals No. 1 and No. 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Troubleshooting Outside Temperature Gauge > Page 9523 3. Pour hot water on the sensor, and measure the change in resistance between terminal No. 1 and terminal No. 2.* Is the resistance measurement approximately the same as the scale? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the temperature sensor.[] 4. *Connect the temperature sensor to the wire harness. 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then select YOP ECU, then DATA LIST, then Outside Temp Sens. Is the temperature on the HDS and the temperature on the display different? YES - Troubleshoot the gauge assembly (see page 22-230 of the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual).[] NO - Replace the outside air temperature gauge control unit.[]* Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9524 44. Behind Gauge Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9525 301. Outside Air Temperature Gauge Control Unit (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9526 Outside Temperature Display: Testing and Inspection Outside Air Temperature Indicator Test NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor. The outside air temperature sensor for the indicator is mounted behind the front bumper. Because of this, the temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the rode, engine heat, and even exhaust from the surrounding traffic, To prevent bogus readings, the display uses a specific logic as shown. The outside air is warmer than when the ignition switch was turned OFF (ACC or LOCK) position: - If the ignition switch was turned OFF for less than 2 hours, the displayed temperature when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) stays at the ignition switch- off temperature until the vehicle has gone faster than 18 mph (11 km/h) for 30 seconds, then the display immediately updates to the measured outside air temperature. - If the ignition switch was turned OFF for 2 hours or more, the displayed temperature when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) rises 1 degree every minute until the outside air temperature is reached. The outside air is cooler than when the ignition switch was turned OFF (ACC or LOCK) position: - If the ignition switch was turned OFF for less than 2 hours, the displayed temperature when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) is the ignition switch-off temperature. The displayed temperature then drops 1 degree every 2 seconds until the reading matches the outside air temperature. - If the ignition switch was turned OFF for 2 hours or more, the displayed temperature is the measured outside air temperature. Forced Display You can also force the indicator to display the measured temperature. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the No.7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box for 60 seconds, then reinstall it. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: After this procedure, always you need to do the power window control unit reset procedure. Troubleshooting If the indicator displays for more than 2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature display mode, check the climate control system for DTCs, or an open in the LT BLU wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the climate control unit. Calibration NOTE: This procedure must be done after the temperature sensor stabilizes. The outside air temperature indicator's displayed temperature can be recalibrated ±3 ° meet the customer's expectations. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the reset select button for 10 seconds. While you continue to hold the button, the display will scroll through temperature settings from +3 ° to -3 ° as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9527 3. When the desired correction value appears on the display, release the button, and the recalibrated outside air temperature will be displayed. Each time a desired correction valve is entered, it replaces the previous valve. Example: Incorrect value = 68 °F (20 °C) Desired correction valve = +2 °F (+1°C) Correct valve = 70 °F (21 °C) Desired correction valve = -2 °F (-1 °C) Correct valve = 66 °F (19 °C) NOTE: To recalibrate the display to the true temperature, remove the outside air temperature sensor (A), but leave it connected. Submerge the sensor and a thermometer (B) in a container of ice water (C). Select the calibration mode as described above, then recalibrate the display to the true temperature. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 67. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9531 14. Parking Brake Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9532 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 9542 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 9548 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Control Module: Locations Gauges Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9552 Gauges Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9555 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9556 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9557 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9558 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9559 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9560 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9561 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9562 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9563 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9564 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9565 Instrument Panel Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9566 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9567 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9568 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9569 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9570 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9571 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9572 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9573 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9574 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9575 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9576 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9577 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9578 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9579 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9580 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9581 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9582 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9583 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9584 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9585 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9586 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9587 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9588 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9589 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9590 216. Gauge Control Module Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9591 Reminder Systems, Key Light Timer, And Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9592 Instrument Panel Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors F and P. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Remove the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9593 7. Disconnect the gauge control module 30P connector. 8. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 9. 9. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If the input tests prove OK, go to step 10. 10. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic function. - If the beeper sounds and the seatbelt light flashes, go to step 11. - If the beeper does not sounds, or the seatbelt light does not flash, replace the gauge control module. 11. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and reheck the system. - It the symptom is gone, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. - It the symptom is still present, the gauge control module is faulty; replace the gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9594 Instrument Panel Control Module: Service and Repair Gauge Control Module Replacement 1. Remove the instrument panel, then remove the upper column cover. 2. Place a clean shop towel (A) under the gauge control module to prevent scratching the steering column or dash panel. 3. Remove the screws from the gauge control module (B). 4. Disconnect the 30P connector (C), and remove the gauge control module. 5. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal. Rewriting the ODO Data on a New Gauge Control Module NOTE: - If the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the ODO value on the ODO/TRIP display will appear as "-----", making the ODO function unusable, and the HDS will be unable to retrieve additional ODO values. - Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module that does not communicate. - Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the rewriting process. 1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect the HDS to the data link connector. 2. Select GAUGES AND INDICATORS from the HDS menu display. 3. Select "ODO REWRITE" from the ADJUSTMENTS menu display, and follow the instructions on the menu display to retrieve the ODO value. 4. Replace the gauge control module. 5. Follow the instructions on the menu display to write the new ODO value to the new gauge control module. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9600 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9601 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9602 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9603 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9604 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9605 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9606 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9607 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9608 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9609 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9610 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9611 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9612 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9613 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9614 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9615 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9616 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9617 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9618 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9619 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9620 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9621 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9622 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9623 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9624 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9625 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9626 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9627 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9628 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9629 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9630 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9631 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9632 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9633 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9634 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9635 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9639 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9640 Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9641 89. Left B-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) 91. Left C-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9642 215. Left B-pillar (2-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9643 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 6. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 7. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip > Page 9648 Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge Sending Unit - New Wrench Available SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: New Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Wrench Available APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new fuel gauge sending unit wrench available in Honda parts stock. The new wrench T/N 07AAA-S0XA100) is a beefier version of the old one (T/N 07XAA-001010A) and supersedes it. The new wrench is much less prone to bending when you're removing a stubborn fuel pump/sender assembly locknut. Order it through normal parts ordering channels. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9649 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9650 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Do multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting test mode A. - If no problem is found, go to step 2. - If DTC B1175 is indicated, go to the DTC B1175 troubleshooting. 2. Check the No.21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from the minimum to maximum position and then returns to minimum, the gauge is OK. Go to step 4. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep correctly, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Remove the trunk floor. 6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 7. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 8. Non-SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. 9. SULEV model: Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9651 10. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the fuel pump 5P connector with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the given readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9652 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100 Non-SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9653 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (I) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. 11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (J) and new O-rings (K). When instaling the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the unit (M) and the fuel tank (N). SULEV model 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the trunk floor. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9654 7. Remove the fuel tank unit (A). 8. Remove the strainer case (A), the fuel gauge sending unit (B), and the wire harness (C). 9. Install the part in the revers order of removal with a new base gasket (F) and new O-ring (G), then check these items: - Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (D) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (E). - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (H) are firmly locked into place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations 43. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9658 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9659 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9660 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index 67. Under Center Console Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9664 14. Parking Brake Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9665 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the center console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground. ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: Customer Interest A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 9675 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop A/T Shift Indicator Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop 03-072 October 3, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord V6 - ALL A/C, Cruise Control, A/T Shift Position Indicator Do Not Work (DTC U0155) SYMPTOM The customer complains about at least one of these intermittent symptoms: ^ A/C doesn't work. ^ Cruise control doesn't work. ^ A/T shift position indicator in the instrument cluster doesn't work. NOTE: When this problem occurs, all of these symptoms are present, but the customer may not notice them all. PROBABLE CAUSE A communication problem between the F-CAN (controller area network) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 37820-RCA-L54 H/C 7300833 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 03-072A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. ^ If DTC U0155 (F-CAN malfunction/gauge control module) is stored, go to step 2. ^ If another DTC is stored, refer to the 2003-04 Accord V6 supplement manual for the appropriate troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-072 > Oct > 03 > A/T, A/C, Cruise - Shift Indicator, A/C or Cruise Inop > Page 9681 ^ If no DTC or other code is stored in the PCM, troubleshoot the customer's specific complaint. 2. If not already done, load the October 2003 or later iN network CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions were included along with the CD mailing. 3. Make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. 4. Update the PCM with the HIM (see service bulletin 01-023, using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules). 5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). Use the HDS to clear any DTCs that may have been set during the PCM update. 6. Cycle the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then to ON (II). Use the HDS to see if the DTCs have returned. ^ If the DTCs have returned, do the appropriate troubleshooting procedure(s) in the 2003-04 Accord Service Manual, then go to step 7. ^ If the DTCs are gone, go to step 7. 7. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical accessories (A/C, radio, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle for 10 minutes. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Windshield Washer Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 9687 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 9688 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 9694 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > A/T Shift Indicator Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for A/T Shift Indicator Module: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 9695 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gauges - Eratic Gauges Or Odd Odometer Display Speedometer Head: Technical Service Bulletins Gauges - Eratic Gauges Or Odd Odometer Display SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Erratic Gauges or Odd Odometer Display? Reset the Gauge Control Module. APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, or 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: If owners are complaining that the gauge needles are bouncing around or the odometer display is blank or displays nonsense, try resetting the gauge control module. Here's how: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the battery cables, starting with the negative cable. 3. Touch the battery cable ends together for about 1 minute. 4. Reconnect the battery cables, starting with the positive cable. 5. Start the engine, and watch the gauge assembly. - If the gauges or odometer still don't work right, shut off the engine, and do the self diagnostic procedure in the Body Electrical section of the appropriate S/M. Then go to step 6 - If the gauges and odometer work OK, shut off the engine, and go to step 6. 6. Do the idle learn procedure: - Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. - Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). - Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off ) for 10 minutes. Shut off the engine. 7. Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature (if applicable): - Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. - Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. - Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams 141. Park Pin Switch/A/T Gear Position Console Light (A/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 244. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9708 34. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9709 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-up Light Switch Test 1. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector (A). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No. 2 terminals of the back-up light switch. There should be continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. 3. If necessary, replace the back-up light switch. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001), and install it on the transmission housing. Tighten the back-up light switch to the specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9714 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9715 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9716 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9717 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9718 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9719 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9720 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9721 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9722 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9723 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9724 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9725 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9726 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9727 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9728 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9729 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9730 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9731 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9732 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9733 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9734 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9735 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9736 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9737 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9738 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9739 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9740 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9741 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9742 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9743 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9744 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9745 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9746 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9747 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9748 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9749 Brake Lamp: Connector Views 134. Brake Light/Taillight, Left (4-door) 135. Brake Light/Taillight, Right (4-door) 264. Brake Light/Taillight, Left (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9750 265. Brake Light/Taillight, Right (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9751 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Diagram 110-12 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9752 Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Exterior Lights - Circuit Diagram (Brake Lights) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9756 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair High Mount Brake Light Replacement Bulb Replacement 1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the bulb socket (B). 2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. Housing Replacement 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Remove the high mount brake light housing (A) from the cover (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Ash Tray Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams 302. Front Ashtray Light (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Cigarette Lighter Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams 304. Cigarette Lighter Light (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Door Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Door Lamp: Diagrams 38. Door Courtesy Light, Driver's (except DX) 39. Door Courtesy Light, Front Passenger's (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams 50. Glove Box Light Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9778 149. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9779 152. DRL Relay (Canada) And Fan Control Relay (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9780 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9781 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9786 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9787 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9788 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9789 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9790 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9791 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9792 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9793 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9794 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9795 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9796 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9797 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9798 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9799 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9800 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9801 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9802 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9803 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9804 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9805 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9806 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9807 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9808 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9809 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9810 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9811 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9812 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9813 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9814 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9815 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9816 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9817 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9818 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9819 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9820 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9821 Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Circuit Diagram Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9826 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9827 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9828 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9829 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9830 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9831 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9832 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9833 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9834 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9835 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9836 Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9837 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9838 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9839 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9840 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9841 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9842 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9843 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9844 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9845 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9846 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9847 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9848 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9849 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9850 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9851 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9852 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9853 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9854 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9855 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9856 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9857 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9858 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9859 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9860 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9861 102. Ceiling Light Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9862 Dome Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-1 (DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9863 Diagram 114-2 (EX, EX-L) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9864 Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Ceiling Light Replacement 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two mounting screws. 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C). 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9868 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9869 Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9870 89. Left B-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) 91. Left C-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9871 215. Left B-pillar (2-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9872 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 6. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 7. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 191. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (Honda Acc.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9877 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams 294. Fog Light Relay 1 (Honda Accessory) 295. Fog Light Relay 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 177. Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9881 296. Fog Light Switch (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9886 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9887 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID PLEASE NOTE: The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Turn Signal/Hazard Relay. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 56. Middle of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9894 154. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9895 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B). 3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the upper panel. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headlamp Bulb: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance Headlamp Bulb: Customer Interest Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance 08-010 March 19, 2008 Applies To: 2003-07 Accord - ALL VINs beginning with 1HG and 3HG Low Beam Headlight Distributes Light Poorly (Supersedes 08-010, dated February 9, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM There is poor light distribution from the low beam in one or both headlights, making it difficult to see street signs. PROBABLE CAUSE The low beam (HB4) headlight bulb made by Sylvania does not provide proper light distribution. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected Sylvania headlight bulb(s). PARTS INFORMATION Low Beam Headlight Bulb: P/N 33116-884-All, H/C 6487201 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Any affected vehicle with Sylvania brand low beam headlight bulbs, in or out of warranty, is eligible for free bulb replacement. Headlight adjustment, if needed, is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. Failed Part: P/N 33116-584-A01 H/C 6248710 Defect Code: 5WB00 Symptom Code: Q7400 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Check the headlight aim. Are the headlights aimed properly? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Adjust the headlights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headlamp Bulb: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance > Page 9905 NOTE: Headlight adjustment is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. ^ Refer to page 22-196 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword HEADLIGHT, and select Headlight Adjustment from the list. 2. Inspect both low beam headlight bulbs. Is a Sylvania bulb installed in either headlight? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the affected bulb(s): ^ Refer to page 22-198 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords HEADLIGHT BULB, and select Exterior Light Bulb Replacement from the list. 2. Turn on the headlights to confirm that they operate correctly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance Headlamp Bulb: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance 08-010 March 19, 2008 Applies To: 2003-07 Accord - ALL VINs beginning with 1HG and 3HG Low Beam Headlight Distributes Light Poorly (Supersedes 08-010, dated February 9, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM There is poor light distribution from the low beam in one or both headlights, making it difficult to see street signs. PROBABLE CAUSE The low beam (HB4) headlight bulb made by Sylvania does not provide proper light distribution. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected Sylvania headlight bulb(s). PARTS INFORMATION Low Beam Headlight Bulb: P/N 33116-884-All, H/C 6487201 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION NOTE: Any affected vehicle with Sylvania brand low beam headlight bulbs, in or out of warranty, is eligible for free bulb replacement. Headlight adjustment, if needed, is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. Failed Part: P/N 33116-584-A01 H/C 6248710 Defect Code: 5WB00 Symptom Code: Q7400 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Check the headlight aim. Are the headlights aimed properly? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Adjust the headlights. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 08-010 > Mar > 08 > Lighting - Poor Low Beam Headlamp Performance > Page 9911 NOTE: Headlight adjustment is covered only under the vehicle's normal warranty. ^ Refer to page 22-196 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword HEADLIGHT, and select Headlight Adjustment from the list. 2. Inspect both low beam headlight bulbs. Is a Sylvania bulb installed in either headlight? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - This service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the affected bulb(s): ^ Refer to page 22-198 in the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords HEADLIGHT BULB, and select Exterior Light Bulb Replacement from the list. 2. Turn on the headlights to confirm that they operate correctly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9912 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement Headlight 1. For low beam headlight bulb, remove the inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) from the headlight. 3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horns Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9917 39. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9918 9. Horn Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9919 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness (B). ( ): With cruise control 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No.1 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 5P (or 13P) connector to body ground. - If the horns sound, go to step 4. - If the horns don't sound, check these items: No.13 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Relay control module in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Horns. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness. ( ): With cruise control 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal from the cable reel (B). 6. Using a jumper wire, connect the cable reel side 1P connector (C) to body ground, and turn the wheel side to side. - If the horns sound, replace the driver's airbag assembly. - If the horns don't sound or sounds intermittently, replace the cable reel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9925 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9926 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9927 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9928 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9929 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9930 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9931 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9932 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9933 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9934 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9935 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9936 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9937 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9938 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9939 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9940 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9941 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9942 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9943 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9944 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9945 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9946 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9947 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9948 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9949 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9950 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9951 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9952 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9953 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9954 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9955 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9956 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9957 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9958 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9959 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9960 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Entry Light Control System - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9961 Diagram 115-0 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9962 Diagram 115-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9963 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the entry light control functions troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, the recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9964 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's door panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the door multiplex control unit. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9965 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations 43. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 9969 163. Ignition Key Switch/Key Light Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 9970 Key Cylinder Lamp: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Light Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. The LED should come on when power is connected to the No.6 terminal and ground is connected to No.5 terminal. 4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9975 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9976 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9977 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9978 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9979 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9980 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9981 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9982 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9983 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9984 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9985 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9986 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9987 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9988 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9989 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9990 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9991 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9992 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9993 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9994 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9995 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9996 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9997 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9998 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9999 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10000 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10001 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10002 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10003 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10004 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10005 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10006 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10007 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10008 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10009 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10010 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views 58. License Plate Light (4-door) 250. License Plate Light (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10011 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 110-6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10012 Diagram 110-7a (4-door) Diagram 110-7b (2-door) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10013 Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10014 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair License Plate Light Replacement 1. 2-door: Remove the license plate trim. 2. Pull the license plate light assembly out, and disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light. 3. Separate the lens (B) and housing (C), then remove the bulb. 4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Map Light: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10019 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10020 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10021 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10022 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10023 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10024 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10025 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10026 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10027 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10028 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10029 Map Light: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10030 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10031 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10032 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10033 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10034 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10035 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10036 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10037 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10038 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10039 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10040 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10041 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10042 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10043 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10044 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10045 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10046 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10047 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10048 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10049 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10050 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10051 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10052 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10053 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10054 116. Individual Map Lights Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10055 Map Light: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-1 (DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10056 Diagram 114-2 (EX, EX-L) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10057 Map Light: Service and Repair Front Individual Map Light Replacement With Moonroof 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 2. Remove the two mounting screws. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C). 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (D) from the ambient light (E). 5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Without Moonroof 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 2. Remove the two mounting screws. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C). 4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 1. Remove the inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front turn signal/side marker light. 3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10066 149. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10067 152. DRL Relay (Canada) And Fan Control Relay (V6) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10068 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10069 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 191. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (Honda Acc.) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10073 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams 294. Fog Light Relay 1 (Honda Accessory) 295. Fog Light Relay 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10077 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10078 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10084 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10085 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10086 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10087 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10088 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10089 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10090 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10091 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10092 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10093 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10094 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10095 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10096 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10097 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10098 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10099 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10100 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10101 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10102 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10103 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10104 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10105 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10106 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10107 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10108 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10109 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10110 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10111 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10112 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10113 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10114 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10115 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10116 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10117 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10118 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10119 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Entry Light Control System - Circuit Diagram Wiring Diagrams Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10120 Diagram 115-0 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10121 Diagram 115-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10122 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing the entry light control functions troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. Multiplex Integrated Control Unit 2. Remove the left kick panel. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, the recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10123 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Door Multiplex Control Unit 8. Remove the driver's door panel. 9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the door multiplex control unit. 10. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 11. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10124 11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the appropriate connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10128 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10129 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 244. Transmission Housing (2-door: V6 M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10134 34. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10135 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-up Light Switch Test 1. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector (A). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No. 2 terminals of the back-up light switch. There should be continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. 3. If necessary, replace the back-up light switch. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001), and install it on the transmission housing. Tighten the back-up light switch to the specified torque. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10139 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10143 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A). 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10144 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A). 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10148 Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10149 Safety Indicator System Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10150 89. Left B-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) 91. Left C-pillar (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10151 215. Left B-pillar (2-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10152 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's 6. Door Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 7. Door Switch, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 177. Left Side Of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10156 296. Fog Light Switch (Honda Accessory) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations 56. Middle of Dash Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10160 154. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10161 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Remove the upper panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B). 3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the upper panel. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the hazard warning switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horns Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10165 39. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10166 9. Horn Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10167 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness (B). ( ): With cruise control 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No.1 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 5P (or 13P) connector to body ground. - If the horns sound, go to step 4. - If the horns don't sound, check these items: No.13 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Relay control module in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Horns. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness. ( ): With cruise control 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive terminal from the cable reel (B). 6. Using a jumper wire, connect the cable reel side 1P connector (C) to body ground, and turn the wheel side to side. - If the horns sound, replace the driver's airbag assembly. - If the horns don't sound or sounds intermittently, replace the cable reel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). ( ):DX 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 (No.1) and No 3 (No.2) terminals. ( ):DX - There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open). - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10178 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10179 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10180 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10181 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10182 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10183 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10184 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10185 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10186 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10187 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10188 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10189 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10190 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10191 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10192 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10193 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10194 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10195 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10196 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10197 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10198 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10199 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10200 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10201 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10202 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10203 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10204 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10205 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10206 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10207 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10208 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10209 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10210 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10211 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10212 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10213 Tail Lamp: Connector Views 80. Taillight, Left Inner (4-door) 81. Taillight, Right Inner (4-door) 134. Brake Light/Taillight, Left (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10214 135. Brake Light/Taillight, Right (4-door) 264. Brake Light/Taillight, Left (2-door) 265. Brake Light/Taillight, Right (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10215 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 110-6 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10216 Diagram 110-7a (4-door) Diagram 110-7b (2-door) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10217 Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10218 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair Taillight Replacement Taillight (4-door) 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Open the trunk lid and remove the trunk side trim panel. 3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillight (B). 4. Remove the mounting nuts and screws, then remove the taillight. 5. Turn the bulb socket 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 6. Inspect the gasket; replace it. If it is distorted or stays compressed. 7. Install the taillight and tighten the nuts to 5 N.m (0.5 kgf.m, 4 lbf.ft). 8. After installing the taillight, run water over it to make sure it does not leak. Taillight (2-door) 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Open the trunk lid and remove the trunk side trim panel. 3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillight (B). 4. Remove the mounting nuts and screws, then remove the taillight. 5. Turn the bulb socket 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 6. Inspect the gasket; replace it. If it is distorted or stays compressed. 7. Install the taillight and tighten the nuts to 5 N.m (0.5 kgf.m, 4 lbf.ft). 8. After installing the taillight, run water over it to make sure it does not leak. Inner Taillight (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10219 1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the connectors (A) from the trunk lid. 2. Remove the three nuts and the inner taillight (B). 3. Turn the bulb socket 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Inspect the gasket; replace it. If it is distorted or stays compressed. 5. Install the taillight and tighten the nuts to 5 N.m (0.5 kgf.m, 4 lbf.ft. 6. After installing the taillight, run water over it to make sure it does not leak. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Trunk Lamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). ( ):DX 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 (No.1) and No 3 (No.2) terminals. ( ):DX - There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open). - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10228 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A). 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10229 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A). 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID PLEASE NOTE: The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Turn Signal/Hazard Relay. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 1. Remove the inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front turn signal/side marker light. 3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10240 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10241 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10249 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10250 Wires Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10251 Connectors - "C" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10252 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10253 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10254 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10255 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10256 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10257 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Locations that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an connector view at Shortcuts to Popular Information/Connector Views that shows the connector terminals wire colors connector cavity numbers and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554 for example means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10258 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10259 Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10260 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10261 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10262 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10263 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10264 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For A Short With A Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10265 Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For Continuity Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest OHMS" range. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10266 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Testing for Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10267 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Power Relay Test Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10268 Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. How to Replace Connector Terminals HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10269 The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10270 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10271 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10272 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10273 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10274 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10275 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10276 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10277 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10278 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10279 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10280 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. NOTE: If you nick or cut off any strands of wire, try again with the next larger size hole on the stripper. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10281 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10282 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. NOTE: Be careful when working with the high heat produced by the heat gun. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fit of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10283 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10284 Vanity Lamp: Connector Views 86. Vanity Mirror Light, Driver's (except DX) 87. Vanity Mirror Light, Front Passenger's (except DX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10285 Vanity Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Ceiling, Map and Vanity Mirror Lights Diagram 114-1 (DX, LX) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10286 Diagram 114-2 (EX, EX-L) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Dash and Console Lights Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10287 Diagram 114-3 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10288 Diagram 114-4 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10289 Vanity Lamp: Testing and Inspection Vanity Mirror Light Test 1. Open the sunvisor. 2. Remove the sunvisor. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the vanity mirror light. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - With the vanity mirror cover (B) opened, there should be continuity. - With the vanity mirror cover closed, there should be no continuity. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the sunvisor. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10295 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10296 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10297 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Rear Window Defogger, Service Manual Fix Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Rear Window Defogger, Service Manual Fix SOURCE: Honda Service News May 2003 TITLE: S/M Fix: Rear Window Defogger Timer APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord SERVICE TIP: While we're on the subject of rear window defoggers, you need to revise the circuit diagrams on pages 22-257 and 22-258 of the 2003 Accord S/M. The text inside the box for the climate control unit on page 22-257 should read: (Rear window defogger switch is built into audio-HVAC display module.). The text inside the heater control panel on page 22-258 should read: (Rear window defogger switch is built into audio-HVAC display module.). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Rear Window Defogger, Service Manual Fix > Page 10305 Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins Rear Window Defogger Timer - ETM Fix SOURCE: Honda Service News May 2003 TITLE: ETM Fix: Rear Window Defogger Timer APPLIES TO: 2003 Accord SERVICE TIP: You need to fix page 64-2 of the 2003 Accord ETM Second Edition. The text makes this bogus statement in two paragraphs: "A timer in the heater control panel ('climate control unit' in the second paragraph) will automatically turn the defogger off after it has been on continuously for about 25 minutes." There's no such timer in 2003 Accords! Make sure you cross out these sentences in your copies of the ETM. You also need to tweak the circuit diagram text on pages 64 and 64-1. The text for the audio-HVAC display module on page 64 should read: (Rear window defogger switch and ON indicator LED are built into Audio-HVAC Display Module.). The text for the climate control unit on page 64-1 should read: (Rear window defogger switch and ON indicator LED are built into Audio-HVAC Display Module.). Make sure you fix these pages in your copies of the ETM. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10310 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10311 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10312 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Power Window Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10317 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10318 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10319 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10320 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10321 Power Window Control Module: Testing and Inspection Resetting the Power Window Control Unit Resetting the power window is required when any of the following have been removed or repaired - Power window regulator - Window run channel - Power window motor - Door glass Using the HDS 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then enter the vehicle's VIN and mileage at the prompts. 3. Select Body Electrical from the System Selection menu. 4. From the Body Electrical System Select menu, select Power Windows. 5. From the Mode menu, select Adjustments. 6. From the Adjustment menu, select Window P Reset. 7. Follow the prompts on the screen. 8. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. Resetting the power window Without the HDS 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat steps 4-7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch to the AUTO DOWN position. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10325 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10326 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10327 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windows - Master Switch Input Test, Manual Revision Power Window Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Windows - Master Switch Input Test, Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: S/M Fix: PW Master Switch Input Test APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: The table for the power window master switch input test on page 22-209 of the 2003-04 S/M is missing some text in the Test condition column. There's no mention about connecting to body ground when testing cavities 9, 18, 13, 19, 12, and 14. For each of these cavities, change the last line of text in the column to read: with a jumper wire, and the No. 3 terminal to body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switches 94. Driver's Door (4-door) 102. Front Passenger's Door (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10338 103. Left Rear Door Door (4-door) (Right Similar) 218. Driver's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10339 219. Front Passenger's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10340 Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Trim and Components Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10341 Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10342 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Front Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10343 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Rear Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10344 Power Window Switch: Diagrams 169. Power Window Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 170. Power Window Switch, Right Rear (4-door) 185. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10345 205. Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 1. Before testing the power windows, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 3. Disconnect the 23P connector (AI from the power window switch (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 10348 NOTE:Technicians please note that several cavities require the number 3 terminal to be grounded to a body ground this is noted in either the wire color cell or test condition cell this only applies to the cavities noted all other instruction to be followed as presented, due to manual update from OEM. Aug.19th 2005. 5. With the power window master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the 23P connector to the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 10349 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and perform the following input tests. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. NOTE: Reference voltage is approximately 5 V when system is awake. The voltage drops to 0.8 V when the system goes into sleep mode. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 10350 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C). 3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test. If the original window switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power mirror and power window switch connectors (A). 3. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove the master switch (A) from the panel (B). 4. Reinstall the switch in reverse order of removal. 5. Reset the power window control unit. 6. For LX and EX models; reprogram the keyless remotes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 10353 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C). 3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test. If the original window switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Power Window Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10359 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10360 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10361 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10362 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10363 Power Window Control Module: Testing and Inspection Resetting the Power Window Control Unit Resetting the power window is required when any of the following have been removed or repaired - Power window regulator - Window run channel - Power window motor - Door glass Using the HDS 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the vehicle's DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then enter the vehicle's VIN and mileage at the prompts. 3. Select Body Electrical from the System Selection menu. 4. From the Body Electrical System Select menu, select Power Windows. 5. From the Mode menu, select Adjustments. 6. From the Adjustment menu, select Window P Reset. 7. Follow the prompts on the screen. 8. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. Resetting the power window Without the HDS 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch. 3. Open the driver's door. NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch. 8. Repeat steps 4-7 three more times. 9. Wait 1 second. 10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1. 11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch to the AUTO DOWN position. 12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second. 13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and DOWN function. If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations 99. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10368 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams 165. Power Window Motor; Driver's 166. Power Window Motor, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations 104. Left Rear Door (4-door) (Right Similar) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10372 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams 167. Power Window Motor, Left Rear (4-door) 168. Power Window Motor, Right Rear (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10376 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10377 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10378 Five-terminal type B Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windows - Master Switch Input Test, Manual Revision Power Window Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Windows - Master Switch Input Test, Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: S/M Fix: PW Master Switch Input Test APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord SERVICE TIP: The table for the power window master switch input test on page 22-209 of the 2003-04 S/M is missing some text in the Test condition column. There's no mention about connecting to body ground when testing cavities 9, 18, 13, 19, 12, and 14. For each of these cavities, change the last line of text in the column to read: with a jumper wire, and the No. 3 terminal to body ground. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switches 94. Driver's Door (4-door) 102. Front Passenger's Door (4-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10385 103. Left Rear Door Door (4-door) (Right Similar) 218. Driver's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10386 219. Front Passenger's Door (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10387 Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Trim and Components Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10388 Doors Component Location Index (2-door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10389 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Front Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Window Switches > Page 10390 Doors Component Location Index (4-door Rear Door) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10391 Power Window Switch: Diagrams 169. Power Window Switch, Left Rear (4-door) 170. Power Window Switch, Right Rear (4-door) 185. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10392 205. Power Window Master Switch (Door Multiplex Control Unit) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 1. Before testing the power windows, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. 2. Remove the driver's door switch trim. 3. Disconnect the 23P connector (AI from the power window switch (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 10395 NOTE:Technicians please note that several cavities require the number 3 terminal to be grounded to a body ground this is noted in either the wire color cell or test condition cell this only applies to the cavities noted all other instruction to be followed as presented, due to manual update from OEM. Aug.19th 2005. 5. With the power window master switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the 23P connector to the switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 10396 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and perform the following input tests. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch. NOTE: Reference voltage is approximately 5 V when system is awake. The voltage drops to 0.8 V when the system goes into sleep mode. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Input Test > Page 10397 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C). 3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test. If the original window switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power mirror and power window switch connectors (A). 3. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove the master switch (A) from the panel (B). 4. Reinstall the switch in reverse order of removal. 5. Reset the power window control unit. 6. For LX and EX models; reprogram the keyless remotes. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 10400 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim. 2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C). 3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test. If the original window switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Window Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. - Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna grid lines, and terminals. 1. Remove these items: - Trunk lid - Rear shelf, 2-door , 4-door 2. Disconnect the window antenna connectors (A) and rear window defogger connectors (B). 3. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10405 4. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, as you may crease or break it. 5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. 6. Remove the molding (A) from the lower edge of the rear window (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a utility knife. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10406 7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window. 8. Carefully remove the rear window. 9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the fasteners from the body. 10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 11. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the moldings and the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10407 12. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), side rubber dam (B), lower rubber dam (C), clips (D), and fasteners (E) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (F) as shown: First attach the upper rubber dam, then attach the side rubber dams around the edge of the rear window. Be sure top of the side rubber dam Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10408 contacts with bottom of the upper rubber dam. If necessary, cut the rubber dam. - Be sure the side rubber dam, clips, and fasteners line up with the alignment marks (G). - Attach the lower rubber dam, around the edge of the windshield (H). - Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. 13. 4-door: Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A) where the molding adhesive tape will be attached as shown. Attach the molding (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the rear window: Be sure both ends of the molding line up with the alignment marks (D) of the rear window. - After installing the molding, cut the ends (E) of the molding as shown. - Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10409 14. Attach the fasteners (A) with adhesive tape to the rear window opening flange (B) of the body on both sides. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10410 15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Make sure both upper clips (B) are in the body holes. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 16. 2-door: Make alignment marks (C) to the rear window with a grease pencil as shown where the molding will be installed. 17. Remove the rear window. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10411 18. 2-door: Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A) where the molding adhesive tape will be attached as shown. Attach the molding (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the rear window: Be sure both ends of the molding line up with the alignment marks (D) you made in step 16. - After installing the molding, cut the ends (E) of the molding as shown. - Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10412 19. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) between the dams (B) and molding (C) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: 2-door: With the printed dots (D) on the rear window as a guide, apply the glass primer to both lower corner portions of the rear window. - Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10413 20. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. - Apply body primer to exposed paint as shown. 21. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10414 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10415 22. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) between the dams (C) and molding (D) as shown: - 2-door: With the printed dots (E) on the rear window as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side portions of the rear window. - Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 23. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 24. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 25. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 26. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough,uneven roads). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10421 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10422 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10423 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10424 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10425 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new one because it will bend. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel, 2-door, 4-door. - Power mirror/Manual mirror. - Door sash trim, 2-door. 2. 4-door: Remove the screws from the rear edge of the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10426 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot. 4. Pull the rear of the glass outer weatherstrip (A) away from the door, then release the front clip (B) from the mounting hole in the door. If necessary, pry the clip, then remove the weatherstrip. 5. Install new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Glass Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface. 1. Remove these items: - C-pillar trim, without side curtain airbags, with side curtain airbags - Side trim panel, as necessary - Front seat belt upper anchor - B-pillar upper trim, without side curtain airbags, with side curtain airbags 2. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body, and along the edge of the headliner. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. 3. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the front seal with a utility knife. 4. Carefully cut through the adhesive (A) at the rear corner portion of the quarter glass (B) with a utility knife. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (C) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the quarter glass as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive around the entire quarter glass: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10430 - If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, take care not to damage the molding (D). - If the molding is damaged, replace the quarter glass, molding, and clips (E) as an assembly. - If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass can be reinstalled using butyl tape. 5. Carefully remove the quarter glass. 6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire quarter glass opening flange: - Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the clips and fastener from the body. 7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 8. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, any broken clips, and the fastener from the glass. Clean the inside face and the edge of the glass with alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease. 9. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light coat of primer, then apply butyl tape (A) to the molding (B) as shown. Attach the fastener (C) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the quarter glass (D): Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. - Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10431 10. Attach the front seal (A) with adhesive tape (B) onto the molding (C). 11. Attach the fastener (A) to the body. Be sure the fastener lines up with the alignment marks (B). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10432 12. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the quarter glass upright in the opening, and make alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and body with a grease pencil at the three points shown. Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. 13. Remove the quarter glass. 14. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the front seal (A) and molding (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass (D) as a guide, apply the glass primer to the front portion of the quarter glass. - Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10433 15. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to an / exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 16. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. 17. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the front seal (B) and molding .(C) as shown. With the glass primer (D) you applied in step 14 on the quarter glass (E) as a Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10434 guide, apply the adhesive to the upper and lower corner portions of the quarter glass. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 18. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (B) over the opening, align the- clips or the alignment marks (C) made in step 12, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 19. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 20. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas and let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 21. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough,uneven roads). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10440 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10441 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10442 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10443 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10444 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new one because it will bend. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door, 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Remove the screw from the front edge of the door. 3. Starting at the front, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10445 4. Detach the rear clip (A), then remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (B). 5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel, 2-door, 4-door. 2. 4-door: Remove the screws, then remove the panel bracket (A). 3. Remove the plastic cover, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10450 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B). 6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. - Make sure the power door locks, windows, and power mirror operate properly. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel - Panel bracket. - Plastic cover, as necessary. 2. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Remove the glass from the regulator (B), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull the door weatherstrip (B) away as needed, then remove the screw (C). Remove the bolt (D) securing the center channel (E). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10454 4. Pull the upper portion of the center channel (A) forward to remove it from the door quarter glass seal (B), then pull up and remove the center channel out through the window slot. Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (C). 5. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B). 6. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10455 7. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B). 8. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 9. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. 10. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its perimeter. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 03-085 > Nov > 03 > Body - Wind Noise From Upper Rear of Front Door Windows Window Seal: Customer Interest Body - Wind Noise From Upper Rear of Front Door Windows 03-085 November 25, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 - From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A132549 2003 Accord V6 - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A097398 Wind Noise From the Upper Rear Corner of the Front Door(s) SYMPTOM Wind noise from the upper rear corner of the front door windows at highway speed. PROBABLE CAUSE Misplaced foam in the corner of the glass run channel. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install EPT sealer to the back of the run channel. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 5T: P/N 06991-SA5-000, H/C 2086650 (One roll will repair 200 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72235-SDA-A11 H/C 7301971 Defect Code: 07407 Symptom Code: 05604 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 03-085 > Nov > 03 > Body - Wind Noise From Upper Rear of Front Door Windows > Page 10464 Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds to verify the customer's complaint of wind noise. ^ If you hear wind noise from the upper rear corner of the front window, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the noise is coming from another location, this service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Pull down on the glass run channel to separate it from the door frame at the upper rear corner. 2. Cut a 10 x 100 mm piece of EPT sealer 5T, and use a utility knife to taper the ends to fit into the corner. 3. Apply the piece of EPT sealer 5T into the gap. 4. Reinstall the glass run channel into the window frame. Make sure that it is installed properly with the added thickness. 5. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds to make sure the noise is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 03-057 > Sep > 03 > Body - Front Window Wind Noise Window Seal: Customer Interest Body - Front Window Wind Noise 03-057 September 9, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 - From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000075 thru 1HGCM5...3A010500 2003 Accord V6 - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000072 thru 1HGCM6...3A006800 Wind Noise at the Front Window SYMPTOM Wind noise coming from the front of the window by the outside mirror. PROBABLE CAUSE The door glass is not completely sealed in the glass run channel. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply a piece of wool felt behind the glass run channel. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt (1T): P/N 06993-SA5-000 H/C 2056676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 73350-SDA-A10 H/C 7144652 Defect Code: 056 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds to verify the customer's complaint of wind noise. ^ If there is wind noise from the front of the window, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the noise is coming from another location, this service bulletin does not apply. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the outside mirror (see page 20-41 of them 2003-2004 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 03-057 > Sep > 03 > Body - Front Window Wind Noise > Page 10469 2. Pull the glass run channel away from the front lower channel area. Remove the glass run channel just enough to access the front lower channel; do not remove it completely. 3. Cut a 10 mm x 135 mm strip of wool felt. 4. Apply the wool felt along the length of the front lower channel as shown. 5. Reinstall the glass run channel. Work it around the front lower channel so it seals properly with the added thickness. Make sure the glass run channel does not pinch in the door molding. 6. Install the mirror. Make sure there are no gaps between the mirror and the run channel. 7. Raise and lower the window. Check that it does not pinch or pucker the glass run channel or window seal. 8. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds to make sure the noise is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 03-085 > Nov > 03 > Body - Wind Noise From Upper Rear of Front Door Windows Window Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Wind Noise From Upper Rear of Front Door Windows 03-085 November 25, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 - From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000001 thru 1HGCM5...3A132549 2003 Accord V6 - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000001 thru 1HGCM6...3A097398 Wind Noise From the Upper Rear Corner of the Front Door(s) SYMPTOM Wind noise from the upper rear corner of the front door windows at highway speed. PROBABLE CAUSE Misplaced foam in the corner of the glass run channel. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install EPT sealer to the back of the run channel. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 5T: P/N 06991-SA5-000, H/C 2086650 (One roll will repair 200 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72235-SDA-A11 H/C 7301971 Defect Code: 07407 Symptom Code: 05604 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 03-085 > Nov > 03 > Body - Wind Noise From Upper Rear of Front Door Windows > Page 10475 Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds to verify the customer's complaint of wind noise. ^ If you hear wind noise from the upper rear corner of the front window, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the noise is coming from another location, this service bulletin does not apply. Continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Pull down on the glass run channel to separate it from the door frame at the upper rear corner. 2. Cut a 10 x 100 mm piece of EPT sealer 5T, and use a utility knife to taper the ends to fit into the corner. 3. Apply the piece of EPT sealer 5T into the gap. 4. Reinstall the glass run channel into the window frame. Make sure that it is installed properly with the added thickness. 5. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds to make sure the noise is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 03-057 > Sep > 03 > Body - Front Window Wind Noise Window Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Window Wind Noise 03-057 September 9, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord L4 - From VIN 1HGCM5...3A000075 thru 1HGCM5...3A010500 2003 Accord V6 - From VIN 1HGCM6...3A000072 thru 1HGCM6...3A006800 Wind Noise at the Front Window SYMPTOM Wind noise coming from the front of the window by the outside mirror. PROBABLE CAUSE The door glass is not completely sealed in the glass run channel. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply a piece of wool felt behind the glass run channel. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt (1T): P/N 06993-SA5-000 H/C 2056676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 73350-SDA-A10 H/C 7144652 Defect Code: 056 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle at highway speeds to verify the customer's complaint of wind noise. ^ If there is wind noise from the front of the window, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the noise is coming from another location, this service bulletin does not apply. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the outside mirror (see page 20-41 of them 2003-2004 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 03-057 > Sep > 03 > Body - Front Window Wind Noise > Page 10480 2. Pull the glass run channel away from the front lower channel area. Remove the glass run channel just enough to access the front lower channel; do not remove it completely. 3. Cut a 10 mm x 135 mm strip of wool felt. 4. Apply the wool felt along the length of the front lower channel as shown. 5. Reinstall the glass run channel. Work it around the front lower channel so it seals properly with the added thickness. Make sure the glass run channel does not pinch in the door molding. 6. Install the mirror. Make sure there are no gaps between the mirror and the run channel. 7. Raise and lower the window. Check that it does not pinch or pucker the glass run channel or window seal. 8. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds to make sure the noise is gone. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision Window Track: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision 10-011 March 5, 2010 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Service Manual Update: Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information in this service bulletin addresses three power window problems that are not currently covered in the service manuals. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-10 Accord - ALL 2006-10 Civic - ALL 2007-10 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2007-10 CR-V - ALL 2003-10 Element - ALL 2009-10 Fit - ALL 2010 Insight - ALL 2005-10 Odyssey - ALL 2009-10 Pilot - ALL 2006-10 Ridgeline - ALL SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver's or front passenger's window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn't work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you're resetting the front passenger's power window control unit, do it from the front passenger's power window switch, not the driver's power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit's memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10485 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the powerwindow switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10486 ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window's noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10487 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Power Window Diagnostics Revision > Page 10488 ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10489 Window Track: Testing and Inspection Power Window Goes Up and Reverses On Its Own, Is Slow to Open and Close, or Squeals, Creaks, Clunks, or Clicks BACKGROUND The information presented here addresses three power window problems that were not originally covered in OE. SYMPTOM 1 When using the auto-up function, the driver s or front passenger s window goes up and then reverses on its own. PROBABLE CAUSE The power window control unit needs to be reset, or the run channel is damaged/dirty. NOTE: Do the power window control unit reset procedure first. If the window still doesn t work, go to Symptom 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: You must do the manual reset from the power window switch at the affected window. For example, if you re resetting the front passenger s power window control unit, do it from the front passenger s power window switch, not the driver s power window master switch. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 3. Open the driver s or front passenger s door. NOTE: Do steps 4 thru 7 within 5 seconds of each other. Do these steps a total of four times in a row. These steps clear the control unit s memory. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Push down and hold the power window switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Release the power window switch. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up feature doesn't work. If it does, do steps 4 thru 7 again, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit for up to three more times for each series of steps. 8. Lower the window all the way down with the power window switch. 9. Pull up and hold the power window switch until the window goes all the way up, then keep holding the switch for 1 second. NOTE: Make sure the auto-up/down feature works correctly by lowering and raising the window with the power window switch. If it doesn't work correctly, repeat the manual reset several times, paying close attention to the 5-second time limit. If it still doesn't work, troubleshoot the power window circuit. Then continue with Symptom 2. SYMPTOM 2 The windows are slow to open. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel is damaged or dirty. REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Aftermarket window tinting will also cause the window to move slower and is not covered by the manufacturer s warranty. No repair attempts should be made if the window has aftermarket tinting. 1. Compare the up and down speed of the affected window to another like vehicle: ^ If the speed is the same as the other vehicle, no further troubleshooting is required. ^ If the speed is not the same, remove the door panel and the door glass, then check the window regulator speed. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10490 ^ If the speed is the same as it was with the glass in place, replace the window regulator. ^ If the speed is faster without the glass, go to step 2. NOTE: When evaluating regulator performance without the glass, never allow the regulator to travel to the full up position because damage can occur to the regulator. 2. Inspect the visible portion of the run channel for damage. ^ If the run channel is visibly damaged, replace it, then recheck the window speed. ^ If the run channel looks OK, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the glass into the door without bolting it to the regulator, then manually slide it through its range of travel and check for excessive resistance: ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 4. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 5. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10491 4. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it, then adjust the run channels and the glass as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, go to step 5. 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. SYMPTOM 3 During operation, the window squeaks, creaks, clunks, or clicks. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10492 REQUIRED MATERIALS Shin-Etsu Grease: P/N 08798-9013 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Compare the window s noise level to another like vehicle: ^ If the noise is the same, no repair is needed. Advise the customer that some noise is a normal characteristic. ^ If the noise is different from the other vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Inspect the run channel for damage. ^ If it is damaged, replace it, then recheck the noise level. ^ If the run channel is not damaged, go to step 3. 3. Remove the door panel. 4. Unbolt the glass from the regulator, then manually slide it through its travel to check for excessive resistance. ^ If the resistance is excessive, go to step 5. ^ If the resistance is not excessive, go to step 6. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10493 5. Clean the run channel using a soapy water solution, then apply Shin-Etsu grease inside the channel. You may also need to clean the portion of the run channel within the door. ^ If the window operates normally after cleaning and applying grease, no further action is required. ^ If the window noise symptoms are still present, go to step 6. 6. Inspect the run channel alignment, both inside and outside the door. Pay close attention just below the door skin; this is a common area for the run channel to be pinched. ^ If the run channel is pinched, replace it and adjust as needed. ^ If the run channel is not pinched, continue with normal troubleshooting. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken Windshield Moulding / Trim: Customer Interest Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken 09-051 October 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Odyssey - - ALL 2009-11 Pilot - ALL 2003-07 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan Produced 2008-11 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan and HMA produced Windshield Side Trim Retainer Is Loose or Broken (Supersedes 09-051, dated February 27, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ In Applies To, and under PARTS INFORMATION, WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, and REPAIR PROCEDURE, the information for 2003-11 Accords was added. ^ Under REQUIRED MATERIALS, the 3M adhesive applicator was changed.* BACKGROUND When removing the windshield side trim, one or more of the retainers bonded to the body are damaged or come off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace any damaged or loose windshield side trim retainers. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10503 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10504 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10505 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10506 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken Windshield Moulding / Trim: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken 09-051 October 8, 2010 Applies To: 2005-10 Odyssey - - ALL 2009-11 Pilot - ALL 2003-07 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan Produced 2008-11 Accord 4-Door - ALL Japan and HMA produced Windshield Side Trim Retainer Is Loose or Broken (Supersedes 09-051, dated February 27, 2010, to revise the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY *^ In Applies To, and under PARTS INFORMATION, WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION, and REPAIR PROCEDURE, the information for 2003-11 Accords was added. ^ Under REQUIRED MATERIALS, the 3M adhesive applicator was changed.* BACKGROUND When removing the windshield side trim, one or more of the retainers bonded to the body are damaged or come off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace any damaged or loose windshield side trim retainers. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10512 The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91570-SDC-A01 (2003-07 Accord) P/N 91570-TA0-003 (2008-11 Accord) P/N 91570-SHJ-A01 (Odyssey) P/N 91 70-SZA-A01 (Pilot) Defect Code: 02502 Symptom Code: 06201 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the damaged retainers or adhesive from the body: ^ Avoid damaging plastic parts by removing them or covering them with aluminum foil. ^ Using a heat gun, heat the retainer or leftover adhesive to between 212°F-248°F (100°C-120°C). ^ Avoid damaging the paint by applying heat gradually to the retainer. ^ Use a plastic scraper to loosen the retainer from the body and scrape off any adhesive on the vehicle. ^ Be careful not to scratch the body. ^ Use pliers to gently pull the retainer from the body. 2. Clean the bonding surface on the body with a shop towel dampened with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the bonding surface. 3. Test fit the retainers in their proper mounting position. The paint color should be different where the clip was removed. 4. Prepare the 3M Adhesive: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10513 NOTE: 3M Scotch-Weld DP-100 NS Adhesive is supplied in a dual syringe plastic Duo-Pak cartridge as part of the 3M Scotch-Weld EPX Applicator system. To use: ^ Insert the Duo-Pak cartridge into the applicator. ^ Using light pressure on the trigger, start the plunger into the cylinders. ^ Remove the Duo-Pak cartridge cap; expel a small amount of adhesive, making sure both sides of the Duo pak cartridges are flowing evenly and freely. ^ Attach the EPX mixing nozzle to the Duo-Pak cartridge. ^ Begin dispensing the adhesive. 5. Clean the retainer bonding surface with isopropyl alcohol, and let it dry, then apply an even coat of adhesive to the bonding surface of the clip. 6. Odyssey only: Position the retainers on the A-pillar in the same location as the original retainers. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10514 7. Pilot only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 8. 2003-07 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 9. 2008-11 Accord only: Position the retainers with the alignment marks on the A-pillar. 10. Press the retainer onto the body, and let the adhesive harden for 30 minutes before installing the windshield side trim. The adhesive reaches maximum hardness after 24 hours. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 09-051 > Oct > 10 > Body Windshield Side Trim Retainer Loose/Broken > Page 10515 Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10521 91. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10522 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1. Remove the right inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B). 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the reservoir. NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals in each float position (C). - There should be continuity when the float is down. - There should be no continuity when the float is up. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10527 41. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10528 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement > Page 10531 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Remove the steering column covers. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 6. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10532 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10537 41. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10538 239. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement > Page 10541 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Remove the steering column covers. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 6. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10542 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Washer Fluid: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Washer Fluid: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Washer Fluid: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10551 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Washer Fluid: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10552 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Washer Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10558 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Washer Fluid: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10559 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10563 91. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10564 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Canada 1. Remove the right inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B). 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the reservoir. NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals in each float position (C). - There should be continuity when the float is down. - There should be no continuity when the float is up. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Hose: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Windshield Washer Hose: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Hose: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10573 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Hose: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10574 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Hose: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield Windshield Washer Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield 03-019 March 18, 2003 Applies To: 2003 Accord 2-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A000452 2003 Accord 4-Door - From VIN 1HGCM....3A000001 thru 1HGCM....3A007564 Wipers Streak or Smear the Windshield SYMPTOM The windshield wipers streak or smear the windshield. PROBABLE CAUSE Deteriorated washer tubing material mixes with the washer fluid. CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the windshield washer reservoir, replace the washer tubing, and replace the wiper blades. PARTS INFORMATION Windshield Washer Tubing: P/N 95003-07008-99M H/C 6763478 (Each roll of tubing repairs about three vehicles.) Left Wiper Blade: P/N 76622-SDA-A01 H/C 7146491 Right Wiper Blade: P/N 76632-SDA-A01 H/C 7146517 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 740104 Flat Rate Time: 0.9 hour Failed Part: P/N 95003-07008-70M H/C 4750733 Defect Code: 011 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 03-019A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front wheel. 2. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-176 of the 2003 Accord Service Manual). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Hose: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10580 3. Carefully cut the washer tubing off the washer pump with a razor knife, then drain and discard the fluid from the reservoir. 4. Fill the reservoir with clean water, then drain it. 5. Remove the windshield wiper arms, and set them aside. 6. Remove the four clips from the front of the cowl covers. Carefully detach the cowl covers from the body, and turn them upside down to expose the washer tubing. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Hose: > 03-019 > Mar > 03 > Wipers/Washers Wipers Streak/Smear the Windshield > Page 10581 7. Cut four pieces of tubing from the washer tubing roll. Use the measurements from the washer tubing chart shown. 8. Using a razor knife, carefully cut the old tubing at the washer nozzles, the "I" joint, and the "Y" joint. 9. Replace each section of tubing with the tubing you cut in step 7. Make sure to route the new tubing correctly, using all existing clips, joints, and fittings. NOTE: ^ To help during assembly, dip the tubing in clean washer fluid before passing it through clips and pressing the ends onto fittings, joints, and nozzles. ^ To prevent damage to the tubing, wrap some electrical tape around it where it passes through the fender at the "Y" joint. 10. Replace any cowl cover clips that may have broken while removing the cowl covers, then install the covers. NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the washer tubing. 11. Install the inner fender and the wheel. Torque the lug nuts to 108 N.m (80 lb-ft). 12. Fill the washer reservoir with commercially available washer fluid. 13. Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Soft Scrub. 14. Install the wiper arms, and replace the wiper blades. 15. Operate the windshield washers and wipers to make sure they work correctly. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10582 Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Tube Replacement 1. Remove the right inner fender. 2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield washer operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10586 130. Behind Right Side Of Front Bumper Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10587 96. Windshield Washer Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10588 Windshield Washer Motor: Testing and Inspection Washer Motor Test 1. Remove the right inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the washer motor. 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground the No.2 terminal of the washer motor. The motor should run. - If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. - If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor outlet. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Reservoir Replacement 1. Remove the right inner fender. 2. Disconnect the washer tube (A) and washer motor 2P connector (B). 3. Remove the clip (A) and three bolts (B), then remove the washer reservoir (C). 4. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windshield Washer Nozzle Troubleshooting Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Technical Service Bulletins Windshield Washer Nozzle Troubleshooting SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Troubleshooting Windshield Washer Nozzle Problems APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 1999-03 Odysseys, and 2003 Pilots. SERVICE TIP: Warranty Parts Inspection (WPI) tested windshield washer nozzles that were replaced because they were "inoperative" or "did not work properly." Every one of the nozzles tested was determined "no trouble found." To cut down on unnecessary nozzle replacement and a possible warranty debit to your dealership follow these tips to fix windshield washer nozzle problems. Washer nozzle doesn't work. If the washer nozzle doesn't work, it's most likely clogged or frozen. If the nozzle is clogged, remove it, and blow some compressed air out through the nozzle to clear it. Then, before you reconnect the nozzle, run the washer pump to flush out any debris from the hoses. If you suspect the washer didn't work because it was frozen, replacing the nozzle won't fix the problem. Drain and refill the washer reservoir with a washer fluid that doesn't freeze. Washer nozzle doesn't work properly. If the washer nozzle isn't aimed right, adjust the ball shaped nozzle; don't replace the nozzle. To adjust the nozzle, use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to push on the deflector and move the ball. Never stick a needle or any such object in the nozzle. Adjust the nozzle so the center of the spray hits the middle of the windshield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10600 41. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10601 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement > Page 10604 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Remove the steering column covers. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 6. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10605 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windshield Wipers - Blade Care & Replacement Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Windshield Wipers - Blade Care & Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Windshield Wiper Blade Care and Replacement APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: A buildup of road film, oil, or grease on the windshield or the wiper blades can cause the wiper blades to smear, streak, or chatter when being used. If your customers complain of this problem, and their wiper blades are less than 6 months old, try doing this before you replace the blades: - Use Glass Cleaner or equivalent, to thoroughly clean the windshield. Make sure you clean it well enough so that water slides off of it, not just beads up. - Use Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze straight from the bottle on a soft cloth to clean the wiper blades. This stuff contains a wetting agent that conditions the blade rubber. If the wiper blades still smear, streak, or chatter after you've cleaned the windshield and the blades, then blade replacement is in order. When you remove the old blade from its holder, make sure you grab the locking end of the blade on its top and bottom (use your thumb and index finger for this). Tug on the blade until it releases, then slide it off the holder. Don't grab the locking end from the sides. The metal rails could come loose and you could also wind up with a nasty cut. If the new blades don't have rails, make sure you install the rails from the old blades on the new blades like this: If the old rails are curved: - Install them on the new driver's-side wiper blade with the ends bowing away from the windshield. This makes the blade press harder against the middle of the windshield, providing a clear center of vision for the driver. - Install them on the new passenger's side wiper blade with the ends bowing toward the windshield. This makes the blade press harder against the edges of the windshield to clear off any water at the upper and lower ends of each wiper pass. If the old rails lie flat: Install them on either new wiper blade. If one of the new blades is shorter than the other (this is common on many vehicles), just install the shorter blade on the driver's side. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windshield Wipers - Blade Care & Replacement > Page 10610 Slide the new blade into the holder, and push from behind with your thumb until you feel the tabs snap into place. Make sure the blade is locked in place before you reinstall the blade assembly. If it's not, the blade could come off during use and the blade assembly could scratch the windshield. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification Technical Service Bulletin # 08-043 Date: 081015 Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification 08-043 October 15, 2008 Applies To: 2003 Accord 4-door - ALL Safety Recall: Windshield Wiper Motor Does Not Work (Supersedes 08-043, dated July 17, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND A breather port on the windshield wiper motor vents warm air from the wiper motor during operation. If water enters the breather port, it can cause wiper motor corrosion that could make the motor stop working. A non-operating wiper motor increases the risk of a crash in certain conditions. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles have received a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the affected VIN range have a wiper motor problem. To verify vehicle eligibility, you must check at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the 13th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. You should not sell or lease these vehicles until they have been repaired. Should an unrepaired vehicle cause an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling or leasing it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the windshield wiper motor and, depending on its condition, install a wiper motor kit or a wiper motor cover kit. If a countermeasured wiper motor is already installed, neither kit is needed. PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Kit: P/N: 06760-SDA-A00, H/C 9027137 (Includes a wiper motor and clips for the cowl cover) Wiper Motor Cover Kit: P/N 06761-SDA-A00, H/C 9027160 (Includes a cover for the wiper motor and clips for the cowl cover) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10619 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 76505-SDA-A01 H/C 7146368 Defect Code: 5XW00 Symptom Code: Q7800 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn on the wipers: ^ If the wipers work, go to step 3. ^ If the wipers don't work, go to step 2. 2. Install a new wiper motor from the wiper motor kit: NOTE: Torque the windshield wiper arm nuts to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft), and replace any damaged cowl cover clips. To avoid cracking the windshield, do not allow the wiper linkage assembly or any tools to contact the bottom edge of the windshield. ^ Refer to 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WIPE and select Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement from the list. Once you replace the wiper motor, go to step 25. 3. Remove the windshield wiper arms: NOTE: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the cowl cover. Any tool that contacts the bottom edge of the windshield could cause the windshield to crack. ^ Refer to steps 1 and 2 of the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WIPE, select Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement from the list, and do only steps 1 and 2 of that procedure. 4. Check the part number on the wiper motor: ^ * If the part number ends with A020 (see above), a countermeasured wiper motor is already installed, go to step 24. ^ If the part number ends with A011 (see above), go to step 5. ^ If you cannot read the part number, or if the number is not a part number (2725L, for example), go to step 5.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10620 5. Disconnect the wiper motor 5P connector, and detach the wire harness from the wiper linkage. 6. Remove the wiper linkage assembly from the cowl (four bolts). 7. Scribe a line across the link and the wiper linkage to mark the original park position of the wipers. 8. Remove the wiper motor from the wiper linkage (one center nut and three outside bolts). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10621 9. Look at the breather port on the wiper motor: ^ If the breather port has a splash rib around it, a countermeasured wiper motor is already installed. Go to step 15. ^ If there is no splash rib around the breather port, the wiper motor is a pre-countermeasured part. Go to step 10. 10. Look for rust or cobwebs in the breather port: ^ If the breather port is clean, go to step 11. ^ If you see any rust or cobwebs, you'll be installing a wiper motor kit (wiper motor and cowl clips); go to step 15. 11. Clean the surface of the wiper motor case and the sealing area between the motor case and gear housing with a shop towel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10622 12. Loosen the two wiper motor screws 3 turns. NOTE: Do not remove the motor case from the gear housing (the screws come out after only 5 turns). If you remove the motor case, you could change the position of the magnets inside, causing the motor to run backwards. 13. With the screws still loose, slightly pull the case away from the housing and look inside: NOTE: On VINs beginning with JHM, there's a butyl seal between the motor case and the gear housing. To look inside the case, carefully cut through the butyl all the way around the housing with a utility knife, then slightly separate the two halves. ^ * On VINs beginning with 1HG or 3HG, there's an O-ring between the motor case and the gear housing. Look inside the case by slightly separating the two halves by hand. To avoid damaging the O-ring, do not use a screwdriver to separate the halves.* ^ If the inside of the case looks clean, go to step 14. ^ If you see any corrosion, mineral deposits, or water inside the case, you'll be installing a wiper motor kit (wiper motor and cowl clips); go to step 15. 14. On VINs beginning with JHM, retighten the two motor case screws. (You don't need to apply new sealer to the case; the existing butyl will seal the case.) This wiper motor will be reused; go to step 15. On VINs beginning with 1HG or 3HG, check the condition of the O-ring between the case and the housing: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10623 ^ If the O-ring is smooth and flat all the way around the housing, the wiper motor will be reused; tighten the two motor case screws, then go to step 15. ^ If the O-ring is pinched and/or rolled, you'll be installing a wiper motor kit (wiper motor and cowl clips); go to step 15. 15. Place the original or the countermeasured wiper motor in its park position by connecting the 5P connector to the wiper motor and cycling the wiper switch one time. 16. Install the wiper motor onto the wiper linkage using its three outside bolts. Torque the bolts to 8 N.m (6 lb-ft). 17. Move the wiper link into the park position you marked in step 7, then tighten the wiper motor center nut just enough to seat its lock washer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10624 18. Move the linkage until you can fit an adjustable wrench on the wiper arm link, then hold the link with the adjustable wrench while torquing the center nut to 31 N.m (23 lb-ft). ^ If you're reinstalling a pre-countermeasured wiper motor, go to step 19. ^ If you're installing a countermeasured wiper motor, go to step 20. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10625 19. Only if you're reinstalling a pre-countermeasured wiper motor: Install a wiper motor cover: ^ Slip the cover over the connector end of the wiper motor. ^ Position the cover over the end of the wiper motor case, then snap it into place. ^ Make sure the locking tabs on the bottom of the cover are securely fastened. 20. Move the wiper link back to the park position you marked in step 7, then reinstall the wiper linkage assembly on the cowl. Tighten the four wiper linkage assembly bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 21. Attach the wire harness to the wiper linkage assembly, then press down firmly on the wiper motor cover as you connect the wiper motor 5P connector. NOTE: To prevent a soft-set condition, make sure the 5P connector clicks into position. 22. Cycle the wipers one time to get the motor and the linkage into the park position. 23. Lubricate the moving parts of the wiper linkage with multipurpose grease. 24. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Note these items: ^ Torque the windshield wiper arm nuts to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft). ^ Replace any damaged cowl cover clips. 25. Make sure the wiper motor and the wiper arms work correctly. 26. Center-punch a completion mark above the 13th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10626 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > NHTSA08V169000 > Apr > 08 > Recall 08V169000: Potential Wiper Motor Failure Wiper Motor: Recalls Recall 08V169000: Potential Wiper Motor Failure MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Accord 2003 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: April 10, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V169000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: PE07060 Component: VISIBILITY:WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER:MOTOR POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 351000 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling 351,000 M/Y 2003 Accord vehicles. If water enters the windshield wiper motor breather port, which is designed to allow the motor to vent warm air during normal operation, it can result in corrosion inside the motor housing. This can cause a failure of the electrical circuit breaker inside the motor housing. CONSEQUENCE: If the circuit breaker fails, it will cause the windshield wiper motor to become inoperative, which can increase the likelihood of a crash in certain conditions. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the windshield wiper motor for signs of corrosion. if no signs of corrosion are present, a cover will be installed over the wiper motor to prevent water from entering the wiper motor housing. If signs of corrosion damage are observed on the wiper motor, the motor will be replaced. The recall is expected to begin on or about June 17, 2008. owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q78. Customers may contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification Technical Service Bulletin # 08-043 Date: 081015 Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification 08-043 October 15, 2008 Applies To: 2003 Accord 4-door - ALL Safety Recall: Windshield Wiper Motor Does Not Work (Supersedes 08-043, dated July 17, 2008, to update the information marked by the black bars and shown with asterisks.) BACKGROUND A breather port on the windshield wiper motor vents warm air from the wiper motor during operation. If water enters the breather port, it can cause wiper motor corrosion that could make the motor stop working. A non-operating wiper motor increases the risk of a crash in certain conditions. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles have received a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the affected VIN range have a wiper motor problem. To verify vehicle eligibility, you must check at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN status inquiry. In addition, check for a punch mark above the 13th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means this campaign has already been completed. Some vehicles affected by this campaign may be in your used vehicle inventory. You should not sell or lease these vehicles until they have been repaired. Should an unrepaired vehicle cause an injury or damage because of the recalled item, the dealership will be solely responsible to the damaged party, and will be required to defend and indemnify American Honda for any resulting claims. To see if a vehicle is affected by this campaign, do a VIN status inquiry before selling or leasing it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the windshield wiper motor and, depending on its condition, install a wiper motor kit or a wiper motor cover kit. If a countermeasured wiper motor is already installed, neither kit is needed. PARTS INFORMATION Wiper Motor Kit: P/N: 06760-SDA-A00, H/C 9027137 (Includes a wiper motor and clips for the cowl cover) Wiper Motor Cover Kit: P/N 06761-SDA-A00, H/C 9027160 (Includes a cover for the wiper motor and clips for the cowl cover) Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10636 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 76505-SDA-A01 H/C 7146368 Defect Code: 5XW00 Symptom Code: Q7800 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn on the wipers: ^ If the wipers work, go to step 3. ^ If the wipers don't work, go to step 2. 2. Install a new wiper motor from the wiper motor kit: NOTE: Torque the windshield wiper arm nuts to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft), and replace any damaged cowl cover clips. To avoid cracking the windshield, do not allow the wiper linkage assembly or any tools to contact the bottom edge of the windshield. ^ Refer to 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WIPE and select Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement from the list. Once you replace the wiper motor, go to step 25. 3. Remove the windshield wiper arms: NOTE: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the cowl cover. Any tool that contacts the bottom edge of the windshield could cause the windshield to crack. ^ Refer to steps 1 and 2 of the 2003-2007 Accord Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WIPE, select Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement from the list, and do only steps 1 and 2 of that procedure. 4. Check the part number on the wiper motor: ^ * If the part number ends with A020 (see above), a countermeasured wiper motor is already installed, go to step 24. ^ If the part number ends with A011 (see above), go to step 5. ^ If you cannot read the part number, or if the number is not a part number (2725L, for example), go to step 5.* Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10637 5. Disconnect the wiper motor 5P connector, and detach the wire harness from the wiper linkage. 6. Remove the wiper linkage assembly from the cowl (four bolts). 7. Scribe a line across the link and the wiper linkage to mark the original park position of the wipers. 8. Remove the wiper motor from the wiper linkage (one center nut and three outside bolts). Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10638 9. Look at the breather port on the wiper motor: ^ If the breather port has a splash rib around it, a countermeasured wiper motor is already installed. Go to step 15. ^ If there is no splash rib around the breather port, the wiper motor is a pre-countermeasured part. Go to step 10. 10. Look for rust or cobwebs in the breather port: ^ If the breather port is clean, go to step 11. ^ If you see any rust or cobwebs, you'll be installing a wiper motor kit (wiper motor and cowl clips); go to step 15. 11. Clean the surface of the wiper motor case and the sealing area between the motor case and gear housing with a shop towel. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10639 12. Loosen the two wiper motor screws 3 turns. NOTE: Do not remove the motor case from the gear housing (the screws come out after only 5 turns). If you remove the motor case, you could change the position of the magnets inside, causing the motor to run backwards. 13. With the screws still loose, slightly pull the case away from the housing and look inside: NOTE: On VINs beginning with JHM, there's a butyl seal between the motor case and the gear housing. To look inside the case, carefully cut through the butyl all the way around the housing with a utility knife, then slightly separate the two halves. ^ * On VINs beginning with 1HG or 3HG, there's an O-ring between the motor case and the gear housing. Look inside the case by slightly separating the two halves by hand. To avoid damaging the O-ring, do not use a screwdriver to separate the halves.* ^ If the inside of the case looks clean, go to step 14. ^ If you see any corrosion, mineral deposits, or water inside the case, you'll be installing a wiper motor kit (wiper motor and cowl clips); go to step 15. 14. On VINs beginning with JHM, retighten the two motor case screws. (You don't need to apply new sealer to the case; the existing butyl will seal the case.) This wiper motor will be reused; go to step 15. On VINs beginning with 1HG or 3HG, check the condition of the O-ring between the case and the housing: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10640 ^ If the O-ring is smooth and flat all the way around the housing, the wiper motor will be reused; tighten the two motor case screws, then go to step 15. ^ If the O-ring is pinched and/or rolled, you'll be installing a wiper motor kit (wiper motor and cowl clips); go to step 15. 15. Place the original or the countermeasured wiper motor in its park position by connecting the 5P connector to the wiper motor and cycling the wiper switch one time. 16. Install the wiper motor onto the wiper linkage using its three outside bolts. Torque the bolts to 8 N.m (6 lb-ft). 17. Move the wiper link into the park position you marked in step 7, then tighten the wiper motor center nut just enough to seat its lock washer. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10641 18. Move the linkage until you can fit an adjustable wrench on the wiper arm link, then hold the link with the adjustable wrench while torquing the center nut to 31 N.m (23 lb-ft). ^ If you're reinstalling a pre-countermeasured wiper motor, go to step 19. ^ If you're installing a countermeasured wiper motor, go to step 20. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10642 19. Only if you're reinstalling a pre-countermeasured wiper motor: Install a wiper motor cover: ^ Slip the cover over the connector end of the wiper motor. ^ Position the cover over the end of the wiper motor case, then snap it into place. ^ Make sure the locking tabs on the bottom of the cover are securely fastened. 20. Move the wiper link back to the park position you marked in step 7, then reinstall the wiper linkage assembly on the cowl. Tighten the four wiper linkage assembly bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 21. Attach the wire harness to the wiper linkage assembly, then press down firmly on the wiper motor cover as you connect the wiper motor 5P connector. NOTE: To prevent a soft-set condition, make sure the 5P connector clicks into position. 22. Cycle the wipers one time to get the motor and the linkage into the park position. 23. Lubricate the moving parts of the wiper linkage with multipurpose grease. 24. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Note these items: ^ Torque the windshield wiper arm nuts to 30 N.m (22 lb-ft). ^ Replace any damaged cowl cover clips. 25. Make sure the wiper motor and the wiper arms work correctly. 26. Center-punch a completion mark above the 13th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 08-043 > Oct > 08 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Modification > Page 10643 Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > NHTSA08V169000 > Apr > 08 > Recall 08V169000: Potential Wiper Motor Failure Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V169000: Potential Wiper Motor Failure MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Honda/Accord 2003 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: April 10, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V169000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: PE07060 Component: VISIBILITY:WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER:MOTOR POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 351000 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling 351,000 M/Y 2003 Accord vehicles. If water enters the windshield wiper motor breather port, which is designed to allow the motor to vent warm air during normal operation, it can result in corrosion inside the motor housing. This can cause a failure of the electrical circuit breaker inside the motor housing. CONSEQUENCE: If the circuit breaker fails, it will cause the windshield wiper motor to become inoperative, which can increase the likelihood of a crash in certain conditions. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the windshield wiper motor for signs of corrosion. if no signs of corrosion are present, a cover will be installed over the wiper motor to prevent water from entering the wiper motor housing. If signs of corrosion damage are observed on the wiper motor, the motor will be replaced. The recall is expected to begin on or about June 17, 2008. owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q78. Customers may contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10648 Wiper Motor: Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10649 36. Under Left Side Of Cowl Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 159. Windshield Wiper Motor Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10652 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Wiper Motor Test 1. Open the hood, and remove the wiper arms. NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms, so that they do not touch the hood. 2. Remove the hood seal and cowl cover. 3. Disconnect the connector from the wiper motor. 4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No.2 terminal and ground the No.3 [1] terminal of the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at low speed. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor. 5. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No.2 terminal and ground the No.5 [4] terminal of the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at high speed. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor. 6. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.4 [5] (+) and No.1 [3] (-) terminals, and run the motor at low or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 12 V and 4 V or less alternately. If it does not, replace the wiper motor. [ ] :2-door Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10653 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement 1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, nuts (A), and the windshield wiper arms (B). 2. Remove the hood seats (C) and cowl covers (D). 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor. 4. Remove the four bolts (B) and wiper linkage assembly (C). 5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield wiper linkage to show the original adjustment. Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the wiper motor (C). 6. Install in the reverse order to removal, and note these items: Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10654 - Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts. - Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to the park position. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - Check the wiper motor operation. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Wipers/Washers Component Location Index Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10659 41. In Steering Column Cover Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10660 239. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test. 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch. Honda Accord Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2003)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement > Page 10663 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test Wiper/Washer Switch Input Test 1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Remove the steering column covers. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B). 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 6. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit).